Table of Contents

LOGO

2014 ANNUAL REPORT

FINANCIAL CONTENTS

 

Glossary of Abbreviations and Acronyms

     14   

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

  

Selected Financial Data

     15   

Overview

     16   

Non-GAAP Financial Measures

     21   

Recent Accounting Standards

     23   

Critical Accounting Policies

     23   

Risk Factors

     27   

Statements of Income Analysis

     36   

Business Segment Review

     43   

Fourth Quarter Review

     50   

Balance Sheet Analysis

     52   

Risk Management

     57   

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

     81   

Contractual Obligations and Other Commitments

     82   

Management’s Assessment as to the Effectiveness of Internal Control over Financial Reporting

     83   

Reports of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     84   

Financial Statements

  

Consolidated Balance Sheets

     85   

Consolidated Statements of Income

     86   

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

     87   

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Equity

     88   

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

     89   

 

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

        

Summary of Significant Accounting and Reporting Policies

     90       Commitments, Contingent Liabilities and Guarantees      130   

Supplemental Cash Flow Information

     100       Legal and Regulatory Proceedings      134   

Restrictions on Cash and Dividends

     100       Related Party Transactions      136   

Securities

     101       Income Taxes      137   

Loans and Leases

     103       Retirement and Benefit Plans      138   

Credit Quality and the Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses

     104       Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income      143   

Bank Premises and Equipment

     113       Common, Preferred and Treasury Stock      145   

Goodwill

     114       Stock-Based Compensation      147   

Intangible Assets

     115       Other Noninterest Income and Other Noninterest Expense      151   

Variable Interest Entities

     116       Earnings Per Share      152   

Sales of Receivables and Servicing Rights

     119       Fair Value Measurements      153   

Derivative Financial Instruments

     121       Certain Regulatory Requirements and Capital Ratios      164   

Offsetting Derivative Financial Instruments

     126       Parent Company Financial Statements      165   

Other Assets

     126       Business Segments      167   

Short-Term Borrowings

     127       Subsequent Event      170   

Long-Term Debt

     128         

Annual Report on Form 10-K

     171         

Consolidated Ten Year Comparison

     187         

Directors and Officers

     188         

Corporate Information

        

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This report contains statements that we believe are “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Rule 175 promulgated thereunder, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Rule 3b-6 promulgated thereunder. These statements relate to our financial condition, results of operations, plans, objectives, future performance or business. They usually can be identified by the use of forward-looking language such as “will likely result,” “may,” “are expected to,” “is anticipated,” “estimate,” “forecast,” “projected,” “intends to,” or may include other similar words or phrases such as “believes,” “plans,” “trend,” “objective,” “continue,” “remain,” or similar expressions, or future or conditional verbs such as “will,” “would,” “should,” “could,” “might,” “can,” or similar verbs. When considering these forward-looking statements, you should keep in mind these risks and uncertainties, as well as any cautionary statements we may make. Moreover, you should treat these statements as speaking only as of the date they are made and based only on information then actually known to us. There are a number of important factors that could cause future results to differ materially from historical performance and these forward-looking statements. Factors that might cause such a difference include, but are not limited to: (1) general economic conditions and weakening in the economy, specifically the real estate market, either nationally or in the states in which Fifth Third, one or more acquired entities and/or the combined company do business, are less favorable than expected; (2) deteriorating credit quality; (3) political developments, wars or other hostilities may disrupt or increase volatility in securities markets or other economic conditions; (4) changes in the interest rate environment reduce interest margins; (5) prepayment speeds, loan origination and sale volumes, charge-offs and loan loss provisions; (6) Fifth Third’s ability to maintain required capital levels and adequate sources of funding and liquidity; (7) maintaining capital requirements and adequate sources of funding and liquidity may limit Fifth Third’s operations and potential growth; (8) changes and trends in capital markets; (9) problems encountered by larger or similar financial institutions may adversely affect the banking industry and/or Fifth Third; (10) competitive pressures among depository institutions increase significantly; (11) effects of critical accounting policies and judgments; (12) changes in accounting policies or procedures as may be required by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) or other regulatory agencies; (13) legislative or regulatory changes or actions, or significant litigation, adversely affect Fifth Third, one or more acquired entities and/or the combined company or the businesses in which Fifth Third, one or more acquired entities and/or the combined company are engaged, including the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act; (14) ability to maintain favorable ratings from rating agencies; (15) fluctuation of Fifth Third’s stock price; (16) ability to attract and retain key personnel; (17) ability to receive dividends from its subsidiaries; (18) potentially dilutive effect of future acquisitions on current shareholders’ ownership of Fifth Third; (19) effects of accounting or financial results of one or more acquired entities; (20) difficulties from Fifth Third’s investment in, relationship with, and nature of the operations of Vantiv, LLC; (21) loss of income from any sale or potential sale of businesses that could have an adverse effect on Fifth Third’s earnings and future growth; (22) ability to secure confidential information and deliver products and services through the use of computer systems and telecommunications networks; and (23) the impact of reputational risk created by these developments on such matters as business generation and retention, funding and liquidity.


Table of Contents

GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

Fifth Third Bancorp provides the following list of abbreviations and acronyms as a tool for the reader that are used in Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, the Consolidated Financial Statements and the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

ALCO: Asset Liability Management Committee GSE: Government Sponsored Enterprise
ALLL: Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses HAMP: Home Affordable Modification Program
AML: Anti-Money Laundering HARP: Home Affordable Refinance Program
AOCI: Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income HFS: Held for Sale
ARM: Adjustable Rate Mortgage HQLA: High Quality Liquid Assets
ATM: Automated Teller Machine IPO: Initial Public Offering
BCBS : Basel Committee on Banking Supervision IRC: Internal Revenue Code
BHC: Bank Holding Company IRLC: Interest Rate Lock Commitment
BHCA: Bank Holding Company Act IRS: Internal Revenue Service
BOLI: Bank Owned Life Insurance ISDA: International Swaps and Derivatives Association, Inc.
BPO: Broker Price Opinion LCR: Liquidity Coverage Ratio
bps: Basis points LIBOR: London Interbank Offered Rate
BSA: Bank Secrecy Act LLC: Limited Liability Company
CCAR: Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review LTV: Loan-to-Value
CDC: Fifth Third Community Development Corporation MD&A: Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial
CFPB: United States Consumer Financial Protection Bureau Condition and Results of Operations
CFTC: Commodity Futures Trading Commission MSR: Mortgage Servicing Right
C&I: Commercial and Industrial N/A: Not Applicable
CPP: Capital Purchase Program NASDAQ: National Association of Securities Dealers Automated Quotations
CRA: Community Reinvestment Act
DCF: Discounted Cash Flow NII: Net Interest Income
DFA: Dodd-Frank Act NM: Not Meaningful
DIF: Deposit Insurance Fund NSFR: Net Stable Funding Ratio
ERISA: Employee Retirement Income Security Act OCC: Office of the Comptroller of the Currency
ERM: Enterprise Risk Management OCI: Other Comprehensive Income
ERMC: Enterprise Risk Management Committee OREO: Other Real Estate Owned
EVE: Economic Value of Equity OTTI: Other-Than-Temporary Impairment
FASB: Financial Accounting Standards Board PMI: Private Mortgage Insurance
FDIA: Federal Deposit Insurance Act RSAs: Restricted Stock Awards
FDIC: Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation SARs: Stock Appreciation Rights
FHA: Federal Housing Administration SBA: Small Business Administration
FHLB: Federal Home Loan Bank SEC: United States Securities and Exchange Commission
FHLMC: Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation TARP: Troubled Asset Relief Program
FICO: Fair Isaac Corporation (credit rating) TBA: To Be Announced
FNMA: Federal National Mortgage Association TDR: Troubled Debt Restructuring
FRB: Federal Reserve Bank TruPS: Trust Preferred Securities
FSOC: Financial Stability Oversight Council U.S.: United States of America
FTAM: Fifth Third Asset Management, Inc. U.S. GAAP: United States Generally Accepted Accounting
FTE: Fully Taxable Equivalent Principles
FTP: Funds Transfer Pricing VA: Department of Veterans Affairs
FTS: Fifth Third Securities VIE: Variable Interest Entity
GDP: Gross Domestic Product VRDN: Variable Rate Demand Note
GNMA: Government National Mortgage Association  

 

14  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The following is MD&A of certain significant factors that have affected Fifth Third Bancorp’s (the “Bancorp” or “Fifth Third”) financial condition and results of operations during the periods included in the Consolidated Financial Statements, which are a part of this filing. Reference to the Bancorp incorporates the parent holding company and all consolidated subsidiaries.

 

TABLE 1: SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA                         

For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions, except for per share data)

  2014     2013     2012     2011     2010  

Income Statement Data

Net interest income (a)

$ 3,600     3,581     3,613     3,575     3,622  

Noninterest income

  2,473     3,227     2,999     2,455     2,729  

Total revenue (a)

  6,073     6,808     6,612     6,030     6,351  

Provision for loan and lease losses

  315     229     303     423     1,538  

Noninterest expense

  3,709     3,961     4,081     3,758     3,855  

Net income attributable to Bancorp

  1,481     1,836     1,576     1,297     753  

Net income available to common shareholders

  1,414     1,799     1,541     1,094     503  

Common Share Data

Earnings per share, basic

$ 1.68     2.05     1.69     1.20     0.63  

Earnings per share, diluted

  1.66     2.02     1.66     1.18     0.63  

Cash dividends per common share

  0.51     0.47     0.36     0.28     0.04  

Book value per share

  17.35     15.85     15.10     13.92     13.06  

Market value per share

  20.38     21.03     15.20     12.72     14.68  

Financial Ratios (%)

Return on average assets

  1.12   %    1.48        1.34        1.15        0.67     

Return on average common equity

  10.0     13.1     11.6     9.0     5.0  

Return on average tangible common equity (b)

  12.2     16.0     14.3     11.4     7.0  

Dividend payout ratio

  30.3     22.9     21.3     23.3     6.3  

Average Total Bancorp shareholders’ equity as a percent of average assets

  11.59     11.56     11.65     11.41     12.22  

Tangible common equity (b)

  8.43     8.63     8.83     8.68     7.04  

Net interest margin (a)

  3.10     3.32     3.55     3.66     3.66  

Efficiency (a)

  61.1     58.2     61.7     62.3     60.7  

Credit Quality

Net losses charged-off

$ 575     501     704     1,172     2,328  

Net losses charged-off as a percent of average portfolio loans and leases

  0.64   %    0.58     0.85     1.49     3.02  

ALLL as a percent of portfolio loans and leases

  1.47     1.79     2.16     2.78     3.88  

Allowance for credit losses as a percent of portfolio loans and leases (c)

  1.62     1.97     2.37     3.01     4.17  

Nonperforming assets as a percent of portfolio loans, leases and other assets, including other real estate owned (d)

  0.82     1.10     1.49     2.23     2.79  

Average Balances

Loans and leases, including held for sale

$ 91,127     89,093     84,822     80,214     79,232  

Total securities and other short-term investments

  24,866     18,861     16,814     17,468     19,699  

Total assets

        131,943     123,732     117,614     112,666     112,434  

Transaction deposits (e)

  89,715     82,915     78,116     72,392     65,662  

Core deposits (f)

  93,477     86,675     82,422     78,652     76,188  

Wholesale funding (g)

  19,188     17,797     16,978     16,939     18,917  

Bancorp shareholders’ equity

  15,290     14,302     13,701     12,851     13,737  

Regulatory Capital Ratios (%)

Tier I risk-based capital

  10.83   %    10.43     10.69     12.00     13.89  

Total risk-based capital

  14.33     14.17     14.47     16.19     18.08  

Tier I leverage

  9.66     9.73     10.15     11.25     12.79  

Tier I common equity (b)

  9.65     9.45     9.54     9.41     7.48  
(a)

Amounts presented on a FTE basis. The FTE adjustment for the years ended December 31, 2014 , 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010 was $21, $20, $18, $18 and $18, respectively.

(b)

The return on average tangible common equity, tangible common equity and Tier I common equity ratios are non-GAAP measures. For further information, refer to the Non-GAAP Financial Measures section of MD&A.

(c)

The allowance for credit losses is the sum of the ALLL and the reserve for unfunded commitments.

(d)

Excludes nonaccrual loans held for sale.

(e)

Includes demand, interest checking, savings, money market and foreign office deposits.

(f)

Includes transaction deposits plus other time deposits.

(g)

Includes certificates $100,000 and over, other deposits, federal funds purchased, other short-term borrowings and long-term debt.

 

15  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

OVERVIEW

 

Fifth Third Bancorp is a diversified financial services company headquartered in Cincinnati, Ohio. At December 31, 2014, the Bancorp had $138.7 billion in assets, operated 15 affiliates with 1,302 full-service Banking Centers, including 101 Bank Mart® locations open seven days a week inside select grocery stores, and 2,638 ATMs in 12 states throughout the Midwestern and Southeastern regions of the U.S. The Bancorp reports on four business segments: Commercial Banking, Branch Banking, Consumer Lending and Investment Advisors. The Bancorp also has an approximate 23% interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC. The carrying value of the Bancorp’s investment in Vantiv Holding, LLC was $394 million as of December 31, 2014.

This overview of MD&A highlights selected information in the financial results of the Bancorp and may not contain all of the information that is important to you. For a more complete understanding of trends, events, commitments, uncertainties, liquidity, capital resources and critical accounting policies and estimates, you should carefully read this entire document. Each of these items could have an impact on the Bancorp’s financial condition, results of operations and cash flows. In addition, see the Glossary of Abbreviations and Acronyms in this report for a list of terms included as a tool for the reader of this annual report on Form 10-K. The abbreviations and acronyms identified therein are used throughout this MD&A, as well as the Consolidated Financial Statements and Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Bancorp believes that banking is first and foremost a relationship business where the strength of the competition and challenges for growth can vary in every market. The Bancorp believes its affiliate operating model provides a competitive advantage by emphasizing individual relationships. Through its affiliate operating model, individual managers at all levels within the affiliates are given the opportunity to tailor financial solutions for their customers.

Net interest income, net interest margin and the efficiency ratio are presented in MD&A on a FTE basis. The FTE basis adjusts for the tax-favored status of income from certain loans and securities held by the Bancorp that are not taxable for federal income tax purposes. The Bancorp believes this presentation to be the preferred industry measurement of net interest income as it provides a relevant comparison between taxable and non-taxable amounts.

The Bancorp’s revenues are dependent on both net interest income and noninterest income. For the year ended December 31, 2014, net interest income, on a FTE basis, and noninterest income provided 59% and 41% of total revenue, respectively. The Bancorp derives the majority of its revenues within the U.S. from customers domiciled in the United States. Revenue from foreign countries and external customers domiciled in foreign countries was immaterial to the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements. Changes in interest rates, credit quality, economic trends and the capital markets are primary factors that drive the performance of the Bancorp. As discussed later in the Risk Management section, risk identification, measurement, monitoring, control and reporting are important to the management of risk and to the financial performance and capital strength of the Bancorp.

Net interest income is the difference between interest income earned on assets such as loans, leases and securities, and interest expense incurred on liabilities such as deposits, other short-term borrowings and long-term debt. Net interest income is affected by the general level of interest rates, the relative level of short-term and long-term interest rates, changes in interest rates and changes in the amount and composition of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities. Generally, the rates of interest the Bancorp earns on its assets and pays on its liabilities are established for a period of

time. The change in market interest rates over time exposes the Bancorp to interest rate risk through potential adverse changes to net interest income and financial position. The Bancorp manages this risk by continually analyzing and adjusting the composition of its assets and liabilities based on their payment streams and interest rates, the timing of their maturities and their sensitivity to changes in market interest rates. Additionally, in the ordinary course of business, the Bancorp enters into certain derivative transactions as part of its overall strategy to manage its interest rate and prepayment risks. The Bancorp is also exposed to the risk of losses on its loan and lease portfolio as a result of changing expected cash flows caused by borrower credit events, such as loan defaults and inadequate collateral due to a weakened economy within the Bancorp’s footprint.

Noninterest income is derived from service charges on deposits, corporate banking revenue, investment advisory revenue, mortgage banking net revenue, card and processing revenue and other noninterest income. Noninterest expense is primarily driven by personnel costs, net occupancy expenses, technology and communication costs and other noninterest expense.

Vantiv, Inc. Share Sale

The Bancorp’s ownership position in Vantiv Holding, LLC was reduced in the second quarter of 2014 when the Bancorp sold an approximate three percent interest and recognized a $125 million gain. The Bancorp’s remaining approximate 23% ownership in Vantiv Holding, LLC was accounted for as an equity method investment in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements and had a carrying value of $394 million as of December, 31, 2014. For more information, refer to Note 19 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Accelerated Share Repurchase Transactions

During 2013 and 2014, the Bancorp entered into a number of accelerated share repurchase transactions. As part of these transactions, the Bancorp entered into forward contracts in which the final number of shares to be delivered at settlement was or will be based generally on a discount to the average daily volume-weighted average price of the Bancorp’s common stock during the term of the Repurchase Agreement. For more information on the accounting for these instruments, refer to Note 23 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. For a summary of all accelerated share repurchase transactions entered into or settled during 2013 and 2014 refer to Table 2. For further information on a subsequent event related to capital actions refer to Note 31 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.    

 

 

16    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

 

 

TABLE 2: SUMMARY OF ACCELERATED SHARE REPURCHASE TRANSACTIONS

Repurchase Date     Amount ($ in millions)     Shares Repurchased on  
Repurchase Date  
Shares Received from Forward
Contract Settlement
Total Shares       
Repurchased    
Settlement Date      

November 9, 2012

$ 125   7,710,761 657,914 8,368,675 February 12, 2013

December 19, 2012

  100   6,267,410 127,760 6,395,170 February 27, 2013

January 31, 2013

  125   6,953,028 849,037 7,802,065 April 5, 2013

May 24, 2013

  539   25,035,519 4,270,250 29,305,769 October 1, 2013

November 18, 2013

  200   8,538,423 1,132,495 9,670,918 March 5, 2014

December 13, 2013

  456   19,084,195 2,294,932 21,379,127 March 31, 2014

January 31, 2014

  99   3,950,705 602,109 4,552,814 March 31, 2014

May 1, 2014

  150   6,216,480 1,016,514 7,232,994 July 21, 2014

July 24, 2014

  225   9,352,078 1,896,685 11,248,763 October 14, 2014

October 23, 2014

  180   8,337,875 794,245 9,132,120 January 8, 2015

 

Preferred Stock Offering

On June 5, 2014, the Bancorp issued in a registered public offering 300,000 depositary shares, representing 12,000 shares of 4.90% fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series J perpetual preferred stock, for net proceeds of $297 million. The Series J preferred shares are not convertible into Bancorp common shares or any other securities. For more information, refer to Note 23 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Senior Notes Offerings

On February 28, 2014, the Bancorp issued and sold $500 million of 2.30% unsecured senior fixed-rate notes, with a maturity of five years, due on March 1, 2019. These notes will be redeemable by the Bancorp, in whole or in part, on or after the date that is 30 days prior to the maturity date at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest up to, but excluding the redemption date.

On April 25, 2014, the Bank issued and sold $1.5 billion in aggregate principal amount of unsecured senior bank notes. The bank notes consisted of $850 million of 2.375% senior fixed-rate notes, with a maturity of five years, due on April 25, 2019; and $650 million of 1.35% senior fixed-rate notes with a maturity of three years, due on June 1, 2017. These bank notes will be redeemable by the Bank, in whole or in part, on or after the date that is 30 days prior to the maturity date at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest up to, but excluding, the redemption date.

On September 5, 2014, the Bank issued and sold $850 million of 2.875% unsecured senior fixed-rate bank notes, with a maturity of seven years, due on October 1, 2021. These bank notes will be redeemable by the Bank, in whole or in part, on or after the date that is 30 days prior to the maturity date at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest up to, but excluding, the redemption date. For additional information on the senior notes offerings, refer to Note 16 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Automobile Loan Securitizations

In securitization transactions that occurred in 2014, the Bancorp transferred an aggregate amount of approximately $3.8 billion in fixed-rate consumer automobile loans to bankruptcy remote trusts which were deemed to be VIEs. The Bancorp concluded that it is the primary beneficiary of these VIEs and, therefore, has consolidated these VIEs. For additional information on the automobile loan securitizations, refer to Notes 10 and 16 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Legislative Developments

On July 21, 2010, the DFA was signed into federal law. This act implements changes to the financial services industry and affects the lending, deposit, investment, trading and operating activities of financial institutions and their holding companies. The legislation established the CFPB responsible for implementing and enforcing compliance with consumer financial laws, changes the methodology for determining deposit insurance assessments, gives the FRB the ability to regulate and limit interchange rates charged to merchants for the use of debit cards, enacts new limitations on proprietary trading, broadens the scope of derivative instruments subject to regulation, requires on-going stress tests and the submission of annual capital plans for certain organizations, requires changes to rules governing regulatory capital ratios and requires enhanced liquidity standards.

The FRB launched the 2014 capital planning and stress testing program, CCAR, on November 1, 2013. The CCAR program requires BHCs with $50 billion or more of total consolidated assets to submit annual capital plans to the FRB for review and to conduct stress tests under a number of economic scenarios. The capital plan and stress testing results were submitted by the Bancorp to the FRB on January 6, 2014.

In March of 2014, the FRB disclosed its estimates of participating institutions results under the FRB supervisory stress scenario, including capital results, which assume all banks take certain consistently applied future capital actions. In addition, the FRB disclosed its estimates of participating institutions results under the FRB supervisory severe stress scenarios including capital results based on each company’s own base scenario capital actions.

On March 26, 2014, the Bancorp announced the results of its capital plan submitted to the FRB as part of the 2014 CCAR. The FRB indicated to the Bancorp that it did not object to the following capital actions for the period beginning April 1, 2014 and ending March 31, 2015:

   

The potential increase in the quarterly common stock dividend to $0.13 per share;

   

The potential repurchase of common shares in an amount up to $669 million;

   

The additional ability to repurchase shares in the amount of any after-tax gains from the sale of Vantiv, Inc. common stock; and

   

The issuance of an additional $300 million in preferred stock.

For more information on the 2014 CCAR results, refer to the Capital Management section of MD&A.

 

 

17  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The BHCs that participated in the 2014 CCAR, including the Bancorp, were required to conduct mid-cycle company-run stress tests using data as of March 31, 2014. The stress tests must be based on three BHC defined economic scenarios – baseline, adverse and severely adverse. As required, the Bancorp reported the mid-cycle stress test results to the FRB on July 7, 2014. In addition, the Bancorp published a Form 8-K providing a summary of the results under the severely adverse scenario on September 18, 2014, which is available on Fifth Third’s website at https://www.53.com . These results represented estimates of the Bancorp’s results from the second quarter of 2014 through the second quarter of 2016 under the severely adverse scenario, which is considered highly unlikely to occur.

Fifth Third offers qualified deposit customers a deposit advance product if they choose to avail themselves of this product to meet short-term, small-dollar financial needs. In April of 2013, the CFPB issued a “White Paper” which studied financial services industry offerings and customer use of deposit advance products as well as payday loans and is considering whether rules governing these products are warranted. At the same time, the OCC and FDIC each issued proposed supervisory guidance for public comment to institutions they supervise which supplements existing OCC and FDIC guidance, detailing the principles they expect financial institutions to follow in connection with deposit advance products and supervisory expectations for the use of deposit advance products. The Federal Reserve also issued a statement in April of 2013 to state member banks like Fifth Third for whom the Federal Reserve is the primary regulator. This statement encouraged state member banks to respond to customers’ small-dollar credit needs in a responsible manner; emphasized that they should take into consideration the risks associated with deposit advance products, including potential consumer harm and potential elevated compliance risk; and reminded them that these product offerings must comply with applicable laws and regulations.

Fifth Third’s deposit advance product is designed to fully comply with the applicable federal and state laws and use of this product is subject to strict eligibility requirements and advance restriction guidelines to limit dependency on this product as a borrowing source. The Bancorp’s deposit advance balances are included in other consumer loans and leases in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Balance Sheets and represent substantially all of the revenue reported in interest and fees on other consumer loans and leases in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Statements of Income and in Table 8 in the Statements of Income Analysis section of MD&A. On January 17, 2014, given developments in industry practice, Fifth Third announced that it would no longer enroll new customers in its deposit advance product and expected to phase out the service to existing customers by the end of 2014. To avoid a disruption to its existing customers during the extension period while the banking industry awaits further regulatory guidance on the deposit advance product, on November 3, 2014, Fifth Third announced changes to its current deposit advance product for existing customers beginning January 1, 2015, including a lower transaction fee, an extended repayment period and a reduced maximum advance period. The Bancorp currently expects to continue to offer the service to existing deposit advance customers until further regulatory guidance is provided. The Bancorp currently expects these changes to the deposit advance product to negatively impact net interest income by approximately $100 million in 2015.

In December of 2010 and revised in June of 2011, the BCBS issued Basel III, a global regulatory framework, to enhance international capital standards. In June of 2012, U.S. banking regulators proposed enhancements to the regulatory capital requirements for U.S. banks, which implement aspects of Basel III, such as re-defining the regulatory capital elements and minimum

capital ratios, introducing regulatory capital buffers above those minimums, revising the agencies’ rules for calculating risk-weighted assets and introducing a new Tier I common equity ratio. In July of 2013, U.S. banking regulators approved the final enhanced regulatory capital rules (Basel III Final Rule), which included modifications to the proposed rules. The Bancorp continues to evaluate the Basel III Final Rule and its potential impact. For more information on the impact of the regulatory capital enhancements, refer to the Capital Management section of MD&A. Refer to the Non-GAAP section of MD&A for an estimate of the Basel III Tier I common equity ratio.

On December 10, 2013, the banking agencies finalized section 619 of the DFA, known as the Volcker Rule, which became effective April 1, 2014. Though the final rule was effective April 1, 2014, the FRB granted the industry an extension of time until July 21, 2015 to conform certain of its activities related to proprietary trading to comply with the Volcker Rule. In addition, the FRB granted the industry an extension of time until July 21, 2016, and announced its intention to grant a one year extension of the conformance period until July 21, 2017, to conform certain ownership interests in, sponsorship activities of and relationships with private equity or hedge funds as well as holding certain collateralized loan obligations that were in place as of December 31, 2013. It is possible that additional conformance period extensions could be granted either to the entire industry, or, upon request, to requesting banking organizations on a case-by-case basis. The final rule prohibits banks and bank holding companies from engaging in short-term proprietary trading of certain securities, derivatives, commodity futures and options on these instruments for their own account. The Volcker Rule also restricts banks and their affiliated entities from owning, sponsoring or having certain relationships with private equity and hedge funds, as well as holding certain collateralized loan obligations that are deemed to contain ownership interests. Exemptions are provided for certain activities such as underwriting, market making, hedging, trading in certain government obligations and organizing and offering a hedge fund or private equity fund. Fifth Third does not sponsor any private equity or hedge funds that, under the final rule, it is prohibited from sponsoring. As of December 31, 2014, the Bancorp held no collateralized loan obligations. As of December 31, 2014, the Bancorp had approximately $165 million in interests and approximately $60 million in binding commitments to invest in private equity funds that are affected by the Volcker Rule. It is expected that over time the Bancorp may need to sell or redeem these investments, however no formal plan to sell has been approved as of December 31, 2014. As a result of the announced conformance period extension, the Bancorp believes it is likely that these investments will be reduced over time in the ordinary course of events before compliance is required.

On October 10, 2014, the U.S. Banking Agencies published final rules implementing a quantitative liquidity requirement consistent with the LCR standard established by the BCBS for large internationally active banking organizations, generally those with $250 billion or more in total consolidated assets or $10 billion or more in on-balance sheet foreign exposure. In addition, a modified LCR requirement was implemented for BHCs with $50 billion or more in total consolidated assets but that are not internationally active, such as Fifth Third. The modified LCR is effective January 1, 2016 and requires BHCs to calculate its LCR on a monthly basis. Refer to the Liquidity Risk Management section of MD&A for further discussion on these ratios.

On July 31, 2013, the U.S. District Court for the District of Columbia issued an order granting summary judgment to the plaintiffs in a case challenging certain provisions of the FRB’s rule concerning electronic debit card transaction fees and network

 

 

18  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

exclusivity arrangements (the “Current Rule”) that were adopted to implement Section 1075 of the DFA, known as the Durbin Amendment. The Court held that, in adopting the Current Rule, the FRB violated the Durbin Amendment’s provisions concerning which costs are allowed to be taken into account for purposes of setting fees that are reasonable and proportional to the costs incurred by the issuer and therefore the Current Rule’s maximum permissible fees were too high. In addition, the Court held that the Current Rule’s network non-exclusivity provisions concerning unaffiliated payment networks for debit cards also violated the Durbin Amendment. The Court vacated the Current Rule, but stayed its ruling to provide the FRB an opportunity to replace the

invalidated portions. The FRB appealed this decision and on March 21, 2014, the D.C. Circuit Court of Appeals reversed the District Court’s grant of summary judgment and remanded the case for further proceedings in accordance with its opinion. The merchants have filed a petition for writ of certiorari to the U.S. Supreme Court. However, on January 20, 2015, the U.S. Supreme Court declined to hear an appeal of the Circuit Court reversal, thereby largely upholding the Current Rule and substantially reducing uncertainty surrounding debit card interchange fees the Bancorp is permitted to charge. Refer to the Noninterest Income subsection of the Statements of Income Analysis section of MD&A for further information regarding the Bancorp’s debit card interchange revenue.

 

 

19  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 3: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME                         

For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions, except per share data)

  2014      2013      2012      2011      2010         

Interest income (FTE)

$ 4,051     3,993     4,125     4,236     4,507        

Interest expense

  451     412     512     661     885        

Net interest income (FTE)

  3,600     3,581     3,613     3,575     3,622        

Provision for loan and lease losses

  315     229     303     423     1,538        

Net interest income after provision for loan and lease losses (FTE)

  3,285     3,352     3,310     3,152     2,084        

Noninterest income

  2,473     3,227     2,999     2,455     2,729        

Noninterest expense

  3,709     3,961     4,081     3,758     3,855        

Income before income taxes (FTE)

  2,049     2,618     2,228     1,849     958        

Fully taxable equivalent adjustment

  21     20     18     18     18        

Applicable income tax expense

  545     772     636     533     187        

Net income

  1,483     1,826     1,574     1,298     753        

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

  2     (10   (2   1     -        

Net income attributable to Bancorp

  1,481     1,836     1,576     1,297     753        

Dividends on preferred stock

  67     37     35     203     250        

Net income available to common shareholders

$       1,414     1,799     1,541     1,094     503        

Earnings per share - basic

$ 1.68     2.05     1.69     1.20     0.63        

Earnings per share - diluted

  1.66     2.02     1.66     1.18     0.63        

Cash dividends declared per common share

$ 0.51     0.47     0.36     0.28     0.04        

 

Earnings Summary

The Bancorp’s net income available to common shareholders for the year ended December 31, 2014 was $1.4 billion, or $1.66 per diluted share, which was net of $67 million in preferred stock dividends. The Bancorp’s net income available to common shareholders for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $1.8 billion, or $2.02 per diluted share, which was net of $37 million in preferred stock dividends. Pre-provision net revenue was $2.3 billion and $2.8 billion for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Pre-provision net revenue is a non-GAAP measure. For further information, refer to the Non-GAAP Financial Measures section in the MD&A.

Net interest income was $3.6 billion for both the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013. Net interest income was positively impacted by an increase in average taxable securities of $5.4 billion for the year ended December 31, 2014 coupled with an increase in yields on these securities of 16 bps compared to the prior year. In addition, net interest income also included the benefit of an increase in average loans and leases and a decrease in the rates paid on long-term debt compared to the prior year, partially offset by lower yields on loans and leases and an increase in average long-term debt. The net interest rate spread decreased to 2.94% in 2014 from 3.15% in 2013 primarily due to a 21 bps decrease in yields on average interest-earning assets for the year ended December 31, 2014. Net interest margin was 3.10% and 3.32% for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

Noninterest income decreased $754 million, or 23%, in 2014 compared to 2013. The decrease from the prior year was primarily due to decreases in mortgage banking net revenue and other noninterest income. Mortgage banking net revenue decreased $390 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the prior year primarily due to decreases in origination fees and gains on loan sales and net mortgage servicing revenue. Other noninterest income decreased $429 million compared to the prior year. The decrease included the impact of a gain of $125 million on the sale of Vantiv, Inc. shares in the second quarter of 2014, compared to gains totaling $327 million during the second and third quarters of 2013. The Bancorp recognized gains of $23 million and $9 million associated with a tax receivable agreement with Vantiv, Inc. in the fourth quarter of 2014 and 2013, respectively. Additionally, other noninterest income decreased for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to 2013 primarily due to decreases in the positive valuation adjustments on the stock warrant associated with Vantiv

Holding, LLC and a decrease in equity method earnings from Vantiv Holding, LLC.

Noninterest expense decreased $252 million, or six percent, in 2014 compared to 2013 primarily due to decreases in total personnel costs and other noninterest expense. Total personnel costs decreased $155 million in 2014 compared to 2013 driven by a decrease in incentive compensation primarily in the mortgage business due to lower production levels and a decrease in base compensation and employee benefits as a result of a decline in the number of full-time equivalent employees. Other noninterest expense decreased $125 million in 2014 compared to 2013 primarily due to decreases in loan and lease expense, FDIC insurance and other taxes, losses and adjustments, marketing expense, debt extinguishment costs and an increase in the benefit from the reserve for unfunded commitments, partially offset by an increase in impairment on affordable housing investments.

Credit Summary

The provision for loan and lease losses was $315 million and $229 million for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Net charge-offs as a percent of average portfolio loans and leases increased to 0.64% during 2014 compared to 0.58% during 2013. At December 31, 2014, nonperforming assets as a percent of loans, leases and other assets, including OREO (excluding nonaccrual loans held for sale) decreased to 0.82%, compared to 1.10% at December 31, 2013. For further discussion on credit quality, refer to the Credit Risk Management section in MD&A.

Capital Summary

The Bancorp’s capital ratios exceed the “well-capitalized” guidelines as defined by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System. As of December 31, 2014, the Tier I risk-based capital ratio was 10.83%, the Tier I leverage ratio was 9.66% and the Total risk-based capital ratio was 14.33%.

 

 

20    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

NON-GAAP FINANCIAL MEASURES

 

The following are Non-GAAP measures which are important to the reader of the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements but should be supplemental to primary GAAP measures. The Bancorp considers many factors when determining the adequacy of its liquidity profile, including its LCR as defined by the U.S. Banking Agencies Basel III LCR final rule. Generally, the LCR is designed to ensure banks maintain an adequate level of unencumbered HQLA to satisfy the estimated net cash outflows under a 30-day stress scenario. The Bancorp will be subject to the Modified LCR whereby

the net cash outflow under the 30-day stress scenario is multiplied by a factor of 0.7. The final rule is not effective for the Bancorp until January 1, 2016. The Bancorp believes there is no comparable U.S. GAAP financial measure to LCR. The Bancorp believes providing an estimated LCR is important for comparability to other financial institutions. For a further discussion on liquidity management and the LCR, refer to the Liquidity Risk Management section of MD&A.

 

 

TABLE 4: Non-GAAP Financial Measures - Liquidity Coverage Ratio     
As of ($ in millions)  

 

        December 3

      2014

1, 

 

High Quality Liquid Assets

$       22,162   

Estimated net cash outflow

  19,831   

Estimated Modified LCR

  112  %   

 

Pre-provision net revenue is net interest income plus noninterest income minus noninterest expense. The Bancorp believes this

measure is important because it provides a ready view of the Bancorp’s pre-tax earnings before the impact of provision expense.

 

 

The following table reconciles the non-GAAP financial measure of pre-provision net revenue to U.S. GAAP for the years ended December 31:

 

TABLE 5: Non-GAAP Financial Measures - Pre-Provision Net Revenue             
($ in millions) 2014   2013     

Net interest income (U.S. GAAP)

$             3,579     3,561   

Add: Noninterest income

  2,473     3,227   

Less: Noninterest expense

  3,709      3,961     

Pre-provision net revenue

$ 2,343           2,827     

 

The Bancorp believes return on average tangible common equity is an important measure for comparative purposes with other financial

institutions, but is not defined under U.S. GAAP, and therefore is considered a non-GAAP financial measure.

 

The following table reconciles the non-GAAP financial measure of return on average tangible common equity to U.S. GAAP for the years ended December 31:

 

TABLE 6: Non-GAAP Financial Measures - Return on Average Tangible Common Equity             
($ in millions) 2014   2013     

Net income available to common shareholders (U.S. GAAP)

$ 1,414     1,799   

Add: Intangible amortization, net of tax

  3     5     

Tangible net income available to common shareholders (1)

$ 1,417     1,804   

Average Bancorp’s shareholders’ equity (U.S. GAAP)

$ 15,290     14,302   

Less: Average preferred stock

  (1,205   (604

          Average goodwill

  (2,416   (2,416

          Average intangible assets and other servicing rights

  (20   (29  

Average Tangible common equity (2)

$             11,649     11,253  

Return on average tangible common equity (1) / (2)

  12.2  %    16.0     

 

The Bancorp considers various measures when evaluating capital utilization and adequacy, including the tangible equity ratio, tangible common equity ratio and Tier I common equity ratio, in addition to capital ratios defined by banking regulators. These calculations are intended to complement the capital ratios defined by banking regulators for both absolute and comparative purposes. Because U.S. GAAP does not include capital ratio measures, the Bancorp believes there are no comparable U.S. GAAP financial measures to these ratios. These ratios are not formally defined by U.S. GAAP or codified in the federal banking regulations and, therefore, are considered to be non-GAAP financial measures. Since analysts and banking regulators may assess the Bancorp’s capital adequacy using

these ratios, the Bancorp believes they are useful to provide investors the ability to assess its capital adequacy on the same basis.

The Bancorp believes these non-GAAP measures are important because they reflect the level of capital available to withstand unexpected market conditions. Additionally, presentation of these measures allows readers to compare certain aspects of the Bancorp’s capitalization to other organizations. However, because there are no standardized definitions for these ratios, the Bancorp’s calculations may not be comparable with other organizations, and the usefulness of these measures to investors may be limited. As a result, the Bancorp encourages readers to consider its Consolidated Financial Statements in their entirety and not to rely on any single financial measure.

 

 

21    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

U.S. banking regulators approved final capital rules (Basel III Final Rule) in July of 2013 that substantially amend the existing risk-based capital rules (Basel I) for banks. The Bancorp believes providing an estimate of its capital position based upon the final rules is important to complement the existing capital ratios and for

comparability to other financial institutions. Since these rules are not effective for the Bancorp until January 1, 2015, they are considered non-GAAP measures and therefore are included in the following non-GAAP financial measures table.

 

 

The following table reconciles non-GAAP capital ratios to U.S. GAAP as of December 31:

 

TABLE 7: Non-GAAP Financial Measures - Capital Ratios          
($ in millions) 2014    2013           

Total Bancorp shareholders’ equity (U.S. GAAP)

$ 15,626      14,589           

Less:  Preferred stock

  (1,331)      (1,034)           

              Goodwill

  (2,416)      (2,416)           

              Intangible assets and other servicing rights

  (16)      (19)           

Tangible common equity, including unrealized gains / losses

  11,863      11,120           

Less:  Accumulated other comprehensive income

  (429)      (82)           

Tangible common equity, excluding unrealized gains / losses (1)

  11,434      11,038           

Add:   Preferred stock

  1,331      1,034           

Tangible equity (2)

  12,765      12,072           

Total assets (U.S. GAAP)

$         138,706      130,443           

Less:  Goodwill

  (2,416)      (2,416)           

              Intangible assets and other servicing rights

  (16)      (19)           

              Accumulated other comprehensive income, before tax

  (660)      (126)           

Tangible assets, excluding unrealized gains / losses (3)

$ 135,614      127,882           

Total Bancorp shareholders’ equity (U.S. GAAP)

$ 15,626      14,589           

Less:  Goodwill and certain other intangibles

  (2,476)      (2,492)           

              Accumulated other comprehensive income

  (429)      (82)           

Add:   Qualifying TruPS

  60      60           

            Other

  (17)      19           

Tier I risk-based capital

  12,764      12,094           

Less:  Preferred stock

  (1,331)      (1,034)           

            Qualifying TruPS

  (60)      (60)           

            Qualified noncontrolling interests in consolidated subsidiaries

  (1)      (37)           

Tier I common equity (4)

$ 11,372      10,963           

Risk-weighted assets (5) (a)

$ 117,878      115,969           

Ratios:

            Tangible equity (2) / (3)

  9.41    9.44           

            Tangible common equity (1) / (3)

  8.43    8.63           

            Tier I common equity (4) / (5)

  9.65    9.45           

Basel III Final Rule - Estimated Tier I common equity ratio

           

Tier I common equity (Basel I)

$ 11,372      10,963           

Add: Adjustment related to capital components (b)

  84      82           

Estimated Tier I common equity under Basel III Final Rule without AOCI (opt out) (6)

  11,456      11,045           

Add: Adjustment related to AOCI (c)

  429      82           

Estimated Tier I common equity under Basel III Final Rule with AOCI (non opt out) (7)

  11,885      11,127           

Estimated risk-weighted assets under Basel III Final Rule (8) (d)

  122,018      122,074           

Estimated Tier I common equity ratio under Basel III Final Rule (opt out) (6) / (8)

  9.39    9.05           

Estimated Tier I common equity ratio under Basel III Final Rule (non opt out) (7) / (8)

  9.74    9.12           
(a)

Under the banking agencies’ risk-based capital guidelines, assets and credit equivalent amounts of derivatives and off-balance sheet exposures are assigned to broad risk categories. The aggregate dollar amount in each risk category is multiplied by the associated risk-weight of the category. The resulting weighted values are added together, along with the measure for market risk, resulting in the Bancorp’s total risk-weighted assets.

(b)

Adjustments related to capital components include MSRs and deferred tax assets subject to threshold limitations and deferred tax liabilities related to intangible assets, which were deductions to capital under Basel I capital rules.

(c)

Under Basel III, non-advanced approach banks are permitted to make a one-time election to opt out of the requirement to include AOCI in Tier I common equity.

(d)

Key differences under Basel III in the calculation of risk-weighted assets compared to Basel I include: (1) Risk-weighting for commitments less than 1 year; (2) Higher risk-weighting for exposures to securitizations, past due loans, foreign banks and certain commercial real estate; (3) Higher risk-weighting for MSRs and deferred tax assets that are under certain thresholds as a percent of Tier I capital; and (4) Derivatives are differentiated between exchange clearing and over-the-counter and the 50% risk-weight cap is removed.

 

22  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

RECENT ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

 

Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements provides a discussion of the significant new accounting standards adopted by

the Bancorp during 2014 and the expected impact of significant accounting standards issued, but not yet required to be adopted.

 

 

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

The Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements are prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Certain accounting policies require management to exercise judgment in determining methodologies, economic assumptions and estimates that may materially affect the Bancorp’s financial position, results of operations and cash flows. The Bancorp’s critical accounting policies include the accounting for the ALLL, reserve for unfunded commitments, income taxes, valuation of servicing rights, fair value measurements, goodwill and legal contingencies. No material changes were made to the valuation techniques or models described below during the year ended December 31, 2014.

ALLL

The Bancorp disaggregates its portfolio loans and leases into portfolio segments for purposes of determining the ALLL. The Bancorp’s portfolio segments include commercial, residential mortgage, and consumer. The Bancorp further disaggregates its portfolio segments into classes for purposes of monitoring and assessing credit quality based on certain risk characteristics. Classes within the commercial portfolio segment include commercial and industrial, commercial mortgage owner-occupied, commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied, commercial construction, and commercial leasing. The residential mortgage portfolio segment is also considered a class. Classes within the consumer portfolio segment include home equity, automobile, credit card, and other consumer loans and leases. For an analysis of the Bancorp’s ALLL by portfolio segment and credit quality information by class, refer to Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Bancorp maintains the ALLL to absorb probable loan and lease losses inherent in its portfolio segments. The ALLL is maintained at a level the Bancorp considers to be adequate and is based on ongoing quarterly assessments and evaluations of the collectability and historical loss experience of loans and leases. Credit losses are charged and recoveries are credited to the ALLL. Provisions for loan and lease losses are based on the Bancorp’s review of the historical credit loss experience and such factors that, in management’s judgment, deserve consideration under existing economic conditions in estimating probable credit losses. The Bancorp’s strategy for credit risk management includes a combination of conservative exposure limits significantly below legal lending limits and conservative underwriting, documentation and collections standards. The strategy also emphasizes diversification on a geographic, industry and customer level, regular credit examinations and quarterly management reviews of large credit exposures and loans experiencing deterioration of credit quality.

The Bancorp’s methodology for determining the ALLL is based on historical loss rates, current credit grades, specific allocation on loans modified in a TDR and impaired commercial credits above specified thresholds and other qualitative adjustments. Allowances on individual commercial loans, TDRs and historical loss rates are reviewed quarterly and adjusted as necessary based on changing borrower and/or collateral conditions and actual collection and charge-off experience. An unallocated allowance is maintained to recognize the imprecision in estimating and measuring losses when evaluating allowances for individual loans or pools of loans.

Larger commercial loans included within aggregate borrower relationship balances exceeding $1 million that exhibit probable or

observed credit weaknesses, as well as loans that have been modified in a TDR, are subject to individual review for impairment. The Bancorp considers the current value of collateral, credit quality of any guarantees, the guarantor’s liquidity and willingness to cooperate, the loan structure, and other factors when evaluating whether an individual loan is impaired. Other factors may include the industry and geographic region of the borrower, size and financial condition of the borrower, cash flow and leverage of the borrower, and the Bancorp’s evaluation of the borrower’s management. When individual loans are impaired, allowances are determined based on management’s estimate of the borrower’s ability to repay the loan given the availability of collateral and other sources of cash flow, as well as an evaluation of legal options available to the Bancorp. Allowances for impaired loans are measured based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, fair value of the underlying collateral or readily observable secondary market values. The Bancorp evaluates the collectability of both principal and interest when assessing the need for a loss accrual.

Historical credit loss rates are applied to commercial loans that are not impaired or are impaired, but smaller than the established threshold of $1 million and thus not subject to specific allowance allocations. The loss rates are derived from a migration analysis, which tracks the historical net charge-off experience sustained on loans according to their internal risk grade. The risk grading system utilized for allowance analysis purposes encompasses ten categories.

Homogenous loans and leases in the residential mortgage and consumer portfolio segments are not individually risk graded. Rather, standard credit scoring systems and delinquency monitoring are used to assess credit risks, and allowances are established based on the expected net charge-offs. Loss rates are based on the trailing twelve month net charge-off history by loan category. Historical loss rates may be adjusted for certain prescriptive and qualitative factors that, in management’s judgment, are necessary to reflect losses inherent in the portfolio. Factors that management considers in the analysis include the effects of the national and local economies; trends in the nature and volume of delinquencies, charge-offs and nonaccrual loans; changes in loan mix; credit score migration comparisons; asset quality trends; risk management and loan administration; changes in the internal lending policies and credit standards; collection practices; and examination results from bank regulatory agencies and the Bancorp’s internal credit reviewers.

The Bancorp’s primary market areas for lending are the Midwestern and Southeastern regions of the United States. When evaluating the adequacy of allowances, consideration is given to these regional geographic concentrations and the closely associated effect changing economic conditions have on the Bancorp’s customers.

Reserve for Unfunded Commitments

The reserve for unfunded commitments is maintained at a level believed by management to be sufficient to absorb estimated probable losses related to unfunded credit facilities and is included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The determination of the adequacy of the reserve is based upon an evaluation of the unfunded credit facilities, including an assessment of historical commitment utilization experience, credit risk grading and historical loss rates based on credit grade migration. This process takes into consideration the same risk elements that are

 

 

23    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

analyzed in the determination of the adequacy of the Bancorp’s ALLL, as discussed above. Net adjustments to the reserve for unfunded commitments are included in other noninterest expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Income Taxes

The Bancorp estimates income tax expense based on amounts expected to be owed to the various tax jurisdictions in which the Bancorp conducts business. On a quarterly basis, management assesses the reasonableness of its effective tax rate based upon its current estimate of the amount and components of net income, tax credits and the applicable statutory tax rates expected for the full year. The estimated income tax expense is recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are determined using the balance sheet method and the net deferred tax asset or liability is reported in other assets or accrued taxes, interest and expenses, respectively, in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. Under this method, the net deferred tax asset or liability is based on the tax effects of the differences between the book and tax basis of assets and liabilities, and reflects enacted changes in tax rates and laws. Deferred tax assets are recognized to the extent they exist and are subject to a valuation allowance based on management’s judgment that realization is more likely than not. This analysis is performed on a quarterly basis and includes an evaluation of all positive and negative evidence, such as the limitation on the use of any net operating losses, to determine whether realization is more likely than not.

Accrued taxes represent the net estimated amount due to taxing jurisdictions and are reported in accrued taxes, interest and expenses in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The Bancorp evaluates and assesses the relative risks and appropriate tax treatment of transactions and filing positions after considering statutes, regulations, judicial precedent and other information and maintains tax accruals consistent with its evaluation of these relative risks and merits. Changes to the estimate of accrued taxes occur periodically due to changes in tax rates, interpretations of tax laws, the status of examinations being conducted by taxing authorities and changes to statutory, judicial and regulatory guidance that impact the relative risks of tax positions. These changes, when they occur, can affect deferred taxes and accrued taxes as well as the current period’s income tax expense and can be significant to the operating results of the Bancorp. For additional information on income taxes, refer to Note 20 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Valuation of Servicing Rights

When the Bancorp sells loans through either securitizations or individual loan sales in accordance with its investment policies, it often obtains servicing rights. Servicing rights resulting from loan sales are initially recorded at fair value and subsequently amortized in proportion to, and over the period of, estimated net servicing revenue. Servicing rights are assessed for impairment monthly, based on fair value, with temporary impairment recognized through a valuation allowance and permanent impairment recognized through a write-off of the servicing asset and related valuation allowance. Key economic assumptions used in measuring any potential impairment of the servicing rights include the prepayment speeds of the underlying loans, the weighted-average life, the discount rate and the weighted-average coupon rate, as applicable. The primary risk of material changes to the value of the servicing rights resides in the potential volatility in the economic assumptions used, particularly the prepayment speeds. The Bancorp monitors risk and adjusts its valuation allowance as necessary to adequately reserve for impairment in the servicing portfolio. For purposes of

measuring impairment, the mortgage servicing rights are stratified into classes based on the financial asset type (fixed-rate vs. adjustable rate) and interest rates. For additional information on servicing rights, refer to Note 11 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Fair Value Measurements

The Bancorp measures certain financial assets and liabilities at fair value in accordance with U.S. GAAP, which defines fair value as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Valuation techniques the Bancorp uses to measure fair value include the market approach, income approach and cost approach. The market approach uses prices or relevant information generated by market transactions involving identical or comparable assets or liabilities. The income approach involves discounting future amounts to a single present amount and is based on current market expectations about those future amounts. The cost approach is based on the amount that currently would be required to replace the service capacity of the asset.

U.S. GAAP establishes a fair value hierarchy, which prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value into three broad levels. The fair value hierarchy gives the highest priority to quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (Level 1) and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs (Level 3). A financial instrument’s categorization within the fair value hierarchy is based upon the lowest level of input that is significant to the instrument’s fair value measurement. The three levels within the fair value hierarchy are described as follows:

Level 1 – Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the Bancorp has the ability to access at the measurement date.

Level 2 – Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly. Level 2 inputs include: quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets; quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active; inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability; and inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data by correlation or other means.

Level 3 – Unobservable inputs for the asset or liability for which there is little, if any, market activity at the measurement date. Unobservable inputs reflect the Bancorp’s own assumptions about what market participants would use to price the asset or liability. The inputs are developed based on the best information available in the circumstances, which might include the Bancorp’s own financial data such as internally developed pricing models and DCF methodologies, as well as instruments for which the fair value determination requires significant management judgment.

The Bancorp’s fair value measurements involve various valuation techniques and models, which involve inputs that are observable, when available. Valuation techniques and parameters used for measuring assets and liabilities are reviewed and validated by the Bancorp on a quarterly basis. Additionally, the Bancorp monitors the fair values of significant assets and liabilities using a variety of methods including the evaluation of pricing runs and

 

 

24    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

exception reports based on certain analytical criteria, comparison to previous trades and overall review and assessments for reasonableness. The following is a summary of valuation techniques utilized by the Bancorp for its significant assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis.

Available-for-sale and trading securities

Where quoted prices are available in an active market, securities are classified within Level 1 of the valuation hierarchy. Level 1 securities include government bonds and exchange traded equities. If quoted market prices are not available, then fair values are estimated using pricing models, quoted prices of securities with similar characteristics, or DCFs. Examples of such instruments, which are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy, include federal agencies, obligations of states and political subdivisions, agency residential mortgage-backed securities, agency and non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities and other debt securities. Corporate bonds are included in asset-backed securities and other debt securities. Federal agencies, obligations of states and political subdivisions, agency residential mortgage-backed securities, agency and non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities and other debt securities are generally valued using a market approach based on observable prices of securities with similar characteristics.

Residential mortgage loans held for sale and held for investment

For residential mortgage loans held for sale for which the fair value election has been made, fair value is estimated based upon mortgage-backed securities prices and spreads to those prices or, for certain ARM loans, DCF models that may incorporate the anticipated portfolio composition, credit spreads of asset-backed securities with similar collateral, and market conditions. The anticipated portfolio composition includes the effect of interest rate spreads and discount rates due to loan characteristics such as the state in which the loan was originated, the loan amount and the ARM margin. Residential mortgage loans held for sale that are valued based on mortgage-backed securities prices are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy as the valuation is based on external pricing for similar instruments. ARM loans classified as held for sale are also classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy due to the use of observable inputs in the DCF model. These observable inputs include interest rate spreads from agency mortgage-backed securities market rates and observable discount rates. For residential mortgage loans in which the fair value election has been made that are subsequently reclassified from held for sale to held for investment, the fair value estimation is based on mortgage-backed securities prices, interest rate risk and an internally developed credit component. Therefore, these loans are classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy.

Derivatives

Exchange-traded derivatives valued using quoted prices and certain over-the-counter derivatives valued using active bids are classified within Level 1 of the valuation

hierarchy. Most of the Bancorp’s derivative contracts are valued using DCF or other models that incorporate current market interest rates, credit spreads assigned to the derivative counterparties, and other market parameters and, therefore, are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy. Such derivatives include basic and structured interest rate swaps and options. Derivatives that are valued based upon models with significant unobservable market parameters are classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. At December 31, 2014, derivatives classified as Level 3, which are valued using an option-pricing model containing unobservable inputs, consisted primarily of the warrant associated with the initial sale of the Bancorp’s 51% interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC to Advent International and a total return swap associated with the Bancorp’s sale of its Visa, Inc. Class B shares. Level 3 derivatives also include IRLCs, which utilize internally generated loan closing rate assumptions as a significant unobservable input in the valuation process.

In addition to the assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis, the Bancorp measures servicing rights, certain loans and long-lived assets at fair value on a nonrecurring basis. Refer to Note 27 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further information on fair value measurements.

Goodwill

Business combinations entered into by the Bancorp typically include the acquisition of goodwill. U.S. GAAP requires goodwill to be tested for impairment at the Bancorp’s reporting unit level on an annual basis, which for the Bancorp is September 30, and more frequently if events or circumstances indicate that there may be impairment. The Bancorp has determined that its segments qualify as reporting units under U.S. GAAP.

Impairment exists when a reporting unit’s carrying amount of goodwill exceeds its implied fair value. In testing goodwill for impairment, U.S. GAAP permits the Bancorp to first assess qualitative factors to determine whether it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount. In this qualitative assessment, the Bancorp evaluates events and circumstances which may include, but are not limited to, the general economic environment, banking industry and market conditions, the overall financial performance of the Bancorp, the performance of the Bancorp’s stock, the key financial performance metrics of the reporting units, and events affecting the reporting units. If, after assessing the totality of events and circumstances, the Bancorp determines it is not more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount, then performing the two-step impairment test would be unnecessary. However, if the Bancorp concludes otherwise, it would then be required to perform the first step (Step 1) of the goodwill impairment test, and continue to the second step (Step 2), if necessary. Step 1 compares the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying amount, including goodwill. If the carrying amount of the reporting unit exceeds its fair value, Step 2 of the goodwill impairment test is performed to measure the amount of impairment loss, if any.

The fair value of a reporting unit is the price that would be received to sell the unit as a whole in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Since none of the Bancorp’s reporting units are publicly traded, individual reporting unit fair value determinations cannot be directly correlated to the Bancorp’s stock price. To determine the fair value of a reporting unit, the Bancorp employs an income-based approach, utilizing the

 

 

25    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

reporting unit’s forecasted cash flows (including a terminal value approach to estimate cash flows beyond the final year of the forecast) and the reporting unit’s estimated cost of equity as the discount rate. Additionally, the Bancorp determines its market capitalization based on the average of the closing price of the Bancorp’s stock during the month including the measurement date, incorporating an additional control premium, and compares this market-based fair value measurement to the aggregate fair value of the Bancorp’s reporting units in order to corroborate the results of the income approach.

When required to perform Step 2, the Bancorp compares the implied fair value of a reporting unit’s goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. If the carrying amount exceeds the implied fair value, an impairment loss equal to that excess amount is recognized. A recognized impairment loss cannot exceed the carrying amount of that goodwill and cannot be reversed in future periods even if the fair value of the reporting unit recovers.

During Step 2, the Bancorp determines the implied fair value of goodwill for a reporting unit by assigning the fair value of the reporting unit to all of the assets and liabilities of that unit (including any unrecognized intangible assets) as if the reporting unit had been acquired in a business combination. The excess of the fair value of the reporting unit over the amounts assigned to its assets and liabilities is the implied fair value of goodwill. This assignment process is only performed for purposes of testing goodwill for impairment. The Bancorp does not adjust the carrying values of recognized assets or liabilities (other than goodwill, if appropriate), nor recognize previously unrecognized intangible assets in the Consolidated Financial Statements as a result of this assignment process. Refer to Note 8 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further information regarding the Bancorp’s goodwill.

Legal Contingencies

The Bancorp is party to numerous claims and lawsuits as well as threatened or potential actions or claims concerning matters arising from the conduct of its business activities. The outcome of claims or litigation and the timing of ultimate resolution are inherently difficult to predict, and significant judgment may be required in the determination of both the probability of loss and whether the amount of the loss is reasonably estimable. The Bancorp’s estimates are subjective and are based on the status of legal and regulatory proceedings, the merit of the Bancorp’s defenses and consultation with internal and external legal counsel. A reserve for a potential litigation loss is established when information related to the loss contingency indicates both that a loss is probable and that the amount of loss can be reasonably estimated. This reserve is included in Other Liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets and is adjusted from time to time as appropriate to reflect changes in circumstances. Legal expenses are recorded in other noninterest expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

 

 

26  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

RISK FACTORS

 

The risks listed below present risks that could have a material impact on the Bancorp’s financial condition, the results of its operations, or its business.

RISKS RELATING TO ECONOMIC AND MARKET CONDITIONS

Weakness in the U.S. economy, including within Fifth Third’s geographic footprint, has adversely affected Fifth Third in the past and may adversely affect Fifth Third in the future.

If the strength of the U.S. economy in general or the strength of the local economies in which Fifth Third conducts operations declines this could result in, among other things, a deterioration in credit quality or a reduced demand for credit, including a resultant effect on Fifth Third’s loan portfolio and ALLL and in the receipt of lower proceeds from the sale of loans and foreclosed properties. These factors could result in higher delinquencies, greater charge-offs and increased losses in future periods, which could materially adversely affect Fifth Third’s financial condition and results of operations.

The global financial markets continue to be strained as a result of economic slowdowns and concerns, especially about the creditworthiness of the European Union member states and financial institutions in the European Union. These factors could have international implications, which could hinder the U.S. economic recovery and affect the stability of global financial markets.

Certain European Union member states have fiscal obligations greater than their fiscal revenue, which has caused investor concern over such countries’ ability to continue to service their debt and foster economic growth in their economies. The European debt crisis and measures adopted to address it have significantly weakened European economies. A weaker European economy may cause investors to lose confidence in the safety and soundness of European financial institutions and the stability of European member economies. A failure to adequately address sovereign debt concerns in Europe could hamper economic recovery or contribute to recessionary economic conditions and severe stress in the financial markets, including in the United States. Should the U.S. economic recovery be adversely impacted by these factors, the likelihood for loan and asset growth at U.S. financial institutions, like Fifth Third, may deteriorate.

Changes in interest rates could affect Fifth Third’s income and cash flows.

Fifth Third’s income and cash flows depend to a great extent on the difference between the interest rates earned on interest-earning assets such as loans and investment securities, and the interest rates paid on interest-bearing liabilities such as deposits and borrowings. These rates are highly sensitive to many factors that are beyond Fifth Third’s control, including general economic conditions and the policies of various governmental and regulatory agencies (in particular, the FRB). Changes in monetary policy, including changes in interest rates, will influence the origination of loans, the prepayment speed of loans, the purchase of investments, the generation of deposits and the rates received on loans and investment securities and paid on deposits or other sources of funding. The impact of these changes may be magnified if Fifth Third does not effectively manage the relative sensitivity of its assets and liabilities to changes in market interest rates. Fluctuations in these areas may adversely affect Fifth Third and its shareholders.

Changes and trends in the capital markets may affect Fifth Third’s income and cash flows.

Fifth Third enters into and maintains trading and investment positions in the capital markets on its own behalf and manages investment positions on behalf of its customers. These investment positions include derivative financial instruments. The revenues and profits Fifth Third derives from managing proprietary and customer trading and investment positions are dependent on market prices. Market changes and trends may result in a decline in investment advisory revenue or investment or trading losses that may impact Fifth Third. Losses on behalf of its customers could expose Fifth Third to litigation, credit risks or loss of revenue from those customers. Additionally, losses in Fifth Third’s trading and investment positions could lead to a loss with respect to those investments and may adversely affect cash flows and funding costs.

Problems encountered by financial institutions larger than or similar to Fifth Third could adversely affect financial markets generally and have indirect adverse effects on Fifth Third.

The commercial soundness of many financial institutions may be closely interrelated as a result of credit, trading, clearing or other relationships between the institutions. As a result, concerns about, or a default or threatened default by, one institution could lead to significant market-wide liquidity and credit problems, losses or defaults by other institutions. This is sometimes referred to as “systemic risk” and may adversely affect financial intermediaries, such as clearing agencies, clearing houses, banks, securities firms and exchanges, with which the Bancorp interacts on a daily basis, and therefore could adversely affect Fifth Third.

Fifth Third’s stock price is volatile.

Fifth Third’s stock price has been volatile in the past and several factors could cause the price to fluctuate substantially in the future. These factors include:

   

Actual or anticipated variations in earnings;

   

Changes in analysts’ recommendations or projections;

   

Fifth Third’s announcements of developments related to its businesses;

   

Operating and stock performance of other companies deemed to be peers;

   

Actions by government regulators;

   

New technology used or services offered by traditional and non-traditional competitors;

   

News reports of trends, concerns and other issues related to the financial services industry;

   

Natural disasters;

   

Geopolitical conditions such as acts or threats of terrorism or military conflicts.

The price for shares of Fifth Third’s common stock may fluctuate significantly in the future, and these fluctuations may be unrelated to Fifth Third’s performance. General market price declines or market volatility in the future could adversely affect the price for shares of Fifth Third’s common stock, and the current market price of such shares may not be indicative of future market prices.

 

 

27    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Changes in retail distribution strategies and consumer behavior may adversely impact Fifth Third’s investments in its bank premises and equipment and other assets and may lead to increased expenditures to change its retail distribution channel

Fifth Third has significant investments in bank premises and equipment for its branch network including its 1,302 full service banking centers, 93 parcels of land held for the development of future banking centers, as well as its retail work force and other branch banking assets. Advances in technology such as e-commerce, telephone, internet and mobile banking, and in-branch self-service technologies including automatic teller machines and other equipment, as well as changing customer preferences for these other methods of accessing Fifth Third’s products and services, could decrease the value of Fifth Third’s branch network or other retail distribution assets and may cause it to change its retail distribution strategy, close and/or sell certain branches or parcels of land held for development and restructure or reduce its remaining branches and work force. These actions could lead to losses on these assets or could adversely impact the carrying value of other long-lived assets and may lead to increased expenditures to renovate and reconfigure remaining branches or to otherwise reform its retail distribution channel.

RISKS RELATING TO FIFTH THIRD’S GENERAL BUSINESS

Deteriorating credit quality, particularly in real estate loans, has adversely impacted Fifth Third in the past and may adversely impact Fifth Third in the future.

When Fifth Third lends money or commits to lend money the Bancorp incurs credit risk or the risk of loss if borrowers do not repay their loans. The credit performance of the loan portfolios significantly affects the Bancorp’s financial results and condition. If the current economic environment were to deteriorate, more customers may have difficulty in repaying their loans or other obligations which could result in a higher level of credit losses and reserves for credit losses. Fifth Third reserves for credit losses by establishing reserves through a charge to earnings. The amount of these reserves is based on Fifth Third’s assessment of credit losses inherent in the loan portfolio (including unfunded credit commitments). The process for determining the amount of the ALLL and the reserve for unfunded commitments is critical to Fifth Third’s financial results and condition. It requires difficult, subjective and complex judgments about the environment, including analysis of economic or market conditions that might impair the ability of borrowers to repay their loans.

Fifth Third might underestimate the credit losses inherent in its loan portfolio and have credit losses in excess of the amount reserved. Fifth Third might increase the reserve because of changing economic conditions, including falling home prices or higher unemployment, or other factors such as changes in borrower’s behavior. As an example, borrowers may “strategically default,” or discontinue making payments on their real estate-secured loans if the value of the real estate is less than what they owe, even if they are still financially able to make the payments.

Fifth Third believes that both the ALLL and the reserve for unfunded commitments are adequate to cover inherent losses at December 31, 2014; however, there is no assurance that they will be sufficient to cover future credit losses, especially if housing and employment conditions worsen. In the event of significant deterioration in economic conditions, Fifth Third may be required to increase reserves in future periods, which would reduce earnings.

For more information, refer to the “Risk Management - Credit Risk Management,” “Critical Accounting Policies - Allowance for

Loan and Leases,” and “Reserve for Unfunded Commitments” sections of MD&A.

Fifth Third must maintain adequate sources of funding and liquidity.

Fifth Third must maintain adequate funding sources in the normal course of business to support its operations and fund outstanding liabilities, as well as meet regulatory expectations. Fifth Third primarily relies on bank deposits to be a low cost and stable source of funding for the loans Fifth Third makes and the operations of Fifth Third’s business. Core customer deposits, which include transaction deposits and other time deposits, have historically provided Fifth Third with a sizeable source of relatively stable and low-cost funds (average core deposits funded 71% of average total assets at December 31, 2014). In addition to customer deposits, sources of liquidity include investments in the securities portfolio, Fifth Third’s sale or securitization of loans in secondary markets and the pledging of loans and investment securities to access secured borrowing facilities through the FHLB and the FRB, and Fifth Third’s ability to raise funds in domestic and international money and capital markets.

Fifth Third’s liquidity and ability to fund and run the business could be materially adversely affected by a variety of conditions and factors, including financial and credit market disruptions and volatility or a lack of market or customer confidence in financial markets in general similar to what occurred during the financial crisis in 2008 and early 2009, which may result in a loss of customer deposits or outflows of cash or collateral and/or ability to access capital markets on favorable terms.

Other conditions and factors that could materially adversely affect Fifth Third’s liquidity and funding include a lack of market or customer confidence in Fifth Third or negative news about Fifth Third or the financial services industry generally which also may result in a loss of deposits and/or negatively affect the ability to access the capital markets; the loss of customer deposits to alternative investments; inability to sell or securitize loans or other assets, increased regulatory requirements, and reductions in one or more of Fifth Third’s credit ratings. A reduced credit rating could adversely affect Fifth Third’s ability to borrow funds and raise the cost of borrowings substantially and could cause creditors and business counterparties to raise collateral requirements or take other actions that could adversely affect Fifth Third’s ability to raise capital. Many of the above conditions and factors may be caused by events over which Fifth Third has little or no control such as what occurred during the financial crisis. While market conditions have stabilized and, in many cases, improved, there can be no assurance that significant disruption and volatility in the financial markets will not occur in the future.

Recent regulatory changes relating to liquidity and risk management may also negatively impact Fifth Third’s results of operations and competitive position. Various regulations recently adopted or proposed, and additional regulations under consideration, impose or could impose more stringent liquidity requirements for large financial institutions, including Fifth Third. These regulations address, among other matters, liquidity stress testing, minimum liquidity requirements and restrictions on short-term debt issued by top-tier holding companies. Given the overlap and complex interactions of these regulations with other regulatory changes, including the resolution and recovery framework applicable to Fifth Third, the full impact of the adopted and proposed regulations will remain uncertain until their full implementation.

If Fifth Third is unable to continue to fund assets through customer bank deposits or access capital markets on favorable terms or if Fifth Third suffers an increase in borrowing costs or otherwise

 

 

28  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

fails to manage liquidity effectively; liquidity, operating margins, financial results and condition may be materially adversely affected. As Fifth Third did during the financial crisis, it may also need to raise additional capital through the issuance of stock, which could dilute the ownership of existing stockholders, or reduce or even eliminate common stock dividends to preserve capital.

Fifth Third may have more credit risk and higher credit losses to the extent loans are concentrated by location or industry of the borrowers or collateral.

Fifth Third’s credit risk and credit losses can increase if its loans are concentrated to borrowers engaged in the same or similar activities or to borrowers who as a group may be uniquely or disproportionately affected by economic or market conditions. Deterioration in economic conditions, housing conditions and real estate values in these states and generally across the country could result in materially higher credit losses.

Fifth Third may be required to repurchase residential mortgage loans or reimburse investors and others as a result of breaches in contractual representations and warranties.

Fifth Third sells residential mortgage loans to various parties, including GSEs and other financial institutions that purchase residential mortgage loans for investment or private label securitization. Fifth Third may be required to repurchase residential mortgage loans, indemnify the securitization trust, investor or insurer, or reimburse the securitization trust, investor or insurer for credit losses incurred on loans in the event of a breach of contractual representations or warranties that is not remedied within a period (usually 60 days or less) after Fifth Third receives notice of the breach. Contracts for residential mortgage loan sales to the GSEs include various types of specific remedies and penalties that could be applied to inadequate responses to repurchase requests. If economic conditions and the housing market deteriorate or future investor repurchase demand and success at appealing repurchase requests differ from past experience, Fifth Third could have increased repurchase obligations and increased loss severity on repurchases, requiring material additions to the repurchase reserve.

If Fifth Third does not adjust to rapid changes in the financial services industry, its financial performance may suffer.

Fifth Third’s ability to deliver strong financial performance and returns on investment to shareholders will depend in part on its ability to expand the scope of available financial services to meet the needs and demands of its customers. In addition to the challenge of competing against other banks in attracting and retaining customers for traditional banking services, Fifth Third’s competitors also include securities dealers, brokers, mortgage bankers, investment advisors, specialty finance and insurance companies who seek to offer one-stop financial services that may include services that banks have not been able or allowed to offer to their customers in the past or may not be currently able or allowed to offer. This increasingly competitive environment is primarily a result of changes in regulation, changes in technology and product delivery systems, as well as the accelerating pace of consolidation among financial service providers.

If Fifth Third is unable to grow its deposits, it may be subject to paying higher funding costs.

The total amount that Fifth Third pays for funding costs is dependent, in part, on Fifth Third’s ability to grow its deposits. If Fifth Third is unable to sufficiently grow its deposits to meet liquidity objectives, it may be subject to paying higher funding costs. Fifth Third competes with banks and other financial services

companies for deposits. If competitors raise the rates they pay on deposits, Fifth Third’s funding costs may increase, either because Fifth Third raises rates to avoid losing deposits or because Fifth Third loses deposits and must rely on more expensive sources of funding. Higher funding costs reduce our net interest margin and net interest income. Fifth Third’s bank customers could take their money out of the bank and put it in alternative investments, causing Fifth Third to lose a lower cost source of funding. Checking and savings account balances and other forms of customer deposits may decrease when customers perceive alternative investments, such as the stock market, as providing a better risk/return tradeoff.

The Bancorp’s ability to receive dividends from its subsidiaries accounts for most of its revenue and could affect its liquidity and ability to pay dividends.

Fifth Third Bancorp is a separate and distinct legal entity from its subsidiaries. Fifth Third Bancorp typically receives substantially all of its revenue from dividends from its subsidiaries. These dividends are the principal source of funds to pay dividends on Fifth Third Bancorp’s stock and interest and principal on its debt. Various federal and/or state laws and regulations, as well as regulatory expectations, limit the amount of dividends that the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary and certain nonbank subsidiaries may pay. Regulatory scrutiny of capital levels at bank holding companies and insured depository institution subsidiaries has increased since the financial crisis and has resulted in increased regulatory focus on all aspects of capital planning, including dividends and other distributions to shareholders of banks such as the parent bank holding companies. Also, Fifth Third Bancorp’s right to participate in a distribution of assets upon a subsidiary’s liquidation or reorganization is subject to the prior claims of that subsidiary’s creditors. Limitations on the Bancorp’s ability to receive dividends from its subsidiaries could have a material adverse effect on its liquidity and ability to pay dividends on stock or interest and principal on its debt.

The financial services industry is highly competitive and creates competitive pressures that could adversely affect Fifth Third’s revenue and profitability.

The financial services industry in which Fifth Third operates is highly competitive. Fifth Third competes not only with commercial banks, but also with insurance companies, mutual funds, hedge funds, and other companies offering financial services in the U.S., globally and over the internet. Fifth Third competes on the basis of several factors, including capital, access to capital, revenue generation, products, services, transaction execution, innovation, reputation and price. Over time, certain sectors of the financial services industry have become more concentrated, as institutions involved in a broad range of financial services have been acquired by or merged into other firms. These developments could result in Fifth Third’s competitors gaining greater capital and other resources, such as a broader range of products and services and geographic diversity. Fifth Third may experience pricing pressures as a result of these factors and as some of its competitors seek to increase market share by reducing prices.

Fifth Third and/or the holders of its securities could be adversely affected by unfavorable ratings from rating agencies.

Fifth Third’s ability to access the capital markets is important to its overall funding profile. This access is affected by the ratings assigned by rating agencies to Fifth Third, certain of its subsidiaries and particular classes of securities they issue. The interest rates that Fifth Third pays on its securities are also influenced by, among other things, the credit ratings that it, its subsidiaries and/or its

 

 

29  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

securities receive from recognized rating agencies. A downgrade to Fifth Third or its subsidiaries’ credit rating could affect its ability to access the capital markets, increase its borrowing costs and negatively impact its profitability. A ratings downgrade to Fifth Third, its subsidiaries or their securities could also create obligations or liabilities to Fifth Third under the terms of its outstanding securities that could increase Fifth Third’s costs or otherwise have a negative effect on its results of operations or financial condition. Additionally, a downgrade of the credit rating of any particular security issued by Fifth Third or its subsidiaries could negatively affect the ability of the holders of that security to sell the securities and the prices at which any such securities may be sold.

Fifth Third could suffer if it fails to attract and retain skilled personnel.

Fifth Third’s success depends, in large part, on its ability to attract and retain key individuals. Competition for qualified candidates in the activities and markets that Fifth Third serves is great and Fifth Third may not be able to hire these candidates and retain them. If Fifth Third is not able to hire or retain these key individuals, Fifth Third may be unable to execute its business strategies and may suffer adverse consequences to its business, operations and financial condition.

In June 2010, the federal banking agencies issued joint guidance on executive compensation designed to help ensure that a banking organization’s incentive compensation policies do not encourage imprudent risk taking and are consistent with the safety and soundness of the organization. In addition, the DFA requires those agencies, along with the SEC, to adopt rules to require reporting of incentive compensation and to prohibit certain compensation arrangements. The federal banking agencies and the SEC proposed such rules in April 2011. In addition, in June 2012, the SEC issued final rules to implement DFA’s requirement that the SEC direct the national securities exchanges to adopt certain listing standards related to the compensation committee of a company’s board of directors as well as its compensation advisers. If Fifth Third is unable to attract and retain qualified employees, or do so at rates necessary to maintain its competitive position, or if compensation costs required to attract and retain employees become more expensive, Fifth Third’s performance, including its competitive position, could be materially adversely affected.

Fifth Third’s mortgage banking revenue can be volatile from quarter to quarter.

Fifth Third earns revenue from the fees it receives for originating mortgage loans and for servicing mortgage loans. When rates rise, the demand for mortgage loans tends to fall, reducing the revenue Fifth Third receives from loan originations. At the same time, revenue from MSRs can increase through increases in fair value. When rates fall, mortgage originations tend to increase and the value of MSRs tends to decline, also with some offsetting revenue effect. Even though the origination of mortgage loans can act as a “natural hedge,” the hedge is not perfect, either in amount or timing. For example, the negative effect on revenue from a decrease in the fair value of residential MSRs is immediate, but any offsetting revenue benefit from more originations and the MSRs relating to the new loans would accrue over time. It is also possible that even if interest rates were to fall, mortgage originations may also fall or any increase in mortgage originations may not be enough to offset the decrease in the MSRs value caused by the lower rates.

Fifth Third typically uses derivatives and other instruments to hedge its mortgage banking interest rate risk. Fifth Third generally does not hedge all of its risks, and the fact that Fifth Third attempts to hedge any of the risks does not mean Fifth Third will be successful. Hedging is a complex process, requiring sophisticated

models and constant monitoring. Fifth Third may use hedging instruments tied to U.S. Treasury rates, LIBOR or Eurodollars that may not perfectly correlate with the value or income being hedged. Fifth Third could incur significant losses from its hedging activities. There may be periods where Fifth Third elects not to use derivatives and other instruments to hedge mortgage banking interest rate risk.

Fifth Third uses financial models for business planning purposes that may not adequately predict future results.

Fifth Third uses financial models to aid in its planning for various purposes including its capital and liquidity needs, potential charge- offs, reserves, and other purposes. The models used may not accurately account for all variables that could affect future results, may fail to predict outcomes accurately and/or may overstate or understate certain effects. As a result of these potential failures, Fifth Third may not adequately prepare for future events and may suffer losses or other setbacks due to these failures.

Changes in interest rates could also reduce the value of MSRs.

Fifth Third acquires MSRs when it keeps the servicing rights after the sale or securitization of the loans that have been originated or when it purchases the servicing rights to mortgage loans originated by other lenders. Fifth Third initially measures all residential MSRs at fair value and subsequently amortizes the MSRs in proportion to, and over the period of, estimated net servicing income. Fair value is the present value of estimated future net servicing income, calculated based on a number of variables, including assumptions about the likelihood of prepayment by borrowers. Servicing rights are assessed for impairment monthly, based on fair value, with temporary impairment recognized through a valuation allowance and permanent impairment recognized through a write-off of the servicing asset and related valuation allowance.

Changes in interest rates can affect prepayment assumptions and thus fair value. When interest rates fall, borrowers are usually more likely to prepay their mortgage loans by refinancing them at a lower rate. As the likelihood of prepayment increases, the fair value of MSRs can decrease. Each quarter Fifth Third evaluates the fair value of MSRs, and decreases in fair value below amortized cost reduce earnings in the period in which the decrease occurs.

The preparation of Fifth Third’s financial statements requires the use of estimates that may vary from actual results.

The preparation of consolidated financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make significant estimates that affect the financial statements. If new information arises that results in a material change to a reserve amount, such a change could result in a change to previously announced financial results. Refer to the “Critical Accounting Policies” section of MD&A for more information regarding management’s significant estimates.

Changes in accounting standards or interpretations could impact Fifth Third’s reported earnings and financial condition.

The accounting standard setters, including the FASB, the SEC and other regulatory agencies, periodically change the financial accounting and reporting standards that govern the preparation of Fifth Third’s consolidated financial statements. These changes can be hard to predict and can materially impact how Fifth Third records and reports its financial condition and results of operations. In some cases, Fifth Third could be required to apply a new or revised standard retroactively, which would result in the recasting of Fifth Third’s prior period financial statements.

 

 

30    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Future acquisitions may dilute current shareholders’ ownership of Fifth Third and may cause Fifth Third to become more susceptible to adverse economic events.

Subject to requisite regulatory approvals, future business acquisitions could be material to Fifth Third and it may issue additional shares of stock to pay for those acquisitions, which would dilute current shareholders’ ownership interests. Acquisitions also could require Fifth Third to use substantial cash or other liquid assets or to incur debt. In those events, Fifth Third could become more susceptible to economic downturns and competitive pressures.

Difficulties in combining the operations of acquired entities with Fifth Third’s own operations may prevent Fifth Third from achieving the expected benefits from its acquisitions.

Upon receipt of requisite governmental approvals and consummation of such transactions, inherent uncertainties exist when integrating the operations of an acquired entity. Fifth Third may not be able to fully achieve its strategic objectives and planned operating efficiencies in an acquisition. In addition, the markets and industries in which Fifth Third and its potential acquisition targets operate are highly competitive. Fifth Third may lose customers or the customers of acquired entities as a result of an acquisition. Future acquisition and integration activities may require Fifth Third to devote substantial time and resources and as a result Fifth Third may not be able to pursue other business opportunities.

After completing an acquisition, Fifth Third may find certain items are not accounted for properly in accordance with financial accounting and reporting standards. Fifth Third may also not realize the expected benefits of the acquisition due to lower financial results pertaining to the acquired entity. For example, Fifth Third could experience higher charge-offs than originally anticipated related to the acquired loan portfolio.

Fifth Third may sell or consider selling one or more of its businesses. Should it determine to sell such a business, it may not be able to generate gains on sale or related increase in shareholders’ equity commensurate with desirable levels. Moreover, if Fifth Third sold such businesses, the loss of income could have an adverse effect on its earnings and future growth.

Fifth Third owns, or owns a minority stake in, as applicable, several non-strategic businesses that are not significantly synergistic with its core financial services businesses. Fifth Third has, from time to time, considered the sale of such businesses and/or interests, including, for example, portions of our stake in Vantiv Holding, LLC. If it were to determine to sell such businesses and/or interests, Fifth Third would be subject to market forces that may make completion of a sale unsuccessful or may not be able to do so within a desirable time frame. If Fifth Third were to complete the sale of non-core businesses and/or interests, it would suffer the loss of income from the sold businesses and/or interests, including those accounted for under the equity method of accounting, and such loss of income could have an adverse effect on its future earnings and growth.

Fifth Third relies on its systems and certain service providers, and certain failures could materially adversely affect operations.

Fifth Third collects, processes and stores sensitive consumer data by utilizing computer systems and telecommunications networks operated by both Fifth Third and third party service providers. Fifth Third has security, backup and recovery systems in place, as well as a business continuity plan to ensure the systems will not be

inoperable. Fifth Third also has security to prevent unauthorized access to the systems. In addition, Fifth Third requires its third party service providers to maintain similar controls. However, Fifth Third cannot be certain that the measures will be successful. A security breach in the systems and loss of confidential information such as credit card numbers and related information could result in losing the customers’ confidence and thus the loss of their business as well as additional significant costs for privacy monitoring activities.

Fifth Third’s necessary dependence upon automated systems to record and process its transaction volume poses the risk that technical system flaws or employee errors, tampering or manipulation of those systems will result in losses and may be difficult to detect. Fifth Third may also be subject to disruptions of its operating systems arising from events that are beyond its control (for example, computer viruses or electrical or telecommunications outages). Fifth Third is further exposed to the risk that its third party service providers may be unable to fulfill their contractual obligations (or will be subject to the same risk of fraud or operational errors as Fifth Third). These disruptions may interfere with service to Fifth Third’s customers and result in a financial loss or liability.

Fifth Third is exposed to cyber-security risks, including denial of service, hacking, and identity theft.

Fifth Third relies heavily on communications and information systems to conduct its business. Any failure, interruption or breach in security of these systems could result in disruptions to its accounting, deposit, loan and other systems, and adversely affect our customer relationships. While Fifth Third has policies and procedures designed to prevent or limit the effect of these possible events, there can be no assurance that any such failure, interruption or security breach will not occur or, if any does occur, that it can be sufficiently remediated. There have been increasing efforts on the part of third parties, including through cyber attacks, to breach data security at financial institutions or with respect to financial transactions. There have been several recent instances involving financial services and consumer-based companies reporting the unauthorized disclosure of client or customer information or the destruction or theft of corporate data, by both private individuals and foreign governments. In addition, because the techniques used to cause such security breaches change frequently, often are not recognized until launched against a target and may originate from less regulated and remote areas around the world, Fifth Third may be unable to proactively address these techniques or to implement adequate preventative measures. Furthermore, there has been a well-publicized series of apparently related distributed denial of service attacks on large financial services companies, including Fifth Third Bank. Distributed denial of service attacks are designed to saturate the targeted online network with excessive amounts of network traffic, resulting in slow response times, or in some cases, causing the site to be temporarily unavailable. To date these attacks have not been intended to steal financial data, but meant to interrupt or suspend a company’s Internet service. These events did not result in a breach of Fifth Third’s client data and account information remained secure; however, the attacks did adversely affect the performance of Fifth Third’s website and in some instances prevented customers from accessing Fifth Third’s website. While the event was resolved in a timely fashion and primarily resulted in inconvenience to our customers, future cyber-attacks could be more disruptive and damaging. Cyber threats are rapidly evolving and Fifth Third may not be able to anticipate or prevent all such attacks. Fifth Third may incur increasing costs in an effort to minimize these risks or in the investigation of such cyber-attacks or related to the protection of the Bancorp’s customers from identity theft as a result

 

 

31    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

of such attacks. Nevertheless, the occurrence of any failure, interruption or security breach of our systems, or of our third-party service providers, particularly if widespread or resulting in financial losses to customers, could also seriously damage Fifth Third’s reputation, result in a loss of customer business, subject it to additional regulatory scrutiny, or expose it to civil litigation and financial liability.

Fifth Third is exposed to operational and reputational risk.

Fifth Third is exposed to many types of operational risk, including but not limited to, business continuity risk, information management risk, fraud risk, model risk, third party service provider risk, human resources risk, and process risk.

Negative public opinion can result from Fifth Third’s actual or alleged conduct in activities, such as lending practices, data security, corporate governance and acquisitions, and may damage Fifth Third’s reputation. Additionally, actions taken by government regulators and community organizations may also damage Fifth Third’s reputation. This negative public opinion can adversely affect Fifth Third’s ability to attract and keep customers and can expose it to litigation and regulatory action.

The results of Vantiv Holding, LLC could have a negative impact on Fifth Third’s operating results and financial condition.

In 2009, Fifth Third sold an approximate 51% interest in its processing business, Vantiv Holding, LLC (formerly Fifth Third Processing Solutions). As a result of additional share sales completed by Fifth Third in 2012, 2013 and 2014 the Bancorp’s current ownership share in Vantiv Holding, LLC is approximately 23%. The Bancorp’s investment in Vantiv Holding, LLC is accounted for under the equity method of accounting and is not consolidated based on Fifth Third’s remaining ownership share in Vantiv Holding, LLC. Vantiv Holding, LLC’s operating results could be poor or favorable and could affect the operating results of Fifth Third. In addition, Fifth Third participates in a multi-lender credit facility to Vantiv Holding, LLC and repayment of these loans is contingent on future cash flows from Vantiv Holding, LLC.

Weather related events or other natural disasters may have an effect on the performance of Fifth Third’s loan portfolios, especially in its coastal markets, thereby adversely impacting its results of operations.

Fifth Third’s footprint stretches from the upper Midwestern to lower Southeastern regions of the United States. This area has experienced weather events including hurricanes and other natural disasters. The nature and level of these events and the impact of global climate change upon their frequency and severity cannot be predicted. If large scale events occur, they may significantly impact its loan portfolios by damaging properties pledged as collateral as well as impairing its borrowers’ ability to repay their loans.

RISKS RELATED TO THE LEGAL AND REGULATORY ENVIRONMENT

As a regulated entity, the Bancorp is subject to certain capital requirements that may limit its operations and potential growth.

The Bancorp is a bank holding company and a financial holding company. As such, it is subject to the comprehensive, consolidated supervision and regulation of the FRB, including risk-based and leverage capital requirements, investment practices, dividend policy and growth. The Bancorp must maintain certain risk-based and leverage capital ratios as required by the FRB which can change depending upon general economic conditions and the Bancorp’s

particular condition, risk profile and growth plans. Compliance with the capital requirements, including leverage ratios, may limit operations that require the intensive use of capital and could adversely affect the Bancorp’s ability to expand or maintain present business levels.

In June 2012, Federal banking agencies proposed enhancements to the regulatory capital requirements for U.S. banking organizations, which implemented aspects of Basel III, such as re-defining the regulatory capital elements and minimum capital ratios, introducing regulatory capital buffers above those minimums, revising the agencies’ rules for calculating risk-weighted assets and introducing a new Tier I common equity ratio. In July 2013, the Federal banking agencies issued final rules for the enhanced regulatory capital requirements, which included modifications to the proposed rules. The final rules provide the option for certain banking organizations, including the Bancorp, to opt out of including AOCI in Tier I capital and retain the treatment of residential mortgage exposures consistent with the current Basel I capital rules. The new capital rules are effective for the Bancorp on January 1, 2015, subject to phase-in periods for certain components and other provisions. The need to maintain more and higher quality capital as well as greater liquidity going forward could limit our business activities, including lending, and our ability to expand, either organically or through acquisitions. Moreover, although these new requirements are being phased in over time, U.S. Federal banking agencies have been taking into account expectations regarding the ability of banks to meet these new requirements, including under stressed conditions, in approving actions that represent uses of capital, such as dividend increases and share repurchases.

The Bancorp’s banking subsidiary must remain well-capitalized, well-managed and maintain at least a “Satisfactory” CRA rating for the Bancorp to retain its status as a financial holding company. Failure to meet these requirements could result in the FRB placing limitations or conditions on the Bancorp’s activities (and the commencement of new activities) and could ultimately result in the loss of financial holding company status. In addition, failure by the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary to meet applicable capital guidelines could subject the bank to a variety of enforcement remedies available to the federal regulatory authorities. These include limitations on the ability to pay dividends, the issuance by the regulatory authority of a capital directive to increase capital, and the termination of deposit insurance by the FDIC.

Fifth Third’s business, financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected by new or changed regulations and by the manner in which such regulations are applied by regulatory authorities.

Previous economic conditions, particularly in the financial markets, have resulted in government regulatory agencies placing increased focus on and scrutiny of the financial services industry. The U.S. government has intervened on an unprecedented scale, responding to what has been commonly referred to as the financial crisis, by introducing various actions and passing legislation such as the DFA. Such programs and legislation subject Fifth Third and other financial institutions to restrictions, oversight and/or costs that may have an impact on Fifth Third’s business, financial condition, results of operations or the price of its common stock.

New proposals for legislation and regulations continue to be introduced that could further substantially increase regulation of the financial services industry. Fifth Third cannot predict whether any pending or future legislation will be adopted or the substance and impact of any such new legislation on Fifth Third. Additional regulation could affect Fifth Third in a substantial way and could

 

 

32    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

have an adverse effect on its business, financial condition and results of operations.

Fifth Third is subject to various regulatory requirements that may limit its operations and potential growth.

Under federal and state laws and regulations pertaining to the safety and soundness of insured depository institutions and their holding companies, the FRB, the FDIC, the CFPB and the Ohio Division of Financial Institutions have the authority to compel or restrict certain actions by Fifth Third and its banking subsidiary. Fifth Third and its banking subsidiary are subject to such supervisory authority and, more generally, must, in certain instances, obtain prior regulatory approval before engaging in certain activities or corporate decisions. There can be no assurance that such approvals, if required, would be forthcoming or that such approvals would be granted in a timely manner. Failure to receive any such approval, if required, could limit or impair Fifth Third’s operations, restrict its growth and/or affect its dividend policy. Such actions and activities subject to prior approval include, but are not limited to, increasing dividends paid by Fifth Third or its banking subsidiary, entering into a merger or acquisition transaction, acquiring or establishing new branches, and entering into certain new businesses.

In addition, Fifth Third, as well as other financial institutions more generally, have recently been subjected to increased scrutiny from government authorities, including bank regulatory authorities, stemming from broader systemic regulatory concerns, including with respect to stress testing, capital levels, asset quality, provisioning, AML/BSA, consumer compliance and other prudential matters and efforts to ensure that financial institutions take steps to improve their risk management and prevent future crises. In this regard, government authorities, including the bank regulatory agencies, are also pursuing aggressive enforcement actions with respect to compliance and other legal matters involving financial activities, which heightens the risks associated with actual and perceived compliance failures and may also adversely affect our ability to enter into certain transactions or engage in certain activities, or obtain necessary regulatory approvals in connection therewith.

In some cases, regulatory agencies may take supervisory actions that may not be publicly disclosed, which restrict or limit a financial institution. Finally, as part of Fifth Third’s regular examination process, Fifth Third’s and its banking subsidiary’s respective regulators may advise it and its banking subsidiary to operate under various restrictions as a prudential matter. Such supervisory actions or restrictions, if and in whatever manner imposed, could have a material adverse effect on Fifth Third’s business and results of operations and may not be publicly disclosed.

Fifth Third and/or its affiliates are or may become involved from time to time in information-gathering requests, investigations and proceedings by various governmental regulatory agencies and law enforcement authorities, as well as self-regulatory agencies which may lead to adverse consequences.

Fifth Third and/or its affiliates are or may become involved from time to time in information-gathering requests, reviews, investigations and proceedings (both formal and informal) by governmental regulatory agencies and law enforcement authorities, as well as self-regulatory agencies, regarding their respective businesses. Such matters may result in material adverse consequences, including without limitation, adverse judgments, settlements, fines, penalties, injunctions or other actions, amendments and/or restatements of Fifth Third’s SEC filings

and/or financial statements, as applicable, and/or determinations of material weaknesses in its disclosure controls and procedures.

Deposit insurance premiums levied against Fifth Third Bank may increase if the number of bank failures increase or the cost of resolving failed banks increases.

The FDIC maintains a DIF to protect insured depositors in the event of bank failures. The DIF is funded by fees assessed on insured depository institutions including Fifth Third Bank. Future deposit premiums paid by Fifth Third Bank depend on the level of the DIF and the magnitude and cost of future bank failures. Fifth Third Bank may be required to pay significantly higher FDIC premiums if market developments change such that the DIF balance is reduced.

Legislative or regulatory compliance, changes or actions or significant litigation, could adversely impact Fifth Third or the businesses in which Fifth Third is engaged.

Fifth Third is subject to extensive state and federal regulation, supervision and legislation that govern almost all aspects of its operations and limit the businesses in which Fifth Third may engage. These laws and regulations may change from time to time and are primarily intended for the protection of consumers and depositors. The impact of any changes to laws and regulations or other actions by regulatory agencies may negatively impact Fifth Third or its ability to increase the value of its business. Additionally, actions by regulatory agencies or significant litigation against Fifth Third could cause it to devote significant time and resources to defending itself and may lead to penalties that materially affect Fifth Third and its shareholders. Future changes in the laws, including tax laws, or regulations or their interpretations or enforcement may also be materially adverse to Fifth Third and its shareholders or may require Fifth Third to expend significant time and resources to comply with such requirements.

On July 21, 2010 the President of the United States signed into law the DFA. Many parts of the DFA are now in effect, while others are in an implementation stage likely to continue for several years. A number of reform provisions are likely to significantly impact the ways in which banks and bank holding companies, including Fifth Third and its bank subsidiary, conduct their business:

 

   

The CFPB has been given authority to regulate consumer financial products and services sold by banks and non-bank companies and to supervise banks with assets of more than $10 billion and their affiliates for compliance with Federal consumer protection laws. Any new regulatory requirements promulgated by the CFPB could require changes to our consumer businesses, result in increased compliance costs and affect the streams of revenue of such businesses. The FSOC has been charged with identifying systemic risks, promoting stronger financial regulation and identifying those non-bank companies that are systemically important and thus should be subject to regulation by the Federal Reserve.

 

   

The DFA “Volcker Rule” provisions and implementing final rule generally prohibit any banking entity from (i) engaging in short-term proprietary trading for its own account and (ii) sponsoring or acquiring ownership interests in private equity or hedge funds. The Volcker Rule, however, contains a number of exceptions to these

 

 

33  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

   

prohibitions. For example, transactions on behalf of customers or in connection with certain underwriting and market making activities, as well as risk-mitigating hedging activities and certain foreign banking activities are permitted. The risk-mitigating hedging exemption applies to hedging activities that are designed to reduce or significantly mitigate specific, identifiable risks of individual or aggregated positions. Fifth Third is required to conduct an analysis supporting its hedging strategy and the effectiveness of hedges must be monitored and recalibrated as necessary. Fifth Third will be required to document, contemporaneously with the transaction, the hedging rationale for certain transactions that present heighted compliance risks. Under the market-making exemption, a trading desk is required to routinely stand ready to purchase and sell one or more types of financial instruments. The trading desk’s inventory in these types of financial instruments has to be designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near-term demands of customers.

 

   

The Volcker Rule and the rulemakings promulgated thereunder restrict banks and their affiliated entities from investing in or sponsoring certain private equity and hedge funds. Fifth Third does not sponsor any private equity or hedge funds that it is prohibited from sponsoring. As of December 31, 2014, the Bancorp had approximately $165 million in interests and approximately $60 million in binding commitments to invest in private equity funds likely to be affected by the Volcker rule. It is expected that the Bancorp may need to eliminate these investments although it is likely that these investments will be reduced over time in the ordinary course before compliance is required. In December 2014, the FRB extended the conformance period through July 2016 for investments in and relationships with such covered funds that were in place prior to December 31, 2013, and indicated that it intends to further extend the compliance period for such investments through July 2017. An ultimate forced sale of some of these investments could result in Fifth Third receiving less value than it would otherwise have received.

 

   

The FDIC and the Federal Reserve adopted a final rule that requires bank holding companies that have $50 billion or more in assets, like Fifth Third, to periodically submit to the Federal Reserve, the FDIC and the FSOC a plan discussing how the company could be resolved in a rapid and orderly fashion if the company were to fail or experience material financial distress. In a related rulemaking, the FDIC adopted a final rule that requires insured depository institutions with $50 billion or more in assets, like Fifth Third, to annually prepare and submit a resolution plan to the FDIC, which would include, among other things, an analysis of how the institution could be resolved under the FDIA in a manner that protects depositors and limits losses or costs to creditors of the bank. Initial plans for Fifth Third and its bank subsidiary have been submitted, in accordance with the final

   

regulatory rules, for review by the FDIC, the Federal Reserve, and the FSOC. The Federal Reserve and the FDIC may jointly impose restrictions on Fifth Third or its bank subsidiary, including additional capital requirements or limitations on growth, if the agencies determine that the institution’s plan is not credible or would not facilitate a rapid and orderly resolution of Fifth Third under the U.S. Bankruptcy Code, or Fifth Third Bank under the FDIA, and additionally could require Fifth Third to divest assets or take other actions if it did not submit an acceptable resolution within two years after any such restrictions were imposed.

 

   

Title VII of DFA imposes a new regulatory regime on the U.S. derivatives markets. While most of the provisions related to derivatives markets are now in effect, several additional requirements await final regulations from the relevant regulatory agencies for derivatives, the CFTC and the SEC. One aspect of this new regulatory regime for derivatives is that substantial oversight responsibility has been provided to the CFTC, which, as a result, now has a meaningful supervisory role with respect to some of Fifth Third’s businesses. In 2014, Fifth Third Bank registered as a swap dealer with the CFTC and became subject to new substantive requirements, including real time trade reporting and robust record keeping requirements, business conduct requirements (including daily valuations, disclosure of material risks associated with swaps and disclosure of material incentives and conflicts of interest), and mandatory clearing and exchange trading of all standardized swaps designated by the relevant regulatory agencies as required to be cleared. Although the ultimate impact will depend on the promulgation of all final regulations, Fifth Third’s derivatives business will likely be further subject to new substantive requirements, including margin requirements in excess of current market practice and capital requirements specific to this business. These requirements will collectively impose implementation and ongoing compliance burdens on Fifth Third and will introduce additional legal risk (including as a result of newly applicable antifraud and anti-manipulation provisions and private rights of action). Once finalized, the rules may raise the costs and liquidity burden associated with Fifth Third’s derivatives businesses and adversely affect or cause Fifth Third to change its derivatives products.

 

   

Financial institutions may be required, regardless of risk, to pay taxes or other fees to the U.S. Treasury. Such taxes or other fees could be designed to reimburse the U.S. Treasury for the many government programs and initiatives it has taken or may undertake as part of its economic stimulus efforts. The Department of Treasury issued an interim final rule in 2012 to establish an assessment schedule for the collection of fees from bank holding companies with at least $50 billion in assets and foreign banks with at least $50 billion in assets in the U.S. to cover the expenses of the Office of Financial Research and FSOC. In August 2013, the FRB also adopted a final

 

 

34  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

   

rule to implement an assessment provision under the DFA equal to the expense the FRB estimates are necessary or appropriate to supervise and regulate bank holding companies with $50 billion or more in assets.

 

   

On July 31, 2013, the U.S. District Court for the District of Columbia issued an order granting summary judgment to the plaintiffs in a case challenging certain provisions of the FRB’s rule concerning electronic debit card transaction fees and network exclusivity arrangements (the “Current Rule”) that were adopted to implement Section 1075 of the DFA, known as the Durbin Amendment. The Court held that, in adopting the Current Rule, the FRB violated the Durbin Amendment’s provisions concerning which costs are allowed to be taken into account for purposes of setting fees that are reasonable and proportional to the costs incurred by the issuer and therefore the Current Rule’s maximum permissible fees were too high. In addition, the Court held that the Current Rule’s network non-exclusivity provisions concerning unaffiliated payment networks for debit cards also violated the Durbin Amendment. The Court vacated the Current Rule, but stayed its ruling to provide the FRB an opportunity to replace the invalidated portions. The FRB appealed this decision and on March 21, 2014, the D.C. Circuit Court of Appeals reversed the District Court’s grant of summary judgment and remanded the case for further proceedings in accordance with its opinion. The merchants have filed a petition for writ of certiorari to the U.S. Supreme Court. However, on January 20, 2015, the U.S. Supreme Court declined to hear an appeal of the Circuit Court reversal, thereby largely upholding the Current Rule and substantially reducing uncertainty surrounding debit card interchange fees the Bancorp is permitted to charge. Refer to the Noninterest Income subsection of the Statements of Income Analysis section of MD&A for further information regarding the Bancorp’s debit card interchange revenue.

It is clear that the reforms, both under the DFA and otherwise, are having a significant effect on the entire financial industry. Fifth Third believes compliance with the DFA and implementing its regulations and other initiatives will likely continue to negatively impact revenue and increase the cost of doing business, both in terms of transition expenses and on an ongoing basis, and may also limit Fifth Third’s ability to pursue certain desirable business opportunities. Any new regulatory requirements or changes to existing requirements could require changes to Fifth Third’s businesses, result in increased compliance costs and affect the profitability of such businesses. Additionally, reform could affect the behaviors of third parties that we deal with in the course of our business, such as rating agencies, insurance companies and investors. The extent to which Fifth Third can adjust its strategies to offset such adverse impacts also is not known at this time.

Fifth Third and/or its affiliates are or may become the subject of litigation which could result in legal liability and damage to Fifth Third’s reputation.

Fifth Third and certain of its directors and officers have been named from time to time as defendants in various class actions and

other litigation relating to Fifth Third’s business and activities. Past, present and future litigation have included or could include claims for substantial compensatory and/or punitive damages or claims for indeterminate amounts of damages. The SEC has announced a policy of seeking admissions of liability in certain settled cases, which could adversely impact the defense of private litigation. These matters could result in material adverse judgments, settlements, fines, penalties, injunctions or other relief, amendments and/or restatements of Fifth Third’s SEC filings and/or financial statements, as applicable and/or determinations of material weaknesses in its disclosure controls and procedures. Like other large financial institutions and companies, Fifth Third is also subject to risk from potential employee misconduct, including non-compliance with policies and improper use or disclosure of confidential information. Substantial legal liability or significant regulatory action against Fifth Third could materially adversely affect its business, financial condition or results of operations and/or cause significant reputational harm to its business.

Fifth Third’s ability to pay or increase dividends on its common stock or to repurchase its capital stock is restricted.

Fifth Third’s ability to pay dividends or repurchase stock is subject to regulatory requirements and the need to meet regulatory expectations. Fifth Third is subject to an annual assessment by the FRB as part of CCAR. The mandatory elements of the capital plan are an assessment of the expected use and sources of capital over the planning horizon, a description of all planned capital actions over the planning horizon, a discussion of any expected changes to the Bancorp’s business plan that are likely to have a material impact on its capital adequacy or liquidity, a detailed description of the Bancorp’s process for assessing capital adequacy and the Bancorp’s capital policy. The capital plan must reflect the revised capital framework that the FRB adopted in connection with the implementation of the Basel III accord, including the framework’s minimum regulatory capital ratios and transition arrangements. Fifth Third’s stress testing results and 2015 capital plan were submitted to the FRB on January 5, 2015.

The FRB’s review of the capital plan will assess the comprehensiveness of the capital plan, the reasonableness of the assumptions and the analysis underlying the capital plan. Additionally, the FRB will review the robustness of the capital adequacy process, the capital policy and the Bancorp’s ability to maintain capital above the minimum regulatory capital ratios and above a Tier I common ratio of 5 percent under baseline and stressful conditions throughout a nine-quarter planning horizon.

 

 

35    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

STATEMENTS OF INCOME ANALYSIS

 

Net Interest Income

Net interest income is the interest earned on securities, loans and leases (including yield-related fees) and other interest-earning assets less the interest paid for core deposits (includes transaction deposits and other time deposits) and wholesale funding (includes certificates of deposit $100,000 and over, other deposits, federal funds purchased, other short-term borrowings and long-term debt). The net interest margin is calculated by dividing net interest income by average interest-earning assets. Net interest rate spread is the difference between the average yield earned on interest-earning assets and the average rate paid on interest-bearing liabilities. Net interest margin is typically greater than net interest rate spread due to the interest income earned on those assets that are funded by noninterest-bearing liabilities, or free funding, such as demand deposits or shareholders’ equity.

Table 8 presents the components of net interest income, net interest margin and net interest rate spread for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012. Nonaccrual loans and leases and loans held for sale have been included in the average loan and lease balances. Average outstanding securities balances are based on amortized cost with any unrealized gains or losses on available-for-sale securities included in other assets. Table 9 provides the relative impact of changes in the balance sheet and changes in interest rates on net interest income.

Net interest income was $3.6 billion for both the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013. Net interest income was positively impacted by an increase in average taxable securities of $5.4 billion for the year ended December 31, 2014 coupled with an increase in yields on these securities of 16 bps for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013. Net interest income also included the benefit of an increase in average loans and leases of $2.0 billion for the year ended December 31, 2014, as well as a decrease in the rates paid on long-term debt for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013. These benefits were partially offset by lower yields on loans and leases and an increase in average long-term debt of $5.0 billion for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013. For the year ended December 31, 2014, the net interest rate spread decreased to 2.94% from 3.15% in 2013 driven by a 21 bps decrease in yields on average interest-earning assets for the year ended December 31, 2014.

Net interest margin was 3.10% for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to 3.32% for the year ended December 31, 2013. The decrease from December 31, 2013 was driven primarily by the previously mentioned decrease in the net interest rate spread, partially offset by increases in average free funding balances.

Interest income from loans and leases decreased $148 million, or four percent, compared to the year ended December 31, 2013 primarily due to a decrease of 25 bps in yields on average loans and leases partially offset by an increase of two percent in average loans and leases for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013. The increase in average loans and leases for the year ended December 31, 2014 was driven primarily by an increase of nine percent in average commercial and industrial loans partially offset by a decrease in average residential mortgage loans of eight percent compared to the year ended December 31, 2013. For more information on the Bancorp’s loan and lease portfolio, refer to the Loans and Leases subsection of the Balance Sheet Analysis section of MD&A. Interest income from investment securities and other short-term investments increased $206 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2013 driven by the factors discussed above.

Average core deposits increased $6.8 billion, or eight percent, compared to the year ended December 31, 2013 primarily due to an

increase in average money market deposits, average interest checking deposits and average demand deposits, partially offset by a decrease in average savings deposits. The cost of average interest bearing core deposits was 27 bps for both the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013. Interest expense on money market deposits increased during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013 driven by a $5.2 billion increase in average money market deposits and a 10 bps increase in the rate paid on average money market deposits. This increase was partially offset by a decrease of 27 bps in the rate paid on other time deposits for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013. Refer to the Deposits subsection of the Balance Sheet Analysis section of MD&A for additional information on the Bancorp’s deposits.

Interest expense on average wholesale funding for the year ended December 31, 2014 increased $23 million, or nine percent, compared to the year ended December 31, 2013, primarily due to an increase in interest expense related to long-term debt partially offset by a decrease in average certificates $100,000 and over. Interest expense on long-term debt increased during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013 driven by a $5.0 billion increase in average long-term debt partially offset by a 67 bps decrease in the rate paid on long-term debt primarily due to the redemption of $750 million of outstanding TruPS during the fourth quarter of 2013 and the lower cost of new debt issuances in 2014. Interest expense on average certificates $100,000 and over decreased during the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013 driven primarily by a $2.4 billion decrease in average certificates $100,000 and over partially offset by a 7 bps increase in the rate paid on average certificates $100,000 and over. Refer to the Borrowings subsection of the Balance Sheet Analysis section of MD&A for additional information on the Bancorp’s borrowings. During both the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, wholesale funding represented 24% of average interest-bearing liabilities. For more information on the Bancorp’s interest rate risk management, including estimated earnings sensitivity to changes in market interest rates, refer to the Market Risk Management section of MD&A.

 

 

36    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 8: CONSOLIDATED AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET AND ANALYSIS OF NET INTEREST INCOME  
For the years ended December 31 2014 2013 2012
($ in millions) Average 
Balance 
 Revenue/
 Cost
  Average
Yield/
Rate
  Average
Balance
  Revenue/
  Cost
  Average   
Yield/
Rate  
  Average
Balance
Revenue/
Cost
  Average   
Yield/
Rate  
 

Assets

Interest-earning assets:

Loans and leases: (a)

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 41,178   $ 1,346     3.27  %  $ 37,770   $ 1,361     3.60  $ 32,911   $ 1,349     4.10  % 

Commercial mortgage

  7,745     260     3.36     8,481     306     3.60      9,686     369     3.81  

Commercial construction

  1,492     51     3.44     793     27     3.45      835     25     2.99  

Commercial leases

  3,585     108     3.01     3,565     116     3.26      3,502     127     3.62  

Subtotal – commercial

  54,000     1,765     3.27     50,609     1,810     3.58      46,934     1,870     3.98  

Residential mortgage loans

  13,344     518     3.88     14,428     564     3.91      13,370     543     4.06  

Home equity

  9,059     336     3.71     9,554     355     3.71      10,369     393     3.79  

Automobile loans

  12,068     334     2.77     12,021     373     3.10      11,849     439     3.70  

Credit card

  2,271     227     9.98     2,121     209     9.87      1,960     192     9.79  

Other consumer loans and leases

  385     138     35.99     360     155     42.93      340     155     45.32  

Subtotal – consumer

  37,127     1,553     4.18     38,484     1,656     4.30      37,888     1,722     4.54  

Total loans and leases

  91,127     3,318     3.64     89,093     3,466     3.89      84,822     3,592     4.23  

Securities:

Taxable

  21,770     722     3.32     16,395     518     3.16      15,262     527     3.45  

Exempt from income taxes (a)

  53     3     4.94     49     3     5.29      57     2     3.29  

Other short-term investments

  3,043     8     0.26     2,417     6     0.26      1,495     4     0.26  

Total interest-earning assets

  115,993     4,051     3.49     107,954     3,993     3.70      101,636     4,125     4.06  

Cash and due from banks

  2,892     2,482     2,355  

Other assets

  14,539     15,053     15,695  

Allowance for loan and lease losses

  (1,481               (1,757               (2,072            

Total assets

$ 131,943               $ 123,732               $ 117,614              

Liabilities and Equity

Interest-bearing liabilities:

Interest checking

$ 25,382   $ 56     0.22  %  $ 23,582   $ 53     0.23  $ 23,096   $ 49     0.22  % 

Savings

  16,080     16     0.10     18,440     22     0.12      21,393     37     0.17  

Money market

  14,670     51     0.35     9,467     23     0.25      4,903     11     0.22  

Foreign office deposits

  1,828     5     0.29     1,501     4     0.28      1,528     4     0.27  

Other time deposits

  3,762     40     1.06     3,760     50     1.33      4,306     68     1.59  

Certificates - $100,000 and over

  3,929     34     0.85     6,339     50     0.78      3,102     46     1.48  

Other deposits

  -     -     0.02     17     -     0.11      27     -     0.13  

Federal funds purchased

  458     -     0.09     503     1     0.12      560     1     0.14  

Other short-term borrowings

  1,873     2     0.10     3,024     5     0.18      4,246     8     0.18  

Long-term debt

  12,928     247     1.91     7,914     204     2.58      9,043     288     3.17  

Total interest-bearing liabilities

  80,910     451     0.56     74,547     412     0.55      72,204     512     0.71  

Demand deposits

  31,755     29,925     27,196  

Other liabilities

  3,950                 4,917                 4,462              

Total liabilities

  116,615     109,389     103,862  

Total equity

  15,328                 14,343                 13,752              

Total liabilities and equity

$     131,943               $     123,732               $     117,614              

Net interest income

$ 3,600   $ 3,581   $ 3,613  

Net interest margin

  3.10  %    3.32    3.55  % 

Net interest rate spread

  2.94     3.15      3.35  

Interest-bearing liabilities to interest-earning assets

   

        69.75                 69.05                  71.04  
(a)

The FTE adjustments included in the above table were $21 , $20 and $18 for the years ended December 31, 2014 , 2013 and 2012, respectively. The federal statutory rate utilized was 35% for all periods presented.

 

37  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 9: CHANGES IN NET INTEREST INCOME ATTRIBUTABLE TO VOLUME AND YIELD/RATE (a)  
For the years ended December 31 2014 Compared to 2013    2013 Compared to 2012
($ in millions) Volume   Yield/Rate       Total        Volume Yield/Rate    Total        

Assets

Interest-earning assets:

Loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 116     (131   (15         $ 187     (175   12     

Commercial mortgage

  (26   (20   (46   (44   (19   (63)     

Commercial construction

  24     -     24     (2   4     2     

Commercial leases

  1     (9   (8         2     (13   (11)     

Subtotal – commercial loans and leases

  115     (160   (45         143     (203   (60)     

Residential mortgage loans

  (42   (4   (46   42     (21   21     

Home equity

  (18   (1   (19   (31   (7   (38)     

Automobile loans

  1     (40   (39   6     (72   (66)     

Credit card

  16     2     18     15     2     17     

Other consumer loans and leases

  9     (26   (17         8     (8   -     

Subtotal – consumer loans and leases

  (34   (69   (103         40     (106   (66)     

Total loans and leases

  81     (229   (148   183     (309   (126)     

Securities:

  -  

Taxable

  177     27     204     38     (47   (9)     

Exempt from income taxes

  -     -     -     1     -     1     

Other short-term investments

  2     -     2           2     -     2     

Subtotal – securities and other short-term investments

  179     27     206           41     (47   (6)     

Total change in interest income

$ 260     (202   58         $ 224     (356   (132)     

Liabilities

Interest-bearing liabilities:

Interest checking

$ 3     -     3   $ -     4     4     

Savings

  (2   (4   (6   (4   (11   (15)     

Money market

  16     12     28     11     1     12     

Foreign office deposits

  1     -     1     -     -     -     

Other time deposits

  -     (10   (10   (8   (10   (18)     

Certificates - $100,000 and over

  (20   4     (16   33     (29   4     

Federal funds purchased

  (1   -     (1   -     -     -     

Other short-term borrowings

  (1   (2   (3   (3   -     (3)     

Long-term debt

  106     (63   43           (34   (50   (84)     

Total change in interest expense

  102     (63   39           (5   (95   (100)     

Total change in net interest income

$             158     (139   19         $             229     (261   (32)     
(a)

Changes in interest not solely due to volume or yield/rate are allocated in proportion to the absolute dollar amount of change in volume and yield/rate.

 

Provision for Loan and Lease Losses

The Bancorp provides as an expense an amount for probable loan and lease losses within the loan and lease portfolio that is based on factors previously discussed in the Critical Accounting Policies section. The provision is recorded to bring the ALLL to a level deemed appropriate by the Bancorp to cover losses inherent in the portfolio. Actual credit losses on loans and leases are charged against the ALLL. The amount of loans actually removed from the Consolidated Balance Sheets is referred to as charge-offs. Net charge-offs include current period charge-offs less recoveries on previously charged-off loans and leases.

The provision for loan and lease losses increased to $315 million in 2014 compared to $229 million in 2013. The increase in provision expense for 2014 compared to the prior year was primarily due to an increase in net charge-offs related to certain impaired commercial and industrial loans in the first and third quarters of 2014 and an increase in net charge-offs related to the

transfer of certain residential mortgage loans from the portfolio to held for sale in the fourth quarter of 2014. The impact of these increases in charge-offs on provision expense in 2014 was partially offset by decreases in nonperforming loans and leases and improved delinquency metrics. The ALLL declined $260 million from $1.6 billion at December 31, 2013 to $1.3 billion at December 31, 2014. As of December 31, 2014, the ALLL as a percent of portfolio loans and leases decreased to 1.47%, compared to 1.79% at December 31, 2013.

Refer to the Credit Risk Management section of MD&A as well as Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for more detailed information on the provision for loan and lease losses, including an analysis of loan portfolio composition, nonperforming assets, net charge-offs, and other factors considered by the Bancorp in assessing the credit quality of the loan and lease portfolio and the ALLL.

 

 

38  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Noninterest Income

Noninterest income decreased $754 million, or 23%, for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013. The components of noninterest income are as follows:

 

TABLE 10: NONINTEREST INCOME                         
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014   2013        2012         2011         2010          

Service charges on deposits

$ 560           549     522     520     574        

Corporate banking revenue

  430           400     413     350     364        

Investment advisory revenue

  407           393     374     375     361        

Mortgage banking net revenue

  310           700     845     597     647        

Card and processing revenue

  295           272     253     308     316        

Other noninterest income

  450           879     574     250     406        

Securities gains, net

  21           21     15     46     47        

Securities gains, net, non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights

  -           13     3     9     14        

Total noninterest income

$             2,473           3,227     2,999     2,455     2,729        

 

Service charges on deposits

Service charges on deposits increased $11 million in 2014 compared to 2013. Commercial deposit revenue increased $15 million in 2014 compared to 2013 primarily due to new customer acquisition and product expansion. Consumer deposit revenue decreased $4 million in 2014 compared to 2013 primarily due to a decrease in consumer checking and savings fees from a decline in the percentage of consumer customers being charged service fees, partially offset by an increase in overdraft fees.

Corporate banking revenue

Corporate banking revenue increased $30 million in 2014 compared to 2013. The increase from the prior year was primarily the result of an increase in syndication and lease remarketing fees. Syndication fees increased $22 million compared to 2013 due to the investment

in resources in the commercial business and a strengthening economy in 2014. The increase in lease remarketing fees included the impact of a $9 million write-down of equipment value on an operating lease during the fourth quarter of 2013.

Investment advisory revenue

Investment advisory revenue increased $14 million in 2014 compared to 2013. The increase was primarily due to an increase of $15 million in private client service fees due to growth in personal asset management fees, partially offset by a decrease in securities broker fees due to a decline in transactional brokerage revenue. The Bancorp had approximately $308 billion and $302 billion in total assets under care as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively, and managed $27 billion in assets for individuals, corporations and not-for-profit organizations as of December 31, 2014 and 2013.

 

 

Mortgage banking net revenue

Mortgage banking net revenue decreased $390 million, or 56%, in 2014 compared to 2013. The components of mortgage banking net revenue are as follows:

 

TABLE 11: COMPONENTS OF MORTGAGE BANKING NET REVENUE  
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions)     2014   2013             2012        

Origination fees and gains on loan sales

$ 153           453     821       

Net mortgage servicing revenue:

Gross mortgage servicing fees

  246           251     250       

Mortgage servicing rights amortization

  (119)           (166   (186)       

Net valuation adjustments on mortgage servicing rights and free-standing derivatives entered into to economically hedge MSR

  30           162     (40)       

Net mortgage servicing revenue

  157           247     24       

Mortgage banking net revenue

$             310           700     845       

 

Origination fees and gains on loan sales decreased $300 million in 2014 compared to 2013 primarily as the result of a 66% decrease in residential mortgage loan originations. Residential mortgage loan originations decreased to $7.5 billion in 2014 from $22.3 billion in 2013 due to strong refinancing activity that occurred during the year ended December 31, 2013.

Net mortgage servicing revenue is comprised of gross servicing fees and related servicing rights amortization as well as valuation adjustments on MSRs and mark-to-market adjustments on both settled and outstanding free-standing derivative financial instruments used to economically hedge the MSR portfolio. Net servicing revenue decreased $90 million in 2014 compared to 2013 driven primarily by a decrease of $132 million in net valuation adjustments, partially offset by a decrease in mortgage servicing rights amortization of $47 million.

The net valuation adjustment gain of $30 million during 2014 included $95 million in gains from derivatives economically hedging

the MSRs partially offset by temporary impairment of $65 million on the MSRs. The net valuation adjustment gain of $162 million during 2013 included a recovery of temporary impairment of $192 million on MSRs partially offset by $30 million in losses from derivatives economically hedging the MSRs. Mortgage rates decreased during 2014 which caused the modeled prepayments speeds to increase, which led to temporary impairment on servicing rights during the year. Mortgage rates increased in 2013 which caused the modeled prepayment speeds to slow, and led to the recovery of temporary impairment on servicing rights in 2013.

Servicing rights are deemed impaired when a borrower’s loan rate is distinctly higher than prevailing rates. Impairment on servicing rights is reversed when the prevailing rates return to a level commensurate with the borrower’s loan rate. Further detail on the valuation of MSRs can be found in Note 11 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. The Bancorp maintains a non-qualifying hedging strategy to manage a portion of the risk

 

 

39    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

associated with changes in the valuation on the MSR portfolio. Refer to Note 12 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for more information on the free-standing derivatives used to economically hedge the MSR portfolio.

The Bancorp’s total residential loans serviced as of December 31, 2014 and 2013 was $79.0 billion and $82.7 billion, respectively, with $65.4 billion and $69.2 billion, respectively, of residential mortgage loans serviced for others.

In addition to the derivative positions used to economically hedge the MSR portfolio, the Bancorp acquires various securities as a component of its non-qualifying hedging strategy. The Bancorp did not sell securities related to the non-qualifying hedging strategy during the year ended December 31, 2014. Net gains on the sale of

these securities were $13 million during the year ended 2013, recorded in securities gains, net, non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Statements of Income.

Card and processing revenue

Card and processing revenue increased $23 million in 2014 compared to 2013. The increase was primarily the result of an increase in the number of actively used cards as well as higher processing fees related to additional ATM locations. Debit card interchange revenue, included in card and processing revenue, was $128 million and $122 million for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

 

Other noninterest income

The major components of other noninterest income are as follows:

 

TABLE 12: COMPONENTS OF OTHER NONINTEREST INCOME  
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions)      2014    2013      2012       

Gain on Vantiv, Inc. IPO and sale of Vantiv, Inc. shares

$ 148                 336                 272       

Operating lease income

  84     75     60       

Equity method income from interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC

  48     77     61       

Cardholder fees

  45     47     46       

BOLI income

  44     52     35       

Valuation adjustments on the warrant and put options associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC

  31     206     67       

Banking center income

  30     34     32       

Consumer loan and lease fees

  25     27     27       

Insurance income

  13     25     28       

Gain on loan sales

  -     3     20       

Loss on OREO

  (14   (26   (57)       

Loss on swap associated with the sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares

  (38   (31   (45)       

Other, net

  34           54           28       

Total other noninterest income

$         450           879           574       

 

Other noninterest income decreased $429 million in 2014 compared to 2013. The decrease included the impact of a gain of $125 million on the sale of Vantiv, Inc. shares in the second quarter of 2014 compared to gains totaling $327 million during the second and third quarters of 2013. The Bancorp recognized gains of $23 million and $9 million associated with a tax receivable agreement with Vantiv, Inc. in the fourth quarter of 2014 and 2013, respectively. In addition, the positive valuation adjustments on the stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC were $31 million and $206 million for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. The fair value of the stock warrant is calculated using the Black-Scholes valuation model, which utilizes several key inputs (Vantiv, Inc. stock price, strike price of the warrant and several unobservable inputs). The positive valuation adjustments for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 were primarily due to increases of four percent and 60%, respectively, in Vantiv, Inc.’s share price from December 31, 2013 to December 31, 2014 and from December 31, 2012 to December 31, 2013, respectively. Equity method earnings from the Bancorp’s interest in Vantiv

Holding, LLC decreased $29 million from 2013 primarily due to charges taken by Vantiv Holding, LLC related to an acquisition in 2014 and a decrease in the Bancorp’s ownership percentage of Vantiv Holding, LLC from approximately 25% at December 31, 2013 to approximately 23% at December 31, 2014.

Insurance income decreased $12 million in 2014 compared to 2013 due to a decrease in premiums and fees collected in 2014. Additionally, the Bancorp recognized $38 million and $31 million in negative valuation adjustments related to the Visa total return swap for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. For additional information on the valuation of the swap associated with the sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares and the valuation of the warrant and put options associated with the sale of Vantiv Holding, LLC, refer to Note 27 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

The “other” caption decreased $20 million for the year ended 2014 compared to 2013. The decrease was primarily the result of $20 million in impairment charges in 2014 for branches and land. For more information on these impairment charges, refer to Note 7 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

40  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Noninterest Expense

Noninterest expense decreased $252 million, or six percent, for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013, primarily due to decreases in total personnel costs (salaries, wages and incentives plus employee benefits) and other noninterest expense. The components of noninterest expense are as follows:

 

TABLE 13: NONINTEREST EXPENSE                    
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014   2013   2012   2011   2010          

Salaries, wages and incentives

$ 1,449     1,581      1,607     1,478      1,430           

Employee benefits

  334     357      371     330      314           

Net occupancy expense

  313     307      302     305      298           

Technology and communications

  212     204      196     188      189           

Card and processing expense

  141     134      121     120      108           

Equipment expense

  121     114      110     113      122           

Other noninterest expense

  1,139     1,264      1,374     1,224      1,394           

Total noninterest expense

$         3,709               3,961                4,081               3,758                3,855           

Efficiency ratio

  61.1  %    58.2      61.7     62.3      60.7           

 

Total personnel costs decreased $155 million, or eight percent, in 2014 compared to 2013 driven by a decrease in incentive compensation primarily in the mortgage business due to lower production levels and a decrease in base compensation and

employee benefits as a result of a decline in the number of full time equivalent employees in 2014. Full time equivalent employees totaled 18,351 at December 31, 2014 compared to 19,446 at December 31, 2013.

 

 

The major components of other noninterest expense are as follows:

 

TABLE 14: COMPONENTS OF OTHER NONINTEREST EXPENSE            
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014   2013   2012          

Losses and adjustments

$ 188     221     187          

Impairment on affordable housing investments

  135     108     90          

Loan and lease

  119     158     183          

Marketing

  98     114     128          

FDIC insurance and other taxes

  89     127     114          

Professional service fees

  72     76     56          

Operating lease

  67     57     43          

Travel

  52     54     52          

Postal and courier

  47     48     48          

Data processing

  41     42     40          

Recruitment and education

  28     26     28          

OREO expense

  17     16     21          

Insurance

  16     17     18          

Supplies

  15     16     17          

Intangible asset amortization

  4     8     13          

Loss on debt extinguishment

  -     8     169          

Benefit from the reserve for unfunded commitments

  (27   (17   (2)          

Other, net

  178     185     169          

Total other noninterest expense

$           1,139                 1,264                 1,374          

 

Total other noninterest expense decreased $125 million, or 10%, in 2014 compared to 2013 primarily due to decreases in loan and lease expense, FDIC insurance and other taxes, losses and adjustments, marketing expense, debt extinguishment costs and an increase in the benefit from the reserve for unfunded commitments, partially offset by increases in impairment on affordable housing investments.

Loan and lease expense decreased $39 million in 2014 compared to 2013 due to lower loan closing and appraisal costs driven by a decline in mortgage originations. FDIC insurance and other taxes decreased $38 million in 2014 compared to 2013 primarily due to the change in the mix of the Bancorp’s funding base and higher capital levels, a change in tax laws during 2014 and the implementation of the large bank assessment fee, which included billings for prior periods during 2013. Losses and adjustments decreased $33 million in 2014 compared to 2013 primarily due to a decrease in legal settlements and reserve expense. Marketing expense decreased $16 million in 2014 compared to 2013 due to management’s expense control efforts. Debt extinguishment

costs decreased $8 million in 2014 compared to 2013. During the fourth quarter of 2013, the Bancorp incurred $8 million of debt extinguishment costs associated with the redemption of outstanding TruPS issued by Fifth Third Capital Trust IV. The benefit from the reserve for unfunded commitments was $27 million and $17 million in 2014 and 2013, respectively. The increase in the benefit recognized reflects a decrease in estimated loss rates related to unfunded commitments due to improved credit trends partially offset by an increase in unfunded commitments for which the Bancorp holds reserves.

Impairment on affordable housing investments increased $27 million in 2014 compared to 2013, primarily driven by a $12 million benefit from the sale of affordable housing investments in 2013 and incremental losses on previous investments.

The Bancorp continues to focus on efficiency initiatives as part of its core emphasis on operating leverage and expense control. The efficiency ratio (noninterest expense divided by the sum of net

 

 

41  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

interest income (FTE) and noninterest income) was 61.1% for 2014

compared to 58.2% in 2013.

 

 

Applicable Income Taxes

Applicable income tax expense for all periods includes the benefit from tax-exempt income, tax-advantaged investments, certain gains on sales of leveraged leases that are exempt from federal taxation and tax credits, partially offset by the effect of certain nondeductible expenses. The tax credits are associated with the Low-Income Housing Tax Credit program established under Section 42 of the IRC, the New Markets Tax Credit program established under Section 45D of the IRC, the Rehabilitation Investment Tax Credit program established under Section 47 of the IRC and the Qualified Zone Academy Bond program established under Section 1397E of the IRC.

The effective tax rates for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 were primarily impacted by $164 million and $155 million, respectively, in tax credits, $27 million of tax benefit from tax exempt income in 2014 and 2013, respectively, and a $9 million non-cash charge to income tax expense related to stock-based awards during the year ended December 31, 2013. The Bancorp did not recognize a similar non-cash charge related to stock-based awards during the year ended December 31, 2014.

As required under U.S. GAAP, the Bancorp established a deferred tax asset for stock-based awards granted to its employees and directors. When the actual tax deduction for these stock-based awards is less than the expense previously recognized for financial

reporting or when the awards expire unexercised and where the Bancorp has not accumulated an excess tax benefit for previously exercised or released stock-based awards, the Bancorp is required to recognize a non-cash charge to income tax expense upon the write-off of the deferred tax asset previously established for these stock-based awards. As a result of the expiration of certain stock options and SARs, the lapse of restrictions on certain shares of restricted stock and because the Bancorp did not have an accumulated excess tax benefit, the Bancorp was required to recognize a non-cash charge to income tax expense of $9 million for the write-off of the deferred tax asset previously established for these awards during the year ended December 31, 2013. Based on the accumulated excess tax benefit at December 31, 2014 the Bancorp was not required to recognize a non-cash charge to income tax expense related to stock-based awards for the year ended December 31, 2014.

Based on the Bancorp’s stock price at December 31, 2014 and the Bancorp’s accumulation of an excess tax benefit through the year ended December 31, 2014, the Bancorp does not believe it will be required to recognize a non-cash charge to income tax expense over the next twelve months related to stock-based awards. However, the Bancorp cannot predict its stock price or whether its employees will exercise other stock-based awards with lower exercise prices in the future. Therefore, it is possible the Bancorp may need to recognize a non-cash charge to income tax expense in the future.

 

 

The Bancorp’s income before income taxes, applicable income tax expense and effective tax rate are as follows:

 

TABLE 15: APPLICABLE INCOME TAXES                    
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014     2013     2012     2011     2010            

Income before income taxes

$         2,028               2,598               2,210               1,831                 940          

Applicable income tax expense

  545     772     636     533     187          

Effective tax rate

  26.9  %    29.7     28.8     29.1     19.8          

 

42  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

BUSINESS SEGMENT REVIEW

 

The Bancorp reports on four business segments: Commercial Banking, Branch Banking, Consumer Lending and Investment Advisors. Additional detailed financial information on each business segment is included in Note 30 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Results of the Bancorp’s business segments are presented based on its management structure and management accounting practices. The structure and accounting practices are specific to the Bancorp; therefore, the financial results of the Bancorp’s business segments are not necessarily comparable with similar information for other financial institutions. The Bancorp refines its methodologies from time to time as management’s accounting practices or businesses change.

The Bancorp manages interest rate risk centrally at the corporate level and employs a FTP methodology at the business segment level. This methodology insulates the business segments from interest rate volatility, enabling them to focus on serving customers through loan and deposit products. The FTP system assigns charge rates and credit rates to classes of assets and liabilities, respectively, based on expected duration and the U.S. swap curve. Matching duration allocates interest income and interest expense to each segment so its resulting net interest income is insulated from interest rate risk. In a rising rate environment, the Bancorp benefits from the widening spread between deposit costs and wholesale funding costs. However, the Bancorp’s FTP system credits this benefit to deposit-providing businesses, such as Branch Banking and Investment Advisors, on a duration-adjusted basis. The net impact of the FTP methodology is captured in General Corporate and Other.

The Bancorp adjusts the FTP charge and credit rates as dictated by changes in interest rates for various interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities. The credit rate provided for demand deposit accounts is reviewed annually based upon the account type, its estimated duration and the corresponding fed funds, U.S. swap curve or swap rate. The credit rates for several deposit products were reset January 1, 2014 to reflect the current market rates and updated duration assumptions. These rates were generally higher than those in place during 2013, thus net interest income for deposit providing businesses was positively impacted during 2014.

The business segments are charged provision expense based on the actual net charge-offs experienced on the loans and leases owned by each segment. Provision expense attributable to loan and lease growth and changes in ALLL factors are captured in General Corporate and Other. The financial results of the business segments include allocations for shared services and headquarters expenses. Additionally, the business segments form synergies by taking advantage of cross-sell opportunities and when funding operations, by accessing the capital markets as a collective unit.

The results of operations and financial position for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 were adjusted to reflect the transfer of certain customers and Bancorp employees from Branch Banking to Commercial Banking, effective January 1, 2014. In addition, the 2013 and 2012 balances were adjusted to reflect a change in internal allocation methodology.

 

 

Net income (loss) by business segment is summarized in the following table:

 

TABLE 16: BUSINESS SEGMENT NET INCOME AVAILABLE TO COMMON SHAREHOLDERS            
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014     2013     2012    

Income Statement Data

Commercial Banking

$ 819     814     714  

Branch Banking

  346     204     144  

Consumer Lending

  (68   183     223  

Investment Advisors

  54     68     43  

General Corporate & Other

  332     557     450  

Net income

  1,483     1,826     1,574  

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

  2     (10   (2 )     

Net income attributable to Bancorp

  1,481     1,836     1,576  

Dividends on preferred stock

  67     37     35  

Net income available to common shareholders

$         1,414               1,799               1,541  

 

43  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Commercial Banking

Commercial Banking offers credit intermediation, cash management and financial services to large and middle-market businesses and government and professional customers. In addition to the traditional lending and depository offerings, Commercial Banking

products and services include global cash management, foreign exchange and international trade finance, derivatives and capital markets services, asset-based lending, real estate finance, public finance, commercial leasing and syndicated finance.

 

 

The following table contains selected financial data for the Commercial Banking segment:

 

TABLE 17: COMMERCIAL BANKING            
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014     2013     2012            

Income Statement Data

Net interest income (FTE) (a)

$ 1,673     1,612     1,550        

Provision for loan and lease losses

  235     194     249        

Noninterest income:

Corporate banking revenue

  429     392     402        

Service charges on deposits

  286     267     251        

Other noninterest income

  172     159     121        

Noninterest expense:

Salaries, incentives and employee benefits

  306     310     304        

Other noninterest expense

  1,013     925     883        

Income before taxes

  1,006     1,001     888        

Applicable income tax expense (a)(b)

  187     187     174        

Net income

$ 819     814     714        

Average Balance Sheet Data

Commercial loans, including held for sale

$         51,310               47,762               44,028        

Demand deposits

  18,935     17,116     16,742        

Interest checking deposits

  8,068     7,095     7,795        

Savings and money market deposits

  5,946     4,987     3,368        

Other time deposits and certificates - $100,000 and over

  1,399     1,330     1,795        

Foreign office deposits and other deposits

  1,824     1,486     1,298        
(a)

The FTE adjustments included in the above table were $21 , $20 and $17 million for the years ended December 31, 2014 , 2013 and 2012, respectively.

(b)

Applicable income tax expense for all periods includes the tax benefit from tax-exempt income and business tax credits, partially offset by the effect of certain nondeductible expenses. Refer to the Applicable Income Taxes section of the MD&A for additional information.

 

Comparison of 2014 with 2013

Net income was $819 million for the year ended December 31, 2014, compared to net income of $814 million for the year ended December 31, 2013. The increase in net income was the result of increases in net interest income and noninterest income, partially offset by increases in noninterest expense and the provision for loan and lease losses.

Net interest income increased $61 million from the prior year primarily due to growth in average commercial construction loans, an increase in FTP credits due to an increase in demand deposits and a decrease in FTP charges, partially offset by a decline in yields of 29 bps on average commercial loans.

Provision for loan and lease losses increased $41 million from the prior year due to an increase in net charge-offs related to certain impaired commercial and industrial loans in the first and third quarters of 2014. Net charge-offs as a percent of average portfolio loans and leases increased to 46 bps for 2014 compared to 41 bps for 2013.

Noninterest income increased $69 million from the prior year due to increases in corporate banking revenue, service charges on deposits and other noninterest income. Corporate banking revenue increased $37 million from 2013 primarily driven by increases in syndication fees and lease remarketing fees. Service charges on deposits increased $19 million from 2013 primarily driven by higher commercial deposit revenue which increased due to the acquisition of new customers and product expansion. Other noninterest income increased $13 million from 2013 primarily due to increases in operating lease income and card and processing revenue.

Noninterest expense increased $84 million from the prior year as a result of an increase in other noninterest expense, partially offset by a decrease in salaries, incentives and benefits. Other

noninterest expense increased $88 million from 2013 driven by increases in corporate overhead allocations, impairment on affordable housing investments and operating lease expense. The decrease in salaries, incentives and employee benefits of $4 million was due to a decrease in incentive compensation resulting from a change to the structure of the incentive compensation plans in the first quarter of 2014.

Average commercial loans increased $3.5 billion from the prior year primarily due to increases in average commercial and industrial loans and average commercial construction loans, partially offset by a decrease in average commercial mortgage loans. Average commercial and industrial portfolio loans and average commercial construction portfolio loans increased $3.5 billion and $689 million, respectively, from the prior year as a result of an increase in new loan origination activity and utilization resulting from a strengthening economy and targeted marketing efforts. Average commercial mortgage portfolio loans decreased $651 million from the prior year due to continued run-off as the level of new originations was less than the repayments on the current portfolio.

Average core deposits increased $4.1 billion from the prior year. The increase was the result of strong growth in average demand deposits, average interest checking deposits, average savings and money market deposits and average foreign deposits and other deposits which increased $1.8 billion, $973 million, $959 million and $338 million, respectively, from to the prior year.

Comparison of 2013 with 2012

Net income was $814 million for the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to net income of $714 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase in net income was primarily driven by increases in net interest income and noninterest income

 

 

44  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

and a decrease in the provision for loan and lease losses, partially offset by higher noninterest expense.

Net interest income increased $62 million from 2012 primarily due to growth in average commercial and industrial loans, an increase in FTP credits due to increases in savings and money market deposits and demand deposits and a decrease in FTP charges on loans, partially offset by a decline in yields of 28 bps on average commercial loans.

Provision for loan and lease losses decreased $55 million from 2012 as a result of improved credit trends. Net charge-offs as a percent of average portfolio loans and leases decreased to 41 bps for 2013 compared to 57 bps for 2012.

Noninterest income increased $44 million from 2012 primarily due to increases in other noninterest income and service charges on deposits, partially offset by a decrease in corporate banking revenue. The increase in other noninterest income of $38 million from 2012 was primarily due to decreases in negative valuation adjustments on OREO, increases in operating lease income and card and processing revenue, and decreases in negative valuation adjustments on loans held for sale, partially offset by decreases in gains on loan sales. Service charges on deposits increased $16 million from 2012 primarily driven by commercial deposit revenue which increased due to fee repricing and the acquisition of new customers. The decrease in corporate banking revenue of $10 million from the prior year was primarily driven by decreases in lease remarketing and letter of credit fees, partially offset by increases in syndication fees, foreign exchange fees and business lending fees.

Noninterest expense increased $48 million from 2012 as a result of increases in other noninterest expense and salaries, incentives and employee benefits. Other noninterest expense increased $42 million from the prior year primarily driven by increases in impairment on affordable housing investments and operating lease expense, partially offset by a decrease in loan and lease expense. The increase in salaries, incentives and employee benefits of $6 million from 2012 was primarily the result of an increase in base compensation primarily driven by improved production levels.

Average commercial loans increased $3.7 billion from the prior year primarily due to an increase in average commercial and industrial loans, partially offset by a decrease in average commercial mortgage loans. Average commercial and industrial portfolio loans increased $4.9 billion from December 31, 2012 as a result of an increase in new origination activity from an increase in demand due to a strengthening economy and targeted marketing efforts. Average commercial mortgage loans decreased $1.1 billion due to continued run-off as the level of new originations was less than the repayments of the existing portfolio.

Average core deposits increased $1.5 billion from December 31, 2012. The increase was primarily driven by strong growth in average savings and money market deposits and average demand deposits, which increased $1.6 billion and $374 million, respectively, from to the prior year, partially offset by a decrease in interest checking deposits of $700 million.

 

 

Branch Banking

Branch Banking provides a full range of deposit and loan and lease products to individuals and small businesses through 1,302 full-service Banking Centers. Branch Banking offers depository and loan products, such as checking and savings accounts, home equity loans

and lines of credit, credit cards and loans for automobiles and other personal financing needs, as well as products designed to meet the specific needs of small businesses, including cash management services.

 

 

The following table contains selected financial data for the Branch Banking segment:

 

TABLE 18: BRANCH BANKING            
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014     2013     2012            

Income Statement Data

Net interest income

$ 1,546     1,356     1,261        

Provision for loan and lease losses

  181     210     268        

Noninterest income:

Service charges on deposits

  272     279     268        

Card and processing revenue

  226     207     195        

Investment advisory revenue

  152     148     129        

Other noninterest income

  70     106     107        

Noninterest expense:

Salaries, incentives and employee benefits

  537     547     537        

Net occupancy and equipment expense

  246     241     238        

Card and processing expense

  133     125     115        

Other noninterest expense

  635     660     579        

Income before taxes

  534     313     223        

Applicable income tax expense

  188     109     79        

Net income

$ 346     204     144        

Average Balance Sheet Data

Consumer loans, including held for sale

$       14,978               15,223               14,926        

Commercial loans, including held for sale

  1,583     1,807     1,905        

Demand deposits

  11,228     10,750     8,391        

Interest checking deposits

  8,998     8,841     9,080        

Savings and money market deposits

  23,911     22,110     22,031        

Other time deposits and certificates - $100,000 and over

  4,690     4,709     5,386        

 

45  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Comparison of 2014 with 2013

Net income was $346 million for the year ended December 31, 2014, compared to net income of $204 million for the year ended December 31, 2013. The increase was driven by an increase in net interest income and declines in the provision for loan and lease losses and noninterest expense, partially offset by a decrease in noninterest income.

Net interest income increased $190 million from the prior year primarily driven by increases in the FTP credit rates for savings and money market deposits, demand deposits and interest checking deposits and a decrease in the FTP charges on loans and leases. These increases were partially offset by declines in yields on average commercial loans and a decrease in interest income relating to the Bancorp’s decision to no longer enroll new customers in the deposit advance product.

Provision for loan and lease losses for 2014 decreased $29 million from the prior year as a result of improved credit trends. Net charge-offs as a percent of average portfolio loans and leases decreased to 110 bps for 2014 compared to 123 bps for 2013.

Noninterest income decreased $20 million from the prior year. The decrease was primarily driven by decreases in other noninterest income and service charges on deposits, partially offset by an increase in card and processing revenue. Other noninterest income decreased $36 million from 2013 primarily due to $20 million in impairment charges in 2014 for branches and land. For more information on these impairment charges, refer to Note 7 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. The remaining decrease in other noninterest income was primarily due to decreases in gains on loan sales and mortgage origination fees and retail service fees. Service charges on deposits decreased $7 million from 2013 primarily due to a decrease in consumer checking and savings fees from a decline in the percentage of consumer customers being charged service fees. Card and processing revenue increased $19 million from the prior year primarily as a result of an increase in the number of actively used cards as well as higher processing fees related to additional ATM locations.

Noninterest expense decreased $22 million from the prior year, primarily driven by decreases in other noninterest expense and salaries, incentives and employee benefits, partially offset by increases in card and processing expense and net occupancy and equipment expense. Other noninterest expense decreased $25 million from the prior year due to lower marketing expense and loan and lease expense. Salaries, incentives and employee benefits decreased $10 million from the prior year primarily driven by lower compensation costs due to a decline in the number of full-time equivalent employees. Card and processing expense increased $8 million from 2013 primarily due to higher rewards expense relating to credit cards and increased fraud-related charges. Net occupancy and equipment expense increased $5 million from 2013 primarily due to an increase in rent expense driven by additional ATM locations.

Average consumer loans decreased $245 million in 2014 primarily due to a decrease in average home equity loans of $382 million as payoffs exceeded new advances and new loan production. This decrease was partially offset by an increase in average credit card loans of $147 million from the prior year primarily due to an increase in open and active accounts driven by the volume of new accounts.

Average core deposits increased $2.4 billion from the prior year primarily driven by net growth in average savings and money market deposits of $1.8 billion and growth in average demand deposits of $478 million.

Comparison of 2013 with 2012

Net income was $204 million for the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to net income of $144 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase was driven by an increase in net interest income and noninterest income and a decline in the provision for loan and lease losses, partially offset by an increase in noninterest expense.

Net interest income increased $95 million from 2012 primarily driven by an increase in the FTP credit rates for savings and money market deposits, demand deposits and interest checking deposits, a decrease in the FTP charges on loans and leases and a decline in interest expense on core deposits due to favorable shifts from certificates of deposit to lower cost transaction deposits.

Provision for loan and lease losses for 2013 decreased $58 million from 2012 as a result of improved credit trends. Net charge-offs as a percent of average portfolio loans and leases decreased to 123 bps for 2013 compared to 159 bps for 2012.

Noninterest income increased $41 million from 2012. The increase was primarily driven by increases in investment advisory revenue, card and processing revenue and service charges on deposits. Investment advisory revenue increased $19 million from 2013 primarily due to increased securities and brokerage fees due to an increase in equity and bond market values. Card and processing revenue increased $12 million from the prior year due to higher transaction volumes, higher levels of consumer spending and the benefit of new products. Service charges on deposits increased $11 million from 2012 primarily due to an increase in account maintenance fees due to the full year impact of new deposit product offerings.

Noninterest expense increased $104 million from 2012, primarily driven by increases in salaries, incentives and employee benefits, card and processing expense and other noninterest expense. Salaries, incentives and employee benefits increased from 2012 primarily due to an increase in bonus and incentive compensation associated with improved securities and brokerage revenue. Card and processing expense increased from 2012 due primarily to increases in debit and credit card transaction volumes, consumer spending, fraud insurance costs and credit card rewards expense. The increase in other noninterest expense was primarily due to an increase in corporate overhead allocations during 2013 compared to 2012.

Average consumer loans increased $297 million in 2013 primarily due to increases in average residential mortgage portfolio loans of $942 million from the prior year as a result of continued retention of certain shorter term residential mortgage loans. In addition, average credit card loans increased from 2012 due to increases in average balances per account and the volume of new customers. These increases were partially offset by decreases in average home equity portfolio loans of $743 million from 2012 as payoffs exceeded new loan production.

Average core deposits increased $1.7 billion from the prior year as growth in demand deposits due to excess customer liquidity and a continued low interest rate environment was partially offset by the run-off of higher priced other time deposits.

Consumer Lending

Consumer Lending includes the Bancorp’s mortgage, home equity, automobile and other indirect lending activities. Lending activities include the origination, retention and servicing of mortgage and home equity loans or lines of credit, sales and securitizations of those loans, pools of loans or lines of credit, and all associated hedging activities. Indirect lending activities include loans to consumers through correspondent lenders and automobile dealers.

 

 

46  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The following table contains selected financial data for the Consumer Lending segment:

 

TABLE 19: CONSUMER LENDING            
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014    2013    2012         

Income Statement Data

Net interest income

$ 257     312     314        

Provision for loan and lease losses

  156     92     176        

Noninterest income:

Mortgage banking net revenue

  304     687     830        

Other noninterest income

  42     61     46        

Noninterest expense:

Salaries, incentives and employee benefits

  122     215     231        

Other noninterest expense

  430     470     439        

(Loss) income before taxes

  (105   283     344        

Applicable income tax (benefit) expense

  (37   100     121        

Net (loss) income

$ (68   183     223        

Average Balance Sheet Data

Residential mortgage loans, including held for sale

$ 8,866                 10,222                 10,143        

Home equity

  483     560     643        

Automobile loans, including held for sale

        11,517     11,409     11,191        

Other consumer loans and leases

  19     16     30        

 

Comparison of 2014 with 2013

Consumer Lending incurred a net loss of $68 million in 2014 compared to net income of $183 million in 2013. The decrease was driven by decreases in net interest income and noninterest income and an increase in the provision for loan and lease losses, partially offset by a decrease in noninterest expense.

Net interest income decreased $55 million from the prior year primarily due to decreases in average residential mortgage loans and average home equity loans as well as lower yields on average automobile loans, partially offset by a decrease in FTP charges on loans and leases.

The provision for loan and lease losses increased $64 million from the prior year primarily due to an $87 million charge-off related to the transfer of certain residential mortgage loans from the portfolio to held for sale in the fourth quarter of 2014, partially offset by improved delinquency metrics on home equity loans. Net charge-offs as a percent of average loans and leases increased to 77 bps for 2014 compared to 46 bps for 2013.

Noninterest income decreased $402 million from 2013 as a result of decreases in mortgage banking net revenue of $383 million and other noninterest income of $19 million. The decrease in mortgage banking net revenue was due to a $293 million decline in mortgage origination fees and gains on loan sales due to a decline in mortgage originations and a $90 million decrease in net mortgage servicing revenue. Refer to the Noninterest Income section of MD&A for additional information on the fluctuations in mortgage banking net revenue. The decrease in other noninterest income was primarily due to a $16 million decrease in securities gains.

Noninterest expense decreased $133 million due to decreases of $93 million in salaries, incentives and benefits and $40 million in other noninterest expense from the prior year. The decrease in salaries, incentives and employee benefits was primarily the result of lower mortgage loan originations. The decrease in other noninterest expense was primarily due to decreases in loan and lease expense and corporate overhead allocations.

Average consumer loans and leases decreased $1.3 billion from the prior year. Average residential mortgage loans, including held for sale, decreased $1.4 billion from the prior year due primarily to a decline of $1.5 billion in average residential mortgage loans held for sale from reduced origination volumes driven by a reduction in refinance activity and the exit of the broker origination channel

during 2014. This decrease was partially offset by the continued retention of certain shorter term residential mortgage loans originated through the Bancorp’s retail branches and the decision to retain certain conforming ARMs and certain other fixed-rate loans originated during the year ended December 31, 2014. Average home equity loans decreased $77 million from the prior year as payoffs exceeded new loan production. Average automobile loans, including held for sale, increased $108 million for the current year from the prior year due to new originations exceeding run-off.

Comparison of 2013 with 2012

Net income was $183 million in 2013 compared to net income of $223 million in 2012. The decrease was driven by a decrease in noninterest income and an increase in noninterest expense, partially offset by a decline in the provision for loan and lease losses.

Net interest income decreased $2 million from 2012 due primarily to lower yields on average residential mortgage and automobile loans, partially offset by a decrease in FTP charges on loans and leases and increases in average residential mortgage and average automobile loans.

The provision for loan and lease losses decreased $84 million from 2012 as delinquency metrics and underlying loss trends improved across all consumer loan types. Net charge-offs as a percent of average loans and leases decreased to 46 bps for 2013 compared to 88 bps for 2012.

Noninterest income decreased $128 million from 2012 primarily due to a decrease in mortgage banking net revenue of $143 million, partially offset by an increase in other noninterest income of $15 million. The decrease in mortgage banking net revenue was primarily due to a decrease in gains on loan sales of $368 million as a result of a decrease in profit margins on sold residential mortgage loans coupled with a decrease in residential mortgage loan originations, partially offset by a $223 million increase in net residential mortgage servicing revenue. The increase in net residential mortgage servicing revenue was driven by an increase of $202 million in net valuation adjustments on MSRs and free-standing derivatives entered into to economically hedge the MSRs and a decrease of $20 million in servicing rights amortization. The increase in other noninterest income was primarily due to a $12 million increase in securities gains and a $7 million decline in losses on the sale of OREO.

 

 

47  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Noninterest expense increased $15 million driven by an increase of $31 million in other noninterest expense, partially offset by a decrease of $16 million in salaries, incentives and employee benefits compared to 2012. The increase in other noninterest expense was primarily due to higher litigation expense and an increase in corporate overhead allocations, partially offset by a decrease in loan and lease expense due to lower appraisal costs. The decrease in salaries, incentives and employee benefits was due to a decline in incentive compensation driven primarily by a decline in originations during 2013 compared to 2012, partially offset by an increase in deferred compensation for 2013 compared to 2012.

Average consumer loans and leases increased $200 million from 2012. Average residential mortgage loans, including held for sale, increased $79 million for 2013 compared to 2012 due to strong refinancing activity that occurred in the first half of 2013. Average automobile loans increased $218 million in 2013 compared to 2012 due to an increase in originations primarily driven by modest improvement in general economic conditions and a continued low interest rate environment. Average home equity portfolio loans decreased $83 million for 2013 compared to 2012 as payoffs exceeded new loan production. Average other consumer loans and

leases decreased $14 million in 2013 resulting from a decrease in average consumer leases due to run-off as the Bancorp discontinued automobile leasing in 2008, partially offset by an increase in average other consumer loans.

Investment Advisors

Investment Advisors provides a full range of investment alternatives for individuals, companies and not-for-profit organizations. Investment Advisors is made up of four main businesses: FTS, an indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of the Bancorp; ClearArc Capital, Inc. (formerly FTAM), an indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of the Bancorp; Fifth Third Private Bank; and Fifth Third Institutional Services. FTS offers full service retail brokerage services to individual clients and broker dealer services to the institutional marketplace. ClearArc Capital, Inc. provides asset management services. Fifth Third Private Bank offers holistic strategies to affluent clients in wealth planning, investing, insurance and wealth protection. Fifth Third Institutional Services provides advisory services for institutional clients including states and municipalities.

 

 

The following table contains selected financial data for the Investment Advisors segment:

 

TABLE 20: INVESTMENT ADVISORS            
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014     2013     2012          

Income Statement Data

Net interest income

$ 121     154     117        

Provision for loan and lease losses

  3     2     10        

Noninterest income:

Investment advisory revenue

  397     384     366        

Other noninterest income

  13     22     30        

Noninterest expense:

Salaries, incentives and employee benefits

  162     159     161        

Other noninterest expense

  283     294     276        

Income before taxes

  83     105     66        

Applicable income tax expense

  29     37     23        

Net income

$ 54     68     43        

Average Balance Sheet Data

Loans and leases

$         2,270               2,014               1,877        

Core deposits

  9,535     8,815     7,709        

 

Comparison of 2014 with 2013

Net income was $54 million in 2014 compared to net income of $68 million for 2013. The decrease in net income was primarily due to a decrease in net interest income, partially offset by a decrease in noninterest expense and an increase in noninterest income.

Net interest income decreased $33 million from 2013 primarily due to a decrease in the FTP credit rate on certain interest checking deposits.

Noninterest income increased $4 million from the prior year due to a $13 million increase in investment advisory revenue primarily driven by an increase of $12 million in private client services revenue due to growth in personal asset management fees, partially offset by a decrease in securities broker fees due to a decline in transactional brokerage revenue. This increase was partially offset by a $9 million decrease in other noninterest income as other noninterest income in the prior year included gains on the sale of certain advisory contracts.

Noninterest expense decreased $8 million from the prior year primarily due to a decrease in other noninterest expense driven by decreases in operational losses, marketing expense and corporate overhead allocations.

Average loans and leases increased $256 million from the prior year primarily driven by increases in average residential mortgage loans and average commercial mortgage loans, partially offset by a decrease in average home equity loans. Average core deposits increased $720 million from the prior year due to growth in average interest checking balances as customers have opted to maintain excess funds in liquid transaction accounts as a result of interest rates remaining near historic lows.

Comparison of 2013 with 2012

Net income was $68 million in 2013 compared to net income of $43 million for 2012. The increase in net income was primarily due to increases in net interest income and noninterest income and a decrease in the provision for loan and lease losses, partially offset by an increase in noninterest expense.

Net interest income increased $37 million from 2012 due to an increase in FTP credits resulting from an increase in interest checking deposits.

Provision for loan and lease losses decreased $8 million from the prior year. Net charge-offs as a percent of average loans and leases decreased to 9 bps compared to 53 bps for the prior year reflecting improved credit trends during 2013.

 

 

48  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Noninterest income increased $10 million compared to 2012 due to an increase in investment advisory revenue, partially offset a decrease in other noninterest income. The increase in investment advisory revenue was primarily driven by increases in securities and brokerage fees and private client service fees due to strong production and an increase in equity and bond market values. The decrease in other noninterest income was due to a decrease in gains on sales of held for sale loans and the impact of the gain on the sale of certain FTAM funds in the third quarter of 2012.

Noninterest expense increased $16 million compared to 2012 due to an increase in other noninterest expense primarily driven by increases in corporate allocations and fraud losses.

Average loans and leases increased $137 million compared to 2012 primarily driven by increases in average residential mortgage, average other consumer and average commercial and industrial loans, partially offset by a decrease in average commercial mortgage loans. Average core deposits increased $1.1 billion compared to 2012 due to growth in interest checking as customers have opted to maintain excess funds in liquid transaction accounts as a result of the low interest rate environment.

General Corporate and Other

General Corporate and Other includes the unallocated portion of the investment securities portfolio, securities gains and losses, certain non-core deposit funding, unassigned equity, provision expense in excess of net charge-offs or a benefit from the reduction of the ALLL, representation and warranty expense in excess of actual losses or a benefit from the reduction of representation and warranty reserves, the payment of preferred stock dividends and certain support activities and other items not attributed to the business segments.

Comparison of 2014 with 2013

Results for 2014 and 2013 were impacted by a benefit of $260 million and $269 million, respectively, due to reductions in the ALLL. Net interest income decreased from $147 million in 2013 to $3 million for 2014 primarily due to increases in FTP credits and interest expense on long-term debt and a decrease in the benefit related to the FTP charges on loans and leases, partially offset by an increase in interest income on taxable securities. Noninterest income was $256 million for 2014 compared to $659 million in 2013. Noninterest income included the impact of a gain of $125 million on the sale of Vantiv, Inc. shares in the second quarter of 2014 compared to gains totaling $327 million during the second and third quarters of 2013. The Bancorp also recognized gains of $23 million and $9 million associated with a tax receivable agreement with Vantiv, Inc. in the fourth quarter of 2014 and 2013, respectively. The positive valuation adjustments on the stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC were $31 million and $206 million for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Additionally, the equity method earnings from the Bancorp’s interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC decreased $29 million from 2013. Noninterest income also included $38 million in negative valuation adjustments related to the Visa total return swap for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to $31 million for the year ended December 31, 2013.

Noninterest expense for the year ended December 31, 2014 was a benefit of $12 million compared to an expense of $159 million for the year ended December 31, 2013. The decrease was driven by decreases in compensation expense, FDIC insurance and other taxes and litigation and regulatory activity, partially offset by a decrease in the benefit from other noninterest expense driven by decreased corporate overhead allocations from General Corporate and Other to the other business segments.

    

Comparison of 2013 with 2012

Results for 2013 and 2012 were impacted by a benefit of $269 million and $400 million, respectively, due to reductions in the ALLL. The decrease in provision expense was primarily due to a decrease in nonperforming loans and leases and improvements in delinquency metrics and underlying loss trends. Net interest income decreased from $370 million in 2012 to $147 million for 2013 primarily due to a decrease in FTP charges partially offset by a decrease in interest expense on long-term debt. Noninterest income increased $278 million compared to 2012 primarily due to positive valuation adjustments on the stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC which increased $139 million in 2013 compared to 2012. In addition, gains of $242 million and $85 million were recognized on the sales of Vantiv, Inc. shares in the second and third quarters of 2013, respectively, compared to gains of $115 million related to the Vantiv, Inc. IPO and $157 million on the sale of Vantiv, Inc. shares in 2012. The Bancorp also recognized a gain of $9 million associated with a tax receivable agreement with Vantiv, Inc. in the fourth quarter of 2013. The equity method earnings from the Bancorp’s interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC increased $16 million from 2012.

Noninterest expense decreased $286 million compared to 2012 due to decreases in other noninterest expense and total personnel costs. Other noninterest expense decreased due to a decrease in debt extinguishment costs, an increase in corporate overhead allocations assigned to the segments, a decrease in loan and lease expense and a decrease in losses and adjustments. Debt extinguishment costs decreased $161 million during 2013 compared to 2012. During the fourth quarter of 2013, the Bancorp incurred $8 million of debt extinguishment costs associated with the redemption of outstanding TruPS issued by Fifth Third Capital Trust IV. During 2012, the Bancorp incurred $160 million of debt extinguishment costs associated with the redemption of certain TruPS and the termination of certain FHLB debt. Loan and lease expense decreased $72 million during 2013 compared to 2012 primarily due to a decrease in loan closing fees due to a decline in mortgage originations. Losses and adjustments decreased $17 million compared to 2012 primarily driven by a decline in the provision for representation and warranty claims partially offset by an increase in litigation expense. The provision for representation and warranty claims changed from a $49 million expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 to a benefit of $39 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 due to the Bancorp recording significant additions to the reserve in 2012 as the result of additional information obtained from FHLMC regarding their file selection criteria which enabled the Bancorp to better estimate the losses that were probable on loans sold to FHLMC with representation and warranty provisions. In addition, 2013 included a decrease in the representation and warranty reserve due to improving underlying repurchase metrics and the settlement with FHLMC. The decrease in representation and warranty expense was partially offset by a $54 million increase in litigation expense. Total personnel costs decreased $38 million from 2012 due primarily to decreases in incentive compensation and employee benefits.

 

 

49  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

FOURTH QUARTER REVIEW

 

The Bancorp’s 2014 fourth quarter net income available to common shareholders was $362 million, or $0.43 per diluted share, compared to net income available to common shareholders of $328 million, or $0.39 per diluted share, for the third quarter of 2014 and net income available to common shareholders of $383 million, or $0.43 per diluted share, for the fourth quarter of 2013. Fourth quarter 2014 earnings included a $56 million positive adjustment on the valuation of the warrant associated with the sale of Vantiv Holding, LLC, a $23 million gain from Vantiv Inc. pursuant to a tax receivable agreement and a $19 million charge related to the valuation of the total return swap entered into as part of the 2009 sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares. Third quarter 2014 results included a $53 million negative adjustment on the valuation of the warrant associated with the sale of Vantiv Holding, LLC. Fourth quarter 2013 earnings included a $91 million positive adjustment on the valuation of the warrant associated with the sale of Vantiv Holding, LLC, $69 million in net charges to increase litigation reserves, an $18 million charge related to the valuation of the total return swap entered into as part of the 2009 sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares and $8 million of debt extinguishment costs associated with the redemption of TruPS issued by Fifth Third Capital Trust IV.

Fourth quarter 2014 net interest income of $888 million decreased $20 million from the third quarter of 2014 and $17 million from the same period a year ago. Interest income decreased $7 million from the third quarter of 2014 primarily driven by the effects of loan repricing and lower average investment securities balances. Interest expense increased $13 million from the third quarter of 2014 primarily driven by the issuance of $850 million of long-term debt during the third quarter and higher deposit costs during the quarter. The decrease in net interest income in comparison to the fourth quarter of 2013 was driven by the effects of loan repricing and higher interest expense from increased long-term debt balances, partially offset by higher average investment securities balances and average loan balances.

Fourth quarter 2014 noninterest income of $653 million increased $133 million compared to the third quarter of 2014 and decreased $50 million compared to the fourth quarter of 2013. The increase from the third quarter of 2014 was primarily due to increases in other noninterest income and corporate banking revenue. The year-over-year decline was primarily the result of lower mortgage banking net revenue and other noninterest income, partially offset by higher corporate banking revenue.

Service charges on deposits of $142 million decreased $3 million from the previous quarter and were flat compared to the fourth quarter of 2013. The decrease from the third quarter of 2014 was primarily due to a decrease in commercial service charges due to a decrease in treasury management fees and a decrease in retail service charges due to lower overdraft occurrences.

Corporate banking revenue of $120 million increased $20 million from the previous quarter and $26 million from the fourth quarter of 2013. The increase from the third quarter of 2014 was primarily due to a $13 million increase in syndication fees during the fourth quarter of 2014 due to the investment in resources in the commercial business. In addition, the increase from the third quarter of 2014 was due to an increase in business lending fees and an increase in foreign exchange fees, partially offset by a decrease in institutional sales revenue. The year-over-year increase was driven by higher syndication fees and lease remarketing fees. The increase in syndication fees from the fourth quarter of 2013 was due to the investment in resources in the commercial business and a strengthening economy. The increase in lease remarketing fees year-over-year was impacted by a $9 million write-down of equipment value on an operating lease during the fourth quarter of 2013.

Investment advisory revenue of $100 million decreased $3 million from the previous quarter and increased $2 million from the fourth quarter of 2013. The decline from the third quarter of 2014 was due to a decrease in private client service fees and insurance fees relative to elevated levels in the third quarter, as well as a decrease in securities and brokerage fees due to a continued shift from transaction-based fees to recurring revenue streams. The year-over-year increase was due to an increase in personal asset management fees due to market-related growth, partially offset by a decrease in securities and brokerage fees.

Mortgage banking net revenue was $61 million in both the fourth and third quarters of 2014 and $126 million in the fourth quarter of 2013. Fourth quarter 2014 originations were $1.7 billion, compared with $2.1 billion in the previous quarter and $2.6 billion in the fourth quarter of 2013. Fourth quarter 2014 originations resulted in gains of $36 million on mortgages sold, compared with gains of $34 million during the previous quarter and $60 million during the fourth quarter of 2013. The increase from the prior quarter was driven by higher gain on sale margins, partially offset by lower production. The decrease from the prior year was due to lower production, including Fifth Third’s exit from the broker channel, partially offset by higher gain on sale margins. Mortgage servicing fees were $60 million in the fourth quarter of 2014, $61 million in the third quarter of 2014 and $63 million in the fourth quarter of 2013. Mortgage banking net revenue is also affected by net servicing asset valuation adjustments, which include MSR amortization and MSR valuation adjustments, including mark-to-market adjustments on free-standing derivatives used to economically hedge the MSR portfolio. These net servicing asset valuation adjustments were negative $34 million in both the fourth and third quarters of 2014 and positive $3 million in the fourth quarter of 2013.

Card and processing revenue of $76 million increased $1 million compared to the third quarter of 2014 and $5 million from the fourth quarter of 2013. The increases from both periods were driven by higher transaction volumes and an increase in the number of actively used cards.

Other noninterest income of $150 million increased $117 million compared to the third quarter of 2014 and decreased $20 million from the fourth quarter of 2013. Fourth quarter 2014 results included a $56 million positive valuation adjustment on the Vantiv Holding, LLC warrant and $23 million in gains pursuant to Fifth Third’s tax receivable agreement with Vantiv Holding, LLC. This compares with a $53 million negative warrant valuation adjustment in the third quarter of 2014, and a $91 million positive warrant valuation adjustment in the fourth quarter of 2013 as well as $9 million in gains pursuant to Fifth Third’s tax receivable agreement with Vantiv Holding, LLC, recognized in the fourth quarter of 2013. Quarterly results also included charges related to the valuation of the total return swap entered into as part of the 2009 sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares. Negative valuation adjustments on this swap were $19 million, $3 million and $18 million in the fourth quarter of 2014, the third quarter of 2014 and the fourth quarter of 2013, respectively.

The net gains on investment securities were $4 million in the fourth quarter of 2014, $3 million in the third quarter of 2014 and $2 million in the fourth quarter of 2013.

Noninterest expense of $918 million increased $30 million from the previous quarter and decreased $71 million from the fourth quarter of 2013. The increase in noninterest expense compared to the third quarter of 2014 was driven by an increase in personnel costs, an increase in provision expense from the reserve for unfunded commitments and an increase in operational losses in the fourth quarter of 2014. The decrease in noninterest expense

 

 

50  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

from the fourth quarter of 2013 was primarily due to $69 million in charges to litigation reserves in the fourth quarter of 2013 compared to a $3 million reversal of litigation reserves in the fourth quarter of 2014, partially offset by an increase in credit-related costs in the fourth quarter of 2014.

The ALLL as a percentage of portfolio loans and leases was 1.47% as of December 31, 2014, compared to 1.56% as of September 30, 2014 and 1.79% as of December 31, 2013. Net

charge-offs were $191 million in the fourth quarter of 2014, or 83 bps of average loans on an annualized basis, compared with net charge-offs of $115 million in the third quarter of 2014 and $148 million in the fourth quarter of 2013. During the fourth quarter of 2014, the Bancorp transferred certain residential mortgage loans from the portfolio to held for sale resulting in a charge-off of $87 million.

 

 

TABLE 21: QUARTERLY INFORMATION (unaudited)                                
   2014   2013  
For the three months ended ($ in millions, except per share data) 12/31   9/30   6/30   3/31   12/31   9/30   6/30   3/31  

Net interest income (a)

      $  888      908      905      898      905      898      885      893   

Provision for loan and lease losses

  99      71      76      69      53      51      64      62   

Noninterest income

  653      520      736      564      703      721      1,060      743   

Noninterest expense

  918      888      954      950      989      959      1,035      978   

Net income attributable to Bancorp

  385      340      439      318      402      421      591      422   

Net income available to common shareholders

  362      328      416      309      383      421      582      413   

Earnings per share, basic

  0.44      0.39      0.49      0.36      0.44      0.47      0.67      0.47   

Earnings per share, diluted

  0.43            0.39            0.49            0.36            0.43            0.47            0.65            0.46   
(a)

Amounts presented on a FTE basis. The FTE adjustment for the three months ended December 31, 2014 September 30, 2014, June 30, 2014, March 31, 2014,  December 31, 2013, September 30, 2013, June 30, 2013 and March 31, 2013 was $5 .

 

COMPARISON OF THE YEAR ENDED 2013 WITH 2012

The Bancorp’s net income available to common shareholders for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $1.8 billion, or $2.02 per diluted share, which was net of $37 million in preferred stock dividends. The Bancorp’s net income available to common shareholders for the year ended December 31, 2012 was $1.5 billion, or $1.66 per diluted share, which was net of $35 million in preferred stock dividends. Overall, credit trends improved in 2013, and as a result, the provision for loan and lease losses decreased to $229 million in 2013 compared to $303 million in 2012.

Net interest income was $3.6 billion for both the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012. Net interest income was negatively impacted by a decline of 36 bps in yields on the Bancorp’s interest-earning assets, partially offset by a $4.3 billion increase in average loans and leases due primarily to increases in average commercial and industrial loans and average residential mortgage loans. In addition, interest expense decreased primarily due to a decrease in rates paid on average long-term debt and a reduction in higher cost average long-term debt.

Noninterest income increased $228 million, or eight percent, in 2013 compared to 2012. The increase from 2012 was primarily due to increases in other noninterest income partially offset by decreases in mortgage banking net revenue. Other noninterest income increased $305 million compared to 2012, primarily due to positive valuation adjustments on the stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC. In addition, the Bancorp recognized gains of $242 million and $85 million, on the sale of Vantiv, Inc. shares in the second and third quarters of 2013, respectively, compared to gains of $115 million related to the Vantiv, Inc. IPO recorded in the first quarter of 2012 and a $157 million gain on the sale of Vantiv shares during the fourth quarter of 2012. Mortgage banking net revenue decreased $145 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to 2012 primarily due to a decrease in origination fees and gains on loan sales partially offset by an increase in positive net valuation adjustments on mortgage servicing rights and free-standing derivatives entered into to economically hedge the MSR portfolio.

Noninterest expense decreased $120 million, or three percent, in 2013 compared to 2012 primarily due to a decrease in other noninterest expense driven by a decrease in debt extinguishment

costs and a decrease in the provision for representation and warranty claims partially offset by an increase in litigation expense.

Net charge-offs as a percent of average portfolio loans and leases decreased to 0.58% during 2013 compared to 0.85% during 2012 largely due to improved credit trends across all commercial and consumer loan types.

The Bancorp took a number of actions that impacted its capital position in 2013. In March of 2013, the Bancorp announced the results of its capital plan submitted to the FRB as part of the 2013 CCAR. The FRB indicated to the Bancorp that it did not object to the following proposed capital actions for the period beginning April 1, 2013 and ending March 31, 2014: the potential increase in its quarterly common stock dividend to $0.12 per share; the potential repurchase of up to $750 million in TruPS, subject to the determination of a regulatory capital event and replacement with the issuance of a similar amount of Tier II-qualifying subordinated debt; the potential conversion of the $398 million in outstanding Series G 8.5% convertible preferred stock into approximately 35.5 million common shares issued to the holders and the repurchase of an equivalent amount of common shares issued in the conversion up to $550 million in market value, and the issuance of $550 million in preferred shares; the potential repurchase of common shares in an amount up to $984 million, including any shares issued in a Series G preferred stock conversion; incremental repurchase of common shares in the amount of any after-tax gains from the sale of Vantiv, Inc stock and the potential issuance of an additional $500 million in preferred stock. Actions consistent with these proposed capital actions were substantially completed in 2013.

The FRB launched the 2014 stress testing program and CCAR on November 1, 2013. The stress testing results and capital plan were submitted by the Bancorp to the FRB on January 6, 2014.

Additionally, the Bancorp entered into a number of accelerated share repurchase transactions in 2013. Refer to Note 23 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for more information on the accelerated share repurchase transactions.

 

 

51  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

BALANCE SHEET ANALYSIS

 

Loans and Leases

The Bancorp classifies its loans and leases based upon the primary purpose of the loan or lease. Table 22 summarizes end of period loans and leases, including loans held for sale and Table 23

summarizes average total loans and leases, including loans held for sale.

 

 

TABLE 22: COMPONENTS OF TOTAL LOANS AND LEASES (INCLUDES HELD FOR SALE)  
As of December 31 ($ in millions) 2014       2013       2012       2011       2010          

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$       40,801               39,347               36,077               30,828               27,275      

Commercial mortgage loans

  7,410     8,069     9,116     10,214     10,992      

Commercial construction loans

  2,071     1,041     707     1,037     2,111      

Commercial leases

  3,721     3,626     3,549     3,531     3,378      

Subtotal – commercial

  54,003     52,083     49,449     45,610     43,756      

Consumer:

Residential mortgage loans

  13,582     13,570     14,873     13,474     10,857      

Home equity

  8,886     9,246     10,018     10,719     11,513      

Automobile loans

  12,037     11,984     11,972     11,827     10,983      

Credit card

  2,401     2,294     2,097     1,978     1,896      

Other consumer loans and leases

  436     381     312     364     702      

Subtotal – consumer

  37,342     37,475     39,272     38,362     35,951      

Total loans and leases

$ 91,345     89,558     88,721     83,972     79,707      

Total portfolio loans and leases (excludes loans held for sale)

$ 90,084     88,614     85,782     81,018     77,491      

 

Loans and leases, including loans held for sale, increased $1.8 billion, or two percent, from December 31, 2013. The increase in loans and leases from December 31, 2013 was the result of a $1.9 billion, or four percent, increase in commercial loans and leases partially offset by a $133 million decrease in consumer loans and leases.

Commercial loans and leases increased from December 31, 2013 primarily due to increases in commercial and industrial loans and commercial construction loans partially offset by a decrease in commercial mortgage loans. Commercial and industrial loans increased $1.5 billion, or four percent, from December 31, 2013 and commercial construction loans increased $1.0 billion, or 99%, from December 31, 2013 primarily driven by an increase in new loan

origination activity and utilization resulting from a strengthening economy and targeted marketing efforts. Commercial mortgage loans decreased $659 million, or eight percent, from December 31, 2013 due to continued run-off as the level of new originations was outpaced by increased repayments on the current portfolio.

Consumer loans and leases decreased from December 31, 2013 primarily due to a decrease in home equity partially offset by an increase in credit card loans. Home equity decreased $360 million, or four percent, from December 31, 2013 as payoffs exceeded new loan production. Credit card loans increased $107 million, or five percent, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in average balances per account and an increase in new customer accounts.

 

 

TABLE 23: COMPONENTS OF AVERAGE TOTAL LOANS AND LEASES (INCLUDES HELD FOR SALE)  
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014       2013       2012       2011       2010          

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$       41,178               37,770               32,911               28,546               26,334      

Commercial mortgage loans

  7,745     8,481     9,686     10,447     11,585      

Commercial construction loans

  1,492     793     835     1,740     3,066      

Commercial leases

  3,585     3,565     3,502     3,341     3,343      

Subtotal – commercial

  54,000     50,609     46,934     44,074     44,328      

Consumer:

Residential mortgage loans

  13,344     14,428     13,370     11,318     9,868      

Home equity

  9,059     9,554     10,369     11,077     11,996      

Automobile loans

  12,068     12,021     11,849     11,352     10,427      

Credit card

  2,271     2,121     1,960     1,864     1,870      

Other consumer loans and leases

  385     360     340     529     743      

Subtotal – consumer

  37,127     38,484     37,888     36,140     34,904      

Total average loans and leases

$ 91,127     89,093     84,822     80,214     79,232      

Total average portfolio loans and leases (excludes loans held for sale)

$ 90,485     86,950     82,733     78,533     77,045      

 

Average loans and leases, including loans held for sale, increased $2.0 billion, or two percent, from December 31, 2013. The increase from December 31, 2013 was the result of a $3.4 billion, or seven percent, increase in average commercial loans and leases partially offset by a $1.4 billion, or four percent, decrease in average consumer loans and leases.

Average commercial loans and leases increased from December 31, 2013 primarily due to increases in average commercial and industrial loans and average commercial construction loans partially offset by a decrease in average commercial mortgage loans. Average commercial and industrial loans increased $3.4 billion, or nine percent, from December 31, 2013 and average commercial construction loans increased $699

 

 

52  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

million, or 88%, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in new loan origination activity and utilization resulting from a strengthening economy and targeted marketing efforts. Average commercial mortgage loans decreased $736 million, or nine percent, from December 31, 2013 due to continued run-off as the level of new originations was outpaced by increased repayments on the current portfolio.

Average consumer loans and leases decreased from December 31, 2013 primarily due to decreases in average residential mortgage loans and average home equity partially offset by an increase in average credit card loans. Average residential mortgage loans decreased $1.1 billion, or eight percent, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to a decline in average loans held for sale of $1.5

billion from reduced origination volumes driven by a reduction in refinance activity and the exit of the broker origination channel during 2014. This decrease was partially offset by the continued retention of certain shorter term residential mortgage loans originated through the Bancorp’s retail branches and the decision to retain certain conforming ARMs and certain other fixed-rate loans originated during the year ended December 31, 2014. Average home equity decreased $495 million, or five percent, from December 31, 2013 as payoffs exceeded new loan production. Average credit card loans increased $150 million, or seven percent, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in open and active accounts driven by the volume of new customer accounts.

 

 

Investment Securities

The Bancorp uses investment securities as a means of managing interest rate risk, providing liquidity support and providing collateral for pledging purposes. As of December 31, 2014, total investment securities were $23.0 billion compared to $19.1 billion at December 31, 2013. Refer to Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for the Bancorp’s methodology for both classifying investment securities and management’s evaluation of securities in an unrealized loss position for OTTI.

At December 31, 2014, the Bancorp’s investment portfolio consisted primarily of AAA-rated available-for-sale securities. The Bancorp did not hold asset-backed securities backed by subprime mortgage loans in its investment portfolio. Additionally, securities

classified as below investment grade were immaterial as of December 31, 2014 and 2013. The Bancorp’s management has evaluated the securities in an unrealized loss position in the available-for-sale and held-to-maturity portfolios for OTTI. The Bancorp recognized $24 million, $74 million and $58 million of OTTI on its available-for-sale and other debt securities, included in securities gains, net and securities gains, net – non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights, in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Statements of Income during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Bancorp did not recognize OTTI on any of its available-for-sale equity securities or held-to-maturity debt securities for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012.

 

 

TABLE 24: COMPONENTS OF INVESTMENT SECURITIES      
As of December 31 ($ in millions) 2014       2013       2012       2011       2010          

Available-for-sale and other: (amortized cost basis)

  U.S. Treasury and federal agencies

$ 1,545     1,549     1,771     1,953     1,789      

  Obligations of states and political subdivisions

  185     187     203     96     170      

  Mortgage-backed securities:

    Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

  11,968     12,294     8,403     9,743     10,570      

    Agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

  4,465     -     -     -     -      

    Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

  -     -     -     28     41      

    Non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

  1,489     1,368     1,089     498     -      

  Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  1,324     2,146     2,072     1,266     1,297      

  Equity securities (a)

  701     865     1,033     1,030     1,052      

Total available-for-sale and other securities

$       21,677             18,409             14,571             14,614             14,919      

Held-to-maturity: (amortized cost basis)

  Obligations of states and political subdivisions

$ 186     207     282     320     348      

  Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  1     1     2     2     5      

Total held-to-maturity

$ 187     208     284     322     353      

Trading: (fair value)

  U.S. Treasury and federal agencies

$ 14     5     7     -     1      

  Obligations of states and political subdivisions

  8     13     17     9     21      

  Mortgage-backed securities:

    Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

  9     3     7     11     8      

    Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

  -     -     -     1     -      

  Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  13     7     15     12     120      

  Equity securities

  316     315     161     144     144      

Total trading

$ 360     343     207     177     294      
(a)

Equity securities consist of FHLB and FRB restricted stock holdings that are carried at par, FHLMC and FNMA preferred stock holdings and certain mutual fund holdings and equity security holdings.

 

As of December 31, 2014, available-for-sale and other securities on an amortized cost basis increased $3.3 billion, or 18%, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in agency commercial mortgage-backed securities partially offset by a decrease in asset-backed securities and other debt securities. Agency commercial mortgage-backed securities increased $4.5 billion from December 31, 2013 due to $4.7 billion in purchases of agency

commercial mortgage-backed securities partially offset by $196 million in sales and $20 million in paydowns on the portfolio during the year ended December 31, 2014. Asset-backed securities and other debt securities decreased $822 million, or 38%, due primarily to sales of $1.1 billion of asset-backed securities, collateralized loan obligations and corporate bonds and paydowns on the portfolio of

 

 

53  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

$45 million partially offset by the purchase of $297 million of asset-backed securities during the year ended December 31, 2014.

On an amortized cost basis, available-for-sale and other securities were 18% and 16% of total interest-earning assets at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. The estimated weighted-average life of the debt securities in the available-for-sale and other portfolio was 5.8 years at December 31, 2014, compared to 6.7 years at December 31, 2013. In addition, at December 31, 2014, the available-for-sale and other securities portfolio had a weighted-average yield of 3.31%, compared to 3.39% at December 31, 2013.

Information presented in Table 25 is on a weighted-average life basis, anticipating future prepayments. Yield information is

presented on a FTE basis and is computed using historical cost balances. Maturity and yield calculations for the total available-for-sale portfolio exclude equity securities that have no stated yield or maturity. Total net unrealized gains on the available-for-sale and other securities portfolio were $731 million at December 31, 2014, compared to $188 million at December 31, 2013. The increase from December 31, 2013 was primarily due to a decrease in interest rates during the year ended December 31, 2014. The fair value of investment securities is impacted by interest rates, credit spreads, market volatility and liquidity conditions. The fair value of investment securities generally increases when interest rates decrease or when credit spreads contract.

 

 

TABLE 25: CHARACTERISTICS OF AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE AND OTHER SECURITIES  
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) Amortized Cost           Fair Value  

        Weighted-Average

        Life (in years)    

 

    Weighted-Average  

    Yield            

 

U.S. Treasury and federal agencies:

 Average life 1 – 5 years

$         1,545              1,632         2.0               3.62 %         

Total

  1,545              1,632         2.0               3.62            

Obligations of states and political subdivisions: (a)

 Average life of one year or less

  39              39         0.4               0.03            

 Average life 1 – 5 years

  111              115         2.9               3.72            

 Average life 5 – 10 years

  30              32         7.9               3.67            

 Average life greater than 10 years

  5              6         10.3               3.78            

Total

  185              192         3.4               2.93            

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities:

 Average life of one year or less

  42              43         0.4               5.61            

 Average life 1 – 5 years

  3,224              3,361         4.1               3.80            

 Average life 5 – 10 years

  8,386              8,665         5.9               3.33            

 Average life greater than 10 years

  316              335         12.9               3.83            

Total

  11,968              12,404         5.6               3.47            

Agency commercial mortgage-backed securities:

 Average life of one year or less

  15               15         0.3               -            

 Average life 1 – 5 years

  865              874         4.4               2.83            

 Average life 5 – 10 years

  3,350              3,427         7.7               3.13            

 Average life greater than 10 years

  235              249         13.6               3.90            

Total

  4,465              4,565         7.3               3.10            

Non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities:

 Average life of one year or less

  54              54         0.5               2.19            

 Average life 1 – 5 years

  561              576         2.3               2.69            

 Average life 5 – 10 years

  874              920         7.9               3.67            

Total

  1,489              1,550         5.5               3.25            

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities:

 Average life of one year or less

  97              102         0.2               2.05            

 Average life 1 – 5 years

  514              524         3.1               2.76            

 Average life 5 – 10 years

  244              253         6.9               1.90            

 Average life greater than 10 years

  469              483         14.5               1.91            

Total

  1,324              1,362         7.6               2.25            

Equity securities

  701              703      

Total available-for-sale and other securities

$ 21,677              22,408         5.8               3.31 %         
(a)

Taxable-equivalent yield adjustments included in the above table are 0.01%, 0.00%, 1.94%, 2.01% and 0.37 for securities with an average life of one year or less, 1-5 years, 5-10 years, greater than 10 years and in total, respectively.

 

Deposits

The Bancorp’s deposit balances represent an important source of funding and revenue growth opportunity. The Bancorp continues to focus on core deposit growth in its retail and commercial franchises

by improving customer satisfaction, building full relationships and offering competitive rates. Core deposits represented 71% of the Bancorp’s asset funding base for both of the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013.

 

 

54  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 26: DEPOSITS                         
As of December 31 ($ in millions)       2014   2013        2012        2011        2010           

Demand

$ 34,809     32,634     30,023     27,600     21,413      

Interest checking

  26,800     25,875     24,477     20,392     18,560      

Savings

  15,051     17,045     19,879     21,756     20,903      

Money market

  17,083     11,644     6,875     4,989     5,035      

Foreign office

  1,114     1,976     885     3,250     3,721      

Transaction deposits

  94,857     89,174     82,139     77,987     69,632      

Other time

  3,960     3,530     4,015     4,638     7,728      

Core deposits

  98,817     92,704     86,154     82,625     77,360      

Certificates - $100,000 and over

  2,895     6,571     3,284     3,039     4,287      

Other

  -      -      79     46     1      

Total deposits

$       101,712     99,275     89,517     85,710     81,648      

 

Core deposits increased $6.1 billion, or seven percent, compared to December 31, 2013, driven by an increase of $5.7 billion, or six percent, in transaction deposits and an increase of $430 million, or 12%, in other time deposits. Total transaction deposits increased from December 31, 2013 due to increases in money market deposits, demand deposits and interest checking deposits partially offset by decreases in savings deposits and foreign office deposits. Money market deposits increased $5.4 billion, or 47%, from December 31, 2013 primarily driven by balance migration from savings deposits which decreased $2.0 billion, or 12%. The remaining increase in money market deposits was due to a promotional product offering and the acquisition of new customers. Demand deposits increased $2.2 billion, or seven percent, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in commercial customer balances and new commercial customer accounts. Interest

checking deposits increased $925 million, or four percent, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in commercial customer balances and new commercial customer accounts. Foreign office deposits decreased $862 million, or 44%, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to lower balances per account. Other time deposits increased $430 million, or 12%, from December 31, 2013 primarily from the acquisition of new customers due to promotional interest rates.

The Bancorp uses certificates $100,000 and over as a method to fund earning assets. At December 31, 2014, certificates $100,000 and over decreased $3.7 billion, or 56%, compared to December 31, 2013 primarily due to the maturity and run-off of retail and institutional certificates of deposit during the year ended December 31, 2014.

 

 

The following table presents average deposits for the years ended December 31:

 

TABLE 27: AVERAGE DEPOSITS                         
($ in millions)       2014   2013        2012        2011        2010           

Demand

$ 31,755     29,925     27,196     23,389     19,669      

Interest checking

  25,382     23,582     23,096     18,707     18,218      

Savings

  16,080     18,440     21,393     21,652     19,612      

Money market

  14,670     9,467     4,903     5,154     4,808      

Foreign office

  1,828     1,501     1,528     3,490     3,355      

Transaction deposits

  89,715     82,915     78,116     72,392     65,662      

Other time

  3,762     3,760     4,306     6,260     10,526      

Core deposits

  93,477     86,675     82,422     78,652     76,188      

Certificates - $100,000 and over

  3,929     6,339     3,102     3,656     6,083      

Other

  -      17     27     7     6      

Total average deposits

$         97,406     93,031     85,551     82,315     82,277      

 

On an average basis, core deposits increased $6.8 billion, or eight percent, compared to December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase of $6.8 billion, or eight percent, in average transaction deposits. The increase in average transaction deposits was driven by an increase in average money market deposits, average demand deposits and average interest checking deposits, partially offset by a decrease in average savings deposits. Average money market deposits increased $5.2 billion, or 55%, from December 31, 2013 primarily driven by balance migration from savings deposits which decreased $2.4 billion, or 13%. The remaining increase in average money market deposits was due to a promotional product offering,

an increase in average commercial account balances and new customer accounts. Average demand deposits increased $1.8 billion, or six percent, from December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in average commercial account balances and new commercial customer accounts. Average interest checking deposits increased $1.8 billion, or eight percent from December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in average balance per account and new commercial customer accounts. Average certificates $100,000 and over decreased $2.4 billion, or 38%, from December 31, 2013 due primarily to the maturity and run-off of retail and institutional certificates of deposit during the year ended December 31, 2014.

 

 

55  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The contractual maturities of certificates $100,000 and over as of December 31, 2014 are summarized in the following table:

 

TABLE 28: CONTRACTUAL MATURITIES OF CERTIFICATES $100,000 AND OVER     
($ in millions) 2014  

Three months or less

$ 759      

After three months through six months

  203      

After six months through 12 months

  273      

After 12 months

  1,660      

Total

$         2,895      

The contractual maturities of other time deposits and certificates $100,000 and over as of December 31, 2014 are summarized in the following table:

 

TABLE 29: CONTRACTUAL MATURITIES OF OTHER TIME DEPOSITS AND CERTIFICATES $100,000 AND OVER     
($ in millions) 2014  

Next 12 months

$ 2,507      

13-24 months

  1,617      

25-36 months

  961      

37-48 months

  626      

49-60 months

  884      

After 60 months

  260      

Total

$         6,855      

 

Borrowings

Total borrowings increased $5.4 billion, or 48%, from December 31, 2013 due to increases in other short-term borrowings and long-term

debt, partially offset by a decrease in federal funds purchased. Total borrowings as a percentage of interest-bearing liabilities were 20% and 14% at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

 

TABLE 30: BORROWINGS                         
As of December 31 ($ in millions)   2014   2013     2012   2011    2010       

Federal funds purchased

$ 144     284     901     346     279      

Other short-term borrowings

  1,556     1,380     6,280     3,239     1,574      

Long-term debt

  14,967     9,633     7,085     9,682     9,558      

Total borrowings

$         16,667     11,297     14,266     13,267     11,411      

 

Federal funds purchased decreased $140 million, or 49%, from December 31, 2013 driven by a decrease in excess balances in reserve accounts held at Federal Reserve Banks that the Bancorp purchased from other member banks on an overnight basis. Other short-term borrowings increased $176 million, or 13%, from December 31, 2013 driven by an increase in cash held as collateral related to derivative agreements with various counterparties. Additionally, the utilization of short-term funding remained low in 2014 due to strong deposit growth and to comply with regulatory standards which require greater dependency on long-term and stable funding. Long-term

debt increased $5.3 billion, or 55%, from December 31, 2013 primarily driven by the issuance of $2.9 billion of unsecured senior bank notes and the issuance of asset-backed securities by consolidated VIEs of $3.8 billion related to automobile loan securitizations during 2014, partially offset by $1.4 billion of paydowns on long-term debt associated with automobile loan securitizations. For additional information regarding automobile securitizations and long-term debt, refer to Note 10 and 16, respectively, of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

TABLE 31: AVERAGE BORROWINGS  
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions)   2014   2013        2012        2011          2010             

Federal funds purchased

$ 458     503     560     345     291      

Other short-term borrowings

  1,873     3,024     4,246     2,777     1,635      

Long-term debt

  12,928     7,914     9,043     10,154     10,902      

Total average borrowings

$         15,259     11,441     13,849     13,276     12,828      

 

Average total borrowings increased $3.8 billion, or 33%, compared to December 31, 2013, due to an increase in average long-term debt partially offset by decreases in average federal funds purchased and average other short-term borrowings. The increase in average long-term debt of $5.0 billion, or 63%, was driven primarily by the issuances of long-term debt as discussed above. The level of average federal funds purchased and average other short-term borrowings can fluctuate significantly from period to period depending on funding needs and which sources are used to satisfy those needs. Additionally, the utilization of short-term funding remained low in 2014 due to strong deposit growth and to comply with regulatory standards which require greater dependency on long-term and stable funding.

Information on the average rates paid on borrowings is discussed in the net interest income section of MD&A. In addition, refer to the Liquidity Risk Management section for a discussion on the role of borrowings in the Bancorp’s liquidity management.

 

 

56  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

RISK MANAGEMENT

 

Managing risk is an essential component of successfully operating a financial services company. The Bancorp’s risk management approach includes processes for identifying, assessing, managing, monitoring and reporting risks. The ERM division, led by the Bancorp’s Chief Risk Officer ensures the consistency and adequacy of the Bancorp’s risk management approach within the structure of the Bancorp’s affiliate operating model. In addition, the Internal Audit division provides an independent assessment of the Bancorp’s internal control structure and related systems and processes.

The assumption of risk requires robust and active risk management practices that comprise an integrated and comprehensive set of activities, measures and strategies that apply to the entire organization. The Bancorp has established a Risk Appetite Framework, approved by the Board, that provides the foundations of corporate risk capacity, risk appetite and risk tolerances. The Bancorp’s risk capacity is represented by its available financial resources. Risk capacity sets an absolute limit on risk-assumption in the Bancorp’s annual and strategic plans. The Bancorp understands that not all financial resources may persist as viable loss buffers over time. Further, consideration must be given to regulatory capital buffers required per Capital Policy Targets that would reduce risk capacity. Those factors take the form of capacity adjustments to arrive at an Operating Risk Capacity which represents the operating risk level the Bancorp can assume while maintaining its solvency standard. The Bancorp’s policy currently discounts its Operating Risk Capacity by a minimum of five percent to provide a buffer; as a result, the Bancorp’s risk appetite is limited by policy to, at most, 95% of its Operating Risk Capacity.

Economic capital is the amount of unencumbered financial resources required to support the Bancorp’s risks. The Bancorp measures economic capital under the assumption that it expects to maintain debt ratings at strong investment grade levels over time. The Bancorp’s capital policies require that the Operating Risk Capacity less the aforementioned buffer exceed the calculated economic capital required in its business.

Risk appetite is the aggregate amount of risk the Bancorp is willing to accept in pursuit of its strategic and financial objectives. By establishing boundaries around risk taking and business decisions, and by incorporating the needs and goals of its shareholders, regulators, rating agencies and customers, the Bancorp’s risk appetite is aligned with its priorities and goals. Risk tolerance is the maximum amount of risk applicable to each of the eight specific risk categories included in its Enterprise Risk Management Framework. This is expressed primarily in qualitative terms. The Bancorp’s risk appetite and risk tolerances are supported by risk targets and risk limits. Those limits are used to monitor the amount of risk assumed at a granular level. On a quarterly basis, the Risk and Compliance Committee of the Board reviews performance against key risk limits as well as current assessments of each of the eight risk types relative to the established tolerance. Any results over limits or outside of tolerance require the development of an action plan that describes actions to be taken to return the measure to within the limit or tolerance.

The risks faced by the Bancorp include, but are not limited to, credit, market, liquidity, operational, regulatory compliance, legal, reputational and strategic. Each of these risks is managed through the Bancorp’s risk program which includes the following key functions:

 

   

Enterprise Risk Management is responsible for developing and overseeing the implementation of risk programs and reporting that facilitate a broad integrated view of risk. The department also leads the continual fostering of a strong risk

   

management culture and the framework, policies and committees that support effective risk governance, including the oversight of Sarbanes-Oxley compliance;

   

Commercial Credit Risk Management is responsible for overseeing the safety and soundness of the commercial loan portfolio within an independent portfolio management framework that supports the Bancorp’s commercial loan growth strategies and underwriting practices, ensuring portfolio optimization and appropriate risk controls;

   

Risk Strategies and Reporting is responsible for quantitative analysis needed to support the commercial dual rating methodology, ALLL methodology and analytics needed to assess credit risk and develop mitigation strategies related to that risk. The department also provides oversight, reporting and monitoring of commercial underwriting and credit administration processes. The Risk Strategies and Reporting department is also responsible for the economic capital program and risk management governance and reporting;

   

Consumer Credit Risk Management is responsible for overseeing the safety and soundness of the consumer portfolio within an independent management framework that supports the Bancorp’s consumer loan growth strategies, ensuring portfolio optimization, appropriate risk controls and oversight, reporting, and monitoring of underwriting and credit administration processes;

   

Operational Risk Management works with lines of business and affiliates to maintain processes to monitor and manage all aspects of operational risk, including ensuring consistency in application of operational risk programs;

   

Bank Protection oversees and manages fraud prevention and detection and provides investigative and recovery services for the Bancorp;

   

Capital Markets Risk Management is responsible for instituting, monitoring, and reporting appropriate trading limits, monitoring liquidity, interest rate risk and risk tolerances within Treasury, Mortgage, and Capital Markets groups and utilizing a value at risk model for Bancorp market risk exposure;

   

Regulatory Compliance Risk Management ensures that processes are in place to monitor and comply with federal and state banking regulations, including processes related to fiduciary, CRA and fair lending compliance. The function also has the responsibility for maintenance of an enterprise-wide compliance framework; and

   

The ERM division creates and maintains other functions, committees or processes as are necessary to effectively oversee risk management throughout the Bancorp.

Risk management oversight and governance is provided by the Risk and Compliance Committee of the Board of Directors and through multiple management committees whose membership includes a broad cross-section of line-of-business, affiliate and support representatives. The Risk and Compliance Committee of the Board of Directors consists of five outside directors and has the responsibility for the oversight of risk management for the Bancorp, as well as for the Bancorp’s overall aggregate risk profile. The Risk and Compliance Committee of the Board of Directors has approved the formation of key management governance committees that are responsible for evaluating risks and controls. The primary committee responsible for the oversight of risk management is the ERMC. Committees accountable to the ERMC, which support the core risk programs, are the Corporate Credit Committee, the Operational Risk Committee, the Management Compliance

 

 

57  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Committee, the Asset/Liability Committee and the Enterprise Marketing Committee. Other committees accountable to the ERMC oversee the ALLL, capital and CRA/fair lending functions. In addition, the Legal and Regulatory Reserve Committee, which is accountable to the Operational Risk Committee, reviews and monitors significant legal and regulatory matters to ensure that reserves for potential litigation losses are established when such losses are both probable and subject to reasonable estimation. There are also new products and initiatives processes applicable to every line of business to ensure an appropriate standard readiness assessment is performed before launching a new product or initiative. Significant risk policies approved by the management governance committees are also reviewed and approved by the Risk and Compliance Committee of the Board of Directors.

Credit Risk Review is an independent function responsible for evaluating the sufficiency of underwriting, documentation and approval processes for consumer and commercial credits, the accuracy of risk grades assigned to commercial credit exposure, nonaccrual status, specific reserves and monitoring for charge-offs. Credit Risk Review reports directly to the Risk and Compliance Committee of the Board of Directors and administratively to the Chief Auditor.

The Bancorp conducts regular reviews of the business it serves based on the changing competitive and regulatory environment. Based on the most recent review, the Bancorp exited the Residential Wholesale Loan Broker business during the first quarter of 2014.

 

 

CREDIT RISK MANAGEMENT

The objective of the Bancorp’s credit risk management strategy is to quantify and manage credit risk on an aggregate portfolio basis, as well as to limit the risk of loss resulting from the failure of a borrower or counterparty to honor its financial or contractual obligations to the Bancorp. The Bancorp’s credit risk management strategy is based on three core principles: conservatism, diversification and monitoring. The Bancorp believes that effective credit risk management begins with conservative lending practices. These practices include conservative exposure and counterparty limits and conservative underwriting, documentation and collection standards. The Bancorp’s credit risk management strategy also emphasizes diversification on a geographic, industry and customer level as well as ongoing portfolio monitoring and timely management reviews of large credit exposures and credits experiencing deterioration of credit quality. Credit officers with the authority to extend credit are delegated specific authority amounts, the utilization of which is closely monitored. Underwriting activities

are centrally managed, and ERM manages the policy and the authority delegation process directly. The Credit Risk Review function provides objective assessments of the quality of underwriting and documentation, the accuracy of risk grades and the charge-off, nonaccrual and reserve analysis process. The Bancorp’s credit review process and overall assessment of the adequacy of the allowance for credit losses is based on quarterly assessments of the probable estimated losses inherent in the loan and lease portfolio. The Bancorp uses these assessments to promptly identify potential problem loans or leases within the portfolio, maintain an adequate reserve and take any necessary charge-offs. The Bancorp defines potential problem loans and leases as those rated substandard that do not meet the definition of a nonperforming asset or a restructured loan. Refer to Note 6 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further information on the Bancorp’s credit grade categories, which are derived from standard regulatory rating definitions.

 

 

The following tables provide a summary of potential problem loans and leases as of December 31:

 

TABLE 32: POTENTIAL PROBLEM LOANS AND LEASES               
2014 ($ in millions) Carrying
Value
  Unpaid  
Principal  
Balance  
  Exposure      

Commercial and industrial

$ 1,022     1,028     1,344   

Commercial mortgage

  272     273     273   

Commercial construction

  7     7     11   

Commercial leases

  29     29     29   

Total

$             1,330     1,337     1,657   
TABLE 33: POTENTIAL PROBLEM LOANS AND LEASES               
2013 ($ in millions) Carrying
Value
  Unpaid  
Principal  
Balance  
  Exposure      

Commercial and industrial

$ 1,032     1,034     1,323   

Commercial mortgage

  517     520     520   

Commercial construction

  44     44     50   

Commercial leases

  18     18     18   

Total

$ 1,611     1,616     1,911   

 

58  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

In addition to the individual review of larger commercial loans that exhibit probable or observed credit weaknesses, the commercial credit review process includes the use of two risk grading systems. The risk grading system currently utilized for reserve analysis purposes encompasses ten categories. The Bancorp also maintains a dual risk rating system for credit approval and pricing, portfolio monitoring and capital allocation that includes a “through-the-cycle” rating philosophy for modeling expected losses. The dual risk rating system includes thirteen probabilities of default grade categories and an additional six grade categories for estimating losses given an event of default. The probability of default and loss given default evaluations are not separated in the ten-category risk rating system. The Bancorp has completed significant validation and testing of the dual risk rating system as a commercial credit risk management tool. The Bancorp is assessing the necessary modifications to the dual risk rating system outputs to develop a U.S. GAAP compliant ALLL model and will make a decision on the use of modified dual risk ratings for purposes of determining the Bancorp’s ALLL once the FASB has issued a final standard regarding proposed methodology changes to the determination of credit impairment as outlined in the FASB’s proposed Accounting Standard Update— Financial Instruments–Credit Losses (Subtopic 825-15) issued on December 20, 2012. Scoring systems, various analytical tools and portfolio performance monitoring are used to assess the credit risk in the Bancorp’s homogenous consumer and small business loan portfolios.

Overview

Economic growth is improving and GDP is expected to maintain its modest expansionary pattern. The job market is slowly but steadily improving. Housing prices have largely stabilized and are increasing in many markets, but overall current economic conditions are causing weaker than desired qualified loan demand and a relatively low interest rate environment, which directly impacts the Bancorp’s growth and profitability.

Among consumer portfolios, residential mortgage and brokered home equity portfolios exhibited the most stress. As of December 31, 2014, consumer real estate loans originated from 2005 through 2008 represent approximately 24% of the consumer real estate portfolio and approximately 68% of total losses in 2014. Loss rates continue to improve as newer vintages are performing within expectations. With the stabilization of certain real estate markets, the Bancorp began to selectively originate new homebuilder and developer lending and nonowner-occupied commercial lending in the third quarter of 2011. Currently, the level of new commercial real estate fundings is slightly above the amortization and pay-off of the portfolio. The Bancorp continues to aggressively engage in other loss mitigation strategies such as reducing credit commitments, restructuring certain commercial and consumer loans, as well as utilizing commercial and consumer loan workout teams. For commercial and consumer loans owned by the Bancorp, loan modification strategies are developed that are workable for both the borrower and the Bancorp when the borrower displays a willingness to cooperate. These strategies typically involve either a reduction of the stated interest rate of the loan, an extension of the loan’s maturity date(s) with a stated rate lower than the current market rate for a new loan with similar risk, or in limited circumstances, a reduction of the principal balance of the loan or the loan’s accrued interest. For residential mortgage loans serviced for FHLMC and FNMA, the Bancorp participates in the HAMP and HARP 2.0 programs. For loans refinanced under the HARP 2.0 program, the Bancorp strictly adheres to the underwriting requirements of the program and promptly sells the refinanced loan back to the agencies. Loan restructuring under the HAMP program is performed on behalf of FHLMC or FNMA and

the Bancorp does not take possession of these loans during the modification process. Therefore, participation in these programs does not significantly impact the Bancorp’s credit quality statistics. The Bancorp participates in trial modifications in conjunction with the HAMP program for loans it services for FHLMC and FNMA. As these trial modifications relate to loans serviced for others, they are not included in the Bancorp’s TDRs as they are not assets of the Bancorp. In the event there is a representation and warranty violation on loans sold through the programs, the Bancorp may be required to repurchase the sold loan. As of December 31, 2014, repurchased loans restructured or refinanced under these programs were immaterial to the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements. Additionally, as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, $22 million and $111 million, respectively, of loans refinanced under HARP 2.0 were included in loans held for sale in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. For the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp recognized $13 million and $97 million, respectively, of noninterest income in mortgage banking net revenue in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Statements of Income related to the sale of loans restructured or refinanced under the HAMP and HARP 2.0 programs.

In the financial services industry, there has been heightened focus on foreclosure activity and processes. The Bancorp actively works with borrowers experiencing difficulties and has regularly modified or provided forbearance to borrowers where a workable solution could be found. Foreclosure is a last resort, and the Bancorp undertakes foreclosures only when it believes they are necessary and appropriate and is careful to ensure that customer and loan data are accurate.

During the fourth quarter of 2013, the Bancorp settled certain repurchase claims related to mortgage loans originated and sold to FHLMC prior to January 1, 2009 for $25 million, after paid claim credits and other adjustments. The settlement removes the Bancorp’s responsibility to repurchase or indemnify FHLMC for representation and warranty violations on any loan sold prior to January 1, 2009 except in limited circumstances.

Commercial Portfolio

The Bancorp’s credit risk management strategy includes minimizing concentrations of risk through diversification. The Bancorp has commercial loan concentration limits based on industry, lines of business within the commercial segment, geography and credit product type.

The risk within the commercial loan and lease portfolio is managed and monitored through an underwriting process utilizing detailed origination policies, continuous loan level reviews, monitoring of industry concentration and product type limits and continuous portfolio risk management reporting. The origination policies for commercial real estate outline the risks and underwriting requirements for owner and nonowner-occupied and construction lending. Included in the policies are maturity and amortization terms, maximum LTVs, minimum debt service coverage ratios, construction loan monitoring procedures, appraisal requirements, pre-leasing requirements (as applicable), sensitivity and pro-forma analysis requirements and interest rate sensitivity. The Bancorp requires a valuation of real estate collateral, which may include third-party appraisals, be performed at the time of origination and renewal in accordance with regulatory requirements and on an as needed basis when market conditions justify. Although the Bancorp does not back test these collateral value assumptions, the Bancorp maintains an appraisal review department to order and review third-party appraisals in accordance with regulatory requirements. Collateral values on criticized assets with relationships exceeding $1 million are reviewed quarterly to assess the appropriateness of the

 

 

59  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

value ascribed in the assessment of charge-offs and specific reserves. In addition, the Bancorp applies incremental valuation adjustments to older appraisals that relate to collateral dependent loans, which can currently be up to 20-30% of the appraised value based on the type of collateral. These incremental valuation adjustments generally reflect the age of the most recent appraisal as well as collateral type. Trends in collateral values, such as home price indices and recent asset dispositions, are monitored in order to determine whether changes to the appraisal adjustments are warranted. Other factors

such as local market conditions or location may also be considered as necessary.

The Bancorp assesses all real estate and non-real estate collateral securing a loan and considers all cross collateralized loans in the calculation of the LTV ratio. The following tables provide detail on the most recent LTV ratios for commercial mortgage loans greater than $1 million, excluding impaired commercial mortgage loans individually evaluated. The Bancorp does not typically aggregate the LTV ratios for commercial mortgage loans less than $1 million.

 

 

TABLE 34: COMMERCIAL MORTGAGE LOANS OUTSTANDING BY LTV, LOANS GREATER THAN $1 MILLION  
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) LTV > 100%   LTV 80-100%   LTV  £  80%  

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

$ 148             248          1,982     

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  243             333          2,423     

Total

$                 391             581          4,405     
TABLE 35: COMMERCIAL MORTGAGE LOANS OUTSTANDING BY LTV, LOANS GREATER THAN $1 MILLION  
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions) LTV > 100%   LTV 80-100%   LTV  £  80%  

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

$ 240             345          2,152     

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  274             353          1,798     

Total

$ 514             698          3,950     

 

60  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The following table provides detail on commercial loan and leases by industry classification (as defined by the North American Industry Classification System), by loan size and by state, illustrating the diversity and granularity of the Bancorp’s commercial loans and leases:

 

TABLE 36: COMMERCIAL LOAN AND LEASE PORTFOLIO (EXCLUDING LOANS HELD FOR SALE)  

 

 
  2014   2013  
    

 

 

 
As of December 31 ($ in millions)                 Outstanding   Exposure   Nonaccrual               Outstanding   Exposure   Nonaccrual    

 

 

By industry:

Manufacturing

  $ 10,315           20,496     55     $ 10,299           19,955     55      

Financial services and insurance

  6,097           13,557     20       5,998           14,010     25      

Real estate

  5,392           8,612     32       5,027           7,302     70      

Business services

  4,644           7,109     79       4,910           7,411     55      

Wholesale trade

  4,314           8,004     62       4,407           8,406     35      

Healthcare

  4,133           6,322     20       4,038           6,220     26      

Retail trade

  3,754           7,190     22       3,301           6,673     18      

Transportation and warehousing

  3,012           4,276     1       3,134           4,416     1      

Communication and information

  2,409           4,140     3       1,801           3,295     2      

Construction

  1,864           3,352     25       1,865           3,196     36      

Mining

  1,862           3,323     3       1,580           3,206     55      

Accommodation and food

  1,712           2,945     9       1,668           2,556     12      

Entertainment and recreation

  1,451           2,321     10       1,149           1,955     12      

Utilities

  1,044           2,551     -        773           2,332     -      

Other services

  881           1,207     11       1,013           1,362     24      

Public administration

  567           658     -        541           734     -      

Agribusiness

  318           444     11       356           504     26      

Individuals

  170           201     4       174           218     6      

Other

  14           17     -        12           12     -       

 

 

Total

  $             53,953           96,725     367     $             52,046           93,763     458      

 

 

By loan size:

Less than $200,000

       1 %             1          6            1 %             1          8      

$200,000 to $1 million

       5                 3          15            5                4          18      

$1 million to $5 million

       11                 9          22            13                10          23      

$5 million to $10 million

       8                 7          19            10                8          10      

$10 million to $25 million

       25                 22          24            27                23          34      

Greater than $25 million

       50                 58          14            44                54          7      

 

 

Total

  100 %        100     100       100 %        100     100      

 

 

By state:

Ohio

       17 %             20          11            19 %             22          16      

Michigan

       9                 8          11            10                8          11      

Illinois

       7                 8          6            7                7          8      

Florida

       7                 6          17            7                6          19      

Indiana

       5                 5          5            5                5          9      

Kentucky

       3                 3          2            3                3          2      

North Carolina

       3                 4          2            3                3          1      

Tennessee

       3                 3          -             3                3          1      

Pennsylvania

       3                 2          7            3                3          7      

All other states

       43                 41          39            40                40          26      

 

 

Total

  100 %        100     100       100 %        100     100      

 

 

 

The Bancorp has identified certain categories of loans which it believes represent a higher level of risk compared to the rest of the

Bancorp’s commercial loan portfolio, due to economic or market conditions within the Bancorp’s key lending areas.

 

 

61  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The following tables provide an analysis of nonowner-occupied commercial real estate loans (excluding loans held for sale):

 

TABLE 37: NONOWNER-OCCUPIED COMMERCIAL REAL ESTATE (a)  
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)                     For the Year Ended 
December 31, 2014 
 
By State: Outstanding   Exposure   90 Days
Past Due
  Nonaccrual   Net Charge-offs
(Recoveries)
 

Ohio

$ 1,283             1,685               -        7         (1

Michigan

  724             797               -        9         8  

Florida

  575             871               -            16         5  

Illinois

  449             964               -        6         2  

North Carolina

  369             537               -        -          -   

Indiana

  250             344               -        -          -   

All other states

  1,865             3,560               -        19         4  

Total

$           5,515             8,758               -        57               18  

(a)     Included in commercial mortgage and commercial construction loans on the Consolidated Balance Sheets.

        

TABLE 38: NONOWNER-OCCUPIED COMMERCIAL REAL ESTATE (a)  
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)   For the Year Ended
December 31, 2013
 
By State: Outstanding   Exposure   90 Days
Past Due
  Nonaccrual   Net Charge-offs  

Ohio

$ 1,086               1,377               -        14         12  

Michigan

  851               925               -        17         5  

Florida

  508               629               -        7         3  

Illinois

  353               593               -        6         4  

North Carolina

  248               428               -        2         1  

Indiana

  161               253               -        4         1  

All other states

  1,270               2,173               -        7         1  

Total

$ 4,477               6,378               -        57               27  
(a)

Included in commercial mortgage and commercial construction loans on the Consolidated Balance Sheets.

 

62  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Consumer Portfolio

The Bancorp’s consumer portfolio is materially comprised of three categories of loans: residential mortgage, home equity and automobile. The Bancorp has identified certain categories within these loan types which it believes represent a higher level of risk compared to the rest of the consumer loan portfolio due to high loan amount to collateral value. The Bancorp does not update LTV ratios for the consumer portfolio subsequent to origination except as part of the charge-off process for real estate secured loans.

Residential Mortgage Portfolio

The Bancorp manages credit risk in the residential mortgage portfolio through conservative underwriting and documentation standards and geographic and product diversification. The Bancorp may also package and sell loans in the portfolio.

The Bancorp does not originate mortgage loans that permit customers to defer principal payments or make payments that are

less than the accruing interest. The Bancorp originates both fixed and adjustable rate residential mortgage loans. Resets of rates on ARMs are not expected to have a material impact on credit costs in the current interest rate environment, as approximately $900 million of adjustable rate residential mortgage loans will have rate resets during the next twelve months. Approximately three fourths of those resets are expected to experience an increase in rate, with an average increase of approximately an eighth of a percent.

Certain residential mortgage products have contractual features that may increase credit exposure to the Bancorp in the event of a decline in housing values. These types of mortgage products offered by the Bancorp include loans with high LTV ratios, multiple loans on the same collateral that when combined result in a LTV greater than 80% and interest-only loans. The Bancorp has deemed residential mortgage loans with greater than 80% LTV ratios and no mortgage insurance as loans that represent a higher level of risk.

 

 

The following table provides an analysis of the residential mortgage portfolio loans outstanding by LTV at origination:

 

TABLE 39: RESIDENTIAL MORTGAGE PORTFOLIO LOANS BY LTV AT ORIGINATION  

 

 
  2014   2013  
As of December 31 ($ in millions) Outstanding   Weighted
Average LTV
  Outstanding   Weighted      
Average LTV      
 

 

 

LTV £ 80%

$ 9,220                 65.1  %  $ 9,507                 65.2 %   

LTV > 80%, with mortgage insurance

  1,206                 93.8     1,242                 93.7      

LTV > 80%, no mortgage insurance

  1,963                 96.2     1,931                 95.9      

 

 

Total

$         12,389                 73.0  %  $         12,680                 72.7 %   

 

 

The following tables provide an analysis of the residential mortgage portfolio loans outstanding with a greater than 80% LTV ratio and no mortgage insurance:

 

TABLE 40: RESIDENTIAL MORTGAGE PORTFOLIO LOANS, LTV GREATER THAN 80%, NO MORTGAGE INSURANCE
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) For the Year Ended  
December 31, 2014  
By State: Outstanding 90 Days
Past Due
Nonaccrual Net Charge-offs     

Ohio

  $ 509                     1       10         22  

Illinois

    293                     1       4         3  

Michigan

    265                     1       5         11  

Florida

    247                     1       5         3  

Indiana

    126                     1       2         3  

North Carolina

    100                     1       1         -  

Kentucky

    78                     -       1         2  

All other states

    345                     -       2         2  

Total

  $             1,963                     6       30         46 (a)
(a)

Includes $34 in charge-offs related to the transfer of $720 of restructured residential mortgage loans from the portfolio to loans held for sale during the fourth quarter of 2014.

 

63  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 41: RESIDENTIAL MORTGAGE PORTFOLIO LOANS, LTV GREATER THAN 80%, NO MORTGAGE INSURANCE
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)          For the Year Ended  
December 31, 2013  
By State: Outstanding 90 Days
Past Due
Nonaccrual Net Charge-offs

Ohio

  $ 583                       3         20             10  

Illinois

    236                   -       5       2  

Michigan

    305                   2       7       5  

Florida

    260                   1       11       3  

Indiana

    120                   1       4       1  

North Carolina

    94                   -       2       -  

Kentucky

    83                   -       3       2  

All other states

    250                   1       2       1  

Total

  $             1,931                    8       54       24  

 

Home Equity Portfolio

The Bancorp’s home equity portfolio is primarily comprised of home equity lines of credit. Beginning in the first quarter of 2013, the Bancorp’s newly originated home equity lines of credit have a 10-year interest only draw period followed by a 20-year amortization period. The home equity line of credit previously offered by the Bancorp was a revolving facility with a 20-year term, minimum payments of interest only and a balloon payment of principal at maturity.

The ALLL provides coverage for probable and estimable losses in the home equity portfolio. The allowance attributable to the portion of the home equity portfolio that has not been restructured in a TDR is calculated on a pooled basis with senior lien and junior lien categories segmented in the determination of the probable credit losses in the home equity portfolio. The modeled loss factor for the home equity portfolio is based on the trailing twelve month historical loss rate for each category, as adjusted for certain prescriptive loss rate factors and certain qualitative adjustment factors to reflect risks associated with current conditions and trends. The prescriptive loss rate factors include adjustments for delinquency trends, LTV trends, refreshed FICO score trends and product mix. The qualitative factors include adjustments for credit administration and portfolio management, credit policy and underwriting and the national and local economy. The Bancorp considers home price index trends when determining the national and local economy qualitative factor.

The home equity portfolio is managed in two primary groups: loans outstanding with a combined LTV greater than 80% and those loans with a LTV 80% or less based upon appraisals at origination. The carrying value of the greater than 80% LTV home equity loans and 80% or less LTV home equity loans were $3.0 billion and $5.9 billion, respectively, as of December 31, 2014. Of the total $8.9 billion of outstanding home equity loans:

   

84% reside within the Bancorp’s Midwest footprint of Ohio, Michigan, Kentucky, Indiana and Illinois;

   

34% are in senior lien positions and 66% are in junior lien positions at December 31, 2014;

   

Approximately 90% of non-delinquent borrowers made at least one payment greater than the minimum payment during the year ended December 31, 2014; and

   

The portfolio had an average refreshed FICO score of 740 and 736 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

The Bancorp actively manages lines of credit and makes reductions in lending limits when it believes it is necessary based on FICO score deterioration and property devaluation. The Bancorp does not routinely obtain appraisals on performing loans to update LTV ratios after origination. However, the Bancorp monitors the local housing markets by reviewing various home price indices and incorporates the impact of the changing market conditions in its on-going credit monitoring processes. For junior lien home equity loans which become 60 days or more past due, the Bancorp tracks the performance of the senior lien loans in which the Bancorp is the servicer and utilizes consumer credit bureau attributes to monitor the status of the senior lien loans that the Bancorp does not service. If the senior lien loan is found to be 120 days or more past due, the junior lien home equity loan is placed on nonaccrual status unless both loans are well-secured and in the process of collection. Additionally, if the junior lien home equity loan becomes 120 days or more past due and the senior lien loan is also 120 days or more past due, the junior lien home equity loan is assessed for charge-off, unless it is well-secured and in the process of collection. Refer to the Analysis of Nonperforming Assets section of MD&A for more information.

 

 

64  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The following table provides an analysis of home equity loans outstanding disaggregated based upon refreshed FICO score as of:

 

TABLE 42: HOME EQUITY PORTFOLIO LOANS OUTSTANDING BY REFRESHED FICO SCORE  
($ in millions) December 31, 2014   % of
Total
  December 31, 2013   % of
Total
 

Senior Liens:

FICO < 620

$ 178     2  %  $ 201     2  %   

FICO 621-719

  613     7     638     7  

FICO > 720

  2,257     25     2,253     24  

Total Senior Liens

  3,048     34     3,092     33  

Junior Liens:

FICO < 620

  471     6     565     6  

FICO 621-719

  1,542     17     1,662     18  

FICO > 720

  3,825     43     3,927     43  

Total Junior Liens

  5,838     66     6,154     67  

Total

$ 8,886     100  %  $ 9,246     100  %   

The Bancorp believes that home equity loans with a greater than 80% combined LTV ratio present a higher level of risk. The following table provides an analysis of the home equity loans outstanding in a senior and junior lien position by LTV at origination:

 

TABLE 43: HOME EQUITY PORTFOLIO LOANS OUTSTANDING BY LTV AT ORIGINATION  

 

 
  2014   2013  
As of December 31 ($ in millions) Outstanding   Weighted
  Average LTV  
  Outstanding   Weighted
      Average LTV      
 

 

 

Senior Liens:

LTV £ 80%

$             2,635             55.2  %  $             2,645             54.9 %   

LTV > 80%

  413             89.1     447             89.2      

 

 

Total Senior Liens

  3,048             60.0     3,092             60.1      

Junior Liens:

LTV £ 80%

  3,281             67.4     3,353             67.3      

LTV > 80%

  2,557             91.1     2,801             91.4      

 

 

Total Junior Liens

  5,838             79.6     6,154             80.2      

 

 

Total

$ 8,886             72.4  %  $ 9,246             72.9 %   

 

 

The following tables provide an analysis of home equity loans by state with a combined LTV greater than 80%:

 

TABLE 44: HOME EQUITY PORTFOLIO LOANS OUTSTANDING WITH A LTV GREATER THAN 80%
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)             For the Year Ended  
December 31, 2014  
By State: Outstanding Exposure 90 Days
Past Due
Nonaccrual Net Charge-offs

Ohio

  $           1,123                 1,838       -       9       9  

Michigan

    613               882       -       7       8  

Illinois

    346               507       -       6       6  

Indiana

    260               404       -       4       3  

Kentucky

    246               390       -       3       3  

Florida

    107               143       -       2       2  

All other states

    275               376       -       5       4  

Total

  $ 2,970               4,540           -         36             35  

 

65  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 45: HOME EQUITY PORTFOLIO LOANS OUTSTANDING WITH A LTV GREATER THAN 80%
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)             For the Year Ended  
December 31, 2013  
By State:     Outstanding Exposure 90 Days
Past Due
Nonaccrual Net Charge-offs

Ohio

  $             1,161             1,868           -         10           18  

Michigan

    697             987       -       7       14  

Illinois

    383             554       -       6       9  

Indiana

    296             454       -       3       4  

Kentucky

    278             436       -       2       3  

Florida

    116             157       -       3       4  

All other states

    317             425       -       4       7  

Total

  $ 3,248             4,881       -       35       59  

 

Automobile Portfolio

The automobile portfolio is characterized by direct and indirect lending products to consumers. As of December 31, 2014, 51% of the automobile loan portfolio is comprised of loans collateralized by

new automobiles. It is a common practice to advance on automobile loans an amount in excess of the automobile value due to the inclusion of taxes, title and other fees paid at closing. The Bancorp monitors its exposure to these higher risk loans.

 

 

The following table provides an analysis of automobile loans outstanding by LTV at origination:

 

TABLE 46: AUTOMOBILE PORTFOLIO LOANS OUTSTANDING BY LTV AT ORIGINATION  

 

 
  2014   2013  
As of December 31 ($ in millions) Outstanding   Weighted
  Average LTV  
  Outstanding   Weighted
      Average LTV      
 

 

 

LTV £ 100%

$ 8,212           81.6  %  $ 8,306           81.4 %   

LTV > 100%

  3,825           111.0     3,678           110.7      

 

 

Total

$       12,037           91.3  %  $             11,984           90.7 %   

 

 

The following table provides an analysis of the Bancorp’s automobile loans with a LTV at origination greater than 100%:

 

TABLE 47: AUTOMOBILE PORTFOLIO LOANS OUTSTANDING WITH A LTV GREATER THAN 100%  
As of ($ in millions)  
         Outstanding         90 Days Past
Due and Accruing
       Nonaccrual        Net Charge-offs for the
Year Ended
 

December 31, 2014

$                 3,825     5      1      16   

December 31, 2013

  3,678     5     1     14  

 

European Exposure

The Bancorp has no direct sovereign exposure to any European government as of December 31, 2014. In providing services to our customers, the Bancorp routinely enters into financial transactions with foreign domiciled and U.S. subsidiaries of foreign businesses as well as foreign financial institutions. These financial transactions are in the form of loans, loan commitments, letters of credit, derivatives

and securities. The Bancorp’s risk appetite for foreign country exposure is managed by having established country exposure limits. The Bancorp’s total exposure to European domiciled or owned businesses and European financial institutions was $4.4 billion and funded exposure was $2.3 billion as of December 31, 2014. Additionally, the Bancorp was within its established country exposure limits for all European countries.

 

 

The following table provides detail about the Bancorp’s exposure to all European domiciled and owned businesses and financial institutions as of December 31, 2014:

 

TABLE 48: EUROPEAN EXPOSURE  
    Sovereigns   Financial Institutions   Non-Financial
Institutions
  Total  
($ in millions)    Total
Exposure
  Funded
Exposure
  Total
Exposure
  Funded
Exposure
  Total
Exposure
  Funded
Exposure
  Total      
Exposure    (a)
  Funded
 Exposure 
 

Peripheral Europe (b)

$   -      -     -       -       162     91     162           91  

Other Eurozone (c)

  -     -     11     11       3,145     1,682     3,156           1,693  

Total Eurozone

  -     -     11     11     3,307     1,773     3,318           1,784  

Other Europe (d)

  -     -     30     25     1,052     510     1,082           535  

Total Europe

$   -      -     41     36     4,359     2,283      4,400   (e)      2,319  
(a)

Total exposure includes funded exposure and unfunded commitments, reported net of collateral.

(b)

Peripheral Europe includes Greece, Ireland, Italy, Portugal and Spain.

(c)

Eurozone includes countries participating in the European common currency (Euro).

(d)

Other Europe includes European countries not part of the Eurozone (primarily the United Kingdom and Switzerland).

(e)

Includes $1,778 related to U.S. based customers owned by European entities.

 

66  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Analysis of Nonperforming Assets

Nonperforming assets include nonaccrual loans and leases for which ultimate collectability of the full amount of the principal and/or interest is uncertain; restructured commercial and credit card loans which have not yet met the requirements to be classified as a performing asset; restructured consumer loans which are 90 days past due based on the restructured terms unless the loan is both well-secured and in the process of collection; and certain other assets, including OREO and other repossessed property. A summary of nonperforming assets is included in Table 49. For further information on the Bancorp’s policies related to accounting for delinquent and nonperforming loans refer to the Nonaccrual Loans and Leases section of Note 1 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Total nonperforming assets, including loans held for sale, were $783 million at December 31 2014 compared to $986 million at December 31, 2013. At December 31, 2014, $39 million of nonaccrual loans, consisting primarily of real estate secured loans, were held for sale, compared to $6 million at December 31, 2013.

Total nonperforming assets, including loans held for sale, as a percentage of total loans, leases and other assets, including OREO as of December 31, 2014 were 0.86%, compared to 1.10% as of December 31, 2013. Excluding nonaccrual loans held for sale, nonperforming assets as a percentage of portfolio loans, leases and other assets, including OREO were 0.82% as of December 31, 2014, compared to 1.10% as of December 31, 2013. The composition of nonaccrual loans and leases continues to be concentrated in real estate as 50% of nonaccrual loans and leases were secured by real estate as of December 31, 2014 compared to 60% as of December 31, 2013.

Commercial nonperforming loans and leases were $391 million at December 31, 2014, a decrease of $73 million from December 31, 2013 as charge-offs, loan paydowns/payoffs, loan transfers to performing and loans sold from the portfolio outpaced new nonaccruals. Excluding commercial nonperforming loans and leases held for sale, commercial nonperforming loans and leases at December 31, 2014 decreased $91 million compared to December 31, 2013.

Consumer nonperforming loans and leases were $227 million at December 31, 2014, a decrease of $66 million from December 31, 2013 as loan pay downs/payoffs, charge-offs and transfers to performing and OREO outpaced new nonaccrual loans. Excluding consumer nonperforming loans and leases held for sale, consumer nonperforming loans and leases at December 31, 2014 decreased $81 million compared to December 31, 2013. Geographical market conditions continue to be a large driver of nonaccrual activity as Florida properties represent approximately 11% and seven percent of residential mortgage and home equity balances, respectively, but represent 32% and 15% of nonaccrual loans for each category at December 31, 2014. Refer to Table 50 for a rollforward of the nonperforming loans and leases.

OREO and other repossessed property was $165 million at December 31, 2014, compared to $229 million at December 31, 2013. The Bancorp recognized $26 million and $45 million in losses on the sale or write-down of OREO properties in 2014 and 2013, respectively. The decrease from the prior year was primarily due to a modest improvement in general economic conditions.

In 2014 and 2013, approximately $49 million and $71 million, respectively, of interest income would have been recognized if the nonaccrual and renegotiated loans and leases on nonaccrual status had been current in accordance with their original terms. Although these values help demonstrate the costs of carrying nonaccrual credits, the Bancorp does not expect to recover the full amount of

interest as nonaccrual loans and leases are generally carried below their principal balance.

 

 

67  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 49: SUMMARY OF NONPERFORMING ASSETS AND DELINQUENT LOANS  
As of December 31 ($ in millions) 2014       2013     2012     2011     2010       

Nonaccrual loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 86     127     234     408     473      

Commercial mortgage loans

  64     90     215     358     407      

Commercial construction loans

  -     10     70     123     182      

Commercial leases

  3     3     1     9     11      

Residential mortgage loans

  44     83     114     134     152      

Home equity

  72     74     30     25     23      

Automobile loans

  -      -      -      -      1      

Other consumer loans and leases

  -      -      1     1     84      

Restructured loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

  142     154     96     79     95      

Commercial mortgage loans (e)

  71     53     67     63     28      

Commercial construction loans

  -      19     6     15     10      

Commercial leases

  1     2     8     3     8      

Residential mortgage loans

  33     83     123     141     116      

Home equity

  21     19     23     29     33      

Automobile loans

  1     1     2     2     2      

Credit card and other

  41     33     39     48     55      

Total nonperforming portfolio loans and leases (d)

  579     751     1,029     1,438     1,680      

OREO and other repossessed property (c)

  165     229     257     378     494      

Total nonperforming portfolio assets

  744     980     1,286     1,816     2,174      

Nonaccrual loans held for sale

  39     6     29     138     294      

Total nonperforming assets including loans held for sale

$                 783     986     1,315     1,954     2,468      

Loans and leases 90 days past due and accruing:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ -      -      1     4     16      

Commercial mortgage loans

  -      -      22     3     11      

Commercial construction loans

  -      -      1     1     3      

Residential mortgage loans (b)

  56     66     75     79     100      

Home equity

  -      -      58     74     89      

Automobile loans

  8     8     8     9     13      

Credit card and other

  23     29     30     30     42      

Total loans and leases 90 days past due and accruing

$ 87     103     195     200     274      

Nonperforming assets as a percent of portfolio loans, leases and other assets, including OREO (a)

  0.82  %    1.10     1.49     2.23     2.79      

Allowance for loan and lease losses as a percent of nonperforming assets (a)

  178     161     144     124     138      
(a)

Excludes nonaccrual loans held for sale.

(b)

Information for all periods presented excludes loans whose repayments are insured by the FHA or guaranteed by the VA. As of December 31, 2014 , 2013, 2012, 2011, and 2010 these advances were $373 , $378, $414, $309 and $279, respectively. The Bancorp recognized losses of $13 for the year ended December 31, 2014, $5 for 2013 and $2 for 2012 due to claim denials and curtailments associated with these advances.

(c)

Excludes $71 , $77, $72, $64 and $38 of OREO related to government insured loans at December 31, 2014 , 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

(d)

Includes $9 , $10, $10, $17 and $24 of nonaccrual government insured commercial loans whose repayments are insured by the SBA at December 31, 2014 , 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively, and $4, $2, $1, $2, and $0 of restructured nonaccrual government insured commercial loans at December 31, 2014 , 2013, 2012, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

(e)

Excludes $21 of restructured nonaccrual loans at December 31, 2014 and 2013 associated with a consolidated VIE in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party.

 

68  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The following table provides a rollforward of portfolio nonperforming loans and leases, by portfolio segment:

 

TABLE 50: ROLLFORWARD OF PORTFOLIO NONPERFORMING LOANS AND LEASES  
For the year ended December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) Commercial    Residential
Mortgage
  Consumer    Total          

Beginning Balance

$ 458     166     127   $ 751             

Transfers to nonperforming

  520     135     219     874             

Transfers to performing

  (22   (39   (42   (103)             

Transfers to performing (restructured)

  (49   (40   (46   (135)             

Transfers to held for sale

  (4   (24   -        (28)             

Loans sold from portfolio

  (43   -        -        (43)             

Loan paydowns/payoffs

  (181   (41   (9   (231)             

Transfers to other real estate owned

  (41   (67   (22   (130)             

Charge-offs

  (279   (13   (92   (384)             

Draws/other extensions of credit

  8     -        -        8             

Ending Balance

$                     367     77     135   $ 579             

    

                                

For the year ended December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)

                       

Beginning Balance

$ 697     237     95   $     1,029             

Transfers to nonperforming

  409     204     297     910             

Transfers to performing

  (9   (52   (60   (121)             

Transfers to performing (restructured)

  (15   (41   (62   (118)             

Transfers to held for sale

  (3   -        -        (3)             

Loans sold from portfolio

  (38   -        -        (38)             

Loan paydowns/payoffs

  (295   (112   (11   (418)             

Transfers to other real estate owned

  (81   (73   (13   (167)             

Charge-offs (recoveries)

  (221   3     (122   (340)             

Draws/other extensions of credit

  14     -        3     17             

Ending Balance

$ 458     166     127   $ 751             

 

Troubled Debt Restructurings

If a borrower is experiencing financial difficulty, the Bancorp may consider, in certain circumstances, modifying the terms of their loan to maximize collection of amounts due. Typically, these modifications reduce the loan interest rate, extend the loan term, reduce the accrued interest or in limited circumstances, reduce the principal balance of the loan. These modifications are classified as TDRs.

At the time of modification, the Bancorp maintains certain consumer loan TDRs (including residential mortgage loans, home equity loans, and other consumer loans) on accrual status, provided there is reasonable assurance of repayment and performance according to the modified terms based upon a current, well-documented credit evaluation. Commercial loans modified as part of a TDR are maintained on accrual status provided there is a sustained payment history of six months or greater prior to the

modification in accordance with the modified terms and all remaining contractual payments under the modified terms are reasonably assured of collection. TDRs of commercial loans and credit card loans that do not have a sustained payment history of six months or greater in accordance with the modified terms remain on nonaccrual status until a six month payment history is sustained.

Consumer restructured loans on accrual status totaled $905 million and $1.7 billion at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, respectively. The decrease from the prior year was primarily due to the transfer of $720 million of restructured residential mortgage loans from the portfolio to loans held for sale during the fourth quarter of 2014. As a result of the transfer, the Bancorp recognized a charge-off of $87 million in 2014. As of December 31, 2014, the percentage of restructured residential mortgage loans, home equity loans, and credit card loans that are past due 30 days or more were 40%, 12% and 33%, respectively.

 

The following tables summarize TDRs by loan type and delinquency status:

 

TABLE 51: PERFORMING AND NONPERFORMING TDRs                               
    Performing             
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)    Current    30-89 Days
Past Due
  90 Days or
More Past Due
     Nonaccrual   Total         

Commercial loans (b)(c)

$   867     2         -             214       $ 1,083      

Residential mortgage loans (a)(c)

  312     54         119             33         518      

Home equity

  337     23         -              21         381      

Credit card

  31     6         -              41         78      

Automobile and other consumer loans and leases

  22     1         -              1         24      

Total

$   1,569     86         119               310       $         2,084      
(a)

Information includes advances made pursuant to servicing agreements for GNMA mortgage pools whose repayments are insured by the FHA or guaranteed by the VA. As of December 31, 2014 , these advances represented $165 of current loans, $42 of 30-89 days past due loans and $102 of 90 days or more past due loans.

(b)

As of December 31, 2014 , excludes $7 of restructured accruing loans and $21 of restructured nonaccrual loans associated with a consolidated VIE in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party.

(c)

Excludes restructured nonaccrual loans held for sale.

 

69  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 52: PERFORMING AND NONPERFORMING TDRs  

 

 
      Performing        
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)      Current        30-89 Days    
Past Due      
  90 Days or
More Past Due
     Nonaccrual   Total       

Commercial loans (b)(c)

      869     -              -              228       $ 1,097    

Residential mortgage loans (a)

  1,045     82              114             84         1,325    

Home equity

  368     26              -              18         412    

Credit card

  25     -              -              33         58    

Automobile and other consumer loans and leases

  24     1              -              1         26    

Total

                  2,331     109              114               364       $           2,918    
(a)

Information includes loans whose repayments are insured by the FHA or guaranteed by the VA. As of December 31, 2013, these loans represented $155 of current loans, $31 of 30-89 days past due loans and $88 of 90 days or more past due loans.

(b)

As of December 31, 2013, excludes $8 of restructured accruing loans and $21 of restructured nonaccrual loans associated with a consolidated VIE in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party.

(c)

Excludes restructured nonaccrual loans held for sale.

 

Analysis of Net Loan Charge-offs

Net charge-offs were 64 bps and 58 bps of average portfolio loans and leases for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Table 53 provides a summary of credit loss experience and net charge-offs as a percentage of average portfolio loans and leases outstanding by loan category.

The ratio of commercial loan and lease net charge-offs to average portfolio commercial loans and leases increased to 48 bps during 2014 compared to 44 bps in 2013, as a result of increases in net charge-offs of $41 million partially offset by an increase in average commercial loan and lease balances of $3.4 billion. The increase in net charge-offs during 2014 was driven primarily by an increase in charge-offs on certain commercial and industrial loans, primarily due to $96 million in aggregate net charge-offs related to six impaired commercial and industrial loans in the first and third quarters of 2014. The increases in commercial and industrial loan and commercial construction loan net charge-offs during 2014 were partially offset by a decrease in commercial mortgage loan net charge-offs, compared to 2013, due to improvements in general economic conditions and previous actions taken by the Bancorp to address problem loans. Net charge-offs for 2014 related to nonowner-occupied commercial real estate were $18 million compared to $27 million in 2013. Net charge-offs related to nonowner-occupied commercial real estate are recorded in the commercial mortgage loans and commercial construction loans captions in Table 53. Net charge-offs on these loans represented seven percent of total commercial loan and lease net charge-offs in 2014 and 12% in 2013.

The ratio of consumer loan and lease net charge-offs to average consumer loans and leases increased to 86 bps in 2014 compared to 77 bps in 2013. Net charge-offs on residential mortgage loans, which typically involve partial charge-offs based upon appraised values of underlying collateral, increased $66 million from the prior year. The increase in net charge-offs on residential mortgage loans was primarily due to an $87 million charge-off related to the transfer of certain residential mortgage loans from the portfolio to held for sale in the fourth quarter of 2014, partially offset by improvements in delinquencies and loss severities. The Bancorp expects the composition of the residential mortgage portfolio to improve as it continues to retain high quality, shorter duration residential mortgage loans that are originated through its branch network as a low-cost, refinance product of conforming residential mortgage loans.

Home equity net charge-offs decreased $38 million compared to the prior year, primarily due to improvements in loss severities. In addition, management actively manages lines of credit and makes reductions in lending limits when it believes it is necessary based on FICO score deterioration and property devaluation.

Automobile loan net charge-offs increased $5 million compared to 2013 due to increased delinquencies and losses in the indirect portfolio. Credit card net charge-offs increased $4 million from 2013. The Bancorp utilizes a risk-adjusted pricing methodology to ensure adequate compensation is received for those products that have higher credit costs.

 

 

70  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 53: SUMMARY OF CREDIT LOSS EXPERIENCE                                                
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014          2013          2012          2011          2010            

Losses charged-off:

Commercial and industrial loans

$           (248   (207   (194   (314   (631

Commercial mortgage loans

  (37   (66   (120   (211   (541

Commercial construction loans

  (13   (9   (34   (89   (265

Commercial leases

  (1   (2   (10   (1   (7

Residential mortgage loans

  (139   (70   (129   (180             (441

Home equity

  (75   (114   (172   (234   (276

Automobile loans

  (44   (44   (55   (85   (132

Credit card

  (95             (92             (90             (114   (164

Other consumer loans and leases

  (27         (33         (33         (86         (28  

Total losses

  (679   (637   (837   (1,314   (2,485

Recoveries of losses previously charged-off:

Commercial and industrial loans

  26     39     29     38     45   

Commercial mortgage loans

  11     19     21     16     17   

Commercial construction loans

  1     5     9     4     13   

Commercial leases

  -      1     2     3     5   

Residential mortgage loans

  13     10     7     7     2   

Home equity

  16     17     15     14     12   

Automobile loans

  17     22     24     32     44   

Credit card

  13     14     16     16     9   

Other consumer loans and leases

  7           9           10           12           10     

Total recoveries

  104     136     133     142     157   

Net losses charged-off:

Commercial and industrial loans

  (222   (168   (165   (276   (586

Commercial mortgage loans

  (26   (47   (99   (195   (524

Commercial construction loans

  (12   (4   (25   (85   (252

Commercial leases

  (1   (1   (8   2     (2

Residential mortgage loans

  (126   (60   (122   (173   (439

Home equity

  (59   (97   (157   (220   (264

Automobile loans

  (27   (22   (31   (53   (88

Credit card

  (82   (78   (74   (98   (155

Other consumer loans and leases

  (20         (24         (23         (74         (18  

Total net losses charged-off

$ (575         (501         (704         (1,172         (2,328  

Net charge-offs as a percent of average loans and leases (excluding held for sale):

Commercial and industrial loans

  0.54  %    0.44     0.50     0.97     2.23   

Commercial mortgage loans

  0.34     0.56     1.02     1.89     4.58   

Commercial construction loans

  0.79     0.51     3.08     4.96     8.48   

Commercial leases

  0.01     0.04     0.22     (0.08   0.05   

Total commercial loans

  0.48           0.44           0.63           1.26           3.10     

Residential mortgage loans

  0.99     0.48     1.07     1.75     5.49   

Home equity

  0.65     1.02     1.51     1.97     2.20   

Automobile loans

  0.22     0.18     0.26     0.47     0.85   

Credit card

  3.60     3.67     3.79     5.19     8.28   

Other consumer loans and leases

  5.80     6.71     7.02     15.29     2.58   

Total consumer loans and leases

  0.86           0.77           1.13           1.79           2.92     

Total net losses charged-off

  0.64  %          0.58           0.85           1.49           3.02    

 

Allowance for Credit Losses

The allowance for credit losses is comprised of the ALLL and the reserve for unfunded commitments. The ALLL provides coverage for probable and estimable losses in the loan and lease portfolio. The Bancorp evaluates the ALLL each quarter to determine its adequacy to cover inherent losses. Several factors are taken into consideration in the determination of the overall ALLL, including an unallocated component. These factors include, but are not limited to, the overall risk profile of the loan and lease portfolios, net charge-off experience, the extent of impaired loans and leases, the level of nonaccrual loans and leases, the level of 90 days past due loans and leases and the overall level of the ALLL as a percentage of loans. The Bancorp also considers overall asset quality trends, credit administration and portfolio management practices, risk identification practices, credit policy and underwriting practices,

overall portfolio growth, portfolio concentrations and current national and local economic conditions that might impact the portfolio. Refer to the Critical Accounting Policies section of MD&A for more information.

In 2014, the Bancorp did not substantively change any material aspect of its overall approach in the determination of the ALLL and there have been no material changes in assumptions or estimation techniques as compared to prior periods that impacted the determination of the current period allowance. In addition to the ALLL, the Bancorp maintains a reserve for unfunded commitments recorded in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The methodology used to determine the adequacy of this reserve is similar to the Bancorp’s methodology for determining the ALLL. The provision for unfunded commitments is included in other noninterest expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

 

 

71  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The ALLL attributable to the portion of the residential mortgage and consumer loan and lease portfolio that has not been restructured is determined on a pooled basis with the segmentation based on the similarity of credit risk characteristics. Loss factors for real estate backed consumer loans are developed for each pool based on the trailing twelve month historical loss rate, as adjusted for certain prescriptive loss rate factors and certain qualitative adjustment factors. The prescriptive loss rate factors and qualitative adjustments are designed to reflect risks associated with current conditions and trends which are not believed to be fully reflected in the trailing twelve month historical loss rate. For real estate backed consumer loans, the prescriptive loss rate factors include adjustments for delinquency trends, LTV trends, refreshed FICO score trends and product mix, and the qualitative factors include adjustments for credit administration and portfolio management practices, credit policy and underwriting practices and the national and local economy. The Bancorp considers home price index trends in its footprint when determining the national and local economy qualitative factor. The Bancorp also considers the volatility of collateral valuation trends when determining the unallocated component of the ALLL.

The Bancorp’s determination of the ALLL for commercial loans is sensitive to the risk grades it assigns to these loans. In the event that 10% of commercial loans in each risk category would experience a downgrade of one risk category, the allowance for commercial loans would increase by approximately $162 million at December 31, 2014. In addition, the Bancorp’s determination of the allowance for residential and consumer loans is sensitive to changes in estimated loss rates. In the event that estimated loss rates would increase by 10%, the allowance for residential and consumer loans would increase by approximately $34 million at December 31, 2014. As several qualitative and quantitative factors are considered in determining the ALLL, these sensitivity analyses do not necessarily reflect the nature and extent of future changes in the ALLL. They are intended to provide insights into the impact of adverse changes to risk grades and estimated loss rates and do not imply any expectation of future deterioration in the risk ratings or loss rates. Given current processes employed by the Bancorp, management believes the risk grades and estimated loss rates currently assigned are appropriate.

 
TABLE 54: CHANGES IN ALLOWANCE FOR CREDIT LOSSES                                             
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014            2013           2012           2011            2010           

ALLL:

Balance, beginning of period

$              1,582     1,854     2,255     3,004     3,749       

Impact of change in accounting principle

  -        -        -        -        45       

Losses charged-off

  (679   (637   (837   (1,314   (2,485)      

Recoveries of losses previously charged-off

  104     136     133     142     157       

Provision for loan and lease losses

  315           229           303           423           1,538       

Balance, end of period

$ 1,322               1,582               1,854               2,255               3,004       

Reserve for unfunded commitments:

Balance, beginning of period

$ 162     179     181     227     294       

Impact of change in accounting principle

  -        -        -        -        (43)       

Benefit from the reserve for unfunded commitments

  (27         (17         (2         (46         (24)       

Balance, end of period

$ 135           162           179           181           227       

 

Certain inherent, but unconfirmed losses are probable within the loan and lease portfolio. The Bancorp’s current methodology for determining the level of losses is based on historical loss rates, current credit grades, specific allocation on impaired commercial credits above specified thresholds and restructured loans and other qualitative adjustments. Due to the heavy reliance on realized historical losses and the credit grade rating process, the model-derived estimate of ALLL tends to slightly lag behind the deterioration in the portfolio, in a stable or deteriorating credit environment, and tend not to be as responsive when improved conditions have presented themselves. Given these model limitations, the qualitative adjustment factors may be incremental or decremental to the quantitative model results.

An unallocated component to the ALLL is maintained to recognize the imprecision in estimating and measuring loss. The unallocated allowance as a percent of total portfolio loans and leases at both December 31, 2014 and 2013 was 0.12%. The unallocated allowance was eight percent of the total allowance as of December 31, 2014 compared to seven percent as of December 31, 2013.

As shown in Table 55, the ALLL as a percent of portfolio loans and leases was 1.47% at December 31, 2014, compared to 1.79% at December 31, 2013. The ALLL was $1.3 billion as of December 31, 2014, compared to $1.6 billion at December 31, 2013. The decrease was reflective of decreases in nonperforming loans and leases and improved delinquency metrics in commercial and consumer loans and leases.

 

 

72  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

TABLE 55: ATTRIBUTION OF ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN AND LEASE LOSSES TO PORTFOLIO LOANS AND LEASES  
As of December 31 ($ in millions) 2014      2013      2012      2011      2010           

Allowance attributed to:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 673     767     802     929     1,123        

Commercial mortgage loans

  140     212     333     441     597        

Commercial construction loans

  17     26     33     77     158        

Commercial leases

  45     53     68     80     111        

Residential mortgage loans

  104     189     229     227     310        

Home equity

  87     94     143     195     265        

Automobile loans

  33     23     28     43     73        

Credit card

  104     92     87     106     158        

Other consumer loans and leases

  13     16     20     21     59        

Unallocated

  106     110       111       136       150        

Total ALLL

$ 1,322     1,582       1,854       2,255       3,004        

Portfolio loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 40,765     39,316     36,038     30,783     27,191        

Commercial mortgage loans

  7,399     8,066     9,103     10,138     10,845        

Commercial construction loans

  2,069     1,039     698     1,020     2,048        

Commercial leases

  3,720     3,625     3,549     3,531     3,378        

Residential mortgage loans

  12,389     12,680     12,017     10,672     8,956        

Home equity

  8,886     9,246     10,018     10,719     11,513        

Automobile loans

  12,037     11,984     11,972     11,827     10,983        

Credit card

  2,401     2,294     2,097     1,978     1,896        

Other consumer loans and leases

  418     364       290       350       681        

Total portfolio loans and leases

$           90,084     88,614       85,782       81,018       77,491        

Attributed allowance as a percent of respective portfolio loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

  1.65  %    1.95     2.23     3.02     4.13        

Commercial mortgage loans

  1.89     2.63     3.66     4.35     5.50        

Commercial construction loans

  0.82     2.50     4.73     7.55     7.71        

Commercial leases

  1.21     1.46     1.92     2.27     3.29        

Residential mortgage loans

  0.84     1.49     1.91     2.13     3.46        

Home equity

  0.98     1.02     1.43     1.82     2.30        

Automobile loans

  0.27     0.19     0.23     0.36     0.66        

Credit card

  4.33     4.01     4.15     5.36     8.33        

Other consumer loans and leases

  3.11     4.40     6.90     6.00     8.66        

Unallocated (as a percent of total portfolio loans and leases)

  0.12     0.12       0.13       0.17       0.19        

Total portfolio loans and leases

  1.47  %    1.79       2.16       2.78       3.88        

 

MARKET RISK MANAGEMENT

Market risk arises from the potential for market fluctuations in interest rates, foreign exchange rates and equity prices that may result in potential reductions in net income. Interest rate risk, a component of market risk, is the exposure to adverse changes in net interest income or financial position due to changes in interest rates. Management considers interest rate risk a prominent market risk in terms of its potential impact on earnings. Interest rate risk can occur for any one or more of the following reasons:

 

   

Assets and liabilities may mature or reprice at different times;

   

Short-term and long-term market interest rates may change by different amounts; or

   

The expected maturity of various assets or liabilities may shorten or lengthen as interest rates change.

In addition to the direct impact of interest rate changes on net interest income, interest rates can indirectly impact earnings through their effect on loan demand, credit losses, mortgage originations, the value of servicing rights and other sources of the Bancorp’s earnings. Stability of the Bancorp’s net income is largely dependent upon the effective management of interest rate risk. Management continually reviews the Bancorp’s balance sheet composition and earnings flows and models the interest rate risk, and possible actions to reduce this risk, given numerous possible future interest rate scenarios.

    

Interest Rate Risk Management Oversight

The Bancorp’s Executive ALCO, which includes senior management representatives and is accountable to the ERM Committee, monitors and manages interest rate risk within Board approved policy limits. In addition to the risk management activities of ALCO, the Bancorp has a Market Risk Management function as part of ERM that provides independent oversight of market risk activities.

Net Interest Income Sensitivity

The Bancorp employs a variety of measurement techniques to identify and manage its interest rate risk, including the use of an NII simulation model to analyze the sensitivity of net interest income to changing interest rates. The model is based on contractual and assumed cash flows and repricing characteristics for all of the Bancorp’s assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet exposures and incorporates market-based assumptions regarding the effect of changing interest rates on the prepayment rates of certain assets and attrition rates of certain liabilities. The model also includes senior management’s projections of the future volume and pricing of each of the product lines offered by the Bancorp as well as other pertinent assumptions. Actual results may differ from simulated results due to timing, magnitude and frequency of interest rate changes as well as changes in market conditions and management strategies.

 

 

73  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

The Bancorp’s interest rate risk exposure is evaluated by measuring the anticipated change in net interest income over 12-month and 24-month horizons assuming 100 bps and 200 bps parallel ramped increases in interest rates. In accordance with internal policy, rate movements are assumed to occur over one year and are sustained thereafter. The analysis would typically include

100 bps and 200 bps parallel ramped decreases in interest rates; however, this analysis is currently omitted due to the current low levels of certain interest rates. Applying the ramps would result in certain interest rates becoming negative in the parallel ramped decrease scenarios.

 

 

The following table shows the Bancorp’s estimated NII sensitivity profile and ALCO policy limits as of December 31:

 

TABLE 56: ESTIMATED NII SENSITIVITY PROFILE  
  2014   2013  
  Percent Change in NII
(FTE)
      ALCO Policy Limits         Percent Change in NII  
(FTE)
  ALCO Policy Limits  
Change in Interest Rates (bps) 12 Months   13 to 24
Months
   12 Months 13 to 24
Months
   12 Months   13 to 24
Months
   12 Months 13 to 24  
Months  
 

+ 200

  2.19        6.49 (4.00) (6.00)   1.73        6.89 (4.00)   (6.00)       

+ 100

  1.16          4.18   - -     0.77          3.37   -   -           

 

At December 31, 2014, the Bancorp’s net interest income would benefit in year one and year two under these parallel ramp increases. The benefit was attributable to the combination of floating-rate assets, including the predominantly floating-rate commercial loan portfolio, and certain intermediate-term fixed-rate liabilities. The benefit was up modestly compared to December 31, 2013 with the exception of the +200 scenario from 13 to 24 months, which was down slightly. Improvements in the NII benefit were attributable to continued growth in commercial loans and core deposits, and the issuance of fixed-rate debt securities. The modest decline in the +200 scenario from 13 to 24 months compared to December 31, 2013 was primarily due to changes in expected loan and security prepayment speeds.

Economic Value of Equity Sensitivity

The Bancorp also uses EVE as a measurement tool in managing interest rate risk. Whereas the net interest income sensitivity analysis

highlights the impact on forecasted NII over one and two year time horizons, the EVE analysis is a point in time analysis of the current positions that incorporates all cash flows over their estimated remaining lives. The EVE of the balance sheet is defined as the discounted present value of all asset and net derivative cash flows less the discounted value of all liability cash flows. Due to this longer horizon, the sensitivity of EVE to changes in the level of interest rates is a measure of longer-term interest rate risk. EVE values only the current balance sheet and does not incorporate the growth assumptions used in the NII sensitivity analysis. As with the NII simulation model, assumptions about the timing and variability of existing balance sheet cash flows are critical in the EVE analysis. Particularly important are assumptions driving loan and security prepayments and the expected balance attrition and pricing of transaction deposits.

 

 

The following table shows the Bancorp’s EVE sensitivity profile as of December 31:

 

TABLE 57: ESTIMATED EVE SENSITIVITY PROFILE  
  2014       2013  
Change in Interest Rates (bps)     Change in EVE   ALCO Policy Limit            Change in EVE   ALCO Policy Limit  

+200

  (2.21 )%    (12.00)       (5.78 )%    (12.00

+100

  (0.62           (2.91

+25

  (0.06   (0.70

-25

  (0.05               0.63        

 

The EVE sensitivity was modestly negative at December 31, 2014 and has improved from the EVE sensitivity at December 31, 2013. The lower level of EVE risk since December 31, 2013 was attributable to continued growth in commercial loans and core deposits, and the issuance of fixed-rate debt securities.

While an instantaneous shift in interest rates was used in this analysis to provide an estimate of exposure, the Bancorp believes that a gradual shift in interest rates would have a much more modest impact. Since EVE measures the discounted present value of cash flows over the estimated lives of instruments, the change in EVE does not directly correlate to the degree that earnings would be impacted over a shorter time horizon (e.g., the current fiscal year). Further, EVE does not take into account factors such as future balance sheet growth, changes in product mix, changes in yield curve relationships and changing product spreads that could mitigate or exacerbate the impact of changes in interest rates. The NII simulations and EVE analyses do not necessarily include certain

actions that management may undertake to manage risk in response to anticipated changes in interest rates.

The Bancorp regularly evaluates its exposures to LIBOR and Prime basis risks, nonparallel shifts in the yield curve and embedded options risk. In addition, the impact on NII and EVE of extreme changes in interest rates is modeled, wherein the Bancorp employs the use of yield curve shocks and environment-specific scenarios.

Use of Derivatives to Manage Interest Rate Risk

An integral component of the Bancorp’s interest rate risk management strategy is its use of derivative instruments to minimize significant fluctuations in earnings caused by changes in market interest rates. Examples of derivative instruments that the Bancorp may use as part of its interest rate risk management strategy include interest rate swaps, interest rate floors, interest rate caps, forward contracts, options, swaptions and TBA securities.

 

 

74  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

As part of its overall risk management strategy relative to its mortgage banking activity, the Bancorp enters into forward contracts accounted for as free-standing derivatives to economically hedge IRLCs that are also considered free-standing derivatives. Additionally, the Bancorp economically hedges its exposure to mortgage loans held for sale through the use of forward contracts and mortgage options.

The Bancorp also establishes derivative contracts with major financial institutions to economically hedge significant exposures assumed in commercial customer accommodation derivative contracts. Generally, these contracts have similar terms in order to protect the Bancorp from market volatility. Credit risk arises from the possible inability of counterparties to meet the terms of their contracts, which the Bancorp minimizes through collateral

arrangements, approvals, limits and monitoring procedures. For further information including the notional amount and fair values of these derivatives, refer to Note 12 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

Portfolio Loans and Leases and Interest Rate Risk

Although the Bancorp’s portfolio loans and leases contain both fixed and floating/adjustable rate products, the rates of interest earned by the Bancorp on the outstanding balances are generally established for a period of time. The interest rate sensitivity of loans and leases is directly related to the length of time the rate earned is established. The following table summarizes the expected cash flows of the carrying value of the Bancorp’s portfolio loans and leases as of December 31, 2014:

 

 

TABLE 58: PORTFOLIO LOANS AND LEASES EXPECTED MATURITIES  
($ in millions) Less than 1 year        1-5 years         Over 5 years        Total  

Commercial and industrial loans

$                   23,653         16,371     741       40,765  

Commercial mortgage loans

  3,328         3,613     458       7,399  

Commercial construction loans

  847         1,183     39       2,069  

Commercial leases

  735         1,623     1,362       3,720  

Subtotal - commercial loans and leases

  28,563                   22,790               2,600             53,953  

Residential mortgage loans

  2,497         5,428     4,464                 12,389       

Home equity

  1,203         3,460     4,223       8,886  

Automobile loans

  5,209         6,704     124       12,037  

Credit card

  481         1,920     -        2,401  

Other consumer loans and leases

  404         14     -        418  

Subtotal - consumer loans and leases

  9,794               17,526           8,811             36,131  

Total

$ 38,357               40,316           11,411             90,084  

Additionally, the following table displays a summary of expected cash flows, excluding interest receivable, occurring after one year for both fixed and floating/adjustable rate loans and leases, as of December 31, 2014:

 

TABLE 59: PORTFOLIO LOANS AND LEASES PRINCIPAL CASH FLOWS OCCURING AFTER ONE YEAR  
                            Interest  Rate                                
($ in millions)    Fixed     Floating or Adjustable  

Commercial and industrial loans

$   2,672     14,440                   

Commercial mortgage loans

  1,031     3,040              

Commercial construction loans

  31     1,191              

Commercial leases

    2,985     -              

Subtotal - commercial loans and leases

    6,719     18,671              

Residential mortgage loans

  7,031     2,861              

Home equity

  736     6,947              

Automobile loans

  6,783     45              

Credit card

  627     1,293              

Other consumer loans and leases

  -      14              

Subtotal - consumer loans and leases

    15,177     11,160              

Total

$   21,896     29,831              

 

Residential Mortgage Servicing Rights and Interest Rate Risk

The net carrying amount of the residential MSR portfolio was $856 million and $967 million as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. The value of servicing rights can fluctuate sharply depending on changes in interest rates and other factors. Generally, as interest rates decline and loans are prepaid to take advantage of refinancing, the total value of existing servicing rights declines because no further servicing fees are collected on repaid loans. The Bancorp maintains a non-qualifying hedging strategy relative to its mortgage banking activity in order to manage a portion of the risk associated with changes in the value of its MSR portfolio as a result of changing interest rates.

Mortgage rates decreased during the year ended December 31, 2014 which caused actual prepayments on the servicing portfolio to

increase. The increase in actual prepayments on the servicing portfolio during the year ended December 31, 2014 caused the modeled prepayment speeds to increase, which led to a temporary impairment of $65 million on servicing rights during the year ended December 31, 2014. Mortgage rates increased during the year ended December 31, 2013 which caused actual prepayments on the servicing portfolio to decrease. The decrease in actual prepayments on the servicing portfolio during the year ended December 31, 2013 caused the modeled prepayment speeds to decrease, which led to a recovery of temporary impairment of $192 million on servicing rights during the year ended December 31, 2013.

Servicing rights are deemed temporarily impaired when a borrower’s loan rate is distinctly higher than prevailing rates. Temporary impairment on servicing rights is reversed when the

 

 

75  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

prevailing rates return to a level commensurate with the borrower’s loan rate. In addition to the mortgage servicing rights valuation, the Bancorp recognized net gains of $95 million and net losses of $17 million on its non-qualifying hedging strategy for the years ended 2014 and 2013, respectively. These amounts include net gains on securities related to the Bancorp’s non-qualifying hedging strategy which were zero during 2014 and $13 million during 2013. The Bancorp may adjust its hedging strategy to reflect its assessment of the composition of its MSR portfolio, the cost of hedging and the anticipated effectiveness of the hedges given the economic environment. Refer to Note 11 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion on servicing rights and the instruments used to hedge interest rate risk on MSRs.

Foreign Currency Risk

The Bancorp may enter into foreign exchange derivative contracts to economically hedge certain foreign denominated loans. The

derivatives are classified as free-standing instruments with the revaluation gain or loss being recorded in other noninterest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The balance of the Bancorp’s foreign denominated loans at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013 was $720 million and $581 million, respectively. The Bancorp also enters into foreign exchange contracts for the benefit of commercial customers involved in international trade to hedge their exposure to foreign currency fluctuations. The Bancorp has internal controls in place to help ensure excessive risk is not being taken in providing this service to customers. These controls include an independent determination of currency volatility and credit equivalent exposure on these contracts, counterparty credit approvals and country limits.

 

 

LIQUIDITY RISK MANAGEMENT

The goal of liquidity management is to provide adequate funds to meet changes in loan and lease demand, unexpected levels of deposit withdrawals and other contractual obligations. Mitigating liquidity risk is accomplished by maintaining liquid assets in the form of investment securities, maintaining sufficient unused borrowing capacity in the debt markets and delivering consistent growth in core deposits. A summary of certain obligations and commitments to make future payments under contracts is included in Note 17 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Bancorp maintains a contingency funding plan that assesses the liquidity needs under various scenarios of market conditions, asset growth and credit rating downgrades. The plan includes liquidity stress testing which measures various sources and uses of funds under the different scenarios. The contingency plan provides for ongoing monitoring of unused borrowing capacity and available sources of contingent liquidity to prepare for unexpected liquidity needs and to cover unanticipated events that could affect liquidity.

Sources of Funds

The Bancorp’s primary sources of funds relate to cash flows from loan and lease repayments, payments from securities related to sales and maturities, the sale or securitization of loans and leases and funds generated by core deposits, in addition to the use of public and private debt offerings.

Expected maturities from loan and lease repayments are included in Table 58 of the Market Risk Management section of MD&A. Of the $22.4 billion of securities in the Bancorp’s available-for-sale and other portfolio at December 31, 2014, $3.3 billion in principal and interest is expected to be received in the next 12 months and an additional $3.5 billion is expected to be received in the next 13 to 24 months. For further information on the Bancorp’s securities portfolio, refer to the Investment Securities subsection of the Balance Sheet Analysis of MD&A.

Asset-driven liquidity is provided by the Bancorp’s ability to sell or securitize loans and leases. In order to reduce the exposure to interest rate fluctuations and to manage liquidity, the Bancorp has developed securitization and sale procedures for several types of interest-sensitive assets. A majority of the long-term, fixed-rate single-family residential mortgage loans underwritten according to FHLMC or FNMA guidelines are sold for cash upon origination. Additional assets such as certain other residential mortgages, certain commercial loans, home equity loans, automobile loans and other consumer loans are also capable of being securitized or sold. For the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp sold or securitized loans totaling $9.4 billion and $23.4 billion, respectively.

For further information on the transfer of financial assets, refer to Note 11 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

Core deposits have historically provided the Bancorp with a sizeable source of relatively stable and low cost funds. The Bancorp’s average core deposits and shareholders’ equity funded 82% of its average total assets during 2014 and 2013. In addition to core deposit funding, the Bancorp also accesses a variety of other short-term and long-term funding sources, which include the use of the FHLB system. Certificates of deposit with a balance of $100,000 or more and deposits in the Bancorp’s foreign branch located in the Cayman Islands are wholesale funding tools utilized to fund asset growth. Management does not rely on any one source of liquidity and manages availability in response to changing balance sheet needs.

On February 25, 2014, the Bancorp issued and sold $500 million of unsecured senior fixed-rate notes. On June 5, 2014, The Bancorp issued in a registered public offering 300,000 depositary shares, representing 12,000 shares of 4.90% fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series J perpetual preferred stock, for net proceeds of $297 million. As of December 31, 2014, $3.0 billion of debt or other securities were available for issuance under the current Bancorp’s Board of Directors’ authorizations and the Bancorp is authorized to file any necessary registration statements with the SEC to permit ready access to the public securities markets; however, access to these markets may depend on market conditions. At December 31, 2014, the Bancorp has approximately $41.7 billion of borrowing capacity available through secured borrowing sources including the FHLB and FRB.

In 2013, the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary updated and amended its existing global bank note program to increase the capacity from $20 billion to $25 billion. On April 25, 2014, the Bank issued and sold $1.5 billion in aggregate principal amount of unsecured senior bank notes. On September 5, 2014, the Bank issued and sold $850 million of unsecured senior fixed-rate bank notes. The Bancorp has $19.1 billion of funding available for issuance under the global bank note program as of December 31, 2014.

For the year ended December 31, 2014, the Bancorp transferred approximately $3.8 billion in consumer automobile loans to bankruptcy remote trusts which were deemed to be VIEs. The Bancorp concluded that it is the primary beneficiary of these VIEs and, therefore, has consolidated these VIEs. The assets of these VIEs are restricted to the settlement of the notes and other obligations of the VIEs. Third-party holders of the notes do not have recourse to the general assets of the Bancorp.

 

 

76    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Liquidity Coverage Ratio and Net Stable Funding Ratio

A key reform within the Basel III framework to strengthen international liquidity standards was the introduction of the LCR and NSFR. On January 7, 2013, the BCBS issued a final standard for the LCR applicable to large internationally active banking organizations. The BCBS plans on implementing the NSFR in 2018.

Section 165 of the DFA requires the FRB to establish enhanced liquidity standards in the U.S. for BHCs with total assets of $50 billion or greater. On October 10, 2014, the U.S. Banking Agencies published final rules implementing a quantitative liquidity requirement consistent with the LCR standard established by the BCBS for large internationally active banking organizations, generally those with $250 billion or more in total consolidated assets or $10 billion or more in on-balance sheet foreign exposure. In addition, a modified LCR requirement was finalized for BHCs with $50 billion or more in total consolidated assets that are not internationally active, such as Fifth Third. The Modified LCR requires BHCs to maintain HQLA equal to its calculated net cash outflows over a 30 calendar-day stress period multiplied by a factor of 0.7. The modified LCR is effective January 1, 2016 and requires BHCs to calculate its LCR on a monthly basis. The final rule includes a transition period for the modified LCR in which BHCs must maintain HQLA of 90% of its calculated net cash outflows for 2016 and then 100% beginning in 2017. The Bancorp estimates its

modified LCR was 112% at December 31, 2014 calculated under the modified LCR final rule. For more information on LCR, refer to the Non-GAAP Financial Measures section of MD&A.

Credit Ratings

The cost and availability of financing to the Bancorp are impacted by its credit ratings. A downgrade to the Bancorp’s credit ratings could affect its ability to access the credit markets and increase its borrowing costs, thereby adversely impacting the Bancorp’s financial condition and liquidity. Key factors in maintaining high credit ratings include a stable and diverse earnings stream, strong credit quality, strong capital ratios and diverse funding sources, in addition to disciplined liquidity monitoring procedures.

The Bancorp’s credit ratings are summarized in Table 60. The ratings reflect the ratings agencies view on the Bancorp’s capacity to meet financial commitments. *

* As an investor, you should be aware that a security rating is not a recommendation to buy, sell or hold securities, that it may be subject to revision or withdrawal at any time by the assigning rating organization and that each rating should be evaluated independently of any other rating. Additional information on the credit rating ranking within the overall classification system is located on the website of each credit rating agency.

 
TABLE 60: AGENCY RATINGS
As of February 25, 2015 Moody’s    Standard and Poor’s      Fitch    DBRS       

Fifth Third Bancorp:

       

Short-term

No rating    A-2 F1 R-1L      

Senior debt

Baa1 BBB+ A      AL      

Subordinated debt

Baa2 BBB A- BBBH      

Fifth Third Bank:

Short-term

P-2 A-2 F1 R-1L      

Long-term deposit

A3 No rating A+ A      

Senior debt

A3 A- A A      

Subordinated debt

Baa1   BBB+       A-   AL      

 

OPERATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT

The Bancorp faces ongoing and emerging risks and regulations related to the activities that surround the delivery of banking and financial products. The Bancorp believes that effective management of operational risk plays a major role in both the level and the stability of profitability. Operational risk is the risk of loss from inadequate or failed internal processes, people or systems or from external events. This includes, but is not limited to, the following types of risk: business continuity risk, information management risk, fraud risk, model risk, third party service provider risk, human resources risk, and process risk.

The Bancorp’s risk management framework consists of five integrated components, including identifying, assessing, managing, monitoring, and reporting risks. The Operational Risk Management function is responsible for developing and overseeing the implementation of the Bancorp’s approach to managing operational

risk. This includes providing training, tools, guidance and oversight to support implementation of key risk programs and systems as they relate to operational risk management, such as risk and control self-assessments, new product/initiative risk reviews, key risk indicators, and operational losses. The function is also responsible for developing reports that support the proactive management of operational risk across the enterprise. The lines of business and corporate functions are responsible for managing the operational risks associated with their areas in accordance with the risk management framework. The framework is intended to enable the Bancorp to function with a sound and well-controlled operational environment. These processes support the Bancorp’s goals to minimize future operational losses and strengthen the Bancorp’s performance by maintaining sufficient capital to absorb operational losses that are incurred.

 

 

CAPITAL MANAGEMENT

Management regularly reviews the Bancorp’s capital levels to help ensure it is appropriately positioned under various operating environments. The Bancorp has established a Capital Committee which is responsible for making capital plan recommendations to management. These recommendations are reviewed by the ERM Committee and the capital plan is approved by the Board of Directors. The Capital Committee is responsible for execution oversight of the capital actions of the capital plan.

Capital Ratios

The U.S banking agencies established quantitative measures that assign risk weightings to assets and off-balance sheet items and also define and set minimum regulatory capital requirements. The U.S. banking agencies define “well-capitalized” ratios for Tier I and Total risk-based capital as 6% and 10%, respectively. The Bancorp exceeded these “well-capitalized” ratios for all periods presented.

The Basel II advanced approach framework was finalized by U.S. banking agencies in 2007. Core banks, defined as those with

 

 

77    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

consolidated total assets in excess of $250 billion or on balance sheet foreign exposures of $10 billion were required to adopt the advanced approach effective April 1, 2008. The Bancorp does not meet these thresholds and, therefore, is not subject to the requirements of Basel II.

The DFA requires more stringent prudential standards, including capital and liquidity requirements, for larger institutions. It addresses the quality of capital components by limiting the degree to which certain hybrid instruments can be included. The DFA will phase out the inclusion of certain TruPS as a component of Tier I risk-based capital when the Bancorp implements the revised regulatory capital rules known as Basel III.

In December of 2010 and revised in June of 2011, the BCBS issued Basel III, a global regulatory framework, to enhance international capital standards. In June of 2012, U.S. banking regulators proposed enhancements to the regulatory capital requirements for U.S. banks, which implement aspects of Basel III, such as re-defining the regulatory capital elements and minimum capital ratios, introducing regulatory capital buffers above those minimums, revising the agencies’ rules for calculating risk-weighted assets and introducing a new Tier I common equity ratio. In July of 2013, U.S. banking regulators approved final enhanced regulatory capital requirements (Basel III Final Rule), which included modifications to the proposed rules. The Basel III Final Rule provides for certain banks, including the Bancorp, to opt out of including AOCI in Tier I capital and retain the treatment of residential mortgage exposures consistent with the current Basel I capital rules. The Basel III Final Rule phases out the inclusion of certain TruPS as a component of Tier I capital. Under these provisions, these TruPS qualify as a component of Tier II capital. At December 31, 2014 the Bancorp’s Tier I capital included $60 million

of TruPS representing approximately 5 bps of risk-weighted assets. The Basel III Final Rule is effective for the Bancorp as of January 1, 2015, subject to phase-in periods for certain of its components and other provisions.

The Bancorp’s current estimate of the pro-forma fully phased in Tier I common equity ratio at December 31, 2014 under the Basel III Final Rule is approximately 9.39% compared with 9.65% as calculated under the existing Basel I capital framework. The primary drivers of the change from the existing Basel I capital framework to the Basel III Final Rule are an increase in Tier I common equity of approximately 74 bps (primarily from the elimination of the current 10% deduction of mortgage servicing rights from capital), which would be more than offset by the impact of increases in risk-weighted assets (primarily from the treatment of securitizations, mortgage servicing rights and commitments with an original maturity of one year or less). If the Bancorp elected to include AOCI components in capital, the December 31, 2014 pro forma Basel III Final Rule Tier I common ratio would have increased by approximately 35 bps. The pro-forma Tier I common equity ratio exceeds the proposed minimum Tier I common equity ratio of 7% comprised of a minimum of 4.5% plus a capital conservation buffer of 2.5%. The pro-forma Tier I common equity ratio does not include the effect of any mitigating actions the Bancorp may undertake to offset the impact of the proposed capital enhancements. Additionally, pursuant to the Basel III Final Rule, the minimum capital ratios as of January 1, 2015 are 6% for the Tier I capital ratio, 8% for the Total risk-based capital ratio and 4% for the Tier I capital to average consolidated assets (leverage ratio). For further discussion on the Basel I and Basel III Tier I common equity ratios, refer to the Non-GAAP Financial Measures section of MD&A.

 
TABLE 61: CAPITAL RATIOS                                                                       
As of December 31 ($ in millions)    2014               2013              2012              2011              2010             

Average equity as a percent of average assets

     11.59  %         11.56           11.65           11.41           12.22           

Tangible equity as a percent of tangible assets (a)

     9.41          9.44           9.17           9.03           10.42           

Tangible common equity as a percent of tangible assets (a)

     8.43          8.63           8.83           8.68           7.04           

Tier I capital

   $           12,764          12,094           11,685           12,503           13,965           

Total risk-based capital

     16,895                    16,431                     15,811                     16,876                     18,178           

Risk-weighted assets (b)

     117,878          115,969           109,301           104,219           100,561           

Regulatory capital ratios:

                         

Tier I risk-based capital

     10.83  %         10.43           10.69           12.00           13.89           

Total risk-based capital

     14.33          14.17           14.47           16.19           18.08           

Tier I leverage

     9.66          9.73           10.15           11.25           12.79           

Tier I common equity (a)

     9.65                9.45                 9.54                 9.41                 7.48           
(a)

For further information on these ratios, refer to the Non-GAAP Financial Measures section of MD&A.

(b)

Under the banking agencies’ risk-based capital guidelines, assets and credit equivalent amounts of derivatives and off-balance sheet exposures are assigned to broad risk categories. The aggregate dollar amount in each risk category is multiplied by the associated risk weight of the category. The resulting weighted values are added together resulting in the Bancorp’s total risk-weighted assets.

 

Preferred Stock Offering and Conversion

As contemplated by the 2013 CCAR, on May 16, 2013 the Bancorp issued in a registered public offering 600,000 depositary shares, representing 24,000 shares of 5.10% fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series H perpetual preferred stock, for net proceeds of $593 million. Each preferred share has a $25,000 liquidation preference. The preferred stock accrues dividends, on a non-cumulative semi-annual basis, at an annual rate of 5.10% through but excluding June 30, 2023, at which time it converts to a quarterly floating rate dividend of three-month LIBOR plus 3.033%. Subject to any required regulatory approval, the Bancorp may redeem the Series H preferred shares at its option in whole or in part, at any time on or after June 30, 2023 and may redeem in whole, but not in part, following a regulatory capital event at any time prior to June 30,

2023. The Series H preferred shares are not convertible into Bancorp common shares or any other securities.

On June 11, 2013, the Bancorp’s Board of Directors authorized the conversion into common stock, no par value, of all outstanding shares of the Bancorp’s 8.50% non-cumulative convertible perpetual preferred stock, Series G, which shares are represented by depositary shares each representing 1/250th of a share of Series G preferred stock, pursuant to the Amended Articles of Incorporation. The Articles grant the Bancorp the right, at its option, to convert all outstanding shares of Series G preferred stock if the closing price of common stock exceeded 130% of the applicable conversion price for 20 trading days within any period of 30 consecutive trading days. The closing price of shares of common stock satisfied such threshold for the 30 trading days ended June 10, 2013, and the

 

 

78  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Bancorp gave the required notice of its exercise of its conversion right.

On July 1, 2013, the Bancorp converted the remaining 16,442 outstanding shares of Series G preferred stock, which represented 4,110,500 depositary shares, into shares of Fifth Third’s common stock. Each share of Series G preferred stock was converted into 2,159.8272 shares of common stock, representing a total of 35,511,740 issued shares. The common shares issued in the conversion are exempt securities pursuant to Section 3(a)(9) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, as the securities exchanged were exclusively with Bancorp’s existing security holders where no commission or other remuneration was paid. Upon conversion, the depositary shares were delisted from the NASDAQ Global Select Market and withdrawn from the Exchange.

On December 9, 2013, the Bancorp issued, in a registered public offering, 18,000,000 depositary shares, representing 18,000 shares of 6.625% fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series I perpetual preferred stock, for net proceeds of $441 million. Each preferred share has a $25,000 liquidation preference. The preferred stock accrues dividends, on a non-cumulative quarterly basis, at an annual rate of 6.625% through but excluding December 31, 2023, at which time it converts to a quarterly floating rate dividend of three-month LIBOR plus 3.71%. Subject to any required regulatory approval, the Bancorp may redeem the Series I preferred shares at its option in whole or in part, at any time on or after December 31, 2023 and may redeem in whole, but not in part, following a regulatory capital event at any time prior to December 31, 2023. The Series I preferred shares are not convertible into Bancorp common shares or any other securities.

As contemplated by the 2014 CCAR, on June 5, 2014, the Bancorp issued in a registered public offering 300,000 depositary shares, representing 12,000 shares of 4.90% fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series J perpetual preferred stock, for net proceeds of $297 million. Each preferred share has a $25,000 liquidation preference. The preferred stock accrues dividends, on a non-cumulative semi-annual basis, at an annual rate of 4.90% through but excluding September 30, 2019, at which time it converts to a quarterly floating rate dividend of three-month LIBOR plus

3.129%. Subject to any required regulatory approval, the Bancorp may redeem the Series J preferred shares at its option in whole or in part, at any time on or after September 30, 2019, or at any time following a regulatory capital event. The Series J preferred shares are not convertible into Bancorp common shares or any other securities.

Redemption of TruPS

The Bancorp redeemed all $750 million of the outstanding TruPS issued by Fifth Third Capital Trust IV on December 30, 2013. These securities had a distribution rate of 6.50% and a scheduled maturity date of April 1, 2067. Pursuant to the terms of the TruPS, the securities of Fifth Third Capital Trust IV were redeemable within ninety days of a Capital Treatment Event. The Bancorp determined that a Capital Treatment Event occurred upon the publication of a Final Rule regarding Regulatory Capital Rules jointly by the Federal Reserve System and the OCC. The redemption price was $1,000 per security, which reflected 100% of the liquidation amount, plus accrued and unpaid distributions to the actual redemption date of $10 million. The Bancorp recognized an $8 million loss on the extinguishment of this debt within other noninterest expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Dividend Policy and Stock Repurchase Program

The Bancorp’s common stock dividend policy and stock repurchase program reflect its earnings outlook, desired payout ratios, the need to maintain adequate capital levels, the ability of its subsidiaries to pay dividends, the need to comply with safe and sound banking practices as well as meet regulatory requirements and expectations. The Bancorp declared dividends per common share of $0.51 and $0.47 during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. The Bancorp entered into accelerated share repurchase transactions during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013. Refer to the Overview section of MD&A and Note 23 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on the accelerated share repurchase transactions.

 

The following table summarizes shares authorized for repurchase for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013:

 

TABLE 62: SHARE REPURCHASES                         
For the years ended December 31 2014            2013            2012                

Shares authorized for repurchase at January 1

  43,071,613     63,046,682     19,201,518             

Additional authorizations (a) (b)

  64,908,628                   45,541,057               86,269,178             

Share repurchases (c)

  (34,799,873         (65,516,126         (42,424,014)             

Shares authorized for repurchase at December 31

  73,180,368           43,071,613           63,046,682             

Average price paid per share

  $ 20.87           $ 18.80           $ 14.82             
(a)

In March 2014, the Bancorp announced that its Board of Directors had authorized management to purchase 100 million shares of the Bancorp’s common stock through the open market or in any private transaction. The authorization does not include specific price targets or an expiration date. This share repurchase authorization replaces the Board’s previous authorization pursuant to which approximately 35 million shares remained available for repurchase by the Bancorp.

(b)

In March 2013, the Bancorp announced that its Board of Directors had authorized management to purchase 100 million shares of the Bancorp’s common stock through the open market or in any private transaction. The authorization does not include specific price targets or an expiration date. This share repurchase authorization replaces the Board’s previous authorization pursuant to which approximately 54 million shares remained available for repurchase by the Bancorp.

(c)

Excludes 2,116,370 , 1,863,097 and 2,059,003 shares repurchased during 2014 , 2013 and 2012, respectively, in connection with various employee compensation plans. These repurchases are not included in the calculation for average price paid and do not count against the maximum number of shares that may yet be repurchased under the Board of Directors’ authorization.

 

Stress Tests and CCAR

In 2011, the FRB adopted the capital plan rule, which requires BHCs with consolidated assets of $50 billion or more to submit annual capital plans to the FRB for review. Under the rule, these capital plans must included detailed descriptions of the following: the BHC’s internal processes for assessing capital adequacy; the policies governing capital actions such as common stock issuances, dividends, and share repurchases; and all planned capital actions

over a nine-quarter planning horizon. Further, each BHC must also report to the FRB the results of stress tests conducted by the BHC under a number of scenarios that assess the sources and uses of capital under baseline and stressed economic scenarios. The FRB launched the 2014 stress testing program and CCAR on November 1, 2013, with firm submissions of stress test results and capital plans due to the FRB on January 6, 2014, which the Bancorp submitted as required. Refer to Note 3 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial

 

 

79  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

Statements for a discussion on the FRB’s review of the capital plan, the FRB’s non-objection to the Bancorp’s proposed capital actions and the Bancorp’s capital actions taken in 2014.

The BHCs that participated in the 2014 CCAR, including the Bancorp, are required to conduct mid-cycle company-run stress tests using data as of March 31, 2014. The stress tests must be based on three BHC defined scenarios – baseline, adverse and severely adverse. As required, the Bancorp reported the mid-cycle stress test results to the FRB on July 7, 2014. In addition, the Bancorp published a Form 8-K providing a summary of the results under the severely adverse scenario on September 18, 2014, which is available on Fifth Third’s website at https://www.53.com . These results represented estimates of the Bancorp’s results from the second quarter of 2014 through the second quarter of 2016 under the severely adverse scenario, which is considered highly unlikely to occur.

The FRB launched the 2015 stress testing program and CCAR on October 23, 2014. The stress testing results and capital plan were submitted by the Bancorp to the FRB on January 5, 2015.

The FRB expects to release summary results of the 2015 stress testing program and CCAR in March of 2015. The results will include supervisory projections of capital ratios, losses and revenues under the supervisory adverse and supervisory severely adverse scenarios. The FRB will also issue an objection or non-objection to each participating institution’s capital plan submitted under CCAR. The FRB’s summary results will also include an overview of methodologies used for supervisory tests. Additionally, as a CCAR institution, Fifth Third is required to disclose its own estimates of results under the supervisory severely adverse scenario using the same consistently applied capital actions noted above, and to provide information related to risks included in its stress testing; a summary description of the methodologies used; estimates of aggregate pre-provision net revenue, losses, provisions, and pro forma capital ratios at the end of the forward-looking planning horizon of at least nine quarters; and an explanation of the most significant causes of changes in regulatory capital ratios. These disclosures are required to be sent to the FRB and publicly disclosed within 15 days of the date the FRB discloses the results of its DFA supervisory stress test.

 

 

 

80  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS

 

In the ordinary course of business, the Bancorp enters into financial transactions that are considered off-balance sheet arrangements as they involve varying elements of market, credit and liquidity risk in excess of the amounts recognized in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. The Bancorp’s off-balance sheet arrangements include commitments, contingent liabilities, guarantees, and transactions with non-consolidated VIEs. A brief discussion of these transactions is as follows:

Commitments

The Bancorp has certain commitments to make future payments under contracts, including commitments to extend credit, letters of credit, forward contracts related to held for sale mortgage loans, noncancelable lease obligations, capital commitments for private equity investments and purchase obligations. Refer to Note 17 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on commitments.

Guarantees and Contingent Liabilities

For certain mortgage loans originated by the Bancorp, borrowers may be required to obtain PMI provided by third-party insurers. In some instances, these insurers cede a portion of the PMI premiums to the Bancorp, and the Bancorp provides reinsurance coverage within a specified range of the total PMI coverage. The Bancorp’s reinsurance coverage typically ranges from 5% to 10% of the total PMI coverage. The Bancorp’s maximum exposure in the event of nonperformance by the underlying borrowers is equivalent to the Bancorp’s total outstanding reinsurance coverage, which was $29 million at December 31, 2014 and $37 million at December 31, 2013. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp maintained a reserve of $2 million and $10 million, respectively, related to exposures within the reinsurance portfolio which was included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The change in the reserve was due to a decrease in both the outstanding exposure and expected losses. During 2009, the Bancorp suspended the practice of providing reinsurance of PMI for newly originated mortgage loans.

The Bancorp has performance obligations upon the occurrence of certain events provided in certain contractual arrangements, including residential mortgage loans sold with representation and warranty provisions or credit recourse. Refer to Note 17 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on guarantees and contingent liabilities.

Transactions with Non-consolidated VIEs

The Bancorp engages in a variety of activities that involve VIEs, which are legal entities that lack sufficient equity to finance their activities, or the equity investors of the entities as a group lack any of the characteristics of a controlling interest. The investments in those entities in which the Bancorp was determined not to be the primary beneficiary but holds a variable interest in the entity are accounted for under the equity method of accounting or other accounting standards as appropriate and not consolidated. Refer to Note 10 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on non-consolidated VIEs.

 

 

81  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

 

CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER COMMITMENTS

 

The Bancorp has certain obligations and commitments to make future payments under contracts. The aggregate contractual obligations and commitments at December 31, 2014 are shown in Table 63. As of December 31, 2014, the Bancorp has unrecognized tax benefits that, if recognized, would impact the effective tax rate in future periods. Due to the uncertainty of the amounts to be

ultimately paid as well as the timing of such payments, all uncertain tax liabilities that have not been paid have been excluded from the Contractual Obligations and Other Commitments table. For further detail on the impact of income taxes refer to Note 20 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

TABLE 63: CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER COMMITMENTS  
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)

  Less than 1  

year

  1-3 years   3-5 years   Greater than
5 years
  Total  

Contractually obligated payments due by period:

Deposits with a stated maturity of less than one year (a)

$           94,857     -      -      -      94,857  

Time deposits (c)

  2,507     2,578     1,510     260     6,855  

Short-term borrowings (e)

  1,700     -      -      -      1,700  

Long-term debt (b)

  702     6,499     3,649     4,117     14,967  

Forward contracts related to held for sale mortgage loans (d)

  999     -      -      -      999  

Noncancelable operating lease obligations (f)

  92     166     145     294     697  

Partnership investment commitments (g)

  191     118     24     31     364  

Pension benefit payments (i)

  22     40     34     80     176  

Purchase obligations and capital expenditures (h)

  51     26     28     -      105  

Capital lease obligations

  11     14     10     2     37  

Total contractually obligated payments due by period

$ 101,132     9,441     5,400     4,784         120,757  

Other commitments by expiration period

Commitments to extend credit (j)

$ 26,540             12,105             17,602     7,658     63,905  

Letters of credit (k)

  2,181     1,160     590     43     3,974  

Total other commitments by expiration period

$ 28,721     13,265     18,192     7,701     67,879  
(a)

Includes demand, interest checking, savings, money market and foreign office deposits. For additional information, refer to the Deposits discussion in the Balance Sheet Analysis section of MD&A.

(b)

Interest-bearing obligations are principally used to fund interest-earning assets. As such, interest charges on contractual obligations were excluded from reported amounts, as the potential cash outflows would have corresponding cash inflows from interest-earning assets. Refer to Note 16 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on these debt instruments.

(c)

Includes other time and certificates $100,000 and over. For additional information, refer to the Deposits discussion in the Balance Sheet Analysis section of MD&A.

(d)

Refer to Note 12 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on forward contracts to sell residential mortgage loans.

(e)

Includes federal funds purchased and borrowings with an original maturity of less than one year. For additional information, refer to Note 15 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

(f)

Includes rental commitments.

(g)

Includes low-income housing and historic tax investments. For additional information, refer to Note 10 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

(h)

Represents agreements to purchase goods or services and includes commitments to various general contractors for work related to banking center construction.

(i)

Refer to Note 21 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information on pension obligations.

(j)

Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend, typically having fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses that may require payment of a fee. Many of the commitments to extend credit may expire without being drawn upon. The total commitment amounts include capital commitments for private equity investments and do not necessarily represent future cash flow requirements. For additional information, refer to Note 17 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

(k)

Letters of credit are conditional commitments issued to guarantee the performance of a customer to a third party. For additional information, refer to Note 17 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

82  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S ASSESSMENT AS TO THE EFFECTIVENESS OF INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

 

The Bancorp conducted an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of the Bancorp’s management, including the Bancorp’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, of the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Bancorp’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act). Based on the foregoing, as of the end of the period covered by this report, the Bancorp’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that the Bancorp’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective, in all material respects, to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports the Bancorp files and submits under the Exchange Act is recorded, processed, summarized and reported as and when required and information is accumulated and communicated to management on a timely basis.

The management of Fifth Third Bancorp is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control, designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. The Bancorp’s management assessed the effectiveness of the Bancorp’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014. Management’s assessment is based on the criteria established in the Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013)  issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and was designed to provide reasonable assurance that the Bancorp maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014. Based on this assessment, management believes that the Bancorp maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014. The Bancorp’s independent registered public accounting firm, that audited the Bancorp’s consolidated financial statements included in this annual report, has issued an audit report on our internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014. This report appears on page 84 of the annual report.

The Bancorp’s management also conducted an evaluation of internal control over financial reporting to determine whether any changes occurred during the year covered by this report that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Bancorp’s internal control over financial reporting. Based on this evaluation, there has been no such change during the year covered by this report.

 

LOGO LOGO

Kevin T. Kabat

Tayfun Tuzun

 

Vice Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

 

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

 

February 25, 2015

 

February 25, 2015

 

83  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

REPORTS OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Shareholders and Board of Directors of Fifth Third Bancorp:

We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Fifth Third Bancorp and subsidiaries (the “Bancorp”) as of December 31, 2014, based on criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013)  issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Bancorp’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Assessment as to the Effectiveness of Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Bancorp’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed by, or under the supervision of, the company’s principal executive and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, and effected by the company’s board of directors, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of the inherent limitations of internal control over financial reporting, including the possibility of collusion or improper management override of controls, material misstatements due to error or fraud may not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting to future periods are subject to the risk that the controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, the Bancorp maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, based on the criteria established in Internal Control— Integrated Framework (2013)  issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended December 31, 2014 of the Bancorp and our report dated February 25, 2015 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.

 

LOGO

Cincinnati, Ohio

February 25, 2015

To the Shareholders and Board of Directors of Fifth Third Bancorp:

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Fifth Third Bancorp and subsidiaries (the “Bancorp”) as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2014. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Bancorp’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Fifth Third Bancorp and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2014, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Bancorp’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2014, based on the criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework (2013)  issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated February 25, 2015 expressed an unqualified opinion on the Bancorp’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

LOGO

Cincinnati, Ohio

February 25, 2015

 

84  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

 

As of December 31 ($ in millions, except share data) 2014   2013  

Assets

Cash and due from banks (a)

$                       3,091     3,178  

Available-for-sale and other securities (b)

  22,408     18,597  

Held-to-maturity securities (c)

  187     208  

Trading securities

  360     343  

Other short-term investments

  7,914     5,116  

Loans held for sale (d)

  1,261     944  

Portfolio loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

  40,765     39,316  

Commercial mortgage loans (a)

  7,399     8,066  

Commercial construction loans

  2,069     1,039  

Commercial leases

  3,720     3,625  

Residential mortgage loans (e)

  12,389     12,680  

Home equity

  8,886     9,246  

Automobile loans (a)

  12,037     11,984  

Credit card

  2,401     2,294  

Other consumer loans and leases

  418     364  

Portfolio loans and leases

  90,084     88,614  

Allowance for loan and lease losses (a)

  (1,322   (1,582

Portfolio loans and leases, net

  88,762     87,032  

Bank premises and equipment

  2,465     2,531  

Operating lease equipment

  728     730  

Goodwill

  2,416     2,416  

Intangible assets

  15     19  

Servicing rights

  858     971  

Other assets (a)

  8,241     8,358  

Total Assets

$ 138,706     130,443  

Liabilities

Deposits:

Demand

$ 34,809     32,634  

Interest checking

  26,800     25,875  

Savings

  15,051     17,045  

Money market

  17,083     11,644  

Other time

  3,960     3,530  

Certificates - $100,000 and over

  2,895     6,571  

Foreign office

  1,114     1,976  

Total deposits

  101,712     99,275  

Federal funds purchased

  144     284  

Other short-term borrowings

  1,556     1,380  

Accrued taxes, interest and expenses

  2,020     1,758  

Other liabilities (a)

  2,642     3,487  

Long-term debt (a)

  14,967     9,633  

Total Liabilities

  123,041     115,817  

Equity

Common stock (f)

  2,051     2,051  

Preferred stock (g)

  1,331     1,034  

Capital surplus

  2,646     2,561  

Retained earnings

  11,141     10,156  

Accumulated other comprehensive income

  429     82  

Treasury stock (f)

  (1,972   (1,295

Total Bancorp shareholders’ equity

  15,626     14,589  

Noncontrolling interests

  39     37  

Total Equity

  15,665     14,626  

Total Liabilities and Equity

$ 138,706     130,443  
(a)

At December 31, 2014 and 2013, includes $ 179 and $49 of cash and due from banks, $47 and $48 of commercial mortgage loans, $3,331 and $1,010 of automobile loans, $(22) and $(15) of ALLL, $25 and $13 of other assets, $5 and $1 of other liabilities, $3,434 and $1,048 of long-term debt from consolidated VIEs that are included in their respective captions. For further information, refer to Note 10.

(b)

Amortized cost of $21,677 and $18,409 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

(c)

Fair value of $187 and $208 at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

(d)

Includes $561 and $890 of residential mortgage loans held for sale measured at fair value at December 31, 2014 , and 2013, respectively.

(e)

Includes $108 and $92 of residential mortgage loans measured at fair value at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

(f)

Common shares: Stated value $2.22 per share; authorized 2,000,000; outstanding at December 31, 2014 – 824,046,952 (excludes 99,845,629 treasury shares) and December 31, 2013 – 855,305,745 (excludes 68,586,836 treasury shares).

(g)

446,000 and 458,000 shares of undesignated no par value preferred stock are authorized and unissued at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013, respectively; fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series H perpetual preferred stock with a $25,000 liquidation preference: 24,000 authorized, issued and outstanding at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013; fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series I perpetual preferred stock with a $25,000 liquidation preference: 18,000 authorized, issued and outstanding at December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2013; and fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series J perpetual preferred stock with a $25,000 liquidation preference: 12,000 authorized shares, issues and outstanding at December 31, 2014 .

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

85  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME

 

For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions, except share data) 2014   2013   2012  

Interest Income

Interest and fees on loans and leases

$                     3,298     3,447     3,574  

Interest on securities

  724     520     529  

Interest on other short-term investments

  8     6     4  

Total interest income

  4,030     3,973     4,107  

Interest Expense

Interest on deposits

  202     202     216  

Interest on other short-term borrowings

  2     6     8  

Interest on long-term debt

  247     204     288  

Total interest expense

  451     412     512  

Net Interest Income

  3,579     3,561     3,595  

Provision for loan and lease losses

  315     229     303  

Net Interest Income After Provision for Loan and Lease Losses

  3,264     3,332     3,292  

Noninterest Income

Service charges on deposits

  560     549     522  

Corporate banking revenue

  430     400     413  

Investment advisory revenue

  407     393     374  

Mortgage banking net revenue

  310     700     845  

Card and processing revenue

  295     272     253  

Other noninterest income

  450     879     574  

Securities gains, net

  21     21     15  

Securities gains, net - non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights

  -     13     3  

Total noninterest income

  2,473     3,227     2,999  

Noninterest Expense

Salaries, wages and incentives

  1,449     1,581     1,607  

Employee benefits

  334     357     371  

Net occupancy expense

  313     307     302  

Technology and communications

  212     204     196  

Card and processing expense

  141     134     121  

Equipment expense

  121     114     110  

Other noninterest expense

  1,139     1,264     1,374  

Total noninterest expense

  3,709     3,961     4,081  

Income Before Income Taxes

  2,028     2,598     2,210  

Applicable income tax expense

  545     772     636  

Net Income

  1,483     1,826     1,574  

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

  2     (10   (2

Net Income Attributable to Bancorp

  1,481     1,836     1,576  

Dividends on preferred stock

  67     37     35  

Net Income Available to Common Shareholders

$ 1,414     1,799     1,541  

Earnings per share - basic

$ 1.68     2.05     1.69  

Earnings per share - diluted

$ 1.66     2.02     1.66  

Average common shares outstanding - basic

  833,116,349     869,462,977     904,425,226  

Average common shares outstanding - diluted

  842,967,356     894,736,445     945,554,102  

Cash dividends declared per common share

$ 0.51     0.47     0.36  

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

86  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014   2013   2012  

Net income

$                  1,483     1,826     1,574  

Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax:

Unrealized gains on available-for-sale securities:

Unrealized holding gains (losses) on available-for-sale securities arising during the year

  378     (295   (63

Reclassification adjustment for net (gains) losses included in net income

  (24   4     (10

Unrealized gains on cash flow hedge derivatives:

Unrealized holding gains (losses) on cash flow hedge derivatives arising during the year

  39     (8   24  

Reclassification adjustment for net gains included in net income

  (29   (29   (54

Defined benefit pension plans:

Net actuarial (loss) gain arising during the year

  (25   25     (5

Reclassification of amounts to net periodic benefit costs

  8     10     13  

Other comprehensive income (loss)

  347     (293   (95

Comprehensive income

  1,830     1,533     1,479  

Less: Comprehensive income attributable to noncontrolling interests

  2     (10   (2

Comprehensive income attributable to Bancorp

$ 1,828     1,543     1,481  

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

87  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

 

         
    Bancorp Shareholders’ Equity          
                    Accumulated        Total          
                    Other       Bancorp   Non-      
    Common      Preferred    Capital     Retained    Comprehensive    Treasury    Shareholders’    Controlling   Total      
($ in millions, except per share data)    Stock        Stock   Surplus     Earnings    Income   Stock    Equity   Interests   Equity     

Balance at December 31, 2011

$

            2,051     398     2,792     7,554     470     (64   13,201     50     13,251  

Net income

  1,576     1,576     (2   1,574  

Other comprehensive loss

  (95   (95   (95

Cash dividends declared:

Common stock at $0.36 per share

  (325   (325   (325

Preferred stock

  (35   (35   (35

Shares acquired for treasury

  (23   (627   (650   (650

Impact of stock transactions under stock compensation plans, net

  (11   54     43     43  

Other

                      (2         3     1           1  

Balance at December 31, 2012

  2,051     398     2,758     8,768     375     (634   13,716     48     13,764  

Net income

  1,836     1,836     (10   1,826  

Other comprehensive loss

  (293   (293   (293

Cash dividends declared:

Common stock at $0.47 per share

  (407   (407   (407

Preferred stock

  (37   (37   (37

Shares acquired for treasury

  (78   (1,242   (1,320   (1,320

Issuance of preferred stock

  1,034     1,034     1,034  

Redemption of preferred stock, Series G

  (398   (142   540     -      -   

Impact of stock transactions under stock compensation plans, net

  22     38     60     60  

Other

                1     (4         3     -      (1   (1

Balance at December 31, 2013

  2,051     1,034     2,561     10,156     82     (1,295   14,589     37     14,626  

Net income

  1,481     1,481     2     1,483  

Other comprehensive income

  347     347     347  

Cash dividends declared:

Common stock at $0.51 per share

  (427   (427   (427

Preferred stock

  (67   (67   (67

Shares acquired for treasury

  72     (726   (654   (654

Issuance of preferred stock

  297     297     297  

Impact of stock transactions under stock compensation plans, net

  13     47     60     60  

Other

  (2   2     -      -   

Balance at December 31, 2014

$

  2,051     1,331     2,646     11,141     429     (1,972   15,626     39     15,665  

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

88  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

 

For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014   2013   2012  

Operating Activities

Net income

$                         1,483     1,826     1,574  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

Provision for loan and lease losses

  315     229     303  

Depreciation, amortization and accretion

  414     507     531  

Stock-based compensation expense

  83     78     69  

Provision for deferred income taxes

  79     253     271  

Securities gains, net

  (21   (21   (15

Securities gains, net - non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights

  -      (13   (3

Provision for (recovery of) MSR impairment

  65     (192   103  

Net gains on sales of loans and fair value adjustments on loans held for sale

  (67   (622   (583

Net losses on disposition and impairment of bank premises and equipment

  19     6     21  

Loss on extinguishment of debt

  -      8     169  

Proceeds from sales of loans held for sale

  5,477     22,047     22,044  

Loans originated for sale, net of repayments

  (4,874   (19,003   (21,439

Dividends representing return on equity method investments

  42     54     45  

Gain on sales of Vantiv, Inc. shares and Vantiv, Inc. IPO

  (148   (336   (272

Net change in:

Trading securities

  (16   (131   (28

Other assets

  (221   (672   4  

Accrued taxes, interest and expenses

  1     8     1  

Other liabilities

  (555   569     (238

Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities

  2,076     4,595     2,557  

Investing Activities

Sales:

Available-for-sale securities

  5,234     9,328     2,521  

Loans

  147     657     275  

Bank premises and equipment

  24     33     13  

Repayments / maturities:

Available-for-sale securities

  2,265     3,191     4,100  

Held-to-maturity securities

  20     74     36  

Purchases:

Available-for-sale securities

  (10,691   (16,216   (6,813

Bank premises and equipment

  (216   (274   (362

Proceeds from sales and dividends representing return of equity method investments

  279     674     393  

Net change in:

Other short-term investments

  (2,798   (2,695   (640

Loans and leases

  (3,136   (4,750   (5,930

Operating lease equipment

  (66   (206   (126

Net Cash Used in Investing Activities

  (8,938   (10,184   (6,533

Financing Activities

Net change in:

Core deposits

  6,114     6,550     3,529  

Certificates - $100,000 and over, including foreign office and other

  (3,677   3,208     279  

Federal funds purchased

  (140   (618   555  

Other short-term borrowings

  176     (4,900   3,041  

Dividends paid on common stock

  (423   (393   (309

Dividends paid on preferred stock

  (67   (37   (35

Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt

  6,570     5,044     523  

Repayment of long-term debt

  (1,399   (2,225   (3,159

Repurchases of treasury shares and related forward contracts

  (654   (1,320   (650

Issuance of preferred stock

  297     1,034     -   

Other

  (22   (17   (20

Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities

  6,775     6,326     3,754  

(Decrease) Increase in Cash and Due from Banks

  (87   737     (222

Cash and Due from Banks at Beginning of Period

  3,178     2,441     2,663  

Cash and Due from Banks at End of Period

$ 3,091     3,178     2,441  

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Note 2 contains cash payments related to interest and income taxes in addition to noncash investing and financing activities.

 

89  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING AND REPORTING POLICIES

 

Nature of Operations

Fifth Third Bancorp, an Ohio corporation, conducts its principal lending, deposit gathering, transaction processing and service advisory activities through its banking and non-banking subsidiaries from banking centers located throughout the Midwestern and Southeastern regions of the United States.

Basis of Presentation

The Consolidated Financial Statements include the accounts of the Bancorp and its majority-owned subsidiaries and VIEs in which the Bancorp has been determined to be the primary beneficiary. Other entities, including certain joint ventures, in which the Bancorp has the ability to exercise significant influence over operating and financial policies of the investee, but upon which the Bancorp does not possess control, are accounted for by the equity method of accounting and not consolidated. The investments in those entities in which the Bancorp does not have the ability to exercise significant influence are generally carried at the lower of cost or fair value. Intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated.

Use of Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

Cash and Due From Banks

Cash and due from banks consist of currency and coin, cash items in the process of collection and due from banks. Currency and coin includes both U.S. and foreign currency owned and held at Fifth Third offices and that is in-transit to the FRB. Cash items in the process of collection include checks and drafts that are drawn on another depository institution or the FRB that are payable immediately upon presentation in the U.S. Balances due from banks include non-interest bearing balances that are funds on deposit at other depository institutions or the FRB.

Securities

Securities are classified as held-to-maturity, available-for-sale or trading on the date of purchase. Only those securities which management has the intent and ability to hold to maturity are classified as held-to-maturity and reported at amortized cost. Securities are classified as available-for-sale when, in management’s judgment, they may be sold in response to, or in anticipation of, changes in market conditions. Securities are classified as trading when bought and held principally for the purpose of selling them in the near term. Available-for-sale securities are reported at fair value with unrealized gains and losses, net of related deferred income taxes, included in OCI. Trading securities are reported at fair value with unrealized gains and losses included in noninterest income. The fair value of a security is determined based on quoted market prices. If quoted market prices are not available, fair value is determined based on quoted prices of similar instruments or DCF models that incorporate market inputs and assumptions including discount rates, prepayment speeds, and loss rates. Realized securities gains or losses are reported within noninterest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The cost of securities sold is based on the specific identification method.

Available-for-sale and held-to-maturity securities with unrealized losses are reviewed quarterly for possible OTTI. For debt securities, if the Bancorp intends to sell the debt security or will more likely than not be required to sell the debt security before recovery of the entire amortized cost basis, then an OTTI has

occurred. However, even if the Bancorp does not intend to sell the debt security and will not likely be required to sell the debt security before recovery of its entire amortized cost basis, the Bancorp must evaluate expected cash flows to be received and determine if a credit loss has occurred. In the event of a credit loss, the credit component of the impairment is recognized within noninterest income and the non-credit component is recognized through OCI. For equity securities, the Bancorp’s management evaluates the securities in an unrealized loss position in the available-for-sale portfolio for OTTI on the basis of the duration of the decline in value of the security and severity of that decline as well as the Bancorp’s intent and ability to hold these securities for a period of time sufficient to allow for any anticipated recovery in the market value. If it is determined that the impairment on an equity security is other-than-temporary, an impairment loss equal to the difference between the amortized cost of the security and its fair value is recognized within noninterest income.

Portfolio Loans and Leases

Basis of Accounting

Portfolio loans and leases are generally reported at the principal amount outstanding, net of unearned income, deferred loan fees and costs, and any direct principal charge-offs. Direct loan origination fees and costs are deferred and the net amount is amortized over the estimated life of the related loans as a yield adjustment. Interest income is recognized based on the principal balance outstanding computed using the effective interest method.

Loans acquired by the Bancorp through a purchase business combination are recorded at fair value as of the acquisition date. The Bancorp does not carry over the acquired company’s ALLL, nor does the Bancorp add to its existing ALLL as part of purchase accounting.

Purchased loans are evaluated for evidence of credit deterioration at acquisition and recorded at their initial fair value. For loans acquired with no evidence of credit deterioration, the fair value discount or premium is amortized over the contractual life of the loan as an adjustment to yield. For loans acquired with evidence of credit deterioration, the Bancorp determines at the acquisition date the excess of the loan’s contractually required payments over all cash flows expected to be collected as an amount that should not be accreted into interest income (nonaccretable difference). The remaining amount representing the difference in the expected cash flows of acquired loans and the initial investment in the acquired loans is accreted into interest income over the remaining life of the loan or pool of loans (accretable yield). Subsequent to the acqusition date, increases in expected cash flows over those expected at the acquisition date are recognized prospectively as interest income over the remaining life of the loan. The present value of any decreases in expected cash flows resulting directly from a change in the contractual interest rate are recognized prospectively as a reduction of the accretable yield. The present value of any decreases in expected cash flows after the acquisition date as a result of credit deterioration is recognized by recording an ALLL or a direct charge-off. Subsequent to the purchase date, the methods utilized to estimate the required ALLL are similar to originated loans. Loans carried at fair value, mortgage loans held for sale and loans under revolving credit agreements are excluded from the scope of this guidance on loans acquired with deteriorated credit quality.

The Bancorp’s lease portfolio consists of both direct financing and leveraged leases. Direct financing leases are carried at the aggregate of lease payments plus estimated residual value of the leased property, less unearned income. Interest income on direct

 

 

90  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

financing leases is recognized over the term of the lease to achieve a constant periodic rate of return on the outstanding investment.

Leveraged leases are carried at the aggregate of lease payments (less nonrecourse debt payments) plus estimated residual value of the leased property, less unearned income. Interest income on leveraged leases is recognized over the term of the lease to achieve a constant rate of return on the outstanding investment in the lease, net of the related deferred income tax liability, in the years in which the net investment is positive.

Nonaccrual Loans and Leases

When a loan is placed on nonaccrual status, the accrual of interest, amortization of loan premium, accretion of loan discount, and amortization/accretion of deferred net loan fees are discontinued and all previously accrued and unpaid interest is charged against income. Commercial loans are placed on nonaccrual status when there is a clear indication that the borrower’s cash flows may not be sufficient to meet payments as they become due. Such loans are also placed on nonaccrual status when the principal or interest is past due 90 days or more, unless the loan is both well secured and in the process of collection. The Bancorp classifies residential mortgage loans that have principal and interest payments that have become past due 150 days as nonaccrual unless the loan is both well secured and in the process of collection. Residential mortgage loans may stay on nonperforming status for an extended time as the foreclosure process typically lasts longer than 180 days. Home equity loans and lines of credit are reported on nonaccrual status if principal or interest has been in default for 90 days or more unless the loan is both well secured and in the process of collection. Home equity loans and lines of credit that have been in default for 60 days or more are also reported on nonaccrual status if the senior lien has been in default 120 days or more, unless the loan is both well secured and in the process of collection. Residential mortgage, home equity, automobile and other consumer loans and leases that have been modified in a TDR and subsequently become past due 90 days are placed on nonaccrual status unless the loan is both well secured and in the process of collection. Commercial and credit card loans that have been modified in a TDR are classified as nonaccrual unless such loans have sustained repayment performance of six months or greater and are reasonably assured of repayment in accordance with the restructured terms. Well secured loans are collateralized by perfected security interests in real and/or personal property for which the Bancorp estimates proceeds from sale would be sufficient to recover the outstanding principal and accrued interest balance of the loan and pay all costs to sell the collateral. The Bancorp considers a loan in the process of collection if collection efforts or legal action is proceeding and the Bancorp expects to collect funds sufficient to bring the loan current or recover the entire outstanding principal and accrued interest balance.

Nonaccrual commercial loans and nonaccrual credit card loans are generally accounted for on the cost recovery method. The Bancorp believes the cost recovery method is appropriate for nonaccrual commercial loans and nonaccrual credit card loans because the assessment of collectability of the remaining recorded investment of these loans involves a high degree of subjectivity and uncertainty due to the nature or absence of underlying collateral. Under the cost recovery method, any payments received are applied to reduce principal. Once the entire recorded investment is collected, additional payments received are treated as recoveries of amounts previously charged-off until recovered in full, and any subsequent payments are treated as interest income. Nonaccrual residential mortgage loans and other nonaccrual consumer loans are generally accounted for on the cash basis method. The Bancorp believes the cash basis method is appropriate for nonaccrual

residential mortgage and other nonaccrual consumer loans because such loans have generally been written down to estimated collateral values and the collectability of the remaining investment involves only an assessment of the fair value of the underlying collateral, which can be measured more objectively with a lesser degree of uncertainty than assessments of typical commercial loan collateral. Under the cash basis method, interest income is recognized upon cash receipt to the extent to which it would have been accrued on the loan’s remaining balance at the contractual rate. Nonaccrual loans may be returned to accrual status when all delinquent interest and principal payments become current in accordance with the loan agreement and are reasonably assured of repayment in accordance with the contractual terms of the loan agreement, or when the loan is both well-secured and in the process of collection.

Commercial loans on nonaccrual status, including those modified in a TDR, as well as criticized commercial loans with aggregate borrower relationships exceeding $1 million, are subject to an individual review to identify charge-offs. The Bancorp does not have an established delinquency threshold for partially or fully charging off commercial loans. Residential mortgage loans, home equity loans and lines of credit and credit card loans that have principal and interest payments that have become past due 180 days are assessed for a charge-off to the ALLL, unless such loans are both well-secured and in the process of collection. Home equity loans and lines of credit are also assessed for charge-off to the ALLL when such loans or lines of credit have become past due 120 days if the senior lien is also 120 days past due, unless such loans are both well-secured and in the process of collection. Automobile and other consumer loans and leases that have principal and interest payments that have become past due 120 days are assessed for a charge-off to the ALLL, unless such loans are both well-secured and in the process of collection.

Restructured Loans and Leases

A loan is accounted for as a TDR if the Bancorp, for economic or legal reasons related to the borrower’s financial difficulties, grants a concession to the borrower that it would not otherwise consider. A TDR typically involves a modification of terms such as a reduction of the stated interest rate or remaining principal amount of the loan, a reduction of accrued interest, or an extension of the maturity date(s) at a stated interest rate lower than the current market rate for a new loan with similar risk. During the third quarter of 2012, the OCC, a national bank regulatory agency, issued interpretive guidance that requires non-reaffirmed loans included in Chapter 7 bankruptcy filings to be accounted for as nonperforming TDRs and collateral dependent loans regardless of their payment history and capacity to pay in the future. The Bancorp’s banking subsidiary is a state chartered bank which therefore is not subject to guidance of the OCC. The Bancorp does not consider the bankruptcy court’s discharge of the borrower’s debt a concession when the discharged debt is not reaffirmed, and as such these loans are classified as TDRs only if one or more of the previously mentioned concessions are granted.

The Bancorp measures the impairment loss of a TDR based on the difference between the original loan’s carrying amount and the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the original, effective yield of the loan. Residential mortgage loans, home equity loans, automobile loans and other consumer loans modified as part of a TDR are maintained on accrual status, provided there is reasonable assurance of repayment and of performance according to the modified terms based upon a current, well-documented credit evaluation. Commercial loans and credit card loans modified as part of a TDR are maintained on accrual status provided there is a sustained payment history of six-months or greater prior to the modification in accordance with the modified

 

 

91  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

terms and all remaining contractual payments under the modified terms are reasonably assured of collection. TDRs of commercial loans and credit cards that do not have a sustained payment history of six months or greater in accordance with their modified terms remain on nonaccrual status until a six-month payment history is sustained. In certain cases, commercial TDRs on nonaccrual status may be accounted for using the cash basis method for income recognition, provided that full repayment of principal under the modified terms of the loan is reasonably assured.

Impaired Loans and Leases

A loan is considered to be impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Bancorp will be unable to collect all amounts due (including both principal and interest) according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Impaired loans generally consist of nonaccrual loans and leases, loans modified in a TDR and loans over $1 million that are currently on accrual status and not yet modified in a TDR, but for which the Bancorp has determined that it is probable that it will grant a payment concession in the near term due to the borrower’s financial difficulties. For loans modified in a TDR, the contractual terms of the loan agreement refer to the terms specified in the original loan agreement. A loan restructured in a TDR is no longer considered impaired in years after the restructuring if the restructuring agreement specifies a rate equal to or greater than the rate the Bancorp was willing to accept at the time of the restructuring for a new loan with comparable risk and the loan is not impaired based on the terms specified by the restructuring agreement. Refer to the ALLL section for discussion regarding the Bancorp’s methodology for identifying impaired loans and determination of the need for a loss accrual.

Loans Held for Sale

Loans held for sale primarily represent conforming fixed-rate residential mortgage loans originated or acquired with the intent to sell in the secondary market and jumbo residential mortgage loans, commercial loans, other residential mortgage loans and other consumer loans that management has the intent to sell. Loans held for sale may be carried at the lower of cost or fair value, or carried at fair value where the Bancorp has elected the fair value option of accounting under U.S. GAAP. The Bancorp has elected to measure residential mortgage loans originated as held for sale under the fair value option. For loans in which the Bancorp has not elected the fair value option, the lower of cost or fair value is determined at the individual loan level.

The fair value of residential mortgage loans held for sale for which the fair value election has been made is estimated based upon mortgage-backed securities prices and spreads to those prices or, for certain ARM loans, DCF models that may incorporate the anticipated portfolio composition, credit spreads of asset-backed securities with similar collateral, and market conditions. The anticipated portfolio composition includes the effects of interest rate spreads and discount rates due to loan characteristics such as the state in which the loan was originated, the loan amount and the ARM margin. These fair value marks are recorded as a component of noninterest income in mortgage banking net revenue. The Bancorp generally has commitments to sell residential mortgage loans held for sale in the secondary market. Gains or losses on sales are recognized in mortgage banking net revenue.

Management’s intent to sell residential mortgage loans classified as held for sale may change over time due to such factors as changes in the overall liquidity in markets or changes in characteristics specific to certain loans held for sale. Consequently, these loans may be reclassified to loans held for investment and, thereafter, reported within the Bancorp’s residential mortgage class of portfolio loans and leases. In such cases, the residential mortgage

loans will continue to be measured at fair value, which is based on mortgage-backed securities prices, interest rate risk and an internally developed credit component.

Loans held for sale are placed on nonaccrual status consistent with the Bancorp’s nonaccrual policy for portfolio loans and leases.

Other Real Estate Owned

OREO, which is included in other assets, represents property acquired through foreclosure or other proceedings and is carried at the lower of cost or fair value, less costs to sell. All OREO property is periodically evaluated for impairment and decreases in carrying value are recognized as reductions in other noninterest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

ALLL

The Bancorp disaggregates its portfolio loans and leases into portfolio segments for purposes of determining the ALLL. The Bancorp’s portfolio segments include commercial, residential mortgage, and consumer. The Bancorp further disaggregates its portfolio segments into classes for purposes of monitoring and assessing credit quality based on certain risk characteristics. Classes within the commercial portfolio segment include commercial and industrial, commercial mortgage owner-occupied, commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied, commercial construction, and commercial leasing. The residential mortgage portfolio segment is also considered a class. Classes within the consumer portfolio segment include home equity, automobile, credit card, and other consumer loans and leases. For an analysis of the Bancorp’s ALLL by portfolio segment and credit quality information by class, refer to Note 6.

The Bancorp maintains the ALLL to absorb probable loan and lease losses inherent in its portfolio segments. The ALLL is maintained at a level the Bancorp considers to be adequate and is based on ongoing quarterly assessments and evaluations of the collectability and historical loss experience of loans and leases. Credit losses are charged and recoveries are credited to the ALLL. Provisions for loan and lease losses are based on the Bancorp’s review of the historical credit loss experience and such factors that, in management’s judgment, deserve consideration under existing economic conditions in estimating probable credit losses. The Bancorp’s strategy for credit risk management includes a combination of conservative exposure limits significantly below legal lending limits and conservative underwriting, documentation and collections standards. The strategy also emphasizes diversification on a geographic, industry and customer level, regular credit examinations and quarterly management reviews of large credit exposures and loans experiencing deterioration of credit quality.

The Bancorp’s methodology for determining the ALLL is based on historical loss rates, current credit grades, specific allocation on loans modified in a TDR and impaired commercial credits above specified thresholds and other qualitative adjustments. Allowances on individual commercial loans, TDRs and historical loss rates are reviewed quarterly and adjusted as necessary based on changing borrower and/or collateral conditions and actual collection and charge-off experience. An unallocated allowance is maintained to recognize the imprecision in estimating and measuring losses when evaluating allowances for individual loans or pools of loans.

Larger commercial loans included within aggregate borrower relationship balances exceeding $1 million that exhibit probable or observed credit weaknesses, as well as loans that have been modified in a TDR, are subject to individual review for impairment. The Bancorp considers the current value of collateral, credit quality of any guarantees, the guarantor’s liquidity and willingness to cooperate, the loan structure, and other factors when evaluating

 

 

92  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

whether an individual loan is impaired. Other factors may include the industry and geographic region of the borrower, size and financial condition of the borrower, cash flow and leverage of the borrower, and the Bancorp’s evaluation of the borrower’s management. When individual loans are impaired, allowances are determined based on management’s estimate of the borrower’s ability to repay the loan given the availability of collateral and other sources of cash flow, as well as an evaluation of legal options available to the Bancorp. Allowances for impaired loans are measured based on the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, fair value of the underlying collateral or readily observable secondary market values. The Bancorp evaluates the collectability of both principal and interest when assessing the need for a loss accrual.

Historical credit loss rates are applied to commercial loans that are not impaired or are impaired, but smaller than the established threshold of $1 million and thus not subject to specific allowance allocations. The loss rates are derived from a migration analysis, which tracks the historical net charge-off experience sustained on loans according to their internal risk grade. The risk grading system utilized for allowance analysis purposes encompasses ten categories.

Homogenous loans and leases in the residential mortgage and consumer portfolio segments are not individually risk graded. Rather, standard credit scoring systems and delinquency monitoring are used to assess credit risks, and allowances are established based on the expected net charge-offs. Loss rates are based on the trailing twelve month net charge-off history by loan category. Historical loss rates may be adjusted for certain prescriptive and qualitative factors that, in management’s judgment, are necessary to reflect losses inherent in the portfolio. Factors that management considers in the analysis include the effects of the national and local economies; trends in the nature and volume of delinquencies, charge-offs and nonaccrual loans; changes in loan mix; credit score migration comparisons; asset quality trends; risk management and loan administration; changes in the internal lending policies and credit standards; collection practices; and examination results from bank regulatory agencies and the Bancorp’s internal credit reviewers.

The Bancorp’s primary market areas for lending are the Midwestern and Southeastern regions of the Unites States. When evaluating the adequacy of allowances, consideration is given to these regional geographic concentrations and the closely associated effect changing economic conditions have on the Bancorp’s customers.

In the current year, the Bancorp has not substantively changed any material aspect to its overall approach to determining its ALLL for any of its portfolio segments. There have been no material changes in criteria or estimation techniques as compared to prior periods that impacted the determination of the current period ALLL for any of the Bancorp’s portfolio segments.

Reserve for Unfunded Commitments

The reserve for unfunded commitments is maintained at a level believed by management to be sufficient to absorb estimated probable losses related to unfunded credit facilities and is included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The determination of the adequacy of the reserve is based upon an evaluation of the unfunded credit facilities, including an assessment of historical commitment utilization experience, credit risk grading and historical loss rates based on credit grade migration. This process takes into consideration the same risk elements that are analyzed in the determination of the adequacy of the Bancorp’s ALLL, as discussed above. Net adjustments to the reserve for unfunded commitments are included in other noninterest expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Loan Sales and Securitizations

The Bancorp periodically sells loans through either securitizations or individual loan sales in accordance with its investment policies. The sold loans are removed from the balance sheet and a net gain or loss is recognized in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements at the time of sale. The Bancorp typically isolates the loans through the use of a VIE and thus is required to assess whether the entity holding the sold or securitized loans is a VIE and whether the Bancorp is the primary beneficiary and therefore consolidator of that VIE. If the Bancorp holds the power to direct activities most significant to the economic performance of the VIE and has the obligation to absorb losses or right to receive benefits that could potentially be significant to the VIE, then the Bancorp will generally be deemed the primary beneficiary of the VIE. If the Bancorp is determined not to be the primary beneficiary of a VIE but holds a variable interest in the entity, such variable interests are accounted for under the equity method of accounting or other accounting standards as appropriate. Refer to Note 10 for further information on consolidated and non-consolidated VIEs.

The Bancorp’s loan sales and securitizations are generally structured with servicing retained. As a result, servicing rights resulting from residential mortgage loan sales are initially recorded at fair value and subsequently amortized in proportion to and over the period of estimated net servicing revenues and are reported as a component of mortgage banking net revenue in the Consolidated Statements of Income. Servicing rights are assessed for impairment monthly, based on fair value, with temporary impairment recognized through a valuation allowance and permanent impairment recognized through a write-off of the servicing asset and related valuation allowance. Key economic assumptions used in measuring any potential impairment of the servicing rights include the prepayment speeds of the underlying loans, the weighted-average life, the discount rate, and the weighted-average coupon, as applicable. The primary risk of material changes to the value of the servicing rights resides in the potential volatility in the economic assumptions used, particularly the prepayment speeds. The Bancorp monitors risk and adjusts its valuation allowance as necessary to adequately reserve for impairment in the servicing portfolio. For purposes of measuring impairment, the mortgage servicing rights are stratified into classes based on the financial asset type (fixed-rate vs. adjustable rate) and interest rates. Fees received for servicing loans owned by investors are based on a percentage of the outstanding monthly principal balance of such loans and are included in noninterest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income as loan payments are received. Costs of servicing loans are charged to expense as incurred.

Reserve for Representation and Warranty Provisions

Conforming residential mortgage loans sold to unrelated third parties are generally sold with representation and warranty provisions. A contractual liability arises only in the event of a breach of these representations and warranties and, in general, only when a loss results from the breach. The Bancorp may be required to repurchase any previously sold loan or indemnify (make whole) the investor or insurer for which the representation or warranty of the Bancorp proves to be inaccurate, incomplete or misleading. The Bancorp establishes a residential mortgage repurchase reserve related to various representations and warranties that reflects management’s estimate of losses based on a combination of factors.

The Bancorp’s estimation process requires management to make subjective and complex judgments about matters that are inherently uncertain, such as future demand expectations, economic factors and the specific characteristics of the loans subject to repurchase. Such factors incorporate historical investor audit and repurchase demand rates, appeals success rates, historical loss

 

 

93  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

severity, and any additional information obtained from the GSEs regarding future mortgage repurchase and file request criteria. At the time of a loan sale, the Bancorp records a representation and warranty reserve at the estimated fair value of the Bancorp’s guarantee and continually updates the reserve during the life of the loan as losses in excess of the reserve become probable and reasonably estimable. The provision for the estimated fair value of the representation and warranty guarantee arising from the loan sales is recorded as an adjustment to the gain on sale, which is included in other noninterest income at the time of sale. Updates to the reserve are recorded in other noninterest expense.

Legal Contingencies

The Bancorp is party to numerous claims and lawsuits as well as threatened or potential actions or claims concerning matters arising from the conduct of its business activities. The outcome of claims or litigation and the timing of ultimate resolution are inherently difficult to predict, and significant judgment may be required in the determination of both the probability of loss and whether the amount of the loss is reasonably estimable. The Bancorp’s estimates are subjective and are based on the status of legal and regulatory proceedings, the merit of the Bancorp’s defenses and consultation with internal and external legal counsel. A reserve for a potential litigation loss is established when information related to the loss contingency indicates both that a loss is probable and that the amount of loss can be reasonably estimated. This reserve is included in Other Liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets and is adjusted from time to time as appropriate to reflect changes in circumstances. Legal expenses are recorded in other noninterest expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Bank Premises and Equipment

Bank premises and equipment, including leasehold improvements, are carried at cost less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation is calculated using the straight-line method based on estimated useful lives of the assets for book purposes, while accelerated depreciation is used for income tax purposes. Amortization of leasehold improvements is computed using the straight-line method over the lives of the related leases or useful lives of the related assets, whichever is shorter. Whenever events or changes in circumstances dictate, the Bancorp tests its long-lived assets for impairment by determining whether the sum of the estimated undiscounted future cash flows attributable to a long-lived asset or asset group is less than the carrying amount of the long-lived asset or asset group through a probability-weighted approach. In the event the carrying amount of the long-lived asset or asset group is not recoverable, an impairment loss is measured as the amount by which the carrying amount of the long-lived asset or asset group exceeds its fair value. Maintenance, repairs and minor improvements are charged to noninterest expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income as incurred.

Derivative Financial Instruments

The Bancorp accounts for its derivatives as either assets or liabilities measured at fair value through adjustments to AOCI and/or current earnings, as appropriate. On the date the Bancorp enters into a derivative contract, the Bancorp designates the derivative instrument as either a fair value hedge, cash flow hedge or as a free-standing derivative instrument. For a fair value hedge, changes in the fair value of the derivative instrument and changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability attributable to the hedged risk are recorded in current period net income. For a cash flow hedge, changes in the fair value of the derivative instrument, to the extent that it is effective, are recorded in AOCI and subsequently reclassified to net income in the same period(s) that the hedged

transaction impacts net income. For free-standing derivative instruments, changes in fair values are reported in current period net income.

Prior to entering into a hedge transaction, the Bancorp formally documents the relationship between the hedging instrument and the hedged item, as well as the risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge transaction. This process includes linking the derivative instrument designated as a fair value or cash flow hedge to a specific asset or liability on the balance sheet or to specific forecasted transactions and the risk being hedged, along with a formal assessment at both inception of the hedge and on an ongoing basis as to the effectiveness of the derivative instrument in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of the hedged item. If it is determined that the derivative instrument is not highly effective as a hedge, hedge accounting is discontinued.

Income Taxes

The Bancorp estimates income tax expense based on amounts expected to be owed to the various tax jurisdictions in which the Bancorp conducts business. On a quarterly basis, management assesses the reasonableness of its effective tax rate based upon its current estimate of the amount and components of net income, tax credits and the applicable statutory tax rates expected for the full year. The estimated income tax expense is recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are determined using the balance sheet method and the net deferred tax asset or liability is reported in other assets or accrued taxes, interest and expenses in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. Under this method, the net deferred tax asset or liability is based on the tax effects of the differences between the book and tax basis of assets and liabilities, and reflects enacted changes in tax rates and laws. Deferred tax assets are recognized to the extent they exist and are subject to a valuation allowance based on management’s judgment that realization is more likely than not. This analysis is performed on a quarterly basis and includes an evaluation of all positive and negative evidence, such as the limitation on the use of any net operating losses, to determine whether realization is more likely than not.

Accrued taxes represent the net estimated amount due to taxing jurisdictions and are reported in accrued taxes, interest and expenses in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The Bancorp evaluates and assesses the relative risks and appropriate tax treatment of transactions and filing positions after considering statutes, regulations, judicial precedent and other information and maintains tax accruals consistent with its evaluation of these relative risks and merits. Changes to the estimate of accrued taxes occur periodically due to changes in tax rates, interpretations of tax laws, the status of examinations being conducted by taxing authorities and changes to statutory, judicial and regulatory guidance that impact the relative risks of tax positions. These changes, when they occur, can affect deferred taxes and accrued taxes as well as the current period’s income tax expense and can be significant to the operating results of the Bancorp. Any interest and penalties incurred in connection with income taxes are recorded as a component of income tax expense in the Consolidated Financial Statements. For additional information on income taxes, refer to Note 20.

Earnings Per Share

Basic earnings per share is computed by dividing net income available to common shareholders by the weighted-average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the period. Earnings per diluted share is computed by dividing adjusted net income available to common shareholders by the weighted-average number

 

 

94  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

of shares of common stock and common stock equivalents outstanding during the period. Dilutive common stock equivalents represent the assumed conversion of dilutive convertible preferred stock, the exercise of dilutive stock-based awards and warrants and the dilutive effect of the settlement of outstanding forward contracts.

The Bancorp calculates earnings per share pursuant to the two-class method. The two-class method is an earnings allocation formula that determines earnings per share separately for common stock and participating securities according to dividends declared and participation rights in undistributed earnings. For purposes of calculating earnings per share under the two-class method, restricted shares that contain nonforfeitable rights to dividends are considered participating securities until vested. While the dividends declared per share on such restricted shares are the same as dividends declared per common share outstanding, the dividends recognized on such restricted shares may be less because dividends paid on restricted shares that are expected to be forfeited are reclassified to compensation expense during the period when forfeiture is expected.

Goodwill

Business combinations entered into by the Bancorp typically include the acquisition of goodwill. Goodwill is required to be tested for impairment at the Bancorp’s reporting unit level on an annual basis, which for the Bancorp is September 30, and more frequently if events or circumstances indicate that there may be impairment. The Bancorp has determined that its segments qualify as reporting units under U.S. GAAP.

Impairment exists when a reporting unit’s carrying amount of goodwill exceeds its implied fair value. In testing goodwill for impairment, U.S. GAAP permits the Bancorp to first assess qualitative factors to determine whether it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount. In this qualitative assessment, the Bancorp evaluates events and circumstances which may include, but are not limited to, the general economic environment, banking industry and market conditions, the overall financial performance of the Bancorp, the performance of the Bancorp’s common stock, the key financial performance metrics of the Bancorp’s reporting units, and events affecting the reporting units. If, after assessing the totality of events and circumstances, the Bancorp determines it is not more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount, then performing the two-step impairment test would be unnecessary. However, if the Bancorp concludes otherwise, it would then be required to perform the first step (Step 1) of the goodwill impairment test, and continue to the second step (Step 2), if necessary. Step 1 of the goodwill impairment test compares the fair value of a reporting unit with its carrying amount, including goodwill. If the carrying amount of the reporting unit exceeds its fair value, Step 2 of the goodwill impairment test is performed to measure the amount of impairment loss, if any.

The fair value of a reporting unit is the price that would be received to sell the unit as a whole in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. As none of the Bancorp’s reporting units are publicly traded, individual reporting unit fair value determinations cannot be directly correlated to the Bancorp’s stock price. To determine the fair value of a reporting unit, the Bancorp employs an income-based approach, utilizing the reporting unit’s forecasted cash flows (including a terminal value approach to estimate cash flows beyond the final year of the forecast) and the reporting unit’s estimated cost of equity as the discount rate. Additionally, the Bancorp determines its market capitalization based on the average of the closing price of the

Bancorp’s stock during the month including the measurement date, incorporating an additional control premium, and compares this market-based fair value measurement to the aggregate fair value of the Bancorp’s reporting units in order to corroborate the results of the income approach.

When required to perform Step 2, the Bancorp compares the implied fair value of a reporting unit’s goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. If the carrying amount exceeds the implied fair value, an impairment loss equal to that excess amount is recognized. A recognized impairment loss cannot exceed the carrying amount of that goodwill and cannot be reversed in future periods even if the fair value of the reporting unit subsequently recovers.

During Step 2, the Bancorp determines the implied fair value of goodwill for a reporting unit by assigning the fair value of the reporting unit to all of the assets and liabilities of that unit (including any unrecognized intangible assets) as if the reporting unit had been acquired in a business combination. The excess of the fair value of the reporting unit over the amounts assigned to its assets and liabilities is the implied fair value of goodwill. This assignment process is only performed for purposes of testing goodwill for impairment. The Bancorp does not adjust the carrying values of recognized assets or liabilities (other than goodwill, if appropriate), nor does it recognize previously unrecognized intangible assets in the Consolidated Financial Statements as a result of this assignment process. Refer to Note 8 for further information regarding the Bancorp’s goodwill.

Fair Value Measurements

The Bancorp measures certain financial assets and liabilities at fair value in accordance with U.S. GAAP, which defines fair value as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Valuation techniques the Bancorp uses to measure fair value include the market approach, income approach and cost approach. The market approach uses prices or relevant information generated by market transactions involving identical or comparable assets or liabilities. The income approach involves discounting future amounts to a single present amount and is based on current market expectations about those future amounts. The cost approach is based on the amount that currently would be required to replace the service capacity of the asset.

U.S. GAAP establishes a fair value hierarchy, which prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value into three broad levels. The fair value hierarchy gives the highest priority to quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (Level 1) and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs (Level 3). A financial instrument’s categorization within the fair value hierarchy is based upon the lowest level of input that is significant to the instrument’s fair value measurement. The three levels within the fair value hierarchy are described as follows:

 

Level 1 – Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the Bancorp has the ability to access at the measurement date.

 

Level 2 – Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly. Level 2 inputs include: quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets; quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active; inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability; and inputs that are

 

 

95  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data by correlation or other means.

 

Level 3 – Unobservable inputs for the asset or liability for which there is little, if any, market activity at the measurement date. Unobservable inputs reflect the Bancorp’s own assumptions about what market participants would use to price the asset or liability. The inputs are developed based on the best information available in the circumstances, which might include the Bancorp’s own financial data such as internally developed pricing models and DCF methodologies, as well as instruments for which the fair value determination requires significant management judgment.

The Bancorp’s fair value measurements involve various valuation techniques and models, which involve inputs that are observable, when available. Valuation techniques and parameters used for measuring assets and liabilities are reviewed and validated by the Bancorp on a quarterly basis. Additionally, the Bancorp monitors the fair values of significant assets and liabilities using a variety of methods including the evaluation of pricing runs and exception reports based on certain analytical criteria, comparison to previous trades and overall review and assessments for reasonableness. Refer to Note 27 for further information on fair value measurements.

Stock-Based Compensation

The Bancorp recognizes compensation expense for the grant-date fair value of stock-based awards that are expected to vest over the requisite service period. All awards, both those with cliff vesting and graded vesting, are expensed on a straight-line basis. Awards to employees that meet eligible retirement status are expensed immediately. As compensation expense is recognized, a deferred tax asset is recorded that represents an estimate of the future tax deduction from exercise or release of restrictions. At the time awards are exercised, cancelled, expire, or restrictions are released, the Bancorp may be required to recognize an adjustment to income tax expense for the difference between the previously estimated tax deduction and the actual tax deduction realized. For further information on the Bancorp’s stock-based compensation plans, refer to Note 24.

Pension Plans

The Bancorp uses an expected long-term rate of return applied to the fair market value of assets as of the beginning of the year and the expected cash flow during the year for calculating the expected investment return on all pension plan assets. Amortization of the net gain or loss resulting from experience different from that assumed and from changes in assumptions (excluding asset gains and losses not yet reflected in market-related value) is included as a component of net periodic benefit cost. If, as of the beginning of the year, that net gain or loss exceeds 10% of the greater of the projected benefit obligation and the market-related value of plan assets, the amortization is that excess divided by the average remaining service period of participating employees expected to receive benefits under the plan. The Bancorp uses a third-party actuary to compute the remaining service period of participating employees. This period reflects expected turnover, pre-retirement mortality, and other applicable employee demographics.

Other

Securities and other property held by Fifth Third Investment Advisors, a division of the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary, in a fiduciary or agency capacity are not included in the Consolidated

Balance Sheets because such items are not assets of the subsidiaries. Investment advisory revenue in the Consolidated Statements of Income is recognized on the accrual basis. Investment advisory service revenues are recognized monthly based on a fee charged per transaction processed and/or a fee charged on the market value of average account balances associated with individual contracts.

The Bancorp recognizes revenue from its card and processing services on an accrual basis as such services are performed, recording revenues net of certain costs (primarily interchange fees charged by credit card associations) not controlled by the Bancorp.

The Bancorp purchases life insurance policies on the lives of certain directors, officers and employees and is the owner and beneficiary of the policies. The Bancorp invests in these policies, known as BOLI, to provide an efficient form of funding for long-term retirement and other employee benefits costs. The Bancorp records these BOLI policies within other assets in the Consolidated Balance Sheets at each policy’s respective cash surrender value, with changes recorded in other noninterest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Other intangible assets consist of core deposit intangibles, customer lists, non-compete agreements and cardholder relationships. Other intangible assets are amortized on either a straight-line or an accelerated basis over their estimated useful lives. The Bancorp reviews other intangible assets for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that carrying amounts may not be recoverable.

Securities sold under repurchase agreements are accounted for as secured borrowings and included in other short-term borrowings in the Consolidated Balance Sheets at the amounts at which the securities were sold plus accrued interest.

Acquisitions of treasury stock are carried at cost. Reissuance of shares in treasury for acquisitions, exercises of stock-based awards or other corporate purposes is recorded based on the specific identification method.

Advertising costs are generally expensed as incurred.

Accounting and Reporting Developments

Obligations Resulting from Joint and Several Liability Arrangements for Which the Total Amount of the Obligation is Fixed at the Reporting Date

In February 2013, the FASB issued amended guidance relating to the measurement of obligations resulting from joint and several liability arrangements for which the total amount under the arrangement is fixed at the reporting date. For the total amount of an obligation under an arrangement to be considered fixed at the reporting date, there can be no measurement uncertainty relating to the total amount of the obligation. The obligation resulting from joint and several liability arrangements would be measured initially as the sum of 1) the amount the Bancorp has agreed to pay on the basis of its arrangement among its co-obligors and 2) any additional amount the Bancorp expects to pay on behalf of its co-obligors. The amended guidance also would require the Bancorp to disclose the nature and amount of the obligation as well as information about the risks that such obligations pose to future cash flows. The amended guidance was effective for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2013 and was applied retrospectively to all prior periods presented for those obligations resulting from joint and several liability arrangements that exist at the beginning of the fiscal year of adoption. The Bancorp adopted the amended guidance on January 1, 2014 and the adoption did not have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Presentation of an Unrecognized Tax Benefit When a Net Operating Loss Carryforward, a Similar Tax Loss, or a Tax Credit Carryforward Exists

 

 

96  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

In July 2013, the FASB issued amended guidance to clarify that an unrecognized tax benefit, or a portion of an unrecognized tax benefit, should be presented in the financial statements as a reduction to a deferred tax asset for a net operating loss carryforward, a similar tax loss, or a tax credit carryforward, except as follows. To the extent a net operating loss carryforward, a similar tax loss, or a tax credit carryforward is not available at the reporting date under the tax law of the applicable jurisdiction to settle any income taxes that would result from the disallowance of a tax position or the tax law of the applicable jurisdiction does not require the entity to use, and the entity does not intend to use, the deferred tax asset for such purpose, the unrecognized tax benefit should be presented in the financial statements as a liability and should not be combined with deferred tax assets. The assessment of whether a deferred tax asset is available is based on the unrecognized tax benefit and deferred tax asset that exist at the reporting date and should be made presuming disallowance of the tax position at the reporting date. The amended guidance was effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2013, with early adoption permitted. The Bancorp adopted the amended guidance on January 1, 2014 and the adoption of the amended guidance did not have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Accounting for Investments in Qualified Affordable Housing Projects

In January 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance which would permit the Bancorp to make an accounting policy election to account for its investments in qualified affordable housing projects using a proportional amortization method if certain conditions are met and to present the amortization as a component of income tax expense. The amended guidance would be applied retrospectively to all periods presented and is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2014, with early adoption permitted. Regardless of the policy election, the amended guidance requires disclosures to enable the users of the financial statements to understand the nature of the Bancorp’s investments in qualified affordable housing projects and the effect of the measurement of the investments in qualified affordable housing projects and the related tax credits on the Bancorp’s financial position and results of operation.

The Bancorp adopted the amended guidance on January 1, 2015, and did not make an accounting policy election to apply the proportional amortization method for its investments in qualified affordable housing projects. Therefore, the adoption did not have an impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Reclassification of Residential Real Estate Collateralized Consumer Mortgage Loans upon Foreclosure

In January 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance that clarifies when a creditor should be considered to have received physical possession of residential real estate property collateralizing a consumer mortgage loan such that the loan receivable should be derecognized and the real estate property recognized. The amended guidance clarifies that an in substance repossession or foreclosure occurs, and a creditor is considered to have received physical possession of residential real estate property collateralizing a consumer mortgage loan, upon either (1) the creditor obtaining legal title to the residential real estate property upon completion of a foreclosure or (2) the borrower conveying all interest in the residential real estate property to the creditor to satisfy that loan through completion of a deed in lieu of foreclosure or through a similar legal agreement. In addition, the amended guidance requires interim and annual disclosures of both (1) the amount of foreclosed residential real estate property held by the creditor and (2) the

recorded investment in consumer mortgage loans collateralized by residential real estate property that are in the process of foreclosure according to local requirements of the applicable jurisdiction. The amended guidance may be applied prospectively or through a modified retrospective approach and is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2014, with early adoption permitted. The Bancorp adopted the amended guidance on January 1, 2015 and the adoption of the amended guidance did not have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Reporting Discontinued Operations and Disclosures of Disposals of Components of an Entity

In April 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance that changes the criteria for reporting discontinued operations. The amended guidance requires a disposal of a component of an entity or a group of components of an entity to be reported in discontinued operations if the disposal represents a strategic shift that has (or will have) a major effect on an entity’s operations and financial results when any of the following occurs: 1) the component of an entity or group of components of an entity meets the criteria to be classified as held for sale; 2) the component of an entity or group of components of an entity is disposed of by sale; or 3) the component of an entity or group of components of an entity is disposed of other than by sale (for example, by abandonment or in a distribution to owners in a spinoff). The amended guidance requires an entity to present, for each comparative period, the assets and liabilities of a disposal group that includes a discontinued operation separately in the asset and liability sections, respectively, of the statement of financial position, as well as additional disclosures about discontinued operations. The amended guidance is to be applied prospectively for 1) all disposals (or classifications as held for sale) of components of an entity that occur within annual periods beginning on or after December 15, 2014, and interim periods within those years; and 2) all businesses or nonprofit activities that, on acquisition, are classified as held for sale that occur within annual periods beginning on or after December 15, 2014, and interim periods within those years. Early adoption is permitted, but only for disposals (or classifications as held for sale) that have not been reported in financial statements previously issued. The Bancorp adopted the amended guidance on January 1, 2015 and the adoption of the amended guidance did not have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Revenue from Contracts with Customers

In May 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance on revenue recognition from contracts with customers. The standard outlines a single comprehensive model for entities to use in accounting for revenue arising from contracts with customers and supersedes most contract revenue recognition guidance, including industry-specific guidance. The core principle of the amended guidance is that an entity should recognize revenue to depict the transfer of promised goods or services to customers in an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. The amended guidance is effective for annual reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2016, and interim periods within the reporting period, and should be applied either retrospectively to each prior reporting period presented or retrospectively with the cumulative effect of initially applying the amendments recognized at the date of initial application. Early adoption is prohibited. The Bancorp is currently in the process of evaluating the impact of the amended guidance on its Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

97  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Repurchase-to-Maturity Transactions, Repurchase Financings, and Disclosures

In June 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance that changes the accounting for repurchase-to-maturity transactions to secured borrowing accounting. The amended guidance also requires separate accounting for a transfer of a financial asset executed contemporaneously with a repurchase agreement with the same counterparty, which will result in secured borrowing accounting for the repurchase agreement. The amended guidance requires disclosures for certain transactions comprising: 1) a transfer of a financial asset accounted for as a sale and 2) an agreement with the same transferee entered into in contemplation of the initial transfer that results in the transferor retaining substantially all of the exposure to the economic return on the transferred financial asset throughout the term of the transaction. The amended guidance also requires new disclosures for repurchase agreements, securities lending transactions, and repurchase-to-maturity transactions accounted for as secured borrowings. The amended guidance is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2014, with early adoption prohibited. Changes in accounting for transactions outstanding on the effective date should be presented as a cumulative-effect adjustment to retained earnings as of the beginning of the period of adoption. The disclosures for certain transactions accounted for as a sale are required to be presented for interim and annual periods beginning after December 15, 2014, and the disclosures for repurchase agreements, securities lending transactions, and repurchase-to-maturity transactions accounted for as secured borrowings are required to be presented for annual periods beginning after December 15, 2014, and interim periods beginning after March 15, 2015. The Bancorp adopted the amended guidance on January 1, 2015 and the adoption of the amended guidance did not have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Accounting for Share-Based Payments When the Terms of the Award Provide That a Performance Target Could be Achieved after the Requisite Service Period

In June 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance which clarifies that a performance target that affects vesting and can be achieved after the requisite service period be treated as a performance condition. The amended guidance provides that an entity should apply existing guidance as it relates to awards with performance conditions that affect vesting to account for such awards. As such, the performance target should not be reflected in estimating the grant-date fair value of the award. Compensation cost should be recognized in the period in which it becomes probable that the performance target will be achieved and should represent the compensation cost attributable to the period(s) for which the requisite service has already been rendered. If the performance target becomes probable of being achieved before the end of the requisite service period, the remaining unrecognized compensation cost should be recognized prospectively over the remaining requisite service period. The total amount of compensation cost recognized during and after the requisite service period should reflect the number of awards that are expected to vest and should be adjusted to reflect those awards that ultimately vest. The requisite service period ends when the employee can cease rendering service and still be eligible to vest in the award if the performance target is achieved. The amended guidance is effective for annual periods, and interim periods within those annual periods, beginning after December 15, 2015, with early adoption permitted. The amended guidance may be adopted either prospectively to all awards granted or modified after the effective date or retrospectively to all awards with performance targets that are outstanding as of the beginning of the earliest annual period presented in the financial statements and to all new or

modified awards thereafter. If retrospective transition is adopted, the cumulative effect of applying the amended guidance as of the beginning of the earliest annual period presented in the financial statements should be recognized as an adjustment to the opening retained earnings balance at that date. The amended guidance is not expected to have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Measuring the Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities of a Consolidated Collateralized Financing Entity

In August 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance that provides an alternative to ASC Topic 820: Fair Value Measurement for measuring the financial assets and financial liabilities of a CFE, such as a collateralized debt obligation or a collateralized loan obligation entity consolidated as a VIE when a) all of the financial assets and the financial liabilities of that CFE are measured at fair value in the consolidated financial statements and b) the changes in the fair values of those financial assets and financial liabilities are reflected in earnings. If elected, the measurement alternative would allow the Bancorp to measure both the financial assets and the financial liabilities of the CFE by using the more observable of the fair value of the financial assets or the fair value of the financial liabilities and to eliminate any measurement difference. When the measurement alternative is not elected for a consolidated CFE within the scope of this amended guidance, the amendments clarify that 1) the fair value of the financial assets and the fair value of the financial liabilities of the consolidated CFE should be measured using the requirements of Topic 820 and 2) any difference in the fair value of the financial assets and the fair value of the financial liabilities of that consolidated CFE should be reflected in earnings and attributed to the Bancorp in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The amended guidance may be applied retrospectively or through a modified retrospective approach and is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning after December 15, 2015. The amended guidance is not expected to have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Classification of Certain Government-Guaranteed Mortgage Loans upon Foreclosure

In August 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance clarifying the classification of certain foreclosed mortgage loans that are either full or partially guaranteed under government programs. The amended guidance requires that a mortgage loan be derecognized and that a separate other receivable be recognized upon foreclosure if the following conditions are met: 1) the loan has a government guarantee that is not separable from the loan before foreclosure; 2) at the time of foreclosure, the creditor has the intent to convey the real estate property to the guarantor and make a claim on the guarantee, and the creditor has the ability to recover under that claim; and 3) at the time of foreclosure, any amount of the claim that is determined on the basis of the fair value of the real estate is fixed. Upon foreclosure, the separate other receivable would be measured based on the amount of the loan balance (principal and interest) expected to be recovered from the guarantor. The amended guidance may be applied prospectively or through a modified retrospective approach and is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2014, with early adoption permitted. The Bancorp adopted the amended guidance on January 1, 2015 and the adoption of the amended guidance did not have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

98  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Pushdown Accounting

In November 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance on whether and at what threshold an acquired entity that is a business or nonprofit activity can apply pushdown accounting in its separate financial statements upon the occurrence of an event in which an acquirer (an individual or an entity) obtains control of the acquired entity. The amended guidance provides that an acquired entity may elect the option to apply pushdown accounting in the reporting period in which the change-in-control event occurs. An acquired entity should determine whether to elect to apply pushdown accounting for each individual change-in-control event in which an acquirer obtains control of the acquired entity. If pushdown accounting is not applied in the reporting period in which the change-in-control event occurs, an acquired entity will have the option to elect to apply pushdown accounting in a subsequent reporting period to the acquired entity’s most recent change-in-control event. An election to apply pushdown accounting in a reporting period after the reporting period in which the change-in-control event occurred should be considered a change in accounting principle. If pushdown accounting is applied to an individual change-in-control event, that election is irrevocable. If an acquired entity elects the option to apply pushdown accounting in its separate financial statements, it should disclose information in the current reporting period that enables users of financial statements to evaluate the effect of pushdown accounting. The amended guidance was effective upon issuance, and the adoption of the amended guidance did not have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Determining Whether the Host Contract in a Hybrid Financial Instrument Issued in the Form of a Share is More Akin to Debt or Equity

In November 2014, the FASB issued amended guidance that clarifies how current GAAP should be interpreted in evaluating the economic characteristics and risks of a host contract in a hybrid financial instrument that is issued in the form of a share. Specifically, the amendments clarify that an entity should consider all relevant terms and features—including the embedded derivative features being evaluated for bifurcation—in evaluating the nature of the host contract. Furthermore, the amendments clarify that no single term or feature would necessarily determine the economic characteristics and risks of the host contract. Rather, the nature of the host contract depends upon the economic characteristics and risks of the entire hybrid financial instrument. The amended guidance is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning after December 15, 2015, with early adoption permitted. The effects of initially adopting the amended guidance should be applied on a modified retrospective basis to existing hybrid financial instruments issued in the form of a share as of the beginning of the fiscal year for which the amendments are effective and shall be reported as a cumulative-effect adjustment directly to retained earnings as of the beginning of the year of adoption. The amended guidance is not expected to have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Simplifying Income Statement Presentation by Eliminating the Concept of Extraordinary Items

In January 2015, the FASB issued amended guidance that eliminates the concept of extraordinary items from GAAP. Presently, an event or transaction is presumed to be an ordinary and usual activity of a reporting entity unless evidence clearly supports its classification as an extraordinary item, which must be both unusual in nature and infrequent in occurrence. An entity was required to segregate the extraordinary item from the results of ordinary operations and show the item separately in the income statement, net of tax, after income

from continuing operations. An entity was also required to disclose applicable income taxes and either present or disclose earnings-per-share data applicable to the extraordinary item. The presentation and disclosure guidance for items that are unusual in nature or occur infrequently will be retained and will be expanded to include items that are both unusual in nature and infrequently occurring. The amended guidance is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning after December 15, 2015, with early adoption permitted provided that the guidance is applied from the beginning of the fiscal year of adoption. The amended guidance may be applied prospectively or retrospectively to all periods presented in the financial statements. The amended guidance is not expected to have a material impact on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements

Amendments to the Consolidation Analysis

In February 2015, the FASB issued amended guidance that changes the analysis a reporting entity must perform to determine whether it should consolidate certain types of legal entities. The amended guidance 1) modifies the evaluation of whether limited partnerships and similar legal entities are VIEs or voting interest entities; 2) eliminates the presumption that a general partner should consolidate a limited partnership; 3) affects the consolidation analysis of reporting entities that are involved with VIEs, particularly those that have fee arrangements and related party relationships; and 4) provides a scope exception from consolidation guidance for reporting entities that are required to comply with or operate in accordance with requirements that are similar to those in Rule 2a-7 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 for registered money market funds. The amended guidance is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those years, beginning after December 15, 2015, with early adoption permitted. The amended guidance may be applied using either a retrospective approach or a modified retrospective approach with a cumulative-effect adjustment to equity as of the beginning of the fiscal year of adoption. The Bancorp is currently in the process of evaluating the impact of adopting the amended guidance on the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

99  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

2.  SUPPLEMENTAL CASH FLOW INFORMATION

 

Cash payments related to interest and income taxes in addition to noncash investing and financing activities are presented in the following table for the years ended December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014        2013        2012  

Cash payments:

Interest

$                     429     406     524  

Income taxes

  550                       535                       383  

Noncash Investing and Financing Activities:

Portfolio loans to loans held for sale

  855     641     62  

Loans held for sale to portfolio loans

  31     44     77  

Portfolio loans to OREO

  145     204     272  

Loans held for sale to OREO

  2     4     23  

Capital lease obligation

  15           -           -  

3.  RESTRICTIONS ON CASH AND DIVIDENDS

 

The FRB, under Regulation D, requires that banks hold cash in reserve against deposit liabilities, known as the reserve requirement. The reserve requirement is calculated based on a two-week average of daily net transaction account deposits as defined by the FRB and may be satisfied with vault cash. When vault cash is not sufficient to meet the reserve requirement, the remaining amount must be satisfied with funds held at the FRB. At December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary reserve requirement was $1.8 billion and $1.6 billion, respectively. Vault cash was not sufficient to meet the total reserve requirement; therefore, as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary satisfied the remaining reserve requirement with $1.0 billion and $942 million, respectively, of the Bancorp’s total deposit at the FRB. The noninterest-bearing portion of the Bancorp’s deposit at the FRB is held in cash and due from banks in the Consolidated Balance Sheets while the interest bearing portion is held in other short-term investments in the Consolidated Balance Sheets.

The dividends paid by the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary are subject to regulations and limitations prescribed by state and federal supervisory agencies. The Bancorp’s banking subsidiary paid the Bancorp’s nonbank subsidiary holding company, which in turn paid the Bancorp $1.1 billion and $859 million in dividends during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

In 2011, the FRB adopted the capital plan rule, which requires BHCs with consolidated assets of $50 billion or more to submit annual capital plans to the FRB for review. Under the rule, these capital plans must include detailed descriptions of the following: the BHC’s internal processes for assessing capital adequacy; the policies governing capital actions such as common stock issuances, dividends, and share repurchases; and all planned capital actions over a nine-quarter planning horizon. Further, each BHC must also report to the FRB the results of stress tests conducted by the BHC under a number of scenarios that assess the sources and uses of capital under baseline and stressed economic scenarios. The FRB launched the 2014 stress testing program and CCAR on November 1, 2013, with firm submissions of stress test results and capital plans due to the FRB on January 6, 2014, which the Bancorp submitted as required.

The FRB’s review of the capital plan assessed the comprehensiveness of the capital plan, the reasonableness of the assumptions and the analysis underlying the capital plan. Additionally, the FRB reviewed the robustness of the capital adequacy process, the capital policy and the Bancorp’s ability to maintain capital above the minimum regulatory capital ratios and above a Tier I common ratio of five percent on a pro forma basis under expected and stressful conditions throughout the planning horizon. The FRB assessed the Bancorp’s strategies for addressing

proposed revisions to the regulatory capital framework agreed upon by the BCBS and requirements arising from the DFA.

On March 26, 2014, the FRB announced it had completed the 2014 CCAR. For BHCs that proposed capital distributions in their plans, the FRB either objected to the plan or provided a non-objection whereby the FRB permitted the proposed 2014 capital distributions. The FRB indicated to the Bancorp that it did not object to the following proposed capital actions for the period beginning April 1, 2014 and ending March 31, 2015:

 

  (a)

The potential increase in the quarterly common stock dividend to $0.13 per share;

  (b)

The potential repurchase of common shares in an amount up to $669 million;

  (c)

The additional ability to repurchase shares in the amount of any after-tax gains from the sale of Vantiv, Inc. common stock; and

  (d)

The issuance of $300 million in preferred stock.

As contemplated by the 2014 CCAR, during the second quarter of 2014, the Bancorp increased the quarterly common stock dividend from $0.12 to $0.13 per share, entered into a $150 million accelerated share repurchase transaction, and issued 300,000 depositary shares of non-cumulative perpetual preferred stock for net proceeds of $297 million. Additionally, during the third and fourth quarters of 2014, the Bancorp entered into accelerated share repurchase transactions of $225 million and $180 million, respectively.

Additionally, as a CCAR institution, the Bancorp is required to disclose the results of its company-run stress test under the supervisory severely adverse scenario, and to provide information related to the types of risk included in its stress testing; a general description of the methodologies used; estimates of certain financial results and pro forma capital ratios; and an explanation of the most significant causes of changes in regulatory capital ratios. On March 26, 2014 the Bancorp publicly disclosed the results of its company-run stress test as required by the DFA stress testing rules.

The BHCs that participated in the 2014 CCAR, including the Bancorp, are required to conduct mid-cycle company-run stress tests using data as of March 31, 2014. The stress tests must be based on three BHC defined scenarios – baseline, adverse and severely adverse. As required, the Bancorp reported the mid-cycle stress test results to the FRB on July 7, 2014. These results represented estimates of the Bancorp’s results from the second quarter of 2014

 

 

100  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

through the second quarter of 2016 under the severely adverse scenario, which is considered highly unlikely to occur.

The FRB launched the 2015 stress testing program and CCAR on October 23, 2014. The stress testing results and capital plan were submitted by the Bancorp to the FRB on January 5, 2015.

The FRB expects to release summary results of the 2015 stress testing program and CCAR in March of 2015. The results will include supervisory projections of capital ratios, losses and revenues

under the supervisory adverse and supervisory severely adverse scenarios. The FRB will also issue an objection or non-objection to each participating institution’s capital plan submitted under CCAR. Additionally, as a CCAR institution, the Bancorp will be required to publicly disclose the results of its company run stress test as required by the DFA, within 15 days of the date the FRB discloses the results of its DFA supervisory stress test.

 

 

4.  SECURITIES

 

The following table provides the amortized cost, fair value and unrealized gains and losses for the major categories of the available-for-sale and other and held-to-maturity securities portfolios as of December 31:

 

 

 
      2014   2013  
($ in millions)    

 Amortized

 Cost

 

 Unrealized

Gains

 

 Unrealized

Losses

 

 Fair

 Value

 

  Amortized

  Cost

 

 Unrealized

Gains

 

 Unrealized

Losses

 

  Fair

  Value

 

 

 

Available-for-sale and other:

U.S. Treasury and federal agencies

$        1,545         87       -         1,632         1,549       121       -         1,670      

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

  185         7       -         192         187       5       -         192      

Mortgage-backed securities:

Agency residential mortgage-backed
securities (a)

  11,968         437       (1)        12,404         12,294       140       (150)        12,284      

Agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

  4,465         101       (1)        4,565         -        -        -         -       

Non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

  1,489         61       -         1,550         1,368       28       (1)        1,395      

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  1,324         40       (2)        1,362         2,146       48       (7)        2,187      

Equity securities (b)

  701         3       (1)        703         865       5       (1)        869      

 

 

Total

$        21,677         736       (5)            22,408         18,409       347       (159)            18,597      

 

 

Held-to-maturity:

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

$        186         -        -         186         207       -        -         207      

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  1         -        -         1         1       -        -         1      

 

 

Total

$        187         -        -         187         208       -        -         208      

 

 
(a)

Includes interest-only mortgage-backed securities of $175 and $262 as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively, recorded at fair value with fair value changes recorded in securities gains, net and securities gains, net – non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

(b)

Equity securities consist of FHLB and FRB restricted stock holdings of $248 and $352 , respectively, at December 31, 2014 and, $402 and $349, respectively, at December 31, 2013, that are carried at cost, and certain mutual fund and equity security holdings.

The following table presents realized gains and losses that were recognized in income from available-for-sale securities for the years ended December 31:

 

 

 

($ in millions)

          2014       2013       2012         

 

 

Realized gains

$ 70     77     75       

Realized losses

  (9             (102             (2)       

OTTI

  (24   (74   (58)       

 

 

Net realized gains (losses) (a)

$ 37     (99   15       

 

 
(a)

Excludes net losses on interest-only mortgage-backed securities of $17 for the year ended December 31, 2014 and net gains on interest-only mortgage-backed securities of  $129 for the year ended December 31, 2013.

 

Trading securities totaled $360 million as of December 31, 2014, compared to $343 million at December 31, 2013. Gross realized gains on trading securities were $4 million, $1 million and $2 million for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Gross realized losses on trading securities were immaterial to the Bancorp for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012. Net unrealized losses on trading securities were $3

million at December 31, 2014 and net unrealized gains on trading securities were $3 million and $1 million at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

At December 31, 2014 and 2013 securities with a fair value of $14.2 billion and $11.6 billion, respectively, were pledged to secure borrowings, public deposits, trust funds, derivative contracts and for other purposes as required or permitted by law.

 

 

101  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The expected maturity distribution of the Bancorp’s mortgage-backed securities and the contractual maturity distribution of the Bancorp’s available-for-sale and other and held-to-maturity securities as of December 31, 2014 are shown in the following table:

 

                     Available-for-Sale and Other                                  Held-to-Maturity                  
($ in millions)            Amortized Cost      Fair Value               Amortized Cost      Fair Value      

Debt securities: (a)

              

Less than 1 year

  $     168                   169               148                148              

1-5 years

      6,583                   6,841               21                21              

5-10 years

      12,784                   13,190               17                17              

Over 10 years

      1,441                   1,505               1                1              

Equity securities

      701                   703               -                -              

Total

  $     21,677                   22,408                 187                187              
(a)

Actual maturities may differ from contractual maturities when there exists a right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.

The following table provides the fair value and gross unrealized losses on available-for-sale and other securities in an unrealized loss position, aggregated by investment category and length of time the individual securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position as of December 31:

 

                    Less than 12 months                  12 months or more            Total  
($ in millions)        Fair Value      Unrealized
Losses
     Fair Value      Unrealized
Losses
     Fair Value      Unrealized     
Losses     
 

2014

                  

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

 

$

    73         (1)             -              -              73         (1)           

Agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

      355         (1)             -              -              355         (1)           

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

      286         (1)             74             (1)             360         (2)           

Equity securities

              -              30             (1)             30         (1)           

Total

 

$

    714         (3)             104             (2)             818         (5)           

2013

                  

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

 

$

    7,221         (150)             1             -              7,222         (150)           

Non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

      168         (1)             28             -              196         (1)           

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

      427         (4)             104             (3)             531         (7)           

Equity securities

      33         (1)             4             -              37         (1)           

Total

 

$

    7,849         (156)             137             (3)             7,986         (159)           

 

Other-Than-Temporary Impairments

The Bancorp recognized $24 million, $74 million and $58 million of OTTI on its available-for-sale and other debt securities, included in securities gains, net and securities gains, net – non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights, in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Statements of Income during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The Bancorp did not recognize OTTI on any of its available-for-sale equity securities or held-to-maturity debt securities for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012. Less than one percent of unrealized losses in the available-for-sale securities portfolio were represented by non-rated securities at December 31, 2014 and 2013.

 

 

102  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

5. LOANS AND LEASES

 

 

The Bancorp diversifies its loan and lease portfolio by offering a variety of loan and lease products with various payment terms and rate structures. Lending activities are concentrated within those states in which the Bancorp has banking centers and are primarily located in the Midwestern and Southeastern regions of the United States. The Bancorp’s commercial loan portfolio consists of lending to various industry types. Management periodically reviews the

performance of its loan and lease products to evaluate whether they are performing within acceptable interest rate and credit risk levels and changes are made to underwriting policies and procedures as needed. The Bancorp maintains an allowance to absorb loan and lease losses inherent in the portfolio. For further information on credit quality and the ALLL, refer to Note 6.

 

 

The following table provides a summary of the total loans and leases classified by primary purpose as of December 31:

 

 

 
($ in millions) 2014       2013                

 

 

Loans and leases held for sale:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 36     31              

Commercial mortgage loans

  11     3              

Commercial construction loans

  2     2              

Commercial leases

  1     1              

Residential mortgage loans

  1,193     890              

Other consumer loans and leases

  18     17              

 

 

Total loans and leases held for sale

$ 1,261     944              

 

 

Portfolio loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 40,765     39,316              

Commercial mortgage loans

  7,399     8,066              

Commercial construction loans

  2,069     1,039              

Commercial leases

  3,720     3,625              

 

 

Total commercial loans and leases

  53,953     52,046              

 

 

Residential mortgage loans

  12,389     12,680              

Home equity

  8,886     9,246              

Automobile loans

  12,037     11,984              

Credit card

  2,401     2,294              

Other consumer loans and leases

  418     364              

 

 

Total consumer loans and leases

  36,131     36,568              

 

 

Total portfolio loans and leases

$             90,084     88,614              

 

 

 

Total portfolio loans and leases are recorded net of unearned income, which totaled $665 million as of December 31, 2014 and $700 million as of December 31, 2013. Additionally, portfolio loans and leases are recorded net of unamortized premiums and discounts, deferred loan fees and costs, and fair value adjustments (associated with acquired loans or loans designated as fair value

upon origination) which totaled a net premium of $169 million and $111 million as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

The Bancorp’s FHLB and FRB advances are generally secured by loans. The Bancorp had loans of $11.1 billion and $10.9 billion at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively, pledged at the FHLB, and loans of $33.9 billion and $33.5 billion at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively, pledged at the FRB.

 

 

The following table presents a summary of the total loans and leases owned by the Bancorp as of and for the years ended December 31:

 

      Balance   90 Days Past Due
and Still Accruing
 

Net

Charge-Offs

 
($ in millions)    2014            2013           2014   2013   2014   2013            

Commercial and industrial loans

$   40,801           39,347            $ -     -   $ 222     168            

Commercial mortgage loans

  7,410           8,069              -     -     26     47            

Commercial construction loans

  2,071           1,041              -     -     12     4            

Commercial leases

  3,721           3,626              -     -     1     1            

Residential mortgage loans

  13,582           13,570              56     66     126     60            

Home equity

  8,886           9,246              -     -     59     97            

Automobile loans

  12,037           11,984              8     8     27     22            

Credit card

  2,401           2,294              23     29     82     78            

Other consumer loans and leases

    436           381              -     -     20     24            

Total loans and leases

$   91,345           89,558            $             87     103   $             575     501            

Less: Loans held for sale

$   1,261           944           

Total portfolio loans and leases

$               90,084           88,614                                   

 

103  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

The Bancorp engages in commercial lease products primarily related to the financing of commercial equipment. The Bancorp had $2.8 billion and $2.7 billion of direct financing leases, net of unearned income, at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively, and $874 million and $881 million of leveraged leases, net of unearned income, at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

Pre-tax income from leveraged leases was $25 million during both the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 and the tax effect of this income was an expense of $9 million during both the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013.

 

The following table provides the components of the investment in portfolio commercial lease financing at December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014        2013             

Rentals receivable, net of principal and interest on nonrecourse debt

$ 3,589     3,556           

Estimated residual value of leased assets

  779     754           

Initial direct cost, net of amortization

  17     15           

Gross investment in lease financing

  4,385     4,325           

Unearned income

  (665   (700)           

Net investment in lease financing (a)

$              3,720     3,625           
(a)

The accumulated allowance for uncollectible minimum lease payments was $45 million and $53 million at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

The Bancorp periodically reviews residual values associated with its leasing portfolio. Declines in residual values that are deemed to be other-than-temporary are recognized as a loss. The Bancorp recognized $4 million and $13 million of residual value write-downs related to commercial leases for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. The residual value write-downs related

to commercial leases are recorded in corporate banking revenue in the Consolidated Statements of Income. At December 31, 2014, the minimum future lease payments receivable for each of the years 2015 through 2019 was $681 million, $625 million, $501 million, $405 million and $329 million, respectively.

 

 

6. CREDIT QUALITY AND THE ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN AND LEASE LOSSES

 

The Bancorp disaggregates ALLL balances and transactions in the ALLL by portfolio segment. Credit quality related disclosures for loans and leases are further disaggregated by class.

Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses

The following tables summarize transactions in the ALLL by portfolio segment:

 

For the year ended December 31, 2014

($ in millions)

Commercial   Residential
Mortgage
  Consumer   Unallocated   Total           

Transactions in the ALLL:

Balance at January 1

$ 1,058          189          225          110          1,582           

Losses charged-off

  (299)          (139)          (241)          -            (679)           

Recoveries of losses previously charged-off

  38          13          53          -            104           

Provision for loan and lease losses

  78          41          200          (4)          315           

Balance at December 31

$ 875          104          237          106          1,322           

For the year ended December 31, 2013

($ in millions)

Commercial   Residential
Mortgage
  Consumer   Unallocated   Total           

Transactions in the ALLL:

Balance at January 1

$ 1,236          229          278          111          1,854           

Losses charged-off

  (284)          (70)          (283)          -            (637)          

Recoveries of losses previously charged-off

  64          10          62          -            136           

Provision for loan and lease losses

  42          20          168          (1)          229           

Balance at December 31

$ 1,058          189          225          110          1,582           

For the year ended December 31, 2012

($ in millions)

Commercial   Residential
Mortgage
  Consumer   Unallocated   Total           

Transactions in the ALLL:

Balance at January 1

$ 1,527          227          365          136          2,255           

Losses charged-off

  (358)          (129)          (350)          -            (837)          

Recoveries of losses previously charged-off

  61          7          65          -            133           

Provision for loan and lease losses

  6          124          198          (25)          303           

Balance at December 31

$              1,236          229          278          111          1,854           

 

104  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following tables provide a summary of the ALLL and related loans and leases classified by portfolio segment:

 

As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) Commercial   Residential
Mortgage
  Consumer   Unallocated   Total        

ALLL: (a)

Individually evaluated for impairment

$ 179   (c)         65        61       -           305          

Collectively evaluated for impairment

  696           39        176       -           911          

Unallocated

  -           -        -       106         106          

Total ALLL

$ 875           104        237       106         1,322          

Portfolio loans and leases: (b)

Individually evaluated for impairment

$ 1,260   (c)         518        483       -           2,261          

Collectively evaluated for impairment

  52,693           11,761        23,259       -           87,713          

Loans acquired with deteriorated credit quality

  -           2        -       -           2          

Total portfolio loans and leases

$           53,953           12,281        23,742       -           89,976          
(a)

Includes $6 related to leveraged leases.

(b)

Excludes $108 of residential mortgage loans measured at fair value, and includes $874 of leveraged leases, net of unearned income.

(c)

Includes five restructured nonaccrual loans at December 31, 2014 associated with a consolidated VIE, in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party, with a recorded investment of $28 and an allowance of $10 .

 

As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions) Commercial  

 

Residential
Mortgage

  Consumer   Unallocated   Total       

ALLL: (a)

Individually evaluated for impairment

$ 186  (c)         139        53         -           378          

Collectively evaluated for impairment

  872            50        172         -           1,094          

Unallocated

  -            -        -          110         110          

Total ALLL

$ 1,058            189        225         110         1,582          

Portfolio loans and leases: (b)

Individually evaluated for impairment

$ 1,560  (c)         1,325        496         -           3,381          

Collectively evaluated for impairment

  50,486            11,259        23,392         -           85,137          

Loans acquired with deteriorated credit quality

  -            4        -          -           4          

Total portfolio loans and leases

$          52,046            12,588        23,888         -           88,522          
(a)

Includes $9 related to leveraged leases.

(b)

Excludes $92 of residential mortgage loans measured at fair value, and includes $881 of leveraged leases, net of unearned income.

(c)

Includes five restructured loans at December 31, 2013 associated with a consolidated VIE, in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party, with a recorded investment of $28 and an allowance of $11.

 

CREDIT RISK PROFILE

Commercial Portfolio Segment

For purposes of monitoring the credit quality and risk characteristics of its commercial portfolio segment, the Bancorp disaggregates the segment into the following classes: commercial and industrial, commercial mortgage owner-occupied, commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied, commercial construction and commercial leasing.

To facilitate the monitoring of credit quality within the commercial portfolio segment, and for purposes of analyzing historical loss rates used in the determination of the ALLL for the commercial portfolio segment, the Bancorp utilizes the following categories of credit grades: pass, special mention, substandard, doubtful or loss. The five categories, which are derived from standard regulatory rating definitions, are assigned upon initial approval of credit to borrowers and updated periodically thereafter.

Pass ratings, which are assigned to those borrowers that do not have identified potential or well defined weaknesses and for which there is a high likelihood of orderly repayment, are updated at least annually based on the size and credit characteristics of the borrower. All other categories are updated on a quarterly basis during the month preceding the end of the calendar quarter.

The Bancorp assigns a special mention rating to loans and leases that have potential weaknesses that deserve management’s close attention. If left uncorrected, these potential weaknesses may, at some future date, result in the deterioration of the repayment

prospects for the loan or lease or the Bancorp’s credit position.

The Bancorp assigns a substandard rating to loans and leases that are inadequately protected by the current sound worth and paying capacity of the borrower or of the collateral pledged. Substandard loans and leases have well defined weaknesses or weaknesses that could jeopardize the orderly repayment of the debt. Loans and leases in this grade also are characterized by the distinct possibility that the Bancorp will sustain some loss if the deficiencies noted are not addressed and corrected.

The Bancorp assigns a doubtful rating to loans and leases that have all the attributes of a substandard rating with the added characteristic that the weaknesses make collection or liquidation in full, on the basis of currently existing facts, conditions, and values, highly questionable and improbable. The possibility of loss is extremely high, but because of certain important and reasonable specific pending factors that may work to the advantage of and strengthen the credit quality of the loan or lease, its classification as an estimated loss is deferred until its more exact status may be determined. Pending factors may include a proposed merger or acquisition, liquidation proceeding, capital injection, perfecting liens on additional collateral or refinancing plans.

Loans and leases classified as loss are considered uncollectible and are charged-off in the period in which they are determined to be uncollectible. Because loans and leases in this category are fully charged-off, they are not included in the following tables.

 

 

105  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following tables summarize the credit risk profile of the Bancorp’s commercial portfolio segment, by class:

 

As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) Pass           Special
Mention
  Substandard   Doubtful   Total          

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 38,013     1,352       1,400           -        40,765      

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  3,430     137       267           -       3,834      

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  3,198     76       284           7       3,565      

Commercial construction loans

  1,966     65       38           -       2,069      

Commercial leases

  3,678     9       33           -       3,720      

Total

$               50,285     1,639       2,022           7       53,953      

 

As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions) Pass           Special
Mention
  Substandard   Doubtful   Total          

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 36,776     1,118       1,419           3       39,316      

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  3,866     209       415           17       4,507      

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  2,879     248       431           1       3,559      

Commercial construction loans

  855     32       152           -       1,039      

Commercial leases

  3,546     56       23           -       3,625      

Total

$               47,922     1,663       2,440           21       52,046      

 

Consumer Portfolio Segment

For purposes of monitoring the credit quality and risk characteristics of its consumer portfolio segment, the Bancorp disaggregates the segment into the following classes: home equity, automobile loans, credit card, and other consumer loans and leases. The Bancorp’s residential mortgage portfolio segment is also a separate class.

The Bancorp considers repayment performance as the best indicator of credit quality for residential mortgage and consumer

loans, which includes both the delinquency status and performing versus nonperforming status of the loans. The delinquency status of all residential mortgage and consumer loans is presented by class in the age analysis section while the performing versus nonperforming status is presented in the table below. Refer to the nonaccrual loans and leases section of Note 1 for additional delinquency and nonperforming information.

 

 

The following table presents a summary of the Bancorp’s residential mortgage and consumer portfolio segments, by class, disaggregated into performing versus nonperforming status as of December 31:

 

      2014   2013
($ in millions)    Performing   Nonperforming   Performing   Nonperforming    

Residential mortgage loans (a)

$   12,204        77             12,423      165

Home equity

  8,793        93             9,153        93

Automobile loans

  12,036        1             11,982          2

Credit card

  2,360        41             2,261        33

Other consumer loans and leases

  418        -                364      -

Total

$             35,811        212             36,183      293
(a)

Excludes $108 and $92 of loans measured at fair value at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

106  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Age Analysis of Past Due Loans and Leases

The following tables summarize the Bancorp’s recorded investment in portfolio loans and leases by age and class:

 

                                     Past Due                                        

As of December 31, 2014

($ in millions)

Current
Loans and
Leases (c)
  30-89
Days (c)
 

90 Days

and

Greater (c)

 

Total

Past Due

 

Total Loans

and Leases

  90 Days Past  
Due and Still  
Accruing  
 

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 40,651     29     85     114     40,765     -          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  3,774     7     53     60     3,834     -          

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  3,537     11     17     28     3,565     -          

Commercial construction loans

  2,069     -     -     -     2,069     -          

Commercial leases

  3,717     3     -     3     3,720     -          

Residential mortgage loans (a)(b)

  12,109     38     134     172     12,281     56          

Consumer:

Home equity

  8,710     100     76     176     8,886     -          

Automobile loans

  11,953     74     10     84     12,037     8          

Credit card

  2,335     34     32     66     2,401     23          

Other consumer loans and leases

  417     1     -     1     418     -          

Total portfolio loans and leases (a)

$          89,272     297     407     704     89,976     87          
(a)

Excludes $108 of loans measured at fair value.

(b)

Information for current residential mortgage loans includes loans whose repayments are insured by the FHA or guaranteed by the VA. As of December 31, 2014, $99 of these loans were 30-89 days past due and $373 were 90 days or more past due. The Bancorp recognized $14 of losses for the year ended December 31, 2014 due to claim denials and curtailments associated with these insured or guaranteed loans.

(c)

Includes accrual and nonaccrual loans and leases.

 

 

 
     

 

                             Past Due                            

         
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions) Current
Loans and
Leases (c)
  30-89
Days (c)
 

90 Days

and

Greater (c)

  Total
Past Due
  Total Loans
and Leases
  90 Days Past  
Due and Still  
Accruing  
 

 

 

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 39,118     53     145     198     39,316     -          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  4,423     15     69     84     4,507     -          

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  3,515     9     35     44     3,559     -          

Commercial construction loans

  1,010     -     29     29     1,039     -          

Commercial leases

  3,620     -     5     5     3,625     -          

Residential mortgage loans (a)(b)

  12,284     73     231     304     12,588     66          

Consumer:

Home equity

  9,058     102     86     188     9,246     -          

Automobile loans

  11,919     55     10     65     11,984     8          

Credit card

  2,225     36     33     69     2,294     29          

Other consumer loans and leases

  362     2     -     2     364     -          

 

 

Total portfolio loans and leases (a)

$         87,534     345     643     988     88,522     103          

 

 
(a)

Excludes $92 of loans measured at fair value.

(b)

Information for current residential mortgage loans includes loans whose repayments are insured by the FHA or guaranteed by the VA. As of December 31, 2013, $81 of these loans were 30-89 days past due and $378 were 90 days or more past due. The Bancorp recognized $5 of losses for the year ended December 31, 2013 due to claim denials and curtailments associated with these insured or guaranteed loans.

(c)

Includes accrual and nonaccrual loans and leases.

 

107  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Impaired Loans and Leases

Larger commercial loans and leases included within aggregate borrower relationship balances exceeding $1 million that exhibit probable or observed credit weaknesses are subject to individual review for impairment. The Bancorp also performs an individual review on loans and leases that are restructured in a TDR. The Bancorp considers the current value of collateral, credit quality of any guarantees, the loan structure, and other factors when

evaluating whether an individual loan or lease is impaired. Other factors may include the geography and industry of the borrower, size and financial condition of the borrower, cash flow and leverage of the borrower, and the Bancorp’s evaluation of the borrower’s management. Smaller balance homogenous loans or leases that are collectively evaluated for impairment are not included in the following tables.

 

 

The following tables summarize the Bancorp’s impaired loans and leases (by class) that were subject to individual review, which includes all portfolio loans and leases restructured in a TDR as of December 31:

 

 

 

2014

($ in millions)

Unpaid 
Principal
Balance 
  Recorded 
Investment
  ALLL          

 

 

With a related ALLL recorded:

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 598     486       149          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans (b)

  54     46       14          

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  69     57       4          

Commercial construction loans

  18     15       -          

Commercial leases

  3          2          

Restructured residential mortgage loans

  388     383       65          

Restructured consumer:

Home equity

  203     201       42          

Automobile loans

  19     19       3          

Credit card

  78     78       16          

 

 

Total impaired loans and leases with a related ALLL

$             1,430     1,288       295          

 

 

With no related ALLL recorded:

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 311     276       -          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  72     68       -          

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  251     231       -          

Commercial construction loans

  48     48       -          

Commercial leases

  2          -          

Restructured residential mortgage loans

  155     135       -          

Restructured consumer:

Home equity

  183     180       -          

Automobile loans

  5          -          

 

 

Total impaired loans and leases with no related ALLL

  1,027     945       -          

 

 

Total impaired loans and leases

$ 2,457     2,233  (a)     295          

 

 
(a)

Includes $869 , $485 and $420 , respectively, of commercial, residential mortgage and consumer TDRs on accrual status; $214 , $33 and $63 , respectively, of commercial, residential mortgage and consumer TDRs on nonaccrual status.

(b)

Excludes five restructured nonaccrual loans at December 31, 2014 associated with a consolidated VIE, in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party, with an unpaid principal balance of $28 , a recorded investment of $28 , and an allowance of $10 .

 

108  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

2013

($ in millions)

 

  Unpaid
      Principal    
  Balance

  Recorded
    Investment    
      ALLL          

With a related ALLL recorded:

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 870             759            145          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans (b)

  85             74            11          

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  154             134            14          

Commercial construction loans

  68             54            5          

Commercial leases

  12             12            -          

Restructured residential mortgage loans

  1,081             1,052            139          

Restructured consumer:

Home equity

  377             373            39          

Automobile loans

  23             23            3          

Credit card

  59             58            11          

Total impaired loans and leases with a related ALLL

$           2,729             2,539            367          

With no related ALLL recorded:

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 181             177            -          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  106             98            -          

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  154             147            -          

Commercial construction loans

  77             63            -          

Commercial leases

  14             14            -          

Restructured residential mortgage loans

  313             273            -          

Restructured consumer:

Home equity

  43             39            -          

Automobile loans

  3             3            -          

Total impaired loans and leases with no related ALLL

  891             814            -          

Total impaired loans and leases

$ 3,620             3,353  (a)         367          
(a)

Includes $869, $1,241 and $444, respectively, of commercial, residential mortgage and consumer TDRs on accrual status; $228, $84 and $52, respectively, of commercial, residential mortgage and consumer TDRs on nonaccrual status.

(b)

Excludes five restructured nonaccrual loans at December 31, 2013 associated with a consolidated VIE, in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party, with an unpaid principal balance of $28, a recorded investment of $28, and an allowance of $11.

The following table summarizes the Bancorp’s average impaired loans and leases (by class) and interest income (by class) for the year ended December 31:

 

   2014      2013   2012  
($ in millions)     Average
    Recorded
    Investment
      Interest  
    Income  
    Recognized  
         Average
    Recorded
    Investment
      Interest 
    Income 
    Recognized 
      Average
    Recorded
    Investment
      Interest       
    Income       
     Recognized       
 

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 786        25          517         16     448         4        

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans (a)

  149        4          146         4     156         4        

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  268        8          321         8     361         10        

Commercial construction loans

  92        2          108         4     160         2        

Commercial leases

  13        -          11         -     10         -        

Restructured residential mortgage loans

  1,273        54          1,311         53     1,276         47        

Restructured consumer:

Home equity

  394        20          429         23     439         24        

Automobile loans

  24        1          29         1     38         1        

Credit card

  62        5          68         4     80         4        

Other consumer loans and leases

  -        -            2         -     1         -        

Total impaired loans and leases

$         3,061        119            2,942         113     2,969         96        
(a)

Excludes five restructured nonaccrual loans at December 31, 2014 associated with a consolidated VIE, in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party, with an average recorded investment of $28 for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 and an immaterial amount of interest income recognized for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013.

 

109  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Nonperforming Assets

Nonperforming assets include nonaccrual loans and leases for which ultimate collectability of the full amount of the principal and/or interest is uncertain; commercial and credit card TDRs which have not yet met the requirements to be classified as a performing asset; consumer TDRs which are 90 days past due based on the restructured terms unless the loan is both well-secured and in the process of collection; and certain other assets, including OREO and other repossessed property. The following table summarizes the Bancorp’s nonperforming loans and leases, by class, as of December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014               2013              

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

$ 228               281            

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans (a)

  78               95            

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  57               48            

Commercial construction loans

  -               29            

Commercial leases

  4               5            

Total commercial loans and leases

  367               458            

Residential mortgage loans

  77               166            

Consumer:

Home equity

  93               93            

Automobile loans

  1               1            

Credit card

  41               33            

Total consumer loans and leases

  135               127            

Total nonperforming loans and leases (b)(c)

$               579               751            

OREO and other repossessed property (d)

  165                           229            
(a)

Excludes $21 of restructured nonaccrual loans at December 31, 2014 and 2013 associated with a consolidated VIE in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due the risk being assumed by a third party.

(b)

Excludes $39 and $6 of nonaccrual loans held for sale at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

(c)

Includes $9 and $10 of nonaccrual government insured commercial loans whose repayments are insured by the SBA at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively, and $4 and $2 of restructured nonaccrual government insured commercial loans at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

(d)

Excludes $71 and $77 of OREO related to government insured loans at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

Troubled Debt Restructurings

If a borrower is experiencing financial difficulty, the Bancorp may consider, in certain circumstances, modifying the terms of their loan to maximize collection of amounts due. Within each of the Bancorp’s loan classes, TDRs typically involve either a reduction of the stated interest rate of the loan, an extension of the loan’s maturity date(s) with a stated rate lower than the current market rate for a new loan with similar risk, or in limited circumstances, a reduction of the principal balance of the loan or the loan’s accrued interest. Modifying the terms of a loan may result in an increase or decrease to the ALLL depending upon the terms modified, the method used to measure the ALLL for a loan prior to modification, and whether any charge-offs were recorded on the loan before or at the time of modification. Refer to the ALLL section of Note 1 for information on the Bancorp’s ALLL methodology. Upon modification of a loan, the Bancorp measures the related impairment as the difference between the estimated future cash

flows expected to be collected on the modified loan, discounted at the original effective yield of the loan, and the carrying value of the loan. The resulting measurement may result in the need for minimal or no valuation allowance because it is probable that all cash flows will be collected under the modified terms of the loan. In addition, if the stated interest rate was increased in a TDR, the cash flows on the modified loan, using the pre-modification interest rate as the discount rate, often exceed the recorded investment of the loan. Conversely, upon a modification that reduces the stated interest rate on a loan, the Bancorp recognizes an impairment loss as an increase to the ALLL.

If a TDR involves a reduction of the principal balance of the loan or the loan’s accrued interest, that amount is charged-off to the ALLL. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp had $89 million and $86 million in line of credit and letter of credit commitments, respectively, to lend additional funds to borrowers whose terms have been modified in a TDR.

 

 

110  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following tables provide a summary of loans modified in a TDR by the Bancorp during the years ended December 31:

 

2014 ($ in millions) (a)   Number of loans
modified in a TDR
during the year (b)
   

Recorded investment
in loans modified

in a TDR

during the year

    Increase
(Decrease)
to ALLL upon
modification
    Charge-offs    
recognized upon    
modification    
 

Commercial:

       

Commercial and industrial loans

    128       $            230         12            6          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

    32       54         (1)            -           

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

    28       30         (3)            2          

Residential mortgage loans

    1,093       160         8            -           

Consumer:

       

Home equity

    284       12         -             -           

Automobile loans

    608       10         1            -           

Credit card

    8,929       52         10            -           

Total portfolio loans and leases

    11,102       $            548         27            8          
       
2013 ($ in millions) (a)   Number of loans
modified in a TDR
during the year (b)
   

Recorded investment

in loans modified

in a TDR

during the year

   

Increase
(Decrease)

to ALLL upon
modification

    Charge-offs    
recognized upon    
modification    
 

Commercial:

       

Commercial and industrial loans

    146       $            604         39            44          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans (c)

    65       19         (2)            -           

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

    59       72         (7)            -           

Commercial construction loans

    4       34         (2)            -           

Commercial leases

    1       2         (5)            -           

Residential mortgage loans

    1,620       249         28            -           

Consumer:

       

Home equity

    695       37         (1)            -           

Automobile loans

    499       14         1            -           

Credit card

    8,202       50         7            -           

Total portfolio loans and leases

    11,291       $         1,081         58            44          
       
2012 ($ in millions) (a)  

Number of loans

modified in a TDR

during the year (b)

   

Recorded investment

in loans modified

in a TDR

during the year

    Increase
(Decrease)
to ALLL upon
modification
    Charge-offs    
recognized upon    
modification    
 

Commercial:

       

Commercial and industrial loans

    108       $              84         (7)            9          

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

    67       53         (8)            2          

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

    67       91         (7)            -           

Commercial construction loans

    17       38         (4)            -           

Commercial leases

    8       7         1            -           

Residential mortgage loans

    1,758       340         35            -           

Consumer:

       

Home equity

    1,343       82         1            -           

Automobile loans

    1,289       23         2            -           

Credit card

    11,407       75         11            -           

Total portfolio loans and leases

    16,064       $            793         24            11          
(a)

Excludes all loans and leases held for sale and loans acquired with deteriorated credit quality.

(b)

Represents number of loans post-modification.

(c)

Excludes five loans modified in a TDR during the year ended December 31, 2013 associated with a consolidated VIE in which the Bancorp has no continuing credit risk due to the risk being assumed by a third party. The TDR had a recorded investment of $29 at modification, ALLL increased $7 upon modification, and a charge-off of $2 was recognized upon modification.

 

The Bancorp considers TDRs that become 90 days or more past due under the modified terms as subsequently defaulted. For commercial loans not subject to individual review for impairment, loss rates that are applied for purposes of determining the allowance include historical losses associated with subsequent defaults on loans previously modified in a TDR. For consumer loans, the Bancorp performs a qualitative assessment of the adequacy of the consumer ALLL by comparing the consumer ALLL to forecasted consumer losses over the projected loss emergence period (the

forecasted losses include the impact of subsequent defaults of consumer TDRs). When a residential mortgage, home equity, auto or other consumer loan that has been modified in a TDR subsequently defaults, the present value of expected cash flows used in the measurement of the potential impairment loss is generally limited to the expected net proceeds from the sale of the loan’s underlying collateral and any resulting impairment loss is reflected as a charge-off or an increase in ALLL. The Bancorp fully reserves for credit card loans modified in a TDR that subsequently default.

 

 

111  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following tables provide a summary of subsequent defaults that occurred during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 and within 12 months of the restructuring date:

 

December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) (a) Number of
Contracts
 

Recorded

Investment

 

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

  11   $ 36            

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  3     4            

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  2     1            

Residential mortgage loans

  235     32            

Consumer:

Home equity

  30     2            

Automobile loans

  6     -             

Credit card

  2,059     12            

Total portfolio loans and leases

  2,346   $                         87             
December 31, 2013 ($ in millions) (a) Number of
Contracts
 

Recorded

Investment

 

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

  6   $ 11            

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  7     1            

Residential mortgage loans

  375     58            

Consumer:

Home equity

  65     4            

Automobile loans

  4     -             

Credit card

  1,768     11            

Total portfolio loans and leases

  2,225   $ 85            
December 31, 2012 ($ in millions) (a) Number of
Contracts
 

Recorded

Investment

 

Commercial:

Commercial and industrial loans

  2   $ 3            

Commercial mortgage owner-occupied loans

  3     2            

Commercial mortgage nonowner-occupied loans

  2     1            

Commercial construction loans

  2     3            

Residential mortgage loans

  332     57            

Consumer:

Home equity

  101     7            

Automobile loans

  42     -             

Credit card (revised)

  1,832     13            

Total portfolio loans and leases

  2,316   $ 86            
(a)

Excludes all loans and leases held for sale and loans acquired with deteriorated credit quality.

 

112  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

7. BANK PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT

 

The following is a summary of bank premises and equipment at December 31:

 

 ($ in millions) Estimated Useful Life 2014   2013   

Land and improvements

$ 816     838   

Buildings

2 to 30 yrs.   1,810     1,763   

Equipment

1 to 30 yrs.   1,682     1,581   

Leasehold improvements

5 to 30 yrs.   416     397   

Construction in progress

  98     118   

Accumulated depreciation and amortization

  (2,357   (2,166)   

Total

  $             2,465     2,531   

 

Depreciation and amortization expense related to bank premises and equipment was $254 million in 2014, $245 million in 2013 and $233 million in 2012.

At December 31, 2014 and 2013, land and improvements included $165 million and $196 million, respectively, associated with parcels of undeveloped land intended for future branch expansion. The Bancorp monitors changing customer preferences associated with the channels it uses for banking transactions to evaluate the efficiency, competitiveness and quality of the customer service experience of its retail transaction network. As part of this ongoing assessment the Bancorp may determine that it is no longer fully committed to maintaining full-service branches at certain of its existing banking center locations. Similarly, the Bancorp may also determine that it is no longer fully committed to building banking centers on certain parcels of land which had previously been held for future branch expansion. In these circumstances, the Bancorp performs an assessment of the recoverability of these long-lived

assets. Impairment losses associated with such assessments and lower of cost or market adjustments were $20 million, $6 million and $21 million for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The recognized impairment losses were recorded in other noninterest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The Bancorp’s assessment of the recoverability of these asset groups requires the exercise of judgment in projecting the extent and nature of their future use and the related cash flows which may be impacted by unanticipated events or circumstances.

Gross occupancy expense for cancelable and noncancelable leases, which is included in net occupancy expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income, was $100 million in 2014, $98 million in 2013 and $99 million in 2012, which was reduced by rental income from leased premises of $17 million in 2014, $16 million in 2013 and $17 million in 2012. The Bancorp’s subsidiaries have entered into a number of noncancelable operating and capital lease agreements with respect to bank premises and equipment.

 

 

The following table provides the annual future minimum payments under noncancelable operating leases and capital leases at December 31, 2014:

 

 ($ in millions) Noncancelable
Operating Leases
  Capital Leases  

Year ending December 31,

2015

$ 92      11   

2016

  87       

2017

  79       

2018

  76       

2019

  69       

Thereafter

  294       

Total minimum lease payments

$ 697      37   

Less: Amounts representing interest

        

Present value of net minimum lease payments

       28   

 

113  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

8. GOODWILL

 

Business combinations entered into by the Bancorp typically include the acquisition of goodwill. Acquisition activity includes acquisitions in the respective period in addition to purchase accounting adjustments related to previous acquisitions. During the fourth quarter of 2008, the Bancorp determined that the Commercial Banking and Consumer Lending reporting units’ goodwill carrying

amounts exceeded their associated implied fair values by $750 million and $215 million, respectively. The resulting $965 million goodwill impairment charge was recorded in the fourth quarter of 2008 and represents the total amount of accumulated impairment losses as of December 31, 2014.

 

 

Changes in the net carrying amount of goodwill, by reporting unit, for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 were as follows:

 

($ in millions)    Commercial  
Banking  
     Branch      
Banking      
     Consumer        
Lending        
     Investment    
Advisors    
     Total          

Net carrying value as of December 31, 2012

   $ 613        1,655        -         148        2,416   

Acquisition activity

     -         -         -         -           

Net carrying value as of December 31, 2013

   $ 613        1,655        -         148        2,416   

Acquisition activity

     -         -         -         -           

Net carrying value as of December 31, 2014

   $                     613        1,655        -         148        2,416   

 

The Bancorp completed its annual goodwill impairment test as of September 30, 2014 by performing a qualitative assessment of goodwill at the reporting unit level to determine whether any indicators of impairment existed. In performing this qualitative assessment, the Bancorp evaluated events and circumstances since the last impairment analysis, macroeconomic conditions, banking industry and market conditions, and key financial metrics of the Bancorp as well as reporting unit and overall Bancorp financial performance. After assessing the totality of the events and circumstances, the Bancorp determined that it was not more likely than not that the fair value of each of its reporting units was less than its carrying amounts and, therefore, the first and second steps of the quantitative goodwill impairment test were deemed unnecessary.

 

 

 

114  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

9. INTANGIBLE ASSETS

 

Intangible assets consist of core deposit intangibles, customer lists, non-compete agreements and cardholder relationships. Intangible assets are amortized on either a straight-line or an accelerated basis

over their estimated useful lives. Intangible assets have an estimated remaining weighted-average life at December 31, 2014 of 4.5 years.

 

 

The details of the Bancorp’s intangible assets are shown in the following table:

 

($ in millions) Gross Carrying
Amount
  Accumulated
Amortization
  Valuation
Allowance
  Net Carrying        
Amount        
 

As of December 31, 2014

Core deposit intangibles

$ 122             (112)          -        10              

Other

  45             (40)          -        5              

Total intangible assets

$ 167             (152)          -        15              

As of December 31, 2013

Core deposit intangibles

$ 154             (141)          -        13              

Other

  45             (39)          -        6              

Total intangible assets

$                     199              (180)          -        19              

 

As of December 31, 2014, all of the Bancorp’s intangible assets were being amortized. Amortization expense recognized on

intangible assets for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $4 million, $8 million and $13 million, respectively.

 

 

The Bancorp’s projections of amortization expense shown below are based on existing asset balances as of December 31, 2014. Future amortization expense may vary from these projections. Estimated amortization expense for the years ending December 31, 2015 through 2019 is as follows:

 

($ in millions) Total              

2015

$                     2              

2016

  2              

2017

  2              

2018

  2              

2019

  1              

 

115  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

10. VARIABLE INTEREST ENTITIES

 

The Bancorp, in the normal course of business, engages in a variety of activities that involve VIEs, which are legal entities that lack sufficient equity to finance their activities, or the equity investors of the entities as a group lack any of the characteristics of a controlling interest. The primary beneficiary of a VIE is generally the enterprise that has both the power to direct the activities most significant to the economic performance of the VIE and the obligation to absorb losses or receive benefits that could potentially be significant to the VIE. For certain investment funds, the primary beneficiary is the enterprise that will absorb a majority of the fund’s expected losses or receive a majority of the fund’s expected residual returns. The

Bancorp evaluates its interest in certain entities to determine if these entities meet the definition of a VIE and whether the Bancorp is the primary beneficiary and should consolidate the entity based on the variable interests it held both at inception and when there is a change in circumstances that requires a reconsideration. If the Bancorp is determined to be the primary beneficiary of a VIE, it must account for the VIE as a consolidated subsidiary. If the Bancorp is determined not to be the primary beneficiary of a VIE but holds a variable interest in the entity, such variable interests are accounted for under the equity method of accounting or other accounting standards as appropriate.

 

 

Consolidated VIEs

The following tables provide a summary of the classifications of consolidated VIE assets, liabilities and noncontrolling interests included in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of:

 

December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) Automobile Loan
Securitization

CDC        

Investments    

Total                    

Assets:

Cash and due from banks

$ 178     1     179                   

Commercial mortgage loans

  -      47     47                   

Automobile loans

  3,331     -                  3,331                   

ALLL

  (11   (11   (22)                   

Other assets

  23     2     25                   

Total assets

$ 3,521       39       3,560                   

Liabilities:

Other liabilities

$ 5     -      5                   

Long-term debt

  3,434       -        3,434                   

Total liabilities

$                     3,439     -      3,439                   

Noncontrolling interests

  -                            39       39                   
December 31, 2013 ($ in millions) Automobile Loan
Securitization

CDC        

Investments    

Total                   

Assets:

Cash and due from banks

$ 49     -        49                   

Commercial mortgage loans

  -        48     48                   

Automobile loans

  1,010     -        1,010                   

ALLL

  (2   (13   (15)                   

Other assets

  11     2     13                   
  $ 1,068       37       1,105                   

Liabilities:

Other liabilities

$ 1     -        1                   

Long-term debt

  1,048     -        1,048                   

Total liabilities

$ 1,049       -          1,049                   

Noncontrolling interests

$ -          37       37                   

 

Automobile Loan Securitization

In securitization transactions that occurred during 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp transferred an aggregate amount of $3.8 billion and $1.3 billion, respectively, in consumer automobile loans to bankruptcy remote trusts which were deemed to be VIEs. The primary purposes of the VIEs were to issue asset-backed securities with varying levels of credit subordination and payment priority, as well as residual interests, and to provide the Bancorp with access to liquidity for its originated loans. The Bancorp retained residual interests in the VIEs and, therefore, has an obligation to absorb losses and a right to receive benefits from the VIEs that could potentially be significant to the VIEs. In addition, the Bancorp retained servicing rights for the underlying loans and, therefore, holds the power to direct the activities of the VIEs that most significantly impact the economic performance of the VIEs. As a result, the Bancorp concluded that it is the primary beneficiary of the VIEs and, therefore, has consolidated these VIEs. The assets of

the VIEs are restricted to the settlement of the notes and other obligations of the VIEs. Third-party holders of the notes do not have recourse to the general assets of the Bancorp.

The economic performance of the VIEs is most significantly impacted by the performance of the underlying loans. The principal risks to which the VIEs are exposed include credit risk and prepayment risk. The credit and prepayment risks are managed through credit enhancements in the form of reserve accounts, overcollateralization, excess interest on the loans and the subordination of certain classes of asset-backed securities to other classes.

CDC Investments

CDC, a wholly owned indirect subsidiary of the Bancorp, was created to invest in projects to create affordable housing, revitalize business and residential areas, and preserve historic landmarks.

 

 

116  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

CDC generally co-invests with other unrelated companies and/or individuals and typically makes investments in a separate legal entity that owns the property under development. The entities are usually formed as limited partnerships and LLCs, and CDC typically invests as a limited partner/investor member in the form of equity contributions. The economic performance of the VIEs is driven by the performance of their underlying investment projects as well as the VIEs’ ability to operate in compliance with the rules and regulations necessary for the qualification of tax credits generated by equity investments. Typically, the general partner or managing member will be the party that has the right to make decisions that will most significantly impact the economic performance of the entity. The Bancorp’s subsidiaries serve as the managing member of certain LLCs invested in business revitalization projects. The Bancorp has provided an indemnification guarantee to the investor member of these LLCs related to the qualification of tax credits

generated by the investor members’ investment. Accordingly, the Bancorp concluded that it is the primary beneficiary and, therefore, has consolidated these VIEs. As a result, the investor members’ interests in these VIEs are presented as noncontrolling interests in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements. This presentation includes reporting separately the equity attributable to the noncontrolling interests in the Consolidated Balance Sheets and Consolidated Statements of Changes in Equity and reporting separately the comprehensive income attributable to the noncontrolling interests in the Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income and the net income attributable to the noncontrolling interests in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The Bancorp’s maximum exposure related to these indemnifications at December 31, 2014 and 2013 was $24 million and $21 million, respectively, which is based on an amount required to meet the investor members’ defined target rate of return.

 

 

Non-consolidated VIEs

The following tables provide a summary of assets and liabilities carried on the Consolidated Balance Sheets related to non-consolidated VIEs for which the Bancorp holds an interest, but is not the primary beneficiary of the VIE, as well as the Bancorp’s maximum exposure to losses associated with its interests in the entities as of:

 

December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)

Total    

Assets  

           Total
Liabilities
           Maximum            
Exposure             
 

CDC investments

$ 1,432     364           1,432                

Private equity investments

  189     -            267                

Loans provided to VIEs

                  1,900     -            2,759                

Automobile loan securitization

  2           -                  2                
December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)

 

Total    

Assets  

           Total
Liabilities
           Maximum            
Exposure             
 

CDC investments

$ 1,436     407           1,436                

Private equity investments

  204     -            294                

Loans provided to VIEs

  1,830     -            2,792                

Automobile loan securitization

  4     -            4                

Restructured loans

  1           -                  1                

 

CDC Investments

As noted previously, CDC typically invests in VIEs as a limited partner or investor member in the form of equity contributions. The Bancorp has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these VIEs because it lacks the power to direct the activities that most significantly impact the economic performance of the underlying project or the VIEs’ ability to operate in compliance with the rules and regulations necessary for the qualification of tax credits generated by equity investments. This power is held by the general partners/managing members who exercise full and exclusive control of the operations of the VIEs. Accordingly, the Bancorp accounts for these investments under the equity method of accounting.

The Bancorp’s funding requirements are limited to its invested capital and any additional unfunded commitments for future equity contributions. The Bancorp’s maximum exposure to loss as a result of its involvement with the VIEs is limited to the carrying amounts of the investments, including the unfunded commitments. The carrying amounts of these investments, which are included in other assets in the Consolidated Balance Sheets, and the liabilities related to the unfunded commitments, which are included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets, are included in the previous tables for all periods presented. The Bancorp has no other liquidity arrangements or obligations to purchase assets of the VIEs that would expose the Bancorp to a loss. In certain arrangements, the general partner/managing member of the VIE has guaranteed a

level of projected tax credits to be received by the limited partners/investor members, thereby minimizing a portion of the Bancorp’s risk.

Private Equity Investments

The Bancorp, through a wholly owned subsidiary, invests as a limited partner in private equity funds which provide the Bancorp an opportunity to obtain higher rates of return on invested capital, while also creating cross-selling opportunities for the Bancorp’s commercial products. Each of the limited partnerships has an unrelated third-party general partner responsible for appointing the fund manager. The Bancorp has not been appointed fund manager for any of these private equity funds. The funds finance primarily all of their activities from the partners’ capital contributions and investment returns. Under the VIE consolidation guidance still applicable to the funds, the Bancorp has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of the funds because it does not absorb a majority of the funds’ expected losses or receive a majority of the funds’ expected residual returns. Therefore, the Bancorp accounts for its investments in these limited partnerships under the equity method of accounting.

The Bancorp is exposed to losses arising from negative performance of the underlying investments in the private equity funds. As a limited partner, the Bancorp’s maximum exposure to loss is limited to the carrying amounts of the investments plus unfunded commitments. The carrying amounts of these

 

 

117  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

investments, which are included in other assets in the Consolidated Balance Sheets, are included in the previous tables. Also, as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the unfunded commitment amounts to the funds were $78 million and $90 million, respectively. The Bancorp made capital contributions of $27 million and $31 million to private equity funds during 2014 and 2013, respectively. Additionally, in response to the issuance of the Volcker Rule in the fourth quarter of 2013, the Bancorp recognized $4 million of OTTI on its investments in private equity funds during 2013. The Bancorp recognized no OTTI on its investments in private equity funds during 2014. Refer to Note 27 for further information.

Loans Provided to VIEs

The Bancorp has provided funding to certain unconsolidated VIEs sponsored by third parties. These VIEs are generally established to finance certain consumer and small business loans originated by third parties. The entities are primarily funded through the issuance of a loan from the Bancorp or syndication through which the Bancorp is involved. The sponsor/administrator of the entities is responsible for servicing the underlying assets in the VIEs. Because the sponsor/administrator, not the Bancorp, holds the servicing responsibilities, which include the establishment and employment of default mitigation policies and procedures, the Bancorp does not hold the power to direct the activities that most significantly impact the economic performance of the entity and, therefore, is not the primary beneficiary.

The principal risk to which these entities are exposed is credit risk related to the underlying assets. The Bancorp’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to the carrying amounts of the loans and unfunded commitments to the VIEs. The Bancorp’s outstanding loans to these VIEs, included in commercial loans in the Consolidated Balance Sheets, are included in the previous tables for all periods presented. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp’s unfunded commitments to these entities were $859 million and $962 million, respectively. The loans and unfunded commitments to these VIEs are included in the Bancorp’s overall analysis of the ALLL and reserve for unfunded commitments, respectively. The Bancorp does not provide any implicit or explicit liquidity guarantees or principal value guarantees to these VIEs.

Automobile Loan Securitization

In March of 2013, the Bancorp recognized an immaterial loss on the securitization and sale of certain automobile loans with a carrying amount of approximately $509 million. The securitization and the resulting sale of all underlying securities qualified for sale accounting. The Bancorp has concluded that it is not the primary beneficiary of the trust because it has neither the obligation to absorb losses of the entity that could potentially be significant to the VIE nor the right to receive benefits from the entity that could potentially be significant to the VIE. The Bancorp is not required and does not currently intend to provide any additional financial support to the trust. Investors and creditors only have recourse to the assets held by the trust. The interest the Bancorp holds in the VIE relates to servicing rights that are included in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The maximum exposure to loss is equal to the carrying value of the servicing asset.

Restructured Loans

As part of loan restructuring efforts, the Bancorp received equity capital from certain borrowers to facilitate the restructuring of the borrower’s loans. These borrowers meet the definition of a VIE because the Bancorp was involved in their refinancing and because their equity capital at risk was insufficient to fund ongoing operations. The Bancorp accounted for its equity capital

investments in these VIEs under the equity method or cost method of accounting based on its percentage of ownership and ability to exercise significant influence.

The Bancorp’s maximum exposure to loss as a result of its involvement with these VIEs was limited to the equity capital investments, the principal and accrued interest on the outstanding loans, and any unfunded commitments. The Bancorp had outstanding loans to these VIEs included in commercial loans in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The Bancorp had no unfunded loan commitments to these VIEs as of December 31, 2014 and 2013. The loans to these VIEs are included in the Bancorp’s overall analysis of the ALLL. The Bancorp does not provide any implicit or explicit liquidity guarantees or principal value guarantees to these VIEs.

 

 

118  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

11. SALES OF RECEIVABLES AND SERVICING RIGHTS

 

Automobile Loan Securitization

In March of 2013, the Bancorp recognized an immaterial loss on the securitization and sale of certain automobile loans with a carrying amount of approximately $509 million. The Bancorp utilized a securitization trust to facilitate the securitization process. The trust issued asset-backed securities in the form of notes and equity certificates, with varying levels of credit subordination and payment priority. The Bancorp does not hold any of the notes or equity certificates issued by the trust, and the investors in these securities have no credit recourse to the Bancorp’s assets for failure of debtors to pay when due. As part of the sale, the Bancorp obtained servicing

responsibilities and recognized a servicing asset with an initial fair value of $6 million.

Residential Mortgage Loan Sales

The Bancorp sold fixed and adjustable rate residential mortgage loans during 2014, 2013 and 2012. In those sales, the Bancorp obtained servicing responsibilities and the investors have no recourse to the Bancorp’s other assets for failure of debtors to pay when due. The Bancorp receives annual servicing fees based on a percentage of the outstanding balance. The Bancorp identifies classes of servicing assets based on financial asset type and interest rates.

 

 

Information related to residential mortgage loan sales and the Bancorp’s mortgage banking activity, which is included in mortgage banking net revenue in the Consolidated Statements of Income, for the years ended December 31 is as follows:

 

($ in millions)    2014           2013          2012          

Residential mortgage loan sales

   $           5,467          21,529          21,574        

Origination fees and gains on loan sales

     153          453          821        

Gross mortgage servicing fees

     246          251          250        

Servicing Rights

The following table presents changes in the servicing rights related to residential mortgage and automobile loans for the years ended December 31:

 

($ in millions)    2014        2013            

Carrying amount before valuation allowance as of the beginning of the period

   $           1,440        1,358          

Servicing rights that result from the transfer of residential mortgage loans

     73        244          

Servicing rights that result from the transfer of automobile loans

     -        6          

Amortization

     (121      (168)          

Carrying amount before valuation allowance

     1,392        1,440          

Valuation allowance for servicing rights:

     

Beginning balance

     (469      (661)          

(Provision for) recovery of MSR impairment

     (65      192          

Ending balance

     (534      (469)          

Carrying amount as of the end of the period

   $ 858        971          

 

Amortization expense recognized on servicing rights for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $121 million, $168 million and $186 million, respectively. The Bancorp’s projections of

amortization expense shown below are based on existing asset balances as of December 31, 2014. Future amortization expense may vary from these projections.

 

 

Estimated amortization expense for the years ending December 31, 2015 through 2019 is as follows:

 

($ in millions)    Total           

2015

   $           125            

2016

     113            

2017

     103            

2018

     93            

2019

     85            

 

Temporary impairment or impairment recovery, affected through a change in the MSR valuation allowance, is captured as a component of mortgage banking net revenue in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The Bancorp maintains a non-qualifying hedging strategy to manage a portion of the risk associated with changes in the value of the MSR portfolio. This strategy includes the purchase of free-standing derivatives and various available-for-sale securities. The

interest income, mark-to-market adjustments and gain or loss from sale activities associated with these portfolios are expected to economically hedge a portion of the change in value of the MSR portfolio caused by fluctuating discount rates, earnings rates and prepayment speeds. The fair value of the servicing asset is based on the present value of expected future cash flows.

 

 

119  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following table displays the beginning and ending fair value of the servicing rights for the years ended December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014         2013            

Fixed-rate residential mortgage loans:

Beginning balance

$               929         664          

Ending balance

  823         929          

Adjustable rate residential mortgage loans:

Beginning balance

  38         33          

Ending balance

  33         38          

Fixed-rate automobile loans:

Beginning balance

  4         -          

Ending balance

  2         4          

The following table presents activity related to valuations of the MSR portfolio and the impact of the non-qualifying hedging strategy, which is included in the Consolidated Statements of Income for the years ended December 31:

 

($ in millions)    2014         2013         2012            

Securities gains, net - non-qualifying hedges on MSRs

$               -            13         3          

Changes in fair value and settlement of free-standing derivatives purchased to economically hedge the MSR portfolio (Mortgage banking net revenue)

  95         (30)         63          

(Provision for) recovery of MSR impairment (Mortgage banking net revenue)

    (65)         192         (103)          

As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the key economic assumptions used in measuring the interests in residential mortgage loans that continued to be held by the Bancorp at the date of sale or securitization resulting from transactions completed during the years ended December 31 were as follows:

 

 

    2014 2013
    Rate  

 

Weighted-

Average Life

(in years)

   

Prepayment

Speed (annual)

   

Discount Rate

(annual)

   

Weighted-

Average

Default Rate

 

Weighted-

Average Life

(in years)

 

Prepayment

Speed (annual)

   

Discount Rate

(annual)

   

Weighted-

Average

Default Rate

 

Residential mortgage loans:

Servicing rights

Fixed   6.6           11.3 %       10.0 %    N/A 7.3   9.1 %       10.2 %     N/A

Servicing rights

Adjustable   3.7           22.3           11.7        N/A 3.6   22.8          11.5        N/A

 

Based on historical credit experience, expected credit losses for residential mortgage loan servicing assets have been deemed immaterial, as the Bancorp sold the majority of the underlying loans without recourse. At December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp

serviced $65.4 billion and $69.2 billion, respectively, of residential mortgage loans for other investors. The value of MSRs that continue to be held by the Bancorp is subject to credit, prepayment and interest rate risks on the sold financial assets.

 

 

At December 31, 2014, the sensitivity of the current fair value of residual cash flows to immediate 10%, 20% and 50% adverse changes in prepayment speed assumptions and immediate 10% and 20% adverse changes in other assumptions are as follows:

 

 

 
           

Prepayment

Speed Assumption

 

Residual Servicing

Cash Flows

 
           

 

 

 
                       

 

Impact of Adverse

 
        Weighted-       Impact of Adverse Change       Change on Fair  
    Fair   Average Life (in       on Fair Value   Discount   Value  
($ in millions) (a) Rate Value   years)   Rate   10%   20%   50%     Rate   10%   20%      

 

 

Residential mortgage loans:

Servicing rights

Fixed $        823     6.0         12.0    $      (37)      (72)      (161)      9.9  $       (29)      (57)      

Servicing rights

Adjustable   33     3.1         26.2      (1)      (2)      (5)      11.8      (1)      (2)      

 

 
(a)

The impact of the weighted-average default rate on the current fair value of residual cash flows for all scenarios is immaterial.

 

These sensitivities are hypothetical and should be used with caution. As the figures indicate, changes in fair value based on these variations in the assumptions typically cannot be extrapolated because the relationship of the change in assumption to the change in fair value may not be linear. The Bancorp believes variations of these levels are reasonably possible; however, there is the potential that adverse changes in key assumptions could be even greater. Also, in the previous table, the effect of a variation in a particular assumption on the fair value of the interests that continue to be held

by the Bancorp is calculated without changing any other assumption; in reality, changes in one factor may result in changes in another (for example, increases in market interest rates may result in lower prepayments), which might magnify or counteract these sensitivities.

 

 

120  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

12. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

 

The Bancorp maintains an overall risk management strategy that incorporates the use of derivative instruments to reduce certain risks related to interest rate, prepayment and foreign currency volatility. Additionally, the Bancorp holds derivative instruments for the benefit of its commercial customers and for other business purposes. The Bancorp does not enter into unhedged speculative derivative positions.

The Bancorp’s interest rate risk management strategy involves modifying the repricing characteristics of certain financial instruments so that changes in interest rates do not adversely affect the Bancorp’s net interest margin and cash flows. Derivative instruments that the Bancorp may use as part of its interest rate risk management strategy include interest rate swaps, interest rate floors, interest rate caps, forward contracts, options and swaptions. Interest rate swap contracts are exchanges of interest payments, such as fixed-rate payments for floating-rate payments, based on a stated notional amount and maturity date. Interest rate floors protect against declining rates, while interest rate caps protect against rising interest rates. Forward contracts are contracts in which the buyer agrees to purchase, and the seller agrees to make delivery of, a specific financial instrument at a predetermined price or yield. Options provide the purchaser with the right, but not the obligation, to purchase or sell a contracted item during a specified period at an agreed upon price. Swaptions are financial instruments granting the owner the right, but not the obligation, to enter into or cancel a swap.

Prepayment volatility arises mostly from changes in fair value of the largely fixed-rate MSR portfolio, mortgage loans and mortgage-backed securities. The Bancorp may enter into various free-standing derivatives (principal-only swaps, interest rate swaptions, interest rate floors, mortgage options, TBAs and interest rate swaps) to economically hedge prepayment volatility. Principal-only swaps are total return swaps based on changes in the value of the underlying mortgage principal-only trust. TBAs are a forward purchase agreement for a mortgage-backed securities trade whereby the terms of the security are undefined at the time the trade is made.

Foreign currency volatility occurs as the Bancorp enters into certain loans denominated in foreign currencies. Derivative instruments that the Bancorp may use to economically hedge these foreign denominated loans include foreign exchange swaps and forward contracts.

The Bancorp also enters into derivative contracts (including foreign exchange contracts, commodity contracts and interest rate contracts) for the benefit of commercial customers and other business purposes. The Bancorp may economically hedge significant exposures related to these free-standing derivatives by entering into offsetting third-party contracts with approved, reputable counterparties with substantially matching terms and currencies. Credit risk arises from the possible inability of counterparties to meet the terms of their contracts. The Bancorp’s exposure is limited to the replacement value of the contracts rather than the notional, principal or contract amounts. Credit risk is minimized through

credit approvals, limits, counterparty collateral and monitoring procedures.

The Bancorp’s derivative assets include certain contractual features in which the Bancorp requires the counterparties to provide collateral in the form of cash and securities to offset changes in the fair value of the derivatives, including changes in the fair value due to credit risk of the counterparty. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the balance of collateral held by the Bancorp for derivative assets was $830 million and $514 million, respectively. The credit component negatively impacting the fair value of derivative assets associated with customer accommodation contracts as of December 31, 2014 and 2013 was $16 million and $12 million, respectively.

In measuring the fair value of derivative liabilities, the Bancorp considers its own credit risk, taking into consideration collateral maintenance requirements of certain derivative counterparties and the duration of instruments with counterparties that do not require collateral maintenance. When necessary, the Bancorp posts collateral primarily in the form of cash and securities to offset changes in fair value of the derivatives, including changes in fair value due to the Bancorp’s credit risk. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the balance of collateral posted by the Bancorp for derivative liabilities was $574 million and $559 million, respectively. Certain of the Bancorp’s derivative liabilities contain credit-risk related contingent features that could result in the requirement to post additional collateral upon the occurrence of specified events. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the fair value of the additional collateral that could be required to be posted as a result of the credit-risk related contingent features being triggered was immaterial to the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements. The posting of collateral has been determined to remove the need for further consideration of credit risk. As a result, the Bancorp determined that the impact of the Bancorp’s credit risk to the valuation of its derivative liabilities was immaterial to the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Bancorp holds certain derivative instruments that qualify for hedge accounting treatment and are designated as either fair value hedges or cash flow hedges. Derivative instruments that do not qualify for hedge accounting treatment, or for which hedge accounting is not established, are held as free-standing derivatives. All customer accommodation derivatives are held as free-standing derivatives.

The fair value of derivative instruments is presented on a gross basis, even when the derivative instruments are subject to master netting arrangements. Derivative instruments with a positive fair value are reported in other assets in the Consolidated Balance Sheets while derivative instruments with a negative fair value are reported in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. Cash collateral payables and receivables associated with the derivative instruments are not added to or netted against the fair value amounts. For further information on offsetting derivatives, refer to Note 13 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

121  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following tables reflect the notional amounts and fair values for all derivative instruments included in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of:

 

 

 
      Fair Value  
December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)

Notional     

Amount     

 

Derivative

Assets

 

Derivative    

Liabilities    

 

 

 

Qualifying hedging instruments

Fair value hedges:

Interest rate swaps related to long-term debt

$                2,205   399          

 

 

Total fair value hedges

  399          

 

 

Cash flow hedges:

Interest rate swaps related to C&I loans

3,150   36          

 

 

Total cash flow hedges

  36          

 

 

Total derivatives designated as qualifying hedging instruments

  435          

 

 

Derivatives not designated as qualifying hedging instruments

Free-standing derivatives - risk management and other business purposes:

Interest rate contracts related to MSRs

4,487   181          

Forward contracts related to held for sale mortgage loans

999   -         

Stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC

691   415          

Swap associated with the sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares

1,092   -        49   

 

 

Total free-standing derivatives - risk management and other business purposes

  596        55   

 

 

Free-standing derivatives - customer accommodation:

Interest rate contracts for customers

29,558   272        278   

Interest rate lock commitments

613   12          

Commodity contracts

3,558   348        338  

Foreign exchange contracts

16,745   417        372   

 

 

Total free-standing derivatives - customer accommodation

  1,049        988   

 

 

Total derivatives not designated as qualifying hedging instruments

  1,645        1,043   

 

 

Total

$                 2,080        1,043   

 

 

 

 
      Fair Value  
December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)

Notional     

Amount    

 

Derivative

Assets

 

Derivative    

Liabilities    

 

 

 

Qualifying hedging instruments

Fair value hedges:

          

Interest rate swaps related to long-term debt

   $                3,205         292          13   

 

 

Total fair value hedges

           292          13   

 

 

Cash flow hedges:

          

Interest rate swaps related to C&I loans

   2,200         40          21   

 

 

Total cash flow hedges

           40          21   

 

 

Total derivatives designated as qualifying hedging instruments

  332        34   

 

 

Derivatives not designated as qualifying hedging instruments

Free-standing derivatives - risk management and other business purposes:

Interest rate contracts related to MSRs

4,092   141        14   

Forward contracts related to held for sale mortgage loans

1,448   13         

Stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC

664   384          

Swap associated with the sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares

947   -        48   

 

 

Total free-standing derivatives - risk management and other business purposes

  538        63   

 

 

Free-standing derivatives - customer accommodation:

          

Interest rate contracts for customers

   28,112         329          339   

Interest rate lock commitments

   924         12           

Commodity contracts

   3,300         66          65   

Foreign exchange contracts

   19,688         276          252   

 

 

Total free-standing derivatives - customer accommodation

  683        657   

 

 

Total derivatives not designated as qualifying hedging instruments

  1,221        720   

 

 

Total

$ 1,553        754   

 

 

 

122  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Fair Value Hedges

The Bancorp may enter into interest rate swaps to convert its fixed-rate funding to floating-rate. Decisions to convert fixed-rate funding to floating are made primarily through consideration of the asset/liability mix of the Bancorp, the desired asset/liability sensitivity and interest rate levels. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, certain interest rate swaps met the criteria required to qualify for the shortcut method of accounting. Based on this shortcut method of accounting treatment, no ineffectiveness is assumed. For interest rate swaps that do not meet the shortcut requirements, an assessment of hedge effectiveness using regression analysis was

performed and such swaps were accounted for using the “long-haul” method. The long-haul method requires a quarterly assessment of hedge effectiveness and measurement of ineffectiveness. For interest rate swaps accounted for as a fair value hedge using the long-haul method, ineffectiveness is the difference between the changes in the fair value of the interest rate swap and changes in fair value of the related hedged item attributable to the risk being hedged. The ineffectiveness on interest rate swaps hedging fixed-rate funding is reported within interest expense in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

 

 

The following table reflects the change in fair value of interest rate contracts, designated as fair value hedges, as well as the change in fair value of the related hedged items attributable to the risk being hedged, included in the Consolidated Statements of Income:

 

  

 

Consolidated Statements of Income

              
For the year ended December 31 ($ in millions) Caption 2014     2013     2012      

Interest rate contracts:

Change in fair value of interest rate swaps hedging long-term debt

Interest on long-term debt $ 120     (279   (104)      

Change in fair value of hedged long-term debt attributable to the risk being hedged

Interest on long-term debt             (126   276     107      

 

Cash Flow Hedges

The Bancorp may enter into interest rate swaps to convert floating-rate assets and liabilities to fixed rates or to hedge certain forecasted transactions. The assets or liabilities may be grouped in circumstances where they share the same risk exposure that the Bancorp desires to hedge. The Bancorp may also enter into interest rate caps and floors to limit cash flow variability of floating rate assets and liabilities. As of December 31, 2014, all hedges designated as cash flow hedges were assessed for effectiveness using regression analysis. Ineffectiveness is generally measured as the amount by which the cumulative change in the fair value of the hedging instrument exceeds the present value of the cumulative change in the hedged item’s expected cash flows attributable to the risk being hedged. Ineffectiveness is reported within other noninterest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The effective portion of the cumulative gains or losses on cash flow hedges are reported within AOCI and are reclassified from AOCI to current period earnings when the forecasted transaction affects earnings. As of December 31, 2014, the maximum length of time over which the

Bancorp is hedging its exposure to the variability in future cash flows is 60 months.

Reclassified gains and losses on interest rate contracts related to commercial and industrial loans are recorded within interest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, $23 million and $13 million, respectively, of net deferred gains, net of tax, on cash flow hedges were recorded in AOCI in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. As of December 31, 2014, $33 million in net deferred gains, net of tax, recorded in AOCI are expected to be reclassified into earnings during the next twelve months. This amount could differ from amounts actually recognized due to changes in interest rates, hedge de-designations, and the addition of other hedges subsequent to December 31, 2014.

During 2014 and 2013, there were no gains or losses reclassified from accumulated AOCI into earnings associated with the discontinuance of cash flow hedges because it was probable that the original forecasted transaction would no longer occur by the end of the originally specified time period or within the additional period of time as defined by U.S. GAAP.

 

 

The following table presents the pretax net gains (losses) recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Income and the Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income relating to derivative instruments designated as cash flow hedges:

 

For the year ended December 31 ($ in millions) 2014      2013      2012           

Amount of pretax net gains (losses) recognized in OCI

$                 60     (13   37           

Amount of pretax net gains reclassified from OCI into net income

  44       44       83           

 

Free-Standing Derivative Instruments – Risk Management and Other Business Purposes

As part of its overall risk management strategy relative to its mortgage banking activity, the Bancorp may enter into various free-standing derivatives (principal-only swaps, interest rate swaptions, interest rate floors, mortgage options, TBAs and interest rate swaps) to economically hedge changes in fair value of its largely fixed-rate MSR portfolio. Principal-only swaps hedge the mortgage-LIBOR spread because these swaps appreciate in value as a result of tightening spreads. Principal-only swaps also provide prepayment protection by increasing in value when prepayment speeds increase, as opposed to MSRs that lose value in a faster prepayment environment. Receive fixed/pay floating interest rate swaps and swaptions increase in value when interest rates do not increase as quickly as expected.

The Bancorp enters into forward contracts and mortgage options to economically hedge the change in fair value of certain residential mortgage loans held for sale due to changes in interest rates. IRLCs issued on residential mortgage loan commitments that will be held for sale are also considered free-standing derivative instruments and the interest rate exposure on these commitments is economically hedged primarily with forward contracts. Revaluation gains and losses from free-standing derivatives related to mortgage banking activity are recorded as a component of mortgage banking net revenue in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Additionally, as part of the Bancorp’s overall risk management strategy with respect to minimizing significant fluctuations in earnings and cash flows caused by interest rate and prepayment volatility, the Bancorp may enter into free-standing derivative instruments (options, swaptions and interest rate swaps). The gains

 

 

123  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

and losses on these derivative contracts are recorded within other noninterest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

In conjunction with the initial sale of the Bancorp’s 51% interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC, the Bancorp received a warrant and issued a put option, which are accounted for as free-standing derivatives. The put option expired as a result of the Vantiv, Inc. IPO in March of 2012. Refer to Note 27 for further discussion of significant inputs and assumptions used in the valuation of the warrant.

In conjunction with the sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares in 2009, the Bancorp entered into a total return swap in which the Bancorp will make or receive payments based on subsequent changes in the conversion rate of the Class B shares into Class A shares. This total return swap is accounted for as a free-standing derivative. Refer to Note 27 for further discussion of significant inputs and assumptions used in the valuation of this instrument.

 

 

The net gains (losses) recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Income relating to free-standing derivative instruments used for risk management and other business purposes are summarized in the following table:

 

For the year ended December 31 ($ in millions)

 

Consolidated Statements of Income

Caption

   2014        2013       2012     

Interest rate contracts:

Forward contracts related to mortgage loans held for sale

 Mortgage banking net revenue $         (18   24     28    

Interest rate contracts related to MSR portfolio

 Mortgage banking net revenue   95     (30   63    

Interest rate swaps related to long-term debt

 Other noninterest income   -      -      2    

Foreign exchange contracts:

Foreign exchange contracts for risk management purposes

 Other noninterest income   14     5     -     

Equity contracts:

Stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC

 Other noninterest income   31     206     66    

Put option associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC

 Other noninterest income   -      -      1    

Swap associated with sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares

 Other noninterest income     (38     (31     (45)    

 

Free-Standing Derivative Instruments – Customer Accommodation

The majority of the free-standing derivative instruments the Bancorp enters into are for the benefit of its commercial customers. These derivative contracts are not designated against specific assets or liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets or to forecasted transactions and, therefore, do not qualify for hedge accounting. These instruments include foreign exchange derivative contracts entered into for the benefit of commercial customers involved in international trade to hedge their exposure to foreign currency fluctuations and commodity contracts to hedge such items as natural gas and various other derivative contracts. The Bancorp may economically hedge significant exposures related to these derivative contracts entered into for the benefit of customers by entering into offsetting contracts with approved, reputable, independent counterparties with substantially matching terms. The Bancorp hedges its interest rate exposure on commercial customer transactions by executing offsetting swap agreements with primary dealers. Revaluation gains and losses on interest rate, foreign exchange, commodity and other commercial customer derivative contracts are recorded as a component of corporate banking revenue in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

The Bancorp enters into risk participation agreements, under which the Bancorp assumes credit exposure relating to certain underlying interest rate derivative contracts. The Bancorp only enters into these risk participation agreements in instances in which the Bancorp has participated in the loan that the underlying interest rate derivative contract was designed to hedge. The Bancorp will make payments under these agreements if a customer defaults on its obligation to perform under the terms of the underlying interest rate derivative contract. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the total notional amount of the risk participation agreements was $1.1 billion and $1.2 billion, respectively, and the fair value was a liability of $2 million at December 31, 2014 and $3 million at December 31, 2013, which is included in interest rate contracts for customers. As of December 31, 2014, the risk participation agreements had an average remaining life of 2.6 years.

The Bancorp’s maximum exposure in the risk participation agreements is contingent on the fair value of the underlying interest rate derivative contracts in an asset position at the time of default. The Bancorp monitors the credit risk associated with the underlying customers in the risk participation agreements through the same risk grading system currently utilized for establishing loss reserves in its loan and lease portfolio.

 

 

Risk ratings of the notional amount of risk participation agreements under this risk rating system are summarized in the following table:

 

At December 31 ($ in millions) 2014             2013            

Pass

$ 1,052     1,153     

Special mention

  59     38     

Substandard

  2       12     

Total

$                 1,113       1,203     

 

124  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The net gains (losses) recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Income relating to free-standing derivative instruments used for customer accommodation are summarized in the following table:

 

For the year ended December 31

($ in millions)

  

 

  Consolidated Statements of Income  

  Caption  

  2014     2013     2012       

Interest rate contracts:

           

Interest rate contracts for customers (contract revenue)

   Corporate banking revenue      $ 19       29       30     

Interest rate contracts for customers (credit losses)

   Other noninterest expense        (3     (3     (2)     

Interest rate contracts for customers (credit portion of fair value adjustment)

   Other noninterest expense        3       7       6     

Interest rate lock commitments

   Mortgage banking net revenue                124       58       417     
Commodity contracts:                            

Commodity contracts for customers (contract revenue)

   Corporate banking revenue        6       7       7     

Commodity contracts for customers (credit portion of fair value adjustment)

   Other noninterest expense        (7     -        2     

Foreign exchange contracts:

           

Foreign exchange contracts - customers (contract revenue)

   Corporate banking revenue        72       69       65     

Foreign exchange contracts - customers (credit portion of fair value adjustment)

   Other noninterest expense          -        (2     2     

 

125  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

13. OFFSETTING DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

 

The Bancorp’s derivative transactions are generally governed by ISDA Master Agreements and similar arrangements, which include provisions governing the setoff of assets and liabilities between the parties. When the Bancorp has more than one outstanding derivative transaction with a single counterparty, the setoff provisions contained within these agreements generally allow the non-defaulting party the right to reduce its liability to the defaulting party by amounts eligible for setoff, including the collateral received

as well as eligible offsetting transactions with that counterparty, irrespective of the currency, place of payment, or booking office. The Bancorp’s policy is to present its derivative assets and derivative liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets on a gross basis, even when provisions allowing for setoff are in place.

Collateral amounts included in the tables below consist primarily of cash and highly-rated government-backed securities.

 

 

    

 

Gross Amount

Recognized in the

   

                Gross Amounts Not Offset  in the                

                Consolidated Balance Sheets                 

      
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)   Consolidated Balance Sheets (a)     Derivatives   Collateral (b)   Net Amount   

Assets

       

Derivatives

     $ 1,653             (440)     (684)     $ 529   

Total assets

    1,653             (440)     (684)       529   

Liabilities

       

Derivatives

    1,043             (440)     (293)       310   

Total liabilities

     $ 1,043             (440)     (293)     $ 310   
         
                         
   

 

Gross Amount

Recognized in the

   

Gross Amounts Not Offset in the

Consolidated Balance Sheets

     
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)   Consolidated Balance Sheets (a)     Derivatives   Collateral (b)   Net Amount   

Assets

       

Derivatives

     $ 1,157             (321)     (390)     $ 446   

Total assets

    1,157             (321)     (390)       446   

Liabilities

       

Derivatives

    753             (321)     (302)       130   

Total liabilities

     $ 753             (321)     (302)     $ 130   
(a)

Amount does not include the stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC and IRLCs because these instruments are not subject to master netting or similar arrangements.

(b)

Amount of collateral received as an offset to asset positions or pledged as an offset to liability positions. Collateral values in excess of related derivative amounts recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets were excluded from this table.

14. OTHER ASSETS

 

The following table provides the components of other assets included in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31:

 

 ($ in millions)    2014            2013  

Derivative instruments

   $         2,080           1,553  

Partnership investments

     1,685           1,687  

Bank owned life insurance

     1,623           1,587  

Accounts receivable and drafts-in-process

     1,452           1,433  

Investment in Vantiv Holding, LLC

     394           423  

Accrued interest receivable

     312           361  

OREO and other repossessed personal property

     236           306  

Income tax receivable

     107           12  

Prepaid expenses

     97           94  

Other

     255             902  

Total

   $ 8,241             8,358  

 

The Bancorp utilizes derivative instruments as part of its overall risk management strategy to reduce certain risks related to interest rate, prepayment and foreign currency volatility. The Bancorp also holds derivatives instruments for the benefit of its commercial customers and for other business purposes. For further information on derivative instruments, refer to Note 12.

CDC, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Bancorp, was created to invest in projects to create affordable housing, revitalize business and residential areas, and preserve historic landmarks, which are

included above in partnership investments. In addition, Fifth Third Capital Holdings, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Bancorp, invests as a direct private equity investor and as a limited partner in private equity funds, which are included above as partnership investments. The Bancorp has determined that these partnership investments are VIEs and the Bancorp’s investments represent variable interests. Refer to Note 10 for further information. Additionally, in response to the issuance of the Volcker Rule, the Bancorp recognized $4 million of OTTI on its investments in private equity funds during

 

 

126  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

2013. The Bancorp recognized no OTTI on its investments in private equity funds during 2014. Refer to Note 27 for further information.

The Bancorp purchases life insurance policies on the lives of certain directors, officers and employees and is the owner and beneficiary of the policies. Certain BOLI policies have a stable value agreement through either a large, well-rated bank or multi-national insurance carrier that provides limited cash surrender value protection from declines in the value of each policy’s underlying investments. Refer to Note 1 for further information.

In 2009, the Bancorp sold an approximate 51% interest in its processing business, Vantiv Holding, LLC. As a result of additional share sales completed by the Bancorp, its current ownership share in Vantiv Holding, LLC is approximately 23%. The Bancorp’s ownership in Vantiv Holding, LLC is accounted for under the equity method of accounting. Refer to Note 19 for further information.

OREO represents property acquired through foreclosure or other proceedings and is carried at the lower of cost or fair value, less costs to sell. Refer to Note 1 for further information.

 

 

15. SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS

 

Borrowings with original maturities of one year or less are classified as short term, and include federal funds purchased and other short-term borrowings. Federal funds purchased are excess balances in reserve accounts held at FRBs that the Bancorp purchased from

other member banks on an overnight basis. Other short-term borrowings include securities sold under repurchase agreements, derivative collateral, FHLB advances and other borrowings with original maturities of one year or less.

 

A summary of short-term borrowings and weighted-average rates follows:

 

 

 
  2014   2013  
  

 

 

 
 ($ in millions) Amount   Rate   Amount   Rate  

 

 

As of December 31:

Federal funds purchased

$ 144     0.08 $ 284     0.03%       

Other short-term borrowings

  1,556     0.08     1,380     0.09        

 

 

Average for the years ended December 31:

Federal funds purchased

$ 458     0.09 $ 503     0.12%       

Other short-term borrowings

            1,873     0.10             3,024     0.18        

 

 

Maximum month-end balance for the years ended December 31:

Federal funds purchased

$ 286   $ 925  

Other short-term borrowings

  3,756     8,001  

 

 

 

127  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

16. LONG-TERM DEBT

 

The following table is a summary of the Bancorp’s long-term borrowings at December 31:

 

 ($ in millions) Maturity   Interest Rate    2014      2013      

Parent Company

Senior:

Fixed-rate notes

  2016   3.625% $ 1,000     999  

Fixed-rate notes

  2019   2.30%   499     -    

Fixed-rate notes

  2022   3.50%   497     497  

Subordinated: (a)

Floating-rate notes

  2016   0.67%   250     250  

Fixed-rate notes

  2017   5.45%   539     558  

Fixed-rate notes

  2018   4.50%   544     555  

Fixed-rate notes

  2024   4.30%   748     748  

Fixed-rate notes

  2038   8.25%   1,317     1,150  

Subsidiaries

Senior:

Fixed-rate notes

  2016    1.15%   1,000     1,000  

Fixed-rate notes

  2016    0.90%   400     400  

Floating-rate notes

  2016    0.74%   750     750  

Floating-rate notes

  2016    0.64%   300     300  

Fixed-rate notes

  2017    1.35%   654     -    

Fixed-rate notes

  2018    1.45%   597     587  

Fixed-rate notes

  2019    2.375%   850     -    

Fixed-rate notes

  2021    2.875%   846     -    

Subordinated: (a)

Fixed-rate bank notes

  2015   4.75%   502     524  

Junior subordinated: (b)

Floating-rate debentures

  2035   1.66% - 1.93%   51     51  

FHLB advances

  2015-2041    0.05% - 6.87%   41     44  

Notes associated with consolidated VIE:

Automobile loan securitization:

Fixed-rate notes

  2015-2021    0.19% - 1.47%   3,434     1,048  

Other

  2015-2039    Varies     148       172  

Total

          $       14,967       9,633  
(a)

Qualify as Tier II capital for regulatory capital purposes.

(b)

Qualify as Tier I capital for regulatory capital purposes. Refer to Note 28 for further information.

The Bancorp pays down long-term debt in accordance with contractual terms over maturity periods summarized in the above table. The aggregate annual maturities of long-term debt obligations (based on final maturity dates) as of December 31, 2014, are presented in the following table:

 

 ($ in millions) Parent      Subsidiaries        Total          

2015

$ -      702     702  

2016

  1,250     2,768     4,018  

2017

  539     1,942     2,481  

2018

  544     1,407     1,951  

2019

  499     1,199     1,698  

Thereafter

  2,562       1,555       4,117  

Total

$                 5,394       9,573       14,967  

 

At December 31, 2014, the Bancorp had outstanding principal balances of $14.6 billion, net discounts of $25 million and additions for mark-to-market adjustments on its hedged debt of $407 million. At December 31, 2013, the Bancorp had outstanding principal balances of $9.4 billion, net discounts of $21 million and additions for mark-to-market adjustments on its hedged debt of $278 million. The Bancorp was in compliance with all debt covenants at December 31, 2014.

PARENT COMPANY LONG-TERM BORROWINGS

Senior Notes

On January 25, 2011, the Bancorp issued and sold $1.0 billion of senior notes to third party investors. The senior notes bear a fixed-rate of interest of 3.625% per annum. The notes are unsecured,

senior obligations of the Bancorp. Payment of the full principal amounts of the notes is due upon maturity on January 25, 2016. The notes are not subject to redemption at the Bancorp’s option at any time prior to maturity.

On March 7, 2012, the Bancorp issued and sold $500 million of senior notes to third party investors, and entered into a Supplemental Indenture dated March 7, 2012 with the Trustee, which modified the existing Indenture for Senior Debt Securities dated April 30, 2008. The Supplemental Indenture and the Indenture define the rights of the senior notes, which senior notes are represented by a Global Security dated as of March 7, 2012. The senior notes bear a fixed-rate of interest of 3.50% per annum. The notes are unsecured, senior obligations of the Bancorp. Payment of the full principal amounts of the notes will be due upon maturity on

 

 

128  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

March 15, 2022. The notes are not subject to redemption at the Bancorp’s option at any time until 30 days prior to maturity.

On February 28, 2014, the Bancorp issued and sold $500 million of senior notes to third party investors. The senior notes bear a fixed-rate of interest of 2.30% per annum. The notes are unsecured, senior obligations of the Bancorp. Payment of the full principal amounts of the notes is due upon maturity on March 1, 2019. The notes are not subject to redemption at the Bancorp’s option at any time until 30 days prior to maturity.

Subordinated Debt

The subordinated floating-rate notes due in 2016 pay interest at three-month LIBOR plus 42 bps. The Bancorp has entered into interest rate swaps to convert its subordinated fixed-rate notes due in 2017 and 2018 to floating-rate, which pay interest at three-month LIBOR plus 42 bps and 25 bps, respectively, at December 31, 2014. The rates paid on the swaps hedging the subordinated floating-rate notes due in 2017 and 2018 were 0.69% and 0.48%, respectively, at December 31, 2014. Of the $1.0 billion in 8.25% subordinated fixed-rate notes due in 2038, $705 million were subsequently hedged to floating and paid a rate of 3.28% at December 31, 2014.

On November 20, 2013, the Bancorp issued and sold $750 million of 4.30% unsecured subordinated fixed-rate notes with a maturity date of January 16, 2024. These fixed-rate notes will be redeemable by the Bancorp, in whole or in part, on or after the date that is 30 days prior to the maturity date at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest up to, but excluding, the redemption date.

SUBSIDIARY LONG-TERM BORROWINGS

Senior and Subordinated Debt

Medium-term senior notes and subordinated bank notes with maturities ranging from one year to 30 years can be issued by the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary. On February 25, 2013, the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary updated and amended its existing global bank note program. The amended global bank note program increased the Bank’s capacity to issue its senior and subordinated unsecured bank notes from $20 billion to $25 billion. As of December 31, 2014, $19.1 billion was available for future issuance under the global bank note program. For the subordinated fixed-rate bank notes due in 2015, the Bancorp entered into interest rate swaps to convert the fixed-rate debt into floating-rate. At December 31, 2014, the weighted-average rate paid on the swaps was 0.33%.

On February 28, 2013, the Bank issued and sold, under its amended bank notes program, $1.3 billion in aggregate principal amount of unsecured senior bank notes. The bank notes consisted of: $600 million of 1.45% senior fixed-rate notes due on February 28, 2018; $400 million of 0.90% senior fixed-rate notes due on February 26, 2016; and $300 million of senior floating-rate notes due on February 26, 2016. Interest on the floating-rate notes is 3-month LIBOR plus 41 bps. These bank notes will be redeemable by the Bank, in whole or in part, on or after the date that is 30 days prior to the maturity date at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest through the redemption date.

On November 20, 2013, the Bank issued and sold, under its amended bank notes program, $1.8 billion in aggregate principal amount of unsecured senior bank notes. The bank notes consisted of $1.0 billion of 1.15% senior fixed-rate notes due on November 18, 2016 and $750 million of senior floating-rate notes due on November 18, 2016. Interest on the floating-rate notes is 3-month LIBOR plus 51 bps. These bank notes will be redeemable by the Bank, in whole or in part, on or after the date that is 30 days prior to the maturity date at a redemption price equal to 100% of

the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest up to, but excluding, the redemption date.

On April 25, 2014, the Bank issued and sold, under its amended bank notes program, $1.5 billion in aggregate principal amount of unsecured senior bank notes. The bank notes consisted of $850 million of 2.375% senior fixed-rate notes due on April 25, 2019 and $650 million of 1.35% senior fixed-rate notes due on June 1, 2017. These bank notes will be redeemable by the Bank, in whole or in part, on or after the date that is 30 days prior to the maturity date at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest up to, but excluding, the redemption date.

On September 5, 2014, the Bank issued and sold, under its amended bank notes program, $850 million of 2.875% unsecured senior fixed-rate bank notes with a maturity date of October 1, 2021. These bank notes will be redeemable by the Bank, in whole or in part, on or after the date that is 30 days prior to the maturity date at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest up to, but excluding, the redemption date.

Junior Subordinated Debt

The junior subordinated floating-rate bank notes due in 2035 were assumed by the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary as part of the acquisition of First Charter in May 2008. The obligation was issued to First Charter Capital Trust I and II, respectively. The notes of First Charter Capital Trust I and II pay a floating-rate at three-month LIBOR plus 169 bps and 142 bps, respectively. The Bank has fully and unconditionally guaranteed all obligations under the acquired TruPS issued by First Charter Capital Trust I and II.

FHLB Advances

At December 31, 2014, FHLB advances have rates ranging from 0.05% to 6.87%, with interest payable monthly. The advances are secured by certain residential mortgage loans and securities totaling $20.5 billion. The $41 million in remaining advances mature as follows: $2 million in 2015, $3 million in 2016, $1 million in 2017, $4 million in 2018, $9 million in 2019 and $22 million thereafter.

Notes Associated with Consolidated VIE

As previously discussed in Note 10, the Bancorp was determined to be the primary beneficiary of various VIEs associated with automobile loan securitizations completed during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013. As such, $3.4 billion of long-term debt related to these VIEs was consolidated in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements as of December 31, 2014. Third-party holders of this debt do not have recourse to the general assets of the Bancorp.

 

 

129  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

17. COMMITMENTS, CONTINGENT LIABILITIES AND GUARANTEES

 

The Bancorp, in the normal course of business, enters into financial instruments and various agreements to meet the financing needs of its customers. The Bancorp also enters into certain transactions and agreements to manage its interest rate and prepayment risks, provide funding, equipment and locations for its operations and invest in its communities. These instruments and agreements involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit risk, counterparty risk and market risk in

excess of the amounts recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The creditworthiness of counterparties for all instruments and agreements is evaluated on a case-by-case basis in accordance with the Bancorp’s credit policies. The Bancorp’s significant commitments, contingent liabilities and guarantees in excess of the amounts recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets are discussed in further detail below:

 

 

Commitments

The Bancorp has certain commitments to make future payments under contracts. The following table reflects a summary of significant commitments as of December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014        2013              

Commitments to extend credit

$                 63,827     62,050           

Letters of credit

  3,974     4,129           

Forward contracts related to held for sale mortgage loans

  999     1,448           

Noncancelable operating lease obligations

  697     746           

Capital commitments for private equity investments

  78     90           

Purchase obligations

  77     84           

Capital lease obligations

  37     19           

Capital expenditures

  28     33           

 

Commitments to extend credit

Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend, typically having fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses that may require payment of a fee. Since many of the commitments to extend credit may expire without being drawn upon, the total commitment amounts do not necessarily represent future cash flow requirements. The Bancorp is exposed to credit risk in the event of nonperformance by the counterparty for the amount of the contract. Fixed-rate commitments are also subject to market risk

resulting from fluctuations in interest rates and the Bancorp’s exposure is limited to the replacement value of those commitments. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp had a reserve for unfunded commitments, including letters of credit, totaling $135 million and $162 million, respectively, included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The Bancorp monitors the credit risk associated with commitments to extend credit using the same risk rating system utilized within its loan and lease portfolio.

 

 

Risk ratings under this risk rating system are summarized in the following table as of December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014          2013              

Pass

$ 62,787     61,364       

Special mention

  660     369       

Substandard

  380     316       

Doubtful

  -     1       

Total

$                 63,827     62,050       

Letters of credit

Standby and commercial letters of credit are conditional commitments issued to guarantee the performance of a customer to a third party and expire as summarized in the following table as of December 31, 2014:

 

($ in millions)     

Less than 1 year (a)

$ 2,181   

1 - 5 years (a)

  1,750   

Over 5 years

  43   

Total

$                     3,974   
(a)

Includes $88 and $17 issued on behalf of commercial customers to facilitate trade payments in U.S. dollars and foreign currencies which expire less than one year and between one and five years, respectively.

 

Standby letters of credit accounted for 97% of total letters of credit at December 31, 2014 and 2013 and are considered guarantees in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Approximately 60% and 48% of the total standby letters of credit were collateralized as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. In the event of nonperformance by the customers, the Bancorp has rights to the underlying collateral, which can include commercial real estate, physical plant and

property, inventory, receivables, cash and marketable securities. At December 31, 2014 and 2013 the reserve related to these standby letters of credit was $1 million and $2 million, respectively, and is included in the total reserve for unfunded commitments. The Bancorp monitors the credit risk associated with letters of credit using the same risk rating system utilized within its loan and lease portfolio.

 

 

130  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Risk ratings under this risk rating system are summarized in the following table as of December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014        2013              

Pass

$ 3,483     3,651          

Special mention

  147     99          

Substandard

  299     355          

Doubtful

  45     24          

Total

$                   3,974     4,129          

 

At December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp had outstanding letters of credit that were supporting certain securities issued as VRDNs. The Bancorp facilitates financing for its commercial customers, which consist of companies and municipalities, by marketing the VRDNs to investors. The VRDNs pay interest to holders at a rate of interest that fluctuates based upon market demand. The VRDNs generally have long-term maturity dates, but can be tendered by the holder for purchase at par value upon proper advance notice. When the VRDNs are tendered, a remarketing agent generally finds another investor to purchase the VRDNs to keep the securities outstanding in the market. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, total VRDNs in which the Bancorp was the remarketing agent or were supported by a Bancorp letter of credit were $1.7 billion and $2.1 billion of which FTS acted as the remarketing agent to issuers on $1.4 billion and $1.8 billion, respectively. As remarketing agent, FTS is responsible for finding purchasers for VRDNs that are put by investors. The Bancorp issued letters of credit, as a credit enhancement, to $1.2 billion and $1.5 billion of the VRDNs remarketed by FTS, in addition to $247 million and $300 million in VRDNs remarketed by third parties at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. These letters of credit are included in the total letters of credit balance provided in the previous table.

Forward contracts to sell mortgage loans

The Bancorp enters into forward contracts to economically hedge the change in fair value of certain residential mortgage loans held for sale due to changes in interest rates. The outstanding notional amounts of these forward contracts are included in the summary of significant commitments table for all periods presented.

Noncancelable lease obligations and other commitments

The Bancorp’s subsidiaries have entered into a number of noncancelable lease agreements. The minimum rental commitments under noncancelable lease agreements are shown in the summary of significant commitments table. The Bancorp has also entered into a limited number of agreements for work related to banking center construction and to purchase goods or services.

Contingent Liabilities

Private mortgage reinsurance

For certain mortgage loans originated by the Bancorp, borrowers may be required to obtain PMI provided by third-party insurers. In some instances, these insurers cede a portion of the PMI premiums to the Bancorp, and the Bancorp provides reinsurance coverage within a specified range of the total PMI coverage. The Bancorp’s reinsurance coverage typically ranges from 5% to 10% of the total PMI coverage. The Bancorp’s maximum exposure in the event of nonperformance by the underlying borrowers is equivalent to the Bancorp’s total outstanding reinsurance coverage, which was $29 million at December 31, 2014 and $37 million at December 31, 2013. As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp maintained a reserve of $2 million and $10 million, respectively, related to exposures within the reinsurance portfolio which was included in

other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. During 2009, the Bancorp suspended the practice of providing reinsurance of PMI for newly originated mortgage loans.

Legal claims

There are legal claims pending against the Bancorp and its subsidiaries that have arisen in the normal course of business. Refer to Note 18 for additional information regarding these proceedings.

Guarantees

The Bancorp has performance obligations upon the occurrence of certain events under financial guarantees provided in certain contractual arrangements as discussed in the following sections.

Residential mortgage loans sold with representation and warranty provisions

Conforming residential mortgage loans sold to unrelated third parties are generally sold with representation and warranty provisions. A contractual liability arises only in the event of a breach of these representations and warranties and, in general, only when a loss results from the breach. The Bancorp may be required to repurchase any previously sold loan or indemnify (make whole) the investor or insurer for which the representation or warranty of the Bancorp proves to be inaccurate, incomplete or misleading.

The Bancorp establishes a residential mortgage repurchase reserve related to various representations and warranties that reflects management’s estimate of losses based on a combination of factors. The Bancorp’s estimation process requires management to make subjective and complex judgments about matters that are inherently uncertain, such as, future demand expectations, economic factors and the specific characteristics of the loans subject to repurchase. Such factors incorporate historical investor audit and repurchase demand rates, appeals success rates, historical loss severity and any additional information obtained from the GSEs regarding future mortgage repurchase and file request criteria. At the time of a loan sale, the Bancorp records a representation and warranty reserve at the estimated fair value of the Bancorp’s guarantee and continually updates the reserve during the life of the loan as losses in excess of the reserve become probable and reasonably estimable. The provision for the estimated fair value of the representation and warranty guarantee arising from the loan sales is recorded as an adjustment to the gain on sale, which is included in other noninterest income at the time of sale. Updates to the reserve are recorded in other noninterest expense.

During the fourth quarter of 2013, the Bancorp settled certain repurchase claims related to mortgage loans originated and sold to FHLMC prior to January 1, 2009 for $25 million, after paid claim credits and other adjustments. The settlement removes the Bancorp’s responsibility to repurchase or indemnify FHLMC for representation and warranty violations on any loan sold prior to January 1, 2009 except in limited circumstances.

As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp maintained reserves related to loans sold with representation and warranty provisions totaling $35 million and $44 million, respectively, included in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets.

 

 

131  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The Bancorp uses the best information available to it in estimating its mortgage representation and warranty reserve, however, the estimation process is inherently uncertain and imprecise and, accordingly, losses in excess of the amounts accrued as of December 31, 2014, are reasonably possible. The Bancorp currently estimates that it is reasonably possible that it could incur losses related to mortgage representation and warranty provisions in an amount up to approximately $57 million in excess of amounts reserved. This estimate was derived by modifying the key assumptions discussed above to reflect management’s judgment regarding reasonably possible adverse changes to those assumptions. The actual repurchase losses could vary significantly from the

recorded mortgage representation and warranty reserve or this estimate of reasonably possibly losses, depending on the outcome of various factors, including those noted above.

During 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp paid $11 million and $64 million, respectively, in the form of make whole payments and repurchased $59 million and $89 million, respectively, in outstanding principal of loans to satisfy investor demands. Total repurchase demand requests during 2014 and 2013 were $97 million and $263 million, respectively. Total outstanding repurchase demand inventory was $7 million at December 31, 2014 compared to $46 million at December 31, 2013.

 

 

The following table summarizes activity in the reserve for representation and warranty provisions for the years ended:

 

 

 
($ in millions) 2014   2013       

 

 

Balance, beginning of period

$ 44     110       

Net additions to the reserve

  6     7       

Losses charged against the reserve

  (15               (73)       

 

 

Balance, end of period

$           35     44       

 

 

The following tables provide a rollforward of unresolved claims by claimant type for the years ended:

 

 

 
          GSE                   Private Label          
December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)         Units   Dollars            Units   Dollars       

 

 

Balance, beginning of period

  264    $ 41      33    $ 5        

New demands

  744      95      14      2        

Loan paydowns/payoffs

  (44)      (5)      (2)      (1)        

Resolved demands

  (927)                  (125)      (44)                  (5)        

 

 

Balance, end of period

  37    $       $ 1        

 

 

 

 
          GSE                   Private Label          
December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)         Units   Dollars           Units   Dollars       

 

 

Balance, beginning of period

  294    $ 48      124    $ 19        

New demands

  1,962      259      237      4        

Loan paydowns/payoffs

  (20)      (3)      (6)      (1)        

Resolved demands

  (1,972)                  (263)      (322)                  (17)        

 

 

Balance, end of period

  264    $ 41      33    $ 5        

 

 

 

Residential mortgage loans sold with credit recourse

The Bancorp sold certain residential mortgage loans in the secondary market with credit recourse. In the event of any customer default, pursuant to the credit recourse provided, the Bancorp is required to reimburse the third party. The maximum amount of credit risk in the event of nonperformance by the underlying borrowers is equivalent to the total outstanding balance. In the event of nonperformance, the Bancorp has rights to the underlying collateral value securing the loan. The outstanding balances on these loans sold with credit recourse were $548 million and $579 million at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively, and the delinquency rates were 4.0% at December 31, 2014 and 4.4% at December 31, 2013. The Bancorp maintained an estimated credit loss reserve on these loans sold with credit recourse of $11 million at December 31, 2014 and $16 million at December 31, 2013 recorded in other liabilities in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. To determine the credit loss reserve, the Bancorp used an approach that is consistent with its overall approach in estimating credit losses for various categories of residential mortgage loans held in its loan portfolio.

Margin accounts

FTS, a subsidiary of the Bancorp, guarantees the collection of all margin account balances held by its brokerage clearing agent for the benefit of its customers. FTS is responsible for payment to its

brokerage clearing agent for any loss, liability, damage, cost or expense incurred as a result of customers failing to comply with margin or margin maintenance calls on all margin accounts. The margin account balance held by the brokerage clearing agent was $13 million at December 31, 2014 and $12 million at December 31, 2013. In the event of any customer default, FTS has rights to the underlying collateral provided. Given the existence of the underlying collateral provided and negligible historical credit losses, the Bancorp does not maintain a loss reserve related to the margin accounts.

Long-term borrowing obligations

The Bancorp had certain fully and unconditionally guaranteed long-term borrowing obligations issued by wholly-owned issuing trust entities of $62 million as of December 31, 2014.

Visa litigation

The Bancorp, as a member bank of Visa prior to Visa’s reorganization and IPO (the “IPO”) of its Class A common shares (the “Class A Shares”) in 2008, had certain indemnification obligations pursuant to Visa’s certificate of incorporation and by-laws and in accordance with their membership agreements. In accordance with Visa’s by-laws prior to the IPO, the Bancorp could have been required to indemnify Visa for the Bancorp’s

 

 

132  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

proportional share of losses based on the pre-IPO membership interests. As part of its reorganization and IPO, the Bancorp’s indemnification obligation was modified to include only certain known litigation (the “Covered Litigation”) as of the date of the restructuring. This modification triggered a requirement for the Bancorp to recognize a liability equal to the fair value of the indemnification liability.

In conjunction with the IPO, the Bancorp received 10.1 million of Visa’s Class B common shares (the “Class B Shares”) based on the Bancorp’s membership percentage in Visa prior to the IPO. The Class B Shares are not transferable (other than to another member bank) until the later of the third anniversary of the IPO closing or the date which the Covered Litigation has been resolved; therefore, the Bancorp’s Class B Shares were classified in other assets and accounted for at their carryover basis of $0. Visa deposited $3 billion of the proceeds from the IPO into a litigation escrow account, established for the purpose of funding judgments in, or settlements of, the Covered Litigation. If Visa’s litigation committee determines that the escrow account is insufficient, then Visa will issue additional Class A Shares and deposit the proceeds from the sale of the Class A Shares into the litigation escrow account. When Visa funds the litigation escrow account, the Class B Shares are subject to dilution through an adjustment in the conversion rate of Class B Shares into Class A Shares.

In 2009, the Bancorp completed the sale of the Class B Shares and entered into a total return swap in which the Bancorp will make or receive payments based on subsequent changes in the conversion rate of the Class B Shares into Class A Shares. The swap terminates on the later of the third anniversary of Visa’s IPO or the date on which the Covered Litigation is settled. Refer to Note 27 for additional information on the valuation of the swap. The counterparty to the swap as a result of its ownership of the Class B

Shares will be impacted by dilutive adjustments to the conversion rate of the Class B Shares into Class A Shares caused by any Covered Litigation losses in excess of the litigation escrow account. If actual judgments in, or settlements of, the Covered Litigation significantly exceed current expectations, then additional funding by Visa of the litigation escrow account and the resulting dilution of the Class B Shares could result in a scenario where the Bancorp’s ultimate exposure associated with the Covered Litigation (the “Visa Litigation Exposure”) exceeds the value of the Class B Shares owned by the swap counterparty (the “Class B Value”). In the event the Bancorp concludes that it is probable that the Visa Litigation Exposure exceeds the Class B Value, the Bancorp would record a litigation reserve liability and a corresponding amount of other noninterest expense for the amount of the excess. Any such litigation reserve liability would be separate and distinct from the fair value derivative liability associated with the total return swap.

As of the date of the Bancorp’s sale of the Class B Shares and through December 31, 2014, the Bancorp has concluded that it is not probable that the Visa Litigation Exposure will exceed the Class B value. Based on this determination, upon the sale of the Class B Shares, the Bancorp reversed its net Visa litigation reserve liability and recognized a free-standing derivative liability associated with the total return swap. The fair value of the swap liability was $49 million and $48 million at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Refer to Notes 12 and 18 for further information.

After the Bancorp’s sale of the Class B Shares, Visa has funded additional amounts into the litigation escrow account which have resulted in further dilution in the conversion of Class B Shares into Class A Shares, and along with other terms of the total return swap, required the Bancorp to make cash payments to the swap counterparty as follows:

 

 

($ in millions)          
Period

Visa             

Funding Amount  

 

Bancorp Cash              

Payment Amount          

 

Q2 2010

$                               500   $                                   20           

Q4 2010

  800     35          

Q2 2011

  400     19          

Q1 2012

  1,565     75          

Q3 2012

  150     6          

Q3 2014

  450     18          

 

133  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

18. LEGAL AND REGULATORY PROCEEDINGS

 

During April 2006, the Bancorp was added as a defendant in a consolidated antitrust class action lawsuit originally filed against Visa ® , MasterCard ® and several other major financial institutions in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York. The plaintiffs, merchants operating commercial businesses throughout the U.S. and trade associations, claimed that the interchange fees charged by card-issuing banks were unreasonable and sought injunctive relief and unspecified damages. In addition to being a named defendant, the Bancorp is also subject to a possible indemnification obligation of Visa as discussed in Note 17 and has also entered into judgment and loss sharing agreements with Visa, MasterCard and certain other named defendants. In October 2012, the parties to the litigation entered into a settlement agreement. The court entered a Class Settlement Preliminary Approval Order in November 2012. Pursuant to the terms of the settlement agreement, the Bancorp paid $46 million into a class settlement escrow account. Previously, the Bancorp paid an additional $4 million in another settlement escrow in connection with the settlement of claims from plaintiffs not included in the class action. More than 7,900 merchants have requested exclusion from the class settlement. Pursuant to the terms of the settlement agreement, 25% of the funds paid into the class settlement escrow account have been returned to the control of the defendants through Class Exclusion Takedown Payments. Approximately 460 of the merchants who requested exclusion from the class have filed separate federal lawsuits against Visa, MasterCard and certain other defendants alleging similar antitrust violations. These “opt-out” federal lawsuits have been transferred to the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York. The Bancorp was not named as a defendant in any of the opt-out federal lawsuits, but may have obligations pursuant to indemnification arrangements and/or the judgment or loss sharing agreements noted above. In addition, one merchant filed a separate state court lawsuit against Visa, MasterCard and certain other defendants, including the Bancorp, alleging similar antitrust violations. On January 14, 2014, the court entered a final order approving the class settlement. A number of merchants have filed appeals from that approval. On July 18, 2014, the court in which all but one of the opt-out federal lawsuits has been consolidated denied defendants’ motion to dismiss the complaints. Several of the opt-out federal lawsuits have been resolved. Refer to Note 17 for further information.

In 2008, two cases were filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Ohio against the Bancorp and certain officers styled Dudenhoeffer v Fifth Third Bancorp et al. Case No. 1:08-cv-538. The complaints alleged violations of ERISA based on allegations similar to those set forth in the previously reported securities class action cases. The ERISA actions were dismissed by the trial court, but the Sixth Circuit Court of Appeals reversed the trial court decision. The Bancorp petitioned the United States Supreme Court to review and reverse the Sixth Circuit decision and sought a stay of proceedings in the trial court pending appeal. On December 13, 2013, the Supreme Court granted certiorari and agreed to hear the appeal. Oral arguments were held on April 2, 2014 and on June 25, 2014 the Supreme Court unanimously vacated the Sixth Circuit decision and remanded the case for further proceedings consistent with the standards articulated in its decision. The Supreme Court issued its mandate remanding the case back to the Sixth Circuit Court of Appeals but no further proceedings have occurred.

In November 2014, a shareholder of the Bancorp filed a shareholder derivative suit in the Court of Common Pleas for Hamilton County, Ohio, against current and former members of the Bancorp’s Board of Directors, the Bancorp’s former Chief Financial Officer and current Executive Vice President, Daniel T. Poston, the

Bancorp’s Chief Executive Officer, Kevin T. Kabat, and, nominally, the Bancorp. The suit alleges breach of fiduciary duty, waste of corporate assets and unjust enrichment in connection with the Bancorp’s alleged violations of federal and state securities laws, among other charges, in relation to its administrative settlement with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission announced on December 4, 2013 to resolve the previously reported investigation of the Bancorp’s historical accounting and reporting with respect to certain commercial loans that were sold or reclassified as held for sale by the Bancorp in the fourth quarter of 2008. The suit seeks, among other things, unspecified monetary damages, disgorgement of profits, certain corporate governance and personnel actions and compliance and disclosure changes. On January 16, 2015 a motion to dismiss the complaint was filed on behalf of all defendants. The impact of the final disposition of this lawsuit cannot be assessed at this time.

The Bancorp and its subsidiaries are not parties to any other material litigation. However, there are other litigation matters that arise in the normal course of business. While it is impossible to ascertain the ultimate resolution or range of financial liability with respect to these contingent matters, management believes any resulting liability from these other actions would not have a material effect upon the Bancorp’s consolidated financial position, results of operations or cash flows.

The Bancorp and/or its affiliates are involved in information-gathering requests, reviews, investigations and proceedings (both formal and informal) by various governmental regulatory agencies and law enforcement authorities, as well as self-regulatory bodies regarding their respective businesses. Additional matters will likely arise from time to time. Any of these matters may result in material adverse consequences to the Bancorp, its affiliates and/or their respective directors, officers and other personnel, including adverse judgments, findings, settlements, fines, penalties, orders, injunctions or other actions, amendments and/or restatements of the Bancorp’s SEC filings and/or financial statements, as applicable, and/or determinations of material weaknesses in our disclosure controls and procedures. Investigations by regulatory authorities may from time to time result in civil or criminal referrals to law enforcement authorities such as the Department of Justice or a United States Attorney. Among other matters, the Bancorp has been cooperating with the Department of Justice, the Department of Housing and Urban Development and the Federal Housing Finance Authority in civil investigations regarding compliance with requirements relating to certain Federal Housing Agency-insured loans and certain loans sold to government sponsored entities originated by affiliates of the Bancorp. The investigations could lead to liability under the Federal False Claims Act and/or the Federal Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act of 1989, which allow up to treble and other special damages substantially in excess of actual losses. Additionally, the Bancorp is also cooperating with an investigation by the Department of Justice to determine whether the Bank engaged in any discriminatory practices in connection with the Bank’s indirect automobile loan portfolio. Any claim resulting from this investigation could include direct and indirect damages and civil money penalties.

The Bancorp is party to numerous claims and lawsuits as well as threatened or potential actions or claims concerning matters arising from the conduct of its business activities. The outcome of claims or litigation and the timing of ultimate resolution are inherently difficult to predict. The following factors, among others, contribute to this lack of predictability: plaintiff claims often include significant legal uncertainties, damages alleged by plaintiffs are often unspecified or overstated, discovery may not have started or may not be complete and material facts may be disputed or

 

 

134  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

unsubstantiated. As a result of these factors, the Bancorp is not always able to provide an estimate of the range of reasonably possible outcomes for each claim. A reserve for a potential litigation loss is established when information related to the loss contingency indicates both that a loss is probable and that the amount of loss can be reasonably estimated. Any such reserve is adjusted from time to time thereafter as appropriate to reflect changes in circumstances. The Bancorp also determines, when possible (due to the uncertainties described above), estimates of reasonably possible losses or ranges of reasonably possible losses, in excess of amounts reserved. Under U.S. GAAP, an event is “reasonably possible” if “the chance of the future event or events occurring is more than remote but less than likely” and an event is “remote” if “the chance of the future event or events occurring is slight.” Thus, references to the upper end of the range of reasonably possible loss for cases in which the Bancorp is able to estimate a range of reasonably possible loss mean the upper end of the range of loss for cases for which the Bancorp believes the risk of loss is more than slight. For matters where the Bancorp is able to estimate such possible losses or ranges of possible losses, the Bancorp currently estimates that it is reasonably possible that it could incur losses related to legal and regulatory proceedings including the matters discussed above in an aggregate amount up to approximately $105 million in excess of amounts reserved, with it also being reasonably possible that no losses will be incurred in these matters. The estimates included in this amount are based on the Bancorp’s analysis of currently available information, and as new information is obtained the Bancorp may change its estimates.

For these matters and others where an unfavorable outcome is reasonably possible but not probable, there may be a range of possible losses in excess of the established reserve that cannot be estimated. Based on information currently available, advice of counsel, available insurance coverage and established reserves, the Bancorp believes that the eventual outcome of the actions against the Bancorp and/or its subsidiaries, including the matters described above, will not, individually or in the aggregate, have a material adverse effect on the Bancorp’s consolidated financial position. However, in the event of unexpected future developments, it is possible that the ultimate resolution of those matters, if unfavorable, may be material to the Bancorp’s results of operations for any particular period, depending, in part, upon the size of the loss or liability imposed and the operating results for the applicable period.

 

 

135  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

19. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

The Bancorp maintains written policies and procedures covering related party transactions to principal shareholders, directors and executives of the Bancorp. These procedures cover transactions such as employee-stock purchase loans, personal lines of credit, residential secured loans, overdrafts, letters of credit and increases in indebtedness. Such transactions are subject to the Bancorp’s normal underwriting and approval procedures. Prior to approving a loan to

a related party, Compliance Risk Management must review and determine whether the transaction requires approval from or a post notification to the Bancorp’s Board of Directors. At December 31, 2014 and 2013, certain directors, executive officers, principal holders of Bancorp common stock, associates of such persons, and affiliated companies of such persons were indebted, including undrawn commitments to lend, to the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary.

 

 

The following table summarizes the Bancorp’s activities with its principal shareholders, directors and executives at December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014   2013  

Commitments to lend, net of participations:

Directors and their affiliated companies

$ 525     586  

Executive officers

  3     2  

Total

$             528     588  

Outstanding balance on loans, net of participations and undrawn commitments

$ 63     86  

 

The commitments to lend are in the form of loans and guarantees for various business and personal interests. This indebtedness was incurred in the ordinary course of business on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with unrelated parties. This indebtedness does not involve more than the normal risk of repayment or present other features unfavorable to the Bancorp.

On June 30, 2009, the Bancorp completed the sale of a majority interest in its processing business, Vantiv Holding, LLC. Advent International acquired an approximate 51% interest in

Vantiv Holding, LLC for cash and a warrant. The Bancorp retained the remaining approximate 49% interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC.

During the first quarter of 2012, Vantiv, Inc. priced an IPO of its shares and contributed the net proceeds to Vantiv Holding, LLC for additional ownership interests. As a result of this offering, the Bancorp’s ownership of Vantiv Holding, LLC was reduced to approximately 39%. The impact of the capital contributions to Vantiv Holding, LLC and the resulting dilution in the Bancorp’s interest resulted in a gain of $115 million recognized by the Bancorp in the first quarter of 2012.

 

 

The following table provides a summary of the sales transactions that impacted the Bancorp’s ownership interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC after the initial IPO:

 

($ in millions)               
Period Ownership
Percentage Sold
  Gain on Sale   Remaining Ownership  
Percentage (a)   
 

Q4 2012

  6 %    $                   157         33 %       

Q2 2013

  5         242         28          

Q3 2013

  3         85         25          

Q2 2014

  3         125         23          
(a)

The Bancorp’s remaining investment in Vantiv Holding, LLC of $394 as of December 31, 2014 was accounted for as an equity method investment in the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

As of December 31, 2014, the Bancorp continued to hold approximately 43 million Class B units of Vantiv Holding, LLC and a warrant to purchase approximately 20.4 million Class C non-voting units of Vantiv Holding, LLC, both of which may be exchanged for Class A Common Stock of Vantiv, Inc. on a one for one basis or at Vantiv, Inc.’s option for cash. In addition, the Bancorp holds approximately 43 million Class B common shares of Vantiv, Inc. The Class B common shares give the Bancorp voting rights, but no economic interest in Vantiv, Inc. The voting rights attributable to the Class B common shares are limited to 18.5% of the voting power in Vantiv, Inc. at any time other than in connection with a stockholder vote with respect to a change in control in Vantiv, Inc. These securities are subject to certain terms and restrictions.

The Bancorp recognized $48 million, $77 million and $61 million respectively, in noninterest income as part of its equity method investment in Vantiv Holding, LLC for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 and received cash distributions totaling $23 million, $40 million and $30 million during 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

The Bancorp and Vantiv Holding, LLC have various agreements in place covering services relating to the operations of Vantiv Holding, LLC. The services provided by the Bancorp to Vantiv Holding, LLC were initially required to support Vantiv Holding, LLC as a standalone entity during the deconversion period. The majority of services previously provided by the Bancorp to support Vantiv Holding, Inc. as a standalone entity are no longer necessary and are now limited to certain general business resources. Vantiv Holding, LLC paid the Bancorp $1 million for these services for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Other services provided to Vantiv Holding, LLC by the Bancorp, have continued beyond the deconversion period, include clearing, settlement and sponsorship. Vantiv Holding, LLC paid the Bancorp $44 million for these services for the year ended December 31, 2014 and $34 million for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. In addition to the previously mentioned services, the Bancorp entered into an agreement under which Vantiv Holding, LLC will provide processing services to the Bancorp. The total amount of fees relating to the processing services provided to the Bancorp by Vantiv Holding, LLC totaled $83 million, $88

 

 

136  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

million and $83 million for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

As part of the initial sale, Vantiv Holding, LLC assumed loans totaling $1.25 billion owed to the Bancorp, which were refinanced in 2010 into a larger syndicated loan structure that included the Bancorp. The outstanding balance of loans to Vantiv Holding, LLC was $204 million and $348 million at December 31, 2014 and 2013,

respectively. Interest income relating to the loans was $5 million, $7 million and $11 million, respectively, for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 and is included in interest and fees on loans and leases in the Consolidated Statements of Income. Vantiv Holding, LLC’s line of credit was $50 million as of December 31, 2014 and 2013. Vantiv Holding, LLC did not draw upon its line of credit during the years ended December 31, 2014 or 2013.

 

 

20. INCOME TAXES

 

The Bancorp and its subsidiaries file a consolidated federal income tax return. The following is a summary of applicable income taxes included in the Consolidated Statements of Income for the years ended December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014   2013   2012  

Current income tax expense:

U.S. Federal income taxes

$ 424     494     327  

State and local income taxes

  34     23     38  

Foreign income taxes

  8     2     -  

Total current tax expense

  466     519     365  

Deferred income tax expense (benefit):

U.S. Federal income taxes

  71     232     252  

State and local income taxes

  9     23     19  

Foreign income taxes

  (1   (2   -  

Total deferred income tax expense

  79     253     271  

Applicable income tax expense

$           545     772     636  

The following is a reconciliation between the statutory U.S. Federal income tax rate and the Bancorp’s effective tax rate for the years ended December 31:

 

   2014   2013   2012  

Statutory tax rate

  35.0    35.0     35.0  

Increase (decrease) resulting from:

State taxes, net of federal benefit

  1.4      1.2     1.7  

Tax-exempt income

  (1.4)      (1.1   (2.1

Credits

  (8.1)      (6.0   (6.7

Unrealized stock-based compensation benefits

      0.3     0.8  

Other, net

      0.3     0.1  

Effective tax rate

  26.9    29.7     28.8  

 

Tax-exempt income in the rate reconciliation table includes interest on municipal bonds, interest on tax-exempt lending, income/charges on life insurance policies held by the Bancorp, and

certain gains on sales of leases that are exempt from federal taxation.

 

 

The following table provides a reconciliation of the beginning and ending amounts of the Bancorp’s unrecognized tax benefits:

 

($ in millions) 2014   2013   2012  

Unrecognized tax benefits at January 1

$ 7     18     14  

Gross increases for tax positions taken during prior period

  2     1     6  

Gross decreases for tax positions taken during prior period

  -       (7   (3

Gross increases for tax positions taken during current period

  2     1     2  

Settlements with taxing authorities

  -       (5   -    

Lapse of applicable statute of limitations

  -       (1   (1

Unrecognized tax benefits at December 31 (a)

$             11     7     18  
(a)

Amounts represent unrecognized tax benefits that if recognized would affect the annual effective tax rate.

 

The Bancorp’s unrecognized tax benefits as of December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 relate to state income tax exposures from taking tax positions where the Bancorp believes it is likely that, upon examination, a state will take a position contrary to the position taken by the Bancorp.

While it is reasonably possible that the amount of the unrecognized tax benefits with respect to certain of the Bancorp’s uncertain tax positions could increase or decrease during the next 12 months, the Bancorp believes it is unlikely that its unrecognized tax benefits will change by a material amount during the next 12 months.

 

 

137  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Deferred income taxes are comprised of the following items at December 31:

 

 ($ in millions) 2014   2013  

Deferred tax assets:

Allowance for loan and lease losses

$ 463     554  

Deferred compensation

  113     109  

Reserves

  96     101  

Reserve for unfunded commitments

  47     57  

State net operating losses

  18     22  

Other

  189     180  

Total deferred tax assets

$             926     1,023  

Deferred tax liabilities:

Lease financing

$ 896     865  

Investments in joint ventures and partnership interests

  329     381  

MSRs

  237     254  

Other comprehensive income

  231     44  

Qualifying hedges and free-standing derivatives

  105     97  

Bank premises and equipment

  103     114  

State deferred taxes

  81     76  

Other

  148     130  

Total deferred tax liabilities

$ 2,130     1,961  

Total net deferred tax liability

$ (1,204   (938

 

At December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp had recorded deferred tax assets of $18 million and $22 million, respectively, related to state net operating loss carryforwards. The deferred tax assets relating to state net operating losses (primarily resulting from leasing operations) are presented net of specific valuation allowances of $19 million at December 31, 2014 and 2013. If these carryforwards are not utilized, they will expire in varying amounts through 2034.

The Bancorp has determined that a valuation allowance is not needed against the remaining deferred tax assets as of December 31, 2014 or 2013. The Bancorp considered all of the positive and negative evidence available to determine whether it is more likely than not that the deferred tax assets will ultimately be realized and, based upon that evidence, the Bancorp believes it is more likely than not that the deferred tax assets recorded at December 31, 2014 and 2013 will ultimately be realized. The Bancorp reached this conclusion as the Bancorp has taxable income in the carryback period and it is expected that the Bancorp’s remaining deferred tax assets will be realized through the reversal of its existing taxable temporary differences and its projected future taxable income.

The IRS is currently examining the Bancorp’s 2010 and 2011 federal income tax returns. The statute of limitations for the Bancorp’s federal income tax returns remains open for tax years

2010-2014. On occasion, as various state and local taxing jurisdictions examine the returns of the Bancorp and its subsidiaries, the Bancorp may agree to extend the statute of limitations for a short period of time. Otherwise, with the exception of a few states with insignificant uncertain tax positions, the statutes of limitations for state income tax returns remain open only for tax years in accordance with each state’s statutes.

Any interest and penalties incurred in connection with income taxes are recorded as a component of income tax expense in the Consolidated Financial Statements. During the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, the Bancorp recognized an immaterial amount of interest expense in connection with income taxes. At December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp had accrued interest liabilities, net of the related tax benefits, of $1 million. No material liabilities were recorded for penalties related to income taxes.

Retained earnings at December 31, 2014 and 2013 included $157 million in allocations of earnings for bad debt deductions of former thrift subsidiaries for which no income tax has been provided. Under current tax law, if certain of the Bancorp’s subsidiaries use these bad debt reserves for purposes other than to absorb bad debt losses, they will be subject to federal income tax at the current corporate tax rate.

 

 

21. RETIREMENT AND BENEFIT PLANS

 

The Bancorp’s qualified defined benefit plan’s benefits were frozen in 1998, except for grandfathered employees. The Bancorp’s other retirement plans consist of nonqualified, supplemental retirement plans, which are funded on an as needed basis. A majority of these

plans were obtained in acquisitions from prior years. The Bancorp recognizes the overfunded and underfunded status of its pension plans as an asset and liability in the Consolidated Balance Sheets.

 

 

The overfunded and underfunded amounts recognized in other assets and other liabilities, respectively, on the Consolidated Balance Sheets were as follows as of December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014   2013  

Prepaid benefit cost

$                              -                             6  

Accrued benefit liability

  (52   (27

Net underfunded status

$ (52   (21

The following tables summarize the defined benefit retirement plans as of and for the years ended December 31:

 

138  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Plans with an Overfunded Status (a)        
($ in millions) 2014   2013  

Fair value of plan assets at January 1

$                          -                          185  

Actual return on assets

  -     30  

Contributions

  -     5  

Settlement

  -     (13

Benefits paid

  -     (7

Fair value of plan assets at December 31

$ -     200  

Projected benefit obligation at January 1

$ -     224  

Service cost

  -     -  

Interest cost

  -     10  

Settlement

  -     (13

Actuarial gain

  -     (20

Benefits paid

  -     (7

Projected benefit obligation at December 31

$ -     194  

Overfunded projected benefit obligation at December 31

$ -     6  
(a)

The Bancorp’s defined benefit plan had an Overfunded status at December 31, 2013. The plan was Underfunded at December 31, 2014 and is reflected in the Underfunded Status table.

 

Plans with an Underfunded Status        
($ in millions) 2014   2013  

Fair value of plan assets at January 1

$ 200     -  

Actual return on assets

  12     -  

Contributions

  3     4  

Settlement

  (11   -  

Benefits paid

  (9   (4

Fair value of plan assets at December 31

$                     195     -  

Projected benefit obligation at January 1

$ 221                           32  

Service cost

  -     -  

Interest cost

  10     1  

Settlement

  (11   -  

Actuarial loss (gain)

  36     (2

Benefits paid

  (9   (4

Projected benefit obligation at December 31

$ 247     27  

Unfunded projected benefit obligation at December 31

$ (52   (27

 

The estimated net actuarial loss for the defined benefit pension plans that will be amortized from AOCI into net periodic benefit cost during 2015 is $10 million. The estimated net prior service cost

for the defined benefit pension plan that will be amortized from AOCI into net periodic benefit cost during 2015 is immaterial to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

The following table summarizes net periodic benefit cost and other changes in plan assets and benefit obligations recognized in OCI for the years ended December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014   2013   2012  

Components of net periodic benefit cost:

Service cost

$ -     -     -  

Interest cost

  10         10         10  

Expected return on assets

  (14   (13   (13

Amortization of net actuarial loss

  7     11     14  

Amortization of net prior service cost

  -     -     -  

Settlement

  5     5     6  

Net periodic benefit cost

$ 8     13     17  

Other changes in plan assets and benefit obligations recognized in other comprehensive income:

Net actuarial loss (gain)

$         37     (38   7  

Net prior service cost

  -     -     -  

Amortization of net actuarial loss

  (7   (11   (14

Amortization of prior service cost

  -     -     -  

Settlement

  (5   (5   (6

Total recognized in other comprehensive income

  25     (54   (13

Total recognized in net periodic benefit cost and other comprehensive income

$ 33     (41   4  

 

139  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Fair Value Measurements of Plan Assets

The following table summarizes plan assets measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of December 31:

 

   Fair Value Measurements Using (a)  
2014 ($ in millions) Level 1         Level 2         Level 3     Total Fair Value   

Equity securities:

Equity securities (Value)

$ 10     -     -   $ 10          

Equity securities (Blended) (b)

  46     -     -     46          

Total equity securities

  56     -     -     56          

Mutual and exchange traded funds:

Money market funds

  7     -     -     7          

International funds

  -     38     -     38          

Domestic funds

  -     31     -     31          

Debt funds

  -     22     -     22          

Alternative strategies

  -     22     -     22          

Total mutual and exchange traded funds

  7     113     -     120          

Debt securities:

U.S. Treasury obligations

  3     -     -     3          

Agency mortgage-backed

  -     11     -     11          

Non-agency mortgage-backed

  -     2     -     2          

Corporate bonds (c)

  -     3     -     3          

Total debt securities

  3     16     -     19          

Total plan assets

$                         66     129     -   $                     195           

 

   Fair Value Measurements Using (a)  
2013 ($ in millions) Level 1       Level 2         Level 3     Total Fair Value   

Equity securities:

Equity securities (Value)

$ 8     -     -   $ 8          

Equity securities (Blended) (b)

  40     -     -     40          

Total equity securities

  48     -     -     48          

Mutual and exchange traded funds:

Money market funds

  7     -     -     7          

International funds

  -     43     -     43          

Domestic funds

  -     41     -     41          

Debt funds

  -     20     -     20          

Alternative strategies

  -     17     -     17          

Commodity funds

  6     -     -     6          

Total mutual and exchange traded funds

 

  13     121     -     134          

Debt securities:

U.S. Treasury obligations

  3     -     -     3          

Agency mortgage-backed

  -     13     -     13          

Non-agency mortgage-backed

  -     2     -     2          

Total debt securities

  3     15     -     18          

Total plan assets

$                         64     136     -   $                     200          
(a)

For further information on fair value hierarchy levels, refer to Note 1.

(b)

Includes holdings in Bancorp common stock.

(c)

Includes private label asset-backed securities.

 

The following is a description of the valuation methodologies used for instruments measured at fair value, as well as the general classification of such instruments pursuant to the valuation hierarchy.

Equity securities

The plan measures common stock using quoted prices which are available in an active market and classifies these investments within Level 1 of the valuation hierarchy.

Mutual and exchange traded funds

All of the plan’s mutual and exchange traded funds are publicly traded. The plan measures the value of these investments using the fund’s quoted prices that are available in an active market and classifies these investments within Level 1 of the valuation hierarchy. Where quoted prices are not available, the plan measures the fair value of these investments based on the redemption price of units held, which is based on the current fair value of the fund’s underlying assets. Unit values are determined by dividing the fund’s net assets at fair value by its units outstanding at the valuation dates to obtain the investment’s net asset value. Therefore, these investments are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy.

 

 

140  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Debt securities

Where quoted prices are available in an active market, securities are classified within Level 1 of the valuation hierarchy. Level 1 securities include U.S. Treasury obligations and federal agency securities. If quoted market prices are not available, then fair values are estimated using pricing models, quoted prices of securities with similar characteristics, or DCFs. Examples of such instruments, which are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy, include agency mortgage-backed securities, non-agency mortgage-backed securities and corporate bonds.

Plan Assumptions

The plan assumptions are evaluated annually and are updated as necessary. The discount rate assumption reflects the yield on a portfolio of high quality fixed-income instruments that have a similar duration to the plan’s liabilities. The expected long-term rate of return assumption reflects the average return expected on the assets invested to provide for the plan’s liabilities. In determining the expected long-term rate of return, the Bancorp evaluated actuarial and economic inputs, including long-term inflation rate assumptions and broad equity and bond indices long-term return projections, as well as actual long-term historical plan performance. In 2014, the Bancorp updated the mortality assumption which resulted in an increase of $14 million to the projected benefit obligation.

 

 

The following table summarizes the weighted-average plan assumptions for the years ended December 31:

 

   2014 2013       2012              

For measuring benefit obligations at year end:

Discount rate

3.82%   4.72     3.83          

Rate of compensation increase

N/A (a)   4.00     4.00          

Expected return on plan assets

7.25           7.50                     8.00          

For measuring net periodic benefit cost:

Discount rate

4.72   3.83     4.27          

Rate of compensation increase

N/A (a)   4.00     5.00          

Expected return on plan assets

7.25   7.50     8.00          
(a)

Since the Bancorp’s qualified defined benefit plan’s benefits were frozen in 1998, except for grandfathered employees, the rate of compensation increase is no longer applicable beginning in 2014 since minimal grandfathered employees are still accruing benefits.

 

Lowering both the expected rate of return on the plan assets and the discount rate by 0.25% would have increased the 2014 pension expense by approximately $1 million.

Based on the actuarial assumptions, the Bancorp expects to contribute $4 million to the plan in 2015. Estimated pension benefit payments, which reflect expected future service, are $22 million in 2015, $21 million in 2016, $19 million in 2017, $18 million in 2018 and $16 million in 2019. The total estimated payments for the years 2020 through 2024 is $80 million.

Investment Policies and Strategies

The Bancorp’s policy for the investment of plan assets is to employ investment strategies that achieve a range of weighted-average target asset allocations relating to equity securities (including the Bancorp’s common stock), fixed-income securities (including federal agency obligations, corporate bonds and notes), alternative strategies (including traditional mutual funds, precious metals and commodities) and cash.

 

 

The following table provides the Bancorp’s targeted and actual weighted-average asset allocations by asset category for the years ended December 31:

 

   Targeted range     2014 2013            

Equity securities

        62% 65        

Bancorp common stock

                2 2        

Total equity securities (a)

  39-78  %            64 67        

Total fixed-income securities

  11-41                 20 22        

Alternative strategies

  8-18                 12 7        

Cash

  0-10                   4 4        

Total

            100% 100        
(a)

Includes mutual and exchange traded funds.

 

The risk tolerance for the plan is determined by management to be “moderate to aggressive”, recognizing that higher returns involve some volatility and that periodic declines in the portfolio’s value are tolerated in an effort to achieve real capital growth. There were no significant concentrations of risk associated with the investments of the Bancorp’s benefit and retirement plan at December 31, 2014 and 2013.

Permitted asset classes of the plan include cash and cash equivalents, fixed-income (domestic and non-U.S. bonds), equities (U.S., non-U.S., emerging markets and REITS), equipment leasing, precious metals, commodity transactions and mortgages. The plan utilizes derivative instruments including puts, calls, straddles or

other option strategies, as approved by management. Per ERISA, the Bancorp’s common stock cannot exceed 10% of the fair value of plan assets.

Fifth Third Bank, as Trustee, is expected to manage the plan assets in a manner consistent with the plan agreement and other regulatory, federal and state laws. The Fifth Third Bank Pension, Profit Sharing and Medical Plan Committee (the “Committee”) is the plan administrator. The Trustee is required to provide to the Committee monthly and quarterly reports covering a list of plan assets, portfolio performance, transactions and asset allocation. The Trustee is also required to keep the Committee apprised of any

 

 

141  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

material changes in the Trustee’s outlook and recommended investment policy.

The accumulated benefit obligation for all defined benefit plans was $247 million and $221 million at December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

Other Information on Retirement and Benefit Plans

Amounts relating to the Bancorp’s defined benefit plans with assets exceeding benefit obligations were as follows at December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014       2013              

Projected benefit obligation

$ -       194          

Accumulated benefit obligation

  -       194          

Fair value of plan assets

  -                   200          

 

Amounts relating to the Bancorp’s defined benefit plans with benefit obligations exceeding assets were as follows at December 31:

 

  

($ in millions) 2014       2013              

Projected benefit obligation

$                 247     27          

Accumulated benefit obligation

  247     27          

Fair value of plan assets

  195     -          

 

As of December 31, 2014 and 2013, $195 million and $200 million, respectively, of plan assets were managed by Fifth Third Bank, a subsidiary of the Bancorp. Plan assets included $4 million of Bancorp common stock as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Plan assets are not expected to be returned to the Bancorp during 2015.

The Bancorp’s profit sharing plan expense was $19 million, $32 million and $46 million for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Expenses recognized for matching contributions to the Bancorp’s defined contribution savings plans were $44 million, $43 million and $42 million for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

 

 

142  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

22. ACCUMULATED OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

The tables below present the activity of the components of OCI and AOCI for the years ended December 31:

 

  

Total Other

Comprehensive Income

 

Total Accumulated Other

Comprehensive Income

 
($ in millions) Pretax
Activity
 

Tax

Effect

 

Net

Activity

  Beginning
Balance
  Net
Activity
  Ending
Balance
 

2014

Unrealized holding gains on available-for-sale securities arising during period

$ 580      (202)      378       

Reclassification adjustment for net gains included in net income

  (37)      13      (24)       

Net unrealized gains on available-for-sale securities

  543      (189)      354          121      354      475         

Unrealized holding gains on cash flow hedge derivatives arising during period

  60      (21)      39       

Reclassification adjustment for net gains on cash flow hedge derivatives included in net income

  (44)      15      (29)       

Net unrealized gains on cash flow hedge derivatives

  16      (6)      10          13      10      23         

Net actuarial loss arising during the period

  (37)      12      (25)       

Reclassification of amounts to net periodic benefit costs

  12      (4)      8       

Defined benefit pension plans, net

  (25)          (17)          (52)      (17)      (69)         

Total

$           534      (187)      347          82      347      429         

2013

Unrealized holding losses on available-for-sale securities arising during period

$ (454)      159      (295)       

Reclassification adjustment for net losses included in net income

      (2)      4       

Net unrealized gains on available-for-sale securities

  (448)      157      (291)          412      (291)      121         

Unrealized holding losses on cash flow hedge derivatives arising during period

  (13)          (8)       

Reclassification adjustment for net gains on cash flow hedge derivatives included in net income

  (44)      15      (29)       

Net unrealized gains on cash flow hedge derivatives

  (57)      20      (37)          50      (37)      13         

Net actuarial gain arising during the period

  38      (13)      25       

Reclassification of amounts to net periodic benefit costs

  16      (6)      10       

Defined benefit pension plans, net

  54      (19)      35          (87)      35      (52)         

Total

$ (451)      158      (293)          375      (293)      82         

2012

Unrealized holding losses on available-for-sale securities arising during period

$ (97)      34      (63)       

Reclassification adjustment for net gains included in net income

  (15)          (10)       

Net unrealized gains on available-for-sale securities

  (112)      39      (73)          485      (73)      412         

Unrealized holding gains on cash flow hedge derivatives arising during period

  37      (13)      24       

Reclassification adjustment for net gains on cash flow hedge derivatives included in net income

  (83)      29      (54)       

Net unrealized gains on cash flow hedge derivatives

  (46)      16      (30)          80      (30)      50         

Net actuarial loss arising during the period

  (7)          (5)       

Reclassification of amounts to net periodic benefit costs

  20      (7)                  13       

Defined benefit pension plans, net

  13      (5)      8          (95)              8      (87)         

Total

$ (145)                  50      (95)                  470      (95)              375         

 

143  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The table below presents reclassifications out of AOCI for the years ended December 31:

 

 

 
Components of AOCI: ($ in millions)  

Affected Line Item in the

Consolidated Statements of Income

      2014           2013          

 

 

Net unrealized gains on available-for-sale securities: (b)

Net gains (losses) included in net income

Securities gains, net $   37     (6)   
        

 

 

 
Income before income taxes   37     (6)   
Applicable income tax expense   (13    
        

 

 

 
Net income   24     (4)   
        

 

 

 

Net unrealized gains on cash flow hedge derivatives: (b)

Interest rate contracts related to C&I loans

Interest and fees on loans and leases   44     45   

Interest rate contracts related to long-term debt

Interest on long-term debt   -     (1)   
        

 

 

 
Income before income taxes   44     44   
Applicable income tax expense   (15   (15)   
        

 

 

 
Net income   29     29   
        

 

 

 

Net periodic benefit costs: (b)

Amortization of net actuarial loss

Employee benefits expense (a)   (7   (11)   

Settlements

Employee benefits expense (a)   (5   (5)   
        

 

 

 
Income before income taxes   (12   (16)   
Applicable income tax expense   4      
        

 

 

 
Net income   (8   (10)   
        

 

 

 

 

 

Total reclassifications for the period

    Net income          $     45       15   

 

 
(a)

This AOCI component is included in the computation of net periodic benefit cost. Refer to Note 21 for information on the computation of net periodic benefit cost.

(b)

Amounts in parentheses indicate reductions to net income.

 

144  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

23. COMMON, PREFERRED AND TREASURY STOCK

 

The following is a summary of the share activity within common, preferred and treasury stock for the years ended:

 

      Common Stock   Preferred Stock   Treasury Stock  
($ in millions, except share data)    Value   Shares   Value   Shares   Value   Shares  

December 31, 2011

$   2,051     923,892,581   $ 398     16,450   $ (64   4,088,145   

Shares acquired for treasury

  -        -        -        -        (627   42,424,014   

Impact of stock transactions under stock compensation plans, net

  -        -        -        -        54     (4,654,165)   

Other

  -        -        -        -        3     (117,470)   

December 31, 2012

$   2,051     923,892,581   $ 398     16,450   $ (634   41,740,524   

Shares acquired for treasury

  -        -        -        -        (1,242   65,516,126   

Issuance of preferred shares, Series I

  -        -        441     18,000     -        -      

Issuance of preferred shares, Series H

  -        -        593     24,000     -        -      

Redemption of preferred shares, Series G

  -        -        (398   (16,450   540     (35,529,018)   

Impact of stock transactions under stock compensation plans, net

  -        -        -        -        38     (3,697,042)   

Other

  -        -        -        -        3     556,246   

December 31, 2013

$   2,051     923,892,581   $ 1,034     42,000   $ (1,295   68,586,836   

Shares acquired for treasury

  -        -        -        -        (726   34,799,873   

Issuance of preferred shares, Series J

  -        -        297     12,000     -          

Impact of stock transactions under stock compensation plans, net

  -        -        -        -        47     (3,493,671)   

Other

  -        -        -        -        2     (47,409)   

December 31, 2014

$           2,051     923,892,581   $         1,331     54,000   $         (1,972   99,845,629   

 

Preferred Stock—Series J

On June 5, 2014, the Bancorp issued, in a registered public offering, 300,000 depositary shares, representing 12,000 shares of 4.90% fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series J perpetual preferred stock, for net proceeds of $297 million. Each preferred share has a $25,000 liquidation preference. The preferred stock accrues dividends, on a non-cumulative semi-annual basis, at an annual rate of 4.90% through but excluding September 30, 2019, at which time it converts to a quarterly floating rate dividend of three-month LIBOR plus 3.129%. Subject to any required regulatory approval, the Bancorp may redeem the Series J preferred shares at its option, in whole or in part, at any time on or after September 30, 2019, or any time prior following a regulatory capital event. The Series J preferred shares are not convertible into Bancorp common shares or any other securities.

Preferred Stock—Series I

On December 9, 2013, the Bancorp issued, in a registered public offering, 18,000,000 depositary shares, representing 18,000 shares of 6.625% fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series I perpetual preferred stock, for net proceeds of $441 million. Each preferred share has a $25,000 liquidation preference. The preferred stock accrues dividends, on a non-cumulative quarterly basis, at an annual rate of 6.625% through but excluding December 31, 2023, at which time it converts to a quarterly floating rate dividend of three-month LIBOR plus 3.71%. Subject to any required regulatory approval, the Bancorp may redeem the Series I preferred shares at its option in whole or in part, at any time on or after December 31, 2023 and may redeem in whole but not in part, following a regulatory capital event at any time prior to December 31, 2023. The Series I preferred shares are not convertible into Bancorp common shares or any other securities.

Preferred Stock—Series H

On May 16, 2013, the Bancorp issued, in a registered public offering, 600,000 depositary shares, representing 24,000 shares of 5.10% fixed-to-floating rate non-cumulative Series H perpetual preferred stock, for net proceeds of $593 million. Each preferred share has a $25,000 liquidation preference. The preferred stock accrues dividends, on a non-cumulative semi-annual basis, at an annual rate of 5.10% through but excluding June 30, 2023, at which

time it converts to a quarterly floating rate dividend of three-month LIBOR plus 3.033%. Subject to any required regulatory approval, the Bancorp may redeem the Series H preferred shares at its option in whole or in part, at any time on or after June 30, 2023 and may redeem in whole but not in part, following a regulatory capital event at any time prior to June 30, 2023. The Series H preferred shares are not convertible into Bancorp common shares or any other securities.

Preferred Stock—Series G

In 2008, the Bancorp issued 8.50% non-cumulative Series G convertible preferred stock. The depositary shares represented 1/250th of a share of Series G convertible preferred stock and had a liquidation preference of $25,000 per preferred share of Series G stock. The preferred stock was convertible at any time, at the option of the shareholder, into 2,159.8272 shares of common stock, representing a conversion price of approximately $11.575 per share of common stock.

On June 11, 2013, pursuant to the Amended Articles of Incorporation, the Bancorp’s Board of Directors authorized the conversion into common stock, no par value, of all outstanding shares of the Bancorp’s Series G perpetual preferred stock. The Articles grant the Bancorp the right, at its option, to convert all outstanding shares of Series G preferred stock if the closing price of common stock exceeded 130% of the applicable conversion price for 20 trading days within any period of 30 consecutive trading days. The closing price of shares of common stock satisfied such threshold for the 30 trading days ended June 10, 2013, and the Bancorp gave the required notice of its exercise of its conversion right.

On July 1, 2013, the Bancorp converted the remaining 16,442 outstanding shares of Series G preferred stock, which represented 4,110,500 depositary shares, into shares of Fifth Third’s common stock. Each share of Series G preferred stock was converted into 2,159.8272 shares of common stock, representing a total of 35,511,740 issued shares. The common shares issued in the conversion are exempt securities pursuant to Section 3(a)(9) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, as the securities exchanged were exclusively with the Bancorp’s existing security holders where no commission or other remuneration was paid. Upon conversion, the

 

 

145  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

depositary shares were delisted from the NASDAQ Global Select Market and withdrawn from the Exchange.

Treasury Stock

On March 13, 2012, the Bancorp announced the results of its capital plan submitted to the FRB as part of the 2012 CCAR. The FRB indicated to the Bancorp that it did not object to the repurchase of common shares in an amount equal to any after-tax gains realized by the Bancorp from the sale of Vantiv, Inc. common shares by either the Bancorp or Vantiv, Inc. On August 21, 2012, the Bancorp announced that the FRB did not object to its capital plan resubmitted under the 2012 CCAR process, which included the repurchases of common shares of up to $600 million through the first quarter of 2013, in addition to any incremental repurchase of common shares related to any after-tax gains realized by the Bancorp from the sale of Vantiv, Inc. common shares by either the Bancorp or Vantiv, Inc. As a result, on August 21, 2012, Fifth Third’s Board of Directors authorized the Bancorp to repurchase up to 100 million shares of its outstanding common stock in the open market or in privately negotiated transactions, and to utilize any derivative or similar instrument to affect share repurchase transactions.

On March 14, 2013, the Bancorp announced the results of its capital plan submitted to the FRB as part of the 2013 CCAR. The FRB indicated to the Bancorp that it did not object to the potential repurchase of common shares in an amount up to $984 million, including any shares issued in a Series G preferred stock conversion, and the repurchase of common shares in an amount equal to any after-tax gains realized by the Bancorp from the sale of Vantiv, Inc. common stock. On March 19, 2013, the Board of Directors authorized the Bancorp to repurchase up to 100 million common shares in the open market or in privately negotiated transactions, and to utilize any derivative or similar instrument to effect share repurchase transactions. This share repurchase authorization replaced the Board’s previous authorization from August of 2012.

On March 18, 2014, the Board of Directors authorized the Bancorp to repurchase up to 100 million common shares in the open market or in privately negotiated transactions, and to utilize any derivative or similar instrument to effect share repurchase transactions. This share repurchase authorization replaced the Board’s previous authorization from March of 2013.

On March 26, 2014, the Bancorp announced the results of its capital plan submitted to the FRB as part of the 2014 CCAR. The FRB indicated to the Bancorp that it did not object to the potential repurchase of $669 million of common shares with the additional ability to repurchase common shares in an amount equal to any after-tax gains realized by the Bancorp from the sale of Vantiv, Inc. common stock for the period beginning April 1, 2014 and ending March 31, 2015.

The Bancorp entered into a number of accelerated share repurchase transactions during 2012, 2013 and 2014. As part of these transactions, the Bancorp entered into forward contracts in which the final number of shares delivered at settlement was based generally on a discount to the average daily volume weighted average price of the Bancorp’s common stock during the term of these repurchase agreements. The accelerated share repurchases were treated as two separate transactions (i) the acquisition of treasury shares on the acquisition date and (ii) a forward contract indexed to the Bancorp’s stock.

 

 

 

146  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following table presents a summary of the Bancorp’s accelerated share repurchase transactions that were entered into or settled during 2012, 2013 and 2014. For more information on a subsequent event related to capital actions refer to Note 31 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Repurchase Date     Amount ($ in millions)   

 

    Shares Repurchased on 
    Repurchase Date

   Shares Received from Forward 
Contract Settlement
      Total Shares    
    Repurchased     
    Settlement Date  

April 26, 2012

$ 75     4,838,710     631,986     5,470,696     June 1, 2012   

August 28, 2012

  350     21,531,100     1,444,047     22,975,147     October 24, 2012   

November 9, 2012

  125     7,710,761     657,914     8,368,675               February 12, 2013   

December 19, 2012

  100     6,267,410     127,760     6,395,170     February 27, 2013   

January 31, 2013

  125     6,953,028     849,037     7,802,065     April 5, 2013   

May 24, 2013

  539     25,035,519     4,270,250     29,305,769     October 1, 2013   

November 18, 2013

  200     8,538,423     1,132,495     9,670,918     March 5, 2014   

December 13, 2013

  456     19,084,195     2,294,932     21,379,127     March 31, 2014   

January 31, 2014

  99     3,950,705     602,109     4,552,814     March 31, 2014   

May 1, 2014

  150     6,216,480     1,016,514     7,232,994     July 21, 2014   

July 24, 2014

  225     9,352,078     1,896,685     11,248,763     October 14, 2014   

October 23, 2014

  180     8,337,875     794,245     9,132,120     January 8, 2015   

24. STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION

 

The Bancorp has historically emphasized employee stock ownership. The following table provides detail of the number of shares to be issued upon exercise of outstanding stock-based awards

and remaining shares available for future issuance under all of the Bancorp’s equity compensation plans as of December 31, 2014:

 

 

Plan Category (shares in thousands)

 

 Number of Shares to be 
Issued Upon Exercise

      Weighted-Average    
Exercise Price
  Shares Available for
Future Issuance
 

Equity compensation plans approved by shareholders

              30,786  (a)           

SARs

  (b)      (b)          (a)         

Restricted stock

  7,253      N/A           (a)         

Stock options (c)

    $ 32.26           (a)         

Phantom stock units

  (d)      N/A       N/A              

Performance units

  (e)      N/A           (a)         

Employee stock purchase plan

  7,431  (f)           

Total shares

  7,260           38,217             
(a)

Under the 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan, 36 million shares of stock were authorized for issuance as incentive and nonqualified stock options, SARs, restricted stock and restricted stock units, performance units and performance RSAs.

(b)

The number of shares to be issued upon exercise will be determined at vesting based on the difference between the grant price and the market price at the date of exercise.

(c)

Excludes 0.3 million outstanding options awarded under plans assumed by the Bancorp in connection with certain mergers and acquisitions. The Bancorp has not made any awards under these plans and will make no additional awards under these plans. The weighted-average exercise price of the outstanding options is $13.76 per share.

(d)

Phantom stock units are settled in cash.

(e)

The number of shares to be issued is dependent upon the Bancorp achieving certain predefined performance targets and ranges from zero shares to approximately 2 million shares.

(f)

Represents remaining shares of Fifth Third common stock under the Bancorp’s 1993 Stock Purchase Plan, as amended and restated, including an additional 1.5 million shares approved by shareholders on March 28, 2007 and an additional 12 million shares approved by shareholders on April 21, 2009.

 

Stock-based awards are eligible for issuance under the Bancorp’s Incentive Compensation Plan to key employees and directors of the Bancorp and its subsidiaries. The Incentive Compensation Plan was approved by shareholders on April 15, 2014, and authorized the issuance of up to 36 million shares, including 16 million shares for Full Value Awards, as equity compensation and provides for incentive and nonqualified stock options, SARs, RSAs and restricted stock units, and performance shares. Full Value Awards are defined as awards with no cash outlay for the employee to obtain the full value. Based on total stock-based awards outstanding (including stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock and performance units) and shares remaining for future grants under the 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan, the potential dilution to which the Bancorp’s shareholders of common stock are exposed due to the potential that stock-based compensation will be awarded to executives, directors or key employees of the Bancorp is 10%. SARs, restricted stock, stock options and performance units outstanding represent seven percent of the Bancorp’s issued shares at December 31, 2014.

All of the Bancorp’s stock-based awards are to be settled with stock. The Bancorp has historically used treasury stock to settle stock-based awards, when available. SARs, issued at fair value based on the closing price of the Bancorp’s common stock on the date of grant, have up to ten-year terms and vest and become exercisable either ratably or fully over a four year period of continued employment. The Bancorp does not grant discounted SARs or stock options, re-price previously granted SARs or stock options, or grant reload stock options. Restricted stock award grants vest after four years, or ratably over three or four years of continued employment and include dividend and voting rights. Stock options were previously issued at fair value based on the closing price of the Bancorp’s common stock on the date of grant, have up to ten-year terms and vested and became fully exercisable ratably over a three or four year period of continued employment. Performance unit awards have three-year cliff vesting terms with market conditions as defined by the plan. All of the Bancorp’s executive stock-based awards contain an annual performance hurdle of two percent return on tangible common equity. If this threshold is not met all awards

 

 

147  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

that would vest in the next year are forfeited. The Bancorp met this threshold as of December 31, 2014.

Stock-based compensation expense was $83 million, $78 million and $69 million for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively, and is included in salaries, wages, and incentives in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The total related income tax benefit recognized was $30 million, $28 million

and $24 million for the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Stock Appreciation Rights

The Bancorp uses assumptions, which are evaluated and revised as necessary, in estimating the grant-date fair value of each SAR grant.

 

 

The weighted-average assumptions were as follows for the years ended December 31:

 

   2014   2013   2012  

Expected life (in years)

  6        6        6     

Expected volatility

  35%      36%      37%   

Expected dividend yield

  2.4%      3.0%      2.8%   

Risk-free interest rate

  2.0%                          1.0%                          1.2%   

 

The expected life is generally derived from historical exercise patterns and represents the amount of time that SARs granted are expected to be outstanding. The expected volatility is based on a combination of historical and implied volatilities of the Bancorp’s common stock. The expected dividend yield is based on annual dividends divided by the Bancorp’s stock price. Annual dividends are based on projected dividends, estimated using an expected long-term dividend payout ratio, over the estimated life of the awards. The risk-free interest rate for periods within the contractual life of the SARs is based on the U.S. Treasury yield curve in effect at the time of grant.

The grant-date fair value of SARs is measured using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model. The weighted-average grant-date fair value of SARs granted was $6.53, $4.56 and $4.23 per share for the years ended 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. The total grant-date fair value of SARs that vested during 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $34 million, $29 million, and $22 million, respectively.

At December 31, 2014, there was $57 million of stock-based compensation expense related to nonvested SARs not yet recognized. The expense is expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted-average period of approximately 2.4 years.

 

 

  

 

2014

  2013   2012  
SARs (Number of SARs in thousands)     Number of
    SARs
         Weighted-
       Average
        Grant Price
      Number of
    SARs
      Weighted-
    Average
    Grant Price
      Number of
    SARs
        Weighted-
      Average
      Grant Price
 

Outstanding at January 1

            48,599      $         19.98       44,120        $         20.41         36,502     $         22.20        

Granted

  4,526        21.63       10,267          16.16         12,179       14.36        

Exercised

  (4,408)        13.63       (2,904)          11.18         (1,271)       6.29        

Forfeited or expired

  (3,127)        34.19       (2,884)          21.78         (3,290)       23.33        

Outstanding at December 31

  45,590      $ 19.79       48,599        $ 19.98         44,120     $ 20.41        

Exercisable at December 31

  27,950      $ 21.71       26,462        $ 24.14         23,248     $ 26.76        

The following table summarizes outstanding and exercisable SARs by grant price at December 31, 2014:

 

   Outstanding SARs      Exercisable SARs  
Grant price per share     Number of
    SARs at
    Year End
    (000s)
        Weighted-
      Average
      Grant Price
 

Weighted-
Average
Remaining
    Contractual    
Life

(in years)

         Number of
    SARs at
    Year End
    (000s)
        Weighted-
      Average
      Grant Price
 

Weighted-
Average
Remaining
    Contractual    
Life

(in years)

 

Under $10.00

  3,363     $ 3.98       4.3           3,360     $ 3.99       4.3        

$10.01-$20.00

  29,089       15.36       6.7           15,783       15.54       5.9        

$20.01-$30.00

  4,362       21.64       9.3           31       22.73       3.4        

$30.01-$40.00

  6,443       38.67       1.7           6,443       38.67       1.7        

Over $40.00

  2,333       42.16       0.8             2,333       42.16       0.8        

All SARs

  45,590     $           19.79       5.8             27,950     $           21.71       4.3        

 

Restricted Stock Awards

The total grant-date fair value of RSAs that vested during 2014, 2013 and 2012 was $32 million, $40 million and $32 million, respectively. At December 31, 2014, there was $88 million of stock-

based compensation expense related to nonvested restricted stock not yet recognized. The expense is expected to be recognized over a remaining weighted-average period of approximately 2.6 years.

 

 

148  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

  

 

2014

  2013   2012  
RSAs (shares in thousands)         Shares          Weighted-
    Average
         Grant-Date    
    Fair Value
  Shares       Weighted-
    Average
         Grant-Date    
    Fair Value
  Shares         Weighted-
    Average
         Grant-Date    
    Fair Value
 

Nonvested at January 1

  6,710    $       15.11             6,379    $         14.32             4,764    $       15.95          

Granted

  3,264      21.61             3,583      16.21             3,863      14.33          

Exercised

    (2,183)      14.84               (2,720)      14.71               (1,826)      18.37          

Forfeited

  (538)      16.73             (532)      14.97             (422)      15.35          

Nonvested at December 31

  7,253    $ 17.98             6,710    $ 15.11             6,379    $ 14.32          

The following table summarizes unvested RSAs by grant-date fair value at December 31, 2014:

 

   Nonvested RSAs  
Grant-Date Fair Value Per Share Number of
    RSAs at Year End    
(000s)
 

    Weighted-Average    
Remaining

Contractual Life

(in years)

 

Under $5.00

  -               -             

$5.01-$10.00

  48               0.8            

$10.01-$15.00

  1,801               0.7            

$15.01-$20.00

  2,320               1.3            

$20.01-$25.00

  3,084               1.8            

All RSAs

  7,253               1.4            

 

Stock options

The grant-date fair value of stock options is measured using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model. There were no stock options granted during 2014, 2013 and 2012.

The total intrinsic value of options exercised was $1 million in 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Cash received from options exercised was $1 million in 2014 and $2 million in both 2013 and

2012. The tax benefit realized from exercised options was immaterial to the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements during 2014, 2013 and 2012. All stock options were vested as of December 31, 2008, therefore, no stock options vested during 2014, 2013 or 2012. As of December 31, 2014, the aggregate intrinsic value of both outstanding options and exercisable options was $2 million.

 

 

  

 

2014

  2013   2012  
Stock Options (Number of Options in thousands)     Number of  
    Options  
      Weighted-
    Average
    Exercise Price    
  Number of  
Options  
      Weighted-
    Average
    Exercise Price    
  Number of  
Options  
      Weighted-
    Average
        Grant Price    
 

Outstanding at January 1

  546      $ 20.72             3,877        $     45.00               7,584      $         53.88        

Exercised

  (115)        12.84             (190)          11.88               (205)        10.32        

Forfeited or expired

  (166)        36.42             (3,141)          51.23               (3,502)        66.25        

Outstanding at December 31

  265      $ 14.25             546        $ 20.72               3,877      $ 45.00        

Exercisable at December 31

  265      $ 14.25             546        $ 20.72               3,877      $ 45.00        

The following table summarizes outstanding and exercisable stock options by exercise price at December 31, 2014:

 

   Outstanding and Exercisable Stock Options  
Exercise price per share     Number of
    Options at Year
    End (000s)
      Weighted-
    Average
    Exercise Price
      Weighted-Average
    Remaining
     Contractual Life
    (in years)
 

Under $10.00

  1       $ 8.59             4.0        

$10.01-$20.00

  258         13.76             1.0        

$20.01-$30.00

  1         24.41             3.0        

$30.01-$40.00

  -         -             -        

Over $40.00

  5         40.98             2.0        

All stock options

  265       $       14.25             1.0        

 

149  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Other stock-based compensation

The Bancorp’s Board of Directors previously approved the use of phantom stock units as part of its compensation for executives in connection with changes made in reaction to the TARP compensation rules. On February 22, 2011, the Bancorp redeemed its Series F preferred stock held by the U.S. Treasury under the CPP. As a result of this redemption, the last payment of phantom stock occurred in April of 2011. The phantom stock units were issued under the Bancorp’s 2008 Incentive Compensation Plan. The number of phantom stock units was determined each pay period by dividing the amount of salary to be paid in phantom stock units for that pay period, by the reported closing price of the Bancorp’s common stock on the pay date for such pay period. The phantom stock units vested immediately on issuance. Phantom stock was expensed based on the number of outstanding units multiplied by the closing price of the Bancorp’s stock at period end. The phantom stock units did not include any rights to receive dividends or dividend equivalents. Phantom stock units issued on or before June 12, 2010 were settled in cash upon the earlier to occur of June 15, 2011 or the executive’s death. Units issued thereafter were settled in cash with 50% settled on June 15, 2012 and 50% settled on June 15, 2013. The amount paid on settlement of the phantom stock units was equal to the total amount of phantom stock units settled at the reported closing price of the Bancorp’s common stock on the settlement date. Under the phantom stock program, no phantom stock units were granted during the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012. No phantom stock units were settled during the year ended December 31, 2014 and 200,130 and 199,813 phantom stock units were settled during the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Performance units are payable contingent upon the Bancorp achieving certain predefined performance targets over the three-year measurement period. Awards granted during 2014, 2013 and 2012 will be entirely settled in stock. The performance targets are based on the Bancorp’s performance relative to a defined peer group. During 2014, 2013 and 2012, 322,567, 348,595, and 344,741 performance units, respectively, were granted by the Bancorp. These awards were granted at a weighted-average grant-date fair value of $15.61, $16.15 and $14.36 per unit during 2014, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

The Bancorp sponsors a stock purchase plan that allows qualifying employees to purchase shares of the Bancorp’s common stock with a 15% match. During the years ended December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012, there were 599,101, 690,039 and 827,709 shares, respectively, purchased by participants and the Bancorp recognized stock-based compensation expense of $1 million in each of the respective years.

 

 

150  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

25. OTHER NONINTEREST INCOME AND OTHER NONINTEREST EXPENSE

 

The following table presents the major components of other noninterest income and other noninterest expense for the years ended December 31:

 

($ in millions) 2014           2013           2012         

Other noninterest income:

Gain on Vantiv, Inc. IPO and sale of Vantiv, Inc. shares

$ 148          336          272       

Operating lease income

  84          75          60       

Equity method income from interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC

  48          77          61       

Cardholder fees

  45          47          46       

BOLI income

  44          52          35       

Valuation adjustments on the warrant and put options associated with sale of Vantiv Holding, LLC

  31          206          67       

Banking center income

  30          34          32       

Consumer loan and lease fees

  25          27          27       

Insurance income

  13          25          28       

Gain on loan sales

  -          3          20       

Loss on OREO

  (14)          (26)          (57)       

Loss on swap associated with the sale of Visa, Inc. class B shares

  (38)          (31)          (45)       

Other, net

  34          54          28       

Total other noninterest income

$ 450          879          574       

Other noninterest expense:

Losses and adjustments

$ 188          221          187       

Impairment on affordable housing investments

  135          108          90       

Loan and lease

  119          158          183       

Marketing

  98          114          128       

FDIC insurance and other taxes

  89          127          114       

Professional services fees

  72          76          56       

Operating lease

  67          57          43       

Travel

  52          54          52       

Postal and courier

  47          48          48       

Data processing

  41          42          40       

Recruitment and education

  28          26          28       

OREO expense

  17          16          21       

Insurance

  16          17          18       

Supplies

  15          16          17       

Intangible asset amortization

  4          8          13       

Loss on debt extinguishment

  -          8          169       

Benefit from the reserve for unfunded commitments

  (27)          (17)          (2)       

Other, net

  178          185          169       

Total other noninterest expense

$     1,139          1,264          1,374       

 

151  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

26. EARNINGS PER SHARE

 

The following table provides the calculation of earnings per share and the reconciliation of earnings per share and earnings per diluted share for the years ended December 31:

 

   2014   2013   2012  
(in millions, except per share data)   Income       Average  
Shares
  Per Share
Amount
    Income       Average  
Shares
  Per Share
Amount
    Income       Average  
Shares
  Per Share
Amount
 

Earnings per share:

Net income attributable to Bancorp

$         1,481     1,836     1,576  

Dividends on preferred stock

  67                 37                 35              

Net income available to common shareholders

  1,414     1,799     1,541  

Less: Income allocated to participating securities

  12                 14                 10              

Net income allocated to common shareholders

$ 1,402     833     1.68     1,785     869     2.05     1,531     904     1.69  

Earnings per diluted share:

Net income available to common shareholders

$ 1,414     1,799     1,541  

Effect of dilutive securities:

Stock-based awards

  -     10     -     8     -     6  

Series G convertible preferred stock

  -     -           18     18           35     36        

Net income available to common shareholders plus assumed conversions

  1,414     1,817     1,576  

Less: Income allocated to participating securities

  12                 14                 10              

Net income allocated to common shareholders plus assumed conversions

$ 1,402     843     1.66     1,803     895     2.02     1,566     946     1.66  

 

Shares are excluded from the computation of net income per diluted share when their inclusion has an anti-dilutive effect on earnings per share. The diluted earnings per share computation for 2014, 2013 and 2012 excludes 13 million, 24 million, and 36 million, respectively, of SARs and an immaterial amount, 1 million, and 5 million, respectively, of stock options because their inclusion would have been anti-dilutive.

The diluted earnings per share computation for the year ended December 31, 2014 excludes the impact of the forward contract related to the October 23, 2014 accelerated share repurchase transaction. Based on the average daily volume-weighted average price of the Bancorp’s common stock during the fourth quarter of 2014, the counterparty to the transaction would have been required to deliver additional shares for the settlement of the forward contract as of December 31, 2014, and thus the impact of the accelerated share repurchase transaction would have been anti-dilutive to earnings per share.

The diluted earnings per share computation for the year ended December 31, 2013 excludes the impact of the forward contracts related to the November 18, 2013 and December 13, 2013 accelerated share repurchase transactions. Based upon the average daily volume-weighted average price of the Bancorp’s common stock during the fourth quarter of 2013, the counterparty to the transactions would have been required to deliver additional shares for the settlement of the forward contracts as of December 31, 2013, and thus the impact of the two accelerated share repurchase transactions would have been anti-dilutive to earnings per share.

The diluted earnings per share computation for the year ended December 31, 2012 excludes the impact of the forward contracts related to the November 6, 2012 and December 14, 2012 accelerated share repurchase transactions. Based upon the average daily volume-weighted average price of the Bancorp’s common stock during the fourth quarter of 2012, the counterparty to the transactions would have been required to deliver additional shares for the settlement of the forward contracts as of December 31, 2012, and thus the impact of the two accelerated share repurchase transactions would have been anti-dilutive to earnings per share.

 

 

152    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

27. FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS

 

The Bancorp measures certain financial assets and liabilities at fair value in accordance with U.S. GAAP, which defines fair value as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. U.S. GAAP also establishes a fair value hierarchy, which prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value into three broad levels. The fair value hierarchy

gives the highest priority to quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (Level 1) and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs (Level 3). A financial instrument’s categorization within the fair value hierarchy is based upon the lowest level of input that is significant to the instrument’s fair value measurement. For more information regarding the fair value hierarchy and how the Bancorp measures fair value, refer to Note 1.

 

 

Assets and Liabilities Measured at Fair Value on a Recurring Basis

The following tables summarize assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis, including residential mortgage loans held for sale for which the Bancorp has elected the fair value option as of:

 

   Fair Value Measurements Using       
December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)         Level 1 (c)                     Level 2 (c)                     Level 3               Total Fair Value      

Assets:

Available-for-sale and other securities:

U.S. Treasury and federal agencies

$ 25     1,607     -      1,632  

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

  -      192     -      192  

Mortgage-backed securities

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

  -      12,404     -      12,404  

Agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

  -      4,565     -      4,565  

Non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

  -      1,550     -      1,550  

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  -      1,362     -      1,362  

Equity securities (a)

  84     19     -      103  

Available-for-sale and other securities (a)

  109      21,699      -      21,808  

Trading securities:

U.S. Treasury and federal agencies

  -      14     -      14  

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

  -      8     -      8  

Mortgage-backed securities

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

  -      9     -      9  

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  -      13     -      13  

Equity securities

  316     -      -      316  

Trading securities

  316      44      -      360  

Residential mortgage loans held for sale

  -      561     -      561  

Residential mortgage loans (b)

  -      -      108     108  

Derivative assets:

Interest rate contracts

  -      888     12     900  

Foreign exchange contracts

  -      417     -      417  

Equity contracts

  -      -      415     415  

Commodity contracts

  68     280     -      348  

Derivative assets

  68     1,585     427     2,080  

Total assets

$ 493      23,889      535     24,917  

Liabilities:

Derivative liabilities:

Interest rate contracts

$ 6     276     2     284  

Foreign exchange contracts

  -      372     -      372  

Equity contracts

  -      -      49     49  

Commodity contracts

  58     280     -      338  

Derivative liabilities

  64      928      51     1,043  

Short positions

  16     5     -      21  

Total liabilities

$ 80     933     51     1,064  

 

153  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

   Fair Value Measurements Using       
December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)         Level 1 (c)                     Level 2 (c)                     Level 3                 Total Fair Value        

Assets:

Available-for-sale and other securities:

U.S. Treasury and federal agencies

$ 26     1,644     -      1,670  

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

  -      192     -      192  

Mortgage-backed securities:

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

  -      12,284     -      12,284  

Non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities

  -      1,395     -      1,395  

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  -      2,187     -      2,187  

Equity securities (a)

  89     29     -      118  

Available-for-sale and other securities (a)

  115      17,731      -      17,846  

Trading securities:

U.S. Treasury and federal agencies

  1     4     -      5  

Obligations of states and political subdivisions

  -      12     1     13  

Mortgage-backed securities:

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

  -      3     -      3  

Asset-backed securities and other debt securities

  -      7     -      7  

Equity securities

  315     -      -      315  

Trading securities

  316      26      1     343  

Residential mortgage loans held for sale

  -      890     -      890  

Residential mortgage loans (b)

  -      -      92     92  

Derivative assets:

Interest rate contracts

  13     802     12     827  

Foreign exchange contracts

  -      276     -      276  

Equity contracts

  -      -      384     384  

Commodity contracts

  18     48     -      66  

Derivative assets

  31     1,126     396     1,553  

Total assets

$ 462      19,773      489     20,724  

Liabilities:

Derivative liabilities:

Interest rate contracts

$ 1     384     4     389  

Foreign exchange contracts

  -      252     -      252  

Equity contracts

  -      -      48     48  

Commodity contracts

  9     56     -      65  

Derivative liabilities

  10      692      52     754  

Short positions

  4     4     -      8  

Total liabilities

$ 14     696     52     762  
(a)

Excludes FHLB and FRB restricted stock totaling $248 and $352 , respectively, at December 31, 2014 and $402 and $349, respectively, at December 31, 2013.

(b)

Includes residential mortgage loans originated as held for sale and subsequently transferred to held for investment.

(c)

During the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, no assets or liabilities were transferred between Level 1 and Level 2.

 

The following is a description of the valuation methodologies used for significant instruments measured at fair value, as well as the general classification of such instruments pursuant to the valuation hierarchy.

Available-for-sale and other and trading securities

Where quoted prices are available in an active market, securities are classified within Level 1 of the valuation hierarchy. Level 1 securities include government bonds and exchange traded equities. If quoted market prices are not available, then fair values are estimated using pricing models, quoted prices of securities with similar characteristics, or DCFs. Examples of such instruments, which are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy, include federal agencies, obligations of states and political subdivisions, agency residential mortgage-backed securities, agency and non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities and other debt securities. Corporate bonds are included in asset-backed securities and other debt securities in the previous table. Federal agencies, obligations of states and political subdivisions,

agency residential mortgage-backed securities, agency and non-agency commercial mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities and other debt securities are generally valued using a market approach based on observable prices of securities with similar characteristics.

Residential mortgage loans held for sale

For residential mortgage loans held for sale for which the fair value election has been made, fair value is estimated based upon mortgage-backed securities prices and spreads to those prices or, for certain ARM loans, DCF models that may incorporate the anticipated portfolio composition, credit spreads of asset-backed securities with similar collateral and market conditions. The anticipated portfolio composition includes the effect of interest rate spreads and discount rates due to loan characteristics such as the state in which the loan was originated, the loan amount and the ARM margin. Residential mortgage loans held for sale that are valued based on mortgage-backed securities prices are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy as the valuation is based on

 

 

154    Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

external pricing for similar instruments. ARM loans classified as held for sale are also classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy due to the use of observable inputs in the DCF model. These observable inputs include interest rate spreads from agency mortgage-backed securities market rates and observable discount rates.

Residential mortgage loans

Residential mortgage loans held for sale that are reclassified to held for investment are transferred from Level 2 to Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy. It is the Bancorp’s policy to value any transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy based on end of period fair values.

For residential mortgage loans reclassified from held for sale to held for investment, the fair value estimation is based on mortgage-backed securities prices, interest rate risk and an internally developed credit component. Therefore, these loans are classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. An adverse change in the loss rate or severity assumption would result in a decrease in fair value of the related loan. The Secondary Marketing Department, which reports to the Bancorp’s Chief Operating Officer, in conjunction with the Consumer Credit Risk Department, which reports to the Bancorp’s Chief Risk Officer, are responsible for determining the valuation methodology for residential mortgage loans held for investment. The Secondary Marketing Department reviews loss severity assumptions quarterly to determine if adjustments are necessary based on decreases in observable housing market data. This group also reviews trades in comparable benchmark securities and adjusts the values of loans as necessary. Consumer Credit Risk is responsible for the credit component of the fair value which is based on internally developed loss rate models that take into account historical loss rates and loss severities based on underlying collateral values.

Derivatives

Exchange-traded derivatives valued using quoted prices and certain over-the-counter derivatives valued using active bids are classified within Level 1 of the valuation hierarchy. Most of the Bancorp’s derivative contracts are valued using DCF or other models that incorporate current market interest rates, credit spreads assigned to the derivative counterparties and other market parameters and, therefore, are classified within Level 2 of the valuation hierarchy. Such derivatives include basic and structured interest rate, foreign exchange and commodity swaps and options. Derivatives that are valued based upon models with significant unobservable market parameters are classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. At December 31, 2014 and 2013, derivatives classified as Level 3, which are valued using models containing unobservable inputs, consisted primarily of a warrant associated with the initial sale of the Bancorp’s 51% interest in Vantiv Holding, LLC to Advent International and a total return swap associated with the Bancorp’s sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares. Level 3 derivatives also include IRLCs, which utilize internally generated loan closing rate assumptions as a significant unobservable input in the valuation process.

The warrant allows the Bancorp to purchase approximately 20 million incremental nonvoting units in Vantiv Holding, LLC at an exercise price of $15.98 per unit and requires settlement under certain defined conditions involving change of control. The fair value of the warrant is calculated in conjunction with a third party valuation provider by applying Black-Scholes option valuation

models using probability weighted scenarios which contain the following inputs: Vantiv, Inc. stock price, strike price per the Warrant Agreement and several unobservable inputs, such as expected term, expected volatility, and expected dividend rate.

For the warrant, an increase in the expected term (years) and the expected volatility assumptions would result in an increase in the fair value; conversely, a decrease in these assumptions would result in a decrease in the fair value. The Accounting and Treasury Departments, both of which report to the Bancorp’s Chief Financial Officer, determined the valuation methodology for the warrant. Accounting and Treasury review changes in fair value on a quarterly basis for reasonableness based on changes in historical and implied volatilities, expected terms, probability weightings of the related scenarios, and other assumptions.

Under the terms of the total return swap, the Bancorp will make or receive payments based on subsequent changes in the conversion rate of the Visa, Inc. Class B shares into Class A shares. Additionally, the Bancorp will make a quarterly payment based on Visa’s stock price and the conversion rate of the Visa, Inc. Class B shares into Class A shares until the date on which the Covered Litigation is settled. The fair value of the total return swap was calculated using a DCF model based on unobservable inputs consisting of management’s estimate of the probability of certain litigation scenarios, the timing of the resolution of the Covered Litigation and Visa litigation loss estimates in excess, or shortfall, of the Bancorp’s proportional share of escrow funds.

An increase in the loss estimate or a delay in the resolution of the Covered Litigation would result in an increase in fair value; conversely, a decrease in the loss estimate or an acceleration of the resolution of the Covered Litigation would result in a decrease in fair value. The Accounting and Treasury Departments determined the valuation methodology for the total return swap. Accounting and Treasury review the changes in fair value on a quarterly basis for reasonableness based on Visa stock price changes, litigation contingencies, and escrow funding.

The net fair value asset of the IRLCs at December 31, 2014 was $12 million. Immediate decreases in current interest rates of 25 bps and 50 bps would result in increases in the fair value of the IRLCs of approximately $5 million and $9 million, respectively. Immediate increases of current interest rates of 25 bps and 50 bps would result in decreases in the fair value of the IRLCs of approximately $5 million and $11 million, respectively. The decrease in fair value of IRLCs due to immediate 10% and 20% adverse changes in the assumed loan closing rates would be approximately $1 million and $2 million, respectively, and the increase in fair value due to immediate 10% and 20% favorable changes in the assumed loan closing rates would be approximately $1 million and $2 million, respectively. These sensitivities are hypothetical and should be used with caution, as changes in fair value based on a variation in assumptions typically cannot be extrapolated because the relationship of the change in assumptions to the change in fair value may not be linear.

The Secondary Marketing Department and the Consumer Line of Business Finance Department, which reports to the Bancorp’s Chief Financial Officer, are responsible for determining the valuation methodology for IRLCs. Secondary Marketing, in conjunction with a third party valuation provider, periodically review loan closing rate assumptions and recent loan sales to determine if adjustments are needed for current market conditions not reflected in historical data.

 

 

155  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following tables are a reconciliation of assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3):

 

 

 
  Fair Value Measurements Using Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)  
  

 

 

 

For the year ended December 31, 2014

($ in millions)

Trading
    Securities    
  Residential
Mortgage
Loans
  Interest Rate
Derivatives,
Net (a)
  Equity
Derivatives,
Net (a)
  Total
Fair Value
 

 

 

Beginning balance

$     92          336    $ 437   

Total gains or losses (realized/unrealized):

Included in earnings

          125      (7)      122   

Purchases

          (1)          (1)   

Sales

  (1)                  (1)   

Settlements

      (17)      (122)      37      (102)   

Transfers into Level 3 (b)

      29              29   

 

 

Ending balance

$     108      10      366    $ 484   

 

 

The amount of total gains (losses) for the period included in earnings attributable to the change in unrealized gains or losses relating to assets still held at December 31, 2014 (c)

$         13      (7)    $ 10   

 

 
                     

 

 
  Fair Value Measurements Using Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)  
  

 

 

 

For the year ended December 31, 2013

($ in millions)

Trading
Securities
  Residential
Mortgage
Loans
  Interest Rate
Derivatives,
Net (a)
  Equity
Derivatives,
Net (a)
  Total
Fair Value
 

 

 

Beginning balance

$     76      57      144    $ 278   

Total gains or losses (realized/unrealized):

Included in earnings

       (1)      59      175      233   

Purchases

            (2)           (2)   

Settlements

       (17)      (106)      17      (106)   

Transfers into Level 3 (b)

       34                34   

 

 

Ending balance

$     92          336    $ 437   

 

 

The amount of total gains (losses) for the period included in earnings attributable to the change in unrealized gains or losses relating to assets still held at December 31, 2013 (c)

$      (1)      11      175    $ 185   

 

 
     

 

 
  Fair Value Measurements Using Significant Unobservable Inputs (Level 3)  
  

 

 

 

For the year ended December 31, 2012

($ in millions)

Trading
Securities
  Residential
Mortgage
Loans
  Interest Rate
Derivatives,
Net (a)
  Equity
Derivatives,
Net (a)
  Total
Fair Value
 

Beginning balance

$     65      32      32    $ 130   

Total gains or losses (realized/unrealized):

Included in earnings

            418      22      440   

Settlements

       (15)      (393)      90     (318)   

Transfers into Level 3 (b)

       26                26   

 

 

Ending balance

$     76      57      144    $ 278   

 

 

The amount of total gains for the period included in earnings attributable to the change in unrealized gains or losses relating to assets still held at December 31, 2012 (c)

$           233      22    $ 255   

 

 
(a)

Net interest rate derivatives include derivative assets and liabilities of $12 and $2 , respectively, as of December 31, 2014 , $12 and $4, respectively as of December 31, 2013 and $60 and $3, respectively, as of December 31, 2012. Net equity derivatives include derivative assets and liabilities of $415 and $49 , respectively, as of December 31, 2014, $384 and $48, respectively, as of December 31, 2013, and $177 and $33, respectively, as of December 31, 2012.

(b)

Includes residential mortgage loans held for sale that were transferred to held for investment.

(c)

Includes interest income and expense.

 

156  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The total gains and losses included in earnings for assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) were recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Income as follows:

 

($ in millions)     2014   2013     2012       

Mortgage banking net revenue

$ 127         57         418      

Corporate banking revenue

  2         1         1      

Other noninterest income

  (7)         175         21      

 

Total gains

$               122             233         440      

The total gains and losses included in earnings attributable to changes in unrealized gains and losses related to Level 3 assets and liabilities still held at December 31, 2014, 2013 and 2012 were recorded in the Consolidated Statements of Income as follows:

 

($ in millions)     2014   2013     2012       

Mortgage banking net revenue

$ 16         10         233      

Corporate banking revenue

  1         -         1      

Other noninterest income

  (7)         175         21      

 

Total gains

$                 10             185         255      

The following tables present information as of December 31, 2014 and 2013 about significant unobservable inputs related to the Bancorp’s material categories of Level 3 financial assets and liabilities measured on a recurring basis:

 

As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)
Financial Instrument   Fair Value Valuation Technique

Significant Unobservable

Inputs

Ranges of
Inputs
Weighted-Average

Residential mortgage loans

$ 108 Loss rate model Interest rate risk factor (7.2) - 17.7% 5.0%
      Credit risk factor 0 - 46.6% 1.8%

IRLCs, net

   12 Discounted cash flow Loan closing rates 8.8 - 86.7% 65.2%

Stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC

   415 Black-Scholes option valuation model

Expected term (years)

Expected volatility (a)

2.0 - 14.5

22.9 - 32.2%

6.0

26.5%

      Expected dividend rate - -

Swap associated with the sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares

   (49) Discounted cash flow

Timing of the resolution of the Covered Litigation

12/31/2015 -

6/30/2020

NM
           
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)
Financial Instrument   Fair Value Valuation Technique

Significant Unobservable

Inputs

Ranges of
Inputs
Weighted-Average

Residential mortgage loans

$ 92 Loss rate model Interest rate risk factor (23.7) - 16.5% 2.3%
      Credit risk factor 0 - 63.4% 2.6%

IRLCs, net

   11 Discounted cash flow Loan closing rates 14.9 - 98.7% 68.5%

Stock warrant associated with Vantiv Holding, LLC

   384 Black-Scholes option valuation model

Expected term (years)

Expected volatility (a)

2.0 - 15.5

18.5 - 33.2%

5.1

25.4%

      Expected dividend rate - -

Swap associated with the sale of Visa, Inc. Class B shares

   (48) Discounted cash flow

Timing of the resolution of the Covered Litigation

12/31/2014 -

12/31/2019

NM
(a)

Based on historical and implied volatilities of comparable companies assuming similar expected terms.

 

Assets and Liabilities Measured at Fair Value on a Nonrecurring Basis

Certain assets and liabilities are measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis. These assets and liabilities are not measured at

fair value on an ongoing basis; however, they are subject to fair value adjustments in certain circumstances, such as when there is evidence of impairment.

 

 

157  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following tables provide the fair value hierarchy and carrying amount of all assets that were held as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, and for which a nonrecurring fair value adjustment was recorded during the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, and the related gains and losses from fair value adjustments on assets sold during the period as well as assets still held as of the end of the period.

 

 

 
    Fair Value Measurements Using           Total Losses          
   

 

       
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)       Level 1 Level 2         Level 3       Total   2014           

 

 

Commercial loans held for sale (a)

$         -       -          33         33     (12)       

Residential mortgage loans held for sale

-       -          554         554     (87)       

Commercial and industrial loans

-       -          456         456     (382)       

Commercial mortgage loans

-       -          110         110     (36)       

Commercial construction loans

-       -          23         23     (1)       

MSRs

-       -          856         856     (65)       

OREO

-       -          90         90     (26)       

Bank premises

  22         22     (20)       

 

 

Total

$ -       -          2,144         2,144     (629)       

 

 
                     

 

 
    Fair Value Measurements Using       Total Losses          
   

 

       
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)       Level 1       Level 2         Level 3       Total   2013          

 

 

Commercial loans held for sale (a)

$ -       -          3         3     (7)       

Commercial and industrial loans

-       -          443         443     (281)       

Commercial mortgage loans

-       -          61         61     (41)       

Commercial construction loans

-       -          16         16     (10)       

MSRs

-       -          967         967             192       

OREO

-       -          87         87     (45)       

Bank premises

-       -          8         8     (6)       

Private equity investment funds

-       -          181         181     (4)       

 

 

Total

$ -       -          1,766               1,766     (202)       

 

 
(a)

Includes commercial nonaccrual loans held for sale.

The following tables present information as of December 31, 2014 and 2013 about significant unobservable inputs related to the Bancorp’s material categories of Level 3 financial assets and liabilities measured on a nonrecurring basis:

 

 

 
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions)  

 

 
Financial Instrument Fair Value   Valuation Technique Significant Unobservable
Inputs
Ranges of
Inputs
  Weighted-Average  

 

 

Commercial loans held for sale

$  33                 Appraised value Appraised value   NM      NM   
Cost to sell   NM      10.0%   

 

 

Residential mortgage loans held for sale

  554               Comparable transactions Estimated sales proceeds from comparable transactions   NM      15.0%   

 

 

Commercial and industrial loans

  456               Appraised value Collateral value   NM      NM   

 

 

Commercial mortgage loans

  110               Appraised value Collateral value   NM      NM   

 

 

Commercial construction loans

  23                 Appraised value Collateral value   NM      NM   

 

 

MSRs

  856               Discounted cash flow Prepayment speed   0 - 100%     

 

(Fixed) 12.0%

(Adjustable) 26.2%

  

  

Discount rates   9.6 - 13.2%     

 

(Fixed) 9.9%

(Adjustable) 11.8%

  

  

 

 

OREO

  90                 Appraised value Appraised value   NM      NM   

 

 

Bank Premises

  22                 Appraised value Appraised value   NM      NM   

 

 

 

158  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

 
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)  

 

 
Financial Instrument Fair Value Valuation Technique

Significant Unobservable

Inputs

Ranges of
Inputs
  Weighted-Average  

 

 

Commercial loans held for sale

$ 3             Appraised value Appraised value   NM      NM   
Cost to sell   NM      10.0%   

 

 

Commercial and industrial loans

   443             Appraised value Collateral value   NM      NM   

 

 

Commercial mortgage loans

   61             Appraised value Collateral value   NM      NM   

 

 

Commercial construction loans

   16             Appraised value Collateral value   NM      NM   

 

 

MSRs

   967             Discounted cash flow Prepayment speed   0 - 100%     

 

(Fixed) 10.3%

(Adjustable) 25.6%

  

  

Discount rates   9.4 - 18.0%     

 

(Fixed) 10.4%

(Adjustable) 11.6%

  

  

 

 

OREO

   87             Appraised value Appraised value   NM      NM   

 

 

Bank premises

   8             Appraised value Appraised value   NM      NM   

 

 

Private equity investment funds

   44 (a)              Liquidity discount applied to fund’s net asset value Liquidity discount   0-18.0%      3.0%   

 

 
(a)

Includes funds the Bancorp will be prohibited from retaining after the July 21, 2016 end of the conformance period for the final rules, adopted under the BHCA, that implemented the provision of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, commonly referred to as the Volcker Rule.

 

Commercial loans held for sale

During 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp transferred $28 million and $5 million, respectively, of commercial loans from the portfolio to loans held for sale that upon transfer were measured at lower of cost or fair value. These loans had fair value adjustments in 2014 and 2013 totaling $10 million and $4 million, respectively, and were generally based on appraisals of the underlying collateral and were therefore, classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. Additionally, during 2014 and 2013 there were fair value adjustments on existing commercial loans held for sale of $2 million and $3 million, respectively. The fair value adjustments were also based on appraisals of the underlying collateral and were therefore classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. An adverse change in the fair value of the underlying collateral would result in a decrease in the fair value measurement.

The Accounting Department determines the procedures for valuation of commercial HFS loans which may include a comparison to recently executed transactions of similar type loans. A monthly review of the portfolio is performed for reasonableness. Quarterly, appraisals approaching a year old are updated and the Real Estate Valuation group, which reports to the Chief Risk Officer, in conjunction with the Commercial Line of Business review the third party appraisals for reasonableness. Additionally, the Commercial Line of Business Finance Department, which reports to the Bancorp Chief Financial Officer, in conjunction with Accounting review all loan appraisal values, carrying values and vintages.

Residential mortgage loans held for sale

During 2014, the Bancorp transferred $720 million of restructured residential mortgage loans from the portfolio to loans held for sale that upon transfer were measured at lower of cost or fair value using significant unobservable inputs. These loans had fair value adjustments in 2014 totaling $87 million. The fair value adjustments were based on estimated third-party valuations utilizing recent sales data from similar transactions. Broker opinion statements were also obtained as additional evidence to support the third-party valuations. The Treasury Department worked with the third-party advisor to estimate the fair value adjustments. The discounts taken were intended to represent the perspective of a market participant, considering among other things, required investor returns which include liquidity discounts reflected in similar bulk transactions. An adverse change in the fair value of the underlying collateral would result in a decrease in the fair value measurement.

Commercial loans held for investment

During 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp recorded nonrecurring impairment adjustments to certain commercial and industrial, commercial mortgage and commercial construction loans held for investment. Larger commercial loans included within aggregate borrower relationship balances exceeding $1 million that exhibit probable or observed credit weaknesses are subject to individual review for impairment. The Bancorp considers the current value of collateral, credit quality of any guarantees, the guarantor’s liquidity and willingness to cooperate, the loan structure and other factors when evaluating whether an individual loan is impaired. When the loan is collateral dependent, the fair value of the loan is generally based on the fair value of the underlying collateral supporting the loan and therefore these loans were classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. In cases where the carrying value exceeds the fair value, an impairment loss is recognized.

An adverse change in the fair value of the underlying collateral would result in a decrease in the fair value measurement. The fair values and recognized impairment losses are reflected in the previous table. Commercial Credit Risk, which reports to the Chief Risk Officer, is responsible for preparing and reviewing the fair value estimates for commercial loans held for investment.

MSRs

Mortgage interest rates decreased during the year ended December 31, 2014 and the Bancorp recognized temporary impairment in certain classes of the MSR portfolio and the carrying value was adjusted to the fair value. The Bancorp recognized a recovery of temporary impairment on servicing rights during the year ended December 31, 2013. MSRs do not trade in an active, open market with readily observable prices. While sales of MSRs do occur, the precise terms and conditions typically are not readily available. Accordingly, the Bancorp estimates the fair value of MSRs using internal DCF models with certain unobservable inputs, primarily prepayment speed assumptions, discount rates and weighted average lives, resulting in a classification within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. Refer to Note 11 for further information on the assumptions used in the valuation of the Bancorp’s MSRs. The Secondary Marketing Department and Treasury Department are responsible for determining the valuation methodology for MSRs. Representatives from Secondary Marketing, Treasury, Accounting and Risk Management are responsible for reviewing key assumptions used in the internal DCF model. Two external

 

 

159  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

valuations of the MSR portfolio are obtained from third parties that use valuation models in order to assess the reasonableness of the internal DCF model. Additionally, the Bancorp participates in peer surveys that provide additional confirmation of the reasonableness of key assumptions utilized in the MSR valuation process and the resulting MSR prices.

OREO

During 2014 and 2013, the Bancorp recorded nonrecurring adjustments to certain commercial and residential real estate properties classified as OREO and measured at the lower of carrying amount or fair value. These nonrecurring losses are primarily due to declines in real estate values of the properties recorded in OREO. For the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, these losses include $12 million and $19 million, respectively, recorded as charge-offs, on new OREO properties transferred from loans during the respective periods and $14 million and $26 million, respectively, recorded as negative fair value adjustments on OREO in other noninterest income subsequent to their transfer from loans. As discussed in the following paragraphs, the fair value amounts are generally based on appraisals of the property values, resulting in a classification within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. In cases where the carrying amount exceeds the fair value, less costs to sell, an impairment loss is recognized. The previous tables reflect the fair value measurements of the properties before deducting the estimated costs to sell.

The Real Estate Valuation department, which reports to the Chief Risk Officer, is solely responsible for managing the appraisal process and evaluating the appraisal for all commercial properties transferred to OREO. All appraisals on commercial OREO properties are updated on at least an annual basis.

The Real Estate Valuation department reviews the BPO data and internal market information to determine the initial charge-off on residential real estate loans transferred to OREO. Once the foreclosure process is completed, the Bancorp performs an interior inspection to update the initial fair value of the property. These properties are reviewed at least every 30 days after the initial interior inspections are completed. The Asset Manager receives a monthly status report for each property which includes the number of showings, recently sold properties, current comparable listings and overall market conditions.

Bank Premises

The Bancorp monitors consumer preferences for banking interactions and related customer behavior patterns in an effort to ensure that its retail distribution network is both responsive to such trends and efficient. As part of this ongoing assessment, the Bancorp determined that certain components of its Bank Premises would no longer be held for or used for their intended purposes and therefore these properties were written down to their lower of cost or market value. At least annually thereafter, the Bancorp will review these properties for market fluctuations. The fair value amounts were generally based on appraisals of the property values, resulting in a classification within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. For further information, refer to Note 7.

Private equity investment funds

The Volcker Rule, was approved by the respective federal agencies on December 10, 2013 and prohibits the Bancorp from retaining an interest in certain of its private equity fund investments. Therefore, while the Bancorp has not approved a formal plan to sell any of the private equity funds, the Bancorp has determined that it may be forced to sell certain of these funds prior to their scheduled redemption dates to comply with the Volcker Rule conformance period. As a result, the Bancorp has performed nonrecurring fair value measurements on a fund by fund basis to determine whether OTTI exists. The Bancorp estimated the fair value of a fund by using the net asset value reported by the fund manager, and in some cases, applying an estimated market discount to the reported net asset value of the fund. Because the length of time until the investment will become redeemable is generally not certain, these funds were classified within Level 3 of the valuation hierarchy. The Bancorp recognized $4 million of OTTI on its investments in private equity funds during 2013. The Bancorp recognized no OTTI on its investments in private equity funds during 2014. An adverse change in the reported net asset values or estimated market discounts where applicable, would result in a decrease in the fair value estimate. In cases where the carrying value exceeds the fair value, an impairment loss is recognized. The Bancorp’s private equity department, which reports to the Chief Operating Officer, in conjunction with Accounting, is responsible for preparing and reviewing the fair value estimates.

Fair Value Option

The Bancorp elected to measure certain residential mortgage loans held for sale under the fair value option as allowed under U.S. GAAP. Electing to measure residential mortgage loans held for sale at fair value reduces certain timing differences and better matches changes in the value of these assets with changes in the value of derivatives used as economic hedges for these assets. Management’s intent to sell residential mortgage loans classified as held for sale may change over time due to such factors as changes in the overall liquidity in markets or changes in characteristics specific to certain loans held for sale. Consequently, these loans may be reclassified to loans held for investment and maintained in the Bancorp’s loan portfolio. In such cases, the loans will continue to be measured at fair value.

Fair value changes recognized in earnings for instruments held at December 31, 2014 and 2013 for which the fair value option was elected as well as the changes in fair value of the underlying IRLCs, included gains of $26 million and $20 million, respectively. These gains are reported in mortgage banking net revenue in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

Valuation adjustments related to instrument-specific credit risk for residential mortgage loans measured at fair value negatively impacted the fair value of those loans by $2 million at both December 31, 2014 and 2013. Interest on residential mortgage loans measured at fair value is accrued as it is earned using the effective interest method and is reported as interest income in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

 

 

160  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The following table summarizes the difference between the fair value and the principal balance for residential mortgage loans measured at fair value as of:

 

 

 
($ in millions)

Aggregate

Fair Value

  Aggregate Unpaid
Principal Balance
  Difference  

 

 

December 31, 2014

Residential mortgage loans measured at fair value

$                                      669                                          643     26   

Past due loans of 90 days or more

  2     2      

Nonaccrual loans

  3     3      

December 31, 2013

Residential mortgage loans measured at fair value

$ 982     962     20   

Past due loans of 90 days or more

  1     2                                          (1)   

Nonaccrual loans

  2     2      

 

 

 

161  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Fair Value of Certain Financial Instruments

The following tables summarize the carrying amounts and estimated fair values for certain financial instruments, excluding financial instruments measured at fair value on a recurring basis:

 

 

 
  Net Carrying   Fair Value Measurements Using       Total      
As of December 31, 2014 ($ in millions) Amount       Level 1       Level 2   Level 3           Fair Value      

 

 

Financial assets:

Cash and due from banks

$                     3,091     3,091     -      -      3,091  

Other securities

  600     -      600     -      600  

Held-to-maturity securities

  187     -      -      187     187  

Other short-term investments

  7,914     7,914     -      -      7,914  

Loans held for sale

  700     -      -      700     700  

Portfolio loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

  40,092     -      -      40,781     40,781  

Commercial mortgage loans

  7,259     -      -      6,878     6,878  

Commercial construction loans

  2,052     -      -      1,735     1,735  

Commercial leases

  3,675     -      -      3,426     3,426  

Residential mortgage loans

  12,177     -      -      12,249     12,249  

Home equity

  8,799     -      -      9,224     9,224  

Automobile loans

  12,004     -      -      11,748     11,748  

Credit card

  2,297     -      -      2,586     2,586  

Other consumer loans and leases

  405     -      -      414     414  

Unallocated allowance for loan and lease losses

  (106   -      -      -      -   

 

 

Total portfolio loans and leases, net

  88,654     -      -      89,041     89,041  

 

 

Financial liabilities:

Deposits

  101,712     -      101,715     -      101,715  

Federal funds purchased

  144     144     -      -      144  

Other short-term borrowings

  1,556     -      1,561     -      1,561  

Long-term debt

  14,967     14,993     655     -      15,648  

 

 
                     

 

 
  Net Carrying   Fair Value Measurements Using       Total      
As of December 31, 2013 ($ in millions)

 

Amount

 

 

    Level 1    

 

 

Level 2

 

 

Level 3    

 

 

    Fair Value    

 

 

 

Financial assets:

Cash and due from banks

$ 3,178     3,178     -      -      3,178  

Other securities

  751     -      751     -      751  

Held-to-maturity securities

  208     -      -      208     208  

Other short-term investments

  5,116     5,116     -      -      5,116  

Loans held for sale

  54     -      -      54     54  

Portfolio loans and leases:

Commercial and industrial loans

  38,549     -      -      39,804     39,804  

Commercial mortgage loans

  7,854     -      -      7,430     7,430  

Commercial construction loans

  1,013     -      -      856     856  

Commercial leases

  3,572     -      -      3,261     3,261  

Residential mortgage loans

  12,399     -      -      11,541     11,541  

Home equity

  9,152     -      -      9,181     9,181  

Automobile loans

  11,961     -      -      11,748     11,748  

Credit card

  2,202     -      -      2,380     2,380  

Other consumer loans and leases

  348     -      -      361     361  

Unallocated allowance for loan and lease losses

  (110   -      -      -      -   

 

 

Total portfolio loans and leases, net

  86,940     -      -      86,562     86,562  

 

 

Financial liabilities:

Deposits

  99,275     -      99,288     -      99,288  

Federal funds purchased

  284     284     -      -      284  

Other short-term borrowings

  1,380     -      1,380     -      1,380  

Long-term debt

  9,633     9,645     577     -      10,222  

 

 

 

Cash and due from banks, other securities, other short-term investments, deposits, federal funds purchased and other short-term borrowings

For financial instruments with a short-term or no stated maturity, prevailing market rates and limited credit risk, carrying amounts approximate fair value. Those financial instruments include cash and due from banks, FHLB and FRB restricted stock, other short-term investments, certain deposits (demand, interest checking, savings, money market and foreign office deposits), federal funds purchased,

and other short-term borrowings excluding FHLB borrowings. Fair values for other time deposits, certificates of deposit $100,000 and over and FHLB borrowings were estimated using a DCF calculation that applies prevailing LIBOR/swap interest rates and a spread for new issuances with similar terms.

 

 

162  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Held-to-maturity securities

The Bancorp’s held-to-maturity securities are primarily composed of instruments that provide income tax credits as the economic return on the investment. The fair value of these instruments is estimated based on current U.S. Treasury tax credit rates.

Loans held for sale

Fair values for commercial loans held for sale were valued based on executable bids when available, or on DCF models incorporating appraisals of the underlying collateral, as well as assumptions about investor return requirements and amounts and timing of expected cash flows. Fair values for residential mortgage loans held for sale were valued based on estimated third-party valuations utilizing recent sales data from similar transactions. Broker opinion statements were also obtained as additional evidence to support the third-party valuations. Fair values for other consumer loans held for sale were based on contractual values upon which the loans may be sold to a third party, and approximate their carrying value.

Portfolio loans and leases, net

Fair values were estimated by discounting future cash flows using the current market rates of loans to borrowers with similar credit characteristics, similar remaining maturities, prepayment speeds and loss severities.

Long-term debt

Fair value of long-term debt was based on quoted market prices, when available, or a DCF calculation using LIBOR/swap interest rates and, in some cases, Fifth Third credit and/or debt instrument spreads for new issuances with similar terms.

 

 

163  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

28. CERTAIN REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND CAPITAL RATIOS

 

The principal source of income and funds for the Bancorp (parent company) are dividends from its subsidiaries. The dividends paid by the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary are subject to regulations and limitations prescribed by the appropriate state and federal supervisory authorities. The Bancorp’s nonbank subsidiaries are also limited by certain federal and state statutory provisions and regulations covering the amount of dividends that may be paid in any given year.

The Bancorp’s banking subsidiary must maintain cash reserve balances when total reservable deposit liabilities are greater than the regulatory exemption. These reserve requirements may be satisfied with vault cash and balances on deposit with the FRB. In 2014 and 2013, the banking subsidiary was required to maintain average cash reserve balances of $1.7 billion and $1.6 billion, respectively.

The Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System issued capital adequacy guidelines pursuant to which it assesses the adequacy of capital in examining and supervising a BHC and in analyzing applications to it under the BHCA of 1956, as amended. These guidelines include quantitative measures that assign risk weightings to assets and off-balance sheet items, as well as define and set minimum regulatory capital requirements. All bank holding companies are required to maintain Tier I capital (core capital) of at least four percent of risk-weighted assets (Tier I risk-based capital ratio), total capital (Tier I plus Tier II capital) of at least eight percent of risk-weighted assets (Total risk-based capital ratio), and Tier I capital of at least three percent of adjusted quarterly average assets (Tier I leverage ratio). Failure to meet the minimum capital requirements can initiate certain actions by regulators that could have a direct material effect on the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Bancorp.

Tier I capital consists principally of shareholders’ equity including Tier I qualifying TruPS. It excludes unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale securities and unrecognized pension actuarial gains and losses and prior service cost, goodwill, certain other intangibles and unrealized gains and losses on cash flow hedges. The revised regulatory capital rules known as Basel III will phase out the inclusion of certain TruPS as a component of Tier I capital when the rules become effective for the Bancorp beginning

January 1, 2015. Under these provisions, these TruPS would qualify as a component of Tier II capital. At December 31, 2014, the Bancorp’s Tier I capital included $60 million of TruPS representing approximately 5 bps of risk-weighted assets. Tier II capital consists principally of term subordinated debt and, subject to limitations, allowances for credit losses.

Assets and credit equivalent amounts of off-balance sheet items are assigned to one of several broad risk categories, according to the obligor, guarantor or nature of collateral. The aggregate dollar value of the amount of each category is multiplied by the associated risk weighting of that category. The resulting weighted values from each of the risk categories in sum is the total risk-weighted assets. Quarterly average assets for this purpose do not include goodwill and any other intangible assets and other investments that the FRB determines should be deducted from Tier I capital.

The Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System issued capital adequacy guidelines for banking subsidiaries substantially similar to those adopted for bank holding companies, as described previously. In addition, the federal banking agencies have issued substantially similar regulations to implement the system of prompt corrective action established by Section 38 of the FDIA. Under the regulations, a bank generally shall be deemed to be well-capitalized if it has a Total risk-based capital ratio of 10% or more, a Tier I risk-based capital ratio of six percent or more, a Tier I leverage ratio of five percent or more and is not subject to any written capital order or directive. If an institution becomes undercapitalized, it would become subject to significant additional oversight, regulations and requirements as mandated by the FDIA.

The Bancorp and its banking subsidiary, Fifth Third Bank, had Tier I risk-based capital, Total risk-based capital and Tier I leverage ratios above the well-capitalized levels at December 31, 2014 and 2013. As of December 31, 2014, the most recent notification from the FRB categorized the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary as well-capitalized under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action. To continue to qualify for financial holding company status pursuant to the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999, the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary must, among other things, maintain “well-capitalized” capital ratios.

 

 

The following table presents capital and risk-based capital and leverage ratios for the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary at December 31:

 

 

 
        2014      2013  
   

 

 
($ in millions)    Amount      Ratio   Amount   Ratio  

 

 

Tier I risk-based capital (to risk-weighted assets):

Fifth Third Bancorp (Consolidated)

$ 12,764         10.83%    $     12,094           10.43%     

Fifth Third Bank

13,760         11.85        13,245           11.59      

Total risk-based capital (to risk-weighted assets):

Fifth Third Bancorp (Consolidated)

16,895         14.33        16,431           14.17      

Fifth Third Bank

15,213         13.10        14,785           12.94      

Tier I leverage (to average assets):

Fifth Third Bancorp (Consolidated)

12,764         9.66        12,094           9.73      

Fifth Third Bank

13,760         10.58        13,245           10.83      

 

 

 

164  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

29. PARENT COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Condensed Statements of Income (Parent Company Only)                                     
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions)         2014               2013                 2012          

Income

Dividends from subsidiaries:

Consolidated bank subsidiaries (a)

$ -     -   -       

Consolidated nonbank subsidiary

  1,094     859   1,959       

Interest on loans to subsidiaries

  14             14           17       

Total income

  1,108             873           1,976       

Expenses

Interest

  163     178   215       

Other

  17             36           61       

Total expenses

  180             214           276       

Income Before Income Taxes and Change in Undistributed Earnings of Subsidiaries

  928     659   1,700       

Applicable income tax benefit

  62             74           96       

Income Before Change in Undistributed Earnings of Subsidiaries

  990     733   1,796       

Change in undistributed earnings

  491             1,103           (220)      

Net Income

$                 1,481             1,836           1,576       

(a)     The Bancorp’s indirect banking subsidiary paid dividends to the Bancorp’s direct nonbank subsidiary holding company of $1.1 billion , $859 million and $2.0 billion for the years ended December 31, 2014 , 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

Condensed Statements of Comprehensive Income (Parent Company Only)

For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions)

2014               2013               2012       

Net income

$ 1,481     1,836   1,576       

Other comprehensive income, net of tax:

Unrealized gains on cash flow hedge derivatives

  -             -           3       

Other comprehensive income

  -             -           3       

Comprehensive income attributable to Parent

$ 1,481             1,836           1,579       

 

165  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Condensed Balance Sheets (Parent Company Only)                      
As of December 31 ($ in millions)         2014            2013     

Assets

Cash

$ -     -  

Short-term investments

  3,189     2,505  

Loans to subsidiaries:

Bank subsidiaries

  -     -  

Nonbank subsidiaries

  984           974    

Total loans to subsidiaries

  984           974    

Investment in subsidiaries

Nonbank subsidiaries

  17,186           16,254    

Total investment in subsidiaries

  17,186           16,254    

Goodwill

  80     80  

Other assets

  451           323    

Total Assets

$                 21,890           20,136    

Liabilities

Other short-term borrowings

  426     311  

Accrued expenses and other liabilities

  405     442  

Long-term debt (external)

  5,394           4,757    

Total Liabilities

  6,225           5,510    

Shareholders’ Equity

Common stock

  2,051     2,051  

Preferred stock

  1,331     1,034  

Capital surplus

  2,646     2,561  

Retained earnings

  11,141     10,156  

Accumulated other comprehensive income

  429     82  

Treasury stock

  (1,972   (1,295

Noncontrolling interests

  39           37    

Total Equity

  15,665           14,626    

Total Liabilities and Equity

$ 21,890           20,136    

 

Condensed Statements of Cash Flows (Parent Company Only)                                    
For the years ended December 31 ($ in millions)         2014            2013                2012         

Operating Activities

Net income

$                 1,481     1,836     1,576  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

(Benefit from) provision for deferred income taxes

  (1   (1   2  

Net change in undistributed earnings

  (491   (1,103   220  

Net change in:

Other assets

  8     13     57  

Accrued expenses and other liabilities

  (40         (28         18    

Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities

  957           717           1,873    

Investing Activities

Net change in:

Short-term investments

  (684   976     107  

Loans to subsidiaries

  (10         47           11    

Net Cash (Used in) Provided by Investing Activities

  (694         1,023           118    

Financing Activities

Net change in other short-term borrowings

  115     (255   (89

Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt

  499     750     500  

Repayment of long-term debt

  -     (1,500   (1,440

Dividends paid on common shares

  (423   (393   (309

Dividends paid on preferred shares

  (67   (37   (35

Issuance of preferred stock

  297     1,034     -  

Repurchases of treasury shares and related forward contracts

  (654   (1,320   (650

Other, net

  (30         (19         (18  

Net Cash Used in Financing Activities

  (263         (1,740         (2,041  

Net Decrease in Cash

  -     -     (50

Cash at Beginning of Year

  -           -           50    

Cash at End of Year

$ -           -           -    

 

166  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

30.  BUSINESS SEGMENTS

 

The Bancorp reports on four business segments: Commercial Banking, Branch Banking, Consumer Lending and Investment Advisors. Results of the Bancorp’s business segments are presented based on its management structure and management accounting practices. The structure and accounting practices are specific to the Bancorp; therefore, the financial results of the Bancorp’s business segments are not necessarily comparable with similar information for other financial institutions. The Bancorp refines its methodologies from time to time as management’s accounting practices and businesses change.

The Bancorp manages interest rate risk centrally at the corporate level by employing an FTP methodology. This methodology insulates the business segments from interest rate volatility, enabling them to focus on serving customers through loan originations and deposit taking. The FTP system assigns charge rates and credit rates to classes of assets and liabilities, respectively, based on expected duration and the U.S. swap curve. Matching duration allocates interest income and interest expense to each segment so its resulting net interest income is insulated from interest rate risk. In a rising rate environment, the Bancorp benefits from the widening spread between deposit costs and wholesale funding costs. However, the Bancorp’s FTP system credits this benefit to deposit-providing businesses, such as Branch Banking and Investment Advisors, on a duration-adjusted basis. The net impact of the FTP methodology is captured in General Corporate and Other.

The Bancorp adjusts the FTP charge and credit rates as dictated by changes in interest rates for various interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities and by the review of the estimated durations for the indeterminate-lived deposits. The credit rate provided for demand deposit accounts is reviewed annually based upon the account type, its estimated duration and the corresponding fed funds, U.S. swap curve or swap rate. The credit rates for several deposit products were reset January 1, 2014 to reflect the current market rates and updated market assumptions. These rates were generally higher than those in place during 2013, thus net interest income for deposit providing businesses was positively impacted during 2014.

The business segments are charged provision expense based on the actual net charge-offs experienced by the loans and leases owned by each segment. Provision expense attributable to loan and lease growth and changes in ALLL factors are captured in General Corporate and Other. The financial results of the business segments include allocations for shared services and headquarters expenses. Additionally, the business segments form synergies by taking advantage of cross-sell opportunities and when funding operations, by accessing the capital markets as a collective unit.

The results of operations and financial position for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 were adjusted to reflect the transfer of certain customers and Bancorp employees from Branch Banking to Commercial Banking, effective January 1, 2014. In addition, the 2013 and 2012 balances were adjusted to reflect a change in internal allocation methodology.

The following is a description of each of the Bancorp’s business segments, and the products and services they provide to their respective client bases.

Commercial Banking offers credit intermediation, cash management and financial services to large and middle-market businesses and government and professional customers. In addition to the traditional lending and depository offerings, Commercial Banking products and services include global cash management, foreign exchange and international trade finance, derivatives and capital markets services, asset-based lending, real estate finance, public finance, commercial leasing and syndicated finance.

Branch Banking provides a full range of deposit and loan and lease products to individuals and small businesses through 1,302 full-service Banking Centers. Branch Banking offers depository and loan products, such as checking and savings accounts, home equity loans and lines of credit, credit cards and loans for automobiles and other personal financing needs, as well as products designed to meet the specific needs of small businesses, including cash management services.

Consumer Lending includes the Bancorp’s mortgage, home equity, automobile and other indirect lending activities. Direct lending activities include the origination, retention and servicing of mortgage and home equity loans or lines of credit, sales and securitizations of those loans, pools of loans or lines of credit, and all associated hedging activities. Indirect lending activities include extending loans to consumers through correspondent lenders and automobile dealers.

Investment Advisors provides a full range of investment alternatives for individuals, companies and not-for-profit organizations. Investment Advisors is made up of four main businesses: FTS, an indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of the Bancorp; ClearArc Capital, Inc., an indirect wholly-owned subsidiary of the Bancorp; Fifth Third Private Bank; and Fifth Third Institutional Services. FTS offers full service retail brokerage services to individual clients and broker dealer services to the institutional marketplace. ClearArc Capital, Inc. provides asset management services and previously advised the Bancorp’s proprietary family of mutual funds. Fifth Third Private Bank offers holistic strategies to affluent clients in wealth planning, investing, insurance and wealth protection. Fifth Third Institutional Services provides advisory services for institutional clients including states and municipalities.

 

 

167  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Results of operations and assets by segment for each of the three years ended December 31 are:

 

2014 ($ in millions)   Commercial 
  Banking 
  Branch  
Banking  
  Consumer  
Lending  
  Investment  
Advisors  
  General 
Corporate 
and Other 
  Eliminations    Total    

Net interest income

$ 1,652      1,546      257     121      3     -    3,579 

Provision for loan and lease losses

  235      181      156         (260   -    315 

Net interest income after provision for loan and lease losses

  1,417      1,365      101     118      263     -    3,264 

Noninterest income:

Service charges on deposits

  286      272      -          -      -    560 

Corporate banking revenue

  429      4      -          (5   -    430 

Investment advisory revenue

      152      -      397      1     (146 )  (a)   407 

Mortgage banking net revenue

       5      304         -      -    310 

Card and processing revenue

  64      226      -          -      -    295 

Other noninterest income

  105      61   (b)     42         239     -    450 

Securities gains, net

       -      -           21     -    21 

Securities gains, net - non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights

       -      -           -      -   

Total noninterest income

  887      720      346     410      256     (146 2,473 

Noninterest expense:

Salaries, wages and incentives

  259      421      95     136      538     -    1,449 

Employee benefits

  47      116      27     26      118     -    334 

Net occupancy expense

  26      187      8         83     -    313 

Technology and communications

  10      4      2          196     -    212 

Card and processing expense

      133      -           -      -    141 

Equipment expense

  10      59      -           52     -    121 

Other noninterest expense

  959      631      420     274      (999   (146 1,139 

Total noninterest expense

  1,319      1,551      552     445      (12   (146 3,709 

Income (loss) before income taxes

  985      534      (105   83      531     -    2,028 

Applicable income tax expense (benefit)

  166      188      (37   29      199     -    545 

Net income (loss)

  819      346      (68   54      332     -    1,483 

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

      -      -           2     -   

Net income (loss) attributable to Bancorp

  819      346      (68   54      330     -    1,481 

Dividends on preferred stock

       -      -           67     -    67 

Net income (loss) available to common shareholders

$ 819      346      (68   54      263     -    1,414 

Total goodwill

$ 613      1,655      -      148      -      -    2,416 

Total assets

$           56,871      50,920      22,554     10,443      (2,082   -    138,706 
(a)

Revenue sharing agreements between Investment Advisors and Branch Banking are eliminated in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

(b) Includes an impairment charge of $20 for branches and land. For more information refer to Note 7 and Note 27 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

168  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

2013 ($ in millions)     Commercial 
    Banking 
  Branch  
Banking   
  Consumer  
Lending  
  Investment  
Advisors  
  General 
Corporate 
and Other 
  Eliminations     Total  

Net interest income

$ 1,592      1,356      312      154      147     -      3,561  

Provision for loan and lease losses

  194      210      92          (269   -      229  

Net interest income after provision for loan and lease losses

  1,398      1,146      220      152      416     -      3,332  

Noninterest income:

Service charges on deposits

  267      279               -      -      549  

Corporate banking revenue

  392      7               (2   -      400  

Investment advisory revenue

      148           384      -      (144 )  (a)     393  

Mortgage banking net revenue

      12      687          -      -      700  

Card and processing revenue

  60      207               -      -      272  

Other noninterest income

  94      87  (b)     45      10      643     -      879  

Securities gains, net

       -               18     -      21  

Securities gains, net - non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights

       -      13           -      -      13  

Total noninterest income

  818      740      748      406      659     (144   3,227  

Noninterest expense:

Salaries, wages and incentives

  261      429      175      134      582     -      1,581  

Employee benefits

  49      118      40      25      125     -      357  

Net occupancy expense

  25      183          10      81     -      307  

Technology and communications

  11      4               188     -      204  

Card and processing expense

      125                1     -      134  

Equipment expense

      58               51     -      114  

Other noninterest expense

  877      656      460      284      (869   (144   1,264  

Total noninterest expense

  1,235      1,573      685      453      159     (144   3,961  

Income before income taxes

  981      313      283      105      916     -      2,598  

Applicable income tax expense

  167      109      100      37      359     -      772  

Net income

  814      204      183      68      557     -      1,826  

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

       -                (10   -      (10

Net income attributable to Bancorp

  814      204      183      68      567     -      1,836  

Dividends on preferred stock

       -                37     -      37  

Net income available to common shareholders

$ 814      204      183      68      530     -      1,799  

Total goodwill

$ 613      1,655           148      -      -      2,416  

Total assets

$           55,081      47,221      22,610      10,711      (5,180   -      130,443  
(a)

Revenue sharing agreements between Investment Advisors and Branch Banking are eliminated in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

(b)

Includes an impairment charge of $6 for branches and land.

 

169  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

2012 ($ in millions)   Commercial 
  Banking 
  Branch  
Banking  
  Consumer  
Lending  
  Investment  
Advisors  
  General 
Corporate 
and Other 
  Eliminations 
  Total  

Net interest income

$ 1,533     1,261      314     117     370     -      3,595  

Provision for loan and lease losses

  249     268      176     10     (400   -      303  

Net interest income after provision for loan and lease losses

  1,284     993      138     107     770     -      3,292  

Noninterest income:

Service charges on deposits

  251     268      -      3     -      -      522  

Corporate banking revenue

  402     8      -      3     -      -      413  

Investment advisory revenue

  6     129      -      366     -      (127 (a)     374  

Mortgage banking net revenue

  -      14      830     1     -      -      845  

Card and processing revenue

  54     195      -      4     -      -      253  

Other noninterest income

  61     85  (b)     42     19     367     -      574  

Securities gains, net

  -      -      1     -      14     -      15  

Securities gains, net - non-qualifying hedges on mortgage servicing rights

  -      -      3     -      -      -      3  

Total noninterest income

  774     699      876     396     381     (127   2,999  

Noninterest expense:

Salaries, wages and incentives

  257     420      192     136     602     -      1,607  

Employee benefits

  47     117      39     25     143     -      371  

Net occupancy expense

  24     184      8     11     75     -      302  

Technology and communications

  10     3      1     -      182     -      196  

Card and processing expense

  5     115      -      -      1     -      121  

Equipment expense

  2     54      1     1     52     -      110  

Other noninterest expense

  842     576      429     264     (610   (127   1,374  

Total noninterest expense

  1,187     1,469      670     437     445     (127   4,081  

Income before income taxes

  871     223      344     66     706     -      2,210  

Applicable income tax expense

  157     79      121     23     256     -      636  

Net income

  714     144      223     43     450     -      1,574  

Less: Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests

  -      -      -      -      (2   -      (2

Net income attributable to Bancorp

  714     144      223     43     452     -      1,576  

Dividends on preferred stock

  -      -      -      -      35     -      35  

Net income available to common shareholders

$ 714     144      223     43     417     -      1,541  

Total goodwill

$ 613     1,655      -      148     -      -      2,416  

Total assets

$           51,392     46,157      24,657     9,212     (9,524   -      121,894  
(a)

Revenue sharing agreements between Investment Advisors and Branch Banking are eliminated in the Consolidated Statements of Income.

(b)

Includes an impairment charge of $21 for branches and land.

31. SUBSEQUENT EVENT

 

On January 22, 2015, the Bancorp entered into an accelerated share repurchase transaction with a counterparty pursuant to which the Bancorp purchased 8,542,713 shares, or approximately $180 million, of its outstanding common stock on January 27, 2015. The Bancorp repurchased the shares of its common stock as part of its Board approved 100 million share repurchase program previously announced on March 18, 2014. The Bancorp expects the settlement of the transaction to occur on or before April 23, 2015.

 

 

 

170  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM 10-K

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR

15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2014

Commission file number 001-33653

 

LOGO

Incorporated in the State of Ohio

I.R.S. Employer Identification No. 31-0854434

Address: 38 Fountain Square Plaza

Cincinnati, Ohio 45263

Telephone: (800) 972-3030

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each class:

 

Name of each exchange

on which registered:

Common Stock, Without Par Value   The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC
Depositary Shares Representing a 1/1000 th Ownership Interest in a Share of 6.625% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series I   The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC

Indicate by checkmark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.

Yes: x No: ¨

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes:  ¨ No: x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes: x No: ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the Registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). Yes: x No: ¨

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K (§229.405 of this chapter) is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K. x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See definitions of “large accelerated

filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

Large accelerated filer  x   Accelerated filer   ¨   Non-accelerated filer   ¨   (Do not check if a smaller reporting company) Smaller reporting company  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act). Yes:  ¨  No:  x

There were 814,765,191 shares of the Bancorp’s Common Stock, without par value, outstanding as of January 31, 2015. The Aggregate Market Value of the Voting Stock held by non-affiliates of the Bancorp was $17,964,278,097 as of June 30, 2014.

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

This report incorporates into a single document the requirements of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) with respect to annual reports on Form 10-K and annual reports to shareholders. The Bancorp’s Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders is incorporated by reference into Part III of this report.

Only those sections of this 2014 Annual Report to Shareholders that are specified in this Cross Reference Index constitute part of the Registrant’s Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2014. No other information contained in this 2014 Annual Report to Shareholders shall be deemed to constitute any part of this Form 10-K nor shall any such information be incorporated into the Form 10-K and shall not be deemed “filed” as part of the Registrant’s Form 10-K.

10-K Cross Reference Index

PART I

  

Item 1.

  Business      16-20, 172-179   
  Employees      41  
  Segment Information      43-49, 167-170   
  Average Balance Sheets      37  
  Analysis of Net Interest Income and Net Interest Income Changes      36-38   
  Investment Securities Portfolio      53-54, 101-102   
  Loan and Lease Portfolio      52-53, 103-104   
  Risk Elements of Loan and Lease Portfolio      57-73   
  Deposits      54-56   
  Return on Equity and Assets      15  
  Short-term Borrowings      56, 127  

Item 1A.

  Risk Factors      27-35   

Item 1B.

  Unresolved Staff Comments      None   

Item 2.

  Properties      180  

Item 3.

  Legal Proceedings      134-135   

Item 4.

  Mine Safety Disclosures      N/A   
  Executive Officers of the Bancorp      180  

PART II

  

Item 5.

  Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities      181  

Item 6.

  Selected Financial Data      15  

Item 7.

  Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations      15-82   

Item 7A.

  Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk      73-76   

Item 8.

  Financial Statements and Supplementary Data      85-170   

Item 9.

  Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure      None   

Item 9A.

  Controls and Procedures      83  

Item 9B.

  Other Information      None   

PART III

  

Item 10.

  Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance      183  

Item 11.

  Executive Compensation      183  

Item 12.

  Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters      147-150, 183   

Item 13.

  Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence      183  

Item 14.

  Principal Accounting Fees and Services      183   

PART IV

  

Item 15.

  Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules      183-185   

SIGNATURES

     186  
 

 

171  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

AVAILABILITY OF FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Fifth Third Bancorp (the “Bancorp”) files reports with the SEC. Those reports include the annual report on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K and proxy statements, as well as any amendments to those reports. The public may read and copy any materials the Bancorp files with the SEC at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 450 Fifth Street, NW, Washington, DC 20549. The public may obtain information on the operation of the Public Reference Room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC maintains an internet site that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with the SEC at www.sec.gov. The Bancorp’s annual report on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K, proxy statements, and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Exchange Act are accessible at no cost on the Bancorp’s web site at www.53.com on a same day basis after they are electronically filed with or furnished to the SEC.

PART I

ITEM 1.    BUSINESS

General Information

The Bancorp, an Ohio corporation organized in 1975, is a bank holding company (“BHC”) as defined by the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (the “BHCA”), and is registered as such with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the “FRB”). The Bancorp’s principal office is located in Cincinnati, Ohio.

The Bancorp’s subsidiaries provide a wide range of financial products and services to the retail, commercial, financial, governmental, educational and medical sectors, including a wide variety of checking, savings and money market accounts, and credit products such as credit cards, installment loans, mortgage loans and leases. Fifth Third Bank has deposit insurance provided by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (the “FDIC”) through the Deposit Insurance Fund. Refer to Exhibit 21 filed as an attachment to this Annual Report on Form 10-K for a list of subsidiaries of the Bancorp as of December 31, 2014.

The Bancorp derives the majority of its revenues from the U.S. Revenue from foreign countries and external customers domiciled in foreign countries is immaterial to the Bancorp’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

Additional information regarding the Bancorp’s businesses is included in Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.

Competition

The Bancorp competes for deposits, loans and other banking services in its principal geographic markets as well as in selected national markets as opportunities arise. In addition to the challenge of attracting and retaining customers for traditional banking services, the Bancorp’s competitors include securities dealers, brokers, mortgage bankers, investment advisors and insurance companies. These competitors, with focused products targeted at highly profitable customer segments, compete across geographic boundaries and provide customers increasing access to meaningful alternatives to banking services in nearly all significant products. The increasingly competitive environment is a result primarily of changes in regulation, changes in technology, product delivery systems and the accelerating pace of consolidation among financial service providers. These competitive trends are likely to continue.

Acquisitions

The Bancorp’s strategy for growth includes strengthening its presence in core markets, expanding into contiguous markets and broadening its product offerings while taking into account the integration and other risks of growth. The Bancorp evaluates strategic acquisition opportunities and conducts due diligence activities in connection with possible transactions. As a result, discussions, and in some cases, negotiations may take place and future acquisitions involving cash, debt or equity securities may occur. These typically involve the payment of a premium over book value and current market price, and therefore, some dilution of book value and net income per share may occur with any future transactions.

Regulation and Supervision

In addition to the generally applicable state and federal laws governing businesses and employers, the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary are subject to extensive regulation by federal and state laws and regulations applicable to financial institutions and their parent companies. Virtually all aspects of the business of the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary are subject to specific requirements or restrictions and general regulatory oversight. The

 

 

172  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

principal objectives of state and federal banking laws and regulations and the supervision, regulation and examination of banks and their parent companies (such as the Bancorp) by bank regulatory agencies are the maintenance of the safety and soundness of financial institutions, maintenance of the federal deposit insurance system and the protection of consumers or classes of consumers, rather than the specific protection of shareholders of a bank or the parent company of a bank. To the extent the following material describes statutory or regulatory provisions, it is qualified in its entirety by reference to the particular statute or regulation.

Regulators

The Bancorp and/or its banking subsidiary are subject to regulation and supervision primarily by the FRB, the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (the “CFPB”) and the Ohio Division of Financial Institutions (the “Division”) and additionally by certain other functional regulators and self-regulatory organizations. The Bancorp is also subject to regulation by the SEC by virtue of its status as a public company and due to the nature of some of its businesses. The Bancorp’s banking subsidiary is subject to regulation by the FDIC, which insures the bank’s deposits as permitted by law.

The federal and state laws and regulations that are applicable to banks and to BHCs regulate, among other matters, the scope of their business, their activities, their investments, capital and liquidity levels, their reserves against deposits, the timing of the availability of deposited funds, the amount of loans to individual and related borrowers and the nature, amount of and collateral for certain loans, and the amount of interest that may be charged on loans as applicable. Various federal and state consumer laws and regulations also affect the services provided to consumers.

The Bancorp and/or its subsidiary are required to file various reports with, and is subject to examination by regulators, including the FRB and the Division. The FRB, Division and the CFPB have the authority to issue orders BHCs and/or banks to cease and desist from certain banking practices and violations of conditions imposed by, or violations of agreements with, the FRB, Division and CFPB. Certain of the Bancorp’s and/or its banking subsidiary regulators are also empowered to assess civil money penalties against companies or individuals in certain situations, such as when there is a violation of a law or regulation. Applicable state and federal laws also grant certain regulators the authority to impose additional requirements and restrictions on the activities of the Bancorp and or its banking subsidiary and, in some situations, the imposition of such additional requirements and restrictions will not be publicly available information.

Acquisitions

The BHCA requires the prior approval of the FRB for a BHC to acquire substantially all the assets of a bank or to acquire direct or indirect ownership or control of more than 5% of any class of the voting shares of any bank, BHC or savings association, or to increase any such non-majority ownership or control of any bank, BHC or savings association, or to merge or consolidate with any BHC.

The BHCA prohibits a BHC from acquiring a direct or indirect interest in or control of more than 5% of any class of the voting shares of a company that is not a bank or a BHC and from engaging directly or indirectly in activities other than those of banking, managing or controlling banks or furnishing services to its banking subsidiaries, except that it may engage in and may own shares of companies engaged in certain activities the FRB

has determined to be so closely related to banking or managing or controlling banks as to be proper incident thereto.

Financial Holding Companies

The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999 (“GLBA”) permits a qualifying BHC to become a financial holding company (“FHC”) and thereby to engage directly or indirectly in a broader range of activities than those permitted for a BHC under the BHCA. Permitted activities for a FHC include securities underwriting and dealing, insurance underwriting and brokerage, merchant banking and other activities that are declared by the FRB, in cooperation with the Treasury Department, to be “financial in nature or incidental thereto” or are declared by the FRB unilaterally to be “complementary” to financial activities. In addition, a FHC is allowed to conduct permissible new financial activities or acquire permissible non-bank financial companies with after-the-fact notice to the FRB. A BHC may elect to become a FHC if each of its banking subsidiaries is well capitalized, is well managed and has at least a “Satisfactory” rating under the Community Reinvestment Act (“CRA”). The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the “DFA”) also extended the well capitalized and well managed requirement to the BHC. In 2000, the Bancorp elected and qualified for FHC status under the GLBA. To maintain FHC status, a holding company must continue to meet certain requirements. The failure to meet such requirements could result in material restrictions on the activities of the FHC and may also adversely affect the FHC’s ability to enter into certain transactions or obtain necessary approvals in connection therewith, as well as loss of FHC status. If restrictions are imposed on the activities of an FHC, such information may not necessarily be available to the public.

Dividends

The Bancorp depends in part upon dividends received from its direct and indirect subsidiaries, including its indirect banking subsidiary, to fund its activities, including the payment of dividends. The Bancorp and its banking subsidiary are subject to various federal and state restrictions on their ability to pay dividends. The FRB has authority to prohibit BHCs from paying dividends if such payment is deemed to be an unsafe or unsound practice. The FRB has indicated generally that it may be an unsafe or unsound practice for BHCs to pay dividends unless a BHC’s net income is sufficient to fund the dividends and the expected rate of earnings retention is consistent with the organization’s capital needs, asset quality and overall financial condition. The ability to pay dividends may be further limited by provisions of the DFA and implanting regulations (see “Regulatory Reform”).

Source of Strength

Under long-standing FRB policy and now as codified in the DFA, a BHC is expected to act as a source of financial and managerial strength to each of its banking subsidiaries and to commit resources to their support. This support may be required at times when the BHC may not have the resources to provide it.

FDIC Assessments

As contemplated by the DFA the FDIC has revised the framework by which insured depository institutions with more than $10 billion in assets (“large IDIs”) are assessed for purposes of payments to the Deposit Insurance Fund (the “DIF”). The final rule implementing revisions to the assessment system took effect for the quarter beginning April 1, 2011.

 

 

173  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

Prior to the passage of the DFA, a large IDI’s DIF premiums principally were based on the size of an IDI’s domestic deposit base. The DFA changed the assessment base from a large IDI’s domestic deposit base to its total assets less tangible equity. In addition to potentially greatly increasing the size of a large IDI’s assessment base, the expansion of the assessment base affords the FDIC much greater flexibility to vary its assessment system based upon the different asset classes that large IDIs normally hold on their balance sheets.

To implement this provision, the FDIC created an assessment scheme vastly different from the deposit-based system. Under the new system, large IDIs are assessed under a complex “scorecard” methodology that seeks to capture both the probability that an individual large IDI will fail and the magnitude of the impact on the DIF if such a failure occurs.

Transactions with Affiliates

Sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act, restrict transactions between a bank and its affiliates (as defined in Sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act), including a parent BHC. The Bancorp’s banking subsidiary is subject to certain restrictions, including but not limited to restrictions on loans to its affiliates, on investments in the stock or securities thereof, on the taking of such stock or securities as collateral for loans to any borrower, and on the issuance of a guarantee or letter of credit on their behalf. Among other things, these restrictions limit the amount of such transactions, require collateral in prescribed amounts for extensions of credit, prohibit the purchase of low quality assets and require that the terms of such transactions be substantially equivalent to terms of comparable transactions with non-affiliates. Generally, the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary is limited in its extension of credit to any affiliate to 10% of the banking subsidiary’s capital stock and surplus and its extension of credit to all affiliates to 20% of the banking subsidiary’s capital stock and surplus.

Community Reinvestment Act

The CRA generally requires insured depository institutions to identify the communities they serve and to make loans and investments and provide services that meet the credit needs of those communities. Furthermore, the CRA requires the FRB to evaluate the performance of the Bancorp’s banking subsidiary in helping to meet the credit needs of its communities. As a part of the CRA program, the banking subsidiary is subject to periodic examinations by the FRB, and must maintain comprehensive records of their CRA activities for this purpose. During these examinations, the FRB rates such institutions’ compliance with the CRA as “Outstanding,” “Satisfactory,” “Needs to Improve” or “Substantial Noncompliance.” Failure of an institution to receive at least a “Satisfactory” rating could inhibit such institution or its holding company from undertaking certain activities, including engaging in activities permitted as a financial holding company under the GLBA and acquiring other financial institutions. The FRB must take into account the record of performance of banks in meeting the credit needs of the entire community served, including low- and moderate-income neighborhoods. Fifth Third Bank received a “Satisfactory” CRA rating in its most recent CRA examination.

Capital

The FRB has established capital guidelines for BHCs and FHCs. The FRB, the Division and the FDIC have also issued regulations establishing capital requirements for banks. Failure to meet

capital requirements could subject the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary to a variety of restrictions and enforcement actions. In addition, as discussed previously, the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary must remain well capitalized and well managed for the Bancorp to retain its status as a FHC. See the “Regulatory Reform” section for additional information on capital requirements impacting the Bancorp.

Privacy

The FRB, FDIC and other bank regulatory agencies have adopted final guidelines (the “Guidelines) for safeguarding confidential, personal customer information. The Guidelines require each financial institution, under the supervision and ongoing oversight of its Board of Directors or an appropriate committee thereof, to create, implement and maintain a comprehensive written information security program designed to ensure the security and confidentiality of customer information, protect against any anticipated threats or hazards to the security or integrity of such information and protect against unauthorized access to or use of such information that could result in substantial harm or inconvenience to any customer. The Bancorp has adopted a customer information security program that has been approved by the Bancorp’s Board of Directors.

The GLBA requires financial institutions to implement policies and procedures regarding the disclosure of nonpublic personal information about consumers to non-affiliated third parties. In general, the statute requires explanations to consumers on policies and procedures regarding the disclosure of such nonpublic personal information, and, except as otherwise required by law, prohibits disclosing such information except as provided in the banking subsidiary’s policies and procedures. The Bancorp’s banking subsidiary has implemented a privacy policy.

Anti-Money Laundering

The Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (the “Patriot Act”), designed to deny terrorists and others the ability to obtain access to the United States financial system, has significant implications for depository institutions, brokers, dealers and other businesses involved in the transfer of money. The Patriot Act, as implemented by various federal regulatory agencies, requires financial institutions, including the Bancorp and its subsidiaries, to implement new policies and procedures or amend existing policies and procedures with respect to, among other matters, anti-money laundering, compliance, suspicious activity and currency transaction reporting and due diligence on customers. The Patriot Act and its underlying regulations also permit information sharing for counter-terrorist purposes between federal law enforcement agencies and financial institutions, as well as among financial institutions, subject to certain conditions, and require the FRB (and other federal banking agencies) to evaluate the effectiveness of an applicant in combating money laundering activities when considering applications filed under Section 3 of the BHCA or the Bank Merger Act. The Bancorp’s Board has approved policies and procedures that are believed to be compliant with the Patriot Act.

Exempt Brokerage Activities

The GLBA amended the federal securities laws to eliminate the blanket exceptions that banks traditionally have had from the definition of “broker” and “dealer.” The GLBA also required that there be certain transactional activities that would not be

 

 

174  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

“brokerage” activities, which banks could effect without having to register as a broker. In September 2007, the FRB and SEC approved Regulation R to govern bank securities activities. Various exemptions permit banks to conduct activities that would otherwise constitute brokerage activities under the securities laws. Those exemptions include conducting brokerage activities related to trust, fiduciary and similar services, certain services and also conducting a de minimis number of riskless principal transactions, certain asset-backed transactions and certain securities lending transactions. The Bancorp only conducts non-exempt brokerage activities through its affiliated registered broker-dealer.

Regulatory Reform

On July 21, 2010, President Obama signed into law the DFA, which is aimed, in part, at accountability and transparency in the financial system and includes numerous provisions that apply to and/or could impact the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary. The DFA implements changes that, among other things, affect the oversight and supervision of financial institutions, provide for a new resolution procedure for large financial companies, create a new agency responsible for implementing and enforcing compliance with consumer financial laws, introduce more stringent regulatory capital requirements, effect significant changes in the regulation of over-the-counter derivatives, reform the regulation of credit rating agencies, implement changes to corporate governance and executive compensation practices, incorporate requirements on proprietary trading and investing in certain funds by financial institutions (known as the “Volcker Rule”), require registration of advisers to certain private funds, and effect significant changes in the securitization market. Not all the rules required or expected to be implemented under the DFA have been proposed or adopted, and certain of the rules that have been proposed or adopted under the DFA are subject to phase-in or transitional periods. The implication of the DFA for the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary continue to depend in large part upon the implementation of the legislation by the FRB and other agencies. Set forth below is a discussion of some of the major sections of the DFA and implementing regulations that have or could have a substantial impact on the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary. Due to the volume of regulations required by the DFA, not all proposed or final regulations that may have an impact on the Bancorp or its banking subsidiary are necessarily discussed.

Financial Stability Oversight Council

The DFA created the Financial Stability Oversight Council (“FSOC”), which is chaired by the Secretary of the Treasury and composed of expertise from various financial services regulators. The FSOC has responsibility for identifying risks and responding to emerging threats to financial stability. On March 15, 2012, the Department of Treasury issued an interim final rule to establish an assessment schedule for the collection of fees from BHCs and foreign banks with at least $50 billion in assets to cover the expenses of the Office of Financial Research and FSOC. The fees would also cover certain expenses incurred by the FDIC. The Bancorp paid approximately $1 million for the assessment periods from October 1, 2013 through March 31, 2015.

On August 16, 2013, the FRB also adopted a final rule to implement an assessment provision under the DFA equal to the expense and the FRB estimates are necessary or appropriate to supervise and regulate BHCs with $50 billion or more in assets.

The Bancorp paid approximately $3 million for the 2014 annual assessment period under the FRB’s rule.

Executive Compensation

The DFA provides for a say on pay for shareholders of all public companies. Under the DFA, each company must give its shareholders the opportunity to vote on the compensation of its executives at least once every three years. The DFA also adds disclosure and voting requirements for golden parachute compensation that is payable to named executive officers in connection with sale transactions. The SEC adopted rules finalizing these say on pay provisions in January 2011.

Pursuant to the DFA, in June 2012, the SEC adopted a final rule directing the stock exchanges to prohibit listing classes of equity securities if a company’s compensation committee members are not independent. The rule also provides that a company’s compensation committee may only select a compensation consultant, legal counsel or other advisor after taking into consideration factors to be identified by the SEC that affect the independence of a compensation consultant, legal counsel or other advisor.

The SEC is required under the DFA to issue rules obligating companies to disclose in proxy materials for annual meetings of shareholders information that shows the relationship between executive compensation actually paid to their named executive officers and their financial performance, taking into account any change in the value of the shares of a company’s stock and dividends or distributions. The DFA also requires the SEC to propose rules requiring companies to disclose the ratio of the compensation of its chief executive officer to the median compensation of its employees. The SEC proposed rules implementing the pay ratio provisions in September 2013.

The DFA provides that the SEC must issue rules directing the stock exchanges to prohibit listing any security of a company unless the company develops and implements a policy providing for disclosure of the policy of the company on incentive-based compensation that is based on financial information required to be reported under the securities laws and that, in the event the company is required to prepare an accounting restatement due to the material noncompliance of the company with any financial reporting requirement under the securities laws, the company will recover from any current or former executive officer of the company who received incentive-based compensation during the three-year period preceding the date on which the company is required to prepare the restatement based on the erroneous data, any exceptional compensation above what would have been paid under the restatement.

The DFA requires the SEC to adopt a rule to require that each company disclose in the proxy materials for its annual meetings whether an employee or board member is permitted to purchase financial instruments designed to hedge or offset decreases in the market value of equity securities granted as compensation or otherwise held by the employee or board member.

Corporate Governance

The DFA clarifies that the SEC may, but is not required to promulgate rules that would require that a company’s proxy materials include a nominee for the board of directors submitted by a shareholder. Although the SEC promulgated rules to accomplish this, these rules were invalidated by a federal appeals court decision. The SEC has said that they will not challenge the

 

 

175  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

ruling, but has not ruled out the possibility that new rules could be proposed.

The DFA requires stock exchanges to have rules prohibiting their members from voting securities that they do not beneficially own (unless they have received voting instructions from the beneficial owner) with respect to the election of a member of the board of directors (other than an uncontested election of directors of an investment company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940), executive compensation or any other significant matter, as determined by the SEC by rule.

Credit Ratings

The DFA includes a number of provisions that are targeted at improving the reliability of credit ratings. In August of 2014 the SEC adopted new requirements for credit rating agencies to enhance governance, protect against conflicts of interest, and increase transparency to improve the quality of credit rating agency accountability.

Consumer Issues

The DFA created a new bureau, the CFPB, which has the authority to implement regulations pursuant to numerous consumer protection laws and has supervisory authority, including the power to conduct examination and take enforcement actions, with respect to depository institutions with more than $10 billion in consolidated assets. The CFPB also has authority, with respect to consumer financial services to, among other things, restrict unfair, deceptive or abusive acts or practices, enforce laws that prohibit discrimination and unfair treatment and to require certain consumer disclosures.

Debit Card Interchange Fees

The DFA provides for a set of new rules requiring that interchange transaction fees for electric debit transactions be “reasonable” and proportional to certain costs associated with processing the transactions. The FRB was given authority to, among other things, establish standards for assessing whether interchange fees are reasonable and proportional. In June 2011, the FRB issued a final rule establishing certain standards and prohibitions pursuant to the DFA, including establishing standards for debit card interchange fees and allowing for an upward adjustment if the issuer develops and implements policies and procedures reasonably designed to prevent fraud. The provisions regarding debit card interchange fees and the fraud adjustment became effective October 1, 2011. The rules impose requirements on the Bancorp and its banking subsidiary and may negatively impact our revenues and results of operations. On July 31, 2013, the U.S. District Court for the District of Columbia issued an order granting summary judgment to the plaintiffs in a case challenging certain provisions of the FRB’s rule concerning electronic debit card transaction fees and network exclusivity arrangements (the “Current Rule”) that were adopted to implement Section 1075 of the DFA, known as the Durbin Amendment. The Court held that, in adopting the Current Rule, the FRB violated the Durbin Amendment’s provisions concerning which costs are allowed to be taken into account for purposes of setting fees that are reasonable and proportional to the costs incurred by the issuer and therefore the Current Rule’s maximum permissible fees were too high. In addition, the Court held that the Current Rule’s network non-exclusivity provisions concerning unaffiliated payment networks for debit cards also violated the Durbin Amendment. The Court vacated the Current Rule, but stayed its ruling to provide the FRB an opportunity to replace the invalidated portions. The FRB appealed this decision and on March 21, 2014, the D.C. Circuit Court of Appeals reversed the

District Court’s grant of summary judgment and remanded the case for further proceedings in accordance with its opinion. The merchants have filed a petition for writ of certiorari to the U.S. Supreme Court. However, on January 20, 2015, the U.S. Supreme Court declined to hear an appeal of the Circuit Court reversal, thereby largely upholding the Current Rule and substantially reducing uncertainty surrounding debit card interchange fees the Bancorp is permitted to charge. Refer to the Noninterest Income subsection of the Statements of Income Analysis section of MD&A for further information regarding the Bancorp’s debit card interchange revenue.

FDIC Matters and Resolution Planning

Title II of the DFA creates an orderly liquidation process that the FDIC can employ for failing systemically important financial companies. Additionally, the DFA also codifies many of the temporary changes that had already been implemented, such as permanently increasing the amount of deposit insurance to $250,000.

In January 2012, the FDIC issued a final rule that requires an insured depository institution with $50 billion or more in total assets to submit periodic contingency plans to the FDIC for resolution in the event of the institution’s failure. The rule became effective in January 2012; however, submission of plans are staggered over a period of time. The Bancorp’s banking subsidiary is subject to this rule and submitted its most recent resolution plan pursuant to this rule as of December 31, 2014.

In October 2011, the FRB and FDIC issued a final rule implementing the resolution planning requirements of Section 165(d) of the DFA. The final rule requires BHCs with assets of $50 billion or more and nonbank financial firms designated by FSOC for supervision by the FRB to annually submit resolution plans to the FDIC and FRB. Each plan shall describe the company’s strategy for rapid and orderly resolution in bankruptcy during times of financial distress. Under the final rule, companies must submit their initial resolution plans on a staggered basis. The Bancorp submitted its most recent resolution plan pursuant to this rule as of December 31, 2014.

Proprietary Trading and Investing in Certain Funds

The DFA sets forth new restrictions on banking organizations’ ability to engage in proprietary trading and sponsors of or invest in private equity and hedge funds (the “Volcker Rule”). The final regulations implementing the Volcker Rule (“Final Rules”) were adopted on December 10, 2013. The Volcker Rule generally prohibits any banking entity from (i) engaging in short-term proprietary trading for its own account and (ii) sponsoring or acquiring any ownership interest in a private equity or hedge fund. The Volcker Rule and Final Rules contain a number of exceptions. The Volcker Rule permits transactions in the securities of the U.S. government and its agencies, certain government-sponsored enterprises and states and their political subdivisions, as well as certain investments in small business investment companies. Transactions on behalf of customers and in connection with certain underwriting and market making activities, as well as risk-mitigating hedging activities and certain foreign banking activities are also permitted. The Final Rules exclude certain funds from the prohibition on fund ownership and sponsorship including wholly-owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, and acquisitions vehicles, as well as SEC registered investment companies. De minimis ownership of private equity or hedge funds is also permitted under the Final Rules. In addition to the general prohibition on sponsorship and investment, the Volcker rule contains additional requirements applicable to any private equity or hedge fund that is sponsored by the banking entity or for

 

 

176  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

which it serves as investment manager or investment advisor. The Bancorp is required under the Final Rules to demonstrate that it has a Volcker Rule compliance program. In connection with the issuance of the Final Rules, the Federal Reserve extended the conformance period generally until July 21, 2015. The Final Rules became effective April 2014 and in December 2014, the FRB extended the compliance period through July 2016 for investments in and relationships with such covered funds that were in place prior to December 31, 2013, and indicated that it intends to further extend the compliance period for such investments through July 2017. Further, with respect to covered funds that are “illiquid funds”, the FRB has the authority to grant up to five more years for the Bancorp to conform to the final Volcker Rule with respect to such illiquid funds.

Derivatives

Title VII of the DFA includes measures to broaden the scope of derivative instruments subject to regulation by requiring clearing and exchange trading of certain derivatives, imposing new capital and margin requirements for certain market participants and imposing position limits on certain over-the-counter derivatives. In 2014, Fifth Third Bank registered as a swap dealer with the CFTC and became subject to new substantive requirements, including real time trade reporting and robust record keeping requirements, business conduct requirements (including daily valuations, disclosure of material risks associated with swaps and disclosure of material incentives and conflicts of interest), and mandatory clearing and exchange trading of all standardized swaps designated by the relevant regulatory agencies as required to be cleared. As with the Volcker Rule, Fifth Third Bank is required to demonstrate that it has a satisfactory compliance program to monitor the activities of the swap dealer and comply with the applicable regulations. Although the ultimate impact of the regulatory changes will depend on the promulgation of all final regulations, Fifth Third Bank’s derivatives business will likely be further subject to additional substantive requirements including margin requirements in excess of current market practice and certain capital requirements. These requirements may impose additional operational and compliance costs on us and may require us to restructure certain businesses and negatively impact our revenues and results of operations.

Interstate Bank Branching

The DFA includes provisions permitting national and insured state banks to engage in de novo interstate branching if, under the laws of the state where the new branch is to be established, a state bank chartered in that state would be permitted to establish a branch.

Systemically Significant Companies and Capital

Title I of the DFA creates a new regulatory regime for large BHCs. U.S. BHCs with $50 billion or more in total consolidated assets, including Fifth Third, are subject to enhanced prudential standards and early remediation requirements under Title I. Title I of the DFA establishes a broad framework for identifying, applying heightened supervision and regulation to, and (as necessary) limiting the size and activities of systemically significant financial companies.

The DFA requires the FRB to impose enhanced capital and risk-management standards on these firms and mandates the FRB to conduct annual stress tests on all BHCs with $50 billion or more in assets to determine whether they have adequate capital available to absorb losses in baseline, adverse, or severely adverse economic conditions. In November 2011, the FRB adopted final

rules requiring BHCs with $50 billion or more in consolidated assets to submit capital plans to the FRB on an annual basis. Under the final rules, the FRB annually will evaluate an institution’s capital adequacy, internal capital adequacy, assessment processes and capital distribution plans such as dividend payments and stock repurchases. Banks are also required to report certain data to the FRB on a quarterly basis to allow the FRB to monitor progress against the approved capital plans.

The CCAR process is intended to help ensure that BHCs have robust, forward-looking capital planning processes that account for each company’s unique risks and that permit continued operations during times of economic and financial stress. The 2015 CCAR required BHCs with consolidated assets of $50 billion or more to submit a capital plan to the FRB by January 5, 2015. The mandatory elements of the capital plan are an assessment of the expected uses and sources of capital over a nine-quarter planning horizon, a description of all planned capital actions over the planning horizon, a discussion of any expected changes to the Bancorp’s business plan that are likely to have a material impact on its capital adequacy or liquidity, a detailed description of the Bancorp’s process for assessing capital adequacy and the Bancorp’s capital policy. The stress tests require increased involvement by boards of directors in stress testing and public disclosure of the results of both the FRB’s annual stress tests and a BHC’s annual supervisory stress tests, and semi-annual internal stress tests. The Bancorp submitted its capital plan, along with all supporting materials, to the FRB on January 5, 2015. The FRB will release the results of the supervisory stress tests on March 5, 2015 and the related results from the 2015 CCAR on March 11, 2015.

The FRB recently amended its capital planning and stress testing rules to, among other things, generally limit a BHC’s ability to make quarterly capital distributions – that is, dividends and share repurchases – commencing April 1, 2015 if the amount of the bank’s actual cumulative quarterly capital issuances of instruments that qualify as regulatory capital are less than the bank had indicated in its submitted capital plan as to which it received a non-objection from the FRB. For example, if the BHC issued a smaller amount of additional common stock than it had stated in its capital plan, it would be required to reduce common dividends and/or the amount of common stock repurchases so that the dollar amount of capital distributions, net of the dollar amount of additional common stock issued (“net distributions”), is no greater than the dollar amount of net distributions relating to its common stock included in its capital plan, as measured on an aggregate basis beginning in the third quarter of the nine-quarter planning horizon through the end of the then current quarter. However, not raising sufficient amounts of common stock as planned would not affect distributions related to Additional Tier I Capital instruments and/ or Tier II Capital. These limitations also contain several important qualifications and exceptions, including that scheduled dividend payments on (as opposed to repurchases of) a BHC’s Additional Tier I Capital and Tier II Capital instruments are not restricted if the BHC fails to issue a sufficient amount of such instruments as planned, as well as provisions for certain de minimis excess distributions.

In December of 2010 and revised in June of 2011, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (the “Basel Committee”) issued Basel III, a global regulatory framework, to enhance international capital standards. Basel III is designed to materially improve the quality of regulatory capital and introduces a new minimum common equity requirement. Basel III also raises the minimum capital requirements and introduces capital

 

 

177  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

conservation and countercyclical buffers to induce banking organizations to hold capital in excess of regulatory minimums. In addition, Basel III establishes an international leverage standard for internationally active banks.

In July of 2013, U.S. banking regulators approved the final enhanced regulatory capital rules (“Final Capital Rules”), which included modifications to the proposed rules. The Final Capital Rules substantially revise the risk-based capital requirements applicable to BHCs and their depository institution subsidiaries as compared to the previous U.S. risk-based capital and leverage ratio rules, and thereby implement certain provisions of the DFA.

The Final Capital Rules, among other things, (i) introduce a new capital measure “Common Equity Tier I” (“CET1”), (ii) specify that Tier I capital consists of CET1 and “Additional Tier I capital” instruments meeting specified requirements, (iii) define CET1 narrowly by requiring that most adjustments to regulatory capital measures be made to CET1 and not to the other components of capital and (iv) expand the scope of the adjustments as compared to existing regulations. CET1 capital consists of common stock instruments that meet the eligibility criteria in the final rules, including; common stock and related surplus, net of treasury stock and retained earnings, certain minority interests and accumulated other comprehensive income (“AOCI”), if elected.

When fully phased-in on January 1, 2019, the Final Capital Rules require banking organizations to maintain (i) a minimum ratio of CET1 to risk-weighted assets of at least 4.5%, plus a 2.5% “capital conservation buffer” (which is added to the 4.5% CET1 ratio as that buffer is phased-in, effectively resulting in a minimum ratio of CET1 to risk-weighted assets of at least 7.0% upon full implementation), (ii) a minimum ratio of Tier I capital to risk-weighted assets of at least 6.0%, plus the capital conservation buffer (which is added to the 6.0% Tier I capital ratio as that buffer is phased-in, effectively resulting in a minimum Tier I capital ratio of 8.5% upon full implementation), (iii) a minimum ratio of total capital (that is, Tier I plus Tier 2 capital) to risk-weighted assets of at least 8.0%, plus the capital conservation buffer (which is added to the 8.0% total capital ratio as that buffer is phased-in, effectively resulting in a minimum total capital ratio of 10.5% upon full implementation) and (iv) a minimum leverage ratio of 4.0%, calculated as the ratio of Tier I capital to adjusted average consolidated assets.

Banking institutions with a ratio of CET1 to risk-weighted assets above the minimum but below the conservation buffer will face limitations on the payment of dividends, common stock repurchases and discretionary cash payments to executive officers based on the amount of the shortfall.

The Final Capital Rules provide for a number of deductions from and adjustments to CET1. These include, for example, the requirement that mortgage servicing rights, deferred tax assets dependent upon future taxable income and significant investments in non-consolidated financial entities be deducted from CET1 to the extent that any one such category exceeds 10% of CET1 or all such categories in the aggregate exceed 15% of CET1. Under current capital standards, the effects of AOCI items included in capital are excluded for the purposes of determining regulatory capital ratios. Under the Final Capital Rules, Bancorp has a one-time election (the “Opt-out Election”) to filter certain AOCI components, comparable to the treatment under the current general risk-based capital rule.

The Final Capital Rules were effective for the Bancorp on January 1, 2015, subject to phase-in periods for certain of their components and other provisions. Although not currently required, Fifth Third Bancorp believes the aforementioned capital

ratios under the revised Final Capital Rules meet or exceed the ratios on a fully phased in basis. Refer to the Non-GAAP section of MD&A for an estimate of the Basel III CET1 ratio as of December 31, 2014.

In February 2014, the FRB approved a final rule implementing several heightened prudential requirements. Beginning in 2015, the rules require BHCs with $10 billion or more in consolidated assets to establish risk committees and require BHCs with $50 billion or more in total consolidated assets to comply with enhanced liquidity and overall risk management standards, including company-run liquidity stress testing and a buffer of highly liquid assets based on projected funding needs for various time horizons, including 30, 60, and 90 days. These liquidity-related provisions are designed to be complementary, and in addition to the Final LCR Rule applicable to BHCs (as discussed below). Rules to implement two other components of the DFA’s enhanced prudential standards –single-counterparty credit limits and early remediation requirements– are still under consideration by the FRB. Fifth Third has conducted a self evaluation of all the requirements within the enhanced prudential standards, and believe the necessary steps have been taken to ensure compliance with all requirements regarding liquidity, risk exposures, and early remediation.

Liquidity Regulation

Liquidity risk management and supervision have become increasingly important since the financial crisis. On September 3, 2014, the FRB and other banking regulators adopted final rules (“Final LCR Rule”) implementing a U.S. version of the Basel Committee’s Liquidity Coverage Ratio requirement (“LCR”), which is designed to ensure that the banking entity maintains an adequate level of unencumbered high-quality liquid assets (“HQLA”) equal to the entity’s expected net cash outflow for a 30-day time horizon (or, if greater, 25% of its expected total cash outflow) under an acute liquidity stress scenario. The rules apply in modified form to banking organizations, such as the Bancorp, having $50 billion or more in total consolidated assets but less than $250 billion. The LCR is the ratio of an institution’s stock of HQLA (the numerator) over projected net cash out-flows over the 30-day horizon (the denominator), in each case, as calculated pursuant to the Final LCR Rule. Once fully phased-in, a subject institution must maintain an LCR equal to at least 100% in order to satisfy this regulatory requirement. Only specific classes of assets, including U.S. Treasuries, other U.S. government obligations and agency mortgaged-backed securities, qualify under the rule as HQLA, with classes of assets deemed relatively less liquid and/or subject to greater degree of credit risk subject to certain haircuts and caps for purposes of calculating the numerator under the Final LCR Rule. The total net cash outflows amount is determined under the rule by applying certain hypothetical outflow and inflow rates, which reflect certain standardized stressed assumptions, against the balances of the banking organization’s funding sources, obligations, transactions and assets over the 30-day stress period. Inflows that can be included to offset outflows are limited to 75% of outflows (which effectively means that banking organizations must hold high-quality liquid assets equal to 25% of outflows even if outflows perfectly match inflows over the stress period). The total net cash outflow amount for the modified LCR applicable to the Bancorp is capped at 70% of the outflow rate that applies to the full LCR.

The initial compliance date for the modified LCR will be January 2016, with the requirement fully phased-in by January 2017. The LCR is a minimum requirement, and the FRB can impose additional liquidity requirements as a supervisory matter.

 

 

178  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

In addition, the Bancorp is also subject to the liquidity-related requirements of the enhanced prudential supervision rules adopted by the FRB under Section 165 of the DFA, as described above. As of December 31, 2014 the Bancorp’s internally calculated LCR would have complied with the fully phased in LCR requirements which will become effective in 2016 as outlined in the final rule.

In addition to the LCR, the Basel III framework also included a second standard, referred to as the net stable funding ratio (“NSFR”), which is designed to promote more medium-and long-term funding of the assets and activities of banks over a one-year time horizon. Although the Basel Committee finalized its formulation of the NSFR in 2014, the U.S. banking agencies have not yet proposed an NSFR for application to U.S. banking organizations or addressed the scope of banking organizations to which it will apply. The Basel Committee’s final NSFR document states that the NSFR applies to internationally active banks, as did its final LCR document as to that ratio.

 

 

179  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

ITEM 2. PROPERTIES

The Bancorp’s executive offices and the main office of Fifth Third Bank are located on Fountain Square Plaza in downtown Cincinnati, Ohio in a 32-story office tower, a five-story office building with an attached parking garage and a separate ten-story office building known as the Fifth Third Center, the William S. Rowe Building and the 530 Building, respectively. The Bancorp’s main operations center is located in Cincinnati, Ohio, in a three-story building with an attached parking garage known as the Madisonville Operations Center. The Bank owns 100% of these buildings.

At December 31, 2014, the Bancorp, through its banking and non-banking subsidiaries, operated 1,302 banking centers, of which 931 were owned, 259 were leased and 112 for which the buildings are owned but the land is leased. The banking centers are located in the states of Ohio, Kentucky, Indiana, Michigan, Illinois, Florida, Tennessee, North Carolina, West Virginia, Pennsylvania, Missouri, and Georgia. The Bancorp’s significant owned properties are owned free from mortgages and major encumbrances.

EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE BANCORP

Officers are appointed annually by the Board of Directors at the meeting of Directors immediately following the Annual Meeting of Shareholders. The names, ages and positions of the Executive Officers of the Bancorp as of February 25, are listed below along with their business experience during the past 5 years:

Kevin T. Kabat , 58. Vice Chairman of the Bancorp since September 2012 and Chief Executive Officer of the Bancorp since April 2007. Previously, Mr. Kabat was President of the Bancorp from June 2006 to September 2012 and Chairman from June 2008 to June 2010. Prior to that, Mr. Kabat was Executive Vice President of the Bancorp since December 2003.

Chad M. Borton , 44. Executive Vice President of the Bancorp since April 2014. Previously, Mr. Borton was Head of Retail Banking for Fifth Third Bank from July 2012 to April 2014. Prior to that, Mr. Borton served in multiple positions at JP Morgan Chase including the Head of Branch Administration from August 2011 to July 2012; Senior Vice President and Market Manager from August 2010 to August 2011; Head of Retail Distribution from 2008 to 2010 and Consumer Bank Chief Financial Officer from 2006 to 2008.

Greg D. Carmichael , 53. President of the Bancorp since September 2012 and Chief Operating Officer of the Bancorp since June 2006. Previously, Mr. Carmichael was the Executive Vice President and Chief Information Officer of the Bancorp since June 2003.

Frank R. Forrest , 60. Executive Vice President and Chief Risk Officer of the Bancorp since April 2014. Previously, Mr. Forrest was Executive Vice President and Chief Risk and Credit Officer of the Bancorp since September 2013. Prior to that, Mr. Forrest served with Bank of America Merrill Lynch. From March 2012 until June 2013, Mr. Forrest served as Managing Director and Quality Control Executive for Legacy Asset Services, a division of Bank of America. From September 2008 until March 2012, Mr. Forrest was Managing Director and Global Debt Products Executive for Global Corporate and Investment Banking. Formerly from January 2007 to September 2008, Mr. Forrest was Risk Management Executive for Commercial Banking.

Mark D. Hazel , 49. Senior Vice President and Controller of the Bancorp since February 2010. Prior to that, Mr. Hazel was the Assistant Bancorp Controller since 2006 and was the Controller of Nonbank entities since 2003.

Gregory L. Kosch , 55. Executive Vice President of the Bancorp since June 2005. Previously, Mr. Kosch was Senior Vice President

and head of the Bancorp’s Commercial Division in the Chicago affiliate since June 2002.

James C. Leonard , 45. Senior Vice President and Treasurer of the Bancorp since October 2013. Previously, Mr. Leonard was the Director of Business Planning and Analysis since 2006 and was the Chief Financial Officer of the Commercial Banking Division since 2001.

Philip R. McHugh , 50, Executive Vice President of the Bancorp since December 2014. Previously, Mr. McHugh was Executive Vice President of Fifth Third Bank since June 2011 and was Senior Vice President of Fifth Third Bank from June 2010 through June 2011. Prior to that, Mr. McHugh was the President and CEO of the Louisville Affiliate of Fifth Third Bank from January 2005 through June 2010.

Daniel T. Poston , 56. Executive Vice President of the Bancorp since June 2003, and Chief Strategy and Administrative Officer of the Bancorp since October 2013. Previously, Mr. Poston was the Chief Financial Officer of the Bancorp from September 2009 to October 2013. Previously, Mr. Poston was the Controller of the Bancorp from July 2007 to May 2008 and from November 2008 to September 2009. Previously, Mr. Poston was the Chief Financial Officer of the Bancorp from May 2008 to November 2008. Formerly, Mr. Poston was the Auditor of the Bancorp since October 2001 and was Senior Vice President of the Bancorp and Fifth Third Bank since January 2002.

Joseph R. Robinson , 47. Executive Vice President and Chief Information Officer and Director of Information Technology and Operations of the Bancorp since September 2009. Previously, Mr. Robinson was Executive Vice President and Chief Information Officer of the Bancorp since April 2008. Prior to that, he was Senior Vice President and Director of Central Operations since November 2006 and Senior Vice President of IT Enterprise Solutions since March 2004.

Robert A. Sullivan , 60. Senior Executive Vice President of the Bancorp since December 2002.

Teresa J. Tanner , 46. Executive Vice President and Chief Human Resources Officer of the Bancorp since February 2010. Previously, Ms. Tanner was Senior Vice President and Director of Enterprise Learning since September 2008. Prior to that, she was Human Resources Senior Vice President and Senior Business Partner for the Information Technology and Central Operations divisions since July 2006. Previously, she was Vice President and Senior Business Partner for Operations since September 2004.

Mary E. Tuuk , 50. Executive Vice President of Corporate Services & Board Secretary of the Bancorp since July 2013. Previously, Ms. Tuuk served as Affiliate President of Fifth Third Bank (Western Michigan) from November 2011 to June 2013. Prior to that, Ms. Tuuk was the Executive Vice President and Chief Risk Officer of the Bancorp from June 2007 to October 2011 and from July 2013 through September 2013. Ms. Tuuk was Senior Vice President of Fifth Third Bancorp since 2003.

Tayfun Tuzun , 50. Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of the Bancorp since October 2013. Previously, Mr. Tuzun was the Senior Vice President and Treasurer of the Bancorp from December 2011 to October 2013. Prior to that, Mr. Tuzun was the Assistant Treasurer and Balance Sheet Manager of Fifth Third Bancorp. Previously, Mr. Tuzun was the Structured Finance Manager since 2007.

 

 

180  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

PART II

ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES

The Bancorp’s common stock is traded in the over-the-counter market and is listed under the symbol “FITB” on the NASDAQ® Global Select Market System.

 

High and Low Stock Prices and Dividends Paid Per Share  
2014    High      Low      Dividends Paid
Per Share
 

Fourth Quarter

     $20.82         $17.65         $0.13   

Third Quarter

     $21.79         $19.45         $0.13   

Second Quarter

     $23.41         $19.82         $0.13   

First Quarter

     $23.90         $20.37         $0.12   
2013    High      Low     

Dividends Paid

Per Share

 

Fourth Quarter

     $21.14         $17.49         $0.12   

Third Quarter

     $19.79         $17.80         $0.12   

Second Quarter

     $18.74         $15.62         $0.12   

First Quarter

     $16.77         $15.19         $0.11   

See a discussion of dividend limitations that the subsidiaries can pay to the Bancorp discussed in Note 3 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements. Additionally, as of December 31, 2014, the Bancorp had 46,876 shareholders of record.

 

Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities  
Period    Shares
Purchased (a)
     Average Price
Paid Per
Share
     Shares
Purchased as
Part of
Publicly
Announced
Plans or
Programs
     Maximum
Shares that
May Be
Purchased
Under the
Plans or
Programs
 

October 2014

     10,234,560        $18.15        10,234,560        73,180,368   

November 2014

                          73,180,368   

December 2014

                          73,180,368   

Total

     10,234,560        $18.15        10,234,560        73,180,368   
(a) The Bancorp repurchased 117,961, 34,182 and 46,119 shares during October, November and December of 2014 in connection with various employee compensation plans of the Bancorp. These purchases are not included against the maximum number of shares that may yet be purchased under the Board of Directors authorization.

See further discussion of stock-based compensation in Note 24 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

181  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

The following performance graphs do not constitute soliciting material and should not be deemed filed or incorporated by reference into any other Company filing under the Securities Act of 1933 or the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, except to the extent the Bancorp specifically incorporates the performance graphs by reference therein.

Total Return Analysis

The graphs below summarize the cumulative return experienced by the Bancorp’s shareholders over the years 2009 through 2014, and 2004 through 2014, respectively, compared to the S&P 500 Stock and the S&P Banks indices.

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP VS. MARKET INDICES

 

LOGO

 

182  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

PART III ITEM 10. DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

The information required by this item relating to the Executive Officers of the Registrant is included in PART I under “EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE BANCORP.”

The information required by this item concerning Directors and the nomination process is incorporated herein by reference under the caption “ELECTION OF DIRECTORS” of the Bancorp’s Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.

The information required by this item concerning the Audit Committee and Code of Business Conduct and Ethics is incorporated herein by reference under the captions “CORPORATE GOVERNANCE” and “BOARD OF DIRECTORS, ITS COMMITTEES, MEETINGS AND FUNCTIONS” of the Bancorp’s Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.

The information required by this item concerning Section 16 (a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance is incorporated herein by reference under the caption “SECTION 16 (a) BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP REPORTING COMPLIANCE” of the Bancorp’s Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.

ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

The information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference under the captions “COMPENSATION DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS,” “COMPENSATION OF NAMED EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS,” “COMPENSATION COMMITTEE REPORT” and “COMPENSATION COMMITTEE INTERLOCKS AND INSIDER PARTICIPATION” of the Bancorp’s Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.

ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

Security ownership information of certain beneficial owners and management is incorporated herein by reference under the captions “CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS,” “ELECTION OF DIRECTORS,” “COMPENSATION DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS” and “COMPENSATION OF NAMED EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS” of the Bancorp’s Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.

The information required by this item concerning Equity Compensation Plan information is included in Note 24 of the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE

The information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference under the captions “CERTAIN TRANSACTIONS”, “ELECTION OF DIRECTORS”, “CORPORATE GOVERNANCE” and “BOARD OF DIRECTORS, ITS COMMITTEES, MEETINGS AND FUNCTIONS” of the Bancorp’s Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.

ITEM 14. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING FEES AND SERVICES

The information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference under the caption “PRINCIPAL INDEPENDENT EXTERNAL AUDIT FIRM FEES” of the Bancorp’s Proxy Statement for the 2015 Annual Meeting of Shareholders.

PART IV

ITEM 15. EXHIBITS, FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES

     

 

Pages

Public Accounting Firm

   84

Fifth Third Bancorp and Subsidiaries Consolidated Financial Statements

   85-89

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

   90-170

The schedules for the Bancorp and its subsidiaries are omitted because of the absence of conditions under which they are required, or because the information is set forth in the Consolidated Financial Statements or the notes thereto.

The following lists the Exhibits to the Annual Report on Form 10-K.

 

2.1

 

Master Investment Agreement (excluding exhibits and schedules) dated as of March 27, 2009 and amended as of June 30, 2009, among Fifth Third Bank, Fifth Third Financial Corporation, Advent-Kong Blocker Corp., FTPS Holding, LLC and Fifth Third Processing Solutions, LLC. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Commission on July 2, 2009.

3.1

 

Amended Articles of Incorporation of Fifth Third Bancorp, as amended. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal quarter ended June 30, 2014.

3.2

 

Code of Regulations of Fifth Third Bancorp, as Amended as of September 15, 2014. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Commission on September 17, 2014.

4.1

 

Junior Subordinated Indenture, dated as of March 20, 1997 between Fifth Third Bancorp and Wilmington Trust Company, as Debenture Trustee. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on March 26, 1997.

4.2

 

Indenture, dated as of May 23, 2003, between Fifth Third Bancorp and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 22, 2003.

4.3

 

Global security representing Fifth Third Bancorp’s $500,000,000 4.50% Subordinated Notes due 2018. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 22, 2003.

4.4

 

First Supplemental Indenture, dated as of December 20, 2006, between Fifth Third Bancorp and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2006.

4.5

 

Global security representing Fifth Third Bancorp’s $500,000,000 5.45% Subordinated Notes due 2017. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2006.

4.6

 

Global security representing Fifth Third Bancorp’s $250,000,000 Floating Rate Subordinated Notes due 2016. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K filed for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2006.

4.7

 

First Supplemental Indenture dated as of March 30, 2007 between Fifth Third Bancorp and Wilmington Trust Company, as trustee, to the Junior Subordinated Indenture dated as of May 20, 1997 between Fifth Third and the Trustee. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on March 30, 2007.

4.8

 

Global security dated as of March 4, 2008 representing Fifth Third Bancorp’s $500,000,000 8.25% Subordinated Notes due 2038. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q filed for the quarter ended March 31, 2008. (1)

4.9

 

Indenture for Senior Debt Securities dated as of April 30, 2008 between Fifth Third Bancorp and Wilmington Trust Company, as trustee. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Current Report on

 

 

183  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents
 

Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 6, 2008.

4.10

  Supplemental Indenture dated as of January 25, 2011 between Fifth Third Bancorp and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee, to the Indenture for Senior Debt Securities dated as of April 30, 2008 between Fifth Third and the Trustee. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on January 25, 2011.

4.11

  Global Security dated as of January 25, 2011 representing Fifth Third Bancorp’s $500,000,000 3.625% Senior Notes due 2016. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on January 25, 2011. (2)

4.12

  Second Supplemental Indenture dated as of March 7, 2012 between Fifth Third Bancorp and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee, to the Indenture for Senior Debt Securities dated as of April 30, 2008 between Fifth Third and the Trustee. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on March 7, 2012.

4.13

  Global Security dated as of March 7, 2012 representing Fifth Third Bancorp’s $500,000,000 3.500% Senior Notes due 2022. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K/A filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on March 7, 2012.

4.14

 

Deposit Agreement dated May 16, 2013, between Fifth Third Bancorp, as issuer, Wilmington Trust, National Association, as depositary and calculation agent, American Stock Transfer & Trust Company, LLC, as transfer agent and registrar, and the holders from time to time of the depositary receipts issued thereunder. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 16, 2013.

4.15

 

Form of Certificate Representing the 5.10% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series H, of Fifth Third Bancorp. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 16, 2013.

4.16

  Form of Depositary Receipt for the 5.10% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series H, of Fifth Third Bancorp. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 16, 2013.

4.17

  Global Security dated as of November 20, 2013 representing Fifth Third Bancorp’s $500,000,000 4.30% Subordinated Notes due 2024. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 20, 2013.

4.18

 

Deposit Agreement dated December 9, 2013, between Fifth Third Bancorp, as issuer, Wilmington Trust, National Association, as depositary and calculation agent, American Stock Transfer & Trust Company, LLC as transfer agent and registrar, and the holders from time to time of the depositary receipts issued thereunder. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 9, 2013.

4.19

 

Form of Certificate Representing the 6.625% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series I, of Fifth Third Bancorp. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 9, 2013.

4.20

  Form of Depositary Receipt for the 6.625% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series I, of Fifth Third Bancorp. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 9, 2013.

4.21

  Deposit Agreement dated June 5, 2014, among Fifth Third Bancorp, as issuer, Wilmington Trust, National Association, as depositary and calculation agent, American Stock Transfer & Trust Company, LLC as transfer agent and registrar, and the holders from time to time of the depositary receipts issued thereunder. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on June 5, 2014.

4.22

  Form of Certificate Representing the 4.90% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series J, of Fifth Third Bancorp. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 of the Registrant’s
  Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on June 5, 2014.

4.23

  Form of Depositary Receipt for the 4.90% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series J, of Fifth Third Bancorp. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on June 5, 2014.

4.24

  Third Supplemental Indenture dated as of February 28, 2014 between Fifth Third Bancorp and Wilmington Trust Company, as Trustee, to the Indenture for Senior Debt Securities dated as of April 30, 2008 between Fifth Third Bancorp and the Trustee. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Commission on February 28, 2014.

4.25

  Global Security dated as of February 28, 2014, representing Fifth Third Bancorp’s $500,000,000 in principal amount of its 2.30% Senior Notes due 2019. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Commission on February 28, 2014.

4.26

  Deposit Agreement dated June 5, 2014, among Fifth Third Bancorp, as issuer, Wilmington Trust, National Association, as depositary and calculation agent, American Stock Transfer & Trust Company, LLC as transfer agent and registrar, and the holders from time to time of the depositary receipts issued thereunder. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.3 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on June 5, 2014.

4.27

  Form of Certificate Representing the 4.90% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series J, of Fifth Third Bancorp. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on June 5, 2014.

4.28

  Form of Depositary Receipt for the 4.90% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Non-Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series J, of Fifth Third Bancorp. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 of the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on June 5, 2014.

10.1

  Fifth Third Bancorp Unfunded Deferred Compensation Plan for Non-Employee Directors, as Amended and Restated. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013. *

10.2

 

Indenture effective November 19, 1992 between Fifth Third Bancorp, Issuer and NBD Bank, N.A., Trustee. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 18, 1992 and as Exhibit 4.1 to the Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-3, Registration No. 33-54134.

10.3

 

Fifth Third Bancorp Master Profit Sharing Plan, as Amended and Restated. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011.*

10.4

 

First Amendment to Fifth Third Bancorp Master Profit Sharing Plan, as Amended and Restated. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011.*

10.5

 

Second Amendment to Fifth Third Bancorp Master Profit Sharing Plan, as Amended and Restated. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.7 of the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2012.*

10.6

 

Third Amendment to Fifth Third Bancorp Master Profit Sharing Plan, as Amended and Restated. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.8 of the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013.*

10.7

 

Fifth Third Bancorp 401(k) Savings Plan, as Amended and Restated.*

10.8

 

The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Retirement Plan, as Amended and Restated.*

10.9

 

Fifth Third Bancorp Incentive Compensation Plan. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Proxy Statement dated February 19, 2004.*

10.10

 

Fifth Third Bancorp 2008 Incentive Compensation Plan. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Proxy Statement dated March 6, 2008.*

10.11

 

Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Proxy Statement dated March 6, 2014.*

10.12

 

Amended and Restated Fifth Third Bancorp 1993 Stock Purchase Plan. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011.*

10.13

 

Fifth Third Bancorp Non-qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, as Amended and Restated. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s

 

 

184  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents
 

Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2013.*

10.14

 

Amendment to the Fifth Third Bancorp Non-qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, as Amended and Restated.*

10.15

 

Fifth Third Bancorp Stock Option Gain Deferral Plan. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Proxy Statement dated February 9, 2001.*

10.16

 

Amendment No. 1 to Fifth Third Bancorp Stock Option Gain Deferral Plan. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 26, 2006. *

10.17

 

Amended and Restated First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. 2003 Incentive Plan. Incorporated by reference to First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc.’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2003. *

10.18

 

Fifth Third Bancorp Executive Change in Control Severance Plan, effective January 1, 2015. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 21, 2014.*

10.19

 

Form of Executive Agreement effective February 3, 2014, between Fifth Third Bancorp and Tayfun Tuzun. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on February 7, 2014.*

10.20

 

Form of Executive Agreement effective February 3, 2014, between Fifth Third Bancorp and Frank R. Forrest. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on February 7, 2014.*

10.21

 

Executive Agreement effective August 19, 2014, between Fifth Third Bancorp and Chad M. Borton. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2014.*

10.22

 

Form of Amended Executive Agreement effective January 19, 2012, between Fifth Third Bancorp and Daniel T. Poston. Incorporated by reference to Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on January 24, 2012. *

10.23

 

Warrant dated June 30, 2009 issued by Vantiv Holding, LLC to Fifth Third Bank. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Schedule 13D filed with the Commission on April 2, 2012.

10.24

 

Second Amended & Restated Limited Liability Company Agreement (excluding certain exhibits) dated as of March 21, 2012 by and among Vantiv, Inc., Fifth Third Bank, FTPS Partners, LLC, Vantiv Holding, LLC and each person who becomes a member after March 21, 2012. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Schedule 13D filed with the Commission on April 2, 2012.

10.25

 

Amendment and Restatement Agreement and Reaffirmation (excluding certain schedules) dated as of June 30, 2009 among Fifth Third Processing Solutions, LLC, FTPS Holding, LLC, Card Management Company, LLC, Fifth Third Holdings, LLC and Fifth Third Bank. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed with the Commission on July 2, 2009.

10.26

 

Registration Rights Agreement dated as of March 21, 2012 by and among Vantiv, Inc., Fifth Third Bank, FTPS Partners, LLC, JPDN Enterprises, LLC and certain stockholders of Vantiv, Inc. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Schedule 13D filed with the Commission on April 2, 2012.

10.27

 

Exchange Agreement dated as of March 21, 2012 by and among Vantiv, Inc., Vantiv Holding, LLC, Fifth Third Bank, FTPS Partners, LLC and such other holders of Class B Units and Class C Non-Voting Units that are from time to time parties of the Exchange Agreement. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Schedule 13D filed with the Commission on April 2, 2012.

10.28

 

Recapitalization Agreement dated as of March 21, 2012 by and among Vantiv, Inc., Vantiv Holding, LLC, Fifth Third Bank, FTPS Partners, LLC, JPDN Enterprises, LLC and certain stockholders of Vantiv, Inc. Incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s Schedule 13D filed with the Commission on April 2, 2012.

10.29

 

Description of Vantiv, Inc. Director Compensation for Greg D. Carmichael. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.8 of the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2012. On May 10, 2012, Daniel T. Poston was elected as a Class B Director of Vantiv, Inc. Mr. Poston is subject to a substantially similar compensation arrangement as described in Exhibit 10.8 of the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2012.*

10.30

 

Stock Appreciation Right Award Agreement. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013.*

10.31

 

Performance Share Award Agreement. Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 of the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013.*

10.32

 

Restricted Stock Award Agreement (for Directors). Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013.*

10.33

 

Restricted Stock Award Agreement (for Executive Officers). Incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.5 of the Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013.*

10.34

 

Stock Appreciation Right Award Agreement.*

10.35

 

Performance Share Award Agreement.*

10.36

 

Restricted Stock Unit Agreement (for Directors).*

10.37

 

Restricted Stock Award Agreement (for Executive Officers).*

10.38

 

Master Confirmation, as supplemented by a Supplemental Confirmation, for accelerated share repurchase transaction dated October 20, 2014 between Fifth Third Bancorp and Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch**

12.1

 

Computations of Consolidated Ratios of Earnings to Fixed Charges.

12.2

 

Computations of Consolidated Ratios of Earnings to Combined Fixed Charges and Preferred Stock Dividend Requirements.

21

 

Fifth Third Bancorp Subsidiaries, as of December 31, 2014.

23

 

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm-Deloitte & Touche LLP.

31(i)

 

Certification Pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 by Chief Executive Officer.

31(ii)

 

Certification Pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 by Chief Financial Officer.

32(i)

 

Certification Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as Adopted Pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 by Chief Executive Officer.

32(ii)

 

Certification Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as Adopted Pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 by Chief Financial Officer.

101

 

Interactive data files pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T: (i) the Consolidated Balance Sheets, (ii) the Consolidated Statements of Income, (iii) the Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (iv) the Consolidated Statements of Changes in Equity, (v) the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows, and (vi) the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements tagged as blocks of text and in detail.

 

(1) Fifth Third Bancorp also entered into an identical security on March 4, 2008 representing an additional $500,000,000 of its 8.25% Subordinated Notes due 2038.
(2) Fifth Third Bancorp also entered into an identical security on January 25, 2011 representing an additional $500,000,000 of its 3.625% Senior Notes due 2016.

*    Denotes management contract or compensatory plan or arrangement.

**  An application for confidential treatment for selected portions of this exhibit has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

 

 

185  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

Registrant

/s/ Kevin T. Kabat

Kevin T. Kabat
Vice Chairman and CEO
Principal Executive Officer
February 25, 2015

Pursuant to requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed on February 25, 2015 by the  following persons on behalf of the Registrant and in the capacities indicated.

 

OFFICERS :

/s/ Kevin T. Kabat

Kevin T. Kabat
Vice Chairman and CEO
Principal Executive Officer

/s/ Tayfun Tuzun

Tayfun Tuzun
Executive Vice President and CFO
Principal Financial Officer

/s/ Mark D. Hazel

Mark D. Hazel
Senior Vice President and Controller
Principal Accounting Officer

DIRECTORS:

/s/ James P. Hackett

James P. Hackett
Chairman

/s/ Marsha C. Williams

Marsha C. Williams
Lead Director

/s/ Nicholas K. Akins

Nicholas K. Akins

/s/ B. Evan Bayh III

B. Evan Bayh III

/s/ Katherine B. Blackburn

Katherine B. Blackburn

/s/ Ulysses L. Bridgeman, Jr.

Ulysses L. Bridgeman, Jr.

/s/ Emerson L. Brumback

Emerson L. Brumback

/s/ Gary R. Heminger

Gary R. Heminger

/s/ Jewell D. Hoover

Jewell D. Hoover

/s/ Kevin T. Kabat

Kevin T. Kabat

/s/ Mitchel D. Livingston, Ph.D.

Mitchel D. Livingston, Ph.D.

/s/ Michael B. McCallister

Michael B. McCallister

/s/ Hendrik G. Meijer

Hendrik G. Meijer
 

 

186  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED TEN YEAR COMPARISON

 

AVERAGE ASSETS FOR THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31 ($ IN MILLIONS)  
       

Interest-Earning Assets

                         
    Year              Loans and
Leases
    Federal Funds
  Sold
(a)
   

        Interest-

        Bearing
        Deposits in
         Banks
(a)

            Securities     Total                     Cash and Due
             from Banks
          Other
      Assets
               Total Average
    Assets
 

    2014

 

$

  91,127       -            3,043        21,823           $       115,993       2,892            14,539     $          131,943        

    2013

    89,093       1          2,416        16,444         107,954       2,482            15,053         123,732        

    2012

    84,822       2          1,493        15,319         101,636       2,355            15,695         117,614        

    2011

    80,214       1          2,030        15,437         97,682       2,352            15,335         112,666        

    2010

    79,232       11          3,317        16,371         98,931       2,245            14,841         112,434        

    2009

    83,391       12          1,023        17,100         101,526       2,329            14,266         114,856        

    2008

    85,835       438          183        13,424         99,880       2,490            13,411         114,296        

    2007

    78,348       257          147        11,630         90,382       2,275            10,613         102,477        

    2006

    73,493       252          144        20,910         94,799       2,477            8,713         105,238        

    2005

      67,737       88          113        24,806         92,744       2,750            8,102               102,876        

 

AVERAGE DEPOSITS AND SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS FOR THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31 ($ IN MILLIONS)   
Deposits              
    Year       Demand     Interest
Checking
    Savings     Money
Market
    Other
Time
    Certificates
$100,000 and
Over
    Foreign
Office
    Total     Short-Term
Borrowings
    Total  
2014       $         31,755       25,382        16,080       14,670        3,762       3,929               1,828       $      97,406       2,331         $      99,737        
2013     29,925       23,582        18,440       9,467        3,760       6,339               1,518         93,031       3,527           96,558        
2012     27,196       23,096        21,393       4,903        4,306       3,102               1,555         85,551       4,806           90,357        
2011     23,389       18,707        21,652       5,154        6,260       3,656               3,497         82,315       3,122           85,437        
2010     19,669       18,218        19,612       4,808        10,526       6,083               3,361         82,277       1,926           84,203        
2009     16,862       15,070        16,875       4,320        14,103       10,367               2,265         79,862       6,980           86,842        
2008     14,017       14,191        16,192       6,127        11,135       9,531               4,220         75,413       10,760           86,173        
2007     13,261       14,820        14,836       6,308        10,778       6,466               3,155         69,624       6,890           76,514        
2006     13,741       16,650        12,189       6,366        10,500       5,795               3,711         68,952       8,670           77,622        
2005     13,868       18,884        10,007       5,170        8,491       4,001               3,967         64,388       9,511           73,899        

 

INCOME FOR THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31 ($ IN MILLIONS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)   
                                  Per Share (b)  
                                                    Originally Reported  
    Year       Interest
Income
    Interest
Expense
    Noninterest
Income
    Noninterest
Expense
    Net Income (Loss)
Available to
Common
Shareholders
    Earnings     Diluted
Earnings
    Dividends
Declared
      Earnings     Diluted
Earnings
 
2014       $         4,030       451       2,473           3,709           1,414            1.68          1.66        0.51        1.68          $         1.66       
2013     3,973       412       3,227           3,961           1,799            2.05          2.02        0.47        2.05            2.02       
2012     4,107       512       2,999           4,081           1,541            1.69          1.66        0.36        1.69            1.66       
2011     4,218       661       2,455           3,758           1,094            1.20          1.18        0.28        1.20            1.18       
2010     4,489       885       2,729           3,855           503            0.63          0.63        0.04        0.63            0.63       
2009     4,668       1,314       4,782           3,826           511            0.73          0.67        0.04        0.73            0.67       
2008     5,608       2,094       2,946           4,564           (2,180)            (3.91)          (3.91)        0.75        (3.94)            (3.94)       
2007     6,027       3,018       2,467           3,311           1,075            1.99          1.98        1.70        2.00            1.99       
2006     5,955       3,082       2,012           2,915           1,188            2.13          2.12        1.58        2.14            2.13       
2005     4,995       2,030       2,374           2,801           1,548            2.79          2.77        1.46        2.79            2.77       

 

MISCELLANEOUS AT DECEMBER 31 ($ IN MILLIONS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)                     
            Bancorp Shareholders’ Equity                
    Year        Common
Shares
Outstanding
     Common
Stock
     Preferred
Stock
     Capital
Surplus
     Retained
Earnings
     Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income
     Treasury
Stock
     Total      Book Value
Per Share
     Allowance for
Loan and
Lease Losses
 
2014      824,046,952      $     2,051           1,331             2,646         11,141         429                (1,972)        $     15,626         17.35          $       1,322      
2013      855,305,745        2,051          1,034            2,561        10,156        82               (1,295)          14,589        15.85            1,582      
2012      882,152,057        2,051          398            2,758        8,768        375               (634)          13,716        15.10            1,854      
2011      919,804,436        2,051          398            2,792        7,554        470               (64)          13,201        13.92            2,255      
2010      796,272,522        1,779          3,654            1,715        6,719        314               (130)          14,051        13.06            3,004      
2009      795,068,164        1,779          3,609            1,743        6,326        241               (201)          13,497        12.44            3,749      
2008      577,386,612        1,295          4,241            848        5,824        98               (229)          12,077        13.57            2,787      
2007      532,671,925        1,295          9            1,779        8,413        (126)               (2,209)          9,161        17.18            937      
2006      556,252,674        1,295          9            1,812        8,317        (179)               (1,232)          10,022        18.00            771      
2005      555,623,430        1,295          9            1,827        8,007        (413)               (1,279)          9,446        16.98            744      
(a)

Federal funds sold and interest-bearing deposits in banks are combined in other short-term investments in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(b)

Adjusted for accounting guidance related to the calculation of earnings per share, which was adopted retroactively on January 1, 2009.

 

187  Fifth Third Bancorp


Table of Contents

DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

 

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

DIRECTORS

James P. Hackett, Chairman

Vice Chair, Board of

Directors

Steelcase, Inc.

Marsha C. Williams, Lead

Director

Retired Senior Vice President

&

Chief Financial Officer

Orbitz Worldwide, Inc.

Nicholas K. Akins

President & CEO

American Electric Power

Company

B. Evan Bayh III

Partner

McGuireWoods LLP

Katherine B. Blackburn

Executive Vice President

Cincinnati Bengals

Ulysses L. Bridgeman, Jr.

President

B.F. Companies

Emerson L. Brumback

Retired President & COO

M&T Bank

Gary R. Heminger

President, CEO & Director

Marathon Petroleum

Corporation

Jewell D. Hoover

Principal & Bank Consultant

Hoover and Associates, LLC

Kevin T. Kabat

Vice Chairman & CEO

Fifth Third Bancorp

Mitchel D. Livingston, Ph.D.

Retired Vice President for

Student Affairs

& Chief Diversity Officer

University of Cincinnati

Michael B. McCallister

Retired Chairman & CEO

Humana Inc.

Hendrik G. Meijer

Co-Chairman, Director

& CEO

Meijer, Inc.

DIRECTORS EMERITI

Darryl F. Allen

John F. Barrett

J. Kenneth Blackwell

Milton C. Boesel, Jr.

Douglas G. Cowan

Thomas L. Dahl

Ronald A. Dauwe

Gerald V. Dirvin

Thomas B. Donnell

Richard T. Farmer

John D. Geary

Ivan W. Gorr

Joseph H. Head, Jr.

Allen M. Hill

William M. Isaac

William J. Keating

Jerry L. Kirby

Robert L. Koch II

Kenneth W. Lowe

Robert B. Morgan

Michael H. Norris

David E. Reese

James E. Rogers

George A. Schaefer, Jr.

John J. Schiff, Jr.

Donald B. Shackelford

David B. Sharrock

Stephen Stranahan

Dudley S. Taft

Alton C. Wendzel

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

OFFICERS

Kevin T. Kabat

Vice Chairman & CEO

Greg D. Carmichael

President &

Chief Operating Officer

Chad M. Borton

Executive Vice President

Frank R. Forrest

Executive Vice President &

Chief Risk Officer

Mark D. Hazel

Senior Vice President &

Controller

Gregory L. Kosch

Executive Vice President

James C. Leonard

Senior Vice President &

Treasurer

Philip R. McHugh

Executive Vice President

Daniel T. Poston

Executive Vice President &

Chief Strategy and

Administrative Officer

Joseph R. Robinson

Executive Vice President &

Chief Information Officer

Robert A. Sullivan

Senior Executive Vice

President

Teresa J. Tanner

Executive Vice President &

Chief Human Resources

Officer

Mary E. Tuuk

Executive Vice President of

Corporate Services &

Board Secretary

Tayfun Tuzun

Executive Vice President &

Chief Financial Officer

AFFILIATE PRESIDENTS

Donald Abel, Jr.

Steven Alonso

David A. Call

Hal Clemmer

David Girodat

Shawn Hagan

Thomas Heiks

Jerry Kelsheimer

Robert W. LaClair

Brian Lamb

Ralph S. Michael III

Jordan A. Miller, Jr.

Thomas Partridge

Robert A. Sullivan

Thomas G. Welch, Jr.

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

BOARD COMMITTEES

Finance Committee

Gary R. Heminger, Chair

Emerson L. Brumback

James P. Hackett

Kevin T. Kabat

Marsha C. Williams

Audit Committee

Emerson L. Brumback, Chair

Nicholas K. Akins

Jewell D. Hoover

Michael B. McCallister

Human Capital and

Compensation Committee

Marsha C. Williams, Chair

Nicholas K. Akins

Gary R. Heminger

Mitchel D. Livingston, Ph. D.

Hendrik G. Meijer

Nominating and Corporate

Governance Committee

Ulysses L. Bridgeman, Jr.,

Chair

B. Evan Bayh III

Gary R. Heminger

Hendrik G. Meijer

Risk and Compliance

Committee

Jewell D. Hoover, Chair

B. Evan Bayh III

Mitchel D. Livingston, Ph. D.

Hendrik G. Meijer

Marsha C. Williams

 

 

188  Fifth Third Bancorp

 

Exhibit 10.7              

 

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

 

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

 

as amended and restated effective as of January 1, 2015

 

 

 


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

as amended and restated effective

as of January 1, 2015

Table of Contents

Articles

 

1.

Introduction and Purpose

 

2.

Definitions

 

3.

Eligibility and Participation

 

4.

Contributions and Their Allocation

 

5.

Limitations on Annual Additions

 

6.

Vesting and Forfeitures

 

7.

Investment of Accounts

 

8.

Withdrawals and Distributions

 

9.

Form of Payment to Participants

 

10.

Death Benefits

 

11.

Administration

 

12.

Amendment and Termination

 

13.

Top-Heavy Rules

 

14.

Miscellaneous


ARTICLE 1

INTRODUCTION AND PURPOSE

1.1         Amendment and Restatement .    Fifth Third Bank hereby amends and restates the Fifth Third Bancorp 401(k) Savings Plan (formerly known before this amendment and restatement as The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Profit Sharing Plan) in its entirety, effective as of January 1, 2015; provided however, such other effective dates as are specified in the Plan for other particular provisions shall be applicable.

1.2         Purposes of the Plan .    The purposes of the Plan are to provide retirement and other benefits for Participants and their respective beneficiaries. Except as otherwise provided by Section 4.9, the assets of the Plan shall be held for the exclusive purpose of providing benefits to Participants and their beneficiaries and defraying reasonable expenses of administering the Plan, and it shall be impossible for any part of the assets or income of the Plan to be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than such exclusive purposes. In accordance with section 401(a)(27) of the Code, the Plan is hereby designated as a profit sharing plan except with respect to the Fifth Third Stock Fund (as described in Section 7.3), which shall constitute a stock bonus plan and an employee stock ownership plan as defined in section 4975(e)(7) of the Code, designed to invest primarily in qualifying employer securities.

 

1-1


ARTICLE 2

DEFINITIONS

As used in the Plan, the following terms, when capitalized, shall have the following meanings, except when otherwise indicated by the context:

2.1        “Account” means, with respect to a Participant, his allocable share of the Plan Assets. A Participant’s Account under the Plan may include one or more of the following subaccounts:

 

  (a)

After-Tax Account;

 

  (b)

First Charter Employer Contribution Account;

 

  (c)

FNB Employer Contribution Account;

 

  (d)

Ohio Company SIP Matching Contribution Account;

 

  (e)

Old Kent After-Tax Account;

 

  (f)

Old Kent Matching Account;

 

  (g)

Old Kent Pre-Tax Account;

 

  (h)

Old Kent Rollover/Transfer Account;

 

  (i)

Post-2014 Employer Matching Account;

 

  (j)

Post-2006 Profit Sharing Account;

 

  (k)

Pre-2004 Employer Contribution Account;

 

  (l)

Pre-2015 Employer Matching Account;

 

  (m)

Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account;

 

  (n)

Qualified Non-Elective Contribution Account;

 

  (o)

Rollover Account which may include one or both of the following subaccounts:

 

  (1)

Traditional Rollover Account; and

 

  (2)

Roth Rollover Account;

(p)          Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account which may include one or both of the following subaccounts:

 

  (1)

Pre-Tax 401(k) Account; and

 

  (2)

Roth 401(k) Account;

(q)          2004-2006 Profit Sharing Account.

 

2-1


A Participant’s Account also may include applicable subaccounts as specified under an Appendix to the Plan. A Participant’s account, if any, under a Predecessor Plan which merges into, or makes transfers to, this Plan, shall be allocated to the appropriate subaccounts as determined by the Administrator. The establishment and maintenance of separate Accounts under the Plan is for accounting purposes, and a segregation and separate investment of each Account shall not be required.

2.2        “Accounting Date” means the last day of each June, September, December and March; provided, however, if such last day falls on a Saturday, Sunday, or holiday, then the preceding business day shall be the Accounting Date.

2.3        (a)        “Actual Contribution Percentage” for a group of Participants in Component Plan A (as described in Section 4.7) for a Plan Year is the average of the ratios, calculated separately for each such Employee in such group, of:

(1)        the amount of the Employer match contributed to the Plan for such Plan Year under Section 4.5 on behalf of each such Employee, to

(2)        the Employee’s Annual Compensation for such Plan Year.

(b)        For purposes of computing the separate ratio under (a) above for any Highly Compensated Employee, all plans described in section 401(a) of the Code or arrangements described in section 401(k) of the Code of the Employer (and other employers taken into account under section 414 of the Code) in which such Highly Compensated Employee is a participant, shall be treated as one such plan or arrangement and all matching contributions and employee contributions for any such Highly Compensated Employee under such arrangements for the Plan Year being tested shall be aggregated.

(c)        if the Plan satisfies the requirements of section 401(m), 401(a)(4) or 410(b) of the Code only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy such requirements only if aggregated with this Plan, then such other plans shall be aggregated with this Plan for purposes of computing the Actual Contribution Percentages and for determining whether the nondiscrimination rules of Section 4.7 are satisfied. If such aggregation applies, the other plans must use a testing method consistent with this Plan.

2.4        (a)        “Actual Deferral Percentage” for a group of Participants in Component Plan A (as described in Section 4.3) for a Plan Year is the average of the ratios, calculated separately for each such Employee in such group, of:

(1)        the compensation reduction contributions on behalf of each such Employee for such Plan Year under Section 4.1(a)(1), to

(2)        the Employee’s Annual Compensation for such Plan Year.

 

2-2


(b)        For purposes of computing the separate ratio under (a) above for any Highly Compensated Employee, all cash or deferred arrangements under section 401(k) of the Code of the Employer (and other employers taken into account under section 414 of the Code) in which such Highly Compensated Employee is a participant, shall be treated as one cash or deferred arrangement under section 401(k) of the Code and all elective contributions for any such Highly Compensated Employees under such arrangements for the Plan Year being tested shall be aggregated.

(c)        If the Plan satisfies the requirements of section 401(k), 401(a)(4) or 410(b) of the Code only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy such requirements only if aggregated with this Plan, then such other plans shall be aggregated with this Plan for purposes of computing the Actual Deferral Percentages and for determining whether the nondiscrimination rules of Section 4.3(b) are satisfied. If such aggregation applies, the other plans must use a testing method consistent with this Plan.

2.5        “Administrator” or “Plan Administrator” means the Fifth Third Bank Pension, Profit Sharing and Medical Plan Committee. Members of said Committee shall be appointed by, and serve at the pleasure of, the President and Chief Executive Officer of Fifth Third Bank. A reference to the Plan Administrator includes, where applicable, its delegate.

2.6        “Affiliate” means each of the following for such period of time as is applicable under section 414 of the Code:

(a)        a corporation which, together with the Employer, is a member of a controlled group of corporations within the meaning of section 414(b) of the Code (as modified by section 415(h) thereof for the purposes of Article 5) and the applicable regulations thereunder;

(b)        a trade or business (whether or not incorporated) with which the Employer is under common control within the meaning of section 414(c) of the Code (as modified by section 415(h) thereof for the purposes of Article 5) and the applicable regulations thereunder;

(c)        an organization which, together with the Employer, is a member of an affiliated service group (as defined in section 414(m) of the Code); and

(d)        any other entity required to be aggregated with the Employer under section 414(o) of the Code.

2.7        “After-Tax Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Account which reflects the Participant’s nondeductible voluntary contributions under Section 4.6 or transferred or merged into this Plan from a Predecessor Plan (other than the Old Kent Thrift Plan), as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.8        “Annual Compensation” means the remuneration (before reduction for withheld amounts) an Employee receives, or would have received but for compensation reduction pursuant to Section 4.1, pursuant to The Fifth Third Bank 125 Plan or pursuant to a Code section 132(f)(4) qualified transportation arrangement, from an Employer during a Plan Year, from and after becoming a Participant, in the form of base wages or salary, overtime, variable compensation, and similar compensation, but excluding payments made pursuant to product-focused incentive

 

2-3


plans, tuition refund reimbursements, wellness rewards and similar payments and benefits. Other performance-based additional cash compensation incentives associated with the primary duties of the Employee’s position shall be included in Annual Compensation. Performance-based additional cash compensation incentives not associated with the primary duties of the Employee’s position shall not be included in Annual Compensation.

Solely for purposes of determining the Actual Deferral Percentage and the Actual Contribution Percentage, the Administrator, in its discretion, may use the definition of “Annual Compensation” set forth in the above paragraph, or the following definition. If the Administrator so determines, “Annual Compensation” for purposes of determining the Actual Deferral Percentage and the Actual Contribution Percentage shall mean the total wages as defined in section 3401 of the Code and all other payments of compensation by the Employer (in the course of its trade or business) for which the Employer is required to furnish the Employee a written statement under sections 6041(d), 6051(a)(3) and 6052 of the Code determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in section 3401(a)(2) of the Code) which is paid by the Employer to an Employee during a Plan Year including amounts that otherwise would have been included within this definition but for section 402(a)(8) of the Code (relating to a salary reduction election under section 401(k) of the Code), section 125 of the Code (relating to the cafeteria or flexible benefit plans), section 132(f)(4), section 402(h) of the Code (relating to SEPs), section 403(b) of the Code (relating to certain tax deferred annuities), section 457(b) of the Code (relating to deferred compensation plans of state and local governments and tax-exempt organizations), section 414(h)(2) of the Code (relating to certain picked-up employee contributions).

For any Plan Year, only the first $265,000 (as adjusted by the Secretary of Treasury in accordance with section 401(a)(17) of the Code) of a Participant’s Annual Compensation shall be taken into account.

2.9        “Beneficiary” means the person or persons entitled to receive the distributions, if any, payable under the Plan upon or after a Participant’s death, as such Participant’s Beneficiary. Each Participant may designate a Beneficiary by filing the proper form with the Administrator. A Participant may designate one or more contingent Beneficiaries to receive any distributions after the death of a prior Beneficiary. A designation shall be effective upon said filing, provided that it is so filed during such Participant’s lifetime, and may be changed from time to time by the Participant; provided however, if a Participant has at least one Hour of Service or at least one hour of paid leave from the Employer (or any other employer for whom service is treated as service for the Employer) on or after August 23, 1984 and is survived by a Surviving Spouse, then such spouse shall be his Beneficiary unless the designation of another Beneficiary is consented to by such spouse in a written consent which acknowledges the effect of such designation, acknowledges the specific Beneficiary or Beneficiaries, and is witnessed by a Plan representative or a notary public.

If there is no designated Beneficiary to receive any amount that becomes payable to a Beneficiary, then such amount shall be paid to the person or persons in the first surviving class of the following classes of successive preference beneficiaries, and the members thereof shall receive equal shares of any distribution payable:

Class 1.        the Participant’s Surviving Spouse;

 

2-4


Class 2.        the Participant’s surviving children or issue of deceased children, per stirpes ;

Class 3.        the Participant’s surviving parents;

Class 4.        the Participant’s surviving brothers and sisters; and

Class 5.        the Participant’s executor or administrator.

2.10     “Break in Service” means:

(a)        before January 1, 1985, a Severance of at least 12 consecutive months; and

(b)        after December 31, 1984, a Severance of at least 72 consecutive months; provided however, if as December 31, 1984, service was not required to be taken into account under the provisions of section 410(a) or 411(a) of the Code, then this Subsection (b) shall not cause such service to be taken into account.

2.11     “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended at the particular time applicable. A reference to a section of the Code shall include said section and any comparable section or sections of any future legislation that amends, supplements or supersedes said section.

2.12     “Deferrable Compensation” means, for Plan Years before 2015, Annual Compensation other than variable compensation. For Plan Years 2015 and later, Deferrable Compensation means Annual Compensation.

For any Plan Year, only the first $265,000 as adjusted by the Secretary of Treasury in accordance with section 401(a)(17) of the Code) of a Participant’s Deferrable Compensation shall be taken into account. This $265,000 (as adjusted) limit may be applied in any reasonable manner determined by the Administrator or its delegate in its sole and absolute discretion.

2.13     “Disability” means an incapacity caused by bodily injury or disease which prevents an Employee from performing his regular duties, based upon medical evidence satisfactory to the Administrator.

2.14     “Early Retirement Age” means age 55 and at least 5 Vesting Years.

2.15     “Effective Date” means January 1, 2015.

2.16     “Eligible Participant” means a Participant, described in Section 4.2(c), who is qualified to receive an allocation of the Employer contribution under Section 4.2 for a Plan Year. As provided in an applicable Appendix, certain individuals may be excluded from the term “Eligible Participant.”

2.17     “Eligibility Service” means an individual’s Service.

 

2-5


2.18     “Eligibility Year” means 365 days of Eligibility Service (whether or not continuous).

2.19     “Employee” means an individual who is employed by an Employer and who is considered by the Employer in its sole and absolute discretion to be an Employee for purposes of the Plan. An individual who performs services for the Employer as an independent contractor, leased employee, employee of a temporary agency or in any other capacity other than as an employee of an Employer shall not be considered an Employee for purposes of the Plan. A determination that an individual is an employee of the Employer for other purposes such as employment tax purposes, shall have no bearing whatsoever on the determination of whether the individual is an Employee under the Plan if the Employer does not consider the individual to be its Employee for purposes of the Plan. As provided in an applicable Appendix, certain individuals may be excluded from the term “Employee.”

2.20     “Employer” means Fifth Third Bank and each other subsidiary (direct or indirect) of Fifth Third Bancorp except for any such subsidiary excluded under the terms of the Plan (including an Appendix). An entity shall not be considered an Employer either before or after the time it is a subsidiary (direct or indirect) of Fifth Third Bancorp.

2.21     “Employment Commencement Date” means, with respect to an individual, the date on which he first performs an Hour of Service.

2.22     “ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended, at the particular time applicable. A reference to a section of ERISA shall include said section and any comparable section or sections of any future legislation that amends, supplements or supersedes said section.

2.23     “First Charter Employer Contribution Account” means the separate portion of the Account of a Participant who was a participant in the First Charter Corporation Retirement Savings Plan which is attributable to his “First Charter Matching Account” and his “First Charter Discretionary Contribution Account” under that plan, which merged into this Plan, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.24     “Five-Percent Owner” means any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of sections 318 and 416 of the Code) more than 5 percent of the outstanding stock of the Employer or stock possessing more than 5 percent of the total combined voting power of all stock of the Employer.

2.25     “FNB Employer Contribution Account” means the separate portion of the Account of a Participant who was a participant in the First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. Salary Savings Plan which is attributable to “Additional Contributions” under that plan and “Matching Contributions” made before January 1, 2004 under that plan, which merged into this Plan, all as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.26     (a)        “Highly Compensated Employee” with respect to a Plan Year means, as determined under section 414(q) of the Code and the Treasury Regulations thereunder, an individual who, at any time during the Plan Year is an Employee, and who:

(1)        during the Plan Year or the preceding twelve month period, was at any time a Five-Percent Owner; or

(2)        received Section 415 Compensation from the Employer in excess of $120,000 (as adjusted pursuant to section 414(q)(1) of the Code) during the twelve month period preceding the Plan Year.

 

2-6


(b)        The determination of Highly Compensated Employees shall be made in accordance with the following:

(1)        For purposes of determining the number of Employees under (a)(2), the Employees described in section 414(q)(5) of the Code shall be disregarded.

(2)        The Employer shall be treated as including any other entities required to be aggregated under section 414 of the Code.

2.27     “Hour of Service” means an hour for which an individual is paid, or entitled to payment, for work for the Employer or an Affiliate.

2.28     “Military Service” means, with respect to a person employed immediately prior thereto by the Employer, the period of time that he spends in the Armed Forces of the United States, or its equivalent recognized pursuant to federal law, provided he returns to the service of the Employer within such period, if any, as is then provided by law for the protection of his re-employment rights, and provided he has not been employed elsewhere before returning to work for the Employer.

2.29     “Non-highly Compensated Employee” means an individual who is not a Highly Compensated Employee and who, at any time during the Plan Year, is an Employee.

2.30     “Normal Retirement Age” means the date on which a Participant has both reached age 65 and completed 5 Vesting Years; provided, however, a Participant’s Normal Retirement Age shall in no event be later than the later of the time a Participant attains age 65 or the 5 th anniversary of the time the Participant commenced participation in the Plan (or any Predecessor Plan).

2.31     “Ohio Company SIP Matching Contribution Account” means the separate portion of the Account of a Participant who was a participant in the Ohio Company Salary Investment Plan which is attributable to “Matching Contributions” under that Plan, which merged into this Plan, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.32     “Old Kent After-Tax Account” means the separate portion of the Account of a Participant who was a participant in the Old Kent Thrift Plan which is attributable to his “Regular Account” under the Old Kent Thrift Plan, which merged into this Plan, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.33     “Old Kent Matching Account” means the separate portion of the Account of a Participant who was a participant in the Old Kent Thrift Plan which is attributable to his “Matching Account” under the Old Kent Thrift Plan, which merged into this Plan, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

 

2-7


2.34     “Old Kent Pre-Tax Account” means the separate portion of the Account of a Participant who was a participant in the Old Kent Thrift Plan which is attributable to his “Thrift Plus Account” under the Old Kent Thrift Plan, which merged into this Plan, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.35     “Old Kent Rollover/Transfer Account” means the separate portion of the Account of a Participant who was a participant in the Old Kent Thrift Plan which is attributable to his “Rollover/Transfer Account” under the Old Kent Thrift Plan, which merged into this Plan, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.36     “Old Plan” means The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Profit Sharing Plan (now known as the Fifth Third Bancorp 401(k) Savings Plan) as it existed prior to the Effective Date.

2.37     “Participant” means an Employee who satisfies the eligibility requirements of Article 3 and also means a former Employee who has an Account under the Plan. To the extent provided in an applicable Appendix, the term also includes an individual with an Account under the Plan by reason of a plan merger or transfer identified in such Appendix. As provided in an applicable Appendix, certain individuals may be excluded from the term “Participant.”

2.38     “Plan” means the Fifth Third Bancorp 401(k) Savings Plan (fka The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Profit Sharing Plan) as set forth in this document, including all Appendices, and, if amended at any time, then as so amended.

2.39     “Plan Assets” means the assets of the Plan at the particular time applicable.

2.40     “Plan Year” means the calendar year.

2.41     “Post-2014 Employer Matching Account” means the separate portion of each Participant’s Account which reflects the Employer’s contributions under Section 4.5 (and the forfeitures allocated thereto), as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.42     “Post-2006 Profit Sharing Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Account which reflects the Employer’s contributions under Section 4.2 (and forfeitures allocated thereto) for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2006, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.43      “Predecessor Plan” means a plan identified as such in an Appendix to this Plan.

2.44     “Pre-Tax 401(k) Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account which reflects all amounts credited thereto except for designated Roth contributions under Section 4.1(a)(3) (and earnings on such designated Roth contributions), as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.45     “Pre-2004 Employer Contribution Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Account which reflects the Employer’s contributions of “Profit Sharing Allocations” for Plan Years after 1996 and before 2004 under the Old Plan, and the Employer’s matching contributions under Section 4.4 for Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2004, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

 

2-8


2.46     “Pre-2015 Employer Matching Account” means the separate portion of each Participant’s Account which reflects the Employer’s contributions under Section 4.4 (and the forfeitures allocated thereto), for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2003 and before January 1, 2015, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.47     “Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Account which reflects: (a) the Employer’s contributions for Plan Years before 1997 of that portion of each Participant’s “Profit Sharing Allocation” which exceeded his “Elective Percentage” (as those terms were defined in the Old Plan) and forfeitures allocated thereto; and (b) for a Participant who was a participant in a Predecessor Plan, amounts which transferred or merged into this subaccount from a Predecessor Plan; all as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.48     “Qualified Non-Elective Contribution Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Account which reflects: (a) qualified nonelective contributions made under the applicable terms of the Old Plan (which were taken into account in actual deferral percentage or actual contribution percentage testing under the Old Plan); and (b) for a Participant who was a participant in the First Charter Corporation Retirement Savings Plan, amounts attributable to his “Bank Savings Subaccount” under that plan, which merged into this Plan; all as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.49     “Reemployment Commencement Date” means the first day, after a Severance, on which an individual performs an Hour of Service.

2.50     “Rollover Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Account which reflects his rollover contributions under Section 4.10, and any rollover contributions transferred or merged into this Plan from a Predecessor Plan (other than the Old Kent Thrift Plan), as adjusted in accordance with Article 7. In order to separately account for any designated Roth contributions (including any earnings on such contributions) accepted in a rollover contribution, a Participant’s Rollover Account may include the following subaccounts:

(a)        Traditional Rollover Account; and

(b)        Roth Rollover Account.

2.51     “Roth 401(k) Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account which reflects designated Roth contributions credited thereto under Section 4.1(a)(3), as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.52     “Roth Rollover Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Rollover Account which reflects designated Roth contributions (including earnings on such contributions) accepted in a rollover contribution under Section 4.10(b), as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.53     “Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Account which reflects: (a) contributions on behalf of such Participant under Section 4.1; (b) contributions of the “Elective Percentage” of his “Profit Sharing Allocation” (as those terms were defined in the Old Plan) for Plan Years before 1997; and (c) any section 401(k) elective deferrals transferred or merged into this Plan from a Predecessor Plan (other than the Old Kent Thrift

 

2-9


Plan); all as adjusted in accordance with Article 7. In order to separately account for any designated Roth contributions under Section 4.1(a)(3), a Participant’s Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account may include the following subaccounts:

(a)        Pre-Tax 401(k) Account; and

(b)        Roth 401(k) Account.

2.54      (a)        “Service” means the sum of the following periods (whether or not continuous), provided that no period of time shall be counted more than once:

(1)        each period beginning on an individual’s Employment Commencement Date or Reemployment Commencement Date and ending with his next Severance;

(2)        any separation from the service of the Employer of 12 months or less;

(3)        Military Service;

(4)        service taken into account for a particular Participant under a Predecessor Plan. Except as otherwise provided in an Appendix, the following transition rules shall apply with respect to any Participant who has been covered under a Predecessor Plan under which service has been computed on the basis of hours of service during 12-month computation periods. Such an individual shall receive credit for a period of service consisting of:

(A)       the number of years of service credited to him before the computation period (determined under the Predecessor Plan) in which the Plan is adopted, plus

(B)       the greater of

(i)        the period of service that would be credited to him under the elapsed time method under (a) above for his service during the entire computation period in which the adoption occurs or

(ii)       service taken into account under the computation periods method as of the date of the adoption.

In addition, the individual shall receive credit for service subsequent to the adoption commencing on the day after the last day of the vesting computation period in which the adoption occurs.

(5)        as provided in an applicable Appendix, service (not otherwise taken into account under a Predecessor Plan) for a predecessor employer named in such Appendix, taken into account as provided in such Appendix.

(b)        Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, in determining an Employee’s Service, he shall be entitled to such credit, if any, as is required by federal law.

 

2-10


2.55     “Severance” means, an absence from the employment of the Employer and all Affiliates, beginning on the earliest of death, quit, discharge, retirement or the first anniversary of any other absence (with or without pay).

2.56     “Surviving Spouse” means a Participant’s surviving spouse except to the extent that a former spouse is treated as such, for purposes of the Plan, under a qualified domestic relations order as described in section 414(p) of the Code.

2.57     “2004-2006 Profit Sharing Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Account which reflects the Employer’s contributions under Section 4.2 (and forfeitures allocated thereto) for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2003 and before January 1, 2007, as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.58     “Traditional Rollover Account” means the separate portion of a Participant’s Rollover Account which reflects amounts accepted in a rollover contribution under Section 4.10(a) (and which are not attributable to designated Roth contributions), as adjusted in accordance with Article 7.

2.59     “Trustee” means JPMorgan Chase Bank, National Association (effective September 13, 2010) and its successors and assigns in trust.

2.60     “Vesting Service” means an individual’s Service.

2.61     “Vesting Years” mean the number of whole years of a Participant’s Vesting Service, whether or not such Vesting Service was completed continuously. Nonsuccessive periods of Vesting Service (whether or not consecutive) shall be aggregated on the basis that 365 days of Vesting Service equal a whole Vesting Year.

 

2-11


ARTICLE 3

ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION

3.1         Eligibility and Participation .

(a)         For Profit Sharing Contributions and Rollovers.    Each Employee shall become a Participant as of the date on which he has credit for at least one Hour of Service.

(b)         For 401(k) Contributions.     Notwithstanding (a) above, an Employee shall be eligible to make 401(k) contributions under Section 4.1 only on and after the first pay date following his completion of 30 days of Eligibility Service. If an Employee terminates employment after completing 30 days of Eligibility Service and is later re-employed as an Employee, he shall be eligible for such contributions beginning with the first pay date after such re-employment provided he still has credit for 30 days of Eligibility Service.

(c)         Safe Harbor Matching Contributions .    Notwithstanding (a) or (b) above, an Employee shall be eligible to receive post-2014 Employer matching contributions under Section 4.5 as follows:

(1)        For Employees with an Employment Commencement Date or Reemployment Commencement Date on or after January 1, 2015, only beginning with the pay period in which falls his completion of 180 days of Eligibility Service. If an Employee terminates employment after completing 180 days of Eligibility Service and is later re-employed as an Employee, he shall be eligible for such contributions immediately provided he still has credit for 180 days of Eligibility Service.

(2)        For Employees with an Employment Commencement Date or Reemployment Commencement Date before January 1, 2015 and whose employment with an Employer continues uninterrupted from such date through January 1, 2015, beginning with the first pay date following his completion of at least 30 days of Eligibility Service. For avoidance of doubt, such an Employee who has at least 30 days of Eligibility Service (including Eligibility Service before 2015) before the first pay date in 2015, shall be eligible to receive the safe harbor matching contributions effective with that first pay date. If such an Employee, after having received credit for at least 30 days of Eligibility Service, terminates employment after January 1, 2015 and is later re-employed, he shall be eligible for such contributions only as provided in (1) above.

3.2         Participants Prior to Effective Date .      Anything in Section 3.1 to the contrary notwithstanding, a person who was a participant in the Old Plan immediately prior to the Effective Date shall be a Participant in the Plan on the Effective Date, but shall be eligible for contributions only as provided in Section 3.1.

3.3         Reemployment of Former Participant .      If a former Participant is reemployed by the Employer, then, provided that he meets the requirements of Section 3.1, he shall become a Participant again as of the date of such reemployment.

 

3-1


3.4         Ineligible Employees .

(a)         Ineligible Class of Employees .   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Article 3 or in Article 4, during the time that an Employee falls within one or more of the following classes of Employees, he shall not be eligible to participate in the Plan, or to make or receive allocations of contributions or forfeitures under the Plan:

(1)        a nonresident alien who is not paid through the Employer’s primary United States payroll system and who receives no earned income from the Employer which constitutes United States source income, or who does receive such income if all of such income is exempt from United States income tax under an applicable income tax convention; or

(2)        an Employee who is not paid through the Employer’s primary United States payroll system and whose position is located primarily (as determined by the Employer) outside the United States.

(b)         Change of Employee Classification .   In the event an Employee who is a member of an ineligible class, as described in (a) above has a change in employment status so that he is no longer a member of such an ineligible class, he shall be eligible to participate in the Plan and to make or receive allocations, contributions or forfeitures under the Plan immediately provided he meets the requirements of Section 3.1.

 

3-2


ARTICLE 4

CONTRIBUTIONS AND THEIR ALLOCATION

4.1         Compensation Reduction Contributions .

(a)         Compensation Reduction .

(1)         401(k) Contributions .      Each Participant who has met the eligibility requirements of Section 3.1(b) may make Section 401(k) contributions by entering into a compensation reduction agreement with his Employer whereby he authorizes his Employer to reduce his Deferrable Compensation or any part thereof, by such percentage or dollar amount prospectively as he shall specify. The Administrator may from time to time establish rules and procedures with respect to compensation reduction contributions hereunder. Such rules and procedures may include, but shall not be limited to, rules pertaining to default elections, rules providing for the continuation of elections from one year to the next, procedures allowing separate elections for different types of Deferrable Compensation (such as variable compensation), rules restricting the amount by which compensation may be reduced, rules restricting such contributions to Participants whose pay is paid through the Fifth Third payroll system, and rules respecting the time for filing forms. In accordance with such rules and procedures as the Administrator deems appropriate, the Employer may treat a Participant as having made a compensation reduction election unless and until a Participant affirmatively elects to revoke or revise such deemed compensation reduction election. A compensation reduction agreement can be made only with respect to Deferrable Compensation which also constitutes “compensation” within the meaning of section 415(c)(3) of the Code and section 1.415(c)-2 of the Treasury Regulations.

(2)         Catch-Up Contributions .  Each “Catch-Up Eligible Participant,” as defined below, shall be eligible to make catch-up contributions in accordance with, and subject to the limitations of, section 414(v) of the Code. Such catch-up contributions shall not be taken into account for purposes of the provisions of the Plan implementing the required limitations of sections 402(g) and 415 of the Code. The Plan shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the provisions of the Plan implementing the requirements of section 401(k)(3), 401(k)(11), 401(k)(12), 410(b), or 416 of the Code, as applicable, by reason of the making of such catch-up contributions. “Catch-Up Eligible Participant” means a Participant who is age 50 or older and for this purpose a Participant who is projected to attain age 50 before the end of a calendar year is deemed to be age 50 as of January 1 of such year.

Catch-up contributions shall be eligible for post-2014 Employer matching contributions under Section 4.5.

(3)         Designated Roth Contributions .   A Participant may irrevocably designate at the time of his Section 401(k) compensation reduction election, part or all of his Section 401(k) contributions hereunder (including catch-up contributions under (2) above) as “designated Roth contributions.” Any amounts so designated shall be includible in the Participant’s income at the time the Employee would have received the amount in cash if he had not made the deferral

 

4-1


election (instead of being excluded from income as is the case with Section 401(k) contributions not so designated). In the absence of such a designation, the default rule shall be that such contributions shall be treated as pre-tax (non-Roth) elective contributions.

The Administrator shall provide separate sub-accounting within a Participant’s Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account so as to track designated Roth contributions (and investment earnings and losses thereon) separately from Section 401(k) contributions not so designated. Designated Roth contributions shall be credited to the Participant’s Roth 401(k) Account (a subaccount of the Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account) and Section 401(k) contributions which are not designated Roth contributions shall be credited to the Participant’s Pre-Tax 401(k) Account. For all purposes of the Plan, designated Roth contributions shall be treated the same as Section 401(k) contributions not so designated.

In any withdrawal, distribution (including corrective distributions), plan loans or other relevant circumstances where a Participant has amounts in both his Roth 401(k) Account and Pre-Tax 401(k) Account, the Administrator in its discretion shall determine which amounts are affected.

The Administrator shall have all power necessary or appropriate to administer the Roth contribution feature of this Plan as the Administrator deems appropriate, provided that a Participant who is an eligible Employee must be given an effective opportunity to make (or change) an election to make designated Roth contributions at least once during each Plan Year.

(b)         Contribution to the Plan .   Subject to the limitations under Article 5 and Section 4.3, the Employer shall so reduce the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation and shall contribute to the Plan on behalf of each such Participant an amount equal to the reduction in the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation. Such contribution shall be credited to the Participant’s Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account (the Roth 401(k) Account in the case of designated Roth contributions and the Pre-Tax 401(k) Account otherwise). Such contributions for a Plan Year shall be made as soon as the Employer can reasonably segregate such amounts, but not later than the 15 th business day of the month following the month in which such amounts would have otherwise been payable to the Participant.

4.2         Profit Sharing Contributions .

(a)         General .    The Board of Directors of Fifth Third Bancorp shall determine the amount (if any) to be contributed to the Plan for allocation under this Section 4.2, subject to Article 5 and this Article 4.

(b)         Allocation Among Employers .  Each Employer shall contribute under the Plan the total contribution allocable to its Eligible Participants.

(c)         Participants Entitled to Receive an Allocation of Employer Contribution .    A Participant shall be an “Eligible Participant” and shall be entitled to receive an allocation of the Employer contribution to the Plan under (a) above for a Plan Year if he:

(1)        is in the employment of an Employer on the last day of such Plan Year;

 

4-2


(2)        died during such Plan Year and prior to the termination of his employment;

(3)        retired on or after his reaching Normal Retirement Age during such Plan Year;

(4)        retired on or after his reaching Early Retirement Age during such Plan Year;

(5)        incurred a Disability and retired as a result thereof during such Plan Year; or

(6)        is on leave of absence at the close of such Plan Year, if he received compensation from an Employer during such Plan Year.

(d)         Allocation Formula .    Subject to the limitations of Article 5, as of the last day of a Plan Year, there shall be allocated to the Post-2006 Profit Sharing Account of each Participant qualified under (c) above to receive such an allocation, that portion of the Employer’s contribution under (a) above for such Plan Year (if any) that bears the same ratio to the total amount of such contribution as the Annual Compensation of such Participant for such Plan Year bears to the total amount of the Annual Compensation for all such Participants for such Plan Year. Contributions under this Section for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2003 and before January 1, 2007 were allocated to Participants’ 2004-2006 Profit Sharing Accounts.

4.3         Limitation on 401(k) Contributions .

(a)         Elimination of ADP Testing Generally .

(1)         General .    Effective January 1, 2015, the ADP testing requirements are deemed satisfied by reason of the Plan’s satisfaction of the safe harbor requirements of section 401(k)(12) of the Code. However, this Plan extends eligibility to make 401(k) contributions to Employees after 30 days of Eligibility Service (Section 3.1(b)) but does not provide the safe harbor matching contributions to such Employees until they have satisfied the minimum service requirements in Section 3.1(c). As such, the ADP testing requirements are theoretically applicable to the Employees who have not met the statutory minimum age or service requirements. Therefore, the ADP provisions remain in the Plan but solely for such group, as provided in (2) below.

(2)         Special Rules for Early Participation .  For testing purposes, the Plan shall be treated as two separate plans: one benefiting the Employees who have satisfied the lower minimum age and service conditions of the Plan but not the greatest such conditions permitted under section 410(a) of the Code (hereinafter “Component Plan A”); and one benefiting Employees who have satisfied the greatest such conditions permitted under section 410(a) of the Code (hereinafter “Component Plan B”). The testing in this Section 4.3 shall be applied as follows:

The testing shall be applied solely to Component Plan A because Component Plan B satisfies the safe harbor requirements of section 401(k)(12) so as to eliminate the need for such testing. In this regard, the Actual Deferral Percentages and Actual Contribution Percentages shall be determined separately for Component Plan A.

 

4-3


This provision shall be administered in accordance with rules and regulations promulgated by the Secretary of Treasury or its delegate.

(b)         Current Year Testing .  For Component Plan A, the Actual Deferral Percentage for any Plan Year for Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees shall not exceed the greater of:

(1)        1.25 times the Actual Deferral Percentage for the current Plan Year for all the Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employees or

(2)        2 times the Actual Deferral Percentage for the current Plan Year for the Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employees, provided that the Actual Deferral Percentage for the Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees shall not exceed the Actual Deferral Percentage for the current Plan Year for Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employees by more than 2 percentage points.

(c)         Adjusted $18.000 Annual Limit .    In no event shall the amount of a Participant’s compensation reduction under Section 4.1(a)(1) (and under all other plans, contracts or arrangements of the Employer which allow elective deferrals within the meaning of section 402(g)(3) of the Code) during a calendar year exceed the dollar limitation contained in section 402(g) of the Code in effect for the taxable year, except to the extent permitted in section 4.1(a)(2) and section 414(v) of the Code.

4.4         Pre-2015 Employer Matching Contributions to Pre-2015 Employer Matching Accounts .  Effective for Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 2015, the provisions of this Section 4.4 provide for matching contributions to eligible Participants’ Pre-2015 Employer Matching Accounts. Effective for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2015, this Section 4.4 shall no longer apply, but the safe harbor matching contribution provisions of Section 4.5 shall apply.

(a)         Pre-2015 Pay Period Match .  The Employer shall make matching contributions to the Pre-2015 Employer Matching Accounts of each Participant who has compensation reduction contributions made on his behalf under Section 4.1 for any pay period. The amount of such matching contributions shall be calculated by reference to so much of the Participant’s compensation reduction contributions under Section 4.1 for such pay period as do not exceed four percent (4%) of the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation otherwise payable in such pay period.

The Employer matching contribution shall equal one hundred percent (100%) of so much of the Participant’s compensation reduction contributions under Section 4.1 for such pay period as do not exceed four percent (4%) of the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation otherwise payable in such pay period.

In the event the rate of matching contribution (determined after corrective distribution of elective deferrals under sections 401(k) or (m) or 402(g) of the Code) is determined by the Administrator to be discriminatory in favor of one or more Highly Compensated Employees, the Administrator

 

4-4


shall forfeit that part of such matching contribution (as adjusted in accordance with Article 7) as is necessary to make such rate nondiscriminatory (and in such a case the contributions shall be disregarded under the Plan’s provisions relative to sections 401(k)(3) and 401(m)(2) of the Code).

(b)         Pre-2015 Plan Year Match .

(1)         General .    The Employer shall make matching contributions to the Pre-2015 Employer Matching Accounts of Participants eligible under (2) below to receive such match in the amount (if any) determined under (3) below.

(2)         Participants Eligible for Plan Year Match .  A Participant shall be eligible for the Plan Year match if he meets all of the following:

(A)       he is an Eligible Participant (as defined in Section 4.2(c)) for the Plan Year;

(B)       he made Section 401(k) contributions during the Plan Year equal to the limit in section 402(g) of the Code (and Section 4.3(c) of the Plan); and

(C)       he made Section 401(k) contributions in the aggregate for the Plan Year of at least four percent (4%) of his Deferrable Compensation payable during the Plan Year (excluding Deferrable Compensation paid prior to the time the Participant was eligible under Section 3.1(b)) but received pay period matching contributions under (a) above in the aggregate for the Plan Year of less than four percent (4%) of the Deferrable Compensation payable during the Plan Year (excluding Deferrable Compensation paid prior to the time the Participant was eligible under Section 3.1(b)).

(3)         Amount of Plan Year Match .   The amount of such matching contributions shall be calculated by reference to so much of the Participant’s Section 401(k) contributions for the Plan Year as do not exceed four percent (4%) of the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation otherwise payable during the Plan Year (excluding Deferrable Compensation paid prior to the time the Participant was eligible under Section 3.1(b)).

The Plan Year match (if any) shall equal one hundred percent (100%) of so much of the Participant’s Section 401(k) contributions for the Plan Year as do not exceed four percent (4%) of the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation otherwise payable during the Plan Year from and after the time he became eligible under Section 3.1(b), reduced by the aggregate amount of the pay period matching contributions allocable to the Participant for pay periods in the Plan Year under Section 4.4(a) above.

In the event the rate of matching contribution (determined after corrective distribution of elective deferrals under section 401(k) or (m) or 402(g) of the Code) is determined by the Administrator to be discriminatory in favor of one or more Highly Compensated Employees, the Administrator shall forfeit that part of such matching contribution (as adjusted in accordance with Article 7) as is necessary to make such rate nondiscriminatory.

(c)         Time for Matches .   Contributions under this Section 4.4 for a Plan Year shall be made no later than the end of the Plan Year following the Plan Year to which the contributions relate (or such later time as may be permitted by Treasury Regulations).

 

4-5


4.5         Employer Contributions to Post-2014 Employer Matching Accounts .

(a)         General .    For Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2015, the Employer shall make matching contributions to the Post-2014 Employer Matching Accounts of eligible Participants in accordance with this Section 4.5. Only those compensation deferrals made after a Participant becomes eligible for the post-2014 Employer matching contributions under Section 3.1(c) shall be eligible to be matched under this Section 4.5.

For each Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 2015, the Employer shall provide eligible Participants a notice describing the eligible Participant’s rights and obligations under the Plan. The notice shall include a description of the formula used for determining safe harbor matching contributions. The notice shall also: (i) describe any other employer contributions available under the Plan and the requirements that must be satisfied to receive an allocation of such Employer Contributions; (ii) state the type and amount of compensation that may be deferred under the Plan as 401(k) contributions; (iii) indicate how to make a cash or deferred election under the Plan and the periods in which such elections may be made or changed; and (iv) describe the withdrawal and vesting provisions applicable to contributions under the Plan. To the extent permitted under Treasury regulations or other guidance, in lieu of including such descriptions in the notice, the descriptions required by this paragraph may be provided by cross-references to the relevant section(s) of an up to date summary plan description or as otherwise permitted under such regulations or other guidance.

The notice shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the average eligible Participant. The Employer shall provide such notice within 1 of the following periods, whichever is applicable:

(1)        for an eligible Participants who is an eligible Participant 90 days before the beginning of the Plan Year, within the period beginning 90 days and ending 30 days before the beginning of the Plan Year, or

(2)        for an employee who becomes an eligible Participant after that date, within the period beginning 90 days before the date he becomes an eligible Participant and ending on the date such employee becomes an eligible Participant.

Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, an eligible Participant shall have a reasonable period (not fewer than 30 days) following receipt of such notice in which to make or amend his election to have his Employer make 401(k) contributions to the Plan on his behalf.

(b)         Pay Period Match .   The Employer shall make matching contributions to the Post- 2014 Employer Matching Accounts of each eligible Participant who has Section 401(k) compensation reduction contributions made on his behalf under Section 4.1 for any pay period or with respect to any payment of Deferrable Compensation after the Participant has become eligible under Section 3.1(c). The amount of the matching contribution for any such pay period or with respect to any such payment shall be equal to:

(1)        one hundred fifty percent (150%) of so much of the Participant’s compensation reduction contributions as do not exceed two percent (2%) of the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation for such period or in such payment, and

(2)        one hundred percent (100%) of so much of the Participant’s compensation reduction contributions under Section 4.1, in excess of two percent (2%) but not in excess of six percent (6%) of the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation for such period or in such payment.

 

4-6


(c)         Plan Year True-Up Match .

(1)         Participants Eligible for Plan Year True-Up Match .  A Participant shall be eligible for the Plan Year true-up match under this Section 4.5(c) only if he meets the following:

(A)      he made compensation reduction contributions during the Plan Year, after becoming eligible for the post-2014 Employer matching contributions under Section 3.1(c); and

(B)      some of those compensation reduction contributions, up to six percent (6%) of the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation for the Plan Year but counting only such Deferrable Compensation payable after the Participant became eligible for the post-2014 Employer matching contributions under Section 3.1(c), were not matched under (b) above.

(2)         Amount of Plan Year Match .  The amount of the Plan Year true-up match shall be calculated by reference to so much of the Participant’s compensation reduction contributions for the Plan Year (but excluding any such contributions made before the Participant was eligible for the safe harbor match under Section 3.1(c)) as do not exceed six percent (6%) of the Participant’s Deferrable Compensation otherwise payable during the Plan Year (excluding Deferrable Compensation paid prior to the time the Participant was eligible under Section 3.1(c)).

The Plan Year true-up match (if any) shall equal—

(A)        (i)        one hundred fifty percent (150%) of such compensation reduction contributions as do not exceed two percent (2%) of such Deferrable Compensation, plus

 (ii)       one hundred percent (100%) of such compensation reduction contributions in excess of two percent (2%) but not in excess of six percent (6%) of such Deferrable Compensation; reduced by

(B)        the aggregate amount of the matching contributions under (b) above allocable to the Participant for the Plan Year.

(d)         Time for Matches .  Contributions under this Section 4.5 for a Plan Year shall be made no later than the end of the Plan Year following the Plan Year to which the contributions relate.

 

4-7


4.6         Voluntary After-Tax Participant Contributions Before 2011 .  For Plan Years before 2011, each Participant who had met the applicable eligibility requirements was eligible to make voluntary after-tax contributions in cash to the Plan. A Participant’s voluntary after-tax contributions are reflected in his After-Tax Account.

Effective for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2011, no further contributions of this type shall be permitted under the Plan.

4.7         Limitation on Employer Matching Contributions .

(a)         Elimination of ACP Testing Generally .

(1)         General .    Effective January 1, 2015, the ACP testing requirements are deemed satisfied by reason of the Plan’s satisfaction of the safe harbor requirements of sections 401(k)(12) and (m)(11) of the Code. However, this Plan extends eligibility to make 401(k) contributions to Employees after 30 days of Eligibility Service (Section 3.1(b)) but does not provide the safe harbor matching contributions to such Employees until they have satisfied the minimum service requirements in Section 3.1(c). As such, the ACP testing requirements are theoretically applicable to the Employees who have not met the statutory minimum age or service requirements. Nevertheless, the ACP provisions remain in the Plan solely for such group, as provided in (2) below.

(2)         Special Rules for Early Participation .   For testing purposes, the Plan shall be treated as two separate plans: one benefiting the Employees who have satisfied the lower minimum age and service conditions of the Plan but not the greatest such conditions permitted under section 410(a) of the Code (hereinafter “Component Plan A”); and one benefiting Employees who have satisfied the greatest such conditions permitted under section 410(a) of the Code (hereinafter “Component Plan B”). The testing in this Section 4.7 shall be applied as follows:

The testing shall be applied solely to Component Plan A because Component Plan B satisfies the safe harbor requirements of sections 401(k)(12) and (m) (11) of the Code so as to eliminate the need for such testing. In this regard, the Actual Deferral Percentages and Actual Contribution Percentages shall be determined separately for Component Plan A.

The provision shall be administered in accordance with rules and regulations promulgated by the Secretary of Treasury or its delegate,

(b)         Current Year Testing .      For Component Plan A, the Actual Contribution Percentage for any Plan Year for Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees shall not exceed the greater of:

(1)        1.25 times the Actual Contribution Percentage for the current Plan Year for Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employees; or

(2)        2 times the Actual Contribution Percentage for the current Plan Year for Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employees provided that the Actual Contribution Percentage for the Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees shall not exceed the Actual Contribution Percentage for the current Plan Year for Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employees by more than 2 percentage points.

 

4-8


4.8         Treatment of Excess Contributions .

(a)         Excess Elective Deferrals .

(1)         Participant Election .    If amounts are includible in a Participant’s gross income under section 402(g) of the Code for a taxable year of the Participant, the Participant may elect to receive a distribution from his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account in an amount up to the sum (or difference) of:

(A)       the lesser of:

(i)        the amount includible in his gross income under section 402(g) of the Code for the taxable year; or

(ii)       the sum of his compensation reduction under Section 4.1(a) for the taxable year plus; (or minus)

(B)       the income (or loss) allocable to the amount determined under (A) through the end of such taxable year (i.e., excluding so-called gap period earnings) determined in accordance with Treasury Regulations.

(2)         Procedure .    An election under (1) above shall be made in writing, signed by the Participant, on such form as the Administrator shall direct and shall be effective only if received by the Administrator no later than the first April 1st following the close of the Participant’s taxable year to which the election relates. A Participant who has exceeded the limits of Section 4.3(c) shall be deemed to have made an election hereunder to the extent of such excess.

(3)         Distribution .      Any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, the amount determined under (1) if properly elected under (2) shall be paid to the Participant as a lump sum no later than the first April 15th following the close of the Participant’s taxable year to which the election relates.

(4)         Effect on Other Provisions .  Except to the extent provided by the Secretary of the Treasury or his delegate, distributions hereunder shall be taken into account under Sections 4.3(b) and 4.7.

(b)         Excess Section 401(k) Deferrals .

(1)         Excess Actual Deferral Percentage .  In the case of Component Plan A, as referred to in Section 4.3(b), if the Actual Deferral Percentage for a Plan Year for the Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees exceeds the maximum amount allowable under Section 4.3(b), then the Administrator shall determine the amount to be distributed, and the Highly Compensated Employees subject to receiving a distribution, in accordance with the Code and applicable Treasury Regulations.

 

4-9


(2)         Distribution .      Any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, the Administrator shall distribute the amount determined under (1) above to each Highly Compensated Employee determined under (1) above as a lump sum cash distribution no later than the last day of the following Plan Year; provided, however, the Employer shall be subject to a 10% excise tax under section 4979 of the Code if the distributions (or forfeitures) are not made before the close of the first 2  1 2 months of such following Plan Year. The income (or loss) allocable to the amount determined under (1) above through the end of the Plan Year of the excess contributions (i.e., excluding so-called gap period earnings) determined by the Administrator in accordance with applicable Treasury Regulation, shall also be distributed.

(3)         Effect on Other Provisions .  If distributions are made in accordance with this Section 4.8(b) with respect to a Plan Year, then the limitations of Section 4.3(b) shall be deemed satisfied for the Plan Year. Except to the extent provided by the Secretary of Treasury, distributions hereunder shall be taken into account under Article 5.

(c)         Excess Actual Contribution Percentage .

(1)         Excess Actual Contribution Percentage .  In the case of Component Plan A, as referred to in Section 4.7(b), if the Actual Contribution Percentage for a Plan Year for the Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees exceeds the maximum amount allowable under Section 4.7 (after application of (a) and (b) above), then the Administrator shall determine the amount to be distributed (or, if forfeitable, forfeited) (“Excess Aggregate Contributions”) in accordance with the Code and applicable Treasury Regulations and the following. “Excess Aggregate Contributions” shall mean, with respect to any Plan Year, the excess of:

(A)       The aggregate amount of contributions actually taken into account in computing the Actual Contribution Percentage of Highly Compensated Employees for such Plan Year, over

(B)       The maximum amount of such contributions permitted by the Actual Contribution Percentage test (determined by hypothetically reducing contributions made on behalf of Highly Compensated Employees in order of the ratios calculated separately for each such Participant (under Section 2.3) beginning with the highest of such percentages).

(2)         Required Distributees and Forfeitures .    Excess Aggregate Contributions are allocated to the Highly Compensated Employees with the largest amounts of contributions taken into account in calculating the Actual Contribution Percentage test for the year in which the excess arose, beginning with the Highly Compensated Employee with the largest amount of such contributions and continuing in descending order until all the Excess Aggregate Contributions have been allocated. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the “largest amount” is determined after distribution (or forfeiture) of any Excess Aggregate Contributions.

(3)         Distribution and Forfeiture .    The Administrator shall distribute to (or forfeit from in the case of a forfeitable amount) each Highly Compensated Employee specified in (2) above from his Account the sum (or difference) of:

(A)       the amount (if any) determined under (2) above; plus (or minus)

(B)       the income (or loss) allocable to the amount determined under (A) through the end of the Plan Year of the Excess Aggregate Contributions (i.e., excluding so-called gap period earnings) determined by the Administrator in accordance with applicable Treasury Regulations earnings).

 

4-10


Any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, the Administrator shall distribute (or forfeit, as applicable) the amount so determined as a lump sum no later than the last day of the following Plan Year; provided, however, the Employer shall be subject to a 10% excise tax under section 4979 of the Code if the distributions (or forfeitures) are not made before the close of the first 2  1 2 months of such following Plan Year. Any forfeitures in this Section 4.8(c) may not be allocated to Participants who receive a distribution or incur a forfeiture under this Section 4.8.

(4)         Effect on Other Provisions .  If distributions are made in accordance with this Section 4.8 with respect to a Plan Year, then the limitations of Section 4.7 shall be deemed satisfied for the Plan Year. Except to the extent provided by the Secretary of the Treasury, distributions hereunder shall be taken into account under Article 5.

4.9         Return of Employer Contributions .

(a)         Mistake of Fact .  If a contribution by an Employer to the Plan is made by reason of a mistake of fact, then, subject to (c) below, such contribution may be returned to the contributing Employer within 1 year after the payment of such contribution.

(b)         Deductibility .    Employer contributions to the Plan are conditioned upon the deductibility of such contributions under section 404 of the Code, and, subject to (c) below, such contributions (to the extent disallowed) may be returned to the contributing Employer within 1 year after the disallowance of the deduction.

(c)         Limitation on Return .  The amount of the contribution which may be returned to an Employer under paragraph (a) or (b) above shall be limited to the excess of the amount contributed over the amount that would have been contributed had there not occurred a mistake of fact or a mistake in determining the deduction. Earnings attributable to such excess may not be returned to an Employer, but losses attributable thereto must reduce the amount to be so returned. Furthermore, the amount of the contribution which may be returned shall be limited so as not to cause the balance to the credit of a Participant’s Account to be reduced to less than the balance which would have been credited to his Account had such contribution not been made.

4.10      Rollover Contributions .

(a)         Traditional Rollovers .    A Participant, while in the employ of the Employer, may contribute to the Plan money and/or other property acceptable to the Trustee that qualifies for such a rollover under the provisions of section 402(c) or 403(a)(4) of the Code or that qualifies as a rollover contribution under section 408(d)(3) of the Code; provided however, no amounts constituting accumulated deductible employee contributions, as defined in section 72(o)(5) of the Code, after-tax employee contributions or traditional Individual Retirement Account (IRA) contributions may be so contributed. Any rollover contribution shall be credited to such Participant’s Traditional Rollover Account as soon as administratively feasible following the Trustee’s receipt thereof. If any amount received as a rollover contribution is determined not to qualify for a rollover, then such amount (adjusted for any gain or loss) shall be returned to the Participant as soon as practical.

 

4-11


(b)         Roth Rollover .    The Administrator may accept a direct rollover from a Roth elective deferral account under an applicable retirement plan described in section 402A(e)(1) of the Code, but only if such rollover meets the applicable requirements of (a) above and section 402(c) of the Code. The Administrator shall provide separate sub-accounting within a Participant’s Rollover Account so as to track designated Roth contributions (and investment earnings and losses thereon) separately from non-Roth rollover contributions. Rollovers of designated Roth contributions (and earnings on such contributions) shall be credited to the Participant’s Roth Rollover Account, as soon as administratively feasible following the Trustee’s receipt thereof.

(c)         Administration .    In any withdrawal, distribution, plan loans or other relevant circumstances where a Participant has amounts in both a Traditional Rollover Account and a Roth Rollover Account, the Administrator in its discretion shall determine which amounts are affected.

 

4-12


ARTICLE 5

LIMITATIONS ON ANNUAL ADDITIONS

5.1         Definitions .  For purposes of this Article 5, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(a)        “Annual Addition” means, with respect to the Plan, any other Defined Contribution Plan in which a Participant participates or has participated, and any account described in (4) or (5) below, the sum, for the Limitation Year, of:

(1)        all employer contributions (other than amounts restored in accordance with section 411(a)(3)(D) or 411(a)(7)(C) of the Code and excluding restorative payments resulting from a fiduciary’s actions for which there is a reasonable risk of liability) allocated to his account;

(2)        all forfeitures allocated to his account;

(3)        100% of his own contributions (other than rollover contributions, repayments of loans or of amounts described in section 411(a)(7)(B) of the Code in accordance with the provisions of section 411(a)(7)(C) of the Code and repayments of amounts described in section 411(a)(3)(D) of the Code, direct transfers between qualified plans);

(4)        amounts allocated to an individual medical benefit account, as defined in section 415(1)(2) of the Code, which is part of a pension or annuity plan maintained by the Employer or an Affiliate; and

(5)        amounts derived from contributions paid or accrued in taxable years ending after such date, which are attributable to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee, as defined in section 419A(d)(3) of the Code, under a welfare benefits fund, as defined in section 419(e) of the Code, maintained by the Employer or an Affiliate.

A Participant’s Annual Addition shall include such other amounts as the Commissioner of Internal Revenue properly determines. An Annual Addition shall be deemed credited to a Participant’s account with respect to an applicable Limitation Year if it is allocated to his account under the terms of such plan as of any date within such applicable Limitation Year; provided however, such amount must be actually contributed within the lime limit prescribed by applicable Treasury Regulations.

(b)        (1)        “Defined Contribution Plan” means each of the following (whether or not terminated) maintained by the Employer or an Affiliate:

(A)       a plan that is qualified under section 401 of the Code and that provides for an individual account for each participant and for benefits based solely on the amount contributed to the participant’s account, and any income, expenses, gains and losses, and any forfeitures of accounts of other participants which may be allocated to such participant’s account;

 

5-1


(B)       a Participant’s contributions to a Defined Benefit Plan; and

(C)       contributions by the Employer or an Affiliate to a simplified employee pension (as defined in section 408(k) of the Code).

(2)        With respect to any Participant who is in control of the Employer within the meaning of section 414(b) or (c) of the Code, as modified by section 415(h) of the Code, the term “Defined Contribution Plan” includes an annuity contract described in section 403(b) of the Code.

(c)        “Limitation Year” means the calendar year or any other 12-consecutive-month period adopted pursuant to written resolution.

(d)        “Section 415 Compensation” means the total wages as defined in section 3401 of the Code and all other payments of compensation by the Employer (in the course of its trade or business) for which the Employer is required to furnish the Employee a written statement under sections 6041(d), 6051(a)(3) and 6052 of the Code determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in section 3401(a)(2) of the Code). Effective for Limitations Years beginning after December 31, 1997, the term includes any elective deferrals (as defined in section 402(g)(3) of the Code) and any amount which is contributed or deferred at the election of the Employee and which is not includible in the Employee’s gross income by reason of section 125 or 457 of the Code. Effective for Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 2000, the term also includes elective amounts that are not includible in the gross income of the Employee by reason of section 132(f)(4) of the Code. Section 415 Compensation actually paid or made available to a Participant within a Limitation Year (including, at the election of the Employer, amounts earned but not paid in a Limitation Year because of the timing of pay periods and pay days if these amounts are paid during the first few weeks of the next Limitation Year, the amounts are included on a uniform and consistent basis with respect to all similarly situated Employees and no amount is included in more than one Limitation Year) shall be used.

Except as follows, in order to be taken into account for a Limitation Year, Section 415 Compensation must be paid or treated as paid to an Employee prior to the Employee’s severance from employment with the Employer. Compensation described below does not fail to constitute Section 415 Compensation merely because it is paid after the Employee’s severance from employment with the Employer provided it is paid by the later of 2  1 2 months after the severance or the end of the Limitation Year that includes the date of the severance. Compensation is subject to this rule if (A) it is regular compensation for services during the Employee’s regular work hours or for services outside the Employee’s regular working hours (such as overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar payments, and (B) the payment would have been paid to the Employee prior to a severance from employment if the Employee had continued in employment with the Employer.

 

5-2


In addition, Section 415 Compensation shall include:

 

(A)

Payments after severance from employment for the following, provided (i) the amounts are paid by the later of 2  1 2 months after severance from employment or the end of the Limitation Year that includes the date of severance, and (ii) those amounts would have been included in the definition of Section 415 Compensation if they were paid prior to the Employee’s severance from employment with the Employer: unused accrued bona fide sick pay, vacation, or other leave if the Employee would have been able to use the leave if employment had continued or payments of nonqualified deferred compensation that are includible in gross income and that would have been paid to the Employee at the same time had his employment continued.

 

 

(B)

Post-severance pay to an individual who does not currently perform services for the Employer by reason of qualified military service (as that term is defined in section 414(u)(1) of the Code) to the extent those payments do not exceed the amounts the individual would have received had he continued to perform services for the Employer rather than entering qualified military service.

 

 

(C)

Post-severance pay to a Participant who is permanently and totally disabled, to the extent provided in applicable Treasury Regulations.

 

For any Limitation Year, only the first $265,000 (as adjusted by the Secretary of Treasury in accordance with section 401(a)(17) of the Code) of Section 415 Compensation shall be taken into account.

5.2         Limitation on Annual Addition .

(a)         Limitation .  Subject to Section 5.3, and subject to Treasury Regulations covering the aggregation during a Limitation Year of previously unaggregated plans, the Annual Addition with respect to a Participant for any Limitation Year to which section 415 of the Code applies shall not exceed the lesser of:

(1)        $53,000 (as adjusted under section 415(d) of the Code), or

(2)        100 percent of such Participant’s Section 415 Compensation for such Limitation Year.

The limitation in (2) above shall not apply with respect to any contributions for medical benefits (within the meaning of section 401(h) or 419A(f)(2) of the Code) which are otherwise treated as an Annual Addition under section 415(1) or 419A(d)(2) of the Code. In addition, the limitations shall not apply to contributions under section 414(v) of the Code.

(b)         Treatment of Excess Annual Additions .    Effective as of January 1, 2008, the correction methods for handling excess Annual Additions specified in the Old Plan no longer apply. However, similar correction methods may be available under the IRS Employee Plans Compliance Resolution System.

 

5-3


ARTICLE 6

VESTING AND FORFEITURES

6.1         Vesting Provisions .

(a)         Fully Vested Accounts .  A Participant’s rights to the following subaccounts shall be nonforfeitable at all times:

(1)        After-Tax Account;

(2)        Ohio Company SIP Matching Contribution Account;

(3)        Old Kent After-Tax Account;

(4)        Old Kent Matching Account (effective September 10, 2010 with respect to such Accounts not previously forfeited);

(5)        Old Kent Pre-Tax Account;

(6)        Old Kent Rollover/Transfer Account;

(7)        Post -2014 Employer Matching Account;

(8)        Pre-2004 Employer Contribution Account;

(9)        Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account;

(10)      Qualified Non-Elective Contribution Account;

(11)      Rollover Account (including the Traditional Rollover Account and the Roth Rollover Account);

(12)      Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account (including the Pre-Tax 401(k) Account of the Roth 401(k) Account).

(b)         Other Subaccounts .

(1)         At Normal Retirement Age .  Upon and after a Participant’s attainment of Normal Retirement Age, if he is then in the service of the Employer or an Affiliate, he shall have a nonforfeitable right to his entire Account (including each of its subaccounts).

(2)         Prior to Normal Retirement Age .

(A)        Vesting Schedule .

(i)         2004-2006 Profit Sharing Account.     A Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of his 2004-2006 Profit Sharing Account (attributable to contributions for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2003 and before January 1, 2007) on the basis of the number of Vesting Years with which he is credited, pursuant to the following schedule:

 

Vesting Years

Nonforfeitable Percentage

Less than 5 0%
5 or more 100%

 

6-1


(ii)        Pre-2015 Employer Matching Account.   A Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of his Pre-2015 Employer Matching Account on the basis of the number of Vesting Years with which he is credited, pursuant to the following vesting schedule:

 

Vesting Years

Nonforfeitable Percentage

Less than 3 0%
3 or more 100%

(iii)       First Charter Employer Contribution Account .        A Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of his First Charter Employer Contribution Account on the basis of the number of his Vesting Years with which he is credited, pursuant to the following vesting schedule:

 

Vesting Years

Nonforfeitable Percentage

Less than 2 0%
2 25%
3 50%
4 75%
5 or more 100%

 

Upon and after a Participant’s attainment of age 65, if he is then in the service of the Employer or an Affiliate, he shall have a nonforfeitable right to his First Charter Employer Contribution Account.

Notwithstanding the above vesting schedule, a Participant shall be fully vested in his First Charter Employer Contribution Account provided the Administrator determines in its sole and absolute discretion that the Participant has been identified in writing by Fifth Third Bancorp (or any of its subsidiaries) for severance under Fifth Third Bancorp’s severance policy in connection with the merger of First Charter Corporation into Fifth Third Financial Corporation (whether or not such Participant continues employment until his actual release dale and actually receives severance pay).

(iv)       FNB Employer Contribution Account .  A Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of his FNB Employer Contribution Account on the basis of the number of his Vesting Years with which he is credited, pursuant to the following vesting schedule:

 

Vesting Years

Nonforfeitable Percentage

Less than 1 0%
1 20%
2 40%
3 60%
4 80%
5 or more 100%

 

6-2


Upon and after a Participant’s attainment of age 62, if he is then in the service of the Employer or an Affiliate, he shall have a nonforfeitable right to his FNB Employer Contribution Account.

Notwithstanding the above vesting schedule, a Participant whose position as an Employee was affected by the restructuring of F.N.B. Corporation and who was notified of such before August 20, 2003, shall be fully vested in his FNB Employer Contribution Account provided his employment continued through the separation date set by his employer.

A Participant whose position was eliminated as a result of the affiliation of First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. (and subsidiaries) with Fifth Third Bancorp and who receives a benefit under the First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. Severance Pay Plan, shall be fully vested in his FNB Employer Contribution Account.

(v)         Post-2006 Profit Sharing Account.   A Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of his Post-2006 Profit Sharing Account (attributable to contributions for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2007) on the basis of the number of Vesting Years with which he is credited, pursuant to the following schedule:

 

Vesting Years

Nonforfeitable Percentage

Less than 3 0%
3 or more 100%

(B)        Death or Disability .      Anything in (A) above to the contrary notwithstanding, if a Participant’s employment by the Employer terminates because of his death or incurrence of a Disability, then his entire Account (including each of its subaccounts) shall be fully vested.

(C)        Changes in Vesting Schedule .    Anything in the foregoing to the contrary notwithstanding, if the adoption of the Plan or of an amendment thereto results in a change in any vesting schedule, then each Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of the particular Account to which such vesting schedule relates that is no less than the vested percentage in such Account computed on the date immediately prior to the later of the date of such adoption or the effective date of such adoption, and without regard to such adoption.

(3)         Forfeiture for Break in Service .  If a Participant incurs a Break in Service, then his forfeitable interest (as of such incurrence) in his Account shall be forfeited.

(4)         Effect of Certain Distributions .      Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (5) or (6) below, if a Participant who is not fully vested in his First Charter Employer Contribution Account or his FNB Employer Contribution Account receives an amount therefrom prior to his incurrence of a Break in Service, then, at any relevant time after such distribution and prior to his incurrence of a Break in Service, the vested portion (“X”) of his First Charter Employer Contribution Account or his FNB Employer Contribution Account, as the case may be, after the distribution (“AB”) shall be an amount determined by the formula

X = P (AB + D) - D

where “P” is the vested percentage at the relevant time and “D” is the amount of the distribution.

 

6-3


(5)         Effect of Cash-Out Distributions .

(A)        Forfeiture .  If a Participant, who is not fully vested in his Account, terminates service and receives a distribution of the present value of his entire nonforfeitable interest, then his forfeitable interest therein shall be forfeited immediately; provided however, if the present value of the portion of the distribution attributable to Employer contributions exceeds $5,000, then there shall be no forfeiture hereunder unless the Participant has voluntarily requested to receive such distribution.

(B)        Restoration .    Any amount that a Participant forfeited under (A) above shall be restored, unadjusted for any gains or losses, if such Participant resumes employment with the Employer covered by the Plan and if he repays to the Plan the full amount of such distribution before the earlier of:

(i)        his incurrence of a Break in Service, or

(ii)       the end of the five-year period beginning with his resumption of employment with an Employer covered by the Plan.

(C)        Source of Restoration .    Any restoration under (B) above shall be made from available forfeitures before any other allocation thereof, and, if such forfeitures are insufficient, then the Employer shall contribute the difference.

(D)        Special Rule .    A Participant, who has no vested interest in his Account and who terminates service, shall be treated for purposes of (A) above as if he had received a distribution of the present value of his entire nonforfeitable interest as of the date of his termination of service. Such a Participant who resumes employment with the Employer covered by the Plan before he incurs a Break in Service, shall be treated under (B) above as if he had repaid to the Plan the full amount of that distribution as of the date of his resumption of employment.

(6)         Forfeiture for Death After Separation from Service .   If a Participant dies after his termination of employment with the Employer and if the Administrator has notice thereof, then any forfeitable portion of his Account shall be forfeited.

6.2         Allocation of Forfeitures .  Forfeitures occurring during a Plan Year, first, shall be applied to any required restoration of forfeitures and then, to the reduction of the Employer’s contributions to the Plan. In the discretion of the Employer, forfeitures may be used to pay administrative expenses of the Plan.

6.3         Vesting Upon Termination or Partial Termination of the Plan or Discontinuance of Contributions .    Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 6.1, upon the termination or partial termination of the Plan or the complete discontinuance of contributions under the Plan, the amounts then credited to all affected Participants’ Accounts shall be nonforfeitable.

6.4         Unclaimed Benefits .      Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, if a Participant or other person entitled to a benefit (including a benefit being paid or payable under

 

6-4


the Old Plan) has not been found within 5 years after such payment becomes due, then such benefit shall be forfeited. However, if such Participant or other person is thereafter located, then, no later than 60 days after the date on which such Participant or other person is located, the Employer shall contribute the amount of such benefit to the Plan, and such contribution shall be used to restore such benefit retroactively and shall be in the same amount as was payable at the time such benefit became due without any adjustment for the time between the date such benefit became due and such restoration.

 

6-5


ARTICLE 7

INVESTMENT OF ACCOUNTS

7.1         Funding Policy and Method .

(a)         Establishment .    The Administrator shall establish, for the Plan, a funding policy and method, which shall be consistent with the objectives of the Plan, ERISA and any other applicable legal requirements and which shall identify the Plan’s short-run and long-run financial needs with respect to liquidity and investment growth, as the same may change from time to time. Such funding policy shall be communicated as soon as practicable to those who are responsible for investment of the Plan Assets.

(b)         Funding Entity .    The Plan Assets shall be held under and the benefits under the Plan shall be funded through The Fifth Third Profit Sharing Trust as it may be amended from time to time. The trust so established and maintained is and shall be a part of the Plan. In addition, Plan Assets may be held under and the benefits under the Plan may be funded through such other trusts as the Employer, in its discretion, may establish or cause to be established or entered into for the purposes of carrying out the Plan. The Employer shall determine the form and terms of any such trust, from time to time, consistent with the objectives of the Plan, ERISA and any other applicable legal requirements, and may remove any trustee and select a successor trustee or trustees or may terminate any such trust. Any such trust so established and maintained is and shall be a part of the Plan.

(c)         Investment Elections .

(1)         Participant Investment Elections .    Each Participant shall elect the manner in which his Account, including any future contributions thereto, are to be invested as provided in this Section 7.1(c). Neither the Administrator, the Employer, nor the Trustee shall have any fiduciary responsibility in connection with the Participant’s investment choices.

(A)        Core Investment Funds .  Each Participant may invest part or all of his Account using such core investment funds as are made available under the Plan. The Administrator shall direct the Trustee as to the core investment funds to be made available, including the Fifth Third Stock Fund (as defined below).

(B)        Self-Directed Brokerage Account .    Each Participant also has the choice of investing part or all of his Account under the self-directed brokerage account arrangement made available under the Plan. Under this feature, the Participant may choose from among a high number of investment options made available through the brokerage arrangement. Neither the Administrator, the Employer, nor the Trustee shall have any duty to determine the suitability or prudence of any of the investment options available under the brokerage arrangement.

(2)         Procedural .  An investment election shall be made in such manner as the Administrator shall direct. The Administrator shall have the power and authority in its sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion to prescribe rules and procedures applicable to this investment election feature. Without limitation, this may include rules and procedures which

 

7-1


limit the frequency of changes to elections, prescribe times for making elections, including new elections when a core investment fund (referred to in (1)(A) above) is eliminated or when the Administrator determines to implement a re-enrollment, regulate the amount or increment a Participant may allocate to a particular fund or the self-directed brokerage account, require or allow an election (or election change) to relate only to future contributions, specify how an election may apply to the subaccounts within an Account and provide for the investment of an Account of a Participant who fails to make an investment election when required to do so, as more fully described in (3) below.

(3)         Default Investment Alternative .    The Administrator may designate one or more default investment alternatives and may prescribe the circumstances in which a Participant’s Account (or portion thereof) is to be invested in a default investment alternative. Such circumstances may include, without limitation, when an original investment election is not correctly and timely made by a Participant, when a core investment fund (referred to in (1)(A) above) is eliminated and a new election is not correctly and timely made by a Participant for any amounts in that fund, or in a re-enrollment in which Participants are required to make new investment elections, and a Participant does not respond with a correct and timely investment election.

The Administrator may administer the default investment alternatives in a manner intended to qualify for the safe harbor of ERISA §404(c)(5). Neither the Administrator, the Employer, nor the Trustee shall have any fiduciary responsibility in connection with the failure of a Participant to make an investment election when required to do so, or the resulting investment of his Account (or portion thereof) in a default investment alternative.

7.2         Investment Adjustment .    The Administrator shall account for the investments and investment transactions attributable to each Account separately. Earnings or losses on Plan Assets attributable to a particular Account shall be allocated solely to that Account. All determinations of the investment adjustments under this Section and under Section 7.3 below and any Appendix shall be made by the Administrator, and such determinations when so made by the Administrator shall be conclusive and shall be binding upon all persons.

7.3         Fifth Third Stock Fund .

(a)         General .  The Trustee shall segregate a portion of the Plan Assets into a separate fund to be known as the “Fifth Third Stock Fund.” The Fifth Third Stock Fund shall be invested primarily in shares of common stock of Fifth Third Bancorp. The Fund may also be invested in short-term liquid investments to the extent the Administrator or Trustee determines desirable to accommodate the expected short-run liquidity needs of the Plan or Fund. The Trustee shall have no discretionary authority to sell Fifth Third Bancorp shares or to refrain from acquiring additional Fifth Third Bancorp shares with funds not held for short-run liquidity needs. In the event of a merger or other corporate transaction, the Fund may hold whatever assets that may be received.

The provisions of this paragraph shall apply to any investment in the Fifth Third Stock Fund as long as the shares of common stock of Fifth Third Bancorp are publicly traded or treated as publicly traded under Code Section 401(a)(35). Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan

 

7-2


to the contrary, a Participant whose Account is invested, to any extent, in the Fifth Third Stock Fund shall be permitted to divest such investment and re-invest in other investment funds made available under the Plan. At least three diversified investment funds with materially different risk return characteristics will be offered as alternatives to the Fifth Third Stock Fund. There will be no restrictions or conditions on investment in the Fifth Third Stock Fund that do not also apply to investment in the other investment funds.

(b)         Investment Adjustment .  The Plan Assets comprising the Fifth Third Stock Fund shall be valued daily at fair market value and the Participants’ Accounts (and appropriate subaccounts) shall be adjusted daily to reflect the change in value of the Fifth Third Stock Fund.

(c)         Voting of Employer Securities .    To the extent a Participant’s Account (or any subaccount) is invested in the Fifth Third Stock Fund, the Participant (or in the event of his death, his Beneficiary) shall have the right to instruct the Trustee in writing as to the manner in which the shares represented by his interest in such Fund are to be voted at each annual or special meeting of the shareholders of Fifth Third Bancorp and as to the manner in which any other right relating to such stock is to be exercised. In the event that any Participant (or Beneficiary) shall fail to instruct the Trustee, then the Trustee shall vote such shares in the same ratio in which the total shares with respect to which timely instructions were received were voted in such matters.

(d)         ESOP Dividend Pass-Through Election .      A Participant with an Account (including any subaccount) invested in the Fifth Third Stock Fund (or in the event of his death, his Beneficiary), shall have the right to elect, in accordance with instructions or procedures of the Administrator, or its delegate to either (1) leave such dividends in the Plan for reinvestment in common stock of Fifth Third Bancorp under the Fifth Third Stock Fund or otherwise; or (2) take the dividends in cash. This election shall be available with respect to only those subaccounts (invested in the Fifth Third Stock Fund) in which the Participant (or Beneficiary) is 100% vested.

7.4         Life Insurance .  No life insurance shall be purchased under the Plan.

7.5         Loans .

(a)         Eligibility .  Upon filing the proper application form with the Administrator by a Participant, the Administrator may authorize and direct the Trustee on behalf of the Plan, to grant a loan to such Participant from the Plan Assets, subject to the conditions set forth below.

(b)         Conditions .  Loans under (a) above shall meet all of the following requirements:

(1)        Loans shall be made available to all Participants on a reasonably equivalent basis; provided that loans shall not be available to Participants who are not Employees (other than former Employees who are parties in interest within the meaning of section 3(14) of ERISA).

(2)        A Participant may borrow solely from his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account, Old Kent Pre-Tax Account, Rollover Account, Old Kent Rollover/Transfer Account and other subaccounts referred to in an Appendix to the extent attributable to elective deferrals described in section 402(g)(3) of the Code or rollover contributions.

 

7-3


(3)        A Participant may have only one loan outstanding at any time.

(4)        A Participant loan must be in an amount equal to at least $1,000.

(5)        Loans shall not be made available to Highly Compensated Employees in an amount greater than the amount made available to other Participants.

(6)        Loans shall bear a reasonable rate of interest equal to the rate that the Fifth Third Bank, in its lending business, would charge on a similar loan.

(7)        Loans shall be adequately secured, which security shall, notwithstanding Section 14.2, consist of an assignment of up to 50 percent of a borrowing Participant’s nonforfeitable Account under the Plan. The Administrator may allow such an assignment to consist solely of amounts not attributable to elective deferrals described in section 402(g)(3) of the Code if such amounts would constitute adequate security.

(8)        Loans shall be repaid only by payroll withholding properly authorized by the Participant; provided that the Administrator may allow complete prepayment through other means; and provided further, a Participant who is on a leave of absence may pay installments by cashier’s check, certified check or money order, to the extent his pay (if any) is insufficient to meet the repayment schedule.

(9)        No Participant loan shall exceed the limitations under (c) below.

(10)      In the event of default, foreclosure on the Participant’s accrued nonforfeitable benefit, to the extent used as security for the loan, will occur after a distributable event occurs under the Plan. Events constituting default shall be specified in the promissory note or security agreement to be executed by the Participant.

(c)         Limitation on Amount .    A loan under the Plan (when added to any other loans outstanding under the Plan and any other plans taken into account under section 72(p)(2)(D) of the Code) to a Participant shall not exceed the lesser of:

(1)        $50,000 reduced by the excess (if any) of -

(A)       the highest outstanding balance of loans from the Plan (and other plans taken into account) during the one-year period ending on the day before the date on which such loan was made, over

(B)       the outstanding balance of loans from the Plan (and other plans taken into account) on the date such loan was made, or

(2)        one-half of the nonforfeitable portion of the Participant’s Account.

(d)         Distributable Event .    Solely for purposes of foreclosure on the Participant’s nonforfeitable Account, to the extent used as security for the loan, default on a Participant’s note shall be deemed to be a distributable event for such a Participant (in addition to the other distributable events under the Plan); provided however, with respect to a Participant’s Section 401(k)

 

7-4


Salary Deferral Account, and any other amounts subject to the distribution limitations of section 401(k)(2), to the extent used as security for the loan, such a default shall be deemed a distributable event if, and only if, the Participant has attained age 59-1/2.

(e)         Repayment Period .   Each loan, by its terms, shall be required to be repaid within 5 years. In addition, loans shall be due and payable in full upon a Participant’s termination of employment (except in the case of parties in interest within the meaning of section 3(14) of ERISA) and such repayment need not be through payroll withholding.

(f)         Level Amortization .       Each loan shall be subject to substantially level amortization, with payments of principal and interest not less frequently than quarterly, over the term of the loan.

(g)         Earmarking .    If a loan is made to a Participant pursuant to (a) above, then his interest in other Plan Assets shall be reduced by the amount of the loan, the loan shall be an investment of his Account, and interest and other amounts allocable to such loan shall be allocated only to his Account.

(h)         Effect of Default on Benefits .   Upon a Participant’s death, if less than 100 percent of his Account is payable to his Surviving Spouse, then, in determining the amount payable to the Surviving Spouse, the amount treated as payment in satisfaction of any loan (including accrued interest) shall first be treated as reducing the Account.

(i)         Administration .   The Administrator is authorized to administer the loan program. Loans will be approved if the proper forms and documentation are completed and delivered to the Administrator, the amount of the loan requested does not exceed the limits specified in this Section, adequate security authorized in this Section is delivered to the Trustee, and the other provisions of this Section are satisfied. The Administrator is authorized to impose on a Participant a reasonable administrative fee for his loan.

7.6        Separately Allocable Plan Expenses.    The Administrator may direct that any expenses attributable to specific Participants’ Accounts due to investment elections (including the self-directed brokerage account), loans, withdrawals, distributions, domestic relations orders or any other reasons, be deducted directly from the Account for which the expense was incurred to the extent paid from Plan Assets.

 

7-5


ARTICLE 8

WITHDRAWALS AND DISTRIBUTIONS

8.1         Hardship Withdrawals .

(a)         Election.    During his employment with the Employer, and subject to filing such forms and following such time and other limitations as the Administrator shall prescribe, a Participant may make withdrawals in the event of hardship from his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account, except to the extent a loan is secured by such subaccount; provided however, that the aggregate of any such withdrawals from his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account shall not exceed the aggregate of the compensation reduction contributions made on the Participant’s behalf under Section 4.1 and any section 401(k) elective deferrals transferred or merged into such subaccount from a Predecessor Plan.

(b)         Hardship .

(1)         General .   For purposes of (a) above, “hardship” means an immediate and heavy financial need of an Employee determined in accordance with (2) below. A withdrawal based upon financial hardship cannot exceed the amount required to satisfy that need (including taxes and penalties on the withdrawal) determined in accordance with (3) below.

(2)         Immediate and Heavy Financial Need .  A withdrawal will be deemed to be made on account of an immediate and heavy financial need of an Employee if and only if the withdrawal is on account of:

(A)       expenses for (or necessary to obtain) medical care that would be deductible under section 213(d) of the Code (determined without regard to whether the expenses exceed 7.5% of adjusted gross income);

(B)       purchase (excluding mortgage payments) of a principal residence of the Employee;

(C)       payment of tuition, related educational fees, and room and board expenses, for up to the next 12 months of post-secondary education for the Employee, or the Employee’s spouse, children, or dependents (as defined in section 152 of the Code, without regard to Code section 152(b)(1), (b)(2) and (d)(1)(B));

(D)       the need to prevent the eviction of the Employee from his principal residence or foreclosure on the mortgage on the Employee’s principal residence;

(E)       payments for burial or funeral expenses for the Employee’s deceased parent, spouse, children or dependents (as defined in section 152 of the Code without regarding to section 152(d)(1)(B) of the Code); or

(F)       expenses for the repair of damage to the Employee’s principal residence that would qualify for the casualty deduction under section 165 of the Code (determined without regard to whether the loss exceeds 10% of adjusted gross income).

 

8-1


(3)         Necessity of the Withdrawal .   A withdrawal will be deemed necessary to satisfy an immediate and heavy financial need if and only if the Administrator relies on the Employee’s representations (unless the Administrator has actual knowledge to the contrary) that the need cannot be relieved by any of the following:

(A)       reimbursement or compensation by insurance, or otherwise;

(B)       reasonable liquidation of the Employee’s assets and the assets of the Employee’s spouse and minor children (except for such assets which are held under an irrevocable trust or under the Uniform Gifts to Minors Act) to the extent such liquidation itself would not cause an immediate and heavy financial need;

(C)       discontinuance of compensation reduction contributions under Section 4.1 by the Employee to the Plan;

(D)       available withdrawals and distributions (including distribution of ESOP dividends under section 404(k) of the Code) or loans from all plans maintained by the Employer or by another employer; or

(E)       loans from banks or other commercial lenders.

In addition to such certification, the Employee’s section 401(k) contributions under Section 4.1 shall be suspended for six months after receipt of the hardship withdrawal.

(c)         Time of Payment.    Any withdrawal pursuant to this Section shall be payable in a reasonable time (giving consideration to the nature of the Plan investments) after the Trustee receives notice of such withdrawal.

8.2         Withdrawals from Certain Accounts .

(a)         Election .   During his employment with the Employer, and subject to filing such forms and following such time and other limitations as the Administrator shall prescribe, a Participant shall have the right to make withdrawals from his After-Tax Account, Old Kent After-Tax Account, Rollover Account, Old Kent Rollover/Transfer Account, Old Kent Matching Account, and his Ohio Company SIP Matching Contribution Account, except to the extent a loan is secured by any such subaccount.

(b)         Time of Payment.    Any withdrawal pursuant to this Section shall be payable in a reasonable time (giving consideration to the nature of the Plan investments) after the Trustee receives notice of such withdrawal.

8.3         Withdrawals on or After Attainment of Age 59-1/2 .

(a)         Election .   During his employment with the Employer, and subject to filing such forms and following such time and other limitations as the Administrator shall prescribe, a Participant may make withdrawals from his Account (from such subaccounts as he may elect) except to the extent a loan is secured thereby, after his attainment of age 59-1/2.

 

8-2


(b)         Payment .    Any withdrawal pursuant to this Section shall be payable in a reasonable time (giving consideration to the nature of the Plan investments) after the Trustee receives notice of such withdrawal.

(c)         Limitations .   The amount of any withdrawal from a subaccount may not exceed the Participant’s vested and nonforfeitable interest in that subaccount.

8.4        Events of Distribution to Participants .   A Participant’s benefit shall become distributable to him on account of:

(a)        termination of employment; or

(b)        the date required under Section 8.6(c).

8.5        Amount of Payment .   The amount of any payment under the Plan shall be based on the nonforfeitable percentage of the Participant’s Account at the cash value of the Plan Assets allocable to such Account, as said Plan Assets are converted to cash (after taking into account all prior payments and/or withdrawals and the allocation of all contributions to which the Participant is entitled).

8.6        Time of Payment to a Participant .

(a)         General .   Subject to (b), (c) and (d) below, distribution to a Participant whose benefit has become distributable shall commence as soon as administratively feasible after the Participant elects commencement of his benefit.

(b)         Participant Consent .

(1)         General .     If the value of a Participant’s nonforfeitable benefit under the Plan exceeds $5,000 (including the value of a Participant’s Rollover Account and other subaccounts specified in an Appendix attributable to rollover contributions), then no part of such benefit may be distributed to him prior to Normal Retirement Age unless he consents in writing to the distribution.

(2)         Written Explanation .   The Administrator shall provide to each Participant whose consent is required under (1) above, no less than 30 days and no more than 180 days prior to the commencement of benefit payments, a written explanation of the material features and relative values of the optional forms of benefit under the Plan, and his right (if any) to defer receipt of the distribution, including the consequences of failing to defer such receipt. A Participant may elect to commence his distribution in less than thirty days (if administratively feasible) from the date he is provided with the explanation provided he is informed of his right to the 30-day period.

(3)         Time of Consent .    A Participant’s consent to a distribution must not be made before he receives the written explanation under (2) above and must not be made more than 180 days before benefit payments commence.

 

8-3


(c)         Latest Date of Payment .    The payment of a Participant’s distribution under the Plan shall begin not later than the earlier of:

(1)        the later of:

(A)       the 60th day after the close of the Plan Year in which occurs the latest of

(i)         the attainment by the Participant of Normal Retirement Age,

(ii)        the 10th anniversary of the date on which the Participant commenced participation in the Plan, or

(iii)       the termination of the Participant’s service with the Employer and all Affiliates; or

(B)       such date as the Participant may elect (but not earlier than the consent of a person if required under (c) above), or

(2)        the April 1 of the calendar year following the later of

(A)       the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70-1/2 or

(B)       the calendar year in which the Participant retires; provided however, this subparagraph (B) shall not apply to a Participant who is a Five-Percent Owner.

With respect to a Participant who first becomes a Five-Percent Owner in a Plan Year after the Plan Year ending in the calendar year in which he attains age 70-1/2, the calendar year in which such subsequent Plan Year ends shall be the applicable time for purposes of subparagraph (B).

(d)         Cash-Out Distributions .

(1)         $5,000 and Under Cash-Out .    Any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, any amount payable to a Participant under the Plan shall be paid in a single sum, provided that the value of the Participant’s nonforfeitable benefit under the Plan (including the value of a Participant’s Rollover Account and other subaccounts specified in an Appendix attributable to rollover contributions), determined as of the date of distribution, does not exceed $5,000, and such payment is made before payment otherwise begins. Such single sum shall be paid as soon as administratively feasible after the amount otherwise becomes distributable under the Plan.

 

8-4


(2)         Default Method of Payment .   In the event of such a cash-out under (1) above (also referred to in Section 9.1(c)), if the Participant does not affirmatively make an election as to whether to have such distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the Participant in a direct rollover or to receive such distribution directly in accordance with Section 9.3, then the Administrator will pay the distribution as follows:

(A)        Roth Accounts .   If the portion of the distribution attributable to the Roth 401(k) Account and the Roth Rollover Account in the aggregate exceeds $1,000, then the Administrator will pay such portion of the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the Administrator. If the portion of the distribution attributable to the Roth 401(k) Account and the Roth Rollover Account in the aggregate is $1,000 or less, then the Administrator will pay such portion of the distribution directly to the Participant.

(B)        Non-Roth Accounts .   If the portion of the distribution attributable to the non-Roth subaccounts (that is, all subaccounts other than the Roth 401(k) Account and the Roth Rollover Account) in the aggregate exceeds $1,000, then the Administrator will pay such portion of the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the Administrator. If the portion of the distribution attributable to the non-Roth subaccounts in the aggregate is $1,000 or less, then the Administrator will pay such portion of the distribution directly to the Participant.

8.7         Restrictions on Section 401(k) Withdrawals and Distributions .    Notwithstanding any other provisions to the contrary, a Participant’s Section 40i(k) Salary Deferral Account, Qualified Non-Elective Contribution Account, and any other portion of his Account attributable to compensation deferral contributions under a section 401(k) feature of a Predecessor Plan shall not be withdrawn or distributed earlier than one of the following:

(a)        the Participant’s severance from employment;

(b)        the Participant’s death;

(c)        the Participant’s incurrence of a Disability;

(d)        the termination of the Plan without the establishment or maintenance of another defined contribution plan (other than an employee stock ownership plan as defined in section 4975(e)(7) or 409(a) of the Code, a simplified employee pension as defined in section 408(k) of the Code, a SIMPLE IRA plan as defined in section 408(p) of the Code, a plan or contract that satisfies the requirements of section 403(b) of the Code, or a plan that is described in section 457(b) of the Code);

(e)        to the extent provided in Article 8, attainment of age 59-1/2 or incurrence of a hardship.

An event described in (d) shall qualify as an event allowing a withdrawal or distribution only if the payment is in a lump sum.

8.8         Effect of Reemployment .    If a Participant is reemployed by an Employer subsequent to the commencement of a distribution to him under the Plan, then, subject to Section 8.6(c), the payment of any unapplied amount from his Account may be suspended at the election of the Participant during the period of such reemployment and, if so suspended, then shall resume as of the first day of the month following the termination of his reemployment.

 

8-5


ARTICLE 9

FORM OF PAYMENT TO PARTICIPANTS

9.1        General .

(a)         Withdrawals .   Any in-service withdrawal made pursuant to Section 8.1, 8.2, or 8.3 shall be paid in a single sum. The single sum shall be payable in cash. However, a Participant making an in-service withdrawal from his Old Kent Pre-Tax Account, Old Kent After-Tax Account, Old Kent Matching Account or Old Kent Rollover/Transfer Account, may elect to have whole shares of Fifth Third Bancorp stock withdrawn to the extent the applicable subaccount is invested in the Fifth Third Stock Fund. In the absence of a valid election by the date the withdrawal is to be paid, the withdrawal shall be in cash.

(b)         Distributions .   When a Participant’s benefit becomes distributable under Section 8.4 of the Plan, such benefit shall be paid in such of the forms described below as the Participant elects, subject to (c) below:

(1)         Available Distribution Forms .    The available forms, described in more detail below, are:

(A)       a single sum,

(B)       periodic installments, not less frequently than annually, with any installments remaining unpaid at the Participant’s death to be paid to his Beneficiary,

(C)       partial withdrawal, or

(D)       with respect to Participants covered by an Appendix, such other form or forms as are specified in the applicable Appendix.

The foregoing are the exclusive forms of benefit available under the Plan. References below to annuity forms of payment serve only to implement the minimum distribution rules with respect to annuity forms (if any) that potentially could be available to particular Participants under a future Appendix.

In the absence of a valid election by the date benefit payments arc to commence, the form of payout shall be a single sum cash distribution.

(2)         Single Sum . If a single sum payment is otherwise applicable, to the extent the Participant has his Account invested in the Fifth Third Stock Fund, he may elect to have whole shares of Fifth Third Bancorp stock distributed to him in accordance with rules and procedures established by the Administrator, with the remainder of his distribution in cash.

(3)         Periodic Installments . Periodic installments shall be in cash.

 

9-1


In accordance with rules and procedures established by the Administrator and subject to the minimum distribution requirements of Section 9.4, a periodic installment election may be revoked or modified by the Participant.

If the Participant elects periodic installments under (b)(1)(B) above and does not revoke that election, any amount remaining unpaid at the Participant’s death shall be paid in a single sum cash distribution to his Beneficiary as soon as administratively feasible after the Participant’s death. If a Participant dies after having commenced and then revoked a periodic installment election, Section 10.1 shall be applied as if the Participant’s benefit had not commenced.

While receiving installment payments, a Participant may also elect a partial withdrawal from his Account under (b)(1)(C) above.

(4)         Partial Withdrawal .     In accordance with rules and procedures established by the Administrator, a Participant may make a partial withdrawal from his Account from time to time under (b)(1)(C) above. A partial withdrawal shall be in cash.

(c)         Cash-Out Distributions .       Any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, any amount payable to a Participant under the Plan shall be paid in a single sum, provided that the value of the Participant’s nonforfeitable benefit under the Plan, determined as of the date of distribution does not exceed $5,000 (including the value of a Participant’s Rollover Account and other subaccounts specified in an Appendix attributable to rollover contributions), and such payment is made before payment otherwise begins. Such single sum shall be paid as soon as administratively feasible after the amount otherwise becomes distributable under the Plan.

9.2        Distributions under Predecessor Plans . The amount and form of any distribution being paid or payable or forfeited under a Predecessor Plan to or by a person, by reason of the occurrence of any event prior to the effective date of the merger of such Predecessor Plan into the Plan, shall continue to be subject to the provisions of such Predecessor Plan as in effect on the date of such occurrence, unless otherwise expressly provided by the Plan.

9.3        Direct Rollover .

(a)         General .   Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a distributee’s election under this Section, but subject to such exceptions permitted by the Internal Revenue Service, a distributee may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, to have any portion of an eligible rollover distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee in a direct rollover.

(b)         Definitions .

(1)         Eligible rollover distribution .    An eligible rollover distribution is any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the distributee, except that an eligible rollover distribution does not include: any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the distributee or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the distributee and

 

9-2


the distributee’s designated beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten years or more; any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code; any hardship distribution; and except as provided in (c) below, the portion of any distribution that is not includible in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities).

(2)         Eligible retirement plan .  An eligible retirement plan is an individual retirement account described in section 408(a) of the Code (including a Roth IRA described in Section 408A of the Code effective for distributions after December 31, 2007), an individual retirement annuity described in section 408(b) of the Code, an annuity plan described in section 403(a) of the Code, or a qualified trust described in section 401(a) of the Code, that accepts the distributee’s eligible rollover distribution. An eligible retirement plan shall also mean an annuity contract described in Section 403(b) of the Code and an eligible plan under Section 457(b) of the Code which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or an agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for accounts transferred into such plan from this Plan.

(3)         Distributee .   A distributee includes an employee or former employee. In addition, the employee’s or former employee’s surviving spouse and the employee’s or former employee’s spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, as defined in section 414(p) of the Code, are distributees with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse. To the extent provided in (d) below, a Beneficiary may also be an eligible distributee.

(4)         Direct rollover .   A direct rollover is a payment by the Plan to the eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee.

(c)         Modification of Definition of Eligible Rollover Distribution to Include After-Tax Employee Contributions .   For purposes of the direct rollover provisions in Section 9.3, a portion of a distribution shall not fail to be an eligible rollover distribution merely because the portion consists of after-tax employee contributions which are not includible in gross income. However, such portion may be transferred only to an individual retirement account or annuity described in section 408(a) or (b) of the Code, or to a qualified plan described in section 401(a) or 403(a) of the Code that agrees to separately account for amounts so transferred, including separately accounting for the portion of such distribution which is includible in gross income and the portion of such distribution which is not so includible.

(d)         Distributions to Inherited Individual Retirement Plan of Nonspouse Beneficiary.    An individual who is a designated Beneficiary of an Employee and who is not the surviving spouse may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, to have any portion of an eligible rollover distribution made pursuant to Article 10 paid directly to an individual retirement plan specified by such Beneficiary in a direct rollover. For purposes of this subsection (d), an individual retirement plan is an individual retirement account described in section 408(a) of the Code or an individual retirement annuity (other than an endowment contract) described in section 408(b) of the Code. To the extent a Beneficiary elects to make such a direct rollover, the individual retirement plan shall be treated as an inherited individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity (within the meaning of section 408(d)(3)(C) of the Code), and section 401(a)(9)(B) of the Code (other than clause (iv) thereof) shall apply to such plan.

 

9-3


For purposes of this subsection (d), to the extent provided in rules prescribed by the Secretary of Treasury, a trust maintained for the benefit of one or more designated Beneficiaries shall be treated in the same manner as an individual who is a designated Beneficiary of an Employee.

(e)         Roth 401(k) Account and Roth Rollover Account .   A direct rollover of amounts from a Roth 401(k) Account or Roth Rollover Account may be made only to another Roth elective deferral account under an applicable retirement plan described in section 402A(e)(1) of the Code or a Roth IRA described in section 408A of the Code.

9.4        Minimum Distribution Requirements .

(a)         General Rules .

(1)         Effective Date .   The provisions of this Section will apply for purposes of determining required minimum distributions for calendar years beginning with the 2003 calendar year.

(2)         Precedence .   The requirements of this Section will take precedence over any inconsistent provisions of the Plan.

(3)         Requirements of Treasury Regulations Incorporated .   All distributions required under this Section will be determined and made in accordance with the Treasury Regulations under section 401(a)(9) of the Code.

(4)         TEFRA Section 242(b)(2) Elections.  Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Section, distributions may be made under a designation made before January 1, 1984, in accordance with section 242(b)(2) of the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act (TEFRA) and the provisions of the Plan that relate to section 242(b)(2) of TEFRA.

(b)         Time and Manner of Distribution.

(1)         Required Beginning Date .    The Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, to the Participant no later than the Participant’s required beginning date.

(2)         Death of Participant Before Distributions Begin.   If the participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows:

(A)       If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, then, distributions to the surviving spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70-1/2, if later.

 

9-4


(B)       If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, then, distributions to the designated Beneficiary may begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died.

(C)       Effective January 1, 2003, unless (A), (B) or (D) applies, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

(D)       If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary and the surviving spouse dies after the Participant but before distributions to the surviving spouse begin, this Section 9.4(b)(2), other than Section 9.4(b)(2)(A), will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant.

For purposes of this Section 9.4(b)(2) and Section 9.4(d), unless Section 9.4(b)(2)(D) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the Participant’s required beginning date. If Section 9.4(b)(2)(D) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 9.4(b)(2)(A). If distributions under an annuity purchased from an insurance company irrevocably commence to the Participant before the Participant’s required beginning date (or to the Participant’s surviving spouse before the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 9.4(b)(2)(A)), the date distributions are considered to begin is the date distributions actually commence.

In the case of the death of a Participant on or after the Effective Date, then notwithstanding anything to the contrary written above, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death, and distributions need not commence before that date.

(3)         Forms of Distribution .   Unless the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company or in a single sum on or before the required beginning date, as of the first distribution calendar year distributions will be made in accordance with Sections 9.4(c) and (d). If the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company, distributions thereunder will be made in accordance with the requirements of section 401(a)(9) of the Code and the Treasury Regulations.

(c)         Required Minimum Distributions During Participant’s Lifetime.

(1)         Amount of Required Minimum Distribution For Each Distribution Calendar Year .   During the Participant’s lifetime, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year is the lesser of:

(A)       the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account balance by the distribution period in the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury Regulations, using the Participant’s age as of the Participant’s birthday in the distribution calendar year; or

(B)       if the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary for the distribution calendar year is the Participant’s spouse, the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s

 

9-5


Account balance by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury Regulations, using the Participant’s and spouse’s attained ages as of the Participant’s and spouse’s birthdays in the distribution calendar year.

(2)         Lifetime Required Minimum Distributions Continue Through Year of Participant’s Death .    Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Section 9.4(c) beginning with the first distribution calendar year and up to and including the distribution calendar year that includes the Participant’s date of death.

(d)         Required Minimum Distributions After Participant’s Death .

(1)         Death On or After Date Distributions Begin .

(A)        Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary .   If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a designated Beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account balance by the longer of the remaining life expectancy of the Participant or the remaining life expectancy of the Participant’s designated Beneficiary, determined as follows:

(i)         The Participant’s remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

(ii)        If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, the remaining life expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant’s death using the surviving spouse’s age as of the spouse’s birthday in that year. For distribution calendar years after the year of the surviving spouse’s death, the remaining life expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated using the age of the surviving spouse as of the spouse’s birthday in the calendar year of the spouse’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent calendar year.

(iii)       If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, the designated Beneficiary’s remaining life expectancy is calculated using the age of the Beneficiary in the year following the year of the Participant’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

(B)        No Designated Beneficiary .   If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year after the year of the Participant’s death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account balance by the Participant’s remaining life expectancy calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

(2)         Death Before Date Distributions Begin.

(A)        Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary.   If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is a designated Beneficiary, minimum

 

9-6


distributions may begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year of the Participant’s death. In such a case, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each distribution calendar year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account balance by the remaining life expectancy of the Participant’s designated Beneficiary, determined as provided in Section 9.4 (d)(1). The payment alternative in this paragraph (A) shall no longer be available in the case of a Participant’s death on or after the Effective Date.

(B)        Five-Year Rule.    Effective January 1, 2003, if the Participant dies before the date distributions begin, unless (A) or (C) applies, distribution of the Participant’s entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

(C)        Death of Surviving Spouse Before Distributions to Surviving Spouse Are Required to Begin.    If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin, the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, and the surviving spouse dies before distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 9.4(b)(2)(A), this Section 9.4(d)(2) will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant. The payment alternative in this paragraph (C) shall no longer be available in the case of a Participant’s death on or after the Effective Date.

(e)         Definitions .

(1)         Designated Beneficiary .    The individual who is designated as the Beneficiary under Section 2.9 of the Plan and is the designated Beneficiary under section 401 (a)(9) of the Code and section 1.401 (a)(9)- 1, Q&A-4, of the Treasury Regulations.

(2)         Distribution Calendar Year .    A calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning before the Participant’s death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which contains the Participant’s required beginning date. For distributions beginning after the Participant’s death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin under Section 9.4(b)(2). The required minimum distribution for the Participant’s first distribution calendar year will be made on or before the Participant’s required beginning date. The required minimum distribution for other distribution calendar years, including the required minimum distribution for the distribution calendar year in which the Participant’s required beginning date occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that distribution calendar year.

(3)         Life Expectancy .   Life expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury Regulations.

(4)         Participant’s Account Balance .    The Account balance as of the last valuation date in the calendar year immediately preceding the distribution calendar year (valuation calendar year) increased by the amount of any contributions made and allocated or forfeitures allocated to the Account balance as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the

 

9-7


valuation date. The Account balance for the valuation calendar year includes any amounts rolled over or transferred to the Plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the distribution calendar year if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar year.

(5)         Required Beginning Date .   The date specified in Section 8.6(c)(2) of the Plan.

(f)         Permitted Waiver of 2009 Distributions .   A Participant or Beneficiary who would be required to take a minimum distribution hereunder for the 2009 distribution calendar year shall not be required to take any distribution for the 2009 distribution calendar year. Foregoing the 2009 required minimum distribution shall have no effect on the determination of the required beginning date for purposes of determining required minimum distributions for distribution calendar years after 2009. The 5-year period described in section 401(a)(9)(B)(ii) of the Code (and the corresponding provisions of the Plan) shall be determined without regard to calendar year 2009. The Administrator is permitted (but not required) to treat a distribution for the 2009 distribution calendar year as an eligible rollover distribution under Section 9.3.

 

9-8


ARTICLE 10

DEATH BENEFITS

10.1       Death Benefit .

(a)         Entitlement .    Upon the death of a Participant, prior to the application of his Account for his benefit and after receipt by the Administrator of proof of such Participant’s death in a form it determines to be proper, his Beneficiary shall be entitled to a benefit equal to:

(1)        the nonforfeitable percentage of such Participant’s Account at the cash value of the Plan Assets allocable to such Account as said Plan Assets are converted to cash; plus

(2)        any nonforfeitable contributions made by or on behalf of such Participant not yet credited to his Account; minus

(3)        any payments to and/or withdrawals by such Participant not yet debited to his Account.

(b)         Payment of Death Benefits .    Death benefits under (a) above shall, subject to Section 9.4, be payable to a Participant’s Beneficiary in such of the following forms as the Participant or Beneficiary elects:

(1)        a single sum cash distribution,

(2)        periodic installment payments in cash, not less frequently than annually, with any installments remaining unpaid at the Beneficiary’s death to be paid to the Participant’s remaining Beneficiary, or

(3)        with respect to Participants (and their Beneficiaries) covered by an Appendix, such other form or forms (if any) of death benefit as are specified in the applicable Appendix.

Subject to Section 9.4, distribution of death benefits under (a) above shall commence at such time as the Participant or Beneficiary elects and, unless administratively impractical, shall first be available for distribution within 90 days after the Participant’s death. In the case of the death of a Participant on or after the Effective Date, periodic installment payments under Section 10.1(b)(2) must be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

The foregoing are the exclusive forms of death benefit under (a) above available under the Plan. References in Section 9.4 to annuity forms of payment serve only to implement the minimum distribution rules with respect to annuity forms of death benefit that potentially could be available to particular Beneficiaries under a future Appendix to the Plan.

 

10-1


ARTICLE 11

ADMINISTRATION

11.1       Administrator .

(a)         Named Fiduciary .  The Administrator shall be a “Named Fiduciary” for the Plan.

(b)         Responsibilities .   The Administrator shall discharge its responsibilities with respect to the Plan in accordance with the documents and instruments governing the Plan insofar as such documents and instruments are consistent with the provisions of title I of ERISA.

(c)         Powers .   In addition to the powers which are expressly provided in the Plan, the Administrator shall have the power and authority in its sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion to control and manage the operation and administration of the Plan and shall have all powers necessary to accomplish these purposes including, but not limited to the following:

(1)        the power to determine who is a Participant;

(2)        the power to determine allocations, balances, and nonforfeitable percentages with respect to Participants’ Accounts;

(3)        the power to determine when, to whom, in what amount, and in what form distributions are to be made; and

(4)        such powers as are necessary, appropriate or desirable to enable it to perform its responsibilities, including the power to establish rules, regulations and forms with respect thereto.

Benefits under this Plan will be paid only if the Administrator decides in its discretion that the applicant is entitled to them.

11.2       Procedures for Delegation .

(a)         Delegations .   The Administrator or the Board may delegate to one or more persons or entities certain of the Administrator’s fiduciary responsibilities (other than duties involving the management or control of the Plan Assets) under an arrangement whereby it shall have the opportunity for such periodic review of the delegate’s performance as is appropriate under the circumstances and at such times and in such manner as it may choose for the purpose of its evaluation of continuing such designation and delegation and whereby it can promptly terminate the delegate’s services.

(b)         Advisors .   The Administrator shall have the right to employ one or more persons or entities to render advice with regard to any responsibility it has under the Plan.

(c)         Claims Review Committee .   The Administrator shall create a Claims Review Committee and shall appoint such individuals to serve on that Committee as it deems appropriate

 

11-1


from time to time. The Claims Review Committee shall have the duty and power, in its sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion to administer the initial claims procedure under Section 11.4 and the claim review procedure under Section 11.5. The Claims Review Committee shall have sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion to decide all claims under the initial claims procedure and under the claim review procedure and its decisions shall be binding on all parties.

(d)         Removal, Resignation, and Vacancies .    A holder of a delegated position of fiduciary responsibility (including an individual member of a group holding such position) may be removed therefrom at any time and without cause by the person or entity making the delegation and may resign at any time upon prior written notice to such person or entity. Vacancies in any such positions created by removal, resignation, death or other cause may be filled by such person or entity or the fiduciary responsibilities for such position may be retained and/or redelegated by such person or entity.

11.3       Miscellaneous Administration Provisions .

(a)         Administrative Expenses .    The Employer may pay the reasonable expenses of administering the Plan, including any expenses incident to the functioning of the Administrator and the professional fees of any consultants or advisors with respect to the Plan; provided however, any expenses not so paid by the Employer shall be paid from the Plan Assets; and provided further, no person who already receives full-time pay from the Employer shall receive any compensation from the Plan, except for reimbursement of expenses properly and actually incurred.

(b)         Indemnification .   The Employer may indemnify, through insurance or otherwise, some or all of the fiduciaries with respect to the Plan against claims, losses, damages, expenses and liabilities arising from their performance of their responsibilities under the Plan.

(c)         Interpretations .    All interpretations of the Plan and questions concerning its administration and application as determined by the Administrator in its sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion shall be binding on all persons having an interest under the Plan.

(d)         Uniform and Non-Discriminatory Application .   All determinations and actions under the Plan shall be uniformly and consistently applied in a non-discriminatory manner to all persons under similar circumstances.

(e)         Qualified Domestic Relations Order Procedures .     The Administrator shall establish reasonable procedures to determine the qualified status, under section 414(p) of the Code, of domestic relations orders and to administer distributions under such qualified orders.

(f)         Effectiveness of Elections, etc .   An election, designation, request or revocation provided for in the Plan shall be made in writing and shall not become effective until it has been properly filed with the Administrator.

(g)         Written Records .   The Administrator shall maintain all such books of account and other records and data as are necessary for the proper performance of its responsibilities under the Plan.

 

11-2


(h)         Administration Consistent with ERISA and the Code .   The Plan is intended to comply with the provisions of ERISA and of the Code, and the Plan shall be interpreted and administered consistently with such provisions and with the applicable regulations and rulings thereunder.

(i)         Service in More Than One Fiduciary Capacity .   Any person or entity may serve in more than one fiduciary capacity for the Plan, including service both as Administrator and as trustee.

11.4       Initial Claims Procedure .

(a)         Claim .

(1)         Filing .  In order to present a complaint regarding the nonpayment of a Plan benefit or a portion thereof (a “Claim”), a Participant or beneficiary under the Plan (a “Claimant”) or his duly authorized representative must file such Claim by mailing or delivering a writing stating such Claim to the department, officer, or employee responsible for employee benefit matters of the Employer.

(2)         Acknowledgment .    Upon such receipt of a Claim, the Claims Review Committee shall furnish to the Claimant a written acknowledgment which shall inform such Claimant of the time limit set forth in (b)(1) below and of the effect, pursuant to (b)(3) below, of failure to decide the Claim within such time limit.

(b)         Initial Decision .

(1)         Time Limit .   The Claims Review Committee shall decide upon a Claim within a reasonable period of time after receipt of such Claim; provided however, that such period shall in no event exceed 90 days, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing. If such an extension of time for processing is required, then the Claimant shall, prior to the termination of the initial 90-day period, be furnished a written notice indicating such special circumstances and the date by which the Claims Review Committee expects to render a decision. In no event shall an extension exceed a period of 90 days from the end of the initial period.

(2)         Notice of Denial .    If the Claim is wholly or partially denied, then the Claims Review Committee shall furnish to the Claimant, within the time limit applicable under (1) above, a written notice setting forth in a manner calculated to be understood by the Claimant:

(A)       the specific reason or reasons for such denial;

(B)       specific reference to the pertinent Plan provisions on which such denial is based;

(C)       a description of any additional material or information necessary for such Claimant to perfect his Claim and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary; and

(D)       appropriate information as to the steps to be taken if such Claimant wishes to submit his Claim for review pursuant to Section 11.5, including notice of the time limits set forth in Section 11.5(b)(2).

 

11-3


(c)         Interpretation .   This Section 11.4 shall be interpreted consistently with section 2560.503-1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. The Claims Review Committee may take such additional actions that are not inconsistent with such regulations.

11.5       Claim Review Procedure .

(a)         Claimant’s Rights .   If a Claim is wholly or partially denied under Section 11.4, then the Claimant or his duly authorized representative shall have the following rights:

(1)        to obtain, subject to (b) below, a full and fair review by the Claims Review Committee;

(2)        to review pertinent documents; and

(3)        to submit issues and comments in writing.

(b)         Request for Review .

(1)         Filing .    To obtain a review pursuant to (a) above, a Claimant entitled to such a review or his duly authorized representative shall, subject to (2) below, mail or deliver a written request for such a review (a “Request for Review”) to the department, officer, or employee responsible for employee benefit matters of his Employer. The filing shall include a complete description of the appeal, including a description of the original claim and any issue or information (e.g., comments, documents, and records) that the Claimant or his duly-appointed representative wants considered.

(2)         Time Limits for Requesting a Review .   A Request for Review must be mailed or delivered within 60 days after receipt by the Claimant of written notice of the denial of the Claim or within such longer period as is reasonable and related to the nature of the benefit which is the subject of the Claim and to other attendant circumstances.

(3)         Information .    At any time during the Claim process, the Claimant may request, and the Claims Review Committee or its delegate shall provide within a reasonable time thereafter free of charge, any relevant documents in its possession relating to the Claim.

(4)         Scope of Review .   The review shall take into account all information (e.g., comments, documents, and records) submitted by the Claimant relating to the Claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial Claim review.

 

11-4


(c)         Decision on Review .

(1)         Time Limit .

(A)        General .  If, pursuant to (b) above, a review is requested, then, except as otherwise provided in (B) below, the Claims Review Committee or its delegate (but only if such delegate has been given the authority to make a final decision on the Claim) shall make a decision promptly and no later than 60 days after receipt of the Request for Review; except that, if special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, then the decision shall be made as soon as possible but not later than 120 days after receipt of the Request for Review. The Claims Review Committee must furnish the Claimant written notice of any extension prior to its commencement.

(B)        Regularly Scheduled Meetings .    Anything to the contrary in (A) above notwithstanding, if the decision on review is to be made by a committee which holds regularly scheduled meetings at least quarterly, then its decision on review shall be made no later than the date of the meeting which immediately follows the receipt of the Request for Review; provided however, if such Request for Review is received within 30 days preceding the date of such meeting, then such decision on review shall be made no later than the date of the second meeting which follows such receipt; and provided further that, if special circumstances require a further extension of time for processing, and if the Claimant is furnished written notice of such extension prior to its commencement, then such decision on review shall be rendered no later than the third meeting which follows such receipt.

(2)         Notice of Decision .   The Claims Review Committee or its delegate shall furnish to the Claimant, within the time limit applicable under (1) above, a written notice setting forth in a manner calculated to be understood by the Claimant:

(A)       the specific reason or reasons for the decision on review; and

(B)       specific reference to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision on review is based.

(C)       a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits.

(D)       a statement that there is no voluntary appeal procedures and the Claimant’s right to bring an action under section 502(a) of ERISA.

(d)         Interpretation .   This Section 11.5 shall be interpreted consistently with section 2560.503-1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. The Claims Review Committee may take such additional actions that are not inconsistent with such regulations.

11.6       Statute of Limitations .   No action at law or equity may be brought by a Participant, Beneficiary or person claiming through the Participant or Beneficiary regarding benefits under the Plan unless the Participant, Beneficiary or person claiming through the Participant or Beneficiary first exhausts the procedures set forth in Sections 11.4 and 11.5 and the action at law or equity is commenced no later than one year from the date of decision on review.

 

11-5


ARTICLE 12

AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

12.1       Amendment and Termination .

(a)         Right to Amend or Terminate .   Fifth Third Bank reserves the right to amend or terminate the Plan in accordance with the procedures set forth in (b) below, and each other Employer irrevocably delegates such power to Fifth Third Bank. The power to amend and terminate shall include, but not be limited to, the power to merge other plans into this Plan, the power to accept transfers of assets and benefits from other plans, the power to determine the terms of any such merger or transfer; and the power to add, modify or delete an Appendix and to otherwise determine the terms and conditions applicable to any other Employer.

(b)        (1)        Amendment Procedure .   Any amendment of the Plan shall be by action of The Fifth Third Bank Pension, Profit Sharing and Medical Plan Committee or the Chairman of such Committee. If an amendment is being made by the Committee, it must be approved by a majority of the members of the Committee as constituted at the time of adoption of the amendment. Any amendment may be given retroactive effect as determined by said Committee or the Chairman. An amendment may be evidenced in such manner as said Committee or Chairman shall determine. If the amendment is approved by the Committee, such evidence may include (but shall not be limited to) a written resolution signed by a majority of the members of the Committee or minutes of a meeting of the Committee reflecting approval by a majority of the members.

(2)         Termination Procedure .   Any termination of the Plan shall be by action of The Fifth Third Bank Pension, Profit Sharing and Medical Plan Committee. Any termination must be approved by a majority of the members of the Committee as constituted at the time of adoption of the termination; and any such termination may be given retroactive effect as determined by said Committee. A termination may be evidenced in such manner as said Committee shall determine, and such evidence may include (but shall not be limited to) a written resolution signed by a majority of the members of the Committee or minutes of a meeting of the Committee reflecting approval by a majority of the members.

(c)         Conditions on Amendments and Termination .

(1)         Accrued Benefit .

(A)        General .   No amendment to the Plan shall be effective to the extent that it has the effect of reducing a Participant’s accrued benefit, except as permitted under section 412(c)(8) of the Code.

 

12-1


(B)        Treatment of Certain Amendments .   For purposes of (A) above, an amendment which has the effect, with respect to benefits attributable to service before the amendment, of -

(i)         eliminating or reducing an early retirement benefit or a retirement-type subsidy or

(ii)        (except as otherwise provided by Treasury Regulations) eliminating an optional form of benefit shall be treated as reducing accrued benefits. In the case of a retirement-type subsidy, the preceding sentence shall apply only with respect to a Participant who satisfies (either before or after the amendment) the preamendment conditions for the subsidy.

(2)         Changes in Vesting Schedule .       No amendment shall reduce the nonforfeitable percentage of a Participant’s accrued benefit (determined as of the later of the date such amendment is adopted or the date such amendment becomes effective).

12.2       Distribution of Plan Assets Upon Termination of the Plan .   If the Plan is terminated, then distributions and withdrawals shall continue to be made as provided in the Plan; provided however, subject to Article 8, the Administrator may cause Participants’ Accounts to be paid to them, pursuant to the provisions of Article 9, on account of such termination of the Plan.

 

12-2


ARTICLE 13

TOP-HEAVY RULES

13.1       Definitions .   For purposes of this Article 13, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(a)        “Aggregation Group” means:

(1)       each qualified plan or simplified employee pension of the Employer or an Affiliate in which a Key Employee is a participant,

(2)       each other plan of the Employer or an Affiliate which enables any plan described in (1) above to meet the requirements of section 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code,

(3)       any other plan or plans which the Employer elects to include provided that the group would continue to meet the requirements of sections 401(a)(4) and 410 of the Code with such plan or plans being taken into account, and

(4)       any other plan which would have been included in the foregoing had it not terminated.

(b)        “Determination Date,” with respect to any Plan Year for the Plan, means the last day of the preceding Plan Year (or, in the case of the first Plan Year of the Plan, the last day of such Plan Year).

(c)        “Determination Period” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the five Plan Years ending on the Determination Date with respect to such Plan Year.

(d)        “Key Employee,” means any Employee or former Employee (including any deceased Employee) who at any time during the Plan Year that includes the Determination Date was an officer of the Employer having annual compensation greater than $170,000 (as adjusted under section 416(i)(1) of the Code) a Five-Percent Owner of the Employer, or a 1-percent owner of the Employer having annual compensation of more than $150,000. For this purpose, annual compensation means compensation within the meaning of section 415(c)(3) of the Code. The determination of who is a Key Employee will be made in accordance with section 416(i)(1) of the Code and the applicable regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder.

(e)        “Present Value” means, with respect to a defined benefit plan, the present value based on the interest and mortality rates specified under the applicable defined benefit plan for purposes of computing the Top-Heavy Ratio. The actuarial assumptions used for all plans within the same Aggregation Group must be the same.

(f)        “Top-Heavy Plan” means the Plan, with respect to any Plan Year after 1983, if the Top-Heavy Ratio exceeds 60 percent.

 

13-1


(g)        “Top-Heavy Ratio” means, for the Plan or an Aggregation Group of which the Plan is a part, a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of defined contribution account balances and the Present Values of defined benefit accrued benefits for all Key Employees and the denominator of which is the sum of defined contribution account balances and the Present Values of defined benefit accrued benefits for all participants. The Top-Heavy Ratio shall be determined in accordance with section 416 of the Code and the applicable regulations thereunder, including, without limitation, the provisions relating to rollovers and the following provisions:

(1)        The value of account balances under the Plan will be determined as of the Determination Date with respect to the applicable Plan Year.

(2)        The value of account balances and accrued benefits under plans aggregated with the Plan shall be calculated with reference to the determination dates under such plans that fall within the same calendar year as the applicable Determination Date under the Plan.

(3)        The value of account balances and the present value of accrued benefits will be determined as of the most recent valuation date that falls within or ends with the 12-month period ending on the applicable determination date, except as provided in section 416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder for the first and second plan years of a defined benefit plan.

(4)        A simplified employee pension shall be treated as a defined contribution plan; provided however, at the election of the Employer, the Top-Heavy Ratio shall be computed by taking into account aggregate employer contributions in lieu of the aggregate of the accounts of employees.

(5)        Distributions (including distributions under a terminated plan which had it not been terminated would have been included in the Aggregation Group) within the 1-year period ending on a Determination Date shall be taken into account. In the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death, or disability, this provision shall be applied by substituting “5-year period” for “1-year period.”

(6)        Defined contribution account balances shall be adjusted to reflect any contribution not actually made as of a Determination Date but required to be taken into account on that date under section 416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

(7)        Deductible voluntary contributions shall not be included.

(8)        There shall be disregarded the account balances and accrued benefits of a Participant

(A)       who is not a Key Employee but who was a Key Employee in a prior Plan Year or

(B)       who has not performed services for the employer maintaining the plan at any time during the 1-year period ending on the Determination Date.

 

13-2


(9)        The accrued benefit of a Participant other than a Key Employee shall be determined (A) under the method, if any, which uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all defined benefit plans of the Employer, or (B) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued not more rapidly than the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule of section 411(b)(1)(C) of the Code.

(h)        “Valuation Date,” with respect to a Determination Date under the Plan, means the Accounting Date coinciding with such Determination Date.

13.2       Minimum Contribution .

(a)         Safe Harbor 401(k) Plan .   This Section shall not apply in any Plan Year in which the Plan consists solely of a safe harbor plan meeting the requirements of sections 401(k)(12) and (m)(11) of the Code, determined in accordance with section 416(g)(4)(H) of the Code.

(b)         General .   For any Plan Year for which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan, the Employer contribution and forfeitures (excluding compensation reduction contributions under Section 4.1) allocated on behalf of any Participant who is not a Key Employee and who is an Employee on the last day of the Plan Year shall not be less than such Participant’s Section 415 Compensation times the lesser of (1) three percent (3%) or (2) the largest percentage of such contributions and forfeitures (including compensation reduction contributions under Section 4.1), expressed as a percentage of Section 415 Compensation, allocated on behalf of any Key Employee for that Plan Year. For these purposes, “Section 415 Compensation” shall mean the first $265,000 (as adjusted by the Secretary of Treasury in accordance with section 401(a)(17) of the Code) of a Participant’s Section 415 Compensation (as defined in Section 5.1(d)). This minimum contribution shall be made even though, under other Plan provisions, the Participant would not otherwise be entitled to receive an allocation, or would have received a lesser allocation for the year because the Participant received compensation of less than a stated amount.

Employer matching contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of section 416(c)(2) of the Code and the Plan. The preceding sentence shall apply with respect to matching contributions under the Plan or, if the Plan provides that the minimum contribution requirement shall be met in another plan, such other plan. Employer matching contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as matching contributions for purposes of the actual contribution percentage test and other requirements of section 401(m) of the Code.

(c)         Participants Also Covered Under Defined Benefit Plan .   If a Participant who is not a Key Employee and who is an Employee on the last day of the Plan Year also participates in one or more defined benefit plans which are part of the same Aggregation Group as the Plan, and if such defined benefit plan or plans do not satisfy the minimum benefit requirements of section 416 of the Code with respect to such Participant, then, with respect to such Participant, “five percent (5%)” shall be substituted for “the lesser of (1) three percent (3%) or (2) the largest percentage of such contributions and forfeitures (including contributions under Section 4.1) expressed as a percentage of Section 415 Compensation, allocated on behalf of any Key Employee for that Plan Year” in (a) above.

 

13-3


ARTICLE 14

MISCELLANEOUS

14.1       Construction .

(a)         Article and Section References .   Except as otherwise indicated by the context, all references to Articles or Sections in the Plan refer to Articles or Sections of the Plan. The titles thereto are for convenience of reference only and the Plan shall not be construed by reference thereto.

(b)         Gender and Number .   As used in the Plan, except when otherwise indicated by the context, the genders of pronouns and the singular and plural numbers of terms shall be interchangeable.

14.2       Assignment or Alienation of Benefits .

(a)         General .   Except as provided in (b) below and section 401(a)(13)(C) of the Code, benefits provided under the Plan may not be anticipated, assigned (either at law or in equity), alienated or subject to attachment, garnishment, levy, execution or other legal or equitable process. Except as provided in the foregoing, if any attempt shall be made to reach the beneficial interest of any Participant or beneficiary by legal process not preempted by ERISA, the Administrator may suspend any rights of distribution which any Participant or beneficiary may have, and may direct that such person’s beneficial interest hereunder be paid over or applied for the benefit of such person, or for the benefit of dependents of such person, as the Administrator shall determine.

(b)         QDRO .

(1)         General .   Notwithstanding (a) above, benefits shall be paid in accordance with the applicable requirements of any domestic relations order which is a qualified domestic relations order (as defined in section 206(d) of ERISA or section 414(p) of the Code); and provided further that benefits shall be paid pursuant to any domestic relations order entered before January 1, 1985 if either the Plan is paying benefits pursuant to such order on such date or the Administrator elects to treat such order as a qualified domestic relations order.

(2)         Immediate Single Sum Distribution .   If a qualified domestic relations order so provides, the Alternate Payee’s entire benefit shall be paid as soon as administratively feasible after the Administrator’s receipt of the order, determination of its qualified status and determination of the amount payable thereunder. Otherwise, payment shall be made only at such time as the Participant’s benefit would otherwise be payable or as provided in section 414(p) of the Code.

(3)         Alternate Payee’s Beneficiary .   In the event an Alternate Payee who is entitled to a benefit hereunder pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order dies prior to the receipt of the entire benefit due, the Alternate Payee’s remaining benefit shall be payable to the Alternate Payee’s beneficiary designated in the order or on a form specified by the Administrator and received by the Administrator prior to the Alternate Payee’s death. In the event there is no designated beneficiary to receive any such amount, then such amount shall be payable to the estate of the Alternate Payee.

(4)         Alternate Payee Defined .   “Alternate Payee” shall have the meaning given in section 414(p)(8) of the Code.

 

14-1


14.3       Data .

(a)         Obligation to Furnish .   Each person who participates or claims benefits under the Plan shall furnish to the Administrator, any trustee, or any insurance company involved in the funding of the benefits under the Plan, such signatures, documents, evidence, or information as the Administrator, such trustee, or such insurance company shall consider necessary or desirable for the purpose of administering the Plan.

(b)         Mistakes or Misstatements .   In the event of a mistake or a misstatement as to any item of such information, as is furnished pursuant to (a) above, which has an effect on the amount of benefits to be paid under the Plan, or in the event of a mistake or misstatement as to the amount of payments to be made to a person entitled to receive a benefit under the Plan, the Administrator shall cause such amounts to be withheld or accelerated, as shall in its judgment accord to such person the payment to which he is properly entitled under the Plan.

14.4       Employment Relationship .

(a)         No Enlargement of Rights .    Except as otherwise provided by law or legally enforceable contract, the establishment of the Plan or of any fund or any insurance contract thereunder, any amendment of the Plan, participation in the Plan, or the payment of any benefits under the Plan, shall not be construed as giving any person whomsoever any legal or equitable claims or rights against any Employer, or its officers, directors, or shareholders, as such, or as giving any person the right to be retained in the employment of any Employer.

(b)         Employer’s Rights .    The right of an Employer to discipline or discharge an employee shall not be affected by reason of any of the provisions of the Plan.

14.5       Merger or Transfer of Plan Assets .   In the case of any merger or consolidation of the Plan with, or transfer of assets or liabilities of the Plan to, any other plan, each Participant in the Plan shall (if the surviving plan terminated immediately after the merger, consolidation, or transfer) be entitled to receive a benefit which is equal to or greater than the benefit he would have been entitled to receive immediately before the merger, consolidation, or transfer (if the Plan had then terminated). In the case of a transfer to another plan of any Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account or any other portion of an Account subject to the 401(k) restrictions on distributions, such a transfer may take place only if it is reasonably concluded that the transferee plan contains the restrictions described in Section 8.7.

14.6       Incompetency or Disability .   Each person to whom a distribution is payable under the Plan shall be conclusively presumed to be mentally competent and not under a disability that renders him unable to care for his affairs, until the date on which the Administrator receives a written notice, in a form and manner acceptable to the Administrator, indicating that a guardian, conservator, or other party legally vested with the care of the person or the estate of such person

 

14-2


has been appointed by a court of competent jurisdiction, and any payment of a distribution due thereafter shall be made to the same, provided that proper proof of his appointment and continuing qualification is furnished in a form and manner acceptable to the Administrator. The Administrator shall not be required to look to the application of any such payment so made.

14.7       Nontransferability of Annuities .   Any annuity contract distributed from the Plan must be nontransferable.

14.8       USERRA and HEART Act .   Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, contributions, benefits and service credit with respect to qualified military service will be provided in accordance with Section 414(u) of the Code. Upon the death of any Participant who dies on or after January 1, 2007, while on a leave of absence to perform qualified military service with reemployment rights described in Code section 414(u), the Participant’s Beneficiary shall be entitled to any additional benefits (other than benefit accruals related to the period of qualified military service) that would be provided under the Plan had the Participant died as an active Employee, in accordance with section 401(a)(37) of the Code.

14.9       Governing Law .   The Plan and all rights and duties under the Plan shall be governed, construed and administered in accordance with the laws of the State of Ohio, except as governed separately by or preempted by federal law.

14.10     Severability .   In case any provision of this Plan shall be held illegal or invalid for any reason, such illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining provisions of this Plan, and this Plan shall be construed and interpreted as if such illegal or invalid provision had never been a part of it.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, FIFTH THIRD BANK has caused this Plan, as supplemented by the Appendices hereto, to be executed this 23 rd day of December, 2014.

 

FIFTH THIRD BANK
BY: 

/s/ Teresa J. Tanner

 

14-3


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX I

PREDECESSOR EMPLOYER INDEX

Service crediting and/or other substantive provisions are applicable with respect to the following predecessor employers in the Appendices indicated:

 

 

Predecessor Employer

Service

Crediting

under

        Appendix        

     Other  

     Substantive  

     Provisions  

     under  

     Appendix  

ACI Merchant Services, Inc.

II  

Bank of Ashland (and affiliates)

II  

Bank One, National Association

II  

Boone State Bank

IV IV

Capital Holdings, Inc.

(and Capital Bank, N.A.)

II  

Card Management Corporation

XXII XXII

CitFed Bancorp, Inc. (and subsidiaries)

XIV XIV

Citizens Heritage Bank, National Association

II  

CNB Bancshares, Inc.

(and Civitas Bank and other subsidiaries)

XVI XVI

Commercial National Bank

II II

Cumberland Federal Savings Bank

VII VII

Decatur County Bank

II  

Enterprise Federal Savings Bank

(and Enterprise Federal Bancorp, Inc.)

XV XV

Falls Savings Bank, FSB

IX IX

First Charter Corporation (and subsidiaries)

XXV XXV

First Horizon National Corporation (and First Tennessee

Bank National Association)

II  

First-Mason Bank

III III

First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. (and subsidiaries)

XXI XXI

First Nationwide Bank, a Federal Savings Bank (fka

California Federal)

XI XI

First Ohio Bancshares, Inc.

(and First National Bank of Toledo

and other subsidiaries)

VI VI

Franklin Financial Corporation (and subsidiaries)

XX XX

Freedom Bank

II  

Gateway Leasing Corporation

II  

Great Lakes National Bank, Ohio, N.A.

II  

 

AI-1


 

Predecessor Employer

Service

Crediting

under

        Appendix        

     Other  

     Substantive  

     Provisions  

     under  

     Appendix  

Heartland Capital Management, Inc.

II  

Integrated Delivery Technologies, Inc.

II  

Kentucky Enterprise Bank, FSB

(and Kentucky Enterprise Bancorp, Inc.)

II  

Mutual Federal Savings Bank

VIII VIII

NBD Bancorp, Inc.

X X

New Palestine Bank

V V

The Ohio Company (and subsidiaries)

XII XII

Old Kent Financial Corporation (and subsidiaries)

XVIII XVIII

Ottawa Financial Corporation (and AmeriBank)

XVII XVII

Peoples Bank Corporation of Indianapolis (and subsidiaries)

II  

R-G Crown Bank, FSB

XXIV XXIV

Resource Management, Inc.

(dba Maxus Investment Group)

II  

Skipjack Financial Services, Inc. and Transactive

Ecommerce Solutions, Inc.

II  

South Florida Bank (and South Florida

Bank Holding Corporation)

II  

Stale Savings Bank (and affiliates)

XIII XIII

Strongsville Savings Bank (and

Emerald Financial Corp)

II  

USB, Inc.

XIX XIX

Vanguard Financial Company

II  

W. Lyman Case & Company

II and XXIII XXIII

 

AI-2


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX II

Service Crediting for Certain Predecessor Employers

1.          Predecessor Employers .   The crediting of Service under this Appendix shall apply only to those Employees described below.

 

  (i)

CITIZENS HERITAGE BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION .  Employees of Citizens Heritage Bank, National Association (“Citizens”) who became Employees on March 31, 1988 in connection with Citizens’ adoption of the Old Plan on that date shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Citizens.

 

  (ii)

COMMERCIAL NATIONAL BANK .   Employees of Commercial National Bank (“Commercial”) who became Employees on or before August 1, 1988 in connection with the merger of Commercial into the Fifth Third Bank of Northwestern Ohio, National Association, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Commercial.

 

  (iii)

DECATUR COUNTY BANK .  Employees of Decatur County Bank (“Decatur”) who became Employees on September 23, 1988 in connection with Decatur County Bank’s adoption of the Plan, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Decatur.

 

  (iv)

KENTUCKY ENTERPRISE BANK, FSB .  Employees of Kentucky Enterprise Bank, FSB and Kentucky Enterprise Bancorp, Inc. who became Employees on or before March 15, 1996 in connection with the merger of Kentucky Enterprise Bancorp, Inc. into Fifth Third Bancorp shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Kentucky Enterprise Bank, FSB and Kentucky Enterprise Bancorp, Inc.

 

  (v)

GATEWAY LEASING CORPORATION, an Ohio Corporation .    Former employees of Gateway Leasing Corporation (“Gateway”) who became Employees on or before June 7, 1997 in connection with The Fifth Third Leasing Company’s Asset Purchase Agreement with Gateway shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Gateway.

 

  (vi)

GREAT LAKES NATIONAL BANK, OHIO, N.A.     Former employees of Great Lakes National Bank, Ohio, N.A. (“Great Lakes”) who became Employees on or before September 26, 1997 in connection with the Employer’s acquisition of certain assets of Great Lakes shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Great Lakes.

 

AII - 1


  (vii)

BANK ONE, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION .   Former employees of Bank One, National Association (“Bank One”) who became Employees on or before October 16, 1998 in connection with Fifth Third Bank of Southern Ohio’s acquisition of certain assets of Bank One shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Bank One.

 

  (viii)

BANK OF ASHLAND .   Employees of Ashland Bankshares, Inc. or Bank of Ashland, Inc. (a subsidiary of Ashland Bankshares, Inc.) who became Employees on or before April 16, 1999 in connection with the merger of Bank of Ashland, Inc. and Fifth Third Bank, Ohio Valley, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Ashland Bankshares, Inc. or Bank of Ashland, Inc.

 

  (ix)

SOUTH FLORIDA BANK AND SOUTH FLORIDA BANK HOLDING CORPORATION .  Employees of South Florida Bank or South Florida Bank Holding Corporation who became Employees of an Employer as a result of the mergers of South Florida Bank into Fifth Third Bank, Florida or South Florida Bank Holding Corporation into Fifth Third Bancorp and who were Employees of an Employer on the first business day after the Effective Time shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with South Florida Bank or South Florida Bank Holding Corporation.

 

  (x)

STRONGSVILLE SAVINGS BANK AND EMERALD FINANCIAL CORP .   Employees of The Strongsville Savings Bank or Emerald Financial Corp., who became Employees of an Employer as a result of the mergers of The Strongsville Savings Bank into Fifth Third Bank, Northwestern Ohio N.A. or Emerald Financial Corporation into Fifth Third Bancorp and who were Employees of an Employer on the first business day after August 6, 1999, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with The Strongsville Savings Bank and Emerald Financial Corp.

 

  (xi)

ACI MERCHANT SERVICES, INC .   Employees of ACI Merchant Services, Inc. (“ACI”) who became Employees on October 2, 2000 in connection with the merger of ACI into Midwest Payment Systems, Inc. shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with ACI.

 

  (xii)

PEOPLES BANK CORPORATION OF INDIANAPOLIS .    Each Peoples Bank Employee who was an Employee of an Employer on January 1, 2000 (and who was an employee of any subsidiary of Fifth Third Bancorp on the first business day after the merger of Peoples Bank Corporation of Indianapolis into Fifth Third Bancorp), shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for his service with Peoples Bank Corporation of Indianapolis, Peoples Bank & Trust Company and any other subsidiary of Peoples Bank Corporation of Indianapolis. “Peoples Bank Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the merger of Peoples Bank Corporation of Indianapolis into Fifth Third Bancorp, was employed by Peoples Bank Corporation of Indianapolis, or any subsidiary of Peoples Bank Corporation of Indianapolis.

 

AII - 2


  (xiii)

HEARTLAND CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, INC.       Individuals who were Employees of Heartland Capital Management, (“Heartland”) on February 4, 2000 became Participants on February 4, 2000. In addition to the Service credited under Section 2.54 for the period that Heartland has been an Affiliate, each individual who was an Employee of Heartland on February 4, 2000 (and who was an employee of Heartland on the first business day after the day Heartland became an Affiliate) shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for his service with Heartland prior to its having become an Affiliate.

 

  (xiv)

INTEGRATED DELIVERY TECHNOLOGIES, INC.        Employees of Integrated Delivery Technologies, Inc. who become Employees as of the effective time of the merger of Integrated Delivery Technologies, Inc. and Midwest Payment Systems East, Inc. in connection with such merger, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Integrated Delivery Technologies, Inc.

 

  (xv)

RESOURCE MANAGEMENT, INC. (dba MAXUS INVESTMENT GROUP).   Employees of Resource Management, Inc. or any of its subsidiaries, who became Employees on January 2, 2001 in connection with the merger of Resource Management, Inc, into Fifth Third Bancorp shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Resource Management, Inc. or its subsidiaries.

 

  (xvi)

CAPITAL HOLDINGS, INC.   Employees of Capital Holdings, Inc. or Capital Bank, N.A. who became Employees on or before the effective time of the merger of Capital Holdings, Inc. and Fifth Third Bancorp (i.e., the close of business on March 9, 2001) in connection with such merger, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Capital Holdings, Inc. or Capital Bank, N.A.

 

  (xvii)

W. LYMAN CASE & COMPANY.   Employees of W. Lyman Case & Company (“WLC”) who became Employees on the date WLC became an Affiliate of Fifth Third Bank in connection with such affiliation, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with WLC for the period prior to the date WLC became an Affiliate of Fifth Third Bank.

 

  (xviii)

VANGUARD FINANCIAL COMPANY.    Employees of Vanguard Financial Company who became Employees as of the effective time of the merger of Vanguard Financial Company into Fifth Third Bancorp, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Vanguard prior to such merger.

 

  (xix)

FIRST HORIZON NATIONAL CORPORATION .   Former employees of First Horizon National Corporation (or First Tennessee Bank National Association) (together “First Horizon”), who became Employees on or before May 3, 2008 in connection with Fifth Third Bancorp’s (and Fifth Third Bank’s) acquisition of certain assets of First Horizon, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with First Horizon.

 

AII - 3


  (xx)

FREEDOM BANK .       Former employees of Freedom Bank, who became Employees on December 22, 2008 in connection with Fifth Third Bank’s acquisition of certain assets of Freedom Bank, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Freedom Bank.

 

  (xxi)

SKIPJACK FINANCIAL SERVICES, INC. AND TRANSACTIVE ECOMMERCE SOLUTIONS, INC.    Former employees of Skipjack Financial Services, Inc. or Transactive Ecommerce Solutions, Inc., who became Employees on April 1, 2009 in connection with Fifth Third Bank’s acquisition of certain assets of Skipjack Financial Services, Inc. and Transactive Ecommerce Solutions, Inc., shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Skipjack Financial Services, Inc. and Transactive Ecommerce Solutions, Inc.

However, Section 3.4 of the Plan shall continue to apply. As such, notwithstanding such crediting of Service, an Employee who falls into an ineligible class of Employees, as described in Section 3.4, shall not be eligible to Participate in the Plan, or to make or receive allocations of contributions or forfeitures under the Plan.

2.          Crediting of Service .   Service with the predecessor employers described in paragraph 1 above shall be credited to such Employees specified in paragraph 1 above under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54 of the Plan.

 

AII - 4


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX III

THE FIRST-MASON BANK EMPLOYEES’ PROFIT SHARING PLAN

Effective December 31, 1982, The First-Mason Bank Employees’ Profit Sharing Plan (the “First-Mason Plan”) was merged into the Plan. The First-Mason Plan, as in effect prior to January 29, 1982, is a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under The First-Mason Plan shall count as Service under Section 2.54 under this Plan. The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the First-Mason Plan shall be reflected in the appropriate subaccount(s) in this Plan, as determined by the Administrator.

 

AIII - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX IV

BOONE STATE BANK PROFIT SHARING PLAN

1.          Predecessor Plan .   Effective December 31, 1986 (the “Merger Date”), the Boone State Bank Profit Sharing Plan (the “Boone State Plan”) was merged into the Plan. The Boone State Plan is a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under the Boone Stale Plan shall count as Service under Section 2.54 under this Plan.

2.          Accounting .   The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the Boone State Plan was previously accounted for under this Plan in a separate Boone State Account. Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Boone State Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

 

AIV - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

NEW PALESTINE BANK EMPLOYEES’ 401(k) PLAN

APPENDIX V

1.          Predecessor Plan .    Effective December 31, 1989 (the “Merger Date”), the New Palestine Bank Employees’ 401(k) Plan (the “New Palestine Plan”) merged into the Plan. The New Palestine Plan is a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under the New Palestine Plan shall count as Service under Section 2.54 under this Plan.

2.          Accounting .   Effective as of the Merger Date, amounts in a Participant’s “Salary Savings Account,” “Regular Account” and “Rollover Account” under the New Palestine Plan were reflected in this Plan in the same Participant’s Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account, “New Palestine Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan), and Rollover Account, respectively. Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s New Palestine Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

 

AV - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX VI

FIRST OHIO BANCSHARES, INC. STOCK PURCHASE, 401(k) AND SAVINGS PLAN

1.          Predecessor Plan .    Effective January 1, 1990, the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Stock Purchase, 401(k) and Savings Plan (the “First Ohio Plan”) became a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under the First Ohio Plan shall count as Service under Section 2.54 under this Plan.

2.          Accounting .     Under the applicable provisions of the Old Plan, trust-to-trust transfers were made on behalf of certain Participants from the First Ohio Plan to the Plan with the transfers reflected in the appropriate subaccounts under this Plan. Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s “Toledo Matching Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan) are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

 

AVI - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX VII

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS THRIFT PLAN,

AS ADOPTED BY THE CUMBERLAND FEDERAL SAVINGS BANK

1.          Predecessor Plan .    Effective August 27, 1994, the Financial Institutions Thrift Plan, as adopted by The Cumberland Federal Savings Bank (“The Cumberland Plan”), became a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under the Cumberland Plan shall count as Service under Section 2.54 under this Plan.

2.          Accounting .    In accordance with the terms of The Cumberland Plan and as directed by the Administrator, certain Participants with accounts in The Cumberland Plan elected to transfer those accounts and related plan assets to this Plan. Amounts in a Participant’s “Regular Account,” “401(k) Account” and “Rollover Account” under The Cumberland Plan initially were reflected in this Plan in the same Participant’s “Cumberland Regular Account,” “Cumberland 401(k) Account,” and “Cumberland Rollover Account” respectively (all prior subaccounts in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Cumberland Regular Account, Cumberland 401(k) Account and Cumberland Rollover Account are now reflected in his After-Tax Account, Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account and Rollover Account, respectively.

 

AVII - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX VIII

MUTUAL FEDERAL SAVINGS BANK RETIREMENT SAVINGS PLAN

1.          Predecessor Plan .    Effective as of the date the Administrator determined (the “Merger Date”), the Mutual Federal Savings Bank Retirement Savings Plan merged into the Plan. The Mutual Federal Savings Bank Retirement Savings Plan (the “Mutual Federal Plan”) is a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under the Mutual Federal Plan shall count as Service under Section 2.54 under this Plan.

2.          Accounting .  The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the Mutual Federal Plan was previously accounted for under this Plan in a “Mutual Federal Discretionary Contribution Account” (attributable to any discretionary employer contributions and forfeitures allocated to the Participant under the Mutual Federal Plan), a “Mutual Federal 401(k) Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Elective Deferral Contributions” under the Mutual Federal Plan), a “Mutual Federal Matching Contribution Account” (attributable to any “Matching Contributions” allocated to the Participant under the Mutual Federal Plan) and a “Mutual Federal Rollover Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Rollover Contributions” under the Mutual Federal Plan).

Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Mutual Federal Discretionary Contribution Account or Mutual Federal Matching Contribution Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account. Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Mutual Federal 401(k) Account and Mutual Federal Rollover Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account and Rollover Account, respectively.

 

AVIII - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX IX

FALLS SAVINGS BANK, FSB SALARY SAVINGS PLAN

1.         Predecessor Plan .   Effective as of April 30, 1996 (the “Merger Date”), the Falls Savings Bank, FSB Salary Savings Plan (the “Fall Savings Plan”) merged into the Plan. The Falls Savings Plan is a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under the Falls Savings Plan shall count as Service under Section 2.54 under this Plan.

2.         Accounting .   The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the Falls Savings Plan was previously accounted for under this Plan in a “Falls Savings Discretionary Contribution Account” (attributable to any discretionary employer contributions allocated to the Participant under the Falls Savings Plan), a “Falls Savings 401(k) Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Elective Contributions” under the Falls Savings Plan), a “Falls Savings Rollover Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Rollover Contributions” under the Falls Savings Plan) and a “Falls Savings Matching Contribution Account” (attributable to any “Matching Contributions” allocated to the Participant under the Falls Savings Plan).

Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Falls Savings Discretionary Contribution Account or Falls Savings Matching Contribution Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account. Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Falls Savings 401(k) Account or Falls Savings Rollover Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account and Rollover Account, respectively.

 

AIX- 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX X

NBD BANCORP, INC. EMPLOYEES’ SAVINGS AND INVESTMENT PLAN

1.         Predecessor Plan .   Upon the transfer referred to in paragraph 2 below, the NBD Bancorp, Inc. Employees’ Savings and Investment Plan (the “NBD Plan”) became a Predecessor Plan solely with respect to each Participant who had amounts transferred from the NBD Plan to this Plan pursuant to paragraph 2 below such that service taken into account under the NBD Plan for such Participants shall count as Service under Section 2.54 under this Plan.

2.         Accounting .  As of the transfer date determined by the Administrator, Participants who were Employees of an Employer on such transfer date and who had accounts in the NBD Plan had those accounts and related plan assets transferred to this Plan. Amounts in a Participant’s “Participant Contribution Account,” “Matching Contribution Account” and “Rollover Account” under the NBD Plan initially were reflected in this Plan in the same Participant’s “NBD Participant Contribution Account,” “NBD Matching Contribution Account” and “NBD Rollover Account,” respectively (all prior subaccounts in the Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s NBD Participant Contribution Account, NBD Matching Contribution Account and NBD Rollover Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account, Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account and Rollover Account, respectively.

 

AX- 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XI

CALIFORNIA FEDERAL EMPLOYEES’ INVESTMENT PLAN

1.         Past Service Credit .   Upon the transfer referred to in paragraph 2 below from the California Federal Employees’ Investment Plan (formerly known as the First Nationwide Employees’ Investment Plan) (the “Cal Fed Plan”), each Participant who had amounts transferred from the Cal Fed Plan to this Plan pursuant to paragraph 2 below was credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for the Participant’s service with First Nationwide Bank, a Federal Savings Bank (“FNB”). Service with FNB shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54 of the Plan.

2.         Accounting .  As of the transfer date determined by the Administrator, Participants who were Employees of an Employer on the fifth business day before the transfer date and who had accounts in the Cal Fed Plan had those accounts and related plan assets transferred to this Plan.

Amounts in a Participant’s “Prior Plan Salary Deferral Account,” “Company Matching Account” and “Prior Plan Matching Account,” “Profit Sharing Account,” “Rollover Account” and “Prior Plan After-Tax Account” under the Cal Fed Plan, initially were reflected in this Plan in the same Participant’s “Cal Fed Salary Deferral Account,” “Cal Fed Company Matching Account, “Cal Fed Profit Sharing Account,” “Cal Fed Rollover Account” and “Cal Fed After-Tax Account,” respectively (all prior subaccounts in this Plan).

Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Cal Fed Company Matching Account and Cal Fed Profit Sharing Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account. Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Cal Fed Salary Deferral Account, Cal Fed Rollover Account and Cal Fed After-Tax Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account, Rollover Account and After-Tax Account, respectively.

 

AXI-1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XII

FIFTH THIRD/THE OHIO COMPANY

AND

FIFTH THIRD INSURANCE AGENCY CORPORATION

1.           Past Service Credit .

(a)         Ohio Company Employees .     For purposes of this Appendix, “Ohio Company Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the effective time of the merger of The Ohio Company and Fifth Third Securities, Inc., was employed by The Ohio Company or any of its subsidiaries and who became an Employee as of the effective time of such merger. “Ohio Company Employee” also means an individual who would have met the foregoing criteria except for the fact that he became an Employee prior to that time but in connection with the merger of The Ohio Company and Fifth Third Securities, Inc.

(b)         Past Service Credit and Eligibility .   Ohio Company Employees shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with The Ohio Company and any of its subsidiaries. Service with The Ohio Company and its subsidiaries shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54 of the Plan. In no event shall there be any duplication of service for the same period.

2.           Trust-to-Trust Transfer from The Ohio Company Profit Sharing Plan .   As of the transfer date determined by Fifth Third Bank, individuals who had “Accounts” in The Ohio Company Profit Sharing Plan had those Accounts and related plan assets, except for any portion in the “Individual Direction Fund” in The Ohio Company Profit Sharing Plan, transferred to this Plan. Amounts transferred from a Participant’s “Profit Sharing Account” under The Ohio Company Profit Sharing Plan initially were reflected in the same Participant’s “Ohio Company Profit Sharing Account” under this Plan. Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Ohio Company Profit Sharing Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

3.           Merger of The Ohio Company Salary Investment Plan into the Plan .

(a)         Predecessor Plan .  Effective as of July 1, 1999 (the “Merger Date”), The Ohio Company Salary Investment Plan merged into the Plan. The Ohio Company Salary Investment Plan is a Predecessor Plan; provided, however, there shall be no duplication of Service for the same period of time, by reason of the crediting of Service under paragraph 1 above and the crediting of service under Section 2.54(a)(4) by reason of the designation of the Predecessor Plan.

 

AXII-1


(b)         Accounting .  The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under The Ohio Company Salary Investment Plan was previously accounted for under this Plan in an “Ohio Company SIP 401(k) Account” (attributable to his “Deferral Contributions” under The Ohio Company Salary Investment Plan), an “Ohio Company SIP Rollover Account” (attributable to a Participant’s rollover contributions (if any) under The Ohio Company Salary Investment Plan), and an “Ohio Company SIP Matching Contribution Account” (attributable to any “Matching Contributions” allocated to the participant under The Ohio Company Salary Investment Plan).

Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Ohio Company SIP 401(k) Account or Ohio Company SIP Rollover Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account and Rollover Account, respectively. The Ohio Company SIP Matching Contribution Account remains as a separate subaccount under the Plan.

 

AXII-2


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XIII

STATE SAVINGS BANK, CENTURY BANK

AND

STATE SAVINGS BANK, F.S.B.

1.         Past Service Credit.

(a)         State Savings Employees .  For purposes of this Appendix, “Stale Savings Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to June 19, 1998, was employed by State Savings Bank, Century Bank or State Savings Bank, F.S.B. and who became an Employee as of June 19, 1998. “State Savings Employee” also means an individual who would have met the foregoing criteria except for the fact that he became an Employee prior to June 19, 1998 but in connection with the acquisition of State Savings Company and subsidiaries by Fifth Third Bancorp.

(b)         Past Service Credit and Eligibility .    State Savings Employees shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with State Savings Company and any of its subsidiaries. Service with State Savings Company and its subsidiaries shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54 of the Plan. In no event shall there be any duplication of service for the same period.

2.           Merger of the State Savings Bank Profit Sharing Plan into the Plan .

(a)         Merger Date .   Effective as of October 1, 1999 (the “Merger Date”), the State Savings Bank Profit Sharing Plan (the “State Savings Plan”) merged into the Plan. The State Savings Plan is a Predecessor Plan; provided, however, there shall be no duplication of Service for the same period of time, by reason of the crediting of Service under paragraph 1 above and the crediting of service under Section 2.54(a)(4) by reason of the designation of the Predecessor Plan.

(b)         Accounting .   The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the State Savings Plan was previously accounted for under this Plan in a “State Savings Employee Pre-Tax Contribution Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Employee Pre-Tax Contribution Account” under the State Savings Plan), a “State Savings Employer Matching Contribution Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Employer Matching Contribution Account” under the State Savings Plan), a “State Savings Employer Nonelective Contribution Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Employer Nonelective Contribution Account” under the State Savings Plan), a “State Savings Employee After-Tax Contribution Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Employee After-Tax Contribution Account” under the State Savings Plan) and a “State Savings Rollover Contribution Account” (attributable to a Participant’s “Rollover Contribution Account” under the State Savings Plan).

 

AXIII-1


Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s State Savings Employer Matching Contribution Account and State Savings Employer Nonelective Contribution Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account. Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s State Savings Employee Pre-Tax Contribution Account, State Savings Employee After-Tax Contribution Account and State Savings Rollover Contribution Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account, After-Tax Account and Rollover Account, respectively.

 

AXIII-2


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XIV

CITIZENS FEDERAL BANK, F.S.B.

1.           Past Service Credit.

(a)         CitFed Employees .     For purposes of this Appendix, “CitFed Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to June 26, 1998, was employed by CitFed Bancorp, Inc. or any of its subsidiaries and who became an Employee as of June 26, 1998. “CitFed Employee” also means an individual who would have met the foregoing criteria except for the fact that he became an Employee prior to June 26, 1998 but in connection with the acquisition of CitFed Bancorp, Inc. and subsidiaries by Fifth Third Bancorp.

(b)         Past Service Credit and Eligibility .   CitFed Employees shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with CitFed Bancorp, Inc. and its subsidiaries. Service with CitFed Bancorp, Inc. and its subsidiaries shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54 of the Plan. In no event shall there be any duplication of service for the same period.

2.           Merger of the Citizens Federal Bank, F.S.B. and Related Companies Amended and Restated Savings and Investment 401(k) Plan into the Plan .

(a)         Merger Date .   Effective as of October 1, 1999 (the “Merger Date”), the Citizens Federal Bank, F.S.B. and Related Companies Amended and Restated Savings and Investment 401(k) Plan (the “Citizens Federal Plan”) merged into the Plan. The Citizens Federal Plan is a Predecessor Plan; provided, however, there shall be no duplication of Service for the same period of time, by reason of the crediting of Service under paragraph 1 above and the crediting of service under Section 2.54(a)(4) by reason of the designation of the Predecessor Plan.

(b)         Accounting .  The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the Citizens Federal Plan was previously accounted for under this Plan in a “Citizens Federal Participant’s Elective Account” (attributable to a “Participant’s Elective Account” under the Citizens Federal Plan), a “Citizens Federal Participant’s Account” (attributable to a “Participant’s Account” and “Restricted Stock Account” under the Citizens Federal Plan) and a “Citizens Federal Participant’s Rollover Account” (attributable to a “Participant’s Rollover Account” under the Citizens Federal Plan).

Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Citizens Federal Participant’s Elective Account, Citizens Federal Participant’s Account and Citizens Federal Participant’s Rollover Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account, After-Tax Account and Rollover Account, respectively.

 

AXIV-1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XV

ENTERPRISE FEDERAL SAVINGS BANK

AND

ENTERPRISE FEDERAL BANCORP, INC.

EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN

1.           Past Service Credit .

(a)         Enterprise Federal Employees .  For purposes of this Appendix, “Enterprise Federal Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to May 14, 1999, was employed by Enterprise Federal Savings Bank or Enterprise Federal Bancorp, Inc. and who became an Employee as of May 14, 1999. “Enterprise Federal Employee” also means an individual who would have met the foregoing criteria except for the fact that he became an Employee prior to May 14, 1999 but in connection with the merger of Enterprise Federal Savings Bank and Enterprise Federal Bancorp into Fifth Third Bank and Fifth Third Bancorp.

(b)         Past Service Credit and Eligibility .  Enterprise Federal Employees shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Enterprise Federal Savings Bank, Enterprise Federal Bancorp, Inc. and any predecessor employer for which Enterprise Federal Savings Bank has credited service. Such Service shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54 of the Plan. The transition rules in Section 2.54 (a)(4) of the Plan shall have no effect with respect to Enterprise Federal Employees. In no event shall there be any duplication of service for the same period.

2.           Merger of Enterprise Federal ESOP into the Plan .

(a)         Merger Date .  Effective as of July 31, 1999 (the “Plan Merger Date”), the Enterprise Federal Bancorp, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan (the “Enterprise ESOP”) merged into the Plan. The Enterprise ESOP is a Predecessor Plan; provided, however, there shall be no duplication of Service for the same period of time, by reason of the crediting of Service under paragraph 1 above and the crediting of service under Section 2.54(a)(4) by reason of the designation of the Predecessor Plan.

(b)         Accounting .  The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the Enterprise ESOP was previously accounted for under this Plan in an “Enterprise ESOP Account” (which was attributable to his “Company Stock Account” under the Enterprise ESOP). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Enterprise ESOP Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

 

AXV-1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XVI

CNB BANCSHARES, INC.

AND

SUBSIDIARIES

1.           Past Service Credit .

(a)         CNB Employee .  For purposes of this Appendix, “CNB Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the merger of CNB Bancshares, Inc. into Fifth Third Bancorp, was employed by CNB Bancshares, Inc., or any subsidiary of CNB Bancshares, Inc.

(b)         Past Service Credit and Eligibility .     Each CNB Employee who was an Employee of an Employer on January 1, 2000 (and who was an employee of any subsidiary of Fifth Third Bancorp on the first business day after the merger of CNB Bancshares, Inc. into Fifth Third Bancorp), shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for his service with CNB Bancshares, Inc., Civitas Bank (now know as Fifth Third Bank, Indiana), Wedgewood Partners, Inc., Civitas Insurance and any other subsidiary of CNB Bancshares, Inc. Such Service shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54 of the Plan. In no event shall there be any duplication of service for the same period.

2.           Merger of the Citizens Incentive Savings Plan into the Plan .

(a)         Merger Date .  Effective as of August 24, 2001 (the “Merger Date”), the Citizens Incentive Savings Plan (the “CISP”) merged into the Plan. The CISP is a Predecessor Plan; provided, however, there shall be no duplication of Service for the same period of time, by reason of the crediting of Service under paragraph 1 above and the crediting of service under Section 2.54(a)(4) by reason of the designation of the Predecessor Plan.

(b)         Accounting .  The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the CISP is accounted for under this Plan as follows:

(1)        Amounts attributable to an “Employee Deferral Account” under the CISP are reflected in the Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account in this Plan.

(2)        Amounts attributable to an “Employer Matching Contribution Account” under the CISP were previously reflected in the “CISP Matching Contribution Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s CISP Matching Contribution Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

(3)        Amounts attributable to an “Employer Discretionary Contribution Account” under the CISP were previously reflected in the “CISP Discretionary Contribution

 

AXVI - 1


Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s CISP Discretionary Contribution Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

(4)        Amounts attributable to an “Employee Rollover Contribution Account” under the CISP are reflected in the Rollover Account in this Plan.

(5)        Amounts attributable to a “Merger Account” under the CISP were previously reflected in the “CISP Merger Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan) Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s CISP Merger Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

 

AXVI - 2


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XVII

OTTAWA FINANCIAL CORPORATION

AND SUBSIDIARIES

1.       Past Service Credit .

(a)       Ottawa Employee .     Effective as of the “Effective Time” as defined in the Affiliation Agreement between Ottawa Financial Corporation and Fifth Third Bancorp (the “Company Merger Date”), Ottawa Financial Corporation merged into Fifth Third Bancorp and its subsidiary, AmeriBank, merged into Fifth Third Bank, Indiana. For purposes of this Appendix, “Ottawa Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the Company Merger Date, was employed by Ottawa Financial Corporation or any subsidiary of Ottawa Financial Corporation.

(b)       Past Service Credit and Eligibility .  Effective as of the Company Merger Date, Ottawa Employees shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54 of the Plan for their service with Ottawa Financial Corporation, its subsidiaries and any predecessor employer for which Ottawa Financial Corporation or its subsidiaries have credited service. Such Service shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54 of the Plan.

2.       Merger of Ottawa Financial Corporation ESOP into the Plan .

(a)       Merger Date .    Effective as of March 26, 2001 (the “Plan Merger Date”), the Ottawa Financial Corporation Employee Stock Ownership Plan (the “Ottawa ESOP”) merged into the Plan. The Ottawa ESOP is a Predecessor Plan; provided, however, there shall be no duplication of Service for the same period of time, by reason of the crediting of Service under paragraph (b) above and the crediting of service under Section 2.54(a)(4) by reason of the designation of the Predecessor Plan.

(b)       Accounting .  The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under Ottawa ESOP was previously accounted for under this Plan in an “Ottawa ESOP Participant Account” (which was attributable to his “Employee Stock Ownership Account” under the Ottawa ESOP). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s Ottawa ESOP Participant Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account.

 

AXVII - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XVIII

OLD KENT FINANCIAL CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

1.           Merger of Old Kent Thrift Plan .

(a)         Merger .  Effective as of the close of business on December 31, 2001 (the “Merger Date”), the Old Kent Thrift Plan is completely amended and restated and merged into this Plan.

(b)         Predecessor Plan and Crediting of Past Service .  The Old Kent Thrift Plan is a Predecessor Plan. Past service shall be credited under Section 2.54(a)(4) with respect to such Predecessor Plan, which shall be interpreted and operated as follows. Service under such Predecessor Plan shall be treated as Service under this Plan based on such Predecessor Plan’s hour counting methodology through that Predecessor Plan’s computation period ending December 31, 2001. Thereafter, Service shall be credited under this Plan’s elapsed time method treating January 1, 2002 as the Participant’s “Employment Commencement Date” (for individuals who are Employees on January 1, 2002). In all events, there shall be no duplication of Service for the same period.

(c)         Accounting .    The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the Old Kent Thrift Plan is accounted for under this Plan as follows:

(1)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Thrift Plus Account” under the Old Kent Thrift Plan are reflected in his Old Kent Pre-Tax Account in this Plan.

(2)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Regular Account” under the Old Kent Thrift Plan are reflected in his Old Kent After-Tax Account in this Plan.

(3)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Matching Account” under the Old Kent Thrift Plan are reflected in his Old Kent Matching Account in this Plan.

(4)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Rollover/Transfer Account” under the Old Kent Thrift Plan are reflected in his Old Kent Rollover/Transfer Account in this Plan.

 

AXVIII - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XIX

USB, INC.

1.           Definitions .

(a)         USB Employee .  For purposes of this Appendix, “USB Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the merger of USB, Inc. contemplated by the Agreement and Conditional Plan of Merger dated February 21, 2001 among Fifth Third Financial Corporation, FTFC, Inc. and USB, Inc., was employed by USB, Inc. as an employee and became an Employee in connection with such merger.

(b)         Active USB Employee .    For purposes of this Appendix, “Active USB Employee” means a USB Employee who, immediately prior to the merger was actively contributing under the section 401(k) feature of the USB, Inc. 401(k) Savings Plan (the “USB Plan”).

2.           Past Service Credit .    Effective January 1, 2002, each USB Employee who is an Employee of an Employer on January 1, 2002, shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54(a)(1), (2) and (3) of the Plan for his service with USB, Inc. Such Service shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54(a)(1), (2) and (3) of the Plan.

 

AXIX - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XX

FRANKLIN FINANCIAL CORPORATION

Franklin Employee .    For purposes of this Appendix, “Franklin Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the merger of Franklin Financial Corporation on June 11, 2004, as contemplated by the Affiliation Agreement dated July 23, 2002 among Fifth Third Bancorp, Fifth Third Financial Corporation and Franklin Financial Corporation, was employed by Franklin Financial Corporation or a subsidiary of Franklin Financial Corporation, as an employee and became an Employee immediately upon the completion of such merger on June 11, 2004.

Past Service Credit .    Effective June 11, 2004, each Franklin Employee shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54(a)(1), (2) and (3) of the Plan for his service with Franklin Financial Corporation or any subsidiary of Franklin Financial Corporation. Such Service shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54(a)(1), (2) and (3) of the Plan.

 

AXX - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XXI

FIRST NATIONAL BANKSHARES OF FLORIDA. INC. SALARY SAVINGS PLAN

1.            Merger of First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. Salary Savings Plan .    Effective as of January 1, 2005 upon the merger of First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. into Fifth Third Financial Corporation (the “Merger Date”), the First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. Salary Savings Plan (the “FNB Plan”) is completely amended and restated and merged into this Plan. The FNB Plan is a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under the FNB Plan shall count as service under Section 2.54 of this Plan.

2.            Accounting .    The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the FNB Plan is accounted for under this Plan as follows:

(a)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Elective Deferral Contributions” under the FNB Plan were previously reflected in his “FNB 401(k) Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s FNB 401(k) Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account in this Plan.

(b)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Qualified Matching Contributions” (“Matching Contributions” made on or after January 1, 2004) under the FNB Plan, were previously reflected in his “FNB Qualified Matching Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s FNB Qualified Matching Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account in this Plan.

(c)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Matching Contributions” made before January 1, 2004 under the FNB Plan were previously reflected in his “FNB Pre-2004 Matching Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s FNB Pre-2004 Matching Account are now reflected in his FNB Employer Contribution Account in this Plan.

(d)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Additional Contributions” under the FNB Plan other than such amounts credited to the FNB Pre-Spin-Off Additional Contribution Account, were previously reflected in his “FNB Additional Contribution Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s FNB Additional Contribution Account are now reflected in his FNB Employer Contribution Account in this Plan.

(e)        Amounts attributable to “Additional Contributions” under the FNB Plan, which immediately after the spin-off of First National Bankshares of Florida, Inc. by F.N.B. Corporation were invested in F.N.B. Corporation stock, were previously reflected in his “FNB Pre-Spin-Off Additional Contribution Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s FNB Pre-Spin-Off Additional Contribution Account are now reflected in his FNB Employer Contribution Account in this Plan.

(f)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Rollover Contributions under the FNB Plan were previously reflected in his “FNB Rollover Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s FNB Rollover Account are now reflected in his Rollover Account in this Plan.

 

AXXI - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XXII

CARD MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

1.         CMC Employee .  For purposes of this Appendix, “CMC Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the acquisition of stock of Card Management Corporation on January 19, 2006 pursuant to the Stock Purchase Agreement dated December 22, 2005 among Fifth Third Bank, Card Management Corporation and its shareholders, was employed by Card Management Corporation as an employee and became an “Employee” in connection with such acquisition.

2.         Past Service Credit .  Effective January 19, 2006, each CMC Employee shall be credited with Vesting Service under Section 2.60 of the Plan for his service with Card Management Corporation. Such service shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54(a)(1), (2) and (3).

 

AXXII - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XXIII

W. LYMAN CASE & COMPANY 401(k) PROFIT SHARING PLAN

1.           Merger of W. Lyman Case & Company 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan .  Effective as of November 2, 2007 (the “Merger Date”), the W. Lyman Case & Company 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan (the “WLC Plan”) is merged into this Plan. The WLC Plan is a Predecessor Plan such that service taken into account under the WLC Plan shall count as Service under Section 2.54 of this Plan; provided, however, there shall be no duplication of Service under the Plan for the same period of time.

2.           Accounting .   The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the WLC Plan is accounted for under this Plan as follows:

(a)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “elective deferrals” under the WLC Plan were previously reflected in his “WLC 401(k) Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s WLC 401(k) Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account in this Plan.

(b)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “matching contributions” under the WLC Plan were previously reflected in his “WLC Employer Matching Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s WLC Employer Matching Account are now reflected in his Prior Plan Employer Contribution Account in this Plan.

(c)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “rollover contributions” under the WLC Plan were previously reflected in his “WLC Rollover Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s WLC Rollover Account are now reflected in his Rollover Account in this Plan.

 

AXXIII - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XXIV

R-G CROWN BANK, FSB

1.         Crown Employee .  For purposes of this Appendix, “Crown Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the acquisition of stock of R-G Crown Bank, FSB on November 2, 2007, pursuant to the Stock Purchase Agreement dated May 20, 2007, among Fifth Third Financial Corporation, R-G Crown Bank, FSB, R&G Financial Corporation, and R&G Acquisition Holdings Corporation, was employed by R-G Crown Bank, FSB as an employee and became an “Employee” in connection with such acquisition.

2.         Past Service Credit .  Effective November 2, 2007, each Crown Employee shall be credited with Service under Section 2.54(a)(5) of the Plan for his service with R-G Crown Bank, FSB. Such service shall be determined under rules comparable to those under Section 2.54(a)(1), (2) and (3). Such Service shall be taken into account in determining Eligibility Service and Vesting Service.

 

AXXIV - 1


FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

401(k) SAVINGS PLAN

APPENDIX XXV

FIRST CHARTER CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

1.           Merger of First Charter Corporation Retirement Savings Plan .    Effective as of July 10, 2008 (the “Merger Date”), the First Charter Corporation Retirement Savings Plan (the “First Charter Plan”) is completely amended and restated and merged into this Plan.

2.           Predecessor Plan and Crediting of Past Service .    The First Charter Plan is a Predecessor Plan. Past service shall be credited as provided in (a) below for purposes of determining a Participant’s nonforfeitable percentage under the Plan of those subaccounts subject to a vesting schedule. Past service shall be credited as provided in (b) below for purposes of determining a Participant’s eligibility under Section 3.1 of the Plan (and paragraph 1(d) above).

(a)         Crediting of Past Service for Vesting Purposes .     For purposes of determining a Participant’s Vesting Years, Service shall be determined under Section 2.54(a)(4) with respect to the First Charter Plan. As such, Service under such Predecessor Plan shall be treated as Service under this Plan based on such Predecessor Plan’s hour counting methodology through that Predecessor Plan’s computation period ending December 31, 2007. Thereafter, the transition rule in Section 2.54(a)(4)(B) shall apply, and Service shall be credited under this Plan’s elapsed time method. In no event shall there be any duplication of Service for the same period.

(b)         Crediting of Past Service for Eligibility .  For purposes of determining a Participant’s “Eligibility Service,” Section 2.54(a)(4) shall be disregarded. Instead, a Participant’s past service with First Charter Corporation or any subsidiary of First Charter Corporation, as well as service with any such entity after it became an Affiliate, shall be taken into account under the elapsed time method under rules comparable to the rules in Section 2.54(a)(1), (2) and (3) of the Plan. In all events there shall be no duplication of service for the same period.

The Administrator shall have the sole power and authority to determine Service under the foregoing.

3.           Accounting .   The portion of a Participant’s Account attributable to his accrued benefit under the First Charter Plan is accounted for under this Plan as follows:

(a)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Deferral Subaccount” under the First Charter Plan were previously reflected in his “First Charter 401(k) Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s First Charter 401(k) Account are now reflected in his Section 401(k) Salary Deferral Account in this Plan.

(b)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Extra Savings Subaccount” under the First Charter Plan were previously reflected in his “First Charter After-Tax Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s First Charter After-Tax Account are now reflected in his After-Tax Account in this Plan.

 

AXXV - 1


(c)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Company Discretionary Contribution Account” under the First Charter Plan were previously reflected in his “First Charter Discretionary Contribution Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s First Charter Discretionary Contribution Account are now reflected in his First Charter Employer Contribution Account in this Plan.

(d)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Match Subaccount,” under the First Charter Plan were previously reflected in his “First Charter Matching Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s First Charter Matching Account are now reflected in his First Charter Employer Contribution Account in this Plan.

(e)        Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Bank Savings Subaccount” under the First Charter Plan were previously reflected in his “First Charter Qualified Nonelective Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s First Charter Qualified Nonelective Account are now reflected in his Qualified Non-Elective Contribution Account in this Plan.

(f)         Amounts attributable to a Participant’s “Rollover Subaccount” under the First Charter Plan, were previously reflected in his “First Charter Rollover Account” (a prior subaccount in this Plan). Any amounts remaining in a Participant’s First Charter Rollover Account are now reflected in his Rollover Account in this Plan.

 

AXXV - 2

 

Exhibit 10.8            

 

 

THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

 

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

 

(as amended and restated effective as of January 1, 2015)

 

 

 

 

 


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

(as amended and restated effective as of January 1, 2015)

Table of Contents

Articles

 

1. Introduction and Purpose
2. Definitions
3. Eligibility and Participation
4. Accrual of Retirement Benefits
5. Vesting
6. Participant’s Entitlement to Benefits
7. Form of Payment to Participant
8. Pre-Retirement Death Benefits
9. Limitations on Benefits
10. Contingent Restrictions on Benefits
11. Funding
12. Administration
13. Amendment and Termination
14. Top-Heavy Rules
15. Miscellaneous


ARTICLE 1

INTRODUCTION AND PURPOSE

1.1         Amendment and Restatement .  Fifth Third Bank hereby amends and restates The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Retirement Plan in its entirety, effective as of January 1, 2015, provided however, such other effective dates as are specified in the Plan for other particular provisions, shall be applicable.

1.2         Purposes of the Plan .  The purposes of the Plan are to provide retirement and other benefits for Participants and their respective Beneficiaries. Except as otherwise provided by Sections 11.2 and 13.2, and by law, the assets of the Plan shall be held for the exclusive purpose of providing benefits to Participants and their beneficiaries and defraying reasonable expenses of administering the Plan, and it shall be impossible for any part of the assets or income of the Plan to be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than such exclusive purposes.

 

1-1


ARTICLE 2

DEFINITIONS

As used in the Plan, the following terms, when capitalized, shall have the following meanings, except when otherwise indicated by the context:

2.1        “ Accrued Benefit ” means the amount determined under Section 4.2.

2.2        “ Actuarial Equivalent ” means an alternative benefit or payment which has a one-sum value equivalent to the one-sum value of the benefit or payment which it replaces, computed on the basis of the following actuarial assumptions:

(a)        For purposes of determining the Actuarial Equivalent of an alternative benefit or payment other than a lump sum:

 

  Interest:

7%

  Mortality:

1971 Group Annuity Mortality Table as it applies to female lives

(b)        Effective for benefits with a Benefit Commencement Date (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid) of January 1, 2008 or later, and subject to (c) below, the Actuarial Equivalent lump sum shall be determined using whichever of the following results in the greater lump sum:

(1)        the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation’s lump sum interest rate for private-sector payments as of the first day of the Plan Year which contains the Benefit Commencement Date (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid), and the mortality table specified in (a) above.

(2)        (A)        the applicable mortality table prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury under section 417(e)(3)(B) of the Code. Such table shall be based on the mortality table (described in section 430(h)(3)(A) of the Code without regard to (C) or (D) of such section), modified as appropriate by the Secretary of the Treasury; and

            (B)         the “Applicable Interest Rate” determined for the first calendar month preceding the Plan Year in which the Benefit Commencement Date (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid) falls. For this purpose, “Applicable Interest Rate” means the adjusted first, second and third segment rates as referred to and as determined in accordance with section 417(e)(3)(C) and (D) of the Code.

(c)        In the case of a Participant who retires or is retired on or after his attainment of Early Retirement Age, for Benefit Commencement Dates of any January 1, February 1 or March 1, the Actuarial Equivalent lump sum shall be the greatest of the lump sum determined under (b) above or determined using whichever of the following results in the greater lump sum:

(1)        the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation’s lump sum interest rate for private-sector payments as of the first day of the Plan Year preceding the Plan Year which contains said January 1, February 1 or March 1, and the mortality table specified in (a) above.

(2)        the “Applicable Interest Rate” as defined in (b)(2)(B) above determined for the first calendar month preceding the Plan Year that immediately precedes the Plan Year in which such January 1, February 1 or March 1 falls (e.g., for a Benefit Commencement Date of January 1, 2002, the Applicable Interest Rate for December 2000) and the mortality table specified in (b)(2)(A) above.

 

2-1


2.3         Administrator” or “Plan Administrator means the Fifth Third Bank Pension, Profit Sharing and Medical Plan Committee. Members of said Committee shall be appointed by and serve at the pleasure of the President and Chief Executive Officer of Fifth Third Bank. A reference to the Plan Administrator includes, where applicable, its delegate.

2.4         Affiliate means each of the following for such period of time as is applicable under section 414 of the Code:

 (a)        a corporation which, together with an Employer, is a member of a controlled group of corporations within the meaning of section 414(b) of the Code (as modified by section 415(h) thereof for the purposes of Article 9) and the applicable regulations thereunder;

 (b)        a trade or business (whether or not incorporated) with which an Employer is under common control within the meaning of section 414(c) of the Code (as modified by section 415(h) thereof for the purposes of Article 9) and the applicable regulations thereunder;

 (c)        an organization which, together with an Employer, is a member of an affiliated service group (as defined in section 414(m) of the Code); and

 (d)        any other entity required to be aggregated with an Employer under section 414(o) of the Code.

2.5        “ Average Monthly Earnings ,” as of any point in time, means the average, on a monthly basis, of a Participant’s Earnings for the highest 5 consecutive Plan Years out of the 10 Plan Years beginning before the current Plan Year. If, as of a particular date, a Participant’s entire period of service is less than 5 consecutive Plan Years out of such period, then the Participant’s Average Monthly Earnings means the average, on a monthly basis, of a Participant’s Earnings for his entire period of service for the Employer.

2.6        “ Beneficiary ” means the person or persons entitled to receive the distributions, if any, payable under the Plan upon or after a Participant’s death, to such person or persons as such Participant’s Beneficiary. Each Participant may designate a Beneficiary by filing the proper form with the Administrator. A designation shall be effective upon said filing, provided that it is so filed during such Participant’s lifetime. With respect to certain optional forms of benefit under Section 7.3 or an Appendix, a Participant may designate one or more contingent Beneficiaries to receive any distributions after the death of a prior Beneficiary and may change his Beneficiary designation from time to time; provided however, the spousal consent rules of Section 7.2(c)(4) must be satisfied.

 

2-2


2.7         “ Benefit Commencement Date ” means the date as of which a benefit commences, as determined under the applicable provision of Article 6 or any applicable Appendix.

2.8         “ Board ” or “ Board of Directors ” means the Board of Directors of Fifth Third Bank.

2.9         (a)        “ Break in Service ” means:

 (1)        before January 1, 1985, one or more consecutive Plan Years during one or more days of the first of which a person is not an Employee and in each of which he does not complete more than 500 Hours of Service; and

 (2)        after December 31, 1984, six or more consecutive Plan Years during one or more days of the first of which a person is not an Employee and in each of which he does not complete more than 500 Hours of Service; provided however, if as of December 31, 1984, service was not required to be taken into account under the provisions of section 410(a) or 411(a) of the Code, then this paragraph (2) shall not cause such service to be taken into account.

              (b)         (1)        Solely for purposes of determining whether a Break in Service has occurred in a computation period, an individual who incurs an absence from work, beginning after December 31, 1984, for maternity or paternity reasons (as defined in (2) below) shall receive credit for the Hours of Service which would otherwise have been credited to such individual but for such absence, or in any case in which such Hours of Service cannot be determined, 8 Hours of Service per day of such absence, and such Hours of Service shall be credited to the computation period in which the absence begins if such crediting would prevent a Break in Service in that computation period or, in any other case, to the following computation period.

 (2)        For purposes of (1) above, an absence for maternity or paternity reasons means an absence:

 (A)        by reason of the pregnancy of the individual;

 (B)        by reason of the birth of a child of the individual;

 (C)        by reason of the placement of a child with the individual in connection with the adoption of such child by the individual; or

 (D)        for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement.

2.10        “ Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended at the particular time applicable. A reference to a section of the Code shall include said section and any comparable section or sections of any future legislation that amends, supplements or supersedes said section.

2.11        “ Earliest Retirement Age ” means the earliest date on which a Participant could elect to receive retirement benefits under the Plan.

2.12        “ Early Retirement Age ” means age 55 and at least 5 Vesting Years.

 

2-3


2.13        “ Earnings ” means the Participant’s base pay during the Plan Year, subject to the Earnings Limit; provided that for any Participant whose termination of employment with an Employer is on or after September 1, 1996, Earnings shall include variable compensation, but not overtime.

2.14        (a)      “ Earnings Limit ” means the following:

 (1)        For any Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1989 and before January 1, 1994, a Participant’s Earnings taken into account for such Plan Year shall not exceed $200,000, as adjusted by the Secretary of Treasury under section 415(d) of the Code.

 (2)        For any Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1994, a Participant’s Earnings taken into account for such Plan Year shall not exceed $150,000, as adjusted in accordance with section 401(a)(17)(B) of the Code.

              (b)       With respect to a Participant whose Accrued Benefit on or after January 1, 1994 is based upon Earnings for any Plan Year beginning prior to January 1, 1994 that is in excess of the adjusted $150,000 limitation in paragraph (a)(2) above, his Accrued Benefit shall not be less than the greater of:

 (1)        his Accrued Benefit determined as of December 31, 1993;

 (2)        his Accrued Benefit determined by applying the adjusted $150,000 limitation to all Plan Years taken into account for benefit accrual purposes; or

 (3)        the sum of:

 (A)        his Accrued Benefit determined as of December 31, 1993; and

 (B)        his Accrued Benefit determined by applying the adjusted $150,000 limitation only to Plan Years taken into account for benefit accrual purposes beginning on and after January 1, 1994.

  (c)       Effective for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the family aggregation rules previously in effect for this purpose no longer apply.

  (d)       If a Participant’s Earnings for the entire Plan Year are not taken into account, then the Earnings Limit for such Plan Year shall be multiplied by the fraction of the Plan Year for which his Earnings are taken into account.

  (e)       The Earnings Limit shall be inapplicable to the extent provided in IRS Notice 88-131 (or other IRS pronouncements).

  (f)        EGTRRA Modification .

 (1)        Affected Participants .     This Section 2.14(f) shall apply solely to a Participant who, as of January 1, 2002, is a Grandfathered Employee, as defined in Section 3.3(b) of the Plan (who, therefore, is actively employed as an Employee and has not previously

 

2-4


received a distribution from the Plan). In no event shall this Section 2.14(f) apply to a Participant whose benefits are determined under the Old Kent Plan Document, as referred to in Appendix XXII of the Old Plan. In no event shall this Section 2.14(f) have any applicability in determining any Predecessor Plan Benefit.

(2)         Increase in Limit .   For Participants to whom this Section 2.14(f) applies, the annual limitation on Earnings taken into account in determining benefit accruals in any Plan Year beginning after December 31, 2001, shall not exceed $200,000.

(3)         Cost-of-Living Adjustment .    The $200,000 limit in (2) above shall be adjusted for cost-of-living increases in accordance with section 401(a)(17)(B) of the Code.

(4)         Compensation Limit for Prior Determination Periods .    In determining benefit accruals in Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001 for Participants to whom this Section 2.14(f) applies, the annual limitation in (2) above shall also apply to Plan Years beginning before January 1, 2002.

2.15         “ Effective Date ” means January 1, 2015.

2.16         “ Employee ” means an individual who is employed by an Employer and who is considered by the Employer in its sole and absolute discretion to be an Employee for purposes of the Plan. An individual who performs services for the Employer as an independent contractor, leased employee, employee of a temporary agency or in any other capacity other than as an employee of an Employer shall not be considered an Employee for purposes of the Plan. A determination that an individual is an employee of the Employer for other purposes such as employment tax purposes, shall have no bearing whatsoever on the determination of whether the individual is an Employee under the Plan if the Employer does not consider the individual to be its Employee for purposes of the Plan. As provided in an applicable Appendix, certain individuals may be excluded from the term “Employee.”

2.17        “ Employer ” means Fifth Third Bank and each other subsidiary (direct or indirect) of Fifth Third Bancorp except for any such subsidiary excluded under the terms of the Plan (including an Appendix). An entity shall not be considered an Employer either before or after the time it is a subsidiary (direct or indirect) of Fifth Third Bancorp.

2.18        “ ERISA ” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended at the particular time applicable. A reference to a section of ERISA shall include said section and any comparable section or sections of any future legislation that amends, supplements or supersedes said section.

2.19        “ Five-Percent Owner ” means any person who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of sections 318 and 416 of the Code) more than 5 percent of the outstanding stock of an Employer or stock possessing more than 5 percent of the total combined voting power of all stock of an Employer.

 

2-5


2.20      (a)          Hour of Service ” means each of the following, determined from records of hours worked and hours for which payment is made or due, provided that the same hour shall not be counted more than once:

(1)        each hour for which an individual is paid, or entitled to payment, for work for an Employer, which hours shall be credited to such individual for the computation period or periods in which the duties are performed;

(2)        each hour for which an individual is paid, or entitled to payment, by an Employer on account of a period of time during which no work is performed (irrespective of whether his employment relationship has terminated) due to vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity (including disability), layoff, jury duty, military duty or leave of absence, but excluding any payments which solely reimburse him for medical or medically related expenses and excluding any payments made or due under a plan maintained solely for the purposes of complying with applicable worker’s compensation or unemployment compensation or disability insurance laws; provided however, no more than 501 Hours of Service shall be credited under this paragraph for any single continuous period (whether or not such period occurs in a single computation period); and provided further that Hours of Service under this paragraph shall be calculated and credited pursuant to section 2530.200b-2 of the Department of Labor Regulations which are incorporated herein by this reference;

(3)        each hour for which back pay, irrespective of mitigation of damages, is either awarded or agreed to by an Employer; provided however, that the same Hours of Service shall not be credited both under paragraph (1) or paragraph (2), as the case may be, and under this paragraph (3); and provided further, that Hours of Service for back pay awarded or agreed to with respect to periods described in paragraph (2) shall be subject to the limitations set forth therein and shall be calculated pursuant to the regulations referred to therein; and provided further, that these Hours of Service shall be credited to such individual for the computation period or periods to which the award or agreement pertains rather than the computation period in which the award, agreement or payment is made;

(4)        each regularly scheduled hour of work for which an employee would have been compensated during Military Service if his employment status immediately prior thereto had continued; and

(5)        each regularly scheduled hour of work for which an employee would have been compensated during a Leave of Absence if his employment status immediately prior thereto had continued; provided that such Hours of Service shall be counted only for purposes of determining whether there has been a Break in Service.

(b)          Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, in determining an employee’s service, he shall be entitled to such credit, if any, as is required by federal law.

2.21      “ Leave of Absence ” means the period of time while an individual is on an Employer approved leave of absence, without being paid by an Employer, up to a maximum of 2 years, provided he returns to the employment of an Employer on or before the end of such leave of absence and provided further that all such leaves shall be granted on a uniform, nondiscriminatory and consistently followed basis for persons in similar circumstances.

2.22      “ Military Service ” means, with respect to a person employed immediately prior thereto by an Employer, the period of time that he spends in the Armed Forces of the United States, or

 

2-6


its equivalent recognized pursuant to federal law, provided he returns to the service of an Employer within such period, if any, as is then provided by law for the protection of his reemployment rights, and provided he has not been employed elsewhere before returning to work for an Employer.

2.23        “ Normal Retirement Age ” means, except as otherwise provided in an applicable Appendix, the date on which a Participant has both reached age 65 and completed 5 Vesting Years; provided however, effective as of January 1, 1988, with respect to Participants with an Hour of Service on or after January 1, 1988, a Participant’s Normal Retirement Age shall in no event be later than the later of the time a Participant attains age 65 or the 5th anniversary of the time the Participant commenced participation in the Plan (or any Predecessor Plan).

2.24        “ Normal Retirement Benefit ” has the meaning determined under Section 4.1.

2.25        “ Normal Retirement Date ” means the first day of the month coinciding with or next following a Participant’s attainment of Normal Retirement Age.

2.26        “ Old Plan ” means The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Retirement Plan as it existed prior to the Effective Date.

2.27        “ Participant ” means an Employee who has become a Participant as provided under Article 3 and also means a former Employee who is entitled to a benefit under the Plan. As provided in Section 3.1, an Employee whose Employment Commencement Date is after December 31, 1997 shall not become a Participant in the Plan. As provided in an applicable Appendix, certain individuals may become Participants with respect to a Predecessor Plan Benefit.

2.28        “ Plan ” means The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Retirement Plan as set forth in this document, including all Appendices, and, if amended at any time, then as so amended.

2.29        “ Plan Assets ” means the assets of the Plan at the particular time applicable.

2.30        “ Plan Year ” means the calendar year.

2.31        “ Postponed Retirement Benefit ” has the meaning determined under Section 4.3.

2.32        “ Predecessor Plan ” means a plan identified as such in an Appendix to this Plan.

2.33        “ Predecessor Plan Benefit ” means an amount determined under an applicable Appendix and included in a Participant’s Accrued Benefit under Section 4.2.

2.34        “ Social Security Covered Compensation ” means, as of any particular date, the average (without indexing), determined on a monthly basis, of the Taxable Wage Base for each of the 35 calendar years ending with the year the Participant attains (or will attain) social security retirement age (as defined in section 415(b)(8) of the Code); provided that in determining such average as of a particular Plan Year, it shall be assumed that the Taxable Wage Base in effect at the beginning of that Plan Year will remain the same for all future years. A Participant’s Social Security Covered Compensation for a Plan Year beginning before the 35-year period described

 

2-7


above is the Taxable Wage Base in effect at the beginning of that Plan Year. A Participant’s Social Security Covered Compensation for a Plan Year beginning after the 35-year period described above is the Participant’s Social Security Covered Compensation for the Plan Year in which the 35-year period ends.

2.35      “ Surviving Spouse ” means a Participant’s surviving spouse (who, in the case of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, is the spouse to whom the Participant was married on his Benefit Commencement Date) except to the extent that a former spouse is treated as such, for purposes of the Plan, under a qualified domestic relations order as described in section 414(p) of the Code. Effective beginning June 26, 2013, spouse means the person to whom the Participant is legally married for Federal tax purposes. For purposes of clarity, effective beginning June 26, 2013, a person is legally married for Federal tax purposes if legally married under the laws of the state in which the marriage was entered into, even if such marriage is not recognized under the laws of the state in which the Participant is domiciled.

2.36      “ Taxable Wage Base ” means the contribution and benefit base under section 230 of the Social Security Act.

2.37      “ Trust ” means the Fifth Third Retirement Trust as established under a separate trust agreement.

2.38      “ Trustee ” means the Trustee under the Trust.

2.39      (a)        “ Vesting Years ” means, subject to (b) below, the sum of the following:

(1)        each Plan Year for which an individual is credited with at least 1000 Hours of Service as an employee of Fifth Third Bank or any Affiliate with respect to Fifth Third Bank;

(2)        each Plan Year, not included in (1) above, for which an individual is credited with at least 1000 Hours of Service for an Employer or an Affiliate, beginning with the Plan Year in which such Employer adopts the Plan; and

(3)        a Participant’s years of service not included in (1) or (2) above but taken into account for vesting purposes under a Predecessor Plan.

              (b)        To the extent included in (a) above, the following years of service shall be disregarded for vesting purposes:

(1)        years prior to a Break in Service if, at the time of incurring such Break in Service, the individual did not have any nonforfeitable right to an Employer-derived benefit and if the Break in Service equals or exceeds his Vesting Years before such Break, provided that such Vesting Years before such Break shall be deemed not to include any of such individual’s Vesting Years not taken into account hereunder by reason of any prior Breaks in Service incurred by him;

(2)        years before January 1, 1971, unless such individual has had at least 3 Vesting Years after December 31, 1970; and

(3)        years before the Effective Date, if such service would have been disregarded under the rules of the Old Plan relating to breaks in service or failure to complete a required period of service within a specified period of time (whether or not such rules are so designated in the Old Plan) as such rules were in effect on the applicable date prior to the Effective Date.

 

2-8


2.40        “ Years of Credited Service ” mean a Participant’s Years of Fifth Third Service as an Employee.

2.41        “ Years of Fifth Third Service ” mean Vesting Years, as an employee of Fifth Third Bank or any Affiliate taken into account under Section 2.39(a)(1) and not disregarded under Section 2.39(b).

 

2-9


ARTICLE 3

ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION

3.1         Eligibility and Participation .  An Employee whose Employment Commencement Date is after December 31, 1997 shall not become a Participant in the Plan. As provided in an applicable Appendix, an individual may become a Participant with respect to a Predecessor Plan Benefit. A person who was a Participant in the Old Plan immediately before the Effective Date shall be a Participant in the Plan on the Effective Date.

3.2         Definitions .   For purposes of this Article 3, the following terms, when capitalized, shall have the following meanings:

(a)         “Employment Commencement Date” means, with respect to an individual, the date on which he first performs an Hour of Eligibility Service.

(b)         “Hour of Eligibility Service” means an hour for which an individual is paid, or entitled to payment, for work for the Employer or an Affiliate.

3.3         Partial Freezing of Plan .

(a)          Partial Freeze .     Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, effective November 15, 1998, no further benefits shall accrue for any Participant who is not a Grandfathered Employee (as defined in (b) below). The Accrued Benefit, Normal Retirement Benefit or Postponed Retirement Benefit, as the case may be, for a Participant who is not a Grandfathered Employee (as defined in (b) below) shall be determined as of November 15, 1998 as if the Participant terminated employment on November 15, 1998, and such benefit shall not increase after November 15, 1998.

(b)          Grandfathered Employee .  “Grandfathered Employee” means a Participant who, as of December 31, 1998, meets all of the following:

(1)        he was an Employee; and

(2)        he was at least 50 years old; and

(3)        he had credit for at least 15 Vesting Years.

A Grandfathered Employee whose employment terminates shall cease to be a Grandfathered Employee at that time and no further benefits shall accrue thereafter for such individual regardless of whether he is reemployed by an Employer.

(c)         Freeze for Highly Compensated Employees .   Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, effective February 29, 2008, no further benefits shall accrue for any Grandfathered Employee (as defined in (b) above) who is a Highly Compensated Employee (as defined in (d) below). The Accrued Benefit, Normal Retirement Benefit or Postponed Retirement Benefit, as the case may be, for a Grandfathered Employee who is a Highly Compensated Employee shall be determined as of February 29, 2008 as if the Participant terminated employment on February 29, 2008, and such benefit shall not increase after February 29, 2008.

 

3-1


A Grandfathered Employee who is not a Highly Compensated Employee on February 29, 2008, shall not accrue any further benefits if he becomes a Highly Compensated Employee. Such a Participant shall accrue no benefit for the first Plan Year for which he is a Highly Compensated Employee or any subsequent Plan Year. In the case of such a Grandfathered Employee who later becomes a Highly Compensated Employee, the Accrued Benefit, Normal Retirement Benefit or Postponed Retirement Benefit, as the case may be, shall be determined as of the last day of the Plan Year immediately prior to the Plan Year for which he becomes a Highly Compensated Employee as if the Participant terminated employment on that day and such benefit shall not increase after that day.

(d)        (1)   “Highly Compensated Employee” with respect to a Plan Year, means, as determined under section 414(q) of the Code and the Treasury Regulations thereunder, an individual who, at any time during the Plan Year is an Employee, and who:

(A)        during the Plan Year or the preceding twelve month period, was at any time a Five-Percent Owner; or

(B)        received Compensation (as defined in Section 9.2(c)) from the Employer in excess of $115,000 (as adjusted pursuant to section 414(q)(l) of the Code) during the twelve month period preceding the Plan Year, and, if the Employer so elects, was in the group consisting of the top 20 percent of Employees when ranked on the basis of Compensation (as defined in Section 9.2(c)) paid during such preceding twelve month period.

(2)        The determination of Highly Compensated Employees shall be made in accordance with the following:

(A)        For purposes of determining the number of Employees under (1)(B), the Employees described in section 414(q)(5) of the Code shall be disregarded.

(B)        The Employer shall be treated as including any other entities required to be aggregated under section 414 of the Code.

 

3-2


ARTICLE 4

ACCRUAL OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS

4.1         Normal Retirement Benefit .  A Participant’s “Normal Retirement Benefit” shall be his Accrued Benefit determined as of the earlier of his Normal Retirement Age or the termination of his employment as an Employee but shall not be less than the highest periodic benefit, payable in the same form but adjusted in accordance with applicable Treasury regulations for any Social Security increase, which he would have received if he had retired early under Section 6.2.

4.2         Accrued Benefit .

(a)         Formula .   A Participant’s “Accrued Benefit”, at any particular time, shall be a monthly benefit, commencing at his Normal Retirement Date and payable in the form provided in Section 7.1, equal to:

(1)        his Predecessor Plan Benefit, if any, under any applicable Appendix, plus

(2)        his Retirement Plan Benefit under Section 4.2(b).

(b)         Retirement Plan Benefit .  A Participant’s “Retirement Plan Benefit” shall be equal to:

(1)        30.5% of his Average Monthly Earnings minus 11.1% of his Average Monthly Earnings (up to his Social Security Covered Compensation); times

(2)        l/30th for each Year of Credited Service, not to exceed 30, with which he has been credited, or, if his employment as an Employee terminates prior to age 60, with which he would have been credited if he had remained an Employee until age 60; times

(3)        a fraction, not exceeding 1, the numerator of which is his actual number of Years of Fifth Third Service, not counting any such Years after age 60, and the denominator of which is the number of Years of Fifth Third Service that he would have had if he had remained employed as an Employee until he reached age 60; provided that the fraction shall be 1 for any Employee who is employed as an Employee upon or after attainment of age 60.

(c)         Transitional Rules .

(1)         Pre-1989 Accrued Benefit .     In the case of a Highly Compensated Employee (as defined in the Old Plan without regard to the change in the Code’s definition of such term), a Participant’s Accrued Benefit, Normal Retirement Benefit or Postponed Retirement Benefit, as the case may be, shall in no event be less than it was as of December 31, 1988.

(2)         IRS Notice 88-131 .   The Accrued Benefit, Normal Retirement Benefit or Postponed Retirement Benefit, as the case may be, of a Participant other than a Highly Compensated Employee (as defined above) shall in no event be less than it would have been as of May 1, 1991 had the benefit formula in effect prior to January 1, 1989 remained in effect through May 1, 1991.

 

4-1


4.3         Postponed Retirement Benefit .  If a Participant who has credit for at least one Hour of Service on or after January 1, 1988 retires or is retired after his Normal Retirement Date, then his “Postponed Retirement Benefit” shall be a monthly benefit, commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date and payable in the form provided in Section 7.1, determined under the same formula prescribed under Section 4.2 (including Years of Credited Service after Normal Retirement Date but excluding Years of Credited Service in excess of 30).

4.4         Effect of Cash-Out Distributions .

(a)         Disregard of Service .

(1)         Total Distribution .    If a Participant terminates service and receives a distribution of the present value of his entire nonforfeitable benefit, then, his forfeitable interest shall be forfeited immediately, and in computing the Participant’s Accrued Benefit, his service prior to such distribution shall be disregarded. If the portion of the distribution which is attributable to the present value of his Accrued Benefit is in excess of $1,000 ($5,000 for Benefit Commencement Dates of August 1, 2015 or later), then the preceding sentence shall apply only if the Participant voluntarily elects to receive the distribution.

(2)         Partial Distribution .    If a Participant terminates service and receives a distribution (which he voluntarily elected to receive) of less than the present value of his entire nonforfeitable benefit, then, a portion of his forfeitable interest shall be forfeited immediately and in computing the Participant’s Accrued Benefit, a portion of his service prior to such distribution shall be disregarded; such portion shall be the amount thereof, multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the amount of the distribution and the denominator of which is the present value of his total nonforfeitable benefit immediately prior to such distribution.

(b)         Restoration .  The portion of a Participant’s interest which is forfeited and service which is disregarded because of a distribution to him under (a) above shall be restored to his credit upon repayment to the Plan by the Participant of the full amount of such distribution, provided:

(1)        such distribution was less than the present value of his Accrued Benefit;

(2)        he resumes employment covered under the Plan;

(3)        he pays, to the Plan, interest on the full amount of such distribution, computed on the amount of such distribution from the date of such distribution to the date of repayment, compounded annually from the date of distribution, at the rate determined under section 411(c)(2)(C) of the Code as in effect on the date of repayment; and

(4)        effective as of January 1, 1985, such repayment is made not later than:

(A)        the Participant’s incurrence of a Break in Service or

(B)        the end of the five-year period beginning with the Participant’s resumption of employment covered by the Plan.

 

4-2


(c)         Determination of Present Value .  For purposes of this Section, present value shall be determined as of the date of distribution using the interest rate determined under Section 411(a)(11)(B) of the Code.

(d)         Special Rule .  A Participant who has no vested interest in his Accrued Benefit and who terminates service, shall be treated for purposes of this section as if he had received a distribution of the present value of his entire vested benefit as of the date of his termination of service. Such a Participant who resumes employment with an Employer before he incurs a Break in Service shall be treated as if he had repaid to the Plan the full amount of that distribution as of the date of his resumption of employment.

4.5         No Duplication of Benefits Under the Plan .  Anything contained in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, if a Plan benefit is payable with respect to a Participant who has previously received a Plan benefit then such subsequent benefit shall be adjusted to prevent duplication of benefits for the same period of service.

4.6         Effect of Plan Amendments on Computation of Benefits .     Except as otherwise specifically provided, no amendment which relates to the amount of benefits under the Plan and which becomes effective after any termination of a Participant’s status as an Employee shall apply with respect to that part of any benefit under the Plan which is computed with respect to his service prior to such termination.

 

4-3


ARTICLE 5

VESTING

5.1         Vesting At Normal Retirement Age .  Upon and after a Participant’s attainment of Normal Retirement Age, if he is then in the service of an Employer or an Affiliate, he shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Normal Retirement Benefit, or his Postponed Retirement Benefit, whichever is applicable.

5.2         Vesting in Accrued Benefit Prior to Normal Retirement Age .

(a)         Vesting Schedule .  Except as otherwise provided in the Plan, a Participant who has credit for an Hour of Service on or after the Effective Date shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of his Accrued Benefit on the basis of the number of Vesting Years with which he is credited, pursuant to the following vesting schedule:

 

Vesting Years

Nonforfeitable

Percentage

Less than 5 0%
5 or more 100%

(b)         Vested Percentage Under the Old Plan .  Notwithstanding (a) above, a Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of his Accrued Benefit that is no less than the vested percentage in his benefit derived from Employer contributions computed under the Old Plan on the date immediately prior to the later of the effective date of this restatement of the Plan or the date on which this restatement of the Plan is adopted.

5.3         Forfeiture on Account of Death .  Anything in the foregoing to the contrary notwithstanding, except as otherwise provided in Articles 7 and 8, a Participant’s benefits shall be forfeited if the Participant dies.

5.4         Vesting Upon Termination or Partial Termination of the Plan . Anything in the foregoing to the contrary notwithstanding, upon the termination or partial termination of the Plan, the rights of all affected Employees to benefits accrued to the date of such termination or partial termination, to the extent funded as of such date, shall be nonforfeitable.

5.5         Limitation on Recourse .  In the event of a complete or partial termination of the Plan, a Participant or beneficiary shall not have any recourse towards satisfaction of his nonforfeitable benefits from other than the Plan Assets or the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.

5.6         Unclaimed Benefits .     Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, if a Participant or other person entitled to a benefit (including a benefit being paid or payable under the Old Plan) has not been found within 5 years after such payment becomes due, then such benefit shall be forfeited. However, if such Participant or other person is thereafter located, then such benefit shall be restored retroactively no later than 60 days after the date on which such Participant or other person is located, and shall be in the same amount as was payable at the time such benefit became due without any adjustment for the time between the date such benefit became due and such restoration.

 

5-1


ARTICLE 6

PARTICIPANT’S ENTITLEMENT TO BENEFITS

6.1         Normal Retirement .

(a)        If a Participant retires on his Normal Retirement Date, then he shall be entitled, as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to his Normal Retirement Benefit; provided, however, if his Benefit Commencement Date is later than his Normal Retirement Date, he shall be entitled, as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to his Normal Retirement Benefit, actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) for each month that his Benefit Commencement Date follows his Normal Retirement Date.

(b)        The “Benefit Commencement Date” of a Participant whose retirement occurs under (a) above shall be his Normal Retirement Date or such later date (which must be the first day of a month) as he shall elect but in no event later than the Latest Commencement Date (as defined in Section 7.4(c)(1)).

6.2         Early Retirement .

(a)        If a Participant retires or is retired on or after his attainment of Early Retirement Age but before his Normal Retirement Date, then, he shall be entitled, as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to his Accrued Benefit determined as of the termination of his employment as an Employee, reduced 1/2 of one percent for each month (if any) by which his Benefit Commencement Date precedes the date on which he reaches age 60; provided however, if his Benefit Commencement Date is later than his Normal Retirement Date, he shall be entitled, as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to his Accrued Benefit, which Accrued Benefit shall be determined as of the termination of his employment as an Employee, actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) for each month by which his Benefit Commencement Date follows his Normal Retirement Date.

(b)        The “Benefit Commencement Date” of a Participant whose retirement occurs under (a) above shall be his Normal Retirement Date or such earlier date (which may be the first day of any month coinciding with or following his retirement) as he shall elect, or such later date (which must be the first day of a month) as he shall elect but in no event later than the Latest Commencement Date (as defined in Section 7.4(c)(1)).

6.3         Postponed Retirement .

(a)         General .   If a Participant’s employment terminates after his Normal Retirement Date, then he shall be entitled as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to his Postponed Retirement Benefit; provided, however, if his Benefit Commencement Date is later than his Postponed Retirement Date (defined in (b) below), he shall be entitled as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to his Postponed Retirement Benefit, increased in accordance with the following:

(1)        if the Participant’s Postponed Retirement Date is not later than April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which he attains age 70-1/2, his Postponed Retirement Benefit shall be actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) for each month his Benefit Commencement Date follows his Postponed Retirement Date; or

 

6-1


(2)        if the Participant’s Postponed Retirement Date is later than April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which he attains age 70-1/2, his Postponed Retirement Benefit shall be increased as follows:

(A)        Benefit Commencement Date in Same Calendar Year .    If the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date is in the same calendar year as such April 1 (of the calendar year following the calendar year in which he attains age 70-1/2), his Postponed Retirement Benefit shall be increased to an amount equal to:

(I)        his Postponed Retirement Benefit determined as of April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which he attained age 70-1/2, actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) for each month his Benefit Commencement Date follows such April 1; or

(II)      if the Participant is a Grandfathered Employee, the greater of (A)(I) above or his Postponed Retirement Benefit determined as of his Postponed Retirement Date, actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) for each month his Benefit Commencement Date follows such Postponed Retirement Date.

(B)        Benefit Commencement Date for Non-Grandfathered Employee . If the Participant is not a Grandfathered Employee, his Postponed Retirement Benefit shall be increased in the same manner as provided in (A)(1) above.

(C)        Grandfathered Employee’s Benefit Commencement Date in Later Calendar Year .    If the Participant is a Grandfathered Employee and if his Benefit Commencement Date is in a calendar year later than the calendar year in which such April 1 (of the calendar year following the calendar year in which he attains age 70-1/2), falls, then his Postponed Retirement Benefit shall be increased as follows:

(I)        his Postponed Retirement Benefit determined as of such April 1 (of the calendar year following the calendar year in which he attains age 70-1/2) shall be actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) to the end of the Plan Year in which such April 1 falls; and the Participant’s Postponed Retirement Benefit (as of the end of such Plan Year) will be deemed to be the greater of such amount or his Postponed Retirement Benefit (as otherwise determined under the Plan without regard to this subparagraph (I));

(II)      thereafter, such adjusted Postponed Retirement Benefit shall be determined as of the end of each subsequent Plan Year ending before the Plan Year in which such a Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date falls in the same manner as provided in (I) above; and

 

6-2


(III)      such a Participant’s Postponed Retirement Benefit as of his Benefit Commencement Date shall be whichever of the following results in the greater benefit:

(i)        his Postponed Retirement Benefit determined as of the end of the immediately preceding Plan Year (as determined under (I) and (II) above) actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) for each month his Benefit Commencement Date follows such December 31, or

(ii)       the Postponed Retirement Benefit (as otherwise determined under the Plan without regard to subparagraphs (I) and (II) above) determined as of his Postponed Retirement Date, actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) for each month his Benefit Commencement Date follows such Postponed Retirement Date.

(b)         Benefit Commencement Date . The “Postponed Retirement Date” of a Participant whose termination of employment occurs under (a) above shall, subject to the notification and other requirements of Labor Regulation §2530.203-3, be the first day of the month coinciding with or next following the termination of his section 203(a)(3)(B) service as defined in such Regulation. The “Benefit Commencement Date” of a Participant whose termination of employment occurs under (a) above shall be his Postponed Retirement Date or such later date (which must be the first day of a month) as he shall elect but in no event later than the Latest Commencement Date (as defined in Section 7.4(c)(1)). In no event shall a Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date be later than the required beginning date under Section 7.4(c)(2).

(c)         Adjustment for Continued Accruals .  If a Participant continues as an Employee of an Employer after his Benefit Commencement Date under (b) above, benefits shall continue to accrue nevertheless each Plan Year until he terminates employment, subject to the minimum benefit requirements (if applicable) of Section 14.2, under the same formula prescribed under Section 4.2 (including Years of Credited Service after the Benefit Commencement Date but excluding Years of Credited Service in excess of 30), determined as a monthly benefit payable in the form provided in Section 7.1 commencing upon the close of the Plan Year of the additional accrual. As of the first date benefit payments are due a Participant each Plan Year commencing after his Benefit Commencement Date under (b) above, the Participant’s benefit payments (under the same form in which payments are being made) shall be increased to reflect the excess (if any) of the Actuarial Equivalent of this additional accrual less the Actuarial Equivalent of the lesser of (i) the total Plan benefit payments to the Participant through the end of the immediately preceding Plan Year, or (ii) the total Plan benefit payments to the Participant which would have been made to the Participant through the end of the immediately preceding Plan Year if such payments had been made in the basic form of benefit under Section 7.1; provided however, if as of the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date under (b) above, the Participant received his benefit as a lump sum, the increase (if any) shall also be paid as a lump sum as soon as administratively feasible after the Plan Year of the additional accrual.

 

6-3


6.4         Termination of Employment .

(a)        A Participant whose employment has terminated but who is not entitled to a benefit under any of the preceding Sections of this Article 6 shall, unless distribution has been made pursuant to Section 7.4, be entitled, as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to the nonforfeitable part of his Accrued Benefit, which Accrued Benefit shall be determined as of the termination of his employment as an Employee, actuarially reduced in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2 for each month by which his Benefit Commencement Date precedes his Normal Retirement Date; provided however, if his Benefit Commencement Date is later than his Normal Retirement Date, he shall be entitled, as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to the nonforfeitable part of his Accrued Benefit, which Accrued Benefit shall be determined as of the termination of his employment as an Employee, actuarially increased in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(a) for each month that his Benefit Commencement Date follows his Normal Retirement Date.

(b)        The “Benefit Commencement Date” of a Participant to whom (a) above applies shall be his Normal Retirement Date; provided however, a Participant may elect as his Benefit Commencement Date, the first day of any month, not later than his Latest Commencement Date (as defined in Section 7.4(c)(1)), that follows his termination of employment.

6.5         Effect of Reemployment .  If, in any calendar month subsequent to the commencement of benefit payments, a Participant is reemployed in section 203(a)(3)(B) service, as defined in Labor Regulation 2530.203-3, and if such benefits are not being paid under an insurance or annuity contract which precludes a refund to the Plan of suspended payments, then, subject to the notification and other requirements of such Regulation, payment of Employer-derived benefits in excess of any minimum benefits under Section 14.2 shall be suspended for such month; provided however, if benefits are suspended during a period of reemployment, then the benefit payable upon the subsequent resumption of payments must be actuarially increased to reflect the nonpayment, during such period of reemployment, of any minimum benefits under Section 14.2.

 

6-4


ARTICLE 7

FORM OF PAYMENT TO PARTICIPANT

7.1         Basic Form of Participant’s Benefit - Single Life Annuity . Subject to the provisions of Section 7.2 regarding the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and subject to the provisions of Section 7.3 regarding optional forms of benefit, the basic form of a Participant’s benefit under the Plan shall be a single life annuity that is payable in equal monthly installments, each in an amount equal to the monthly benefit to which he is entitled under the Plan, commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date and continuing until the payment of the installment due on the first day of the month in which he dies.

7.2         Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity .

(a)         Automatic Basic Form .   Unless the waiver provided for in (c) below is effective with respect to a Participant, the form of payment with respect to him under the Plan shall be a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity (defined in (b) below) if the lump sum Actuarial Equivalent (determined as of his Benefit Commencement Date) of his nonforfeitable benefit under the Plan exceeds $5,000.

(b)         Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity .   A “Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity” is an immediate annuity which is the Actuarial Equivalent of the basic form of benefit under Section 7.1 and which:

(1)        for a married Participant (including a Participant who is subject to an applicable qualified domestic relations order as described in section 414(p) of the Code), provides a lifetime benefit for the Participant and a lifetime survivor benefit for his Surviving Spouse equal to 50 percent, 75 percent or 100 percent, as the Participant may elect, of the benefit payable to the Participant during their joint lives; or

(2)        for a single Participant, provides payments for the life of the Participant only.

(c)         Waiver .

(1)         Election Period .   A Participant may waive the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity form of benefit at any time during a 180-day election period ending on his Benefit Commencement Date. Such a waiver must be in writing and must specify the optional form of benefit elected and the specific Beneficiary or Beneficiaries, if any, to whom any death benefits under the optional form will be payable.

(2)         Revocation .   A Participant may also revoke any waiver under (1) above during the election period thereunder. There shall be no limitation on the number of such waivers and revocations permitted during such election period.

(3)         Written Explanation .   The Administrator shall provide to each Participant, no less than 30 days and no more than 180 days prior to his Benefit Commencement Date (and consistent with such regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe), a written explanation of:

(A)         the terms and conditions of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity,

 

7-1


(B)       the Participant’s right to make, and the effect of, an election under (1) above to waive the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity form of benefit,

(C)       the rights of the Participant’s spouse under (4) below,

(D)       the right to make, and the effect of, a revocation of a waiver under (1) above, and

(E)       the eligibility requirements, material features and relative values of any optional forms of benefit under the Plan.

To the extent permitted by Treasury Regulations or pronouncements of the Internal Revenue Service, the Administrator may permit the Participant to waive the 30-day limit.

(4)         Spousal Consent .        A waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity shall not take effect with respect to a spouse of a Participant unless:

(A)       such spouse consents in writing to such election, and such spouse’s consent:

(i)        acknowledges the effect of such election,

(ii)       acknowledges the specific Beneficiary or Beneficiaries, if any, to whom any death benefits under the Plan will be payable, which may not be changed without spousal consent (or the consent of the spouse expressly permits designations by the Participant without any requirement of further consent by the spouse),

(iii)      for waivers made in Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1986, acknowledges the specific optional form of benefit elected which may not be changed without spousal consent (except back to the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity) (or the consent of the spouse expressly permits changes by the Participant without any requirement of further consent by the spouse), and

(iv)      is witnessed by a Plan representative or a notary public; or

(B)       it is established to the satisfaction of a Plan representative that the consent required under (A) above may not be obtained because there is no spouse, because the spouse cannot be located, or because of such other circumstances as may be provided in regulations of the Internal Revenue Service.

General consents referred to in the parentheticals under (A)(ii) and (iii) above executed after October 21, 1986 must acknowledge that the spouse has the right to limit consent to a specific Beneficiary or Beneficiaries and a specific optional form or forms of benefit and that the spouse voluntarily elects to relinquish the rights so relinquished.

 

7-2


7.3         Optional Forms of Benefit .     Subject to an effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, a Participant may, by filing the proper form with the Administrator prior to his Benefit Commencement Date, elect to receive his benefit under the Plan in one or a combination of the following forms. For Benefit Commencement Dates prior to August 1, 2015, a Participant with a nonforfeitable benefit with an Actuarial Equivalent lump sum value not exceeding $5,000 may elect one or a combination of the following forms without the need to obtain spousal consent. Such benefit shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of the basic form of benefit under Section 7.1.

(a)         Contingent Annuitant Option .

(1)        Under the contingent annuitant option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date and terminating with the monthly payment due on the first day of the month in which his death occurs.

(2)        Upon such Participant’s death, on or after his Benefit Commencement Date, a contingent benefit shall be payable to the Beneficiary designated by him at the time he elects this option, if such Beneficiary is then living.

(3)        Such contingent benefit shall commence as of the first day of the month next following the calendar month in which the death of such Participant occurs and shall terminate with the monthly payment due on the first day of the month in which the death of his designated Beneficiary occurs.

(4)        The monthly amount of contingent benefit payable to such Participant’s designated Beneficiary shall be equal to 50 percent, 75 percent or 100 percent as the Participant may elect, of the monthly benefit payable under this option to such Participant during the joint lives of him and such designated Beneficiary.

(5)        This option shall not be effective with respect to a Participant, unless within 90 days after his election of such optional form, but not later than the 30th day prior to his Benefit Commencement Date, he furnishes evidence satisfactory to the Administrator of the date of birth of his designated Beneficiary and unless his designated Beneficiary is alive on his Benefit Commencement Date.

(b)         Life-10 Year Certain Option .

(1)        Under the life-10 year certain option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date and before he has received 120 monthly payments, then such monthly payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of such payments made to such Participant and such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 120 monthly payments.

 

7-3


(2)        In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before 120 monthly payments have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

(c)         Life-15 Year Certain Option .

(1)        The life-15 year certain option described in this subsection (c) shall be available with respect to Benefit Commencement Dates of March 1, 2015 or later.

(2)        Under the life-15 year certain option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date and before he has received 180 monthly payments, then such monthly payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of such payments made to such Participant and such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 180 monthly payments.

(3)        In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before 180 monthly payments have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

(d)         Lump Sum .     Under the lump sum option, a Participant is entitled to a single payment which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his benefit under the Plan.

7.4         Date of Payment and Cash-Out .

(a)         General .   Subject to the Subsections below, a Participant’s benefit shall commence as of his Benefit Commencement Date determined under Article 6.

(b)         Consent to Early Payment .

(1)         General .     Except as provided in (c) and (d) below, no part of a Participant’s benefit may be paid to him prior to the later of Normal Retirement Age or age 62 unless he consents to the distribution.

(2)         Written Explanation .   The Administrator shall provide to each Participant whose consent is required under (1) above, no less than 30 days and no more than 180 days prior to his Benefit Commencement Date, a written explanation of the material features and relative values of the optional forms of benefit under the Plan, and his right (if any) to defer receipt of the distribution, including the consequences of failing to defer such receipt. A Participant may elect to commence his distribution in less than 30 days from the date he is provided with the explanation (if administratively feasible) provided he is informed of his right to the 30-day period.

 

7-4


(3)         Time of Consent .    A Participant’s consent to a distribution must not be made before he receives the written explanation under (2) above and must not be made more than 180 days before his Benefit Commencement Date.

(c)         Latest Date of Payment .

(1)        In compliance with section 401(a)(14) of the Code, in the case of a Participant whose employment has terminated, the “Latest Commencement Date” for his benefit under the Plan shall be March 1 of the Plan Year following the later of:

(A)        the Plan Year in which he reaches Normal Retirement Age, or

(B)        the Plan Year in which his service with an Employer and all Affiliates has terminated.

Such Latest Commencement Date shall be the latest Benefit Commencement Date a Participant may elect in accordance with Article 6. If a Participant does not timely elect an earlier Benefit Commencement Date, his benefit shall commence to be paid (without the need for his consent or election) as of such Latest Commencement Date.

(2)        While the Latest Commencement Date is likely to precede the required beginning date under section 401(a)(9) of the Code, in the event it does not, the payment of a Participant’s benefit under the Plan shall begin no later than the April 1 of the calendar year following the later of:

(A)        the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70-1/2, or

(B)        the calendar year in which the Participant retires; provided however, this subparagraph (B) shall not apply to a Participant who is a Five-Percent Owner.

With respect to a Participant who first becomes a Five-Percent Owner in a Plan Year after the Plan Year ending in the calendar year in which he attains age 70-1/2, the calendar year in which such subsequent Plan Year ends shall be the applicable time for purposes of subparagraph (B).

(3)        the 60th day after the later of the close of the Plan Year in which the Participant:

(A)        reaches Normal Retirement Age or

(B)        terminates his service with an Employer and all Affiliates; or

(4)        the April 1 of the calendar year following the later of:

(A)        the calendar year in which the Participant attains age 70-1/2 or

(B)        the calendar year in which the Participant retires; provided however, this subparagraph (B) shall not apply to a Participant who is a Five-Percent Owner.

 

7-5


With respect to a Participant who first becomes a Five-Percent Owner in a Plan Year after the Plan Year ending in the calendar year in which he attains age 70-1/2, the calendar year in which such subsequent Plan Year ends shall be the applicable time for purposes of subparagraph (B).

(d)         Cash-Out Distributions .

(1)         Prior to August 1, 2015 . Any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, any amount payable to a Participant under the Plan shall be paid in a lump sum, provided that the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s nonforfeitable benefit under the Plan, does not exceed $1,000 and such payment is made before payment otherwise begins. Such lump sum shall be paid as soon as administratively feasible after the Participant terminates employment.

(2)         August 1, 2015 and Later . Effective August 1, 2015, any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, any amount payable to a Participant under the Plan shall be paid in a lump sum, provided that the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s nonforfeitable benefit under the Plan, determined as of his Benefit Commencement Date (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to commence), does not exceed $5,000 and such payment is made before payment otherwise begins. Such lump sum shall be paid as soon as administratively feasible on or after such Benefit Commencement Date (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to commence). In the event of a mandatory distribution greater than $1,000 in accordance with this Section, if the Participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the Participant in a direct rollover or to receive the distribution directly in accordance with Section 7.6, then the Administrator will pay the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement plan designated by the Administrator,

(e)         Qualified Domestic Relations Order Procedures . To the extent that a benefit is affected by the determination of whether a domestic relations order is a qualified domestic relations order, nothing in this Section shall require a benefit to be distributed earlier than required under section 414(p) of the Code.

7.5         New Required Minimum Distribution Rules .

(a)         General Rules .

(1)         Effective Date . This Section 7.5 will apply for purposes of determining required minimum distributions for calendar years beginning with the 2003 calendar year.

(2)         Precedence . The requirements of this Section 7.5 will take precedence over any inconsistent provisions of the Plan.

(3)         Requirements of Treasury Regulations Incorporated . All distributions required under this Section will be determined and made in accordance with the Treasury regulations under section 401(a)(9) of the Code.

(4)         TEFRA Section 242(b)(2) Elections . Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Section, other than (3) above, distributions may be made under a designation made before

 

7-6


January 1, 1984, in accordance with section 242(b)(2) of the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act (TEFRA) and the provisions of the Plan that relate to section 242(b)(2) of TEFRA.

(b)         Time and Manner of Distribution .

(1)         Required Beginning Date .   The Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, to the Participant no later than the Participant’s required beginning date, as determined under Section 7.4(c)(2).

(2)         Death of Participant Before Distributions Begin .   If the Participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows:

(A)        If the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, then distributions to the Surviving Spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70-1/2, if later;

(B)        If the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is not the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, then distributions to the designated beneficiary will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died;

(C)        If there is no designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death;

(D)        If the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary and the Surviving Spouse dies after the Participant but before distributions to the Surviving Spouse begin, this Section 7.5(b)(2), other than Section 7.5(b)(2)(A), will apply as if the Surviving Spouse were the Participant.

For purposes of this Section 7.5(b)(2) and Section 7.5(e), distributions are considered to begin on the Participant’s required beginning date (or, if Section 7.5(b)(2)(D) applies, the date distributions are required to begin to the Surviving Spouse under Section 7.5(b)(2)(A)). If annuity payments irrevocably commence to the Participant before the Participant’s required beginning date (or to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse before the date distributions are required to begin to the Surviving Spouse under Section 7.5(b)(2)(A)), the date distributions are considered to begin is the date distributions actually commence.

(3)         Form of Distribution .   Unless the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company or in a single sum on or before the required beginning date, as of the first distribution calendar year distributions will be made in accordance with Section 7.5(c), (d), and (e). If the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of an annuity purchased from an insurance company, distributions thereunder will be made in accordance with the requirements of section 401(a)(9) of the Code and the Treasury regulations.

 

7-7


Any part of the Participant’s interest which is in the form of an individual account described in section 414(k) of the Code will be distributed in a manner satisfying the requirements of section 401(a)(9) of the Code and the Treasury regulations that apply to individual accounts.

(c)         Determination of Amount to be Distributed Each Year .

(1)         General Annuity Requirements . If the Participant’s interest is paid in the form of annuity distributions under the Plan, payments under the annuity will satisfy the following requirements:

(A)        the annuity distributions will be paid in periodic payments made at intervals not longer than one year;

(B)        the distribution period will be over a life (or lives) or over a period certain not longer than the period described in (d) or (e);

(C)        once payments have begun over a period certain, the period certain will not be changed even if the period certain is shorter than the maximum permitted;

(D)        payments will either be nonincreasing or increase only as follows:

 (i)        by an annual percentage increase that does not exceed the annual percentage increase in a cost-of-living index that is based on prices of all items and issued by the Bureau of Labor Statistics;

 (ii)       to the extent of the reduction in the amount of the Participant’s payments to provide for a survivor benefit upon death, but only if the Beneficiary whose life was being used to determine the distribution period described in (d) dies or is no longer the Participant’s Beneficiary pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order within the meaning of Code section 414(p);

 (iii)      to provide cash refunds of employee contributions upon the Participant’s death; or

 (iv)      to pay increased benefits that result from a plan amendment.

(2)         Amount Required to be Distributed by Required Beginning Date . The amount that must be distributed on or before the Participant’s required beginning date (or, if the Participant dies before distributions begin, the date distributions are required to begin under Section 7.5(b)(2)(A) or (B)) is the payment that is required for one payment interval. The second payment need not be made until the end of the next payment interval even if that payment interval ends in the next calendar year. Payment intervals are the periods for which payments are received, e.g., bi-monthly, monthly, semi-annually, or annually. All of the Participant’s benefit accruals as of the last day of the first distribution calendar year will be included in the calculation of the amount of the annuity payments for payment intervals ending on or after the Participant’s required beginning date.

 

7-8


(3)         Additional Accruals After First Distribution Calendar Year .     Any additional benefits accruing to the Participant in a calendar year after the first distribution calendar year will be distributed beginning with the first payment interval ending in the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which such amount accrues.

(d)         Requirements For Annuity Distributions that Commence During Participant’s Lifetime .

(1)         Joint Life Annuities Where the Beneficiary Is Not the Participant’s Spouse .     If the Participant’s interest is being distributed in the form of a joint and survivor annuity for the joint lives of the Participant and a nonspouse Beneficiary, annuity payments to be made on or after the Participant’s required beginning date to the designated Beneficiary after the Participant’s death must not at any time exceed the applicable percentage of the annuity payment for such period that would have been payable to the Participant using the table set forth in Q&A-2 of section 1.401(a)(9)-6 of the Treasury regulations. If the form of distribution combines a joint and survivor annuity for the joint lives of the Participant and a nonspouse Beneficiary and a period certain annuity, the requirement in the preceding sentence will apply to annuity payments to be made to the designated Beneficiary after the expiration of the period certain.

(2)         Period Certain Annuities .      Unless the Participant’s spouse is the sole designated Beneficiary and the form of distribution is a period certain and no life annuity, the period certain for an annuity distribution commencing during the Participant’s lifetime may not exceed the applicable distribution period for the Participant under the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury regulations for the calendar year that contains the annuity starting date. If the annuity starting date precedes the year in which the Participant reaches age 70, the applicable distribution period for the Participant is the distribution period for age 70 under the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury regulations plus the excess of 70 over the age of the Participant as of the Participant’s birthday in the year that contains the annuity starting date. If the Participant’s spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary and the form of distribution is a period certain and no life annuity, the period certain may not exceed the longer of the Participant’s applicable distribution period, as determined under this sub-paragraph (2), or the joint life and last survivor expectancy of the Participant and the Participant’s spouse as determined under the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury regulations, using the Participant’s and spouse’s attained ages as of the Participant’s and spouse’s birthdays in the calendar year that contains the annuity starting date.

(e)         Requirements for Minimum Distributions Where Participant Dies Before Date Distributions Begin .

(1)         Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary .     If the Participant dies before the date distribution of his or her interest begins and there is a designated Beneficiary, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, beginning no later than the time described in Section 7.5(b)(2)(A) or (B) over the life of the designated Beneficiary or over a period certain not exceeding:

(A)        unless the annuity starting date is before the first distribution calendar year, the life expectancy of the designated Beneficiary determined using the Beneficiary’s age as of the Beneficiary’s birthday in the calendar year immediately following the calendar year of the Participant’s death; or

 

7-9


(B)        if the annuity starting date is before the first distribution calendar year, the life expectancy of the designated Beneficiary determined using the Beneficiary’s age as of the Beneficiary’s birthday in the calendar year that contains the annuity starting date.

(2)         No Designated Beneficiary .   If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, distribution of the Participant’s entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

(3)         Death of Surviving Spouse Before Distributions to Surviving Spouse Begin .    If the Participant dies before the date distribution of his or her interest begins, the Participant’s Surviving Spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, and the Surviving Spouse dies before distributions to the Surviving Spouse begin, Section 7.5(e) will apply as if the Surviving Spouse were the Participant, except that the time by which distributions must begin will be determined without regard to Section 7.5(b)(2)(A).

(f)         Definitions .

(1)         Designated Beneficiary .     The individual who is designated as the Beneficiary under the Plan and is the designated Beneficiary under section 401(a)(9) of the Code and section 1.401 (a)(9)-1, Q&A-4, of the Treasury regulations.

(2)         Distribution calendar year .    A calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning before the Participant’s death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which contains the Participant’s required beginning date. For distributions beginning after the Participant’s death, the first distribution calendar year is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin pursuant to Section 7.5(b)(2).

(3)         Life expectancy . Life expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury regulations.

(4)         Required beginning date . The date by which a Participant’s interest must begin to be distributed, as determined in Section 7.4(c)(2).

7.6         Eligible Rollover Distributions .

(a)         General .   Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a distributee’s election under this Section 7.6, but subject to exceptions permitted by the Internal Revenue Service, a distributee may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, to have any portion of an eligible rollover distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee in a direct rollover.

 

7-10


(b)         Definitions .

(1)         Eligible rollover distribution .     An eligible rollover distribution is any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the distributee, except that an eligible rollover distribution does not include:

(A)        any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the distributee or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the distributee and the distributee’s designated beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten years or more;

(B)        any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code; and

(C)        the portion of any distribution that is not includible in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities).

(2)         Eligible Retirement Plan .   An eligible retirement plan means:

(A)        an individual retirement account described in section 408(a) of the Code (including a Roth IRA described in section 408A of the Code effective for distributions after December 31, 2007);

(B)        an individual retirement annuity described in section 408(b) of the Code;

(C)        an annuity plan described in section 403(a) of the Code;

(D)        a qualified trust described in section 401(a) of the Code, that accepts the distributee’s eligible rollover distribution;

(E)        an annuity contract described in section 403(b) of the Code; and

(F)        an eligible plan under section 457(b) of the Code which is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this Plan.

(3)         Distributee . A distributee includes an employee or former employee. In addition, the employee’s or former employee’s surviving spouse and the employee’s or former employee’s spouse or former spouse who is the alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order as defined in section 414(p) of the Code, are distributees with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse.

(4)         Direct Rollover .    A direct rollover is a payment by the Plan to the eligible retirement plan specified by the distributee.

 

7-11


(c)         PPA Changes .

(1)         Effective Date .   This Section 7.6(c) shall apply to distributions made after December 31, 2006.

(2)         Distributions to Inherited Individual Retirement Plan of Nonspouse Beneficiary .   An individual who is a designated Beneficiary of an Employee and who is not the surviving spouse may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, to have any portion of an eligible rollover distribution paid directly to an individual retirement plan specified by such Beneficiary in a direct rollover. For purposes of this subsection (c), an individual retirement plan is an individual retirement account described in section 408(a) of the Code or an individual retirement annuity (other than an endowment contract) described in section 408(b) of the Code. To the extent a Beneficiary elects to make such a direct rollover, the individual retirement plan shall be treated as an inherited individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity (within the meaning of section 408(d)(3)(C) of the Code), and section 401(a)(9)(B) of the Code (other than clause (iv) thereof) shall apply to such plan.

(3)         Modification of Definition of Eligible Rollover Distribution . For purposes of the direct rollover provisions of this subsection (c), an eligible rollover distribution is any distribution that satisfies all of the requirements of Section 7.6(b)(1) other than the requirement that the distribution be made to a distributee.

(4)         Certain Trusts Treated as Beneficiaries .   For purposes of this subsection (c), to the extent provided in rules prescribed by the Secretary of Treasury, a trust maintained for the benefit of one or more designated Beneficiaries shall be treated in the same manner as an individual who is a designated Beneficiary of an Employee.

(5)         Interpretation of Provisions .      The direct rollover provisions of this subsection (c) are intended to comply with the requirements of section 402(c)(11) of the Code and shall be construed in accordance with section 402(c)(11) of the Code and any pronouncements of the Internal Revenue Service issued thereunder.

7.7         Small Benefit .     Any provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, the Administrator may adopt such procedures as it shall find convenient with respect to the payment of a benefit where the monthly installment thereof is less than $50 and may at its option, direct that such benefit be paid in advance; in quarterly, semi-annual, or annual installments; or, subject to Section 7.4, by a single cash payment.

 

7-12


ARTICLE 8

PRE-RETIREMENT DEATH BENEFITS

8.1         Preretirement Survivor Annuity .

(a)         General .

(1)         Death After August 22, 1984 .   If a Participant dies after August 22, 1984 and before the commencement of benefit payments, if he has a Surviving Spouse, and if he is covered, under (b) below, by the Preretirement Survivor Annuity, then his Surviving Spouse shall be entitled to the Preretirement Survivor Annuity, provided that the Participant and such Surviving Spouse were married throughout the 1-year period ending on the date of the Participant’s death or, if such Surviving Spouse is a former spouse treated as a Surviving Spouse pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order as described in section 414(p) of the Code, that the Participant and such Surviving Spouse were married for at least 1 year.

(2)         Death Before August 23, 1984 .    Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, the entitlement to and payment of the Preretirement Survivor Annuity with respect to a Participant who dies prior to August 23, 1984, shall continue to be governed by the provisions of the Old Plan applicable to the qualified joint and survivor annuity under section 401(a)(11) of the Code prior to the Retirement Equity Act of 1984.

(b)         Coverage .

(1)         Service on or After August 23, 1984 . The Preretirement Survivor Annuity applies to any Participant who:

(A)        has at least 1 Hour of Service or at least 1 hour of paid leave from an Employer (or any other employer for whom service is treated as service for an Employer) on or after August 23, 1984;

(B)        has a nonforfeitable right to any portion of his Accrued Benefit; and

(C)        has a Surviving Spouse who survives to the commencement of the Preretirement Survivor Annuity under (d) below.

(2)         Entitlement Under Provisions of Old Plan .    The Preretirement Survivor Annuity applies to any Participant:

(A)        to whom (1) above does not apply;

(B)        on whose behalf benefits were accrued on or after the first day of the first Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1976; and

(C)        who separated from service on or after becoming entitled to the qualified joint and survivor annuity under the applicable provisions of the Old Plan and the Code prior to the Retirement Equity Act of 1984.

 

8-1


(3)         Election for Certain Separated Participants .    The Preretirement Survivor Annuity applies to any Participant:

(A)        to whom neither (1) nor (2) above applies;

(B)        who has at least 1 Hour of Service in the first Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1976;

(C)        who separated from service with at least 10 Vesting Years and had a nonforfeitable right to all or part of his Accrued Benefit;

(D)        who is alive on August 23, 1984;

(E)        whose Benefit Commencement Date has not occurred as of August 23, 1984; and

(F)        who elects the coverage of such Annuity during the period beginning on August 23, 1984 and ending on the earlier of his Benefit Commencement Date or the date of his death.

(c)         Definition of Preretirement Survivor Annuity .      The Preretirement Survivor Annuity is a survivor annuity for the life of a Participant’s Surviving Spouse:

(1)        under which the payments are equal to the survivor annuity which would have been paid under the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity with a survivor annuity equal to 50 percent (or such greater percentage as would have been payable to the Surviving Spouse under the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity elected by the Participant under Section 7.2 prior to his Benefit Commencement Date if the Participant dies prior to his Benefit Commencement Date) of the amount of annuity which is payable during their joint lives if:

(A)       in the case of a Participant who dies after attaining his Earliest Retirement Age, such Participant had retired with an immediate Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity on the day before his death; or

(B)       in the case of a Participant who dies on or before attaining his Earliest Retirement Age, such Participant had:

(i)        separated from service on the earlier of his actual separation or the date of his death,

(ii)       survived to his Earliest Retirement Age,

(iii)      begun to receive his benefit under the Plan as an immediate Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity at his Earliest Retirement Age, and

(iv)      died on the day after the day on which he would have attained his Earliest Retirement Age; and

(2)        under which annuity payments commence as of the later of:

(A)        the Participant’s date of death; or

(B)        the date on which the Participant would have attained his Earliest Retirement Age.

 

8-2


(d)         Preretirement Survivor Annuity Commencement Date .      The Preretirement Survivor Annuity shall commence as of the latest of:

(1)        the first day of the month coinciding with or next following the Participant’s date of death;

(2)        the date on which the Participant would have attained his Earliest Retirement Age; or

(3)        the first day of any month (not later than the December 31st of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70-1/2) elected by such Surviving Spouse. If the Preretirement Survivor Annuity commences as of a date other than the applicable date under (c)(2) above, the amount of the benefit shall be actuarially adjusted in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2 to account for the different commencement date.

(e)         Cash-Out Distributions .   Any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, the lump sum Actuarial Equivalent of the Preretirement Survivor Annuity shall be distributed to the Surviving Spouse, provided that:

(1)        the Actuarial Equivalent (determined as of the date as of which distribution occurs) of such Preretirement Survivor Annuity does not exceed $5,000 (or at the time of any prior distribution for distributions prior to October 17, 2000, did not exceed $5,000) and such payment is made before payment otherwise begins; or

(2)        the Surviving Spouse elects in writing to receive the lump sum distribution, such election acknowledges its effect, and the election is witnessed by a Plan representative or a notary public.

Such lump sum shall be paid as of the date the Preretirement Survivor Annuity would otherwise commence under (d) above.

8.2         No Other Death Benefit . Except as provided in Article 7 and Article 8, no other benefits shall be paid as a result of the death of a Participant.

 

8-3


ARTICLE 9

LIMITATIONS ON BENEFITS

9.1         Effective Date of Amendment for Final 415 Regulations .

(a)         General .    The provisions of this Article 9, as amended to reflect the Final 415 Regulations published by the Department of Treasury on April 5, 2007, are generally effective as of January 1, 2008.

(b)         Grandfather Rule .    Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Article 9, benefits accrued or payable under the Old Plan as of December 31, 2008 under the provisions of the Old Plan as adopted and in effect before April 5, 2007, may continue to be administered in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Plan as then in effect even if those benefits no longer comply with the requirements of such Final 415 Regulations or this Article 9.

9.2         Definitions . For purposes of this Article 9, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(a)        “Annual Addition” means, with respect to all Defined Contribution Plans in which a Participant participates or has participated, the sum, for the Limitation Year, of:

(1)        all employer contributions (other than amounts restored in accordance with section 411(a)(3)(D) or 411(a)(7)(C) of the Code) allocated to his account;

(2)        all forfeitures allocated to his account;

(3)        (A)           for Limitation Years beginning before January 1, 1987, the lesser of:

    (i)        one-half of his own contributions (other than rollover contributions, repayments of loans or of amounts described in section 411(a)(7)(B) of the Code in accordance with the provisions of section 411(a)(7)(C) of the Code, repayments of amounts described in section 411(a)(3)(D) of the Code, direct transfers between qualified plans, and, for Limitation Years after December 31, 1981, deductible employee contributions within the meaning of section 72(o)(5) of the Code) or

    (ii)       the amount of his own such contributions in excess of 6 percent of his Compensation for the Limitation Year;

            (B)            for Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 1986, 100% of his own such contributions for the Limitation Year.

(4)        amounts allocated, in years beginning after March 31, 1984, to an individual medical account, as defined in section 415(1)(2) of the Code, which is part of a pension or annuity plan maintained by the Employer or an Affiliate; and

 

9-1


(5)        amounts derived from contributions paid or accrued after December 31, 1985, in taxable years ending after such date, which are attributable to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee, as defined in section 419A(d)(3) of the Code, under a welfare benefit fund, as defined in section 419(e) of the Code, maintained by the Employer or an Affiliate.

A Participant’s Annual Addition shall include such other amounts as the Commissioner of Internal Revenue properly determines. An Annual Addition shall be deemed credited to a Participant’s account with respect to an applicable Limitation Year if it is allocated to his account under the terms of such plan as of any date within such applicable Limitation Year; provided however, such amount must be actually contributed within the time limit prescribed by applicable Treasury Regulations.

(b)        “Annual Benefit” means, with respect to a Participant, his annual benefit under the Plan and, subject to the applicable Treasury regulations, any other Defined Benefit Plans in which he participates or has participated, but not including any benefits not directly related to retirement benefits or any benefits attributable to employee contributions, rollover contributions, or (to the extent provided by applicable Treasury regulations) amounts transferred directly from another plan. Any benefit under any multiemployer plan (as defined in section 414(f) of the Code) shall be included only to the extent of the excess of such benefit over the benefit computed as if the Participant had no covered service with the Employer or any Affiliate.

(c)        “Compensation” means the total wages as defined in section 3401 of the Code and all other payments of compensation by the Employer (in the course of its trade or business) for which the Employer is required to furnish the Employee a written statement under sections 6041(d), 6051(a)(3) and 6052 of the Code determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in section 3401(a)(2) of the Code). Effective for Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 1997, the term includes any elective deferrals (as defined in section 402(g)(3) of the Code) and any amount which is contributed or deferred at the election of the Employee and which is not includible in the Employee’s gross income by reason of section 125 or 457 of the Code. Effective for Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 2000, the term also includes elective amounts that are not includible in the gross income of the Employee by reason of section 132(f)(4) of the Code. Section 415 Compensation actually paid or made available to a Participant within a Limitation Year (including, at the election of the Employer, amounts earned but not paid in a Limitation Year because of the timing of pay periods and pay days if these amounts are paid during the first few weeks of the next Limitation Year, the amounts are included on a uniform and consistent basis with respect to all similarly situated Employees and no amount is included in more than one Limitation Year) shall be used.

Except as follows, in order to be taken into account for a Limitation Year, Compensation must be paid or treated as paid to an Employee prior to the Employee’s severance from employment with the Employer. Compensation described below does not fail to constitute Compensation merely because it is paid after the Employee’s severance from employment with the Employer provided it is paid by the later of 2  1 2 months after the severance or the end of the Limitation Year that includes the date of the severance. Compensation is subject to this rule if (A) it is regular

 

9-2


compensation for services during the Employee’s regular work hours or for services outside the Employee’s regular working hours (such as overtime or shift differential), commissions, bonuses, or other similar payments, and (B) the payment would have been paid to the Employee prior to a severance from employment if the Employee had continued in employment with the Employer.

In addition, Compensation shall include:

(1)        Payments after severance from employment for the following, provided (i) the amounts are paid by the later of 2  1 2 months after severance from employment or the end of the Limitation Year that includes the date of severance, and (ii) those amounts would have been included in the definition of Compensation if they were paid prior to the Employee’s severance from employment with the Employer: unused accrued bona fide sick pay, vacation, or other leave if the Employee would have been able to use the leave if employment had continued or payments of nonqualified deferred compensation that are includible in gross income and that would have been paid to the Employee at the same time had his employment continued.

(2)        Post-severance pay to an individual who does not currently perform services for the Employer by reason of qualified military service (as that term is defined in section 414(u)(1) of the Code) to the extent those payments do not exceed the amounts the individual would have received had he continued to perform services for the Employer rather than entering qualified military service.

(3)        Post-severance pay to a Participant who is permanently and totally disabled, to the extent provided in applicable Treasury Regulations.

For any Limitation Year, only the first $265,000 (as adjusted by the Secretary of Treasury in accordance with section 401(a)(17) of the Code) of Compensation shall be taken into account.

(d)        “Defined Benefit Plan” means a plan (whether or not terminated) of the Employer or an Affiliate that is not a Defined Contribution Plan and that either qualifies under section 401 of the Code or meets the requirements of section 404(a)(2) of the Code.

(e)        “Defined Benefit Plan Fraction,” with respect to a Participant, means, subject to section 2004(d)(2) of ERISA, a fraction:

(1)        the numerator of which is the sum, for all Defined Benefit Plans in which he participates or has participated, of his Projected Annual Benefit (as determined under section 415(b)(2) of the Code as of the close of the Limitation Year), and

(2)        the denominator of which is the lesser of:

(A)        1.25 times the dollar limitation, under section 415(b)(1)(A) of the Code, in effect for the Limitation Year, or

(B)        1.4 times the Participant’s average Compensation for his highest three consecutive Limitation Years.

 

9-3


Notwithstanding the above, if the Participant was a participant as of the first day of the first Limitation Year beginning after December 31, 1986, in one or more Defined Benefit Plans which were in existence on May 6, 1986, the denominator of this fraction will not be less than 125 percent of the sum of the annual benefits under such plans which the Participant had accrued as of the end of the last Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 1987, disregarding any changes in the terms and conditions of the plan after May 5, 1986. The preceding sentence applies only if the Defined Benefit Plans individually and in the aggregate satisfied the requirements of section 415 of the Code for all Limitation Years beginning before January 1, 1987.

(f)        (1)        “Defined Contribution Plan” means each of the following (whether or not terminated) maintained by the Employer or an Affiliate:

(A)        a plan that is qualified under section 401 of the Code and that provides for an individual account for each participant and for benefits based solely on the amount contributed to the participant’s account, and any income, expenses, gains and losses, and any forfeitures of accounts of other participants which may be allocated to such participant’s account;

(B)        a Participant’s contributions to a Defined Benefit Plan;

(C)        contributions by the Employer or an Affiliate to a simplified employee pension (as defined in section 408(k) of the Code);

(D)        amounts allocated, in years beginning after March 31, 1984, to an individual medical account, as defined in section 415(1)(2) of the Code, which is part of a Defined Benefit Plan; and

(E)        a welfare benefit fund, as defined in section 419(e) of the Code, maintained by the Employer or an Affiliate, with respect to amounts derived from contributions paid or accrued after December 31, 1985, in taxable years ending after such date, which are attributable to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate account of a key employee, as defined in section 419A(d)(3) of the Code.

(2)        With respect to any Participant who is in control of the Employer within the meaning of section 414(b) or (c) of the Code, as modified by section 415(h) of the Code, the term “Defined Contribution Plan” includes an annuity contract described in section 403(b) of the Code and, with respect to Limitation Years before January 1, 1982, an individual retirement plan (as described in section 7701(a)(37) of the Code).

(g)        “Defined Contribution Plan Fraction,” with respect to a Participant, means, subject to the transition rules under section 415(e) of the Code and subject to the special rules provided by Treasury Regulations for special situations (including situations in which past records are not available), a fraction:

(1)        the numerator of which is the sum of the Annual Addition to the Participant’s account for the current Limitation Year and all prior Limitation Years and

 

9-4


(2)        the denominator of which is the sum of the lesser of the following amounts determined for the current Limitation Year and each prior Limitation Year of the Participant’s service:

(A)        1.25 times the dollar limitation in effect under section 415(c)(1)(A) (without regard to paragraph (6) thereof) of the Code for such Limitation Year, or

(B)        1.4 times the amount which may be taken into account for such Limitation Year under section 415(c)(1)(B) of the Code.

If the Participant was a participant as of the first day of the first Limitation Year beginning after December 31, 1986, in one or more Defined Contribution Plans which were in existence on May 6, 1986, the numerator of this fraction will be adjusted if the sum of this fraction and the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction would otherwise exceed 1.0 under the terms of this Plan. Under the adjustment, an amount equal to the product of the excess of the sum of the fractions over 1.0 times the denominator of this fraction, will be permanently subtracted from the numerator of this fraction. The adjustment is calculated using the fractions as they would be computed as of the end of the last Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 1987 and disregarding any changes in the terms and conditions of the plan made after May 6, 1986, but using the section 415 limitation applicable to the first Limitation Year beginning on or after January 1, 1987. The Annual Additions for any Limitation Year shall not be recomputed to treat nondeductible employee contributions as Annual Additions.

(h)        “Limitation Year” means the Plan Year or any other 12-consecutive-month period adopted pursuant to written resolution.

(i)        “Projected Annual Benefit” means, in the case of a Defined Benefit Plan, the Annual Benefit to which a Participant would be entitled upon the assumptions that:

(1)        he will continue employment until reaching normal retirement age as determined under the terms of the plan (or current age, if that is later);

(2)        his Compensation for the Limitation Year under consideration will remain the same until the date he attains the age described in (1) above; and

(3)        all other relevant factors used to determine benefits under the plan for the Limitation Year under consideration will remain constant for all future Limitation Years.

9.3         Limitation on Benefits .

(a)         General .    Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant’s Annual Benefit shall not, at any time within any Limitation Year to which section 415 of the Code applies, exceed the lesser of (1) $210,000 or (2) 100 percent of his average Compensation for the three consecutive Limitation Years for which he had the greatest aggregate Compensation. Benefit increases resulting from the increase to the dollar limitation shall be provided solely to those Participants with at least one Hour of Service on or after January 1, 2002.

 

9-5


In the case of a Participant who has had a severance from employment with an Employer that maintains the Plan and who is subsequently rehired by the Employer, the period of the Participant’s high-3 years of service is calculated by excluding all years for which the Participant performs no service for and receives no Compensation from the Employer maintaining the plan (referred to as the break period), and by treating the year of service immediately prior to and the year of service immediately after the break period as if such years of service were consecutive.

If, after having a severance from employment with the Employer, an Employee is rehired by the Employer, the Employee’s Compensation limit under the above is the greater of - -

(1)        100 percent of the Participant’s average Compensation for the period of the Participant’s three consecutive Limitation Years for which he had the greatest aggregate Compensation, as determined prior to the Employee’s severance from employment; or

(2)        100 percent of the Participant’s average Compensation for the period of the Participant’s high-3 years of service, with the period of the participant’s high-3 years of service determined pursuant to the immediately preceding provision and Treasury regulation section 1.415(b)-1(a)(5)(iii).

(b)         Participation in More Than One Defined Benefit Plan .      If a Participant participates, or has participated, in more than one Defined Benefit Plan, then any required reduction in his Annual Benefit shall be effected by reducing the most recently accrued benefit (other than a benefit under a multiemployer plan as defined in section 414(f) of the Code); and if such benefits accrued simultaneously under more than one plan, any such reduction shall be applied to each such benefit in proportion to the amount of such benefit (determined without regard to the limitations under section 415 of the Code).

(c)         Cost-of-Living Adjustment .   The dollar limitation set forth in (a)(1) above and, in the case of a Participant who separated from service, both the dollar limitation in (a)(1) and the amount taken into account under (a)(2) shall be adjusted for increases in the cost of living as prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury. Any such adjustment shall apply with respect to Limitation Years ending with or within the calendar year for which such adjustment is effective. No such adjustment shall be made to the dollar limitation in (a)(1) with respect to any Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 1988.

(d)         Actuarial Adjustments .

(1)         Adjustment for Form of Payment .   If a Participant’s benefit is in any form other than a straight life annuity, then, for purposes of (a) above, such benefit shall be adjusted to an actuarially equivalent straight life annuity in accordance with rules determined by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue; provided however, the value of a qualified joint and survivor annuity (as defined in section 417 of the Code) shall not be taken into account to the extent that such value exceeds the sum of the value of a straight life annuity beginning on the same date and the value of any post-retirement death benefits which would be payable even if the annuity were not in the form of a joint and survivor annuity.

(2)         Adjustment to Dollar Limitation for Benefits Beginning Before Age 62 .   If the benefit of a Participant begins prior to age 62, the defined benefit dollar limitation applicable

 

9-6


to the Participant at such earlier age is an annual benefit payable in the form of a straight life annuity beginning at the earlier age that is the actuarial equivalent of the defined benefit dollar limitation applicable to the Participant at age 62 (adjusted under (f) below, if required). The defined benefit dollar limitation applicable at an age prior to age 62 is determined based on the actuarial assumptions described in (4)(B) below.

(3)         Adjustment to Dollar Limitation For Benefits Beginning After Age 65 .   If the benefit of a Participant begins after the Participant attains age 65, the defined benefit dollar limitation applicable to the Participant at the later age is the annual benefit payable in the form of a straight life annuity beginning at the later age that is actuarially equivalent to the defined benefit dollar limitation applicable to the Participant at age 65 (adjusted under (f) below, if required). The actuarial equivalent of the defined benefit dollar limitation applicable at an age after age 65 is determined based on the actuarial assumptions described in (4)(B) below.

(4)         Actuarial Assumptions .

(A)         Adjustments for Form of Payment . Except as otherwise provided in applicable Treasury Regulations, effective for Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 1999, for purposes of adjusting any benefits under (1) above, the interest rate assumption used shall depend on the particular benefit form. In the case of a benefit form, such as a straight life annuity, not referred to in section 415(b)(2)(E)(ii) of the Code, the interest rate assumption shall be 5 percent.

In the case of a single sum and other forms referred to in section 415(b)(2)(E)(ii) of the Code, the interest rate assumption shall be the greater of (i) 5.5 percent, or (ii) the rate that provides a benefit of not more than 105 percent of the benefit that would be provided if the “applicable interest rate” as defined in section 417(e)(3) of the Code were the interest rate assumption. However, for Plan Years beginning in 2004 or 2005, the interest rate assumption shall be 5.5 percent.

The mortality table to be used shall be the applicable mortality table within the meaning of section 417(e)(3) of the Code.

In accordance with applicable Treasury regulations, automatic cost-of-living increases to a form of benefit that is not subject to section 417(e)(3) of the Code are not taken into account in determining the actuarially equivalent benefit.

(B)         Adjustments for Benefits Before or After Age 62 .    Except as provided in applicable Treasury Regulations, effective for Limitation Years beginning after December 31, 1999, for purposes of adjusting any limitation under (2) and (3) above, the interest rate assumption shall be 5 percent. To the extent that a forfeiture does not occur upon the Participant’s death, as provided in applicable Treasury regulations, no adjustment is to be made to reflect the probability of the Participant’s death. To the extent a mortality adjustment is required, the mortality table to be used shall be the applicable mortality table described in (A) above.

 

9-7


(e)         Total Annual Benefits Not In Excess of $10,000 .    Anything in (a) above to the contrary notwithstanding, the benefits payable with respect to a Participant under the Plan shall be deemed not to exceed the limitations of this Section 10.3 if:

(1)        the retirement benefits (without adjustment under (d) above) payable with respect to such Participant under the Plan and under all other Defined Benefit Plans do not exceed $10,000 for the Limitation Year or any prior Limitation Year; and

(2)        the Participant has never, at any time, participated in a Defined Contribution Plan to the extent defined in Section 9.2(f)(1)(A).

(f)         Reduction for Less Than 10 Years of Participation or Service .

(1)         Dollar Limitation .  In the case of a Participant who has less than 10 years of participation (determined on a reasonable and consistent basis) with the Employer and any Affiliates, the limitation in (a)(1) above shall be modified by multiplying such limitation by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of his years of participation (or part thereof) and the denominator of which is 10; provided however, such limitation shall not be reduced to an amount less than 1/10th of such limitation (determined without regard to this paragraph). To the extent provided in Treasury Regulations, this limitation shall be applied separately with respect to each change in the benefit structure of the Plan.

(2)         Compensation and Benefits Limitations .   In the case of a Participant who has less than 10 years of service (determined on a reasonable and consistent basis) with the Employer and any Affiliates, the limitations in (a)(2) and (e) above shall be modified by multiplying each such limitation by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of his years of service (or part thereof) and the denominator of which is 10; provided however, such limitations shall not be reduced to amounts less than 1/10th of such limitations (determined without regard to this paragraph).

(g)         Pre-Tax Reform Act of 1986 Accrued Benefit .    The limitations under (a) above shall not be less than a Participant’s Accrued Benefit, Normal Retirement Benefit or Postponed Retirement Benefit, as the case may be (expressed as an Annual Benefit), determined under the Plan as of the close of the last Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 1987 but without regard to changes in the Plan and cost of living increases occurring after May 5, 1986.

(h)         Pre-Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act of 1982 Accrued Benefit .    The limitations under (a) above shall not be less than a Participant’s Accrued Benefit or Normal Retirement Benefit, as the case may be (expressed as an Annual Benefit), determined under the Plan as of the close of the last Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 1983 but without regard to changes in the Plan and cost of living increases occurring after July 1, 1982.

(i)         Special Rules .    The limitations contained in this Section shall be subject to Section 9.4, subject to the transition rule under section 2004(d)(2) of ERISA (applicable to an individual who was an active Participant before October 3, 1973), and subject to Treasury Regulations covering the aggregation during a Limitation Year of previously unaggregated plans.

 

9-8


(j)         Multiple Annuity Starting Dates .   If a Participant has or will have distributions commencing at more than one annuity starting date, the limitations in this Section 9.3 must be satisfied as of each annuity starting date, taking into account the benefits that have been or will be provided at all of the annuity starting dates in accordance with applicable Treasury regulations.

9.4        Limitation in Case of Defined Benefit Plan and Defined Contribution Plan for the Same Employee .   For Limitation Years beginning before January 1, 2000, in any case in which a Participant has at any time participated in one or more Defined Contributions Plans, the sum of the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction and the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction, for any Limitation Year to which section 415 of the Code applies, may not exceed 1.0, subject to the provisions of section 2004(a)(3) of ERISA (applicable to an individual who, on September 2, 1974, was a Participant in both a Defined Benefit Plan and a Defined Contribution Plan), and subject to Treasury Regulations covering the aggregation during a Limitation Year of previously unaggregated plans. If such sum would exceed 1.0, then the rate of benefit accrual under the Plan shall be frozen or reduced (pursuant to Section 9.3(b) in the case of a Participant who participates in more than one Defined Benefit Plan) to the extent necessary to eliminate such excess. Benefit increases resulting from the repeal of section 415(e) of the Code and the corresponding inapplicability of this Section 9.4 will be provided solely to Participants with at least one Hour of Service on or after January 1, 2000.

 

9-9


ARTICLE 10

CONTINGENT RESTRICTIONS ON BENEFITS

10.1       Post-1991 Restrictions .

(a)         Effective Date .   The provisions of this Section shall be applicable to Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1992.

(b)         Restriction on Benefits .     Any other provision of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, in the event of Plan termination, the benefit of any highly compensated employee (as defined in section 414(q) of the Code) and any highly compensated former employee (as defined in section 414(q)(9) of the Code) is limited to a benefit that is nondiscriminatory under section 401(a)(4) of the Code.

(c)         Restrictions on Distributions .

 (1)        Applicability .   The restrictions described in (2) below are applicable only if --

(A)        after payment to a Restricted Participant of all Benefits to which he is entitled, the value of Plan Assets does not equal or exceed 110 percent of current liabilities, as defined in section 412(1)(7) of the Code, and

(B)        the value of Benefits of a Restricted Participant is not less than one percent of the value of current liabilities before distribution.

 (2)        Limit on Annual Payments .   The annual payments to a Restricted Participant are restricted to an amount equal to the payments that would be made on behalf of such Restricted Participant under a single life annuity that is the Actuarial Equivalent of the sum of his Accrued Benefit and his other Benefits under the Plan.

 (3)        “Restricted Participant” Defined . For purposes of this Section, “Restricted Participant” means a Participant who is among the 25 highly compensated employees (as defined in section 414(q) of the Code) or highly compensated former employees (as defined in section 414(q)(9) of the Code) with the greatest Earnings in the current or any prior Plan Year.

 (4)        “Benefit” Defined .    For purposes of this Section, “Benefit” includes loans in excess of the amounts set forth in section 72(p)(2)(A) of the Code, any periodic income, any withdrawal values payable to a living employee or former employee, and any death benefits not provided for by insurance on the Employee’s or former Employee’s life.

(d)         Exception to Restrictions .   The restrictions contained in this Section 10.1 may be exceeded for the purpose of making benefit payments to Restricted Participants who would otherwise be subject to such restrictions, if an agreement has been established, in accordance with this Section 10.1(d), to secure repayment to the Trust of the Restricted Amount upon termination of the Plan to satisfy section 401(a)(4) of the Code.

 

10-1


(1)         Security for Restricted Participant’s Repayment Obligation .   Prior to the receipt of a distribution, a Restricted Participant must agree to secure or collateralize his repayment of the Restricted Amount by:

(A)        promptly depositing in escrow with a depositary acceptable to the Administrator property having a fair market value equal to at least 125 percent of the Restricted Amount;

(B)        posting a bond, furnished by an insurance company, bonding company or other surety approved by the U.S. Treasury Department as an acceptable surety for federal bonds, equal to at least 100 percent of the Restricted Amount; or

(C)        providing the Administrator with a bank letter of credit in an amount equal to at least 100 percent of the Restricted Amount.

(2)         Withdrawals or Releases .     No provision in the Plan shall prevent a Restricted Participant from withdrawing from any escrow account established under this Section any amounts exceeding 125 percent of the Restricted Amount. A surety or bank may release any liability exceeding 100 percent of the Restricted Amount with respect to any bond posted or letter of credit provided under this Section.

(3)         Other Requirements for Escrow Accounts .     If the market value of the property in an escrow account established under this Section falls below 110 percent of the Restricted Amount, the Restricted Participant is obligated to deposit additional property to bring the value of the property held by the depositary up to 125 percent of the Restricted Amount. Subject to the preceding sentence, no provision in the Plan shall prevent a Restricted Participant from withdrawing any income from the property placed in escrow.

(4)         Certification by Administrator .     If at any time after distribution of a Restricted Amount commences,

(A)        the value of Plan Assets equals or exceeds 110 percent of the value of the Plan’s current liabilities;

(B)        the value of the Restricted Participant’s future payments that could have been distributed to the Restricted Participant, beginning when distribution commenced to the Restricted Participant, had the Restricted Participant received payments as provided under Section 10.1(c)(2), constitutes less than 1 percent of the value of the Plan’s current liabilities; or

(C)        the Plan has terminated and the benefit received by the Restricted Participant is nondiscriminatory, then the Administrator shall certify to the depositary, surety or bank, as applicable, that the Restricted Participant is no longer obligated to repay any amount under the agreement established between the Restricted Participant and the Administrator under this Section.

 

10-2


(5)         “Restricted Amount” Defined .   For purposes of this Section, “Restricted Amount” means the amount in excess of the amounts distributed to the Restricted Participant (accumulated with reasonable interest) over the amounts that could have been distributed to the Restricted Participant under Section 10.1(c)(2) (accumulated with reasonable interest).

10.2       PPA Restrictions .   Effective for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2008, the restrictions specified in section 436 of the Code shall apply, as provided in Appendix XX to the Plan and section 401(a)(29) of the Code.

 

10-3


ARTICLE 11

FUNDING

11.1       Employer Contributions .   The Employers shall make contributions to the Plan at such times and in such amounts as the Employers may determine.

11.2       Return of Employer Contributions to the Employer .

(a)         Mistake of Fact .   If a contribution by an Employer to the Plan is made by reason of a mistake of fact, then, subject to (c) below, such contribution may be returned to the Employer within 1 year after the payment of such contribution.

(b)         Deductibility .   Contributions by the Employers to the Plan are conditioned upon the deductibility of such contributions under section 404 of the Code, and if such deduction is disallowed, then, subject to (c) below, such contribution (to the extent disallowed) may be returned to the contributing Employer within 1 year after the disallowance of the deduction.

(c)         Limitation on Return .    The amount which may be returned to the Employers under paragraph (a) or (b) above shall be limited to the excess of the amount contributed over the amount that would have been contributed had there not occurred a mistake of fact or a mistake in determining the deduction. Earnings attributable to such excess may not be returned to any Employer, but losses attributable thereto must reduce the amount to be so returned.

11.3       Application of Forfeitures .  Prior to the termination of the Plan, all forfeitures of benefits arising from termination of employment with an Employer, death, or any other reason shall not be applied to increase the benefits any Participant would otherwise be entitled to receive under the Plan, but may be anticipated in determining the costs under the Plan and shall be applied to the reduction of the Employer’s contributions to the Plan.

11.4       Funding Policy and Method .

(a)         Establishment .   The Administrator shall establish, for the Plan, a funding policy and method, which shall be consistent with the objectives of the Plan, ERISA and any other applicable legal requirements and which shall take into account the Plan’s short-run and long-run financial needs with respect to liquidity and investment growth, as the same may change from time to time. Such funding policy shall be communicated as soon as practicable to those who are responsible for investment of the Plan Assets.

(b)         Funding Entities .  The Plan Assets shall be held under and the benefits under the Plan shall be funded through the Trust as it may be amended from time to time. The Trust so established and maintained is and shall be a part of the Plan.

 

11-1


ARTICLE 12

ADMINISTRATION

12.1       Administrator .

(a)         Named Fiduciary .  The Administrator shall be a “Named Fiduciary” for the Plan.

(b)         Responsibilities .   The Administrator shall discharge its responsibilities with respect to the Plan in accordance with the documents and instruments governing the Plan insofar as such documents and instruments are consistent with the provisions of title I of ERISA.

(c)         Powers .  In addition to the powers which are expressly provided in the Plan, the Administrator shall have the power and authority in its sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion to control and manage the operation and administration of the Plan and shall have all powers necessary to accomplish these purposes including, but not limited to the following:

(1)        the power to determine who is a Participant;

(2)        the power to determine benefits and nonforfeitable percentages with respect to Participants’ benefits;

(3)        the power to determine when, to whom, in what amount, and in what form distributions are to be made; and

(4)        such powers as are necessary, appropriate or desirable to enable it to perform its responsibilities, including the power to establish rules, regulations and forms with respect thereto.

Benefits under this Plan will be paid only if the Administrator decides in its discretion that the applicant is entitled to them.

12.2       Procedures for Delegation .

(a)         Delegations .  The Administrator may delegate to one or more persons or entities certain of its fiduciary responsibilities (other than duties involving the management or control of the Plan Assets) under an arrangement whereby it shall have the opportunity for such periodic review of the delegate’s performance as is appropriate under the circumstances and at such times and in such manner as it may choose for the purpose of its evaluation of continuing such designation and delegation and whereby it can promptly terminate the delegate’s services.

(b)         Advisors .  The Administrator shall have the right to employ one or more persons or entities to render advice with regard to any responsibility it has under the Plan.

(c)         Claims Review Committee .   The Administrator shall create a Claims Review Committee and shall appoint such individuals to serve on that Committee as it deems appropriate from time to time. The Claims Review Committee shall have the duty and power, in its sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion to administer the initial claims procedure under Section 12.4

 

12-1


and the claim review procedure under section 12.5. The Claims Review Committee shall have sole, absolute and uncontrolled discretion to decide all claims under the initial claims procedure and under the claim review procedure and its decisions shall be binding on all parties.

(d)         Removal, Resignation, and Vacancies .    A holder of a delegated position of fiduciary responsibility (including an individual member of a group holding such position) may be removed therefrom at any time and without cause by the person or entity making the delegation and may resign at any time upon prior written notice to such person or entity. Vacancies in any such positions created by removal, resignation, death or other cause may be filled by such person or entity or the fiduciary responsibilities for such position may be retained and/or redelegated by such person or entity.

12.3       Miscellaneous Administration Provisions .

(a)         Administrative Expenses .    The Administrator may direct that the reasonable expenses of administering the Plan, including any expenses incident to the functioning of the Administrator and the professional fees of any consultants or advisors with respect to the Plan, be paid from the Plan Assets; provided however, no person who already receives full-time pay from an Employer shall receive any compensation from the Plan, except for reimbursement of expenses properly and actually incurred. The Employer in its sole and absolute discretion may elect to make payment of the reasonable expenses of administering the Plan and may incur such expenses with reimbursement to be made by the Plan.

(b)         Indemnification .   An Employer may indemnify, through insurance or otherwise, some or all of the fiduciaries with respect to the Plan against claims, losses, damages, expenses and liabilities arising from their performance of their responsibilities under the Plan.

(c)         Interpretations .    All interpretations of the Plan and questions concerning its administration and application as determined by the Administrator shall be binding on all persons having an interest under the Plan.

(d)         Qualified Domestic Relations Order Procedures .     The Administrator shall establish reasonable procedures to determine the qualified status, under section 414(p) of the Code, of domestic relations orders and to administer distributions under such qualified orders.

(e)         Effectiveness of Elections, etc.   An election, designation, request or revocation provided for in the Plan shall be made in writing and shall not become effective until it has been properly filed with the Administrator.

(f)         Written Records .  The Administrator shall maintain all such books of account and other records and data as are necessary for the proper performance of its responsibilities under the Plan.

(g)         Administration Consistent with ERISA and the Code .   The Plan is intended to comply with the provisions of ERISA and of the Code, and the Plan shall be interpreted and administered consistently with such provisions and with the applicable regulations and rulings thereunder.

 

12-2


(h)         Service in More Than One Fiduciary Capacity . Any person or entity may serve in more than one fiduciary capacity for the Plan, including service both as Administrator and as trustee.

12.4       Initial Claims Procedure .

(a)         Claim .

(1)         Filing .  In order to present a complaint regarding the nonpayment of a Plan benefit or a portion thereof (a “Claim”), a Participant or beneficiary under the Plan (a “Claimant”) or his duly authorized representative must file such Claim by mailing or delivering a writing stating such Claim to the department, officer, or employee responsible for employee benefit matters of his Employer. A Claim includes a determination of whether specific employment will be section 203(a)(3)(B) service for purposes of the suspension of benefits.

(2)         Acknowledgment .    Upon such receipt of a Claim, the Claims Review Committee shall furnish to the Claimant a written acknowledgment which shall inform such Claimant of the time limit set forth in (b)(1) below and of the effect, pursuant to (b)(3) below, of failure to decide the Claim within such time limit.

(b)         Initial Decision .

(1)         Time Limit .   The Claims Review Committee shall decide upon a Claim within a reasonable period of time after receipt of such Claim; provided however, that such period shall in no event exceed 90 days, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing. If such an extension of time for processing is required, then the Claimant shall, prior to the termination of the initial 90-day period, be furnished a written notice indicating such special circumstances and the date by which the Claims Review Committee expects to render a decision. In no event shall an extension exceed a period of 90 days from the end of the initial period.

(2)         Notice of Denial .   If the Claim is wholly or partially denied, then the Claims Review Committee shall furnish to the Claimant, within the time limit applicable under (1) above, a written notice setting forth in a manner calculated to be understood by the Claimant:

(A)       the specific reason or reasons for such denial;

(B)       specific reference to the pertinent Plan provisions on which such denial is based;

(C)       a description of any additional material or information necessary for such Claimant to perfect his Claim and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary; and

(D) appropriate information as to the steps to be taken if such Claimant wishes to submit his Claim for review pursuant to Section 12.5, including notice of the time limits set forth in Section 12.5(b)(2).

 

12-3


(3)         Deemed Denial for Purposes of Review .   If a Claim is not granted and if, despite the provisions of (1) and (2) above, notice of the denial of a Claim is not furnished within the time limit applicable under (1) above, then the Claimant may deem such Claim denied and may request a review of such deemed denial pursuant to the provisions of Section 12.5.

12.5       Claim Review Procedure .

(a)         Claimant’s Rights .    If a Claim is wholly or partially denied under Section 12.4, then the Claimant or his duly authorized representative shall have the following rights:

(1)        to obtain, subject to (b) below, a full and fair review by the Claims Review Committee;

(2)        to review pertinent documents; and

(3)        to submit issues and comments in writing.

(b)         Request for Review .

(1)         Filing .    To obtain a review pursuant to (a) above, a Claimant entitled to such a review or his duly authorized representative shall, subject to (2) below, mail or deliver a written request for such a review (a “Request for Review”) to the department, officer, or employee responsible for employee benefit matters of his Employer. The filing shall include a complete description of the appeal, including a description of the original claim and any issue or information (e.g., comments, documents, and records) that the Claimant or his duly-appointed representative wants considered.

(2)         Time Limits for Requesting a Review .   A Request for Review must be mailed or delivered within 60 days after receipt by the Claimant of written notice of the denial of the Claim or within such longer period as is reasonable and related to the nature of the benefit which is the subject of the Claim and to other attendant circumstances.

(3)         Information .   At any time during the Claim process, the Claimant may request, and the Administrator or its delegate shall provide within a reasonable time thereafter free of charge, any relevant documents in its possession relating to the Claim.

(4)         Scope of Review .   The review shall take into account all information (e.g., comments, documents, and records) submitted by the Claimant relating to the Claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial Claim review.

(c)         Decision on Review .

(1)         Time Limit .

(A)        General .    If, pursuant to (b) above, a review is requested, then, except as otherwise provided in (B) below, the Claims Review Committee or its delegate (but only if such delegate has been given the authority to make a final decision on the Claim) shall make a decision promptly and no later than 60 days after receipt of the Request for Review; except that, if special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, then the decision shall be made as soon as possible but not later than 120 days after receipt of the Request for Review. The Claims Review Committee must furnish the Claimant written notice of any extension prior to its commencement.

 

12-4


(B)        Regularly Scheduled Meetings . Anything to the contrary in (A) above notwithstanding, if the decision on review is to be made by a committee which holds regularly scheduled meetings at least quarterly, then its decision on review shall be made no later than the date of the meeting which immediately follows the receipt of the Request for Review; provided however, if such Request for Review is received within 30 days preceding the date of such meeting, then such decision on review shall be made no later than the date of the second meeting which follows such receipt; and provided further that, if special circumstances require a further extension of time for processing, and if the Claimant is furnished written notice of such extension prior to its commencement, then such decision on review shall be rendered no later than the third meeting which follows such receipt.

(2)         Notice of Decision .   The Claims Review Committee or its delegate shall furnish to the Claimant, within the time limit applicable under (1) above, a written notice setting forth in a manner calculated to be understood by the Claimant:

(A)       the specific reason or reasons for the decision on review;

(B)       specific reference to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision on review is based;

(C)       a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits; and

(D)       a statement that there is no voluntary appeal procedure and the Claimant’s right to bring an action under section 502(a) of ERISA.

(d)         Interpretation .   This Section 12.5 shall be interpreted consistently with section 2560.503-1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. The Administrator may take such additional actions that are not inconsistent with such regulations.

12.6       Statute of Limitations .   No action at law or equity may be brought by a Participant, Beneficiary or person claiming through the Participant or Beneficiary regarding benefits under the Plan unless the Participant, Beneficiary or person claiming through the Participant or Beneficiary first exhausts the procedures set forth in Sections 12.4 and 12.5 and the action at law or equity is commenced no later than one year from the date of decision on review.

 

12-5


ARTICLE 13

AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

13.1       Amendment and Termination .

(a)         Right to Amend or Terminate . Fifth Third Bank reserves the right to amend or terminate the Plan, and each other Employer irrevocably delegates such power to Fifth Third Bank; provided any amendment shall be in accordance with the procedures set forth in (b) below. The power to amend and terminate shall include, but not be limited to, the power to merge other plans into this Plan, the power to accept transfers of assets and benefits from other plans, the power to determine the terms of any such merger or transfer, and the power to add, modify or delete an Appendix and to otherwise determine the terms and conditions applicable to any other Employer adopting the Plan.

(b)        (1)         Amendment Procedure . Any amendment of the Plan shall be by action of the Fifth Third Bank Pension, Profit Sharing and Medical Plan Committee or the Chairman of such Committee. If an amendment is being made by said Committee, it must be approved by a majority of the members of the Committee as constituted at the time of adoption of the amendment. Any amendment may be given retroactive effect as determined by said Committee or Chairman. An amendment may be evidenced in such manner as said Committee or Chairman shall determine. If the amendment is approved by said Committee, such evidence may include (but shall not be limited to) a written resolution signed by a majority of the members of the Committee or minutes of a meeting of the Committee reflecting approval by a majority of the members.

(2)         Termination Procedure . Any termination of the Plan shall be by action of the Fifth Third Bank Pension, Profit Sharing and Medical Plan Committee. Any termination must be approved by a majority of the members of said Committee as constituted at the time of adoption of the termination; and any such termination may be given retroactive effect as determined by said Committee. A termination may be evidenced in such manner as said Committee shall determine, and such evidence may include (but shall not be limited to) a written resolution signed by a majority of the members of the Committee or minutes of a meeting of the Committee reflecting approval by a majority of the members.

(c)         Conditions on Amendments and Termination .

(1)         Accrued Benefit .

(A)        General .    No amendment to the Plan (including a change in the actuarial basis for determining optional or early retirement benefits) shall be effective to the extent that it has the effect of reducing a Participant’s Accrued Benefit, except as permitted under the Code, including sections 411(d)(6) and 412(c)(8) of the Code, and/or Treasury Regulations.

(B)        Treatment of Certain Amendments .  For purposes of (A) above, an amendment which has the effect, with respect to benefits attributable to service before the amendment, of -

(i)       eliminating or reducing an early retirement benefit or a retirement-type subsidy or

 

13-1


(ii)      (except as otherwise provided by Treasury regulations) eliminating an optional form of benefit shall be treated as reducing Accrued Benefits. In the case of a retirement-type subsidy, the preceding sentence shall apply only with respect to a Participant who satisfies (either before or after the amendment) the preamendment conditions for the subsidy.

(2)         Changes in Vesting Schedule . No amendment shall reduce the nonforfeitable percentage of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit (determined as of the later of the date such amendment is adopted or the date such amendment becomes effective).

13.2       Allocation of Plan Assets Upon Termination of the Plan .

(a)         General Provisions .  In the event of the termination of the Plan, the Administrator shall allocate the assets of the Plan (available to provide benefits) among the Participants and beneficiaries of the Plan pursuant to section 4044 of ERISA and the applicable regulations and rulings promulgated thereunder.

(b)         Residual Assets .

(1)        Any residual assets remaining upon termination of the Plan may be distributed to the Employers if -

(A)       all liabilities (fixed and contingent) of the Plan to participants and their beneficiaries have been satisfied, and

(B)       the distribution does not contravene any provision of law.

(2)        Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (1), if any assets of the Plan attributable to employee contributions, if any, remain after all liabilities of the Plan to Participants and their beneficiaries have been satisfied, such assets shall be equitably distributed to the employees who made such contributions (or their beneficiaries) in accordance with their rate of contributions.

 

13-2


ARTICLE 14

TOP-HEAVY RULES

14.1       Definitions . For purposes of this Article 14, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(a)        “Aggregation Group” means:

(1)        each qualified plan or simplified employee pension of an Employer or an Affiliate in which a Key Employee is a participant,

(2)        each other plan of an Employer or an Affiliate which enables any plan described in (1) above to meet the requirements of section 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code,

(3)        any other plan or plans which the Administrator elects to include provided that the group would continue to meet the requirements of sections 401(a)(4) and 410 of the Code with such plan or plans being taken into account, and

(4)        any other plan which would have been included in the foregoing had it not been terminated.

(b)        “Determination Date,” with respect to any Plan Year for the Plan, means the last day of the preceding Plan Year (or, in the case of the first Plan Year of the Plan, the last day of such Plan Year).

(c)        “Determination Period” means, with respect to any Plan Year, the five Plan Years ending on the Determination Date with respect to such Plan Year.

(d)        “Key Employee,” with respect to any Plan Year, means, as determined under section 416(i) of the Code, any person who, at any time during the Determination Period with respect to such Plan Year, is:

(1)        an officer of an Employer or an Affiliate who:

(A)       has Compensation (as defined in Section 9.1) greater than 50 percent of the dollar limitation in effect under section 415(b)(1)(A) of the Code for any such Plan Year, and

(B)       is taken into account under section 416(i) of the Code;

(2)        one of the 10 employees who:

(A)       owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of sections 318 and 416(i) of the Code) both more than a 1/2 percent ownership interest in value and one of the 10 largest percentage ownership interests in value of an Employer; and

 

14-1


(B)       has (during the Plan Year of ownership) Compensation (as defined in Section 9.1) from the Employers and any Affiliates of more than the limitation in effect under section 415(c)(1)(A) of the Code for the calendar year in which such Plan Year ends;

(3)        a Five-Percent Owner; or

(4)        a 1-percent owner (as defined in section 416(i) of the Code) of an Employer having Compensation (as defined in Section 9.1) from the Employers and any Affiliates of more than $150,000.

(e)        “Present Value,” with respect to Accrued Benefits under the Plan, shall be determined as of the most recent Valuation Date which is within a 12-month period ending on the applicable Determination Date and shall be determined on the basis of the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2.

(f)        “Top-Heavy Plan” means the Plan, with respect to any Plan Year after 1983, if the Top-Heavy Ratio exceeds 60 percent.

(g)        “Top-Heavy Ratio” means, for the Plan or an Aggregation Group of which the Plan is a part, a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of defined contribution account balances and the Present Values of defined benefit accrued benefits for all Key Employees and the denominator of which is the sum of defined contribution account balances and the Present Values of defined benefit accrued benefits for all participants. The Top-Heavy Ratio shall be determined in accordance with section 416 of the Code and the applicable regulations thereunder, including, without limitation, the provisions relating to rollovers and the following provisions:

(1)        The value of accrued benefits under the Plan will be determined as of the Determination Date with respect to the applicable Plan Year.

(2)        The value of account balances and accrued benefits under plans aggregated with the Plan shall be calculated with reference to the determination dates under such plans that fall within the same calendar year as the applicable Determination Date under the Plan.

(3)        The value of account balances and the Present Value of accrued benefits will be determined as of the most recent valuation date that falls within or ends with the 12-month period ending on the applicable determination date, except as provided in section 416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder for the first and second plan years of a defined benefit plan.

(4)        A simplified employee pension shall be treated as a defined contribution plan; provided however, at the election of the Administrator, the Top-Heavy Ratio shall be computed by taking into account aggregate employer contributions in lieu of the aggregate of the accounts of employees.

(5)        Distributions (including distributions under a terminated plan which had it not been terminated would have been included in the Aggregation Group) within the 5-year period ending on a determination date shall be taken into account.

 

14-2


(6)        Defined contribution account balances shall be adjusted to reflect any contribution not actually made as of a determination date but required to be taken into account on that date under section 416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

(7)        Deductible voluntary contributions shall not be included.

(8)        There shall be disregarded the account balances and accrued benefits of a Participant.

(A)        who is not a Key Employee but who was a Key Employee in a prior Plan Year or

(B)        with respect to a plan year beginning after 1984, who has not performed services for any employer maintaining the plan at any time during the 5-year period ending on the determination date.

(9)        Effective for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1986, the accrued benefit of a Participant other than a Key Employee shall be determined (1) under the method, if any, which uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all defined benefit plans of the Employers, or (2) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued not more rapidly than the slowest accrual rate permitted under the fractional rule of section 411(b)(1)(C) of the Code.

(h)        “Valuation Date” means the valuation date used for computing Plan costs for minimum funding, regardless of whether a valuation is performed that year.

 

14.2

Minimum Benefit .

(a)         General .  If the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan for any Plan Year, then each Participant who is a Participant in such Plan Year, who is not a Key Employee, and who has a Vesting Year for such Plan Year, shall have an Employer-derived Accrued Benefit of not less than the minimum determined under this Section. Such benefit shall not be reduced in subsequent Plan Years.

(b)         Amount .  For purposes of this Section, the minimum benefit, expressed as a single life annuity commencing at Normal Retirement Age, shall be equal to the product of:

(1)        one-twelfth of the Participant’s average Compensation, as defined in Section 9.1(c), for the 5 consecutive Plan Years during which the Participant had the highest aggregate Compensation (disregarding any such Plan Year for which the Participant did not earn a Vesting Year and disregarding any such Plan Year beginning before January 1, 1984 or after the close of the last Plan Year in which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan); and

(2)        the lesser of

(A)        2 percent multiplied by his Vesting Years, excluding

(i)        any such Years completed in Plan Years beginning before January 1, 1984, and

(ii)       any such Years with, or within, which ends any Plan Year for which the Plan was not a Top-Heavy Plan; or

 

14-3


(B)       20 percent.

For these purposes, Compensation shall mean, for any Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the first $150,000 (as adjusted by the Secretary of Treasury in accordance with section 401(a)(17) of the Code), and only the first $200,000 (as adjusted by the Secretary of Treasury under section 415(d) of the Code) for any Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1989 and before January 1, 1994, of a Participant’s Compensation.

(c)         Actuarial Adjustment .  If a Participant’s benefit is paid in any form other than a single life annuity commencing at Normal Retirement Age, then the minimum benefit under (b) above shall be adjusted to the Actuarial Equivalent of such an annuity.

(d)         Participant Also Covered Under Defined Contribution Plan .  In lieu of (b) above, a Participant who is not a Key Employee and who is an Employee on the last day of the Plan Year also participates in one or more defined contribution plans which are part of the same Aggregation Group as the Plan, a maximum allocation of five percent (5%) of “Section 415 Compensation” shall be provided under the defined contribution plan or plans. If no defined contribution plan provides the minimum benefits described in this subsection (d), the minimum benefits shall be provided under this Plan.

 

14.3

Vesting Requirements .

(a)         Top-Heavy Years .  Anything in Article 5 to the contrary notwithstanding, for any Plan Year for which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan, a Participant who has at least one Hour of Service after the Plan becomes a Top-Heavy Plan shall have a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of his Accrued Benefit determined under the following table; provided however, no Participant’s vested percentage (as of the day before the Plan’s becoming a Top-Heavy Plan) shall be reduced.

 

Vesting Years

Nonforfeitable

Percentage

Less than 2 0%
2 20%
3 40%
4 60%
5 or more 100%

(b)         Subsequent Years .  If a Participant is covered under the Plan for a Plan Year in which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan and the Plan then ceases to be a Top-Heavy Plan for a subsequent Plan Year, then, for each such subsequent Plan Year, the following provisions shall apply:

(1)        the amount of such Participant’s nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit shall not be less than the amount of his nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit as of the end of the last Plan Year for which the Plan was a Top-Heavy Plan; and

 

 

14-4


(2)        if such Participant has credit for at least 3 Vesting Years (5 Vesting Years with respect to Participants who do not have credit for an Hour of Service on or after January 1, 1989) as of the end of the last Plan Year for which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan, then the vesting schedule in (a) above shall continue to apply to such Participant.

14.4       Limitations on Benefits .  If a Limitation Year beginning before January 1, 2000 contains any portion of a Plan Year for which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan, then, for purposes of the computation of the Defined Benefit Plan Fraction and the Defined Contribution Plan Fraction under Article 9, “1.0” shall be substituted for “1.25”; provided however, any limitation which results from the application of this sentence may be exceeded so long as there are no Defined Benefit Plan accruals for the individual and no employer contributions, forfeitures, or voluntary nondeductible contributions allocated to the individual.

 

14.5

EGTRRA Modification of Top-Heavy Rules .

(a)         Effective Date .   This Section shall apply for purposes of determining whether the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan under section 416(g) of the Code for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2001, and whether the Plan satisfies the minimum benefits requirements of section 416(c) of the Code for such years. This section applies notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary.

(b)         Determination of Top-Heavy Status .

(1)         Key Employee .  Key employee means any Employee or former Employee (including any deceased Employee) who at any time during the Plan Year that includes the determination date was an officer of the Employer having annual compensation greater than $130,000 (as adjusted under section 416(i)(1) of the Code for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2002), a 5-percent owner of the Employer, or a 1-percent owner of the Employer having annual compensation of more than $150,000. For this purpose, annual compensation means compensation within the meaning of section 415(c)(3) of the Code. The determination of who is a key employee will be made in accordance with section 416(i)(1) of the Code and the applicable regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder.

(2)         Determination of Present Values and Amounts .   This Section 14.5(b)(2) shall apply for purposes of determining the present values of Accrued Benefits and the amounts of account balances of Employees as of the determination date.

(A)        Distributions During Year Ending on the Determination Date . The present values of Accrued Benefits and the amounts of account balances of an Employee as of the determination date shall be increased by the distributions made with respect to the Employee under the Plan and any plan aggregated with the Plan under section 416(g)(2) of the Code during the 1-year period ending on the Determination Date. The preceding sentence shall also apply to distributions under a terminated plan which, had it not been terminated, would have been aggregated with the Plan under section 416(g)(2)(A)(i) of the Code. In the case of a distribution made for a reason other than severance from employment, death, or disability, this provision shall be applied by substituting “5-year period” for “1-year period”.

 

14-5


(B)        Employees not Performing Services During Year Ending on the Determination Date .    The Accrued Benefits and accounts of any individual who has not performed services for the Employer during the 1-year period ending on the determination date shall not be taken into account.

(C)        Minimum Benefits . For purposes of satisfying the minimum benefit requirements of section 416(c)(1) of the Code and the Plan, in determining years of service with the Employer, any service with the Employer shall be disregarded to the extent that such service occurs during a Plan Year when the Plan benefits (within the meaning of section 410(b) of the Code) no key employee or former key employee.”

 

14-6


ARTICLE 15

MISCELLANEOUS

 

15.1

Construction .

(a)         Article and Section References .   Except as otherwise indicated by the context, all references to Articles or Sections in the Plan refer to Articles or Sections of the Plan. The titles thereto are for convenience of reference only and the Plan shall not be construed by reference thereto.

(b)         Gender and Number .   As used in the Plan, except when otherwise indicated by the context, the genders of pronouns and the singular and plural numbers of terms shall be interchangeable.

15.2       Assignment or Alienation of Benefits .   Except as provided in section 401(a)(13)(C) of the Code, benefits provided under the Plan may not be anticipated, assigned (either at law or in equity), alienated or subject to attachment, garnishment, levy, execution or other legal or equitable process; provided however, effective January 1, 1985, benefits shall be paid in accordance with the applicable requirements of any domestic relations order which is a qualified domestic relations order (as defined in section 206(d) of ERISA or section 414(p) of the Code); and provided further that benefits shall be paid pursuant to any domestic relations order entered before January 1, 1985 if either the Plan is paying benefits pursuant to such order on such date or the Administrator elects to treat such order as a qualified domestic relations order. Except as provided in the foregoing, if any attempt shall be made to reach the beneficial interest of any Participant or beneficiary by legal process not preempted by ERISA, the Administrator may suspend any rights of distribution which any Participant or beneficiary may have, and may direct that such person’s beneficial interest hereunder be paid over or applied for the benefit of such person, or for the benefit of dependents of such person, as the Administrator shall determine.

 

15.3

Data .

(a)         Obligation to Furnish .   Each person who participates or claims benefits under the Plan shall furnish to the Administrator, any trustee, or any insurance company involved in the funding of the benefits under the Plan, such signatures, documents, evidence, or information as the Administrator, such trustee, or such insurance company shall consider necessary or desirable for the purpose of administering the Plan.

(b)         Mistakes or Misstatements .   In the event of a mistake or a misstatement as to any item of such information, as is furnished pursuant to (a) above, which has an effect on the amount of benefits to be paid under the Plan, or in the event of a mistake or misstatement as to the amount of payments to be made to a person entitled to receive a benefit under the Plan, the Administrator shall cause such amounts to be withheld or accelerated, as shall in its judgment accord to such person the payment to which he is properly entitled under the Plan.

 

15-1


15.4

Employment Relationship .

(a)         No Enlargement of Rights .    Except as otherwise provided by law or legally enforceable contract, the establishment of the Plan or of any fund or any insurance contract thereunder, any amendment of the Plan, participation in the Plan, or the payment of any benefits under the Plan, shall not be construed as giving any person whomsoever any legal or equitable claims or rights against any Employer, or its officers, directors, or shareholders, as such, or as giving any person the right to be retained in the employment of any Employer.

(b)         Employer’s Rights .    The right of an Employer to discipline or discharge an employee shall not be affected by reason of any of the provisions of the Plan.

15.5       Merger or Transfer of Plan Assets .   In the case of any merger or consolidation of the Plan with, or transfer of assets or liabilities of the Plan to, any other plan, each Participant in the Plan shall (if the surviving plan terminated immediately after the merger, consolidation, or transfer) be entitled to receive a benefit which is equal to or greater than the benefit he would have been entitled to receive immediately before the merger, consolidation, or transfer (if the Plan had then terminated).

15.6       Incompetency or Disability .   Each person to whom a distribution is payable under the Plan shall be conclusively presumed to be mentally competent and not under a disability that renders him unable to care for his affairs, until the date on which the Administrator receives a written notice, in a form and manner acceptable to the Administrator, indicating that a guardian, conservator, or other party legally vested with the care of the person or the estate of such person has been appointed by a court of competent jurisdiction, and any payment of a distribution due thereafter shall be made to the same, provided that proper proof of his appointment and continuing qualification is furnished in a form and manner acceptable to the Administrator. The Administrator shall not be required to look to the application of any such payment so made.

15.7       Annuity Contracts .   In order to provide the benefit to which any person is entitled under the Plan, the Administrator may distribute an annuity contract pursuant to the terms of which the person’s benefit is to be provided in compliance with the terms of the Plan. Any annuity contract distributed from the Plan must be nontransferable.

15.8       USERRA and HEART Act .   Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, contributions, benefits and service credit with respect to qualified military service will be provided in accordance with section 414(u) of the Code. Upon the death of any Participant who dies on or after January 1, 2007, while on a leave of absence to perform qualified military service with reemployment rights described in Code section 414(u), the Participant’s Beneficiary shall be entitled to any additional benefits (other than benefit accruals related to the period of qualified military service) that would be provided under the Plan had the Participant resumed employment and then terminated employment on account of death, in accordance with section 401(a)(37) of the Code.

 

15-2


15.9       Governing Law .    The Plan and all rights and duties under the Plan shall be governed, construed and administered in accordance with the laws of the State of Ohio, except as governed separately by or preempted by federal law.

15.10     Severability .    In case any provision of this Plan shall be held illegal or invalid for any reason, such illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining provisions of this Plan, and this Plan shall be construed and interpreted as if such illegal or invalid provision had never been a part of it.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Fifth Third Bank has caused this Plan as supplemented by Appendices I through XX attached hereto, to be executed this 21 day of January, 2015.

 

FIFTH THIRD BANK

By:

/s/ Teresa J Tanner

 

15-3


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX I

SERVICE CREDITING FOR CERTAIN PREDECESSOR EMPLOYERS

1.            Predecessor Employers .    The crediting of service under this Appendix shall apply only to those Employees described below.

 

  (a)

GATEWAY LEASING CORPORATION, an Ohio Corporation .      Former employees of Gateway Leasing Corporation (“Gateway”) who became Employees on or before June 7, 1997 in connection with The Fifth Third Leasing Company’s Asset Purchase Agreement with Gateway shall be credited with Vesting Years under Section 2.39 of the Plan, for their service with Gateway.

 

  (b)

GREAT LAKES NATIONAL BANK, OHIO, N.A .      Former employees of Great Lakes National Bank, Ohio, N.A. (“Great Lakes’) who became Employees on or before September 26, 1997 in connection with the Employer’s acquisition of certain assets of Great Lakes shall be credited with Vesting Years under Section 2.39 of the Plan for their service with Great Lakes.

 

  (c)

SUBURBAN BAN CORPORATION, INC. AND SUBURBAN FEDERAL SAVINGS BANK .        Former employees of Suburban Bancorporation, Inc. or Suburban Federal Savings Bank who became Employees in connection with Fifth Third Bancorp’s acquisition of such entities shall be credited with Vesting Years under Section 2.39 of the Plan, for their service with Suburban Bancorporation, Inc. and Suburban Federal Savings Bank.

 

  (d)

STATE SAVINGS COMPANY .    Former employees of State Savings Company or any of its subsidiaries who become Employees in connection with Fifth Third Bancorp’s acquisition of such entities shall be credited with Vesting Years under Section 2.39 of the Plan, for their service with State Savings Company and any of its subsidiaries.

2.            Crediting of Service .    Service with the predecessor employers described in paragraph 1 above shall be credited to such Employees specified in paragraph 1 above under rules comparable to those under Section 2.39 of the Plan for Vesting Years.

 

AI-1


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX II

THE FIFTH THIRD BANK PENSION PLAN

1.           Predecessor Plan .  The Fifth Third Bank Pension Plan (the “Pension Plan”) was merged into the Plan, effective as of January 1, 1982. The Pension Plan is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.           Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .  The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in the Pension Plan on December 31, 1981 and whose employment by Fifth Third Bank terminates on or after January 1, 1982.

(b)         Benefit Formula .  A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the Pension Plan shall be a monthly benefit equal to the sum of:

(1)        1-1/2% of his Final Average Pay multiplied by his last continuous period of employment (in 12-month periods and completed quarters to a maximum of 35 years) by The Fifth Third Bank prior to January 1, 1955, determined in accordance with reasonable standards and policies adopted by The Fifth Third Bank which standards and policies shall be consistently observed; plus

(2)        $10.00 (actuarially adjusted for payment in a form other than a single life annuity).

(c)         Predecessor Employers .  Employment with each of the following banks shall be treated as employment by The Fifth Third Bank with respect to persons who were employed by any such bank on December 31, 1954:

(1)        The Lincoln National Bank, of Cincinnati, Ohio (which was consolidated into and with The Fifth Third Bank as of the close of business on May 13, 1955);

(2)        The Norwood-Hyde Park Bank and Trust Company (whose assets were purchased, whose liabilities were assumed and whose personnel were employed by The Fifth Third Bank as of the close of business on January 1, 1962); and

(3)        The Citizens Bank of St. Bernard (whose assets were purchased, whose liabilities were assumed and whose personnel were employed by The Fifth Third Bank as of the close of business on September 1, 1963).

 

AII-1


(d)         Norwood-Hyde Park Provisions .

(1)        The amount of the monthly benefit of a Participant, computed under (b) above, shall include and shall not be in addition to the aggregate amount of monthly benefits which may be available to him under any single premium units of paid-up life insurance acquired on such Participant’s life pursuant to the Profit Sharing Retirement Plan of The Norwood-Hyde Park Bank and Trust Company.

(2)        If the service of a Participant does not give him a monthly benefit, computed under (b) above, then the Predecessor Plan Benefit hereunder of such Participant shall be the aggregate amount of monthly benefits which may be available under any single premium units of paid-up life insurance acquired on such Participant’s life pursuant to the Profit Sharing Retirement Plan of The Norwood-Hyde Park Bank and Trust Company.

 

3.

Special Benefit Provisions .

(a)         Vesting .  Anything in Section 5.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant shall, at all times, have a non-forfeitable right to his Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix.

(b)         Early Retirement Reduction Factor .    Anything in Section 6.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant’s monthly Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be reduced by 4/10th of 1% for each full calendar month by which his Benefit Commencement Date precedes his 60th birthday.

(c)         Disability .

(1)         General .        Subject to (3) below, upon a Participant’s incurrence of a Disability (defined in (2) below) prior to his reaching Normal Retirement Age, if, at the time of such incurrence (his “Disability Retirement Date”), he is an Employee, then, anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, his Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be payable (without actuarial reduction) commencing as of the first day of the month coinciding with or next following his Disability Retirement Date. Such Benefit shall be payable pursuant to the applicable provisions of Article 7 (without regard to the optional forms of payment under Sections 7.3), and, for such purposes, such first day of the month shall be treated as the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date.

(2)         Definition of Disability .  “Disability” means, with respect to a Participant, that he has a total and presumably permanent disability, as determined by the Administrator on the basis of such evidence as it determines to be satisfactory.

(3)         Cessation Upon Recovery from Disability .        If the Administrator determines that a Participant who is receiving a benefit pursuant to (1) above, and who has not attained Normal Retirement Age, is no longer suffering from a Disability, then such benefit shall cease. If a Participant’s entitlement to a benefit has ceased by reason of the preceding sentence and if such Participant has not returned to the employment of an Employer, then he shall be entitled to a benefit under Section 6.4 of the Plan, reduced by the Actuarial Equivalent of the aggregate amount of Disability retirement benefit which he previously received.

 

AII-2


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX III

THE FARMERS BANK OF WEST UNION RETIREMENT PLAN

1.           Predecessor Plan .    Effective January 1, 1982, The Farmers Bank of West Union adopted the terms and provisions of the Plan as a complete restatement of The Farmers Bank of West Union Retirement Plan (the “West Union Plan”). Effective January 1, 1982 (the “Merger Date”), the West Union Plan was merged into the Plan. The West Union Plan, as in effect prior to January 1, 1982, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.           Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .    The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in The West Union Plan on December 31, 1981 and whose employment by The Fifth Third Bank of Southern Ohio (formerly known as The Farmers Bank of West Union) terminates on or after January 1, 1982.

(b)         Amount .    A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the West Union Plan shall be equal to his accrued monthly benefit under the West Union Plan as of December 31, 1981.

 

AIII-1


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX IV

THE FAYETTE COUNTY BANK EMPLOYEES RETIREMENT PLAN

1.           Predecessor Plan .  Effective January 1, 1982, The Fayette County Bank adopted the terms and provisions of the Plan as a complete restatement of The Fayette County Bank Employees Retirement Plan (the “Fayette County Plan”). Effective January 1, 1982 (the “Merger Date”), the Fayette County Plan was merged into the Plan. The Fayette County Plan, as in effect prior to January 1, 1982, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.           Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .    The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in the Fayette County Plan on December 31, 1981 and whose employment by The Fayette County Bank terminates on or after January 1, 1982.

(b)         Amount .    A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the Fayette County Plan shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of a benefit in the form of a life-ten year certain annuity equal to the product of

(1)        his Benefit Service, as determined under the Fayette County Plan as of December 31, 1981, times

(2)        the sum of

(A)       .7 percent of his Final Average Pay (including, for this purpose, all payments which are reportable on his IRS W-2 form) plus

(B)       .8 percent of such Final Average Pay in excess of 1/12 of the amount of annual compensation (rounded to the nearest whole multiple of $600) on which a male Participant’s old age benefit at age 65 would be computed under the Social Security Act in effect on the first day of the calendar year in which his benefit is calculated, had he always earned compensation at least equal to the Social Security taxable wage base during each of his Social Security benefit computation years.

(c)         Minimum .  A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit, in whatever form paid, shall not be less than the actuarial equivalent of his accrued benefit, as of December 31, 1981, under the Fayette County Plan. For purposes of the preceding sentence, such actuarial equivalent shall be determined on the basis of the 1971 Group Annuity Mortality Table (Male), with female ages rated six years, and interest at the rate of 6% per year.

 

AIV-1


3.

Special Benefit Provisions .

(a)         Vesting Years .    Any Participant who was covered under the Fayette County Plan on December 31, 1981, and who has credit for at least 1,000 Hours of Service in both the 12 month period beginning on August 1, 1981 and the 12 month period beginning on January 1, 1982, shall be credited with 2 Vesting Years.

(b)         Right to Cash Surrender Value .        Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant’s nonforfeitable benefit shall not be less than the Actuarial Equivalent of a monthly benefit, payable at his Normal Retirement Date in the form of a life-ten year certain annuity, equal to 1/12 of 10 percent of his cash surrender value under the Fayette County Plan as of December 31, 1981.

 

AIV-2


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX V

THE PEOPLES NATIONAL BANK EMPLOYEES PENSION PLAN AND TRUST

1.           Predecessor Plan .    Effective as of November 1, 1983, and with respect to Participants retiring or otherwise separating from service after November 1, 1983, The Peoples’ National Bank of Wapakoneta adopted the terms and provisions of the Plan as a complete restatement of the plan provisions of The Peoples National Bank Employees Pension Plan and Trust (the “Peoples’ National Bank Plan”). Effective November 1, 1983 (the “Merger Date”), the Peoples’ National Bank Plan was merged into the Plan. The Peoples’ National Bank Plan, as in effect prior to November 1, 1983, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.           Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .    The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in the Peoples’ National Bank Plan on October 31, 1983 and whose employment by The Peoples’ National Bank of Wapakoneta terminates after November 1, 1983.

(b)         Amount .    A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the Peoples’ National Bank Plan shall be equal to the annuity, commencing as of his Normal Retirement Date and payable in the form provided in Section 7.1, which, as a lump sum, is the actuarial equivalent, determined on the basis of 7 percent interest and the 1971 Group Annuity Mortality Table (as it applies for female lives), of the cash value, on October 31, 1983, of the policy or policies then held for him under the Peoples’ National Bank Plan.

3.           Vesting Years .    Any Participant who was covered under the Peoples’ National Bank Plan on October 31, 1983, and who has credit for at least 1,000 Hours of Service in both the 12 month period beginning on the last anniversary, before January 1, 1984, of his date of hire and the 12 month period beginning on January 1, 1984, shall be credited with 2 Vesting Years.

 

AV-1


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX VI

C & H BANCORP PENSION TRUST

1.           Predecessor Plan .      Effective January 1, 1989, Citizens Heritage Bank, National Association, adopted the terms and provisions of the Plan as a complete restatement of the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust. Effective December 31, 1988 (the “Merger Date”), the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust was merged into the Plan. The C & H Bancorp Pension Trust, as in effect prior to January 1, 1989, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.           Early Retirement Age .    In the case of any Participant who was a participant in the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust on the Merger Date, Early Retirement Age shall be age 55.

3.           Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .    The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust on the Merger Date, and whose employment by Citizens Heritage Bank, National Association, terminates on or after January 1, 1989.

(b)         Amount .    A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust shall be equal to his accrued monthly benefit under that plan as of the Merger Date.

4.           Vesting .    Anything in Section 5.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant who was a participant in the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust on the date of adoption of this Appendix and who has 5 or more Vesting Years (determined as of 60 days after the later of such adoption date or the date such Participant is notified of the vesting schedule in said Section 5.2) shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Accrued Benefit determined pursuant to the vesting schedule in the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust (immediately prior to the merger) at any time that such vesting schedule would provide the Participant with a greater nonforfeitable percentage than the percentage determined under Section 5.2.

5.           Actuarial Equivalent .    Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, if a Participant has a Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix, then his accrued monthly benefit under the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust as of the Merger Date, shall be converted to alternate forms of payment in accordance with the actuarial assumptions in effect as of the Merger Date in the C & H Bancorp Pension Trust.

 

AVI-1


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX VII

FIRST OHIO BANCSHARES, INC. EMPLOYEES’ RETIREMENT PLAN

1.           Predecessor Plan .    Effective December 8, 1989, Fifth Third Bancorp (successor to First Ohio Bancshares, Inc.), The First National Bank of Toledo, The Home Banking Company, Gibsonburg, First Ohio Capital Corporation, First Ohio Life Insurance Company, First Ohio Bancshares Realty, Inc. and First Ohio Investment Services, Inc. adopted the terms and provisions of the Plan as a complete restatement of the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan. Effective December 7, 1989 (the “Merger Date”), the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan was merged into the Plan. The First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.           Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .    The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan on the Merger Date and whose employment by Fifth Third Bancorp (successor to First Ohio Bancshares, Inc.), The First National Bank of Toledo, The Home Banking Company, Gibsonburg, First Ohio Capital Corporation, First Ohio Life Insurance Company, First Ohio Bancshares Realty, Inc. and First Ohio Investment Services, Inc. terminates after the Merger Date.

(b)         Benefit Formula .    A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan, in the case of a Participant who is an Employee on August 31, 1994, shall be equal to the sum of (1) the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity payable in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued monthly benefit (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 120 monthly payments guaranteed) under that plan as of the Merger Date plus (2) the amount (if any) by which the Participant’s Ongoing First Ohio Benefit as of August 31, 1994 exceeds the Participant’s Total Fifth Third Benefit as of August 31, 1994. Effective as of August 31, 1994, the Predecessor Plan Benefit is frozen and no further Predecessor Plan Benefit shall accrue for any Participant.

(c)         Definitions .    As used in this Appendix, the following terms, when capitalized, shall have the following meanings:

(1)         “Average Monthly Earnings” means, as of any particular date, the average, on a monthly basis, of a Participant’s Earnings for the highest 5 consecutive Plan Years in the preceding 15 Plan Years; provided however, if, as of a particular date, a Participant’s entire period of service for the Employers (including service for an Employer prior to its adoption of the plan) is less than 5 consecutive Plan Years in the preceding 15 Plan Years, then the Participant’s Average Monthly Earnings means the average, on a monthly basis of the Participant’s Earnings during his entire period of service for the Employers (including service for an Employer prior to its adoption of the Plan).

 

AVII-1


(2)         “Benefit Hours” means, with respect to a Participant, each Hour of Service determined by treating service taken into account under the First Ohio Plan, as if it were service for the Employer.

(3)         “Benefit Years” means, except as provided below, the sum of the following:

(A)        All of a Participant’s “Credited Service” taken into account under the First Ohio Plan as of December 31, 1988, for benefit accrual and payment purposes.

(B)        Each Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1988 (commencing with the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 21) for which the Participant receives credit for 2,080 or more Benefit Hours; provided however, that if a Participant has less than 2,080 Benefit Hours but at least 1,000 Benefit Hours for a Plan Year, then he shall receive credit for a partial Benefit Year in accordance with the following schedule:

 

Benefit Hours

Twelfths of a Year of Credit Service

1,820 or More

                        12/12ths

1,660 to 1,819

                        11/12ths

1,500 to 1,659

                        10/12ths

1,340 to 1,499

                        9/12ths

1,180 to 1,339

                        8/12ths

1,000 to 1,179

                        7/12ths

Less than 1,000

                        None

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant credited with less than 1,000 Hours of Service for the Plan Year in which he retires or terminates service, shall receive credit for a partial Benefit Year in accordance with the following schedule:

 

Benefit Hours

Twelfths of a Year of Credit Service

860 to 999

                        6/12ths

700 to 859

                        5/12ths

540 to 699

                        4/12ths

380 to 539

                        3/12ths

220 to 379

                        2/12ths

75 to 219

                        1/12th

Less than 75

                        None

If any of a Participant’s Vesting Years are disregarded by reason of a Break in Service, then his Benefit Years prior to such Break in Service shall also be disregarded.

 

AVII-2


(4)        “Earnings” means, for a Plan Year:

(A)        For Plan Years ending before January 1, 1989, the “Annual Earnings” taken into account for the corresponding period under the First Ohio Plan for benefit accrual and payment purposes.

(B)        For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, for an individual who is credited with at least 2,080 Benefit Hours for the Plan Year, the total compensation which is required to be reported by the Employer (including such compensation paid by an Employer prior to its adoption of the Plan) for the calendar year for federal income tax purposes on Form W-2 (or any corresponding successor form) excluding discretionary bonuses, pay in lieu of vacation time, moving expenses, extra compensation for special services and amounts received pursuant to a cash election under The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Profit Sharing Plan, but including amounts that would have been included in the foregoing but for a salary reduction election under a qualified cash or deferred arrangement under section 401(k) of the Code.

(C)        For Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1988, for an individual who is credited with less than 2,080 Benefit Hours, the amount determined under (B) above increased by a fraction, the numerator of which is 2,080 and the denominator is the number of Benefit Hours for which the participant receives credit for the Plan Year.

In no event, however, shall a Participant’s Earnings taken into account for a Plan Year exceed $200,000 ($150,000 for any Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1994) as adjusted pursuant to section 401(a)(17) of the Code. In applying these limitations to any “5-percent owner” or any “highly compensated employee in the group consisting of the 10 highly compensated employees paid the greatest compensation during the year” (as those terms are used in section 414(q)(6) of the Code), such Participant’s spouse and lineal descendants who have not attained age 19 before the close of the Plan Year shall be aggregated with such Participant and shall be treated as a single Participant.

(5)       (A)        A Participant’s “Offset Amount” at any particular time shall be equal to:

(i)        for a Participant who was a Qualified Participant (as defined below) in 1990, his base pay plus variable compensation (up to a total of $207,326) from the Employers for 1990 x 15.97%; plus

(ii)       for a Participant who was a Qualified Participant (as defined below) in 1991, his base pay plus variable compensation (up to a total of $212,014) from the Employers for 1991 x 14.28%; plus

(iii)      for a Participant who was a Qualified Participant (as defined below) in 1992, his base pay plus variable compensation (up to a total of $199,867) from the Employers for 1992 x 14.27%; plus

 

AVII-3


(iv)        for a Participant who was a Qualified Participant (as defined below) in 1993, his base pay plus variable compensation (up to a total of $196,721) from the Employers for 1993 x 14.14%.

(B)        A Participant shall be a “Qualified Participant” for a particular year under (A) above if he:

(i)          is in the employment of an Employer on the last day of such Plan Year;

(ii)         died during such Plan Year and prior to the termination of his employment;

(iii)        retired on or after his reaching age 65 during such Plan Year;

(iv)        retired on or after his reaching age 55 during such Plan Year;

(v)         incurred a disability (an incapacity caused by bodily injury or disease which prevents an Employee from performing his regular duties, based upon medical evidence satisfactory to the Administrator) and retired as a result thereof during such Plan Year; or

(vi)        is on leave of absence at the close of such Plan Year, if he received compensation from an Employer during such Plan Year.

(C)        In determining base pay plus variable compensation under (A) above, only the first $200,000 (only $150,000 for any Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1994) (as adjusted pursuant to section 401(a)(17) of the Code) of a Participant’s base pay plus variable compensation shall be taken into account. Effective for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1996, the family aggregation rules previously in effect for this purpose no longer apply.

In determining benefits payable under the Plan, the determination of a Participant’s Offset Amount shall be made as of August 31, 1994.

(6)       A Participant’s “Ongoing First Ohio Benefit” shall be equal to the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity payable in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Normal Retirement Date (or, in the case of a Participant who has not terminated service as of his Normal Retirement Date, commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date under Section 6.3 of the Plan) which is the Actuarial Equivalent of a monthly benefit commencing at Normal Retirement Date (or, in the case of a Participant who has not terminated service as of his Normal Retirement Date, commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date under Section 6.3 of the Plan) and payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 120 monthly payments guaranteed equal to the sum of:

(A)        1.9% of the first $1,000 of his Average Monthly Earnings, plus 2.5% of his Average Monthly Earnings in excess of $1,000, multiplied by his Benefit Years not to exceed 20; plus

(B)        .5% of his Average Monthly Earnings multiplied by his Benefit Years in excess of 20 but not in excess of 35.

 

AVII-4


(7)        A Participant’s “Total Fifth Third Benefit” shall be equal to the sum of:

(A)        the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity payable in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued monthly benefit (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 120 monthly payments guaranteed) under the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan as of the Merger Date; plus

(B)        his Retirement Plan Benefit; plus

(C)        the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing immediately in the case of Participant who retires upon attainment of his Early Retirement Age or Normal Retirement Age (or, in the case of a Participant who has not terminated service as of his Normal Retirement Date, commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date under Section 6.3 of the Plan) which is the actuarial equivalent (based on the actuarial assumptions specified in 3 below) of the Participant’s Offset Amount as of August 31, 1994.

(d)         Early Retirement Reduction Factors .  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, if a Participant’s benefit commences prior to his Normal Retirement Date, in determining the Participant’s benefit, the amounts specified in (b)(1), (c)(6) and (c)(7)(A) above shall be reduced by 5/9ths of 1% (.55556%) for each month of the first sixty (60) calendar months, plus 5/18ths of 1% (.27778%) for each month of the next sixty (60) calendar months by which such Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date precedes his Normal Retirement Date.

 

3.

Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         Offset Amount Conversion .    For purposes of 2(c)(7)(C) above, actuarial equivalence shall be determined on the basis of the 1971 Group Annuity Mortality Table as it applies to female lives and the following interest rates:

(1)        if the Participant’s Offset Amount is not in excess of $25,000, the interest rates which would be used (as of January 1, 1994) by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation for purposes of determining the present value of a lump sum distribution on plan termination; or

(2)        if the Participant’s Offset Amount exceeds $25,000, 120% of the interest rates specified in (1) above.

 

AVII-5


(b)         Cash-Out Distributions .  The amount of any lump sum cash-out under Section 7.4 of the Plan with respect to any benefit attributable to a Participant who was a participant in the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan as of the Merger Date shall be based on the greater of:

(1)        the Participant’s nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit and the actuarial assumptions specified in (a) above (except that the interest rates used shall be those that are applicable as of the first day of the Plan Year which contains the Benefit Commencement Date or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid rather than August 31, 1994); and

(2)        the Participant’s nonforfeitable accrued monthly benefit under the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan as of the Merger Date and the UP-1984 Unisex Mortality Table set back two years and the interest rates specified in (a) above (except that the interest rates used shall be those that are applicable as of the first day of the Plan Year which contains the Benefit Commencement Date or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid rather than August 31, 1994).

 

4.

Alternative Forms of Benefit – Before August 1, 2015 .

(a)         Preservation of Alternative Form .  Subject to an effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the Plan, a Participant who was a participant in the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan as of the Merger Date, may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed the amount specified in 2(b)(1) above in a form specified in (b) below, but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015.

(b)         Preserved Joint Life-Ten Year Certain Option .

(1)        Under the preserved joint life-ten year certain option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date, then monthly payments shall be continued in an amount equal to 50%, 66- 2/3% or 100% (as elected by the Participant) of the monthly benefit payable to the Participant under this option to his designated Beneficiary payable over such Beneficiary’s remaining lifetime; provided that if the Participant and such Beneficiary die before a total of 120 monthly payments have been made, then the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

 

AVII-6


(2)        In determining the amount payable to the Participant under (1) above, the monthly benefit attributable to a Participant’s accrued monthly benefit under the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan as of the Merger Date (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 120 monthly payments guaranteed) shall be multiplied by the following factors:

 

Joint & Survivor

Percentage

Factor

 
50%

93% plus 1/2% for each year the Beneficiary is older than the Participant to a maximum of 97% or minus 1/2% for each year the Beneficiary is younger than the Participant.

66-2/3%

91 % plus 1/2% for each year the Beneficiary is older than the Participant to a maximum of 96% or minus 1/2% for each year the Beneficiary is younger than the Participant.

100%

87% plus 1% for each year the Beneficiary is older than the Participant to a maximum of 95% or minus 1% for each year the Beneficiary is younger than the Participant.

 

5.

Alternative Forms of Benefit – After July 1, 2015 .

(a)         Preservation of Alternative Form for Participants Age 70 or Older . Subject to an effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the Plan, a Participant who was a participant in the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan as of the Merger Date, and who is age 70 or older as of his Benefit Commencement Date, may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed the amount specified in 2(b)(1) above in the form specified in (b) below.

(b)         Preserved Joint Life-Ten Year Certain Option .

(1)        Under the preserved joint life-ten year certain option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date, then monthly payments shall be continued in an amount equal to 50% of the monthly benefit payable to the Participant under this option to his designated Beneficiary payable over such Beneficiary’s remaining lifetime; provided that if the Participant and such Beneficiary die before a total of 120 monthly payments have been made, then the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

 

AVII-7


(2)        In determining the amount payable to the Participant under (1) above, the monthly benefit attributable to a Participant’s accrued monthly benefit under the First Ohio Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Retirement Plan as of the Merger Date (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 120 monthly payments guaranteed) shall be multiplied by the following factors:

 

Joint & Survivor

Percentage

Factor

 
50%

93% plus 1/2% for each year the Beneficiary is older than the Participant to a maximum of 97% or minus 1/2% for each year the Beneficiary is younger than the Participant.

 

AVII-8


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX VIII

AMERICAN NATIONAL BANK RETIREMENT PLAN

1.           Predecessor Plan . Effective January 1, 1986, the American National Bank (subsequently renamed The Fifth Third Bank of Campbell County, National Association) adopted the terms and provisions of the Plan as a complete restatement of the American National Bank Retirement Plan (the “American National Plan”). Effective December 31, 1986 (the “Merger Date”), the American National Plan merged into the Plan. The American National Plan, as in effect prior to January 1, 1986, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.           Normal Retirement Age and Early Retirement Age . In the case of any Participant who was a participant in the American National Plan on the date immediately preceding the adoption of this Appendix:

(a)        Normal Retirement Age shall be age 65; and

(b)        Early Retirement Age shall be age 55.

3.           Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .    The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in the American National Plan on December 31, 1985 and whose employment by the American National Bank terminates on or after January 1, 1986.

(b)         Amount .

(1)         General .    A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the American National Plan shall be equal to the sum of:

(A)        his accrued monthly benefit under the American National Plan as of December 31, 1985; plus

(B)        the excess, if any, of:

(i)        his accrued monthly benefit under the American National Plan for the period from January 1, 1986 through the date of adoption of this Appendix; over

(ii)       his Retirement Plan Benefit.

(2)         Bellevue Participants - Form of Payment .  Anything in Section 7.1 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, in the case of a Participant (hereinafter referred to as a “Former Bellevue Participant”) who was covered under the American National Bank Retirement Income Plan (formerly known as the Bellevue Commercial and Savings Bank Retirement Income Plan) on December 31, 1983, his monthly accrued benefit under (1)(A) above for service

 

AVIII-1


prior to January 1, 1984 shall be computed in the form of a life-ten year certain annuity and shall be converted to other forms of payment in accordance with the provisions of Section 6 of this Appendix.

4.           Vesting for Bellevue Participants .  The nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit of a Former Bellevue Participant (as defined in Section 3(b)(2) of this Appendix) shall not be less than the nonforfeitable amount of his accrued benefit under such plan as of December 31, 1983, based on the assumption that such plan had continued in existence.

5.           Pre-Retirement Death Benefit - Prior Plan Value .  If a Participant who was covered under the American National Bank Retirement Income Plan (formerly known as the Bellevue Commercial and Savings Bank Retirement Income Plan) prior to May 1, 1980 dies while in the active service of the Employer, then his designated beneficiary shall receive an amount equal to the excess, if any, of:

(a)        his prior plan value (as shown in Appendix C to the American National Plan as amended and restated effective January 1, 1984) together with interest of 8 percent per annum credited to his date of death, over

(b)        the sum of any payments made to his Surviving Spouse.

6.           Actuarial Equivalent .  Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, if a Participant has a Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix, then the following provisions shall apply:

(a)         Pre-1986 Benefits .  His accrued monthly benefit under the American National Plan as of December 31, 1985 shall be converted to alternate forms of payment in accordance with Tables A-I through A-S below; provided however, if he is a Former Bellevue Participant (as defined in Section 3(b)(2) of this Appendix), then Tables B-I through B-3 below shall apply (in lieu of Tables A-I through A-3) to his benefits for service prior to January 1, 1984.

(b)         Post-1985 Benefits .  His benefit under the Plan for service after December 31, 1985 shall not be less than an amount determined by applying the actuarial assumptions and factors in Tables A-I through A-S below to the excess of:

(1)        his Accrued Benefit under the Plan as of the date this Appendix is adopted over

(2)        his accrued monthly benefit under the American National Plan as of December 31, 1985.

 

AVIII-2


TABLE A-1

FACTORS FOR JOINT AND SURVIVOR OPTIONS

 

Number of Completed Years
by which Joint Annuitant is
  Qualified Joint & Survivor
and 50% Contingent
 

Contingent 

Annuitant Option  

Younger than Annuitant   Annuitant Option   75%      100%
0 .900   .860            .830
1 .895   .854            .822
2 .890   .848            .814
3 .885   .842            .806
4 .880   .836            .798
5 .875   .830            .790
6 .870   .824            .782
7 .865   .818            .774
8 .860   .812            .766
9 .855   .806            .758
10 .850   .800            .750
11 .845   .794            .742
12 .840   .788            .734
13 .835   .782            .726
14 .830   .776            .718
15 .825   .770            .710
16 .820   .764            .702
17 .815   .758            .694
18 .810   .752            .686
19 .805   .746            .678
20 .800   .740            .670
21 .795   .734            .662
22 .790   .728            .654
23 .785   .722            .646
24 .780   .716            .638
25 .775   .710            .630
26 .770   .704            .622
27 .765   .700            .614
28 .760   .700            .606
29 .755   .700            .600
30 or more .750   .700            .600

 

AVIII-3


TABLE A-2

FACTORS FOR JOINT AND SURVIVOR OPTIONS

 

Number of Completed Years
by which Joint Annuitant is
  Qualified Joint & Survivor
and 50% Contingent
 

Contingent  

Annuitant Option   

Older than Annuitant

 

Annuitant Option

  75%   100%
0 .900   .860          .830
1 .905   .866          .838
2 .910   .872          .846
3 .915   .878          .854
4 .920   .884          .862
5 .925   .890          .870
6 .930   .896          .878
7 .935   .902          .886
8 .940   .908          .894
9 .945   .914          .902
10 .950   .920          .910
11 .955   .926          .918
12 .960   .932          .926
13 .965   .938          .934
14 .970   .944          .942
15 .975   .950          .950
16 .980   .956          .950
17 .980   .962          .950
18 .980   .968          .950
19 .980   .974          .950
20 .980   .980          .950

 

AVIII-4


TABLE A-3

FACTOR FOR LIFE-10 YEAR CERTAIN OPTION

 

         Age Factor                 

         70

 .870                

         69

 .880                

         68

 .890                

         67

 .900                

         66

 .910                

         65

 .920                

         64

 .925                

         63

 .930                

         62

 .935                

         61

 .940                

         60

 .945                

         59

 .950                

         58

 .955                

         57

 .960                

         56

 .965                

         55

 .970                

TABLE A-4

FACTORS TO BE APPLIED TO ACCRUED BENEFIT

TO DETERMINE BENEFIT PAYABLE COMMENCING PRIOR TO AGE 65

NUMBER OF MONTHS

 

 

        Age at

     Retirement    

0   1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8   9   10   11  

55

.5000 .5033 .5067 .5100 .5133 .5167 .5200 .5233 .5267 .5300 .5333 .5367

56

.5400 .5433 .5467 .5500 .5533 .5567 .5600 .5633 .5667 .5700 .5733 .5767

57

.5800 .5833 .5867 .5900 .5933 .5967 .6000 .6033 .6067 .6100 .6133 .6167

58

.6200 .6233 .6267 .6300 .6333 .6366 .6400 .6433 .6467 .6500 .6533 .6567

59

.6600 .6633 .6667 .6700 .6733 .6767 .6800 .6833 .6867 .6900 .6933 .6967

60

.7000 .7050 .7100 .7150 .7200 .7250 .7300 .7350 .7400 .7450 .7500 .7550

61

.7600 .7650 .7700 .7750 .7800 .7850 .7900 .7950 .8000 .8050 .8100 .8150

62

.8200 .8250 .8300 .8350 .8400 .8450 .8500 .8550 .8600 .8650 .8700 .8750

63

.8800 .8850 .8900 .8950 .9000 .9050 .9100 .9150 .9200 .9250 .9300 .9350

64

.9400 .9450 .9500 .9550 .9600 .9650 .9700 .9750 .9800 .9850 .9900 .9950

 

AVIII-5


TABLE A-5

SINGLE SUM

 

Interest

-

            6-1/2%

Mortality             

 -

            PBGC Unisex UP-84 Table.

TABLE B-1

(FORMER BELLEVUE PARTICIPANTS)

FACTORS FOR JOINT AND SURVIVOR OPTIONS

 

Number of Completed Years   Qualified Joint & Survivor  

Contingent Annuitant

by which Joint Annuitant   and 50% Continent Annuitant  

Option

is Younger than Annuitant

 

Option

  75% 100%
0 .972 .929     .896
1 .967 .922     .888
2 .961 .916     .879
3 .956 .909     .870
4 .950 .903     .862
5 .945 .896     .853
6 .940 .890     .845
7 .934 .883     .836
8 .929 .877     .827
9 .923 .870     .819
10 .918 .864     .810
11 .913 .858     .801
12 .907 .851     .793
13 .902 .845     .784
14 .896 .838     .775
15 .891 .832     .767
16 .886 .825     .758
17 .880 .819     .750
18 .875 .812     .741
19 .869 .806     .732
20 .864 .799     .724
21 .859 .793     .715
22 .853 .786     .706
23 .848 .780     .698
24 .842 .773     .689
25 .837 .767     .680
26 .832 .760     .672
27 .826 .756     .663
28 .821 .756     .654
29 .815 .756     .648
30 or more .810 .756     .648

 

AVIII-6


TABLE B-2

(FORMER BELLEVUE PARTICIPANTS)

FACTORS FOR JOINT AND SURVIVOR OPTIONS

 

Number of Completed Years
by which Joint Annuitant      
  Qualified Joint & Survivor
and 50% Continent
  Contingent   
Annuitant Option   
is Older than Annuitant   Annuitant Option   75%   100%
0 .972   .929          .896
1 .977   .935          .905
2 .983   .942          .914
3 .988   .948          .922
4 .994   .955          .931
5 .999   .961          .940
6 1.004   .968          .948
7 1.010   .974          .957
8 1.015   .981          .966
9 1.021   .987          .974
10 1.026   .994          .983
11 1.031   1.000         .991
12 1.037   1.007         1.000
13 1.042   1.013         1.009
14 1.048   1.020         1.017
15 1.053   1.026         1.026
16 1.058   1.032         1.026
17 1.058   1.039         1.026
18 1.058   1.045         1.026
19 1.058   1.052         1.026
20 or more 1.058   1.058         1.026

TABLE B-3

(FORMER BELLEVUE PARTICIPANTS)

FACTORS FOR SINGLE LIFE ANNUITY

 

Age

Factor

65

1.087

64

1.081

63

1.075

62

1.070

61

1.064

60

1.058

59

1.053

58

1.047

57

1.042

56

1.036

55

1.031

 

AVIII-7


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX IX

KENTUCKY ENTERPRISE BANK, F.S.B.

EMPLOYEES RETIREMENT PLAN

1.          Predecessor Plan .  The Kentucky Enterprise Bank, F.S.B. Employees Retirement Plan (the “Kentucky Enterprise Plan”) merged into the Plan as of September 30, 1996 (the “Merger Date”). The Kentucky Enterprise Plan, as in effect on the Merger Date, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .    The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply to those Participants who were participants in the Kentucky Enterprise Plan on the Merger Date.

(b)         Amount .    A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be equal to this accrued monthly benefit as of the Merger Date payable under a single life annuity with equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date which is the actuarial equivalent of his accrued benefit under the Kentucky Enterprise Plan expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 60 monthly payments guaranteed.

3.          Retirement Ages .    In the case of any Participant who was a participant in the Kentucky Enterprise Plan as of the Merger Date, the following shall apply:

(a)        Normal Retirement Age shall be age 65; and

(b)        Early Retirement Age shall be age 55.

4.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         General .  The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan for any Participant with a Predecessor Plan Benefit and whose employment with Fifth Third Savings Bank of Northern Kentucky, F.S.B. or The Fifth Third Bank of Northern Kentucky, Inc. terminates after the Merger Date (and the amount of any adjustment for benefit commencement after attainment of age 65) shall be determined based on the greater of:

(i)       the Participant’s nonforfeitable Predecessor Plan Benefit and the actuarial assumptions applicable for this purpose under the Kentucky Enterprise Plan as of the Merger Date, and

(ii)      the Participant’s total nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit under the Plan as of the date the alternative form is being determined and the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2 of the Plan.

 

AIX-1


(b)         Early Retirement Reduction .    Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, if the benefit of any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable commences prior to his Normal Retirement Date, in determining the Participant’s benefit, his Predecessor Plan Benefit under 2(b) above shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of his Predecessor Plan Benefit using the actuarial assumptions applicable for this purpose under the Kentucky Enterprise Plan as of the Merger Date.

5.          Vesting Service and Vesting at age 55 .

(a)         Crediting of Service .   As provided in the Plan, whole “Years of Service” with which a Participant was credited for vesting purposes as of March 15, 1996 under the Kentucky Enterprise Plan, shall be credited to the Participant under this Plan. In addition, in determining whether the Participant is credited with a Vesting Year in 1996, he shall be credited with 190 Hours of Service for each whole month (and 45 Hours of Service of reach week in a partial month) for which the Employee would have been credited with one Hour of Service had Kentucky Enterprise Bancorp, Inc. and Kentucky Enterprise Bank, F.S.B. been Affiliates since January 1, 1996.

(b)         Vesting at age 55 .    Anything in Section 5.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable and who has three or more Vesting Years (determined as of 60 days after the later of the Merger Date or the date such Participant is notified of the Plan’s Early and Normal Retirement Ages and their effect on vesting) shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Accrued Benefit upon his attainment of age 55 if he is then in the service of an Employer or an Affiliate.

6.          Benefit Commencement Date .  Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable may elect to have a Benefit Commencement Date which is either the applicable Benefit Commencement Date provided under the terms of the Plan or the applicable date that similar benefits would have commenced under the Predecessor Plan.

7.          Alternative Forms of Benefit – Before August 1, 2015 .    Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable may elect to receive his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the following preserved payment options, but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015.

(a)    A Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date and before a total of 60 monthly payments have been made, then the monthly payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of such payments made to such Participant and such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 60 monthly payments. In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before the number of monthly payments specified by such Participant have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

 

AIX-2


(b)        a Participant shall be entitled to payments over a period certain in monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual installments. The period over which such payment is to be made shall not extend beyond the Participant’s life expectancy (or the life expectancy of the Participant and his Beneficiary); and

(c)        a Participant shall be entitled to annuity payments (payable by the Plan or through the purchase of an annuity contract) over a period not extending beyond either the life of the Participant (or the lives of the Participant and his designated Beneficiary) or the life expectancy of the Participant (or the life expectancy of the Participant and his designated Beneficiary).

8.          Alternative Forms of Benefit – After July 1, 2015 .   Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable may elect to receive his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the following preserved payment options, if the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date is August 1, 2015 or later:

(a)         Preserved Life-Five Year Certain Option for Participants Age 68 or Older .  A Participant who is age 68 or older as of his Benefit Commencement Date, shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date and before a total of 60 monthly payments have been made, then the monthly payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of such payments made to such Participant and such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 60 monthly payments. In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before 60 monthly payments have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

(b)         Preserved Installment Payments .   A Participant may elect to receive level annual installment payments over a period of either 10 years or 15 years. In the event of the Participant’s death before he has received all 10 or 15 annual payments (as the case may be), then such annual payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of annual payments made to such Participant and Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 10 or 15 annual payments (as the case may be). In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before 10 or 15 annual payments (as the case may be) have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

 

AIX-3


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX X

FIRST BANK & TRUST COMPANY

AMENDED RETIREMENT PLAN

1.          Predecessor Plan .  Effective January 1, 1988, First Bank & Trust Company of Batesville adopted the terms and provisions of the Plan as a complete restatement of the First Bank & Trust Company Amended Retirement Plan (the “First Bank & Trust Plan”). Effective December 31, 1987 (the “Merger Date”), the First Bank & Trust Plan was merged into the Plan. The First Bank & Trust Plan, as in effect prior to January 1, 1988, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Normal Retirement Age .  In the case of any Participant who was a participant in the First Bank & Trust Plan on December 31, 1987, Normal Retirement Age shall be age 65.

3.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in the First Bank & Trust Plan on December 31, 1987 and whose employment by First Bank & Trust Company of Batesville terminates on or after January 1, 1988.

(b)         Amount .  A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the First Bank & Trust Plan shall be equal to his accrued monthly benefit under that plan as of December 31, 1987.

4.          Actuarial Equivalent .     Anything in the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, if a Participant has a Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix, then his accrued monthly benefit under the First Bank & Trust Plan as of December 31, 1987 shall be converted to alternate forms of payment in accordance with the actuarial assumptions in effect as of December 31, 1987 in the First Bank & Trust Plan.

5.          Alternative Forms of Benefit – Before August 1, 2015 .    A Participant who was a participant in the First Bank & Trust Plan on December 31, 1987 may elect to receive his Predecessor Plan Benefit in the following form but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015.

Life-5 Year Certain Option .

Under the life-five year certain option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date and before he has received 60 monthly payments, then monthly payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of such payments made to such Participant and such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 60 monthly payments.

 

AX-1


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XI

NEW PALESTINE BANK EMPLOYEES’ PENSION PLAN

1.          Predecessor Plan .  Effective December 31, 1989 (the “Merger Date”), The Fifth Third Bank of Central Indiana Employees’ Pension Plan (formerly known as the New Palestine Bank Employees’ Pension Plan) was merged into the Plan. The Fifth Third Bank of Central Indiana Employees’ Pension Plan is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in The Fifth Third Bank of Central Indiana Employees’ Pension Plan on the Merger Date and whose employment by The Fifth Third Bank of Central Indiana terminates after the Merger Date.

(b)         Amount .   A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for The Fifth Third Bank of Central Indiana Employees’ Pension Plan shall be equal to the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity payable in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued monthly benefit (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 120 monthly payments guaranteed) under that plan as of the Merger Date.

3.          Actuarial Assumptions .   The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan for any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable (referred to in 2(a) above) shall be based on the greater of:

(a)        the Participant’s nonforfeitable Predecessor Plan Benefit and the actuarial assumptions specified in the Predecessor Plan effective as of the Merger Date; and

(b)        the Participant’s total nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit under the Plan as of the date the alternative form is being determined and the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2 of the Plan.

4.          Change in Plan Year .   For Participants with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable (referred to in 2(a) above), the Plan Year ending December 31, 1989 shall be treated as including the period through July 31, 1990 for purposes of determining Vesting Years under Section 2.39(a)(2) of the Plan and a Break in Service under Section 2.9 of the Plan.

5.          Vesting at Age 65 .  Anything in Section 5.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant who was a participant in the Predecessor Plan on the date of adoption of this Appendix and who has 3 or more Vesting Years (determined as of 60 days after the later of such adoption date or the date such Participant is notified of the Normal Retirement Age under the Plan and its effect on vesting) shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Accrued Benefit upon his attainment of age 65 if he is then in the service of an Employer or an Affiliate.

 

AXI-1


6.          Preserved Term Certain Options – Before August 1, 2015 .  Subject to an effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the Plan, a Participant who was a participant in the Predecessor Plan as of the Merger Date, may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed his Predecessor Plan Benefit under any of the preserved term certain options but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015.

Under these options, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date and before a total of 60 or 180 (as selected by the Participant) monthly payments have been made, then the monthly payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of such payments made to such Participant and such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals the number of monthly payments (60 or 180) selected by the Participant. In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before the number of monthly payments specified by such Participant have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

7.          Preserved Term Certain Options – After July 1, 2015 .   For a Benefit Commencement Date of August 1, 2015 or later, the life and term certain annuity with a guarantee of monthly payments for a 60-month period as described in 6 above, shall not be available. The 180-month term certain period shall be available in accordance with Section 7.3(c) of the Plan.

 

AXI-2


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XII

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS RETIREMENT FUND/CUMBERLAND

1.          Predecessor Plan .   Employees with accrued benefits under the Financial Institutions Retirement Fund with respect to the participation in said multiple-employer plan by The Cumberland Federal Bancorporation, Inc. or The Cumberland Federal Savings Bank (“The Cumberland Plan”), had the choice of electing to have their accrued benefits transferred to the Plan in accordance with the terms of The Cumberland Plan. Upon such transfer, the Plan assumed the accrued benefit under The Cumberland Plan attributable to Employees who elected a transfer and accepted the plan assets transferred from The Cumberland Plan. The Cumberland Plan, as in effect September 1, 1994, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who had their accrued benefit under The Cumberland Plan transferred to, and assumed by, this Plan.

(b)         Amount .   A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be equal to the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity payable in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued benefit (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 120 monthly payments guaranteed) as of September 1, 1994 transferred by The Cumberland Plan; provided that said transferred accrued benefit shall be enhanced by applying the benefit formula in effect under The Cumberland Plan as if it had been amended with respect to employees who remained in service on September 1, 1994, by increasing the 2% “annual accrual rate” to 2.35% (which “annual accrual rate” times “High-5 Salary”, times “years and months of Benefit Service” produced the annual normal retirement benefit under The Cumberland Plan).

3.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         General .   The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan for any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable (referred to in 2(a) above) (and the amount of any adjustment for benefit commencement after attainment of age 65) shall be based on the greater of:

(i)         the Participant’s nonforfeitable Predecessor Plan Benefit and the actuarial assumptions applicable for this purpose under The Cumberland Plan as of September 1, 1994; and

(ii)        the Participant’s total nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit under the Plan as of the date the alternative form is being determined and the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2 of the Plan.

 

AXII-1


(b)         Early Retirement Reduction Factors .    Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, if a Participant’s benefit commences prior to his attainment of age 65, in determining the Participant’s benefit, his Predecessor Plan Benefit under 2(b) above shall be reduced by 1/2 of 1% for each month of the first sixty (60) calendar months, plus 1/3 of 1% for each month of the next sixty (60) calendar months by which such Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date precedes his Normal Retirement Date.

4.          Vesting Service and Vesting at Age 65 .

(a)         Crediting of Service .  As provided in Section 2.39(a)(3) of the Plan, whole years of “Vesting Service” with which a Participant was credited as of September 1, 1994 under The Cumberland Plan (determined under the elapsed time method), shall be credited to the Participant under this Plan. In addition, in determining whether the Participant is credited with a Vesting Year under Section 2.39(a)(2)), he shall be credited with 190 Hours of Service for each month (from January 1994 through August 1994) for which the Employee would have been credited with one Hour of Service had The Cumberland Federal Bancorporation, Inc. and The Cumberland Federal Savings Bank been Affiliates since January 1, 1994.

(b)         Vesting at Age 65 .   Anything in Section 5.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable (referred to in 2(a) above) who has 3 or more Vesting Years (determined as of 60 days after the later of September 1, 1994 or the date such Participant is notified of the Plan’s Normal Retirement Age under the Plan and its effect on vesting) shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Accrued Benefit upon his attainment of age 65 if he is then in the service of an Employer or an Affiliate.

5.          Alternative Forms of Benefit .

A Participant to whom this Appendix applies (referred to in 2(a) above) may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the preserved joint life-ten year certain option. Under this option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date, then monthly payments shall be continued in an amount equal to 100% of the monthly benefit payable to the Participant under this option to his designated Beneficiary payable over such Beneficiary’s remaining lifetime; provided that if the Participant and such Beneficiary die before a total of 120 monthly payments have been made, then the present value of the unpaid installments, discounted at the rate of 7% per annum, shall be paid in a lump sum to a Beneficiary designated by the Participant, or, if none, to the estate of the survivor of the Participant and the joint annuitant (presuming the Participant to be the survivor if they die within 24 hours of each other).

 

AXII-2


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XIII

THE FIFTH THIRD BANK OF NORTHEASTERN OHIO

1.          Predecessor Plan . The Falls Savings Bank, FSB Defined Benefit Pension Plan (the “Falls Plan”) merged into the Plan as of March 8, 1996 (the “Merger Date”). The Falls Plan, as in effect on the Merger Date, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .    The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to those Participants who were participants in the Falls Plan on the Merger Date and whose employment with The Fifth Third Savings Bank of Northern Ohio, F.S.B. or The Fifth Third Bank of Northeastern Ohio terminates after the Merger Date.

(b)         Amount .    A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be equal to his accrued monthly benefit under the Falls Plan as of the Merger Date.

3.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         General .   The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan for any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable (and the amount of any adjustment for benefit commencement after attainment of age 65) shall be determined based on the sum of:

(i)         the Participant’s nonforfeitable Predecessor Plan Benefit and the actuarial assumptions applicable for this purpose under the Falls Plan as of the Merger Date, and

(ii)        the Participant’s Retirement Plan Benefit under the Plan as of the date the alternative form is being determined and the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2 of the Plan.

(b)         Early Retirement Reduction Factors .   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, if the benefit of any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable commences prior to his Normal Retirement Date, in determining the Participant’s benefit, his Predecessor Plan Benefit under 2(b) above shall be the greater of (1) his Predecessor Plan Benefit reduced by 1/15 for each of the first five (5) years and 1/30 for each of the next five (5) years and reduced actuarially for each additional year thereafter that the first day of the month on which his Predecessor Plan Benefit commences precedes his Normal Retirement Date, or (2) the Actuarial Equivalent of his Predecessor Plan Benefit if such benefit is distributed in a form other than a nondecreasing life annuity payable for a period not less than the life of such Participant.

 

AXIII-1


4.          Vesting .

(a)         Crediting of Service .   As provided in the Plan, whole “Years of Service” with which a Participant was credited for vesting purposes as of December 31, 1994 under the Falls Plan, shall be credited to the Participant under this Plan. In addition, in determining whether the Participant is credited with a Vesting Year in 1995, he shall be credited with Hours of Service for which the Employee would have been credited had The Fifth Third Savings Bank of Northern Ohio, F.S.B. and The Fifth Third Bank of Northeastern Ohio been Affiliates since January 1, 1995.

(b)         Vesting in Predecessor Plan Benefit .   Anything in Section 5.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable shall have a nonforfeitable right in his Predecessor Plan Benefit.

(c)         Vesting in Retirement Plan Benefit .   Anything in Section 5.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable and who has been credited with at least 3 “Years of Service” under the Predecessor Plan shall have a nonforfeitable right in his Retirement Plan Benefit.

5.          Alternative Forms of Benefit – Before August 1, 2015 .    Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable may elect to receive his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the preserved installment payment option described in this Section but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015. Under this option, a Participant shall be entitled to payments over a period certain in monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual installments. The period over which such payment is to be made shall not extend beyond the Participant’s life expectancy (or the life expectancy of the Participant and his Beneficiary).

6.          Alternative Forms of Benefit – After July 1, 2015 .  Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, a Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable may elect to receive his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the following preserved installment payment option described in this Section if the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date is August 1, 2015 or later.

Under this option, a Participant may elect to receive level annual installment payments over a period of either 10 years or 15 years. In the event of the Participant’s death before he has received all 10 or 15 annual payments (as the case may be), then such annual payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of annual payments made to such Participant and Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 10 or 15 annual payments (as the case may be). In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before 10 or 15 annual payments (as the case may be) have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

 

AXIII-2


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XIV

THE OHIO COMPANY PENSION PLAN

1.          Adoption of Plan and Plan Merger .  The Ohio Company Pension Plan merged into the Plan as of July 31, 1999 (the “Merger Date”). The Ohio Company Pension Plan, as in effect on the Merger Date, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Ohio Company Employees .    For purposes of this Appendix, “Ohio Company Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the effective time of the merger of The Ohio Company and Fifth Third Securities, Inc., was employed by The Ohio Company or any of its subsidiaries and who became an Employee as of the effective time of such merger. “Ohio Company Employee” also means an individual who would have met the foregoing criteria except for the fact that he became an Employee prior to June 12, 1998 but in connection with the merger of The Ohio Company and Fifth Third Securities, Inc.

3.          Vesting .    Effective as of June 12, 1998, an Ohio Company Employee shall be credited with Vesting Years under Section 2.39(a)(3) of this Plan for the “Years of Service” with which an Ohio Company Employee was credited for purposes of determining vesting under The Ohio Company Pension Plan as of December 31, 1997. In addition, for purposes of determining whether a Participant is credited with a Vesting Year under Section 2.39(a)(2), he shall be credited with Hours of Service for the “Hours of Service” with which he was credited under The Ohio Company Pension Plan from January 1, 1998 through the effective time of the merger of The Ohio Company and Fifth Third Securities, Inc.

The service so credited shall be taken into account for vesting purposes and for purposes of determining whether a Participant is a Grandfathered Employee under Section 3.3.

4.          Investment Executives’ Commissions as Eligible Earnings .   Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, an Ohio Company Employee who, immediately prior to the effective time of the merger of The Ohio Company and Fifth Third Securities, Inc., was employed by The Ohio Company or any of its subsidiaries as an “Investment Executive” (as determined by the Administrator in its sole and absolute discretion) and who became an Employee as of the effective time of such merger, shall have his commissions paid by an Employer after the Adoption Date counted as Earnings under the Plan (subject to the Earnings Limit).

5.          Prior-July 1, 1998 Earnings .     Any provision of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, any amounts paid to an Ohio Company Employee prior to July 1, 1998 shall not be considered Earnings under the Plan.

6.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply to all individuals who were “Participants” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) with a vested accrued benefit as of the Merger Date under the Predecessor Plan. Any such “Participant” shall

 

AXIV-1


become a Participant in this Plan on the Merger Date if not already a Participant. The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein also shall apply to the determination of any Preretirement Survivor Annuity available under Article 8 of the Plan with respect to the benefit of any such Participant and with respect to any “Spouse” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) entitled to a “Surviving Spouse Pension” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) on account of the death of a “Participant” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) prior to the Merger Date.

(b)         Amount .   A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the Ohio Company Pension Plan shall be equal to the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity payable in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued monthly benefit (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 120 monthly payments guaranteed) under that plan as of the Merger Date.

(c)         Vesting .   Notwithstanding Section 5.2 of the Plan, a Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein.

(d)         Benefits in Pay Status .   The amount and form of any distribution being paid under the Predecessor Plan by reason of the occurrence of any event prior to the Merger Date shall continue to be subject to the provisions of the Predecessor Plan immediately prior to the Merger Date.

7.          Early Payment Reduction Factors .

(a)         Reduction .    Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, if a Participant’s benefit commences prior to his Normal Retirement Date in a life annuity form, in determining the Participant’s benefit, his Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be reduced as follows:

(i)         If the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date is on or after his “Ohio Company Early Retirement Date,” as defined below, his Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be reduced by 5/9ths of 1% for each month of the first sixty (60) calendar months, plus 5/18ths of 1% for each month of the next sixty (60) calendar months by which such Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date precedes his Normal Retirement Date.

(ii)        If the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date is before his “Ohio Company Early Retirement Date,” as defined below, his Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be reduced in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2 of the Plan for each month by which his Benefit Commencement Date precedes his Normal Retirement Date.

If a Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit is payable in a single sum distribution prior to Normal Retirement Date, his Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be reduced in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in paragraph 8(a) below.

(b)         Ohio Company Early Retirement Date .   For purposes of this Appendix, “Ohio Company Early Retirement Date” means the first day of the month coinciding with or next following a Participant’s attainment of age 55 and completion of 10 Vesting Years.

 

AXIV-2


8.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         Lump Sum .   Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, for Benefit Commencement Dates (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid) of January 1, 2008 or later, the lump sum actuarial equivalent Predecessor Plan Benefit with respect to any Participant (or other payee) to whom this Appendix is applicable, shall be determined using the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2(b)(2) of the Plan.

(b)         Other Alternative Forms .   The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan other than a lump sum distribution for any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable shall be based on the greater of:

(i)         the Participant’s nonforfeitable Predecessor Plan Benefit and the actuarial assumptions applicable for this purpose under the Predecessor Plan as of the Merger Date; and

(ii)        the Participant’s total nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit under the Plan as of the date the alternative form is being determined and the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2 of the Plan.

9.          Alternative Forms of Benefit .

(a)         Immediate Commencement of Benefits .    The Benefit Commencement Dates otherwise available under the Plan shall also be available with respect to the Predecessor Plan Benefit. A Participant who terminated service prior to the Merger Date and who, under the terms of the Predecessor Plan, was not yet eligible to commence benefit payments, may elect to commence the payment of his Predecessor Plan Benefit as of a Benefit Commencement Date under Section 6.4(b) of the Plan falling after the Merger Date. This shall include the right to take a lump sum distribution as provided in (b) below, subject to the effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the Plan, determined using the actuarial assumptions specified in paragraph 8(a) above. Similarly, the Preretirement Survivor Annuity commencement dates available under Section 8.1(d) of the Plan (falling after the Merger Date) shall be available to a “Spouse” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) entitled to the Preretirement Survivor Annuity on account of the death of a “Participant” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) prior to the Merger Date. This shall include the right to take a lump sum distribution as provided in (b) below, subject to the effective waiver of the Preretirement Survivor Annuity in accordance with the Plan, determined using the actuarial assumptions specified in paragraph 8(a) above.

(b)         Lump Sum .    Subject to an effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the Plan, a Participant may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed his Predecessor Plan Benefit as a single sum distribution determined using the actuarial assumptions specified in paragraph 8(a) above. In the event a Participant has a benefit under the Plan consisting in part of a Predecessor Plan Benefit and in part of a Retirement Plan Benefit under Section 4.2(b) of the Plan, and the Participant elects the lump sum payment option, his lump sum benefit shall consist of:

(i)         his Predecessor Plan Benefit converted to a lump sum using the actuarial assumptions specified in paragraph 8(a) above, plus

(ii)        his Retirement Plan Benefit under Section 4.2(b) of the Plan converted to a lump sum using the actuarial assumptions otherwise specified in the Plan for this purpose.

 

AXIV-3


Similarly, subject to the effective waiver of the Preretirement Survivor Annuity in accordance with the Plan, a Surviving Spouse may elect to receive so much of the Preretirement Survivor Annuity as is attributable to the Predecessor Plan Benefit as a lump sum distribution determined using the actuarial assumptions specified in paragraph 8(a) above and any remaining part of the Preretirement Survivor Annuity shall be converted to a lump sum using the actuarial assumptions otherwise specified in the Plan for this purpose.

(c)         Preserved Fifteen Year Certain Option .

(i)    Subject to the effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the terms of the Plan, a Participant may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the preserved fifteen year certain option. Under this option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies after his Benefit Commencement Date but before he receives 180 monthly payments, then monthly payments shall be continued in an amount equal to 100% of the monthly benefit payable to the Participant under this option to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of such payments made to such Participant and such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 180.

(ii)    In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before 180 monthly payments have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

 

AXIV-4


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XV

THE AMENDED AND RESTATED EMPLOYEES’ PENSION PLAN OF

CITIZENS FEDERAL BANK, F.S.B. AND RELATED COMPANIES

1.          Adoption of Plan .   Effective as of June 26, 1998 (the. “CitFed Closing Date”), Citizens Federal Bank, F.S.B., CitFed Mortgage Corporation of America and CF Property Management, Inc. became Employers under the Plan.

2.          Plan Merger .   The Amended and Restated Employees’ Pension Plan of Citizens Federal Bank, F.S.B. and Related Companies (the “CitFed Pension Plan”) merged into the Plan as of July 31, 2001 (the “Plan Merger Date”). The CitFed Pension Plan, as in effect on the Plan Merger Date, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

3.          CitFed Employees .  For purposes hereof, “CitFed Employee” means an individual who, immediately prior to the CitFed Closing Date, was employed by CitFed Bancorp, Inc. or any of its subsidiaries and who became an Employee as of the CitFed Closing Date. “CitFed Employee” also means an individual who would have met the foregoing criteria except for the fact that he became an Employee prior to the CitFed Closing Date but in connection with the acquisition of CitFed Bancorp, Inc. and its subsidiaries by Fifth Third Bancorp.

4.          Vesting .   Effective as of the CitFed Closing Date, a CitFed Employee shall be credited with Vesting Years under Section 2.39(a)(3) of this Plan for the “Years of Service” with which a CitFed Employee was credited for purposes of determining vesting under the CitFed Pension Plan as of August 31, 1997. In addition, for purposes of determining whether a Participant is credited with one or two Vesting Years under Section 2.39(a)(2), he shall be credited with Hours of Service for the “Hours of Service” with which he was credited under the CitFed Pension Plan from September 1, 1997 through the CitFed Closing Date. To appropriately reflect that the CitFed Pension Plan credited a “Year of Service” for vesting purposes generally where a participant was credited with at least 1,000 “Hours of Service” in a September 1 through August 31 plan year and that this Plan uses a calendar Plan Year, a CitFed Employee who has credit for at least 1,000 Hours of Service in both the period September 1, 1997 through August 31, 1998 and the period January 1, 1998 through December 31, 1998, shall be credited with two Vesting Years.

The service so credited shall be taken into account for vesting purposes and for purposes of determining whether a Participant is a Grandfathered Employee under Section 3.3.

5.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply to all individuals who were “Participants” or “Former Participants” (as such terms are defined in the Predecessor Plan) with a vested accrued benefit as of the Plan Merger Date under the Predecessor Plan. Because such individuals will have a Predecessor Plan Benefit upon the plan merger, any such individual shall be considered a Participant in this Plan on the Plan Merger

 

AXV-1


Date if not already a Participant. The designation of any such individual as a Participant shall not result in such individual being entitled to ongoing accruals under this Plan. The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein also shall apply to the determination of any Preretirement Survivor Annuity available under Article 8 of the Plan with respect to the benefit of any such Participant and with respect to any spouse entitled to a “Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) on account of the death of a “Participant” or “Former Participant” (as such terms are defined in the Predecessor Plan) prior to the Plan Merger Date.

(b)         Amount .   A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit for the CitFed Pension Plan shall be equal to the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity payable in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his Regular CitFed Accrued Benefit (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime) under that plan as of the Plan Merger Date.

(c)         Vesting .   Notwithstanding Section 5.2 of the Plan, a Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Predecessor Plan Benefit and CitFed Cash Balance Account provided herein.

(d)         Definitions .     As used in this Appendix, the following terms, when capitalized, shall have the following meaning:

(i)       “Regular CitFed Accrued Benefit” means a Participant’s accrued monthly benefit under the CitFed Pension Plan as of the Plan Merger Date, but excluding in all events that part of such benefit attributable to the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account;

(ii)       “CitFed Cash Balance Account” means the Participant’s “Cash Balance Account” under the CitFed Pension Plan as of the Plan Merger Date as further defined and adjusted under paragraph 8 below.

6.          Early Payment Reduction Factors .

(a)         Reduction for Life Annuity Forms .     Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, if a Participant’s benefit commences prior to his Normal Retirement Date in a life annuity form, in determining the Participant’s benefit, his Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be reduced by the early payment reduction factors applicable for this purpose under the Predecessor Plan as of the Plan Merger Date.

(b)         Reduction for Lump Sum Form .    If the Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit is payable in a single sum distribution prior to his Normal Retirement Date, such Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be reduced in accordance with the actuarial assumptions set forth in paragraph 7(a) below.

7.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         Lump Sum .   Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Plan, for Benefit Commencement Dates (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid) of January 1, 2008 or later, the lump sum actuarial equivalent of the Predecessor Plan Benefit with respect to any Participant (or other payee) to whom this Appendix is applicable, shall be determined using the following actuarial assumptions:

(i)        Mortality .    The applicable mortality table described in Section 2.2(b)(2)(A) of the Plan.

 

AXV-2


(ii)        Interest .    The “Applicable Interest Rate” (as defined in Section 2.2(b)(2)(B) of the Plan) determined as of the second calendar month preceding the Plan Year which contains the Benefit Commencement Date (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to commence).

(b)         Other Alternative Forms .  The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan (excluding amounts attributable to a CitFed Cash Balance Account) other than a lump sum distribution for any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable shall be based on the greater of:

(i)        the Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit and the actuarial assumptions applicable for this purpose under the Predecessor Plan as of the Plan Merger Date; and

(ii)       the Participant’s total nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit (excluding amounts attributable to a CitFed Cash Balance Account) under the Plan as of the date the alternative form is being determined and the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2 of the Plan.

8.          CitFed Cash Balance Account .

(a)         Applicability .   The CitFed Cash Balance Account provided herein shall apply to all individuals who were “Cash Balance Participants” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) with a “Cash Balance Account” under the CitFed Pension Plan as of the Plan Merger Date under the Predecessor Plan. Because such individuals will have a CitFed Cash Balance Account upon the plan merger, any such Cash Balance Participant shall be considered a Participant in this Plan on the Plan Merger Date if not already a Participant. The designation of any such individual as a Participant shall not result in such individual being entitled to ongoing accruals under this Plan. The benefits provided by the CitFed Cash Balance Account are in addition to the benefits otherwise determined under the Plan (including this Appendix) and will be paid in addition to the benefits otherwise available under the Plan (including this Appendix).

(b)         Assumption of Cash Balance Account .   A CitFed Cash Balance Account shall be maintained for each Participant to whom this paragraph applies. The CitFed Cash Balance Account is a hypothetical account used to determine the amount of retirement benefits payable under this paragraph. The Participant shall have no actual individual account, and shall have no claim to any particular assets of the Plan. The balance of a Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account (if any) on the Plan Merger Date shall be equal to his Cash Balance Account under the CitFed Pension Plan as of such date.

 

AXV-3


(c)         Interest Credits .

(i)        For the period beginning August 1, 2001 and ending August 31, 2001, interest shall be credited to a Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of August 31, 2001. The interest credit shall be equal to 0.48% (Applicable Interest Rate (as defined in paragraph 7(a)(ii) of Appendix XIX of the Old Plan) for November, 2000 multiplied by 1/12) of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of August 1, 2001.

(ii)       For the period beginning September 1, 2001 and ending December 31, 2001, interest shall be credited to a Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of December 31, 2001. The interest credit shall be equal to 4/12ths of the Applicable Interest Rate (as defined in paragraph 7(a)(ii) of Appendix XIX of the Old Plan) for either July, 2001 or November, 2000 (whichever rate is lower) as a percentage of the balance of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of September 1, 2001.

(iii)       For the period beginning January 1, 2002 and ending July 31, 2002, interest shall be credited to a Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of July 31, 2002. The interest credit shall be equal to 7/12ths of the Applicable Interest Rate (as defined in paragraph 7(a)(ii) of Appendix XIX of the Old Plan) for either July, 2001 or November, 2001 (whichever rate is lower) as a percentage of the balance of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of January 1, 2002.

(iv)       For the period beginning August 1, 2002 and ending December 31, 2002, interest shall be credited to a Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of December 31, 2002. The interest credit shall be equal to 5/12ths of the Applicable Interest Rate (as defined in paragraph 7(a)(ii) of Appendix XIX of the Old Plan) for November, 2001 as a percentage of the balance of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of August 1, 2002.

(v)        For Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 2003, interest shall be credited to a Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of the end of each Plan Year. The interest credit shall equal the Applicable Interest Rate (as defined in paragraph 7(a)(ii) of Appendix XIX of the Old Plan) determined as of the second calendar month preceding the Plan Year for which the interest is being credited, as a percentage of the balance of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of the beginning of the Plan Year.

(vi)       Interest shall be credited until the Participant’s (or Surviving Spouse’s) commencement of benefits attributable to his CitFed Cash Balance Account. For the Plan Year (or other period described above) in which the Participant (or Surviving Spouse) commences such distribution of benefits, interest credits shall be allocated to his CitFed Cash Balance Account on a pro rata basis.

(d)         Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent .  “Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent” is an alternative benefit or payment which has a one-sum value equivalent to the one-sum value of the benefit or payment which it replaces, computed on the basis of the actuarial assumptions set forth in paragraph 7 above.

 

AXV-4


(e)         Accrued Benefit .    Subject to the limits of section 415 of the Code, a Participant’s accrued benefit with respect to his CitFed Cash Balance Account, at any particular time, shall be a monthly benefit, commencing at Normal Retirement Date and payable as a single life annuity, which is the actuarial equivalent of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account projected to his Normal Retirement Date using the Applicable Interest Rate and mortality table specified in paragraph 7(a) of Appendix XIX of the Old Plan.

(f)         Retirement Benefits .

(i)         Normal Retirement Benefit .   A Participant who retires on or after his Normal Retirement Date shall be entitled to his accrued benefit attributable to his CitFed Cash Balance Account, as defined in (e) above commencing as of the first day of the month following the month in which the Participant retires. The benefit shall be an amount, payable monthly for the life of the Participant that is equal to the Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent of the balance of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of the end of the month before the annuity payments begin.

(ii)        Termination of Employment .        If a Participant terminates employment before he has attained his Normal Retirement Age, he may elect to commence his retirement benefit as of the first day of any month after the month in which the Participant terminates employment, but in no event later than the date provided in Section 7.4(c) of the Plan. The amount of the retirement benefit shall be an amount, payable monthly for the life of the Participant, that is equal to the Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s accrued benefit attributable to his CitFed Cash Balance Account as defined in (e) above at that time. In no event will the retirement benefit be less than the Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of the end of the month before the annuity payments begin.

(g)         Form of Benefits .

(i)        Benefits attributable to the CitFed Cash Balance Account shall be paid in the form as provided in Sections 7.2 and 7.3 of the Plan and paragraph 9 of this Appendix. The form of benefit shall be the Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent of the accrued benefit attributable to his CitFed Cash Balance Account as defined in (e) above.

(ii)       If a Participant elects to receive his benefit in the form of one lump sum payment in cash in lieu of an annuity pursuant to Section 7.3(d) of the Plan, subject to the spousal consent requirements of Section 7.2(b) of the Plan, the amount of the lump sum benefit shall be determined by converting the Participant’s accrued benefit attributable to his CitFed Cash Balance Account as defined in (e) above to a Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent single sum. In no event shall the lump sum payment be less than the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account as of the last day of the month preceding the payment. In no event, however, shall the lump sum benefit exceed the present value of the maximum benefit that is payable under section 415 of the Code, where the present value is calculated using the Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent.

 

AXV-5


(h)         Cash Balance Death Benefit .

(i)         General .   If a Participant dies at any age before commencement of a distribution of the Participant’s benefit attributable to his CitFed Cash Balance Account, then the lump sum benefit that would have been payable under (g) above to the Participant had the Participant separated from service on the date of his death shall be paid to the Participant’s designated Beneficiary as soon as is practicable. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity is otherwise applicable (under (ii) below), the Participant’s benefit attributable to his CitFed Cash Balance Account shall be payable to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse in such form unless such form is waived pursuant to (vi) below.

(ii)        Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity .   If a Participant dies before the commencement of benefit payments attributable to his CitFed Cash Balance Account, if he has a Surviving Spouse, and if he has not waived the Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity under (vi) below, then his Surviving Spouse shall be entitled to the Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity, provided that the Participant and such Surviving Spouse were married throughout the 1-year period ending on the date of the Participant’s death or, if such Surviving Spouse is a former spouse treated as a Surviving Spouse pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order as described in section 414(p) of the Code, that the Participant and such Surviving Spouse were married for at least 1 year.

(iii)        Definition of Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity .   The Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity is a survivor annuity for the life of a Participant’s Surviving Spouse which is equal to the Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s CitFed Cash Balance Account, determined as of the date such annuity commences.

(iv)        Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity Commencement Date . The Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity shall commence as of the later of - -

(a)        the first day of the month coinciding with or next following the Participant’s date of death;

(b)        the first day of any month (not later than the December 31st of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70-1/2) elected by such Surviving Spouse.

(v)         Cash-Out Distributions .   Any other provisions of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, the lump sum Cash Balance Actuarial Equivalent of the Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity shall be distributed to the Surviving Spouse, provided that the Surviving Spouse elects in writing to receive the lump sum distribution, such election acknowledges its effect, and the election is witnessed by a Plan representative or a notary public.

(vi)        Waiver of Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity .

(a)         General .    A Participant may waive coverage of the Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity at any time during his election period under (c) below. Such a waiver must be in writing and must specify the specific Beneficiary or Beneficiaries, if any, to whom any death benefits under the Plan will be available.

 

AXV-6


(b)         Revocation .   Any waiver under (a) above may be revoked at any time during the Participant’s election period under (c) below. There shall be no limitation on the number of such waivers and revocations permitted during such election period.

(c)         Election Period .    For purposes of (a) and (b) above, the election period shall be the period

(A)        beginning on the earlier of

  (i)        the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 35, or

  (ii)        the date of the Participant’s separation from service; provided, however, if the Participant returns to service, then any election made prior to the first day of the Plan Year in which he attains age 35 shall be voided; and

(B)        ending on the Participant’s date of death.

(d)         Written Explanation .

(A)        The Administrator shall provide to each Participant, within the Applicable Period (defined below) and consistent with such regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe, a written explanation of:

  (i)        the terms and conditions of the Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity;

  (ii)        the Participant’s right to make, and the effect of, an election under (a) above to waive the coverage of the Cash Balance Preretirement Survivor Annuity;

  (iii)        the rights of the Participant’s spouse under (e) below;

  (iv)        the right to make, and the effect of, a revocation of a waiver under (b) above; and

  (v)        the eligibility conditions, material features and relative values of any optional forms of benefit under the Plan.

(B)        “Applicable Period” means, with respect to a Participant, whichever of the following periods ends last:

  (i)        the period beginning with the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 32 and ending with the close of the Plan Year preceding the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 35; or

  (ii)        the period beginning one year prior to, and ending one year after, the date the individual becomes a Participant.

 

AXV-7


In the case of a Participant who separates from service before attaining age 35, the “Applicable Period” means in all events the period beginning one year before the separation from service and ending one year after such separation; provided that if such a Participant returns to service, the provisions of (i) and (ii) above shall again apply.

(e)         Spousal Consent .        A waiver under (a) above shall not be effective with respect to a spouse of a Participant unless:

(A)        such spouse consents in writing to such election, and such spouse’s consent:

  (i)        acknowledges the effect of such election,

  (ii)        acknowledges the specific Beneficiary or Beneficiaries, if any, to whom any death benefits under the Plan will be payable which may not be changed without spousal consent (or the consent of the spouse expressly permits designations by the Participant without any requirement of further consent by the spouse), and

  (iii)        is witnessed by a Plan representative or a notary public; or

(B)        it is established to the satisfaction of a Plan representative that the consent required under (A) above may not be obtained because there is no spouse, because the spouse cannot be located, or because of such other circumstances as may be provided in regulations of the Internal Revenue Service.

General consents referred to in the parenthetical of (A)(ii) above must acknowledge that the spouse has the right to limit consent to a specific Beneficiary or Beneficiaries and that the spouse voluntarily elects to relinquish such right.

9.         Preserved Term Certain Options – Before August 1, 2015 .    Subject to the effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the terms of the Plan, a Participant may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed his Predecessor Plan Benefit under any of the preserved term certain options but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015. Under these options, a Participant shall be entitled to a life and term certain annuity with a guarantee of monthly payments for a 60, 120, 180 or 240 month period, as the Participant may elect. The term certain period over which such payment is to be made shall not extend beyond the Participant’s life expectancy (or the life expectancy of the Participant and his Beneficiary).

10.       Preserved Term Certain Options – After July 1, 2015 .      For Benefit Commencement Dates of August 1, 2015 and later, the life and term certain annuity with a guarantee of monthly payments for a 60 or 240 month period, as described in 9 above, shall not be available. The other term certain periods shall be available in accordance with Section 7.3(b) and (c) of the Plan.

 

AXV-8


11.       Benefits in Pay Status .  The amount and form of any distribution being paid under the Predecessor Plan by reason of the occurrence of any event prior to the Plan Merger Date shall continue to be subject to the provisions of the Predecessor Plan immediately prior to the Plan Merger Date.

 

AXV-9


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XVI

CNB BANCSHARES, INC. EMPLOYEES’ PENSION PLAN

1.          Plan Merger/Predecessor Plan .   The CNB Bancshares, Inc. Employees’ Pension Plan (the “CNB Pension Plan”) merged into the Plan as of December 31, 2001 (the “Plan Merger Date”). The provisions below are effective from and after the Plan Merger Date. The CNB Pension Plan, as in effect on the Plan Merger Date, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply to all individuals who had a vested accrued benefit under the Predecessor Plan as of the Plan Merger Date. Because such individuals will have a Predecessor Plan Benefit upon the plan merger, any such individual shall be considered a Participant in this Plan on the Plan Merger Date notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan. The designation of any such individual as a Participant shall not result in such individual being entitled to ongoing accruals under this Plan. The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein also shall apply to the determination of any Preretirement Survivor Annuity available under Article 8 of the Plan with respect to the benefit of any such Participant and with respect to any spouse entitled to a pre-retirement survivor annuity (as determined under Section 7.2 of the Predecessor Plan) on account of the death of a “participant,” “inactive participant” or “severed participant” (as defined in the Predecessor Plan) prior to the Plan Merger Date.

(b)         Amount .   A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be an equal monthly amount payable under a single life annuity over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date and which is equal to the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued benefit under the Predecessor Plan, expressed as an annual amount (commencing at the Participant’s Normal Retirement Date) payable in monthly installments under a straight life annuity for an unmarried Participant, or under a joint and one-half survivor annuity for a married Participant but actuarially adjusted (using the actuarial assumptions in Paragraph 5(a)(i) below) to reflect the number of full or partial years by which the difference in the ages of the Participant and his Surviving Spouse exceeds five. For purposes of this paragraph, the determination of whether a Participant has a Surviving Spouse is made as of his Benefit Commencement Date.

(c)         Vesting .  Notwithstanding Section 5.2 of the Plan, a Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Predecessor Plan Benefit.

3.          Normal Retirement Age .   Notwithstanding Section 2.23 of the Plan, “Normal Retirement Age” shall be age 65 for Participants who became participants in the Predecessor Plan before the first day of the Predecessor Plan’s plan year beginning after December 31, 1987. For all other Participants with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable, it shall be the later of age 65 or the first day of the Plan Year which includes the fifth anniversary of the date the Participant commenced participation in the Predecessor Plan.

 

AXVI-1


4.          Benefits at Termination of Employment .     Under the Predecessor Plan, a participant (other than a severed participant) who terminated service prior to Early Retirement Age was not entitled to commence his distribution until attaining his Early Retirement Age. Upon the plan merger, a Participant with a Predecessor Plan Benefit may elect to commence his benefit prior to attainment of Early Retirement Age under Section 6.4; provided, however, in no event may such a Participant have a Benefit Commencement Date under Section 6.4(b) of the Plan before July 1, 2002.

5.          Payment Reduction Factors .  Notwithstanding Sections 6.2 or 6.4 of the Plan, if a Participant’s benefit attributable to a Predecessor Plan Benefit commences prior to his Normal Retirement Date, his benefit (determined as of his termination from employment) shall be reduced in accordance with (a) through (c) below.

(a)         Reduction for Life Annuity Forms .    If a benefit commences in a life annuity form under Article 7 of the Plan, the benefit shall be reduced for early commencement as follows.

(i)        If the Participant has not reached his Early Retirement Age, his benefit shall be reduced by using:

(A)        the UP Mortality Table projected to 1984, adjusted for 50% female content; and

(B)        a 6% annual effective interest rate.

(ii)       If the Participant has reached his Early Retirement Age, his benefit shall be reduced by 5/12% for each month by which the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date precedes his Normal Retirement Date.

(b)         Reduction for Lump Sum Form .   If a Participant’s benefit is payable in a lump sum under Section 7.3(d) of the Plan, his benefit shall be reduced in accordance with the actuarial assumptions in Paragraph 6(a) below.

(c)         Reduction for Sharedata Benefits .   In addition to any reduction under (a) and (b) above, a Participant’s benefit shall be reduced by the accrued benefit (expressed as a monthly annuity payable for life commencing the first day of the month following the Participant’s Normal Retirement Date) to which a Participant is entitled under The Pension Plan for Employees of National Sharedata Corporation as of December 1, 1982.

6.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         Lump Sum .   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, for Benefit Commencement Dates (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid) of January 1, 2008 or later, the lump sum actuarial equivalent of the Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be determined using the following actuarial assumptions:

(i)         Mortality .    The applicable mortality table described in Section 2.2(b)(2)(A) of the Plan.

 

AXVI-2


(ii)         Interest .    The “Applicable Interest Rate” (as defined in Section 2.2(b)(2)(B) of the Plan) determined as of the second calendar month preceding the Plan Year which contains the Benefit Commencement Date (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to commence).

(b)         Other Alternative Forms .   The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan (other than a lump sum distribution), including a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, for any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable shall be based on Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit and the actuarial assumptions in Paragraph 5(a)(i) above.

(c)         Postponed Retirement .   For purposes of applying Section 6.3(a) of the Plan to the Predecessor Plan Benefit, the actuarial assumptions in Paragraph 5(a)(i) above shall be used.

7.          Benefits in Pay Status .  The amount and form of any distribution being paid under the Predecessor Plan by reason of the occurrence of any event prior to the Plan Merger Date shall continue to be subject to the provisions of the Predecessor Plan immediately prior to the Plan Merger Date.

 

AXVI-3


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XVII

ENTERPRISE FEDERAL SAVINGS BANK/

FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS RETIREMENT FUND

1.          Predecessor Plan .      On May 14, 1999, Enterprise Federal Savings Bank (“Enterprise”) merged into Fifth Third Bank. Employees (formerly employed by Enterprise) with accrued benefits under the Financial Institutions Retirement Fund with respect to the participation in said multiple-employer plan by Enterprise (the “Enterprise Plan”), had the choice of electing to have their accrued benefits transferred to the Plan in accordance with the terms of the Enterprise Plan. Upon such a transfer, the Plan assumed the accrued benefit under the Enterprise Plan attributable to Employees who elected a transfer and accepted the plan assets transferred from the Enterprise Plan. The Enterprise Plan, as in effect July 1, 2000, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Enterprise Federal Participants .     For purposes of this Appendix, “Enterprise Federal Participant” means an Employee who:

(a)        immediately prior to the merger of Enterprise into Fifth Third Bank was employed by Enterprise Federal Savings Bank or Enterprise Federal Bancorp, Inc.; and

(b)        had his accrued benefit under the Enterprise Plan transferred to, and assumed by, this Plan.

3.          Eligibility, Service and Vesting .

(a)         Eligibility .    Effective as of the date an Enterprise Federal Participant’s accrued benefit is transferred to, and assumed by, this Plan, such Enterprise Federal Participant shall become a Participant in this Plan notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary. Upon becoming a Participant, such Enterprise Federal Participant shall be considered a Grandfathered Employee (as otherwise defined in Section 3.3 of the Plan) retroactive to July 1, 2000 such that benefits may accrue under this Plan for such Enterprise Federal Participant from and after July 1, 2000.

Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, effective December 31, 2003, no further benefits shall accrue for any Enterprise Federal Participant, and the Enterprise Federal Participants shall no longer be considered Grandfathered Employees. The Accrued Benefit, Normal Retirement Benefit or Postponed Retirement Benefit, as the case may be, for an Enterprise Federal Participant, shall be determined as of December 31, 2003 as if the Participant terminated employment on December 31, 2003, and such benefit shall not increase after December 31, 2003.

(b)         Service for Retirement Plan Benefit Purposes .      For purposes of determining an Enterprise Federal Participant’s Retirement Plan Benefit under Section 4.2(b) of the Plan, Hours of Service prior to July 1, 2000 shall not be taken into account in determining such Participant’s Years of Credited Service and Years of Fifth Third Service.

 

AXVII-1


(c)         Vesting Service .   As provided in Section 2.39(a)(3) of the Plan, whole years of “Vesting Service” with which a Participant was credited as of July 1, 2000 under the Enterprise Plan (determined under the elapsed time method), shall be credited to the Participant under this Plan. For purposes of determining Vesting Years under Section 2.39(a)(1), no Vesting Years for periods prior to January 1, 2000 shall be credited. In determining whether an Enterprise Federal Participant is credited with a Vesting Year for the 2000 Plan Year, he shall be credited with 190 Hours of Service for each month (from January, 2000 through June, 2000) for which the Employee is credited with one Hour of Service and with his actual Hours of Service for the remainder of the Plan Year.

(d)         Vesting at Age 65 .   Anything in Section 5.2 of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, an Enterprise Federal Participant who has 3 or more Vesting Years (determined as of 60 days after the later of July 1, 2000 or the date such Participant is notified of the Plan’s Normal Retirement Age under the Plan and its effect on vesting) shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Accrued Benefit upon his attainment of age 65 if he is then in the service of an Employer or an Affiliate.

4.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply only to Enterprise Federal Participants (i.e., those who had their accrued benefit under the Enterprise Plan transferred to, and assumed by, this Plan).

(b)         Amount .   A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be equal to the monthly amount payable under a single life annuity payable in equal monthly installments over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued benefit transferred by the Enterprise Plan.

5.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         General .   The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan for any Enterprise Federal Participant (and the amount of any adjustment for benefit commencement after attainment of age 65) shall be based on the greater of:

(i)        the Participant’s nonforfeitable Predecessor Plan Benefit and the actuarial assumptions applicable for this purposes under the Enterprise Plan as of July 1, 2000; and

(ii)       the Participant’s total nonforfeitable Accrued Benefit under the Plan as of the date the alternative form is being determined and the actuarial assumptions specified in Section 2.2 of the Plan.

(b)         Early Retirement Reduction Factors .   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, if a Participant’s benefit commences prior to his attainment of age 65, in determining the Participant’s benefit, his Predecessor Plan Benefit under 4(b) above shall be reduced by 1/4 of 1% for each month of the first two hundred forty (240) calendar months by which such Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date precedes his Normal Retirement Date. If the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date is more than two hundred forty (240) months prior to his attainment of age 65, his Predecessor Plan Benefit under 4(b) above shall be reduced based on the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2 of the Plan.

 

AXVII-2


6.          Alternative Forms of Benefit .

(a)        Lump Sum at Age 55.  Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, a Participant may elect to receive his Predecessor Plan Benefit as a lump sum under Section 7.3(d) only after attainment of age 55 (and only prior to commencement of any benefit payments), unless, as of the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date, the total payments the Participant would receive in a year (with respect to his entire Accrued Benefit) under the form of benefit specified in Section 7.1, amounts to less than $600. Effective for Benefit Commencement Dates of August 1, 2015 or later, the age 55 restriction shall no longer apply and a Participant may elect a lump sum regardless of his age at his Benefit Commencement Date.

(b)         Preserved Joint Life-Ten Year Certain Option – Before August 1, 2015 .  An Enterprise Federal Participant may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the preserved joint life-ten year certain option, but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015. Under this option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime, provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date, then monthly payments shall be continued in an amount equal to 100% of the monthly benefit payable to the Participant under this option to his designated Beneficiary payable over such Beneficiary’s remaining lifetime; provided that if the Participant and such Beneficiary die before a total of 120 monthly payments have been made, then the present value of the unpaid installments, discounted at the rate of 7% per annum, shall be paid in a lump sum to a Beneficiary designated by the Participant, or, if none, to the estate of the survivor of the Participant and the joint annuitant (presuming the Participant to be the survivor if they die within 24 hours of each other).

(c)         “12 Times” Death Benefit Option – Before August 1, 2015 .  An Enterprise Federal Participant may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the preserved “12 Times” Death Benefit Option as described herein but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015. Under this option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, and continuing until the payment of the installment due on the first day of the month in which he dies. Upon his death, his Beneficiary shall be entitled to a lump sum equal to the excess, if any, of:

(i)        an amount equal to 12 times the Participant’s annual lifetime benefit under this option; over

(ii)       the sum of the actual benefit payments the Participant received during his lifetime.

 

AXVII-3


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XVIII

THE OLD KENT RETIREMENT INCOME PLAN

1.          Plan Merger .   Effective December 31, 2001, The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Retirement plan merged with the Old Kent Retirement Income Plan. Notwithstanding the plan merger, prior to January 1, 2009 (the “Restatement Date”), the surviving plan consisted of two separate plan documents, as amended: The Fifth Third Bancorp Master Retirement Plan document, as amended, and as it existed immediately prior to the plan merger (the “Fifth Third Plan Document”) and the Old Kent Retirement Income Plan document, as amended, and as it existed immediately prior to the plan merger (the “Old Kent Plan Document”).

2.          Old Kent Plan Document/Predecessor Plan .  Notwithstanding the plan merger, the Old Kent Plan Document, as amended from time to time, has been controlling with respect to the determination of benefits and rights of an individual who was a “Participant” (or “Spouse” or “Beneficiary”) pursuant to such document immediately prior to the plan merger. Such plan merger (and the Fifth Third Plan Document) did not change an individual’s benefits and rights under the Old Kent Plan Document, and the plan merger did not confer any benefits or rights on any other individual under the Old Kent Plan Document. Notwithstanding any other provisions, an individual who was not a “Participant” pursuant to the provisions of the Old Kent Plan Document as of December 31, 2001, shall never become a Participant thereunder.

Effective as of the Restatement Date, the Old Kent Plan Document, as amended, shall no longer be part of the Master Retirement Plan. Instead, this Plan (including this Appendix) shall be controlling with respect to a Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit (as described below) attributable to the Old Kent Retirement Income Plan. The Old Kent Plan Document (as amended), as in effect immediately prior to the Restatement Date, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

3.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply to Participants who had an accrued benefit determined under the Predecessor Plan immediately prior to the Restatement Date.

(b)         Amount .   Benefits ceased accruing under the Old Kent Plan Document effective March 10, 2002. A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be an equal monthly amount payable under a single life annuity over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date and which is equal to the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued benefit under the Old Kent Plan Document (expressed as a monthly benefit payable during the Participant’s lifetime with 60 monthly payments guaranteed).

4.          Vesting Years .    For purposes of determining Vesting Years under the Plan, Section 2.39(a) shall be interpreted as follows: a Participant shall be credited with a Vesting Year for each “Year of Vesting Service” he had under the Predecessor Plan as of December 31,

 

AXVIII-1


2008. For periods after December 31, 2008, a Participant shall be credited with Vesting Years as provided in Section 2.39(a)(1) and (2). The foregoing shall be subject to the rules in Section 2.39(b) regarding service that is not counted.

5.          Normal Retirement Age .

(a)         Defined .   Notwithstanding Section 2.23 of the Plan, “Normal Retirement Age” shall mean age 65 for Participants who were Participants under the Predecessor Plan immediately prior to the Restatement Date.

(b)         Working Past Normal Retirement Date .   Notwithstanding Section 6.3 of the Plan, a Participant with a Predecessor Plan Benefit who had attained his Normal Retirement Date before the Restatement Date (January 1, 2009) but who had not terminated employment, shall be entitled as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to that part of the Normal Retirement Benefit which is attributable to his Predecessor Plan Benefit, that he would have been entitled to if he had retired on his Normal Retirement Date, actuarially adjusted based on the actuarial assumptions in Paragraph 7(b) below.

Similarly, for purposes of applying Section 6.3(a) of the Plan to the Predecessor Plan Benefit in the case of a Participant who had not attained Normal Retirement Date by January 1, 2009, the actuarial assumptions in Paragraph 7(b) below shall apply.

6.          Early Payment Reduction Factors .   Notwithstanding Section 6.2 or 6.4 of the Plan, if a Participant’s benefit attributable to his Predecessor Plan Benefit commences prior to his Normal Retirement Date, his Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be reduced in accordance with (a) or (b) below.

(a)         Reduction for Life Annuity Forms .   If a benefit commences in a life annuity form under Paragraph 8 below, the benefit shall be reduced for each additional month that the benefit is payable by the percentage determined below:

 

Participant’s Age

When Benefit Begins

Percentage Reduction

60 to 65 5/9% per month
55 to 60 5/18% per month

If the benefit commences prior to the Participant’s attainment of age 55, then the reduction shall be based on the actuarial assumptions set forth in Paragraph 7(b) below.

(b)         Reduction for Lump Sum Form .   If the Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit is payable in a lump sum, his Predecessor Plan Benefits shall be reduced in accordance with the actuarial assumptions in Paragraph 7(a) below.

 

AXVIII-2


7.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         Lump Sum .   Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, the lump sum Actuarial Equivalent of the Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be determined using the following actuarial assumptions:

(i)         Mortality .    The applicable mortality table described in Section 2.2(b)(2)(A) of the Plan.

(ii)        Interest .   The “Applicable Interest Rate” (as defined in Section 2.2(b)(2)(B) of the Plan) determined for the month that is the fifth month preceding the first day of the calendar quarter that includes the Benefit Commencement Date (or other date as of which benefits under the Plan are to be paid).

These provisions also shall be applicable effective for Benefit Commencement Dates under the Old Kent Plan Document of January 1, 2008 or later.

(b)         Other Alternative Forms .     Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Plan, the Actuarial Equivalent of any alternative form of benefit under the Plan (other than a lump sum distribution), including a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, for any Participant to whom this Appendix is applicable shall be based on the Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit and the following mortality and interest assumptions:

(i)           Mortality .

 1983 Group Annuity Table (Unisex) - Preretirement

 1983 Group Annuity Table (Unisex) - Post-retirement

(ii)          Interest .

 7% Preretirement

 7% Post-retirement

8.          Form of Payment of Predecessor Plan Benefits – Before August 1, 2015 .   This Section shall apply for Benefit Commencement Dates before August 1, 2015. For Benefit Commencement Dates of August 1, 2015 or later, Section 9 below shall be controlling.

(a)         Exclusive Forms .   Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the forms of payment described in this Appendix shall be the only available forms of payment available for a Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit. The other forms of payment described in Article 7 of the Plan (or elsewhere) shall not be available for the payment of the Predecessor Plan Benefit.

(b)         Basic Form of Predecessor Plan Benefit .   Subject to the provisions of (c) below regarding the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and subject to the provisions of (d) below regarding optional forms of benefit under this Appendix, the basic form of a Participant’s

 

AXVIII-3


Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be an Actuarial Equivalent life annuity with five years certain. A life annuity with five years certain is an annuity that is payable in equal monthly installments, commencing as of the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date and continuing until the payment of the installment due on the first day of the month in which he dies; provided, however, if the Participant dies before receiving 60 monthly payments, then such payments shall be continued to his Beneficiary until the total number of payments to the Participant and his Beneficiary equals 60.

(c)         Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity .

(i)          Automatic Basic Form .   Unless the waiver provided for in Section 7.2(c) of the Plan is effective with respect to a Participant, the form of payment of the Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity (defined in (ii) below) if the lump sum Actuarial Equivalent (determined as of his Benefit Commencement Date) of his nonforfeitable benefit under the Plan exceeds $5,000.

(ii)         Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity .    A “Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity” is an immediate annuity which is the Actuarial Equivalent of the basic form of benefit under (b) above and which:

(A)        for a married Participant (including a Participant who is subject to an applicable qualified domestic relations order as described in section 414(p) of the Code), provides a lifetime benefit for the Participant and a lifetime survivor benefit for his Surviving Spouse equal to 50 percent or 75 percent, as the Participant may elect, of the benefit payable to the Participant during their joint lives; or

(B)        for a single Participant, is the life annuity with five years certain (as described in (b) above).

(iii)        Waiver .  A Participant may waive the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with Section 7.2(c) of the Plan.

(d)         Optional Forms of Benefit .  Subject to an effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity or, in the case of a nonforfeitable benefit with an Actuarial Equivalent lump sum value not exceeding $5,000, a Participant may, by filing the proper forms with the Administrator prior to this Benefit Commencement Date, elect to receive his Predecessor Plan Benefit in one of the following forms; provided, however, if the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date precedes his attainment of age 55, the lump sum option shall be the only available optional form of benefit. Each optional form of benefit shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of the basic form of benefit under (b) above.

(i)          Single Life Annuity .    Under the single life annuity option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit (in equal monthly amounts) commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date and terminating with the monthly payment due on the first day of the month in which death occurs.

(ii)         OJ&S with 100 Percent Survivor Annuity .   Under this option, a married Participant would be entitled to the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity as described in (c)(ii) above except the lifetime survivor benefit for the Surviving Spouse is equal to 100 percent of the benefit payable to the Participant during their joint lives.

 

AXVIII-4


(iii)         Term Certain Life Annuity with Lump Sum .   Under this option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided, however, if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date and before he has received either 120 or 180 monthly payments (as the Participant may elect), then the sum of the remaining monthly payments needed to total the 120 or 180 elected monthly payments, shall be paid in a lump sum to the Participant’s Beneficiary.

(iv)         Lump Sum .   Under the lump sum option, a Participant is entitled to a single payment which is the Actuarial Equivalent of his Predecessor Plan Benefit.

(v)          Term Certain Joint and Survivor Annuity with Lump Sum .   Under this option, a married Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit (in equal monthly amounts) commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date for his lifetime and a lifetime survivor benefit for his Surviving Spouse equal to 100 percent of the monthly benefit payable to the Participant during their joint lives; provided, however, if both the Participant and the Surviving Spouse die (after the Participant’s Benefit Commencement Date) before they have received together a total of either 120 or 180 monthly payments (as the Participant may elect), then the sum of the remaining monthly payments needed to total the 120 or 180 elected monthly payments, shall be paid in a lump sum to the Participant’s Beneficiary.

9.           Forms of Payment of Predecessor Plan Benefits – After July 1, 2015 .    This Section 9 shall apply for Benefit Commencement Dates of August 1, 2015 or later. The forms of payment described in Article 7 of the Plan shall apply to a Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit. In addition, subject to an effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the Plan, a Participant who is age 68 or older as of his Benefit Commencement Date, may elect to receive his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the preserved life-5 year certain option described below. Under this option, a Participant who is age 68 or older as of his Benefit Commencement Date, shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies on or after his Benefit Commencement Date and before a total of 60 monthly payments have been made, then the monthly payments shall be continued in the same amount to his designated Beneficiary or Beneficiaries until the aggregate number of such payments made to such Participant and such Beneficiary or Beneficiaries equals 60 monthly payments. In the event of the death of such Participant and all of his designated Beneficiaries before 60 monthly payments have been made, then the commuted value of the balance of such payments shall be paid, in a lump sum, to the Participant’s Surviving Spouse or, if none, to the estate of the person upon whose death such amount becomes payable.

10.         Preretirement Survivor Annuity .   The Preretirement Survivor Annuity available under Article 8 of the Plan with respect to the Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be as provided in Article 8.

 

AXVIII-5


11.         Benefits in Pay Status .  The amount and form of any distribution being paid under the Predecessor Plan by reason of the occurrence of any event prior to the Restatement Date shall continue to be subject to the provisions of the Predecessor Plan immediately prior to the Restatement Date.

12.         Sale of Fifth Third Insurance Services, Inc .

(a)         Cessation of Active Participation .    Due to the sale of 100% of the outstanding shares of capital stock of Fifth Third Insurance Services, Inc. (“Insurance Sub”) on December 31, 2002, Insurance Sub is no longer a subsidiary of Fifth Third Bancorp, and therefore, is no longer an Employer under the Plan (including the Old Kent Plan Document). As such, after December 31, 2002, employees of Insurance Sub are no longer “Employees” under the Plan (including the Old Kent Plan Document).

(b)         Vesting .      Notwithstanding any other provisions to the contrary, a Participant who was an employee of Insurance Sub on December 31, 2002 and who continued as an employee of Insurance Sub (and not of an Employer) immediately after the sale, shall have a nonforfeitable right to 100% of his Accrued Benefit (including his Accrued Benefit under the Old Kent Plan Document).

(c)         Distributable Event .    In order to make Participants who, on and after December 31, 2002, were employees of Insurance Sub eligible to take distributions under the Plan, such Insurance Sub employees shall be considered to have incurred a termination of employment immediately after December 31, 2002.

 

AXVIII-6


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XIX

PEOPLES BANK & TRUST COMPANY EMPLOYEES’ PENSION PLAN

1.          Plan Merger/Predecessor Plan .  The Peoples Bank & Trust Company Employees’ Pension Plan (the “Peoples Bank Pension Plan”) merged into the Plan as of December 31, 2005 (the “Plan Merger Date”). The provisions below are effective from and after the Plan Merger Date. The Peoples Bank Pension Plan, as in effect on the Plan Merger Date, is the Predecessor Plan for purposes of this Appendix.

2.          Predecessor Plan Benefit .

(a)         Applicability .   The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein shall apply to all individuals who had a vested accrued benefit under the Predecessor Plan as of the Plan Merger Date. Because such individuals will have a Predecessor Plan Benefit upon the plan merger, any such individual shall be considered a Participant in this Plan on the Plan Merger Date notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan. The designation of any such individual as a Participant shall not result in such individual being entitled to ongoing accruals under this Plan. The Predecessor Plan Benefit provided herein also shall apply to the determination of any Preretirement Survivor Annuity available under Article 8 of the Plan with respect to the benefit of any such Participant.

(b)         Amount .   A Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix shall be an equal monthly amount payable under a single life annuity over the life of the Participant commencing at his Benefit Commencement Date and which is equal to the Actuarial Equivalent of his accrued benefit under the Predecessor Plan (expressed as a monthly benefit under a straight life annuity) as of the Plan Merger Date.

(c)         Vesting .   Notwithstanding Section 5.2 of the Plan, a Participant shall have a nonforfeitable right to his Predecessor Plan Benefit.

3.          Normal Retirement Age .    Notwithstanding Section 2.23 of the Plan, “Normal Retirement Age” shall be age 65 for Participants who were participants in the Predecessor Plan as of the Plan Merger Date.

4.          Early Retirement Age .   Notwithstanding Section 2.12, “Early Retirement Age” means age 55 and at least 10 Vesting Years for Participants who were participants in the Predecessor Plan as of the Plan Merger Date.

5.          Commencement Date of Benefit .

(a)        Under the Predecessor Plan, a participant who terminated service prior to Normal Retirement Age and prior to Early Retirement Age was not entitled to commence his distribution immediately. This provision shall be preserved prior to July 1, 2012, so that Section 6.4 of the Plan shall not apply with respect to a Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit. Instead, a

 

AXIX-1


Participant who has terminated employment and who is not entitled to commence his Predecessor Plan Benefit under Section 6.1, 6.2 or 6.3, shall be entitled as of his Benefit Commencement Date, to his Predecessor Plan Benefit actuarially reduced in accordance with Paragraph 6 below if his Benefit Commencement Date precedes his Normal Retirement Date. Effective July 1, 2012, the foregoing limitation shall no longer apply and such a Participant may elect an earlier Benefit Commencement Date with respect to his Predecessor Plan Benefit, as provided in (b)(ii) below.

(b)        The “Benefit Commencement Date” of a Participant to whom (a) above applies shall be his Normal Retirement Date except as follows:

(i)        prior to July 1, 2012, if a Participant has credit for at least 10 Vesting Years, then he may elect as his Benefit Commencement Date the first day of any month, not later than his Normal Retirement Date, which coincides with or follows his attainment of age 55; and

(ii)       effective July 1, 2012, a Participant may elect as his Benefit Commencement Date, the first day of any month, not later than his Latest Commencement Date (as defined in Section 7.4(c)(1)), that follows his termination of employment.

6.          Payment Reduction Factors .   Notwithstanding Section 6.2 or 6.4 of the Plan, if a Participant’s benefit attributable to a Predecessor Plan Benefit commences prior to his Normal Retirement Date, his Predecessor Plan Benefit shall be reduced in accordance with (a) or (b) below.

(a)         Reduction for Life Annuity Forms .    If a benefit commences in a life annuity form under Article 7 of the Plan or Paragraph 8 below after the Participant has reached his Early Retirement Age, the benefit shall be reduced for early commencement based on his attained age as of the Benefit Commencement Date and determined under the following table:

 

Attained Birthday as of

Benefit Commencement Date

Early Payment Percentage

65 100%
64 97
63 94
62 91
61 88
60 75
59 70
58 65
57 60
56 55
55 50

If the benefit commences prior to the Participant’s attainment of age 55, then the reduction shall be based on the actuarial assumptions set forth in Paragraph 7(b) below.

 

AXIX-2


(b)         Reduction for Lump Sum Form .   If a Participant’s benefit is payable in a lump sum under Section 7.3(d) of the Plan, his Predecessor Plan Benefit expressed as an immediate single life annuity shall first be reduced as provided in (a) above, and the lump sum actuarial equivalent of such reduced amount shall be determined in accordance with the actuarial assumptions referred to in Paragraph 7(a) below.

If a greater lump sum would result, and in all events in the case of a cash-out distribution under Section 7.4(d) of the Plan, instead of reducing the Predecessor Plan Benefit, as provided in (a) above, the reduction and determination of the lump sum shall be based on the actuarial assumptions referred to in Paragraph 7(a) below.

7.          Actuarial Assumptions .

(a)         Lump Sum .   The lump sum actuarial equivalent of the Predecessor Plan Benefit under this Appendix (after first being reduced for early commencement under Paragraph 6(b) above, if applicable) shall be determined using the actuarial assumptions set forth in Section 2.2(b)(2) of the Plan or the actuarial assumptions set forth below, whichever results in a greater lump sum:

(i)         Mortality .   For Participants and Beneficiaries, the Unisex Pension 1984 Mortality Table (UP-1984 Table) with ages set back one and one-half (1 1/2) years. This setback is determined by interpolating (straight line) between mortality rates with a one (1) year age setback and mortality rates with a two (2) year age setback. The above mortality assumptions are commonly referred to as a “50-50 male/female mix.”

(ii)         Interest .  The interest rate specified in Section 2.2(b)(1) of the Plan.

(b)         Other Alternative Forms .  The amount of any alternative forms of payment under the Plan (other than a lump sum distribution), including a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, for any Participant with respect to whom this Appendix is applicable shall be based on the Participant’s Predecessor Plan Benefit and the mortality assumptions in Paragraph 7(a)(i) above and an interest rate of six percent (6%) per annum, compounded annually.

8.          Preserved Twenty Year Certain Option – Before August 1, 2015 .  Subject to the effective waiver of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity in accordance with the terms of the Plan, a Participant may elect to receive so much of his benefit under the Plan as does not exceed his Predecessor Plan Benefit under the preserved twenty year certain option but only if his Benefit Commencement Date is before August 1, 2015. Under this option, a Participant shall be entitled to a monthly benefit commencing as of his Benefit Commencement Date, payable during his remaining lifetime; provided that if such Participant dies after his Benefit Commencement Date but before he receives 240 monthly payments, then monthly payments shall be continued in an amount equal to 100% of the monthly benefit payable to the Participant under this option to his designated Beneficiary until the number of monthly pension payments made to the Beneficiary, when added to the number of monthly pension payments made to the Participant, equals 240.

 

AXIX-3


9.          Benefits in Pay Status . The amount and form of any distribution being paid under the Predecessor Plan by reason of the occurrence of any event prior to the Plan Merger Date shall continue to be subject to the provisions of the Predecessor Plan immediately prior to the Plan Merger Date.

 

AXIX-4


THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

MASTER RETIREMENT PLAN

APPENDIX XX

INTERNAL REVENUE CODE SECTION 436 RESTRICTIONS

Limitations Applicable If the Plan’s Adjusted Funding Target Attainment Percentage Is Less Than 80 Percent or If the Plan Sponsor Is In Bankruptcy

1. Limitations Applicable If the Plan’s Adjusted Funding Target Attainment Percentage Is Less Than 80 Percent, But Not Less Than 60 Percent .   Notwithstanding any other provisions of the plan, if the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for a plan year is less than 80 percent (or would be less than 80 percent to the extent described in Section 1(b) below) but is not less than 60 percent, then the limitations set forth in this Section 1 apply.

(a) 50 Percent Limitation on Single Sum Payments, Other Accelerated Forms of Distribution, and Other Prohibited Payments .   A participant or beneficiary is not permitted to elect, and the plan shall not pay, a single sum payment or other optional form of benefit that includes a prohibited payment with an annuity starting date on or after the applicable section 436 measurement date, and the plan shall not make any payment for the purchase of an irrevocable commitment from an insurer to pay benefits or any other payment or transfer that is a prohibited payment, unless the present value of the portion of the benefit that is being paid in a prohibited payment does not exceed the lesser of:

(i) 50 percent of the present value of the benefit payable in the optional form of benefit that includes the prohibited payment; or

(ii) 100 percent of the PBGC maximum benefit guarantee amount (as defined in § 1.436-1(d)(3)(iii)(C) of the Treasury Regulations).

The limitation set forth in this Section 1(a) does not apply to any payment of a benefit which under § 411(a)(11) of the Internal Revenue Code may be immediately distributed without the consent of the participant. If an optional form of benefit that is otherwise available under the terms of the plan is not available to a participant or beneficiary as of the annuity starting date because of the application of the requirements of this Section 1(a), the participant or beneficiary is permitted to elect to bifurcate the benefit into unrestricted and restricted portions (as described in § 1.436-1(d)(3)(iii)(D) of the Treasury Regulations). The participant or beneficiary may also elect any other optional form of benefit otherwise available under the plan at that annuity starting date that would satisfy the 50 percent/PBGC maximum benefit guarantee amount limitation described in this Section 1(a), or may elect to defer the benefit in accordance with any general right to defer commencement of benefits under the plan.

(b) Plan Amendments Increasing Liability for Benefits .   No amendment to the plan that has the effect of increasing liabilities of the plan by reason of increases in benefits,

 

AXX-1


establishment of new benefits, changing the rate of benefit accrual, or changing the rate at which benefits become nonforfeitable shall take effect in a plan year if the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year is:

(i) Less than 80 percent; or

(ii) 80 percent or more, but would be less than 80 percent if the benefits attributable to the amendment were taken into account in determining the adjusted funding target attainment percentage.

The limitation set forth in this Section 1(b) does not apply to any amendment to the plan that provides a benefit increase under a plan formula that is not based on compensation, provided that the rate of such increase does not exceed the contemporaneous rate of increase in the average wages of participants covered by the amendment.

2. Limitations Applicable If the Plan’s Adjusted Funding Target Attainment Percentage Is Less Than 60 Percent .   Notwithstanding any other provisions of the plan, if the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for a plan year is less than 60 percent (or would be less than 60 percent to the extent described in Section 2(b) below), then the limitations in this Section 2 apply.

(a) Single Sums, Other Accelerated Forms of Distribution, and Other Prohibited Payments Not Permitted .   A participant or beneficiary is not permitted to elect, and the plan shall not pay, a single sum payment or other optional form of benefit that includes a prohibited payment with an annuity starting date on or after the applicable section 436 measurement date, and the plan shall not make any payment for the purchase of an irrevocable commitment from an insurer to pay benefits or any other payment or transfer that is a prohibited payment. The limitation set forth in this Section 2(a) does not apply to any payment of a benefit which under § 411(a)(11) of the Internal Revenue Code may be immediately distributed without the consent of the participant.

(b) Shutdown Benefits and Other Unpredictable Contingent Event Benefits Not Permitted to Be Paid .   An unpredictable contingent event benefit with respect to an unpredictable contingent event occurring during a plan year shall not be paid if the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year is:

(i) Less than 60 percent; or

(ii) 60 percent or more, but would be less than 60 percent if the adjusted funding target attainment percentage were redetermined applying an actuarial assumption that the likelihood of occurrence of the unpredictable contingent event during the plan year is 100 percent.

(c) Benefit Accruals Frozen.   Benefit accruals under the plan shall cease as of the applicable section 436 measurement date. In addition, if the plan is required to cease benefit accruals under this Section 2(c), then the plan is not permitted to be amended in a manner that would increase the liabilities of the plan by reason of an increase in benefits or establishment of new benefits.

 

AXX-2


3. Limitations Applicable If the Plan Sponsor Is In Bankruptcy .   Notwithstanding any other provisions of the plan, a participant or beneficiary is not permitted to elect, and the plan shall not pay, a single sum payment or other optional form of benefit that includes a prohibited payment with an annuity starting date that occurs during any period in which the plan sponsor is a debtor in a case under title 11, United States Code, or similar Federal or State law, except for payments made within a plan year with an annuity starting date that occurs on or after the date on which the plan’s enrolled actuary certifies that the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for that plan year is not less than 100 percent. In addition, during such period in which the plan sponsor is a debtor, the plan shall not make any payment for the purchase of an irrevocable commitment from an insurer to pay benefits or any other payment or transfer that is a prohibited payment, except for payments that occur on a date within a plan year that is on or after the date on which the plan’s enrolled actuary certifies that the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for that plan year is not less than 100 percent. The limitation set forth in this Section 3 does not apply to any payment of a benefit which under § 411(a)(11) of the Internal Revenue Code may be immediately distributed without the consent of the participant.

4. Provisions Applicable After Limitations Cease to Apply .

(a) Resumption of Prohibited Payments.   If a limitation on prohibited payments under Section 1(a), Section 2(a), or Section 3 applied to the plan as of a section 436 measurement date, but that limit no longer applies to the plan as of a later section 436 measurement date, then that limitation does not apply to benefits with annuity starting dates that are on or after that later section 436 measurement date.

(b) Resumption of Benefit Accruals.   If a limitation on benefit accruals under Section 2(c) applied to the plan as of a section 436 measurement date, but that limitation no longer applies to the plan as of a later section 436 measurement date, then benefit accruals shall resume prospectively and that limitation does not apply to benefit accruals that are based on service on or after that later section 436 measurement date, except as otherwise provided under the plan. The plan shall comply with the rules relating to partial years of participation and the prohibition on double proration under Department of Labor regulation 29 CFR § 2530.204-2(c) and (d).

(c) Shutdown and Other Unpredictable Contingent Event Benefits.   If an unpredictable contingent event benefit with respect to an unpredictable contingent event that occurs during the plan year is not permitted to be paid after the occurrence of the event because of the limitation of Section 2(b), but is permitted to be paid later in the same plan year (as a result of additional contributions or pursuant to the enrolled actuary’s certification of the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year that meets the requirements of § 1.436-1(g)(5)(ii)(B) of the Treasury Regulations), then that unpredictable contingent event benefit shall be paid, retroactive to the period that benefit would have been payable under the terms of the plan (determined without regard to Section 2(b)). If the unpredictable contingent event benefit does not become payable during the plan year in accordance with the preceding sentence, then the plan is treated as if it does not provide for that benefit.

 

AXX-3


(d) Treatment of Plan Amendments That Do Not Take Effect.    If a plan amendment does not take effect as of the effective date of the amendment because of the limitation of Section 1(b) or Section 2(c), but is permitted to take effect later in the same plan year (as a result of additional contributions or pursuant to the enrolled actuary’s certification of the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year that meets the requirements of § 1.436-l(g)(5)(ii)(C) of the Treasury Regulations), then the plan amendment must automatically take effect as of the first day of the plan year (or, if later, the original effective date of the amendment). If the plan amendment cannot take effect during the same plan year, then it shall be treated as if it were never adopted, unless the plan amendment provides otherwise.

5. Notice Requirement.    See section 101(j) of ERISA for rules requiring the plan administrator of a single employer defined benefit pension plan to provide a written notice to participants and beneficiaries within 30 days after certain specified dates if the plan has become subject to a limitation described in Section 1(a), Section 2, or Section 3.

6. Methods to Avoid or Terminate Benefit Limitations.   See § 436(b)(2), (c)(2), (e)(2), and (f) of the Internal Revenue Code and § 1.436-1(f) of the Treasury Regulations for rules relating to employer contributions and other methods to avoid or terminate the application of the limitations set forth in Sections 1 through 3 for a plan year. In general, the methods a plan sponsor may use to avoid or terminate one or more of the benefit limitations under Sections 1 through 3 for a plan year include employer contributions and elections to increase the amount of plan assets which are taken into account in determining the adjusted funding target attainment percentage, making an employer contribution that is specifically designated as a current year contribution that is made to avoid or terminate application of certain of the benefit limitations, or providing security to the plan.

7. Special Rules.

(a) Rules of Operation for Periods Prior to and After Certification of Plan’s Adjusted Funding Target Attainment Percentage.

(i) In General. Section 436(h) of the Internal Revenue Code and § 1.436- 1(h) of the Treasury Regulations set forth a series of presumptions that apply (1) before the plan’s enrolled actuary issues a certification of the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year and (2) if the plan’s enrolled actuary does not issue a certification of the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year before the first day of the 10th month of the plan year (or if the plan’s enrolled actuary issues a range certification for the plan year pursuant to § 1.436-1 (h)(4)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations but does not issue a certification of the specific adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan by the last day of the plan year). For any period during which a presumption under § 436(h) of the Internal Revenue Code and § 1.436-1(h) of the Treasury Regulations applies to the plan, the limitations under Sections 1 through 3 are applied to the plan as if the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year were the presumed adjusted funding target attainment percentage determined under the rules of § 436(h) of the Internal Revenue Code and § 1.436-1(h)(1), (2), or (3) of the Treasury Regulations. These presumptions are set forth in Section 7(a)(ii) though (iv).

 

AXX-4


(ii) Presumption of Continued Underfunding Beginning First Day of Plan Year.   If a limitation under Section 1, 2, or 3 applied to the plan on the last day of the preceding plan year, then, commencing on the first day of the current plan year and continuing until the plan’s enrolled actuary issues a certification of the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan for the current plan year, or, if earlier, the date Section 7(a)(iii) or Section 7(a)(iv) applies to the plan:

(1) The adjusted funding target attainment percentage of the plan for the current plan year is presumed to be the adjusted funding target attainment percentage in effect on the last day of the preceding plan year; and

(2) The first day of the current plan year is a section 436 measurement date.

(iii) Presumption of Underfunding Beginning First Day of 4th Month.   If the plan’s enrolled actuary has not issued a certification of the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year before the first day of the 4th month of the plan year and the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the preceding plan year was either at least 60 percent but less than 70 percent or at least 80 percent but less than 90 percent, or is described in § 1.436-1(h)(2)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations, then, commencing on the first day of the 4th month of the current plan year and continuing until the plan’s enrolled actuary issues a certification of the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan for the current plan year, or, if earlier, the date Section 7(a)(iv) applies to the plan:

(1) The adjusted funding target attainment percentage of the plan for the current plan year is presumed to be the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the preceding plan year reduced by 10 percentage points; and

(2) The first day of the 4th month of the current plan year is a section 436 measurement date.

(iv) Presumption of Underfunding On and After First Day of 10th Month.   If the plan’s enrolled actuary has not issued a certification of the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year before the first day of the 10th month of the plan year (or if the plan’s enrolled actuary has issued a range certification for the plan year pursuant to § 1.436-1(h)(4)(ii) of the Treasury Regulations but has not issued a certification of the specific adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan by the last day of the plan year), then, commencing on the first day of the 10th month of the current plan year and continuing through the end of the plan year:

(1) The adjusted funding target attainment percentage of the plan for the current plan year is presumed to be less than 60 percent; and

(2) The first day of the 10th month of the current plan year is a section 436 measurement date.

 

AXX-5


(b) New Plans, Plan Termination, Certain Frozen Plans, and Other Special Rules.

(i) First 5 Plan Years.   The limitations in Section 1(b), Section 2(b), and Section 2(c) do not apply to a new plan for the first 5 plan years of the plan, determined under the rules of § 436(i) of the Internal Revenue Code and § 1.436-1(a)(3)(i) of the Treasury Regulations.

(ii) Plan Termination.   The limitations on prohibited payments in Section 1(a), Section 2(a), and Section 3 do not apply to prohibited payments that are made to carry out the termination of the plan in accordance with applicable law. Any other limitations under this section of the plan do not cease to apply as a result of termination of the plan.

(iii) Exception to Limitations on Prohibited Payments Under Certain Frozen Plans.   The limitations on prohibited payments set forth in Sections 1(a), 2(a), and 3 do not apply for a plan year if the terms of the plan, as in effect for the period beginning on September 1, 2005, and continuing through the end of the plan year, provide for no benefit accruals with respect to any participants. This Section 7(b)(iii) shall cease to apply as of the date any benefits accrue under the plan or the date on which a plan amendment that increases benefits takes effect.

(iv) Special Rules Relating to Unpredictable Contingent Event Benefits and Plan Amendments Increasing Benefit Liability.   During any period in which none of the presumptions under Section 7(a) apply to the plan and the plan’s enrolled actuary has not yet issued a certification of the plan’s adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan year, the limitations under Section 1(b) and Section 2(b) shall be based on the inclusive presumed adjusted funding target attainment percentage for the plan, calculated in accordance with the rules of § 1.436-1(g)(2)(iii) of the Treasury Regulations.

(c) Special Rules Under PRA 2010.

(i) Payments Under Social Security Leveling Options.   For purposes of determining whether the limitations under Section 1(a) or 2(a) apply to payments under a social security leveling option, within the meaning of § 436(j)(3)(C)(i) of the Internal Revenue Code, the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for a plan year shall be determined in accordance with the “Special Rule for Certain Years” under § 436(j)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code and any Treasury Regulations or other published guidance thereunder issued by the Internal Revenue Service.

(ii) Limitation on Benefit Accruals.   For purposes of determining whether the accrual limitation under Section 2(c) applies to the plan, the adjusted funding target attainment percentage for a plan year shall be determined in accordance with the “Special Rule for Certain Years” under § 436(j)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code (except as provided under section 203(b) of the Preservation of Access to Care for Medicare Beneficiaries and Pension Relief Act of 2010, if applicable).

 

AXX-6


(d) Interpretation of Provisions.   The limitations imposed by this section of the plan shall be interpreted and administered in accordance with § 436 of the Internal Revenue Code and § 1.436-1 of the Treasury Regulations.

8. Definitions.   The definitions in the following Treasury Regulations apply for purposes of Sections 1 through 7: § 1.436-1(j)(1) defining adjusted funding target attainment percentage; § 1.436-1(j)(2) defining annuity starting date; § 1.436-1(j)(6) defining prohibited payment; § 1.436-1(j)(8) defining section 436 measurement date; and § 1.436-1(j)(9) defining an unpredictable contingent event and an unpredictable contingent event benefit.

9. Effective Date.   The rules in Sections 1 through 8 are effective for plan years beginning after December 31, 2007.

 

AXX-7

Exhibit 10.14

AMENDMENT TO

THE FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

NONQUALIFIED DEFERRED COMPENSATION PLAN

(as amended and restated effective as of January 1, 2013)

Pursuant to the power of amendment in Paragraph 15.1 of The Fifth Third Bancorp Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan (as amended and restated effective as of January 1, 2013) (the “Plan”), the Plan is hereby amended, effective as of December 31, 2014, in the following respects:

1.          Paragraph 2.5 is amended and restated to read as follows:

2.5         “Compensation” shall mean the total base earnings plus the cash portion of variable compensation (but excluding other cash incentives not characterized by an Employer as variable compensation) paid by an Employer to a Participant or which would otherwise be paid but for a deferral election hereunder. For purposes of this plan, “Compensation” shall only include the cash portion of any variable compensation amount otherwise payable in the calendar year immediately following the performance period applicable to such variable compensation (and shall exclude the portion of variable compensation that is payable in any subsequent calendar years pursuant to the terms of the Employer’s variable compensation program).

2.          A new Paragraph 2.28 is added to read as follows:

2.28        “Performance-Based Compensation” means variable compensation that is based on services performed over a period of at least twelve (12) months and that constitutes “performance-based compensation” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code.

3.          Paragraph 4.1 (a) is amended to add the following to the end thereof:

Pursuant to administrative procedures established by the Committee, a Key Employee or a Qualified Executive may make separate deferral elections with respect to the base earnings and variable compensation portions of his Compensation.

4.          The first sentence of Paragraph 4.1(b) is replaced with the following:

The base earnings portion of a Key Employee’s or Qualified Executive’s Compensation otherwise earned and payable to the Participant during the Plan Year shall be reduced by the amount of Participant’s election under this Paragraph 4.1. The variable compensation portion of a Key Employee’s or Qualified Executive’s Compensation otherwise payable to the Participant in the year immediately following the Plan Year shall be reduced by the amount of the Participant’s election under 4.1.


5.          A new Paragraph 4.5 is added to read as follows:

4.5         Performance Based Compensation Deferral . The Committee may allow all or some Key Employees or Qualified Executives to make and/or change deferral elections with respect to variable compensation that constitutes Performance-Based Compensation on any date up to the date that is 6 months before the end of the performance period applicable to such variable compensation (or such earlier date as specified by the Committee), provided that in no event may such deferral election be made after such variable compensation has become “readily ascertainable” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code and provided further that such election shall only apply with respect to such variable compensation or portion thereof that is paid (or would be paid but for the Participant’s deferral election) to the participant in the calendar year immediately following the applicable performance period.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has caused this Amendment to be adopted this ( 23 rd day of December, 2014.

 

FIFTH THIRD BANK
BY:

    /s/ Teresa J. Tanner

    (Name and Title)

EVP & Chief Human Resources Officer

 

2

Exhibit 10.34

 

LOGO

Stock Appreciation Right Award Agreement

 

 

[Participant Name]

It is my pleasure to inform you that you are hereby granted an award of Stock Appreciation Rights (“SARs”) subject to the terms and conditions of this Award and the terms of the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”), approved by shareholders in 2014:

 

Date of Grant [Grant Date]
Total Number of SARs Granted [Number of Shares Granted]
Grant Date Price per Share of Stock [Grant Price]
Expiration Date [Expiration Date]

 

These stock appreciation rights will vest and become exercisable in equal installments on the first, second, third, and fourth anniversaries of the grant date.

Upon exercise, you will be entitled to a payment in the form of shares of stock with a fair market value equal to the fair market value of a share of stock at the date of exercise in excess of the grant date price per share of stock, multiplied by the number of SARs exercised.

In order for the grant to continue to vest upon Retirement, you must be at least 60 years of age and have completed 10 or more years of service with the Company, and also meet the Retirement terms and conditions as defined in the Plan, at the time of your retirement.

Any bonus, commission, compensation, or awards granted to you under the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan is subject to recovery, or “clawback” by the Company in such amount and with respect to such time period as the Committee shall determine to be required by Company policy, applicable law, rules, or regulations if the payments were based on materially inaccurate financial statements or any other materially inaccurate performance metric criteria, or as otherwise required by law. In addition, all executive compensation plans are automatically amended as necessary to comply with the requirements and/or limitations under any other laws, rules, regulations, or regulatory agreements up to and including a revocation of this award.

If you accept the terms of this Award, you will be deemed to have consented to all of the terms and conditions of this Award and of the Plan, except as modified hereby, including the terms of the Confidential Information and Non-Solicitation Agreement located on the following pages. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Award and the Plan, the terms of this Award shall control.

This Award will expire by its own terms unless accepted within 60 days.

 

 

 

For Fifth Third Bancorp:
LOGO

            [Grant Date]

 

Kevin T. Kabat
Vice Chairman & CEO

[Acceptance Date]

 

 

2014 Plan SAR (Band C and below)


CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND NON-SOLICITATION AGREEMENT

This Confidential Information and Non-Solicitation Agreement (“Agreement”) is made by and between Fifth Third Bancorp (which includes its subsidiaries and/or affiliated entities, hereinafter collectively referred to as “the Company”) and the undersigned Employee.

RECITALS

A.                 The Company is a diversified financial services company that operates four main businesses - Commercial Banking, Branch Banking, Consumer Lending, and Investment Advisors.

B.                 The Company has informed Employee that the execution of this Agreement, being in the best interests of the Company, is a condition of employment of the Employee or, in the case of an existing employee, to the continued employment of the Employee by the Company.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the Recitals and the mutual covenants contained herein, it is mutually agreed as follows:

AGREEMENT

 

SECTION I. COVENANT NOT TO USE CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

A.                  As a necessary function of Employee’s employment with the Company, Employee will have access to, use, receive, and otherwise acquire various kinds of customer, business, and technical information relating to the Company’s business that is of a confidential nature to the Company, whether or not such information is specifically labeled as “confidential. Employee agrees that such confidential information includes, for example, the following:

Current, prospective and former customer names and information, including but not limited to contact, financial and account information; product information; compensation plans and arrangements, including incentive compensation plans; performance specifications; pricing, profit margin, and other financial information; product specifications; vendor information; Company training, reference and/or educational materials; Company forecasts/plans/pipelines; objectives and strategies; quality control and/or compliance standards; business referrals, suppliers, and customer lists; unpublished works of any nature whether or not copyrightable; business plans; Company research and/or development materials relating to the Company’s business; information contained in pending patent applications; inventions, technical improvements, and ideas; and all other information and knowledge in whatever form used or useful in management, marketing, purchasing, finance, or operations of the Company’s business and any compilation of such information and all other similar information used by the Company that is not available to those outside of the Company (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Confidential Information”)

B.                  Employee also understands that he or she will occupy a position of confidence and trust with respect to the Company’s Confidential Information during his or her employment. Employee acknowledges and agrees that such Confidential Information is not generally known outside of the Company, that the Company has taken measures to guard the secrecy of its Confidential Information, that such information is extremely valuable and an essential asset of the Company’s business, and that such information, if disclosed without authorization to a third party or used by Employee for purposes other than conducting the Company business would cause irreparable harm to the Company and/or its customers.

C.                  Employee further agrees that, during Employee’s employment with the Company and following his or her termination for whatever reason, Employee will not disclose or use, directly or indirectly, or authorize or permit anyone under his or her direction to disclose to anyone, any Confidential Information of the Company that he or she obtains during the course of his or her employment relating to or otherwise concerning the business of the Company, whether or not acquired, originated, or developed in whole or in part by Employee.

D.                  The obligations set forth herein shall not apply to any trade secrets or Confidential Information that has become generally known to competitors of the Company through no act or omission of Employee, nor shall the obligations set forth herein apply to disclosures made pursuant to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. However, Employee agrees that after termination of employment he or she will not compile pieces of information from several sources and assemble them together in any manner in an attempt to circumvent a violation of his or her confidentiality obligations to the Company or attempt to demonstrate thereby that any of the Confidential Information is in the public domain.

 

SECTION II. COVENANT NOT TO SOLICIT CUSTOMERS

Confidential Information of the Company gained by Employee during employment is developed by the Company through substantial expenditures of time, effort, and financial resources, and constitutes valuable and unique property of the Company. Employee acknowledges, understands, and agrees that the foregoing makes it necessary for the protection of the Company’s business that Employee does not divert business of the Company’s customers from the Company and that he or she maintain the confidentiality and integrity of Confidential Information. Therefore, Employee agrees that during his or her employment and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not:

(a) Directly or indirectly solicit, divert, entice or take away any customers, business or prospective business with whom he or she had contact, involvement or responsibility during his or her employment with the Company, or attempt to do so for the sale of any product or service that competes with a product or service offered by the Company;

(b) Directly or indirectly solicit, divert, entice or take away any potential customer identified, selected or targeted by the Company with whom he or she had contact, involvement or responsibility during his or her employment with the Company, or attempt to do so for the sale of any product or service that competes with a product or service offered by the Company; or

(c) Accept or provide assistance in the accepting of (including, but not limited to, providing any service, information or assistance or other facilitation or other involvement) business or orders from customers or any potential customers of the Company with whom he or she has had contact, involvement, or responsibility on behalf of any third party or otherwise for his or her own benefit.

Nothing contained in this Section shall preclude Employee from accepting employment with or creating his or her own company, firm, or business that competes with the Company so long as his or her activities do not violate any of the terms of this Agreement.

 

2014 Plan SAR (Band C and below)


SECTION III. COVENANT NOT TO SOLICIT EMPLOYEES

Employee agrees that during his or her employment with the Company and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not directly or indirectly solicit, induce, confer or discuss with any employee of the Company or attempt to solicit, induce, confer or discuss with any employee of the Company the prospect of leaving the employ of the Company or the subject of employment by some other person or organization. Employee further agrees that during his or her employment with the Company and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not directly or indirectly hire or attempt to hire any employee of the Company.

 

SECTION IV. EMPLOYEE WARRANTIES

Employee represents and warrants that his or her employment with the Company and the performance of this Agreement will not violate any express or implied obligation to any former employer or other party. Employee further represents that he or she has not brought with him or her and will not use or disclose during his or her employment with the Company any information, documents, or materials subject to any legally enforceable restrictions or obligations as to confidentiality or secrecy. Furthermore, Employee shall not make any agreements with or commitments to any person, firm, or corporation that would prevent, restrict, or hinder the performance of Employee’s duties and obligations under this Agreement. In addition, Employee agrees that he or she shall share a copy of this Agreement with any subsequent employer in order to ensure that there is no violation hereof, and Employee consents to the Company sharing a copy of this Agreement with any such employer.

 

SECTION V. OTHER PROVISIONS

A.                 Extension In The Event Of Breach :  Any breach by Employee of any of the restrictions contained in Sections II-IV of this Agreement shall extend the term of this Agreement by the period of the breach. The commitments made in this Agreement will survive termination of employment with the Company.

B.                 Governing Law :  This Agreement and all the rights, duties and remedies of the parties hereunder shall be governed by the laws of the state in which is located the office of the Company at which Employee is based. The Company shall have the right to specifically enforce the covenants contained in this Agreement, in addition to any other legal, equitable (including specifically, but not limited to temporary restraining orders or preliminary or permanent injunctive relief) or other remedies as may be available to the Company for my breach of any such covenants.

C.                 Severability :  If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable, such provision shall be deemed modified to the extent necessary and possible to render it valid and enforceable.

D.                 Waiver/Modification :  No waiver or modification of this Agreement will be valid unless in writing and duly executed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. Failure of the Company to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right of the Company thereafter to enforce each and every provision.

E.                 At-Will Nature Of Employment :  I understand that nothing in this Agreement requires me to continue employment with the Company for any particular length of time or requires that the Company continue to employ me for any particular length of time.

F.                 Successors/Assigns :  The terms and provisions of this Agreement shall be binding on and inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns of the Company (including but not limited to any corporate successor of The Company) and Employee’s heirs, executors and personal representatives. As part of this provision, Employee understands and agrees that should Employee become employed by another entity owned or otherwise affiliated with Fifth Third Bancorp (such as its subsidiaries, divisions or unincorporated affiliates), the obligations of this Agreement follow Employee to such other entity automatically and without further action, and that entity becomes the “Company” within the meaning of this Agreement.

G.                 Obligation To Comply With Other Laws:   The duties Employee owes the Company under this Agreement shall be deemed to include federal, state and common law obligations of employees to their employers. This Agreement is intended, amongst other things, to supplement the provisions of state trade secret law and duties Employee owes the Company under common law, including but not limited to the duty of loyalty, and does not in any way supersede any of the obligations or duties Employee otherwise owe the Company.

H.                 Obligation To Comply With Other Agreements :  This Agreement is in addition to and not in lieu of other non-solicitation, non-disclosure, and non-competition obligations Employee may owe to the Company.

I.                   Attorney’s Fees :  If the Company must enforce any of its rights under this Agreement through legal proceedings, Employee agrees to reimburse the Company for all reasonable costs, expenses, and attorney’s fees incurred by it in connection with the enforcement of its rights.

J.                  Injunctive Relief :  Employee acknowledges that should Employee violate any of the provisions of this Agreement, the Company will suffer irreparable harm and not have adequate an adequate remedy at law. Accordingly, Employee agrees that the Company may seek injunctive relief to restrain any such violation, as well as equitable relief, in a court of competent jurisdiction.

K.                 Counterparts :  This Agreement may be signed in counterparts.

THE PARTIES HERETO ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THEY HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS. They further acknowledge that they have exercised due diligence in reviewing this Agreement, and that each has had adequate opportunity to consult with legal counsel or other advisors to the extent that each deemed such consultation necessary.

 

2014 Plan SAR (Band C and below)

Exhibit 10.35

 

LOGO

Performance Share Award Agreement

[Participant Name]

It is my pleasure to inform you that you are hereby granted a Performance Share Award, subject to the terms and conditions of this Award and the terms of the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”), approved by shareholders in 2014.

 

Date of Performance Share Award

Performance Period

Performance Shares Granted

Performance Goals

[Grant Date]

4/1/2014 through 3/31/2017

[Number of Shares granted]

Total Shareholder Return (TSR) Relative to Peer Group and Return on Tangible Common Equity (ROTCE)

 

 

Your performance share award will vest at the end of the 3 year Performance Period, so long as the applicable TSR goal is met and the adjusted Return on Tangible Common Equity (“ROTCE”) for Fifth Third Bancorp as determined by the Human Capital and Compensation Committee for each fiscal year end during the Performance Period meets or exceeds 2%. If the TSR goal is not met your entire award will forfeit. Likewise, if ROTCE for any of the three fiscal years ended during the Performance Period is less than 2%, then one-third of your award will forfeit and the remaining award may be forfeited at the discretion of the Board of Directors

The number of, if any, performance shares you may earn under this award will be based on the level of achievement of the TSR goals. Your final earned performance shares will be determined by multiplying your awarded performance shares by the payout percentage.

In order for this award to be prorated and continue to vest upon Retirement, you must be at least 60 years of age and have completed 10 or more years of service with the Company, and also meet the Retirement terms and conditions as defined in the Plan, at the time of your retirement.

Any bonus, commission, compensation, or awards granted to you under the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan is subject to recovery, or “clawback” by the Company in such amount and with respect to such time period as the Committee shall determine to be required by Company policy, applicable laws, rules, or regulations if the payments were based on materially inaccurate financial statements or any other materially inaccurate performance metric criteria, or as otherwise required by law. In addition, all executive compensation plans are automatically amended as necessary to comply with the requirements and/or limitations under any other laws, rules, regulations, or regulatory agreements up to and including a revocation of this award.

If you accept the terms of this performance share award, you will be deemed to have consented to all of the terms and conditions of this Award and of the Plan, except as modified hereby, including the terms of the Confidential Information and Non-Solicitation Agreement located on the following pages. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Award and the Plan, the terms of this Award shall control.

This Award will expire by its own terms unless accepted within 60 days.

 

 

 

For Fifth Third Bancorp:
LOGO

                [Grant Date]

 

Kevin T. Kabat
Vice Chairman & CEO

[Acceptance Date]

 

 

2014 Plan Non-Category 1 Band B PSA


TERMS OF PERFORMANCE SHARE AWARD

Performance Goals:  There are two performance goals associated with this award, with the goal of each to achieve a relatively high return for Fifth Third Bancorp. No performance shares will be earned unless Fifth Third Bancorp’s TSR is at least equal to the 33rd percentile of the TSR achieved by the Peer Group. In addition, a portion of this entire award may not be earned unless Fifth Third Bancorp’s ROTCE for each of the three fiscal years during the Performance Period meets or exceeds 2%.

TSR Measure:  The number of performance shares earned is dependent upon the relative total shareholder return (TSR) achieved by Fifth Third Bancorp stockholders during the Performance Period commencing April 1, 2014 and ending March 31, 2017. TSR will be determined by reference to change in market value of Fifth Third Bancorp stock, plus reinvested dividends, during the Performance Period. Fifth Third Bancorp TSR will be compared to the TSR of the Peer Group shown below. For the purpose of measuring TSR for Fifth Third Bancorp and the Peer Group, a 30-business day average closing price will be used to calculate market value of Fifth Third stock at the beginning and end of the Performance Period. Dividends will be reinvested at the market price on the day of the dividend.

The Compensation Peer Group is shown below:

 

BB&T Corporation    KeyCorp       SunTrust Banks, Inc.
Capital One Financial Corporation    M&T Bank Corporation       U. S. Bancorp
Comerica, Inc.    The PNC Financial Services Group, Inc.       Wells Fargo & Company
Huntington Bancshares, Inc.    Regions Financial Corporation       Zions Bancorporation

Performance Grid :

 

Relative Total Shareholder

Return

   Payout Percentage

Less than 33 rd Percentile

 

  

0%

 

33 rd Percentile

 

  

25%

 

40 th Percentile

 

  

40%

 

50 th Percentile

 

  

100%

 

60 th Percentile

 

  

120%

 

70 th Percentile

 

  

140%

 

Greater than or equal to 75 th Percentile

 

  

150% (Maximum)

 

Determination and Payment of Earned Performance Shares : Upon completion of the Performance Period, the Human Capital & Compensation Committee will determine the level of achievement of the Performance Goal. The earned award will be determined by multiplying the performance shares awarded by the payout percentage. Straight-line interpolation will be used to determine the percent of performance shares earned for achievement between performance levels shown above.

 

2014 Plan Non-Category 1 Band B PSA


CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND NON-SOLICITATION AGREEMENT

This Confidential Information and Non-Solicitation Agreement (“Agreement”) is made by and between Fifth Third Bancorp (which includes its subsidiaries and/or affiliated entities, hereinafter collectively referred to as “the Company”) and the undersigned Employee.

RECITALS

A.                 The Company is a diversified financial services company that operates four main businesses - Commercial Banking, Branch Banking, Consumer Lending, and Investment Advisors.

B.                 The Company has informed Employee that the execution of this Agreement, being in the best interests of the Company, is a condition of employment of the Employee or, in the case of an existing employee, to the continued employment of the Employee by the Company.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the Recitals and the mutual covenants contained herein, it is mutually agreed as follows:

AGREEMENT

 

SECTION 1. COVENANT NOT TO USE CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

A.                  As a necessary function of Employee’s employment with the Company, Employee will have access to, use, receive, and otherwise acquire various kinds of customer, business, and technical information relating to the Company’s business that is of a confidential nature to the Company, whether or not such information is specifically labeled as “confidential. Employee agrees that such confidential information includes, for example, the following:

Current, prospective and former customer names and information, including but not limited to contact, financial and account information; product information; compensation plans and arrangements, including incentive compensation plans; performance specifications; pricing, profit margin, and other financial information; product specifications; vendor information; Company training, reference and/or educational materials; Company forecasts/plans/pipelines; objectives and strategies; quality control and/or compliance standards; business referrals, suppliers, and customer lists; unpublished works of any nature whether or not copyrightable; business plans; Company research and/or development materials relating to the Company’s business; information contained in pending patent applications; inventions, technical improvements, and ideas; and all other information and knowledge in whatever form used or useful in management, marketing, purchasing, finance, or operations of the Company’s business and any compilation of such information and all other similar information used by the Company that is not available to those outside of the Company (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Confidential Information”)

B.                  Employee also understands that he or she will occupy a position of confidence and trust with respect to the Company’s Confidential Information during his or her employment. Employee acknowledges and agrees that such Confidential Information is not generally known outside of the Company, that the Company has taken measures to guard the secrecy of its Confidential Information, that such information is extremely valuable and an essential asset of the Company’s business, and that such information, if disclosed without authorization to a third party or used by Employee for purposes other than conducting the Company business would cause irreparable harm to the Company and/or its customers.

C.                  Employee further agrees that, during Employee’s employment with the Company and following his or her termination for whatever reason, Employee will not disclose or use, directly or indirectly, or authorize or permit anyone under his or her direction to disclose to anyone, any Confidential Information of the Company that he or she obtains during the course of his or her employment relating to or otherwise concerning the business of the Company, whether or not acquired, originated, or developed in whole or in part by Employee.

D.                  The obligations set forth herein shall not apply to any trade secrets or Confidential Information that has become generally known to competitors of the Company through no act or omission of Employee, nor shall the obligations set forth herein apply to disclosures made pursuant to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. However, Employee agrees that after termination of employment he or she will not compile pieces of information from several sources and assemble them together in any manner in an attempt to circumvent a violation of his or her confidentiality obligations to the Company or attempt to demonstrate thereby that any of the Confidential Information is in the public domain.

 

SECTION II. COVENANT PROHIBITING COMPETITION AND SOLICITATION OF CUSTOMERS

Confidential Information of the Company gained by Employee during employment is developed by the Company through substantial expenditures of time, effort, and financial resources, and constitutes valuable and unique property of the Company. Employee acknowledges, understands, and agrees that the foregoing makes it necessary for the protection of the Company’s business that Employee does not divert business of the Company’s customers from the Company and that he or she maintain the confidentiality and integrity of Confidential Information. Therefore, Employee agrees that during his or her employment and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not:

(a) Enter into an ownership, consulting or employment arrangement with, or render services for, any individual or entity rendering services or handling products competitive with the Company in any geographic region or territory in which I worked or for which I had responsibility during the twenty-four (24) month period preceding my departure from the Company;

(b) Directly or indirectly solicit, divert, entice or take away any customers, business or prospective business with whom he or she had contact, involvement or responsibility during his or her employment with the Company, or attempt to do so for the sale of any product or service that competes with a product or service offered by the Company;

(c) Directly or indirectly solicit, divert, entice or take away any potential customer identified, selected or targeted by the Company with whom he or she had contact, involvement or responsibility during his or her employment with the Company, or attempt to do so for the sale of any product or service that competes with a product or service offered by the Company; or

(c) Accept or provide assistance in the accepting of (including, but not limited to, providing any service, information or assistance or other facilitation or other involvement) business or orders from customers or any potential customers of the Company with whom he or she has had contact, involvement, or responsibility on behalf of any third party or otherwise for his or her own benefit.

 

2014 Plan Non-Category 1 Band B PSA


Nothing contained in this Section shall preclude Employee from accepting employment with or creating his or her own company, firm, or business that competes with the Company so long as his or her activities do not violate any of the terms of this Agreement.

 

SECTION III. COVENANT NOT TO SOLICIT EMPLOYEES

Employee agrees that during his or her employment with the Company and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not directly or indirectly solicit, induce, confer or discuss with any employee of the Company or attempt to solicit, induce, confer or discuss with any employee of the Company the prospect of leaving the employ of the Company or the subject of employment by some other person or organization. Employee further agrees that during his or her employment with the Company and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not directly or indirectly hire or attempt to hire any employee of the Company.

 

SECTION IV. EMPLOYEE WARRANTIES

Employee represents and warrants that his or her employment with the Company and the performance of this Agreement will not violate any express or implied obligation to any former employer or other party. Employee further represents that he or she has not brought with him or her and will not use or disclose during his or her employment with the Company any information, documents, or materials subject to any legally enforceable restrictions or obligations as to confidentiality or secrecy. Furthermore, Employee shall not make any agreements with or commitments to any person, firm, or corporation that would prevent, restrict, or hinder the performance of Employee’s duties and obligations under this Agreement. In addition, Employee agrees that he or she shall share a copy of this Agreement with any subsequent employer in order to ensure that there is no violation hereof, and Employee consents to the Company sharing a copy of this Agreement with any such employer.

 

SECTION V. OTHER PROVISIONS

A.                 Extension In The Event Of Breach :  Any breach by Employee of any of the restrictions contained in Sections II -IV of this Agreement shall extend the term of this Agreement by the period of the breach. The commitments made in this Agreement will survive termination of employment with the Company.

B.                 Governing Law :  This Agreement and all the rights, duties and remedies of the parties hereunder shall be governed by the laws of the state in which is located the office of the Company at which Employee is based. The Company shall have the right to specifically enforce the covenants contained in this Agreement, in addition to any other legal, equitable (including specifically, but not limited to temporary restraining orders or preliminary or permanent injunctive relief) or other remedies as may be available to the Company for my breach of any such covenants.

C.                 Severability :  If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable, such provision shall be deemed modified to the extent necessary and possible to render it valid and enforceable.

D.                 Waiver/Modification :  No waiver or modification of this Agreement will be valid unless in writing and duly executed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. Failure of the Company to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right of the Company thereafter to enforce each and every provision.

E.                 At-Will Nature Of Employment :  I understand that nothing in this Agreement requires me to continue employment with the Company for any particular length of time or requires that the Company continue to employ me for any particular length of time.

F.                 Successors/Assigns :  The terms and provisions of this Agreement shall be binding on and inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns of the Company (including but not limited to any corporate successor of The Company) and Employee’s heirs, executors and personal representatives. As part of this provision, Employee understands and agrees that should Employee become employed by another entity owned or otherwise affiliated with Fifth Third Bancorp (such as its subsidiaries, divisions or unincorporated affiliates), the obligations of this Agreement follow Employee to such other entity automatically and without further action, and that entity becomes the “Company” within the meaning of this Agreement.

G.                 Obligation To Comply With Other Laws:   The duties Employee owes the Company under this Agreement shall be deemed to include federal, state and common law obligations of employees to their employers. This Agreement is intended, amongst other things, to supplement the provisions of state trade secret law and duties Employee owes the Company under common law, including but not limited to the duty of loyalty, and does not in any way supersede any of the obligations or duties Employee otherwise owe the Company.

H.                 Obligation To Comply With Other Agreements :  This Agreement is in addition to and not in lieu of other non-solicitation, non-disclosure, and non-competition obligations Employee may owe to the Company.

I.                   Attorney’s Fees :  If the Company must enforce any of its rights under this Agreement through legal proceedings, Employee agrees to reimburse the Company for all reasonable costs, expenses, and attorney’s fees incurred by it in connection with the enforcement of its rights.

J.                  Injunctive Relief :  Employee acknowledges that should Employee violate any of the provisions of this Agreement, the Company will suffer irreparable harm and not have adequate an adequate remedy at law. Accordingly, Employee agrees that the Company may seek injunctive relief to restrain any such violation, as well as equitable relief, in a court of competent jurisdiction.

K.                 Counterparts :  This Agreement may be signed in counterparts.

THE PARTIES HERETO ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THEY HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS. They further acknowledge that they have exercised due diligence in reviewing this Agreement, and that each has had adequate opportunity to consult with legal counsel or other advisors to the extent that each deemed such consultation necessary.

 

2014 Plan Non-Category 1 Band B PSA

Exhibit 10.36

 

LOGO

Restricted Stock Unit Agreement

 

 

[Participant Name]

It is my pleasure to inform you that you are hereby granted an award of Restricted Stock Units subject to the terms and conditions of this Award and the terms of the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”), approved by shareholders in 2014:

 

Date of Restricted Stock Unit Award [Grant Date]
Total Number of Restricted Units Granted [Number of shares granted]

 

 

These restricted stock units will be distributed to you when your service as a non-employee Director of Fifth Third Bancorp ends.

If you accept the terms of this restricted stock unit award, you will be deemed to have consented to all of the terms and conditions of this restricted stock unit award and of the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Notice and the Plan, the terms of the Plan shall control.

Any bonus, commission, compensation, or awards granted to you under the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan is subject to recovery, or “clawback” by the Company in such amount and with respect to such time period as the Committee shall determine to be required by Company policy, applicable law, rules, or regulations if the payments were based on materially inaccurate financial statements or any other materially inaccurate performance metric criteria, or as otherwise required by law. In addition, all executive compensation plans are automatically amended as necessary to comply with the requirements and/or limitations under any other laws, rules, regulations, or regulatory agreements up to and including a revocation of this award.

This Award will expire by its own terms unless accepted within 60 days.

 

 

 

For Fifth Third Bancorp:
LOGO

                [Grant Date]

Kevin Kabat   Date
Vice Chairman & CEO

[Acceptance Date]

 

RSU Board of Director

Exhibit 10.37

 

LOGO

Restricted Stock Award Agreement

 

 

[Participant Name]

It is my pleasure to inform you that you are hereby granted a Restricted Stock Award subject to the terms and conditions of this Award and the terms of the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”), approved by shareholders in 2014:

 

Date of Restricted Stock Award [Grant Date]
Total Number of Restricted Shares Granted [Number of Shares Granted]

 

 

This restricted stock award will vest in three equal annual installments on the first, second, and third anniversaries of the grant date (Anniversary Date), so long as the adjusted return on tangible common equity (“ROTCE”) for Fifth Third Bancorp as determined by the Human Capital and Compensation Committee for the fiscal year ended immediately prior to such Anniversary Date meets or exceeds 2%. If the ROTCE for the fiscal year ended immediately prior to an Anniversary Date is less than 2%, then the annual installment of the award that otherwise was supposed to vest on that Anniversary Date, as well as any other unvested installments, may be forfeited at the discretion of the Board of Directors. In addition, if the ROTCE threshold is met, but your annual risk performance evaluation rating is a one, the Committee has the discretion on an individual basis to forfeit up to 100% of your unvested award.

In order for the grant to continue to vest upon Retirement, you must be at least 60 years of age and have completed 10 or more years of service with the Company, and also meet the Retirement terms and conditions as defined in the Plan, at the time of your retirement.

Any bonus, commission, compensation, or awards granted to you under the Fifth Third Bancorp 2014 Incentive Compensation Plan is subject to recovery, or “clawback” by the Company in such amount and with respect to such time period as the Committee shall determine to be required by Company policy, applicable law, rules, or regulations if the payments were based on materially inaccurate financial statements or any other materially inaccurate performance metric criteria, or as otherwise required by law. In addition, all executive compensation plans are automatically amended as necessary to comply with the requirements and/or limitations under any other laws, rules, regulations, or regulatory agreements up to and including a revocation of this award.

If you accept the terms of this Award, you will be deemed to have consented to all of the terms and conditions of this Award and of the Plan, except as modified hereby, including the terms of the Confidential Information and Non-Solicitation Agreement located on the following pages. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Notice and the Plan, the terms of this Award shall control.

This Award will expire by its own terms unless accepted within 60 days.

 

 

 

For Fifth Third Bancorp:
LOGO

        [Grant Date]

 

Kevin T. Kabat
Vice Chairman & CEO

[Acceptance Date]

 

2014 Plan Category 1 RSA


CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND NON-SOLICITATION AGREEMENT

This Confidential Information and Non-Solicitation Agreement (“Agreement”) is made by and between Fifth Third Bancorp (which includes its subsidiaries and/or affiliated entities, hereinafter collectively referred to as “the Company”) and the undersigned Employee.

RECITALS

A.                 The Company is a diversified financial services company that operates four main businesses - Commercial Banking, Branch Banking, Consumer Lending, and Investment Advisors.

B.                 The Company has informed Employee that the execution of this Agreement, being in the best interests of the Company, is a condition of employment of the Employee or, in the case of an existing employee, to the continued employment of the Employee by the Company.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the Recitals and the mutual covenants contained herein, it is mutually agreed as follows:

AGREEMENT

 

SECTION 1. COVENANT NOT TO USE CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

A.                  As a necessary function of Employee’s employment with the Company, Employee will have access to, use, receive, and otherwise acquire various kinds of customer, business, and technical information relating to the Company’s business that is of a confidential nature to the Company, whether or not such information is specifically labeled as “confidential. Employee agrees that such confidential information includes, for example, the following:

Current, prospective and former customer names and information, including but not limited to contact, financial and account information; product information; compensation plans and arrangements, including incentive compensation plans; performance specifications; pricing, profit margin, and other financial information; product specifications; vendor information; Company training, reference and/or educational materials; Company forecasts/plans/pipelines; objectives and strategies; quality control and/or compliance standards; business referrals, suppliers, and customer lists; unpublished works of any nature whether or not copyrightable; business plans; Company research and/or development materials relating to the Company’s business; information contained in pending patent applications; inventions, technical improvements, and ideas; and all other information and knowledge in whatever form used or useful in management, marketing, purchasing, finance, or operations of the Company’s business and any compilation of such information and all other similar information used by the Company that is not available to those outside of the Company (hereinafter collectively referred to as “Confidential Information”)

B.                  Employee also understands that he or she will occupy a position of confidence and trust with respect to the Company’s Confidential Information during his or her employment. Employee acknowledges and agrees that such Confidential Information is not generally known outside of the Company, that the Company has taken measures to guard the secrecy of its Confidential Information, that such information is extremely valuable and an essential asset of the Company’s business, and that such information, if disclosed without authorization to a third party or used by Employee for purposes other than conducting the Company business would cause irreparable harm to the Company and/or its customers.

C.                  Employee further agrees that, during Employee’s employment with the Company and following his or her termination for whatever reason, Employee will not disclose or use, directly or indirectly, or authorize or permit anyone under his or her direction to disclose to anyone, any Confidential Information of the Company that he or she obtains during the course of his or her employment relating to or otherwise concerning the business of the Company, whether or not acquired, originated, or developed in whole or in part by Employee.

D.                  The obligations set forth herein shall not apply to any trade secrets or Confidential Information that has become generally known to competitors of the Company through no act or omission of Employee, nor shall the obligations set forth herein apply to disclosures made pursuant to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. However, Employee agrees that after termination of employment he or she will not compile pieces of information from several sources and assemble them together in any manner in an attempt to circumvent a violation of his or her confidentiality obligations to the Company or attempt to demonstrate thereby that any of the Confidential Information is in the public domain.

 

SECTION II. COVENANT PROHIBITING COMPETITION AND SOLICITATION OF CUSTOMERS

Confidential Information of the Company gained by Employee during employment is developed by the Company through substantial expenditures of time, effort, and financial resources, and constitutes valuable and unique property of the Company. Employee acknowledges, understands, and agrees that the foregoing makes it necessary for the protection of the Company’s business that Employee does not divert business of the Company’s customers from the Company and that he or she maintain the confidentiality and integrity of Confidential Information. Therefore, Employee agrees that during his or her employment and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not:

(a) Enter into an ownership, consulting or employment arrangement with, or render services for, any individual or entity rendering services or handling products competitive with the Company in any geographic region or territory in which I worked or for which I had responsibility during the twenty-four (24) month period preceding my departure from the Company;

(b) Directly or indirectly solicit, divert, entice or take away any customers, business or prospective business with whom he or she had contact, involvement or responsibility during his or her employment with the Company, or attempt to do so for the sale of any product or service that competes with a product or service offered by the Company;

(c) Directly or indirectly solicit, divert, entice or take away any potential customer identified, selected or targeted by the Company with whom he or she had contact, involvement or responsibility during his or her employment with the Company, or attempt to do so for the sale of any product or service that competes with a product or service offered by the Company; or

(c) Accept or provide assistance in the accepting of (including, but not limited to, providing any service, information or assistance or other facilitation or other involvement) business or orders from customers or any potential customers of the Company with whom he or she has had contact, involvement, or responsibility on behalf of any third party or otherwise for his or her own benefit.

 

2014 Plan Category 1 RSA


Nothing contained in this Section shall preclude Employee from accepting employment with or creating his or her own company, firm, or business that competes with the Company so long as his or her activities do not violate any of the terms of this Agreement.

SECTION III. COVENANT NOT TO SOLICIT EMPLOYEES

Employee agrees that during his or her employment with the Company and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not directly or indirectly solicit, induce, confer or discuss with any employee of the Company or attempt to solicit, induce, confer or discuss with any employee of the Company the prospect of leaving the employ of the Company or the subject of employment by some other person or organization. Employee further agrees that during his or her employment with the Company and for a period of one (1) year thereafter he or she will not directly or indirectly hire or attempt to hire any employee of the Company.

 

SECTION IV. EMPLOYEE WARRANTIES

Employee represents and warrants that his or her employment with the Company and the performance of this Agreement will not violate any express or implied obligation to any former employer or other party. Employee further represents that he or she has not brought with him or her and will not use or disclose during his or her employment with the Company any information, documents, or materials subject to any legally enforceable restrictions or obligations as to confidentiality or secrecy. Furthermore, Employee shall not make any agreements with or commitments to any person, firm, or corporation that would prevent, restrict, or hinder the performance of Employee’s duties and obligations under this Agreement. In addition, Employee agrees that he or she shall share a copy of this Agreement with any subsequent employer in order to ensure that there is no violation hereof, and Employee consents to the Company sharing a copy of this Agreement with any such employer.

 

SECTION V. OTHER PROVISIONS

A.                 Extension In The Event Of Breach :  Any breach by Employee of any of the restrictions contained in Sections II -IV of this Agreement shall extend the term of this Agreement by the period of the breach. The commitments made in this Agreement will survive termination of employment with the Company.

B.                 Governing Law :  This Agreement and all the rights, duties and remedies of the parties hereunder shall be governed by the laws of the state in which is located the office of the Company at which Employee is based. The Company shall have the right to specifically enforce the covenants contained in this Agreement, in addition to any other legal, equitable (including specifically, but not limited to temporary restraining orders or preliminary or permanent injunctive relief) or other remedies as may be available to the Company for my breach of any such covenants.

C.                 Severability :  If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable, such provision shall be deemed modified to the extent necessary and possible to render it valid and enforceable.

D.                 Waiver/Modification :  No waiver or modification of this Agreement will be valid unless in writing and duly executed by the party against whom enforcement is sought. Failure of the Company to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right of the Company thereafter to enforce each and every provision.

E.                 At-Will Nature Of Employment :  I understand that nothing in this Agreement requires me to continue employment with the Company for any particular length of time or requires that the Company continue to employ me for any particular length of time.

F.                 Successors/Assigns :  The terms and provisions of this Agreement shall be binding on and inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns of the Company (including but not limited to any corporate successor of The Company) and Employee’s heirs, executors and personal representatives. As part of this provision, Employee understands and agrees that should Employee become employed by another entity owned or otherwise affiliated with Fifth Third Bancorp (such as its subsidiaries, divisions or unincorporated affiliates), the obligations of this Agreement follow Employee to such other entity automatically and without further action, and that entity becomes the “Company” within the meaning of this Agreement.

G.                 Obligation To Comply With Other Laws:   The duties Employee owes the Company under this Agreement shall be deemed to include federal, state and common law obligations of employees to their employers. This Agreement is intended, amongst other things, to supplement the provisions of state trade secret law and duties Employee owes the Company under common law, including but not limited to the duty of loyalty, and does not in any way supersede any of the obligations or duties Employee otherwise owe the Company.

H.                 Obligation To Comply With Other Agreements :  This Agreement is in addition to and not in lieu of other non-solicitation, non-disclosure, and non-competition obligations Employee may owe to the Company.

I.                   Attorney’s Fees :  If the Company must enforce any of its rights under this Agreement through legal proceedings, Employee agrees to reimburse the Company for all reasonable costs, expenses, and attorney’s fees incurred by it in connection with the enforcement of its rights.

J.                  Injunctive Relief :  Employee acknowledges that should Employee violate any of the provisions of this Agreement, the Company will suffer irreparable harm and not have adequate an adequate remedy at law. Accordingly, Employee agrees that the Company may seek injunctive relief to restrain any such violation, as well as equitable relief, in a court of competent jurisdiction.

K.                 Counterparts :  This Agreement may be signed in counterparts.

THE PARTIES HERETO ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THEY HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS. They further acknowledge that they have exercised due diligence in reviewing this Agreement, and that each has had adequate opportunity to consult with legal counsel or other advisors to the extent that each deemed such consultation necessary.

 

2014 Plan Category 1 RSA

Exhibit 10.38

A MARK OF [**] IN THE TEXT OF THIS EXHIBIT INDICATES THAT CONFIDENTIAL MATERIAL HAS BEEN OMITTED. THIS EXHIBIT, INCLUDING THE OMITTED PORTIONS, HAS BEEN FILED SEPERATELY WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO AN APPLICATION REQUESTING CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT UNDER RULE 24B-2 OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934, AS AMENDED.

 

  

LOGO

 

Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch

Winchester house

1 Great Winchester St, London EC2N 2DB

Telephone: 44 20 7545 8000

 

c/o Deutsche Bank Securities Inc.

60 Wall Street

New York, NY 10005

Telephone: 212-250-2500

Opening Transaction

 

To:   

Fifth Third Bancorp

Fifth Third Center

Cincinnati, Ohio 45263

From:    Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch
Re:    Accelerated Stock Buyback
Ref. No:    As provided in the Supplemental Confirmation
Date:    May 21, 2013

This master confirmation (this “ Master Confirmation ”), dated as of May 21, 2013 is intended to set forth certain terms and provisions of certain Transactions (each, a “ Transaction ”) entered into from time to time between Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch (“ Deutsche ”), with Deutsche Bank Securities Inc. acting as agent, and Fifth Third Bancorp (“ Counterparty ”). This Master Confirmation, taken alone, is neither a commitment by either party to enter into any Transaction nor evidence of a Transaction. The additional terms of any particular Transaction shall be set forth in a Supplemental Confirmation in the form of Schedule A hereto (a “ Supplemental Confirmation ”), which shall reference this Master Confirmation and supplement, form a part of, and be subject to this Master Confirmation. This Master Confirmation and each Supplemental Confirmation together shall constitute a “Confirmation” as referred to in the Agreement specified below.

DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH IS NOT REGISTERED AS A BROKER DEALER UNDER THE U.S. SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934. DEUTSCHE BANK SECURITIES INC. (“DBSI”) HAS ACTED SOLELY AS AGENT IN CONNECTION WITH THE TRANSACTION AND HAS NO OBLIGATION, BY WAY OF ISSUANCE, ENDORSEMENT, GUARANTEE OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE PERFORMANCE OF EITHER PARTY UNDER THE TRANSACTION, EXCEPT FOR ITS GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT IN PERFORMING ITS DUTIES AS AGENT. AS SUCH, ALL DELIVERY OF FUNDS, ASSETS, NOTICES, DEMANDS AND COMMUNICATIONS OF ANY KIND RELATING TO THIS TRANSACTION BETWEEN DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH, AND COUNTERPARTY SHALL BE TRANSMITTED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH DEUTSCHE BANK SECURITIES INC. DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH IS NOT A MEMBER OF THE SECURITIES INVESTOR PROTECTION CORPORATION (SIPC).

The definitions and provisions contained in the 2002 ISDA Equity Derivatives Definitions (the “ Equity Definitions ”), as published by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association, Inc., are incorporated into this Master Confirmation. This Master Confirmation and each Supplemental Confirmation evidence a complete binding agreement between Counterparty and Deutsche as to the subject matter and terms of each Transaction to which this Master Confirmation and such Supplemental Confirmation relate and shall supersede all prior or contemporaneous written or oral communications with respect thereto.

Chairman of the Supervisory Board: Dr. Paul Achleitner.

 

Management Board: Jürgen Fitschen (Co-Chairman),

Anshu Jain (Co-Chairman), Stefan Krause, Stephan

Leithner, Stuart Lewis, Rainer Neske and Henry Ritchotte.

   Deutsche Bank AG is authorised under German Banking Law (competent authority: BaFin – Federal Financial Supervising Authority) and regulated by the Financial Services Authority for the conduct of UK business; a member of the London Stock Exchange. Deutsche Bank AG is a joint stock corporation with limited liability incorporated in the Federal Republic of Germany HRB No. 30 000 District Court of Frankfurt am Main; Branch Registration in England and Wales BR000005; Registered address: Winchester House, 1 Great Winchester Street, London EC2N 2DB. Deutsche Bank Group online: http://www.deutsche-bank.com


This Master Confirmation and each Supplemental Confirmation supplement, form a part of, and are subject to an agreement in the form of the 2002 ISDA Master Agreement (the “ Agreement ”) as if Deutsche and Counterparty had executed the Agreement on the date of this Master Confirmation (but without any Schedule except for (i) the election of New York law (without reference to its choice of laws doctrine other than Title 14 of Article 5 of the New York General Obligations Law) as the governing law and US Dollars (“ USD ”) as the Termination Currency, (ii) the election that subparagraph (ii) of Section 2(c) will not apply to the Transactions and (iii) the election that the “Cross Default” provisions of Section 5(a)(vi) shall apply to Counterparty and Deutsche, with a “Threshold Amount” equal to 3% of such party’s shareholders’ equity as reported in their respective most recent audited financial statements; provided that the words “, or becoming capable at such time of being declared,” shall be deleted from such Section 5(a)(vi)).

The Transactions shall be the sole Transactions under the Agreement. If there exists any ISDA Master Agreement between Deutsche and Counterparty or any confirmation or other agreement between Deutsche and Counterparty pursuant to which an ISDA Master Agreement is deemed to exist between Deutsche and Counterparty, then notwithstanding anything to the contrary in such ISDA Master Agreement, such confirmation or agreement or any other agreement to which Deutsche and Counterparty are parties, the Transactions shall not be considered Transactions under, or otherwise governed by, such existing or deemed ISDA Master Agreement.

All provisions contained or incorporated by reference in the Agreement shall govern this Master Confirmation and each Supplemental Confirmation except as expressly modified herein or in the related Supplemental Confirmation.

If, in relation to any Transaction to which this Master Confirmation and a Supplemental Confirmation relate, there is any inconsistency between the Agreement, this Master Confirmation, any Supplemental Confirmation and the Equity Definitions, the following will prevail for purposes of such Transaction in the order of precedence indicated: (i) such Supplemental Confirmation; (ii) this Master Confirmation; (iii) the Equity Definitions; and (iv) the Agreement.

1.            Each Transaction constitutes a Share Forward Transaction for the purposes of the Equity Definitions. Set forth below are the terms and conditions that, together with the terms and conditions set forth in the Supplemental Confirmation relating to any Transaction, shall govern such Transaction.

 

General Terms:
Trade Date: For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation.
Buyer: Counterparty
Seller: Deutsche
Shares: Common stock, without par value, of Counterparty (Ticker: FITB)
Exchange: NASDAQ Global Select Market
Related Exchange(s): All Exchanges.
Prepayment\Variable Obligation: Applicable
Prepayment Amount: For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation.
Prepayment Date: For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation.
Valuation:
VWAP Price: For any Exchange Business Day, as determined by the Calculation Agent based on the NASDAQ 10b-18 Volume Weighted Average Price per Share for the regular trading session (including any extensions thereof, provided the Exchange publicly announced such extension prior to the end of the regular

 

2


trading session on the prior Exchange Business Day) of the Exchange on such Exchange Business Day (without regard to pre-open or after hours trading outside of such regular trading session for such Exchange Business Day), as published by Bloomberg at 4:15 p.m. New York time (or 15 minutes following the end of any extension of the regular trading session) on such Exchange Business Day, on Bloomberg page “FITB.Q <Equity> AQR_SEC” (or any successor thereto), or if such price is not so reported on such Exchange Business Day for any reason or is, in the Calculation Agent’s reasonable discretion, erroneous, such VWAP Price shall be as reasonably determined in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner by the Calculation Agent. For purposes of calculating the VWAP Price, the Calculation Agent will include only those trades that are reported during the period of time during which Counterparty could purchase its own shares under Rule 10b-18(b)(2) and are effected pursuant to the conditions of Rule 10b-18(b)(3), each under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act ”) (such trades, “ Rule 10b-18 eligible transactions ”).
Forward Price: The average of the VWAP Prices for the Exchange Business Days in the Calculation Period, subject to “Valuation Disruption” below.
Forward Price Adjustment Amount: For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation.
Calculation Period: The period from and including the Calculation Period Start Date to and including the Termination Date.
Calculation Period Start Date: For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation.
Termination Date: The Scheduled Termination Date; provided that Deutsche shall have the right to designate any Exchange Business Day on or after the First Acceleration Date to be the Termination Date (the “ Accelerated Termination Date ”) by delivering notice to Counterparty of any such designation prior to 11:59 p.m. New York City time on the Exchange Business Day immediately following the designated Accelerated Termination Date.
Scheduled Termination Date: For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation, subject to postponement as provided in “Valuation Disruption” below.
First Acceleration Date: For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation.
Valuation Disruption:

The definition of “Market Disruption Event” in Section 6.3(a) of the Equity Definitions is hereby amended by deleting the words “at any time during the one-hour period that ends at the relevant Valuation Time, Latest Exercise Time, Knock-in Valuation Time or Knock-out Valuation Time, as the case may be” and inserting the words “at any time on any Scheduled Trading Day during the Calculation Period or Settlement Valuation Period” after the word “material,” in the third line thereof.

 

Section 6.3(d) of the Equity Definitions is hereby amended by deleting the remainder of the provision following the term “Scheduled Closing Time” in the fourth line thereof.

 

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Equity Definitions, to the extent that a Disrupted Day occurs (i) in the Calculation Period, the Calculation Agent may, in its good faith and commercially reasonable discretion, postpone the Scheduled Termination Date, or (ii) in the Settlement Valuation Period, the Calculation Agent may, in its good faith and commercially reasonable discretion, extend the Settlement Valuation Period, in both cases by no more than one Exchange Business Day for each such Disrupted Day. If any such Disrupted Day is a Disrupted Day because of a Market Disruption Event (or a deemed Market Disruption Event as provided herein), the Calculation Agent shall determine whether (i) such Disrupted Day is a Disrupted Day in full, in

 

3


which case the VWAP Price for such Disrupted Day shall not be included for purposes of determining the Forward Price or the Settlement Price, as the case may be, or (ii) such Disrupted Day is a Disrupted Day only in part, in which case the VWAP Price for such Disrupted Day shall be determined by the Calculation Agent based on Rule 10b-18 eligible transactions in the Shares on such Disrupted Day taking into account the nature and duration of the relevant Market Disruption Event, and the weighting of the VWAP Price for the relevant Exchange Business Days during the Calculation Period or the Settlement Valuation Period, as the case may be, shall be adjusted in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner by the Calculation Agent for purposes of determining the Forward Price or the Settlement Price, as the case may be, with such adjustments based on, among other factors, the duration of any Market Disruption Event and the volume, historical trading patterns and price of the Shares. Any Exchange Business Day on which, as of the date hereof, the Exchange is scheduled to close prior to its normal close of trading shall be deemed not to be an Exchange Business Day; if a closure of the Exchange prior to its normal close of trading on any Exchange Business Day is scheduled following the date hereof, then such Exchange Business Day shall be deemed to be a Disrupted Day in full.

 

If a Disrupted Day occurs during the Calculation Period or the Settlement Valuation Period, as the case may be, and each of the nine immediately following Scheduled Trading Days is a Disrupted Day, then the Calculation Agent, in its good faith and commercially reasonable discretion, may deem such ninth Scheduled Trading Day to be an Exchange Business Day that is not a Disrupted Day and determine the VWAP Price for such ninth Scheduled Trading Day using its good faith estimate of the value of the Shares on such ninth Scheduled Trading Day based on the volume, historical trading patterns and price of the Shares and such other factors as it deems appropriate.

Settlement Terms:
Settlement Procedures: If the Number of Shares to be Delivered is positive, Physical Settlement shall be applicable; provided that Deutsche does not, and shall not, make the agreement or the representations set forth in Section 9.11 of the Equity Definitions related to the restrictions imposed by applicable securities laws with respect to any Shares delivered by Deutsche to Counterparty under any Transaction as a result of the fact that Counterparty is the Issuer of the Shares. If the Number of Shares to be Delivered is negative, then the Counterparty Settlement Provisions in Annex A shall apply.
Number of Shares to be Delivered: A number of Shares equal to (x)(a) the Prepayment Amount divided by (b) the Divisor Amount, minus (y) the number of Initial Shares.
Divisor Amount: The greater of (i) the Forward Price minus the Forward Price Adjustment Amount and (ii) $1.00.
Excess Dividend Amount: For the avoidance of doubt, all references to the Excess Dividend Amount shall be deleted from Section 9.2(a)(iii) of the Equity Definitions.
Settlement Date: If the Number of Shares to be Delivered is positive, the date that is one Settlement Cycle immediately following the Termination Date.
Settlement Currency: USD
Initial Share Delivery: Deutsche shall deliver a number of Shares equal to the Initial Shares to Counterparty on the Initial Share Delivery Date in accordance with Section 9.4 of the Equity Definitions, with the Initial Share Delivery Date deemed to be a “Settlement Date” for purposes of such Section 9.4.
Initial Share Delivery Date: For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation.

 

4


 

Initial Shares:

For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation; provided that Deutsche does not, and shall not, make the agreement or the representations set forth in Section 9.11 of the Equity Definitions related to the restrictions imposed by applicable securities laws with respect to any Shares delivered by Deutsche to Counterparty under any Transaction as a result of the fact that Counterparty is the Issuer of the Shares.

Share Adjustments:
Potential Adjustment Event:

 

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Section 11.2(e) of the Equity Definitions, an Extraordinary Dividend shall not constitute a Potential Adjustment Event.

 

It shall constitute an additional Potential Adjustment Event if the Scheduled Termination Date for any Transaction is postponed pursuant to “Valuation Disruption” above, in which case the Calculation Agent may, in good faith and in its commercially reasonable discretion, adjust any relevant terms of any such Transaction as appropriate to account for the economic effect on such Transaction of such postponement.

Extraordinary Dividend:

 

For any calendar quarter, any dividend or distribution on the Shares with an ex- dividend date occurring during such calendar quarter (other than any dividend or distribution of the type described in Section 11.2(e)(i) or Section 11.2(e)(ii)(A) of the Equity Definitions) (a “ Dividend ”) the amount or value of which (as determined by the Calculation Agent), when aggregated with the amount or value (as determined by the Calculation Agent) of any and all previous Dividends with ex-dividend dates occurring in the same calendar quarter, exceeds the Ordinary Dividend Amount.

Ordinary Dividend Amount:

For each Transaction, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation

Method of Adjustment:

 

Calculation Agent Adjustment

Extraordinary Events:
Consequences of Merger Events:

(a)    Share-for- Share:

Modified Calculation Agent Adjustment

(b)    Share-for- Other:

Cancellation and Payment

(c)    Share-for- Combined:

Component Adjustment

Tender Offer: Applicable; provided that (i) Section 12.1(l) of the Equity Definitions shall be amended (x) by deleting the parenthetical in the fifth line thereof, (y) by replacing “that” in the fifth line thereof with “whether or not such announcement” and (z) by adding immediately after the words “Tender Offer” in the fifth line thereof “, and any publicly announced change or amendment to such an announcement (including the announcement of an abandonment of such intention)” and (ii) Sections 12.3(a) and 12.3(d) of the Equity Definitions shall each be amended by replacing each occurrence of the words “Tender Offer Date” by “Announcement Date.”
Consequences of Tender Offers:

(a)    Share-for-Share:

Modified Calculation Agent Adjustment or Cancellation and Payment, at the election of Deutsche

 

5


     (b)    Share-for-Other: Modified Calculation Agent Adjustment or Cancellation and Payment, at the election of Deutsche
  (c)    Share-for-Combined: Modified Calculation Agent Adjustment or Cancellation and Payment, at the election of Deutsche

Nationalization, Insolvency or Delisting:

Cancellation and Payment; provided that in addition to the provisions of Section 12.6(a)(iii) of the Equity Definitions, it shall also constitute a Delisting if the Exchange is located in the United States and the Shares are not immediately re-listed, re-traded or re-quoted on any of the New York Stock Exchange, The NASDAQ Global Select Market or The NASDAQ Global Market (or their respective successors); if the Shares are immediately re-listed, re-traded or re-quoted on any such exchange or quotation system, such exchange or quotation system shall be deemed to be the Exchange.

Additional Disruption Events:

        (a)     Change in Law: Applicable; provided that Section 12.9(a)(ii) of the Equity Definitions is hereby amended by (i) replacing the phrase “the interpretation” in the third line thereof with the phrase “, or public announcement of the interpretation”, (ii) by replacing the word “Shares” where it appears in clause (X) thereof with the words “Hedge Position” and (iii) by immediately following the word “Transaction” in clause (X) thereof, adding the phrase “in the manner contemplated by the Hedging Party on the Trade Date”; provided further that (i) any determination as to whether (A) the adoption of or any change in any applicable law or regulation (including, for the avoidance of doubt and without limitation, (x) any tax law or (y) adoption or promulgation of new regulations authorized or mandated by existing statute) or (B) the promulgation of or any change in the interpretation by any court, tribunal or regulatory authority with competent jurisdiction of any applicable law or regulation (including any action taken by a taxing authority), in each case, constitutes a “Change in Law” shall be made without regard to Section 739 of the Dodd- Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 or any similar legal certainty provision in any legislation enacted, or rule or regulation promulgated, on or after the Trade Date, and (ii) Section 12.9(a)(ii) of the Equity Definitions is hereby amended by replacing the parenthetical beginning after the word “regulation” in the second line thereof the words “(including, for the avoidance of doubt and without limitation, (x) any tax law or (y) adoption or promulgation of new regulations authorized or mandated by existing statute)”.
        (b) Failure to Deliver: Applicable
        (c) Insolvency Filing: Applicable
        (d) Loss of Stock Borrow: Applicable

Maximum Stock Loan Rate:

200 basis points per annum

Hedging Party:

Deutsche
        (e)

 Increased Cost of Stock Borrow:

Applicable

Initial Stock Loan Rate:

25 basis points per annum

 

6


   Hedging Party:

Deutsche

   Determining Party:

Deutsche; provided that, following the occurrence of an Event of Default pursuant to Section 5(a)(vii) of the Agreement with respect to which Deutsche is the Defaulting Party, Counterparty shall have the right to designate a nationally recognized third-party dealer in over-the-counter corporate equity derivatives to act, during the period commencing on the date such Event of Default occurred and ending on the Early Termination Date with respect to such Event of Default, as the Determining Party. Upon receipt of written request from Counterparty, the Determining Party shall promptly (but in no event later than within five (5) Exchange Business Days from the receipt of such request) provide Counterparty with a written explanation describing in reasonable detail any calculation, adjustment or determination made by it (including any quotations, market data or information from external sources used in making such calculation, adjustment or determination, as the case may be, but without disclosing Deutsche’s proprietary models or other information that may be proprietary or subject to contractual, legal or regulatory obligations to not disclose such information). All calculations and determinations by the Determining Party shall be made in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner.
Additional Termination Event(s):

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Equity Definitions, if, as a result of an Extraordinary Event, any Transaction would be cancelled or terminated (whether in whole or in part) pursuant to Article 12 of the Equity Definitions, an Additional Termination Event (with such terminated Transaction(s) (or portions thereof) being the Affected Transaction(s) and Counterparty being the sole Affected Party) shall be deemed to occur, and, in lieu of Sections 12.7, 12.8 and 12.9 of the Equity Definitions, Section 6 of the Agreement shall apply to such Affected Transaction(s).

 

The (i) declaration by the Issuer of any Extraordinary Dividend, the ex-dividend date for which occurs or is scheduled to occur during the Relevant Dividend Period, or (ii) occurrence of an ex-dividend date for any Dividend that is not an Extraordinary Dividend during any calendar quarter occurring (in whole or in part) during the Relevant Dividend Period (as defined below) and is prior to the Scheduled Ex-Dividend Date for such calendar quarter will constitute an Additional Termination Event, with Counterparty as the sole Affected Party and all Transactions hereunder as the Affected Transactions.

Relevant Dividend Period: The period from and including the Calculation Period Start Date to and including the Relevant Dividend Period End Date.
Relevant Dividend Period End Date:   If the Number of Shares to be Delivered is negative, the last day of the Settlement Valuation Period; otherwise, the Termination Date.
Scheduled Ex-Dividend Dates: For each Transaction for each calendar quarter, as set forth in the related Supplemental Confirmation.

 

Non-Reliance/Agreements and Acknowledgements Regarding Hedging Activities/Additional Acknowledgements: Applicable
Transfer: Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Agreement, Deutsche may assign, transfer and set over all rights, title and interest, powers, privileges and remedies of Deutsche under any Transaction, in whole or in part, to an affiliate of Deutsche whose obligations are guaranteed by Deutsche, without the consent of Counterparty.

 

7


Deutsche Payment Instructions: To be advised under separate cover
Counterparty’s Contact Details for Purpose of Giving Notice: To be provided by Counterparty
Deutsche’s Contact Details for Purpose of Giving Notice:

Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch

c/o Deutsche Bank Securities Inc.

60 Wall Street

New York, NY 10005

Attention: Paul Stowell
Andrew Yaeger
Lars Kestner
Telephone:         212-250-2717
212-250-4580
212-250-6043
Email: paul.stowell@db.com
andrew.yaeger@db.com
lars.kestner@db.com
Role of DBSI: DBSI in its capacity as Agent will be responsible for (A) effecting any Transaction, (B) issuing all required confirmations and statements to Deutsche and Counterparty, (C) maintaining books and records relating to any Transaction in accordance with its standard practices and procedures and in accordance with applicable law and (D) unless otherwise requested by Counterparty, receiving, delivering, and safeguarding Counterparty’s funds and any securities in connection with any Transaction, in accordance with its standard practices and procedures and in accordance with applicable law.
The date and time of any Transaction evidenced by this Master Confirmation and the related Supplemental Confirmation will be furnished by the Agent to Deutsche and Counterparty upon written request.
The Agent will furnish to Counterparty upon written request a statement as to the source and amount of any remuneration received or to be received by the Agent in connection with any Transaction evidenced by this Master Confirmation and the related Supplemental Confirmation.

 

2. Calculation Agent . Deutsche; provided that, following the occurrence of an Event of Default pursuant to Section 5(a)(vii) of the Agreement with respect to which Deutsche is the Defaulting Party, Counterparty shall have the right to designate a nationally recognized third-party dealer in over-the-counter corporate equity derivatives to act, during the period commencing on the date such Event of Default occurred and ending on the Early Termination Date with respect to such Event of Default, as the Calculation Agent. Upon receipt of written request from Counterparty, the Calculation Agent shall promptly (but in no event later than within five (5) Exchange Business Days from the receipt of such request) provide Counterparty with a written explanation describing in reasonable detail any calculation, adjustment or determination made by it (including any quotations, market data or information from external sources used in making such calculation, adjustment or determination, as the case may be, but without disclosing Deutsche’s proprietary models or other information that may be proprietary or subject to contractual, legal or regulatory obligations to not disclose such information). All calculations and determinations by the Calculation Agent shall be made in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner.

 

8


3. Additional Mutual Representations, Warranties and Covenants of Each Party . In addition to the representations, warranties and covenants in the Agreement, each party represents, warrants and covenants to the other party that:

(a) Eligible Contract Participant . It is an “eligible contract participant”, as defined in the U.S. Commodity Exchange Act (as amended), and is entering into each Transaction hereunder as principal (and not as agent or in any other capacity, fiduciary or otherwise) and not for the benefit of any third party.

(b) Accredited Investor . Each party acknowledges that the offer and sale of each Transaction to it is intended to be exempt from registration under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “ Securities Act ”), by virtue of Section 4(2) thereof. Accordingly, each party represents and warrants to the other that (i) it has the financial ability to bear the economic risk of its investment in each Transaction and is able to bear a total loss of its investment, (ii) it is an “accredited investor” as that term is defined under Regulation D under the Securities Act and (iii) the disposition of each Transaction is restricted under this Master Confirmation, the Securities Act and state securities laws.

4. Additional Representations, Warranties and Covenants of Counterparty . In addition to the representations, warranties and covenants in the Agreement, Counterparty represents, warrants and covenants to Deutsche that:

(a) The purchase or writing of each Transaction and the transactions contemplated hereby will not violate Rule 13e-1 or Rule 13e-4 under the Exchange Act.

(b) It is not entering into any Transaction (i) on the basis of, and is not aware of, any material non-public information with respect to the Shares, (ii) in anticipation of, in connection with, or to facilitate, a distribution of its securities, a self tender offer or a third-party tender offer or (iii) to create actual or apparent trading activity in the Shares (or any security convertible into or exchangeable for the Shares) or to raise or depress or otherwise manipulate the price of the Shares (or any security convertible into or exchangeable for the Shares).

(c) Each Transaction is being entered into pursuant to a publicly disclosed Share buy-back program and its Board of Directors has approved the use of derivatives to effect the Share buy-back program.

(d) Without limiting the generality of Section 13.1 of the Equity Definitions, Counterparty acknowledges that neither Deutsche nor any of its affiliates is making any representations or warranties or taking any position or expressing any view with respect to the treatment of any Transaction under any accounting standards including ASC Topic 260, Earnings Per Share, ASC Topic 815, Derivatives and Hedging, or ASC Topic 480, Distinguishing Liabilities from Equity and ASC 815-40, Derivatives and Hedging – Contracts in Entity’s Own Equity.

(e) As of (i) the date hereof and (ii) the Trade Date for each Transaction hereunder, Counterparty is in compliance with its reporting obligations under the Exchange Act and its most recent Annual Report on Form 10-K, together with all reports subsequently filed by it pursuant to the Exchange Act, taken together and as amended and supplemented to the date of this representation, do not, as of their respective filing dates, contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state any material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading.

(f) Counterparty shall report each Transaction as required under the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations thereunder.

(g) The Shares are not, and Counterparty will not cause the Shares to be, subject to a “restricted period” (as defined in Regulation M promulgated under the Exchange Act) at any time during any Regulation M Period (as defined below) for any Transaction unless Counterparty has provided written notice to Deutsche of such restricted period not later than the Scheduled Trading Day immediately preceding the first day of such “restricted period”; Counterparty acknowledges that any such notice may cause a Disrupted Day to occur pursuant to Section 5 below; accordingly, Counterparty acknowledges that its delivery of such notice must comply with the standards set forth in Section 6 below; “ Regulation M Period ” means, for any Transaction, (i) the Relevant Period (as defined below) and (ii) the Settlement Valuation Period, if any, for such Transaction. “ Relevant Period ” means, for any Transaction, the period commencing on the Calculation Period Start Date for such Transaction and ending on the earlier of (i) the Scheduled Termination Date and (ii) the last Additional Relevant Day (as specified in the related Supplemental Confirmation) for such Transaction, or such earlier day as elected by Deutsche and communicated to Counterparty on such day (or, if later, the First Acceleration Date without regard to any acceleration thereof pursuant to “Special Provisions for Acquisition Transaction Announcements” below).

(h) As of the Trade Date, the Prepayment Date, the Initial Share Delivery Date and the Settlement Date for each Transaction, Counterparty is not “insolvent” (as such term is defined under Section 101(32) of the U.S.

 

9


Bankruptcy Code (Title 11 of the United States Code) (the “ Bankruptcy Code ”)) and Counterparty would be able to purchase a number of Shares with a value equal to the Prepayment Amount in compliance with the laws of the jurisdiction of Counterparty’s incorporation.

(i) Counterparty is not and, after giving effect to any Transaction, will not be, required to register as an “investment company” as such term is defined in the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.

(j) Counterparty has not and will not enter into agreements similar to the Transactions described herein where any initial hedge period, calculation period, relevant period or settlement valuation period (each however defined) in such other transaction will overlap at any time (including as a result of extensions in such initial hedge period, calculation period, relevant period or settlement valuation period as provided in the relevant agreements) with any Relevant Period or, if applicable, any Settlement Valuation Period under this Master Confirmation. In the event that the initial hedge period, relevant period, calculation period or settlement valuation period in any other similar transaction overlaps with any Relevant Period or, if applicable, Settlement Valuation Period under this Master Confirmation as a result of any postponement of the Scheduled Termination Date or extension of the Settlement Valuation Period pursuant to “Valuation Disruption” above, Counterparty shall promptly amend such transaction to avoid any such overlap.

5. Regulatory Disruption . In the event that Deutsche concludes, in good faith and based on the advice of counsel, that it is appropriate with respect to any legal, regulatory or self-regulatory requirements or related policies and procedures generally applicable to the relevant line of business (whether or not such requirements, policies or procedures are imposed by law or have been voluntarily adopted by Deutsche), for it to refrain from or decrease any market activity on any Scheduled Trading Day or Days during the Calculation Period or, if applicable, the Settlement Valuation Period, Deutsche may by written notice to Counterparty elect to deem that a Market Disruption Event has occurred and will be continuing on such Scheduled Trading Day or Days.

6. 10b5-1 Plan . Counterparty represents, warrants and covenants to Deutsche that:

(a) Counterparty is entering into this Master Confirmation and each Transaction hereunder in good faith and not as part of a plan or scheme to evade the prohibitions of Rule 10b-5 under the Exchange Act (“ Rule 10b-5 ”) or any other antifraud or anti-manipulation provisions of the federal or applicable state securities laws and that it has not entered into or altered and will not enter into or alter any corresponding or hedging transaction or position with respect to the Shares. Counterparty acknowledges that it is the intent of the parties that each Transaction entered into under this Master Confirmation comply with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(A) and (B) of Rule 10b5-1 under the Exchange Act (“ Rule 10b5-1 ”) and each Transaction entered into under this Master Confirmation shall be interpreted to comply with the requirements of Rule 10b5-1(c).

(b) Counterparty will not seek to control or influence Deutsche’s decision to make any “purchases or sales” (within the meaning of Rule 10b5-1(c)(1)(i)(B)(3)) under any Transaction entered into under this Master Confirmation, including, without limitation, Deutsche’s decision to enter into any hedging transactions. Counterparty represents and warrants that it has consulted with its own advisors as to the legal aspects of its adoption and implementation of this Master Confirmation and each Supplemental Confirmation under Rule 10b5-1.

(c) Counterparty acknowledges and agrees that any amendment, modification, waiver or termination of this Master Confirmation or the relevant Supplemental Confirmation must be effected in accordance with the requirements for the amendment or termination of a “plan” as defined in Rule 10b5-1(c). Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, any such amendment, modification, waiver or termination shall be made in good faith and not as part of a plan or scheme to evade the prohibitions of Rule 10b-5, and no such amendment, modification or waiver shall be made at any time at which Counterparty or any officer, director, manager or similar person of Counterparty is aware of any material non-public information regarding Counterparty or the Shares.

7. Counterparty Purchases . Counterparty (or any “affiliated purchaser” as defined in Rule 10b-18 under the Exchange Act (“ Rule 10b-18 ”)) shall not, without the prior written consent of Deutsche, directly or indirectly purchase any Shares (including by means of a derivative instrument), listed contracts on the Shares or securities that are convertible into, or exchangeable or exercisable for Shares (including, without limitation, any Rule 10b-18 purchases of blocks (as defined in Rule 10b-18)) during any Relevant Period or, if applicable, Settlement Valuation Period, except through Deutsche. However, the foregoing shall not limit Counterparty’s ability (or the ability of any “agent independent of the issuer” (as defined in Rule 10b-18)), pursuant to any plan (as defined in Rule 10b-18) of Counterparty, to re-acquire Shares in connection with any equity transaction related to such plan or to limit Counterparty’s ability to withhold Shares to cover tax liabilities associated with such equity

 

10


transactions or otherwise restrict Counterparty’s ability to repurchase Shares under privately negotiated or off-market transactions (including, without limitation, an agreement relating to Counterparty’s 401(k) Plan or transactions with any of Counterparty’s employees, officers, directors or affiliates), so long as any re-acquisition, withholding or repurchase does not constitute a “Rule 10b-18 purchase” (as defined in Rule 10b-18).

8. Special Provisions for Merger Transactions . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein or in the Equity Definitions:

(a) Counterparty agrees that it:

(i) will not during the period commencing on the Trade Date through the end of the Relevant Period or, if applicable, the Settlement Valuation Period for any Transaction make, or permit to be made, any public announcement (as defined in Rule 165(f) under the Securities Act) of any Merger Transaction or potential Merger Transaction (a “ Public Announcement ”) unless such Public Announcement is made prior to the opening or after the close of the regular trading session on the Exchange for the Shares;

(ii) shall promptly (but in any event prior to the next opening of the regular trading session on the Exchange) notify Deutsche following any such Public Announcement that such Public Announcement has been made; and

(iii) shall promptly (but in any event prior to the next opening of the regular trading session on the Exchange) provide Deutsche with written notice specifying (i) Counterparty’s average daily Rule 10b-18 Purchases (as defined in Rule 10b-18) during the three full calendar months immediately preceding the announcement date that were not effected through Deutsche or its affiliates and (ii) the number of Shares purchased pursuant to the proviso in Rule 10b-18(b)(4) under the Exchange Act for the three full calendar months preceding the date of such Public Announcement. Such written notice shall be deemed to be a certification by Counterparty to Deutsche that such information is true and correct. In addition, Counterparty shall promptly notify Deutsche of the earlier to occur of the completion of the relevant Merger Transaction and the completion of the vote by target shareholders.

(b) Counterparty acknowledges that a Public Announcement may cause the terms of any Transaction to be adjusted or such Transaction to be terminated; accordingly, Counterparty acknowledges that in making any Public Announcement, it must comply with the standards set forth in Section 6 above.

(c) Upon the occurrence of any Public Announcement (whether made by Counterparty or a third party), Deutsche may in its sole discretion (i) make adjustments in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner to the terms of any Transaction, including, without limitation, the Scheduled Termination Date or the Forward Price Adjustment Amount, and/or suspend the Calculation Period and/or any Settlement Valuation Period or (ii) treat the occurrence of such Public Announcement as an Additional Termination Event with Counterparty as the sole Affected Party and the Transactions hereunder as the Affected Transactions and with the amount under Section 6(e) of the Agreement determined taking into account the fact that the Calculation Period or Settlement Valuation Period, as the case may be, had fewer Scheduled Trading Days than originally anticipated.

Merger Transaction ” means any merger, acquisition or similar transaction involving a recapitalization as contemplated by Rule 10b-18(a)(13)(iv) under the Exchange Act.

9. Special Provisions for Acquisition Transaction Announcements . (a) If an Acquisition Transaction Announcement occurs on or prior to the Settlement Date for any Transaction, then the Number of Shares to be Delivered for such Transaction shall be determined as if the Divisor Amount were equal to “The greater of (i) the Forward Price and (ii) $1.00.” If an Acquisition Transaction Announcement occurs after the Trade Date, but prior to the First Acceleration Date of any Transaction, the First Acceleration Date shall be the date of such Acquisition Transaction Announcement.

(b) “ Acquisition Transaction Announcement ” means (i) the announcement of an Acquisition Transaction, (ii) an announcement that Counterparty or any of its subsidiaries has entered into an agreement, a letter of intent or an understanding designed to result in an Acquisition Transaction, (iii) the announcement of the intention to solicit or enter into, or to explore strategic alternatives or other similar undertaking that may include, an Acquisition Transaction, (iv) any other announcement that in the reasonable judgment of the Calculation Agent could reasonably be expected to result in an Acquisition Transaction or (v) any announcement of any change or amendment to any previous Acquisition Transaction Announcement (including any announcement of the abandonment of any such previously announced Acquisition Transaction, agreement, letter of intent, understanding or intention). For the avoidance of doubt, announcements as used in the definition of Acquisition Transaction Announcement refer to any public announcement whether made by the Issuer or a third party.

 

11


(c) “ Acquisition Transaction ” means (i) any Merger Event (for purposes of this definition the definition of Merger Event shall be read with the references therein to “100%” being replaced by “15%” and to “50%” by “75%” and without reference to the clause beginning immediately following the definition of Reverse Merger therein to the end of such definition), Tender Offer or Merger Transaction or any other transaction involving the merger of Counterparty with or into any third party, (ii) the sale or transfer of all or substantially all of the assets of Counterparty, (iii) a recapitalization, reclassification, binding share exchange or other similar transaction, (iv) any acquisition, lease, exchange, transfer, disposition (including by way of spin-off or distribution) of assets (including any capital stock or other ownership interests in subsidiaries) or other similar event by Counterparty or any of its subsidiaries where the aggregate consideration transferable or receivable by or to Counterparty or its subsidiaries exceeds 15% of the market capitalization of Counterparty and (v) any transaction in which Counterparty or its board of directors has a legal obligation to make a recommendation to its shareholders in respect of such transaction (whether pursuant to Rule 14e-2 under the Exchange Act or otherwise).

10. Acknowledgments . (a) The parties hereto intend for:

(i) each Transaction to be a “securities contract” as defined in Section 741(7) of the Bankruptcy Code, a “swap agreement” as defined in Section 101(53B) of the Bankruptcy Code and a “forward contract” as defined in Section 101(25) of the Bankruptcy Code, and the parties hereto to be entitled to the protections afforded by, among other Sections, Sections 362(b)(6), 362(b)(17), 362(b)(27), 362(o), 546(e), 546(g), 546(j), 555, 556, 560 and 561 of the Bankruptcy Code;

(ii) the Agreement to be a “master netting agreement” as defined in Section 101(38A) of the Bankruptcy Code;

(iii) a party’s right to liquidate, terminate or accelerate any Transaction, net out or offset termination values or payment amounts, and to exercise any other remedies upon the occurrence of any Event of Default or Termination Event under the Agreement with respect to the other party or any Extraordinary Event that results in the termination or cancellation of any Transaction to constitute a “contractual right” (as defined in the Bankruptcy Code); and

(iv) all payments for, under or in connection with each Transaction, all payments for the Shares (including, for the avoidance of doubt, payment of the Prepayment Amount) and the transfer of such Shares to constitute “settlement payments” and “transfers” (as defined in the Bankruptcy Code).

(b) Counterparty acknowledges that:

(i) during the term of any Transaction, Deutsche and its affiliates may buy or sell Shares or other securities or buy or sell options or futures contracts or enter into swaps or other derivative securities in order to establish, adjust or unwind its hedge position with respect to such Transaction;

(ii) Deutsche and its affiliates may also be active in the market for the Shares and derivatives linked to the Shares other than in connection with hedging activities in relation to any Transaction, including acting as agent or as principal and for its own account or on behalf of customers;

(iii) Deutsche shall make its own determination as to whether, when or in what manner any hedging or market activities in Counterparty’s securities shall be conducted and shall do so in a manner that it deems appropriate to hedge its price and market risk with respect to the Forward Price and the VWAP Price;

(iv) any market activities of Deutsche and its affiliates with respect to the Shares may affect the market price and volatility of the Shares, as well as the Forward Price and the VWAP Price, each in a manner that may be adverse to Counterparty; and

(v) each Transaction is a derivatives transaction in which it has granted Deutsche an option; Deutsche may purchase shares for its own account at an average price that may be greater than, or less than, the price paid by Counterparty under the terms of the related Transaction.

11. Credit Support Documents . The parties hereto acknowledge that no Transaction hereunder is secured by any collateral that would otherwise secure the obligations of Counterparty herein or pursuant to the Agreement.

 

12


12. Set-off . (a) The parties agree to amend Section 6 of the Agreement by adding a new Section 6(f) thereto as follows:

“(f) Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default or Termination Event with respect to a party who is the Defaulting Party or the Affected Party (“X”), the other party (“Y”) will have the right (but not be obliged) without prior notice to X or any other person to set-off or apply any obligation of X owed to Y (or any Affiliate of Y) (whether or not matured or contingent and whether or not arising under the Agreement, and regardless of the currency, place of payment or booking office of the obligation) against any obligation of Y (or any Affiliate of Y) owed to X (whether or not matured or contingent and whether or not arising under the Agreement, and regardless of the currency, place of payment or booking office of the obligation). Y will give notice to the other party of any set-off effected under this Section 6(f).

Amounts (or the relevant portion of such amounts) subject to set-off may be converted by Y into the Termination Currency at the rate of exchange at which such party would be able, acting in a reasonable manner and in good faith, to purchase the relevant amount of such currency. If any obligation is unascertained, Y may in good faith estimate that obligation and set-off in respect of the estimate, subject to the relevant party accounting to the other when the obligation is ascertained. Nothing in this Section 6(f) shall be effective to create a charge or other security interest. This Section 6(f) shall be without prejudice and in addition to any right of set-off, combination of accounts, lien or other right to which any party is at any time otherwise entitled (whether by operation of law, contract or otherwise).”

(b) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the foregoing, Deutsche agrees not to set off or net amounts due from Counterparty with respect to any Transaction against amounts due from Deutsche to Counterparty with respect to contracts or instruments that are not Equity Contracts. “ Equity Contract ” means any transaction or instrument that does not convey to Deutsche rights, or the ability to assert claims, that are senior to the rights and claims of common stockholders in the event of Counterparty’s bankruptcy.

13. Delivery of Shares . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, Deutsche may, by prior notice to Counterparty, satisfy its obligation to deliver any Shares or other securities on any date due (an “ Original Delivery Date ”) by making separate deliveries of Shares or such securities, as the case may be, at more than one time on or prior to such Original Delivery Date, so long as the aggregate number of Shares and other securities so delivered on or prior to such Original Delivery Date is equal to the number required to be delivered on such Original Delivery Date.

14. Early Termination . In the event that an Early Termination Date (whether as a result of an Event of Default or a Termination Event) occurs or is designated with respect to any Transaction (except as a result of a Merger Event in which the consideration or proceeds to be paid to holders of Shares consists solely of cash), if either party would owe any amount to the other party pursuant to Section 6(d)(ii) of the Agreement (any such amount, a “ Payment Amount ”), then, in lieu of any payment of such Payment Amount, Counterparty may, no later than the Early Termination Date or the date on which such Transaction is terminated, elect to deliver or for Deutsche to deliver, as the case may be, to the other party a number of Shares (or, in the case of a Merger Event, a number of units, each comprising the number or amount of the securities or property that a hypothetical holder of one Share would receive in such Merger Event (each such unit, an “ Alternative Delivery Unit ” and, the securities or property comprising such unit, “ Alternative Delivery Property ”)) with a value equal to the Payment Amount, as determined by the Calculation Agent (and the parties agree that, in making such determination of value, the Calculation Agent may take into account a number of factors, including the market price of the Shares or Alternative Delivery Property on the date of early termination and, if such delivery is made by Deutsche, the prices at which Deutsche purchases Shares or Alternative Delivery Property to fulfill its delivery obligations under this Section 14); provided that in determining the composition of any Alternative Delivery Unit, if the relevant Merger Event involves a choice of consideration to be received by holders, such holder shall be deemed to have elected to receive the maximum possible amount of cash; and provided further that Counterparty may make such election only if Counterparty represents and warrants to Deutsche in writing on the date it notifies Deutsche of such election that, as of such date, Counterparty is not aware of any material non-public information concerning the Shares and is making such election in good faith and not as part of a plan or scheme to evade compliance with the federal securities laws. If such delivery is made by Counterparty, paragraphs 2 through 7 of Annex A shall apply as if such delivery were a settlement of the Transaction to which Net Share Settlement applied, the Cash Settlement Payment Date were the Early Termination Date and the Forward Cash Settlement Amount were zero (0)  minus the Payment Amount owed by Counterparty.

15. Calculations and Payment Date upon Early Termination . The parties acknowledge and agree that in calculating Close-out Amount pursuant to Section 6 of the Agreement Deutsche may (but need not) determine losses without reference to actual losses incurred but based on expected losses assuming a commercially

 

13


reasonable (including without limitation with regard to reasonable legal and regulatory guidelines) risk bid were used to determine loss to avoid awaiting the delay associated with closing out any hedge or related trading position in a commercially reasonable manner prior to or sooner following the designation of an Early Termination Date. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Section 6(d)(ii) of the Agreement, all amounts calculated as being due in respect of an Early Termination Date under Section 6(e) of the Agreement will be payable on the day that notice of the amount payable is effective; provided that if Counterparty elects to receive Shares or Alternative Delivery Property in accordance with Section 14, such Shares or Alternative Delivery Property shall be delivered on a date selected by Deutsche as promptly as practicable.

16. [Reserved.]

17. Automatic Termination Provisions . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Section 6 of the Agreement, if a Termination Price is specified in any Supplemental Confirmation, then an Additional Termination Event with Counterparty as the sole Affected Party and the Transaction to which such Supplemental Confirmation relates as the Affected Transaction will automatically occur without any notice or action by Deutsche or Counterparty if the price of the Shares on the Exchange at any time falls below such Termination Price, and the Exchange Business Day that the price of the Shares on the Exchange at any time falls below the Termination Price will be the “Early Termination Date” for purposes of the Agreement.

18. Delivery of Cash . For the avoidance of doubt, nothing in this Master Confirmation shall be interpreted as requiring Counterparty to deliver cash in respect of the settlement of the Transactions contemplated by this Master Confirmation following payment by Counterparty of the relevant Prepayment Amount, except in circumstances where the required cash settlement thereof is permitted for classification of the contract as equity by ASC 815-40, Derivatives and Hedging – Contracts in Entity’s Own Equity , as in effect on the relevant Trade Date (including, without limitation, where Counterparty so elects to deliver cash or fails timely to elect to deliver Shares or Alternative Delivery Property in respect of the settlement of such Transactions).

19. Claim in Bankruptcy . Deutsche acknowledges and agrees that this Confirmation is not intended to convey to it rights with respect to the Transactions that are senior to the claims of common stockholders in the event of Counterparty’s bankruptcy.

20. [Reserved.]

21. Governing Law . The Agreement, this Master Confirmation, each Supplemental Confirmation and all matters arising in connection with the Agreement, this Master Confirmation and each Supplemental Confirmation shall be governed by, and construed and enforced in accordance with, the laws of the State of New York (without reference to its choice of laws doctrine other than Title 14 of Article 5 of the New York General Obligations Law).

22. Offices .

The Office of Counterparty for each Transaction is: Fifth Third Bancorp, Fifth Third Center Cincinnati, Ohio 45263.

The Office of Deutsche for each Transaction is: Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch, c/o Deutsche Bank Securities Inc., 60 Wall Street, New York, NY 10005, USA.

23. Waiver of Jury Trial . Each party waives, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, any right it may have to a trial by jury in respect of any suit, action or proceeding relating to any Transaction. Each party (i) certifies that no representative, agent or attorney of the other party has represented, expressly or otherwise, that such other party would not, in the event of such a suit, action or proceeding, seek to enforce the foregoing waiver and (ii) acknowledges that it and the other party have been induced to enter into any Transaction hereunder by, among other things, the mutual waivers and certifications provided herein.

24. Submission to Jurisdiction . Section 13(b) of the Agreement is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following:

“Each party hereby irrevocably and unconditionally submits for itself and its property in any suit, legal action or proceeding relating to this Agreement and/or any Transaction, or for recognition and enforcement of any judgment in respect thereof, (each, “ Proceedings ”) to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Supreme Court of the State of New York, sitting in New York County, the courts of the United States of America for the Southern District of New York and appellate courts from any thereof. Nothing in the Master Confirmation, any Supplemental Confirmation or this Agreement precludes either party from

 

14


bringing Proceedings in any other jurisdiction if (A) the courts of the State of New York or the United States of America for the Southern District of New York lack jurisdiction over the parties or the subject matter of the Proceedings or declines to accept the Proceedings on the grounds of lacking such jurisdiction; (B) the Proceedings are commenced by a party for the purpose of enforcing against the other party’s property, assets or estate any decision or judgment rendered by any court in which Proceedings may be brought as provided hereunder; (C) the Proceedings are commenced to appeal any such court’s decision or judgment to any higher court with competent appellate jurisdiction over that court’s decisions or judgments if that higher court is located outside the State of New York or Borough of Manhattan, such as a federal court of appeals or the U.S. Supreme Court; or (D) any suit, action or proceeding has been commenced in another jurisdiction by or against the other party or against its property, assets or estate and, in order to exercise or protect its rights, interests or remedies under this Agreement, the Master Confirmation or any Supplemental Confirmation, the party (1) joins, files a claim, or takes any other action, in any such suit, action or proceeding, or (2) otherwise commences any Proceeding in that other jurisdiction as the result of that other suit, action or proceeding having commenced in that other jurisdiction.”

25. Method of Delivery . Whenever delivery of funds or other assets is required hereunder by or to Deutsche, such delivery shall be effected through DBSI. In addition, all notices, demands and communications of any kind relating to any Transaction between Deutsche and Counterparty shall be transmitted exclusively through DBSI.

26. Counterparts . This Master Confirmation may be executed in any number of counterparts, all of which shall constitute one and the same instrument, and any party hereto may execute this Master Confirmation by signing and delivering one or more counterparts.

 

[ Remainder of Page Intentionally Blank ]

 

15


Counterparty hereby agrees (a) to check this Master Confirmation carefully and immediately upon receipt so that errors or discrepancies can be promptly identified and rectified and (b) to confirm that the foregoing (in the exact form provided by Deutsche) correctly sets forth the terms of the agreement between Deutsche and Counterparty with respect to any particular Transaction to which this Master Confirmation relates, by manually signing this Master Confirmation or this page hereof as evidence of agreement to such terms and providing the other information requested herein and immediately returning an executed copy to Deutsche Bank Securities Inc., Facsimile No. 646-736-7122.

 

Yours faithfully,

DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH

By: 

/s/ Lars Kestner

Name:

Lars Kestner

Title: Managing Director

By:

/s/ Michael Sanderson

Name:

Michael Sanderson

Title: Managing Director

DEUTSCHE BANK SECURITIES INC.,

acting solely as Agent in connection with any Transaction

By:

/s/ Lars Kestner

Name:

Lars Kestner

Title: Managing Director

By:

/s/ Michael Sanderson

Name:

Michael Sanderson

Title: Managing Director

 

Agreed and Accepted By:

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

By:

 /s/ Kevin Kabat

 Name:

Kevin Kabat

 Title: CEO

 

[ Signature Page to Master Confirmation ]


SCHEDULE A

SUPPLEMENTAL CONFIRMATION

 

To:

Fifth Third Bancorp

Fifth Third Center

Cincinnati, Ohio 45263

From: Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch
Subject: Accelerated Stock Buyback
Ref. No.: [Insert Ref. No.]
Date: [Insert Date]

The purpose of this Supplemental Confirmation is to confirm the terms and conditions of the Transaction entered into between Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch (“ Deutsche ”), with Deutsche Bank Securities Inc. acting as agent, and Fifth Third Bancorp (“ Counterparty ”) (together, the “ Contracting Parties ”) on the Trade Date specified below. This Supplemental Confirmation is a binding contract between Deutsche and Counterparty as of the relevant Trade Date for the Transaction referenced below.

1. This Supplemental Confirmation supplements, forms part of, and is subject to the Master Confirmation dated as of May 21, 2013 (the “ Master Confirmation ”) between the Contracting Parties, as amended and supplemented from time to time. All provisions contained in the Master Confirmation govern this Supplemental Confirmation except as expressly modified below.

2. The terms of the Transaction to which this Supplemental Confirmation relates are as follows:

 

  Trade Date:   [        ]
  Forward Price Adjustment Amount:   USD [    ]
  Calculation Period Start Date:   [        ]
  Scheduled Termination Date:   [        ]
  First Acceleration Date:   [        ]
  Prepayment Amount:   USD [    ]
  Prepayment Date:   [        ]
  Initial Shares: [        ] Shares; provided that if, in connection with the Transaction, Deutsche is unable to borrow or otherwise acquire a number of Shares equal to the Initial Shares for delivery to Counterparty on the Initial Share Delivery Date, the Initial Shares delivered on the Initial Share Delivery Date shall be reduced to such number of Shares that Deutsche is able to so borrow or otherwise acquire, and Deutsche shall use reasonable good faith efforts to borrow or otherwise acquire a number of Shares equal to the shortfall in the Initial Share Delivery and to deliver such additional Shares as soon as reasonably practicable. The aggregate of all Shares delivered to Counterparty in respect of the Transaction pursuant to this paragraph shall be the “Initial Shares” for purposes of “Number of Shares to be Delivered” in the Master Confirmation.
  Initial Share Delivery Date: [        ]
  Ordinary Dividend Amount: USD [    ]
  Scheduled Ex-Dividend Dates: [        ]
  Termination Price: USD [    ]
  Additional Relevant Days: The [        ] Exchange Business Days immediately following the Calculation Period.

 

A - 1


3. Counterparty represents and warrants to Deutsche that neither it nor any “affiliated purchaser” (as defined in Rule 10b-18 under the Exchange Act) has made any purchases of blocks pursuant to the proviso in Rule 10b-18(b)(4) under the Exchange Act during either (i) the four full calendar weeks immediately preceding the Trade Date or (ii) during the calendar week in which the Trade Date occurs.

4. This Supplemental Confirmation may be executed in any number of counterparts, all of which shall constitute one and the same instrument, and any party hereto may execute this Supplemental Confirmation by signing and delivering one or more counterparts.

 

[ Remainder of Page Intentionally Blank ]

 

A - 2


Counterparty hereby agrees (a) to check this Supplemental Confirmation carefully and immediately upon receipt so that errors or discrepancies can be promptly identified and rectified and (b) to confirm that the foregoing (in the exact form provided by Deutsche) correctly sets forth the terms of the agreement between Deutsche and Counterparty with respect to any particular Transaction to which this Master Confirmation relates, by manually signing this Master Confirmation or this page hereof as evidence of agreement to such terms and providing the other information requested herein and immediately returning an executed copy to Deutsche Bank Securities Inc., Facsimile No. 646-736-7122.

 

Yours faithfully,

DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH

By: 

 

Name:

Title:

By:

 

Name:

Title:

DEUTSCHE BANK SECURITIES INC.,

acting solely as Agent in connection with the Transaction

By: 

 

Name:

Title:

By: 

 

Name:

Title

 

Agreed and Accepted By:

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP

By: 

 

Name:

Title:

 

[ Signature Page to Supplemental Confirmation ]


ANNEX A

COUNTERPARTY SETTLEMENT PROVISIONS

1. The following Counterparty Settlement Provisions shall apply to the extent indicated under the Master Confirmation:

 

Settlement Currency: USD
Settlement Method Election:
Applicable; provided that (i) Section 7.1 of the Equity Definitions is hereby amended by deleting the word “Physical” in the sixth line thereof and replacing it with the words “Net Share” and (ii) the Electing Party may make a settlement method election only if the Electing Party represents and warrants to Deutsche in writing on the date it notifies Deutsche of its election that, as of such date, the Electing Party is not aware of any material non-public information concerning Counterparty or the Shares and is electing the settlement method in good faith and not as part of a plan or scheme to evade compliance with the federal securities laws.
Electing Party: Counterparty
Settlement Method Election Date:
The earlier of (i) the Scheduled Termination Date and (ii) the second Exchange Business Day immediately following the Accelerated Termination Date (in which case the election under Section 7.1 of the Equity Definitions shall be made no later than 10 minutes prior to the open of trading on the Exchange on such second Exchange Business Day), as the case may be.
Default Settlement Method: Cash Settlement
Forward Cash Settlement Amount: The Number of Shares to be Delivered multiplied by the Settlement Price.
Settlement Price: The average of the VWAP Prices for the Exchange Business Days in the Settlement Valuation Period, subject to Valuation Disruption as specified in the Master Confirmation.
Settlement Valuation Period:
A number of Scheduled Trading Days selected by Deutsche in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner, such number to be approximately equal to the Number of Shares to be Delivered divided by 10% of the ADTV (as defined in Rule 10b-18, and expressed as a number of Shares) for the Shares at the time of determination, beginning on the Scheduled Trading Day immediately following the earlier of (i) the Scheduled Termination Date or (ii) the Exchange Business Day immediately following the Termination Date.
Cash Settlement: If Cash Settlement is applicable, then Buyer shall pay to Seller the absolute value of the Forward Cash Settlement Amount on the Cash Settlement Payment Date.
Cash Settlement Payment Date: The date one Settlement Cycle following the last day of the Settlement Valuation Period.
Net Share Settlement Procedures:
If Net Share Settlement is applicable, Net Share Settlement shall be made in accordance with paragraphs 2 through 7 below.

2. Net Share Settlement shall be made by delivery on the Cash Settlement Payment Date of a number of Shares satisfying the conditions set forth in paragraph 3 below (the “ Registered Settlement

 

[ Signature Page to Master Confirmation ]


Shares ”), or a number of Shares not satisfying such conditions (the “ Unregistered Settlement Shares ”), in either case with a value equal to the absolute value of the Forward Cash Settlement Amount, with such Shares’ value based on the value thereof to Deutsche (which value shall, in the case of Unregistered Settlement Shares, take into account a commercially reasonable illiquidity discount), in each case as determined by the Calculation Agent.

3. Counterparty may only deliver Registered Settlement Shares pursuant to paragraph 2 above if:

(a) a registration statement covering public resale of the Registered Settlement Shares by Deutsche (the “ Registration Statement ”) shall have been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission under the Securities Act and been declared or otherwise become effective on or prior to the date of delivery, and no stop order shall be in effect with respect to the Registration Statement; a printed prospectus relating to the Registered Settlement Shares (including any prospectus supplement thereto, the “ Prospectus ”) shall have been delivered to Deutsche, in such quantities as Deutsche shall reasonably have requested, on or prior to the date of delivery;

(b) the form and content of the Registration Statement and the Prospectus (including, without limitation, any sections describing the plan of distribution) shall be satisfactory to Deutsche;

(c) as of or prior to the date of delivery, Deutsche and its agents shall have been afforded a reasonable opportunity to conduct a due diligence investigation with respect to Counterparty customary in scope for underwritten offerings of equity securities and the results of such investigation are satisfactory to Deutsche, in its discretion; and

(d) as of the date of delivery, an agreement (the “ Underwriting Agreement ”) shall have been entered into with Deutsche in connection with the public resale of the Registered Settlement Shares by Deutsche substantially similar to underwriting agreements customary for underwritten offerings of equity securities, in form and substance satisfactory to Deutsche, which Underwriting Agreement shall include, without limitation, provisions substantially similar to those contained in such underwriting agreements relating, without limitation, to the indemnification of, and contribution in connection with the liability of, Deutsche and its affiliates and the provision of customary opinions, accountants’ comfort letters and lawyers’ negative assurance letters.

4. If Counterparty delivers Unregistered Settlement Shares pursuant to paragraph 2 above:

(a) all Unregistered Settlement Shares shall be delivered to Deutsche (or any affiliate of Deutsche designated by Deutsche) pursuant to the exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act provided by Section 4(2) thereof;

(b) as of or prior to the date of delivery, Deutsche and any potential purchaser of any such shares from Deutsche (or any affiliate of Deutsche designated by Deutsche) identified by Deutsche shall be afforded a commercially reasonable opportunity to conduct a due diligence investigation with respect to Counterparty customary in scope for private placements of equity securities (including, without limitation, the right to have made available to them for inspection all financial and other records, pertinent corporate documents and other information reasonably requested by them);

(c) as of the date of delivery, Counterparty shall enter into an agreement (a “ Private Placement Agreement ”) with Deutsche (or any affiliate of Deutsche designated by Deutsche) in connection with the private placement of such shares by Counterparty to Deutsche (or any such affiliate) and the private resale of such shares by Deutsche (or any such affiliate), substantially similar to private placement purchase agreements customary for private placements of equity securities, in form and substance commercially reasonably satisfactory to Deutsche, which Private Placement Agreement shall include, without limitation, provisions substantially similar to those contained in such private placement purchase agreements relating, without limitation, to the indemnification of, and contribution in connection with the liability of, Deutsche and its affiliates and the provision of customary opinions, accountants’ comfort letters and lawyers’ negative assurance letters, and shall provide for the payment by Counterparty of all fees and expenses in connection with such resale, including all fees and expenses of counsel for Deutsche, and shall contain representations, warranties, covenants and agreements of Counterparty reasonably necessary or advisable to establish and maintain the availability of an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act for such resales; and

(d) in connection with the private placement of such shares by Counterparty to Deutsche (or any such affiliate) and the private resale of such shares by Deutsche (or any such affiliate), Counterparty shall, if so requested by Deutsche, prepare, in cooperation with Deutsche, a private placement memorandum in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to Deutsche

 

A - 5


5. Deutsche, itself or through an affiliate (the “ Selling Agent ”) or any underwriter(s), will sell all, or such lesser portion as may be required hereunder, of the Registered Settlement Shares or Unregistered Settlement Shares and any Makewhole Shares (as defined below) (together, the “ Settlement Shares ”) delivered by Counterparty to Deutsche pursuant to paragraph 6 below commencing on the Cash Settlement Payment Date and continuing until the date on which the aggregate Net Proceeds (as such term is defined below) of such sales, as determined by Deutsche, is equal to the absolute value of the Forward Cash Settlement Amount (such date, the “ Final Resale Date ”). If the proceeds of any sale(s) made by Deutsche, the Selling Agent or any underwriter(s), net of any fees and commissions (including, without limitation, underwriting or placement fees) customary for similar transactions under the circumstances at the time of the offering, together with carrying charges and expenses incurred in connection with the offer and sale of the Shares (including, but without limitation to, the covering of any over-allotment or short position (syndicate or otherwise)) (the “ Net Proceeds ”) exceed the absolute value of the Forward Cash Settlement Amount, Deutsche will refund, in USD, such excess to Counterparty on the date that is three (3) Currency Business Days following the Final Resale Date, and, if any portion of the Settlement Shares remains unsold, Deutsche shall return to Counterparty on that date such unsold Shares.

6. If the Calculation Agent determines that the Net Proceeds received from the sale of the Registered Settlement Shares or Unregistered Settlement Shares or any Makewhole Shares, if any, pursuant to this paragraph 6 are less than the absolute value of the Forward Cash Settlement Amount (the amount in USD by which the Net Proceeds are less than the absolute value of the Forward Cash Settlement Amount being the “ Shortfall ” and the date on which such determination is made, the “ Deficiency Determination Date ”), Counterparty shall on the Exchange Business Day next succeeding the Deficiency Determination Date (the “ Makewhole Notice Date ”) deliver to Deutsche, through the Selling Agent, a notice of Counterparty’s election that Counterparty shall either (i) pay an amount in cash equal to the Shortfall on the day that is one (1) Currency Business Day after the Makewhole Notice Date, or (ii) deliver additional Shares. If Counterparty elects to deliver to Deutsche additional Shares, then Counterparty shall deliver additional Shares in compliance with the terms and conditions of paragraph 3 or paragraph 4 above, as the case may be (the “ Makewhole Shares ”), on the first Clearance System Business Day which is also an Exchange Business Day following the Makewhole Notice Date in such number as the Calculation Agent reasonably believes would have a market value on that Exchange Business Day equal to the Shortfall. Such Makewhole Shares shall be sold by Deutsche in accordance with the provisions above; provided that if the sum of the Net Proceeds from the sale of the originally delivered Shares and the Net Proceeds from the sale of any Makewhole Shares is less than the absolute value of the Forward Cash Settlement Amount then Counterparty shall, at its election, either make such cash payment or deliver to Deutsche further Makewhole Shares until such Shortfall has been reduced to zero.

7. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in no event shall the aggregate number of Settlement Shares and Makewhole Shares be greater than the Reserved Shares minus the amount of any Shares actually delivered by Counterparty under any other Transaction(s) under this Master Confirmation (the result of such calculation, the “ Capped Number ”). Counterparty represents and warrants (which shall be deemed to be repeated on each day that a Transaction is outstanding) that the Capped Number is equal to or less than the number of Shares determined according to the following formula:

A – B

 

Where: A = the number of authorized but unissued shares of the Counterparty that are not reserved for future issuance on the date of the determination of the Capped Number; and
B = the maximum number of Shares required to be delivered to third parties if Counterparty elected Net Share Settlement of all transactions in the Shares (other than Transactions in the Shares under this Master Confirmation) with all third parties that are then currently outstanding and unexercised.

Reserved Shares ” means initially, 58,907,104 Shares. The Reserved Shares may be increased or decreased in a Supplemental Confirmation.

 

A - 6


LOGO

 

Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch

Winchester house

1 Great Winchester St, London EC2N 2DB

Telephone: 44 20 7545 8000

 

c/o Deutsche Bank Securities Inc.

60 Wall Street

New York, NY 10005

Telephone: 212-250-2500

SUPPLEMENTAL CONFIRMATION

 

To:

Fifth Third Bancorp

Fifth Third Center

Cincinnati, Ohio 45263

From: Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch
Subject: Accelerated Stock Buyback
Ref. No.: 604465
Date: October 20, 2014

The purpose of this Supplemental Confirmation is to confirm the terms and conditions of the Transaction entered into between Deutsche Bank AG, London Branch (“ Deutsche ”), with Deutsche Bank Securities Inc. acting as agent, and Fifth Third Bancorp (“ Counterparty ”) (together, the “ Contracting Parties ”) on the Trade Date specified below. This Supplemental Confirmation is a binding contract between Deutsche and Counterparty as of the relevant Trade Date for the Transaction referenced below.

1. This Supplemental Confirmation supplements, forms part of, and is subject to the Master Confirmation dated as of May 21, 2013 (the “ Master Confirmation ”) between the Contracting Parties, as amended and supplemented from time to time. All provisions contained in the Master Confirmation govern this Supplemental Confirmation except as expressly modified below.

2. The terms of the Transaction to which this Supplemental Confirmation relates are as follows:

 

Trade Date:   October 20, 2014
Forward Price Adjustment Amount:   [**]*
Calculation Period Start Date:   October 21, 2014
Scheduled Termination Date:   January 21, 2015
First Acceleration Date:   [**]*
Prepayment Amount:   USD 180,000,000.00
Prepayment Date:   October 23, 2014
Initial Shares: 8,337,875 Shares; provided that if, in connection with the Transaction, Deutsche is unable to borrow or otherwise acquire a number of Shares equal to the Initial Shares for delivery to

 

 

 

Chairman of the Supervisory Board: Dr. Paul Achleitner.

 

Management Board: Jürgen Fitschen (Co-Chairman), Anshu Jain (Co-Chairman), Stefan Krause, Stephan Leithner, Stuart Lewis, Rainer Neske and Henry Ritchotte.

 

Deutsche Bank AG is authorised under German Banking Law (competent authority: BaFin – Federal Financial Supervising Authority) and regulated by the Financial Services Authority for the conduct of UK business; a member of the London Stock Exchange. Deutsche Bank AG is a joint stock corporation with limited liability incorporated in the Federal Republic of Germany HRB No. 30 000 District Court of Frankfurt am Main; Branch Registration in England and Wales BR000005; Registered address: Winchester House, 1 Great Winchester Street, London EC2N 2DB. Deutsche Bank Group online: http://www.deutsche-bank.com

 

 

*          CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION HAS BEEN OMITTED AND HAS BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION.


Counterparty on the Initial Share Delivery Date, the Initial Shares delivered on the Initial Share Delivery Date shall be reduced to such number of Shares that Deutsche is able to so borrow or otherwise acquire, and Deutsche shall use reasonable good faith efforts to borrow or otherwise acquire a number of Shares equal to the shortfall in the Initial Share Delivery and to deliver such additional Shares as soon as reasonably practicable. The aggregate of all Shares delivered to Counterparty in respect of the Transaction pursuant to this paragraph shall be the “Initial Shares” for purposes of “Number of Shares to be Delivered” in the Master Confirmation.
Initial Share Delivery Date: October 23, 2014
Ordinary Dividend Amount: [**]*
Scheduled Ex-Dividend Date: December 29, 2014
Termination Price: [**]*
Additional Relevant Days: The 5 Exchange Business Days immediately following the Calculation Period.
Reserved Shares: The number of Reserved Shares set forth in Annex A to the Master Confirmation shall be increased by 19,618,529 Shares.

3. Counterparty represents and warrants to Deutsche that neither it nor any “affiliated purchaser” (as defined in Rule 10b-18 under the Exchange Act) has made any purchases of blocks pursuant to the proviso in Rule 10b-18(b)(4) under the Exchange Act during either (i) the four full calendar weeks immediately preceding the Trade Date or (ii) during the calendar week in which the Trade Date occurs.

4. The Master Confirmation shall be amended by adding the following at the end thereof:

“27. 2013 EMIR Portfolio Reconciliation, Dispute Resolution and Disclosure Protocol . The parties agree that the terms of the 2013 EMIR Portfolio Reconciliation, Dispute Resolution and Disclosure Protocol published by ISDA on July 19, 2013 (“ Protocol ”) apply to the Agreement as if the parties had adhered to the Protocol without amendment. In respect of the Attachment to the Protocol, (i) the definition of “Adherence Letter” shall be deemed to be deleted and references to “Adherence Letter” shall be deemed to be to this Section 27 (and references to “such party’s Adherence Letter” and “its Adherence Letter” shall be read accordingly), (ii) references to “adheres to the Protocol” shall be deemed to be “enters into this Agreement”, (iii) references to “Protocol Covered Agreement” shall be deemed to be references to the Agreement (and each “Protocol Covered Agreement” shall be read accordingly), and (iv) references to “Implementation Date” shall be deemed to be references to the date of the Agreement. For the purposes of this Section 27:

 

  (a) Deutsche is a Portfolio Data Sending Entity and Counterparty is a Portfolio Data Receiving Entity;

 

  (b) Deutsche and Counterparty may use a Third Party Service Provider, and each of Deutsche and Counterparty consents to such use including the communication of the relevant data in relation to Deutsche and Counterparty to such Third Party Service Provider for the purposes of the reconciliation services provided by such entity.

 

  (c) The Local Business Days for such purposes in relation to Deutsche are New York, London, Frankfurt, Tokyo and Singapore and in relation to Counterparty are Cincinnati, Ohio;

 

  (d) The provisions in this paragraph shall survive the termination of any Transaction; and

 

 

*          CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION HAS BEEN OMITTED AND HAS BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION.


  (e) The following are the applicable email addresses.

 

Portfolio Data: Deutsche: collateral.disputes@db.com
Counterparty: Brennen.willingham@53.com
Notice of discrepancy: Deutsche: collateral.disputes@db.com
Counterparty: Brennen.willingham@53.com
Dispute Notice: Deutsche: collateral.disputes@db.com
Counterparty: Brennen.willingham@53.com

5. This Supplemental Confirmation may be executed in any number of counterparts, all of which shall constitute one and the same instrument, and any party hereto may execute this Supplemental Confirmation by signing and delivering one or more counterparts.

 

[ Remainder of Page Intentionally Blank ]

 

 

*          CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION HAS BEEN OMITTED AND HAS BEEN FILED SEPARATELY WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION.


Counterparty hereby agrees (a) to check this Supplemental Confirmation carefully and immediately upon receipt so that errors or discrepancies can be promptly identified and rectified and (b) to confirm that the foregoing (in the exact form provided by Deutsche) correctly sets forth the terms of the agreement between Deutsche and Counterparty with respect to any particular Transaction to which this Master Confirmation relates, by manually signing this Master Confirmation or this page hereof as evidence of agreement to such terms and providing the other information requested herein and immediately returning an executed copy to Deutsche Bank Securities Inc., Facsimile No. 646-736-7122.

 

Yours faithfully,
DEUTSCHE BANK AG, LONDON BRANCH
By:

/s/ Michael Sanderson

Name: Michael Sanderson
Title: Managing Director
By:

/s/ Lars Kestner

Name: Lars Kestner
Title: Managing Director

DEUTSCHE BANK SECURITIES INC.,

acting solely as Agent in connection with the Transaction

By:

/s/ Michael Sanderson

Name: Michael Sanderson
Title: Managing Director
By:

/s/ Lars Kestner

Name: Lars Kestner
Title: Managing Director

 

Agreed and Accepted By:
FIFTH THIRD BANCORP
By:

/s/ James C. Leonard

Name: James C. Leonard
Title: Treasurer

[ Signature Page to Supplemental Confirmation ]

Exhibit 12.1

Fifth Third Bancorp

Computations of Consolidated Ratios of Earnings to Fixed Charges

($ In Millions)

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
    2014   2013   2012   2011   2010  

Excluding Interest on Deposits:

Fixed Charges:

Interest Expense (excluding interest on deposits)

$   249        210        296        309        293     

One-Third of Rents, Net of Income from Subleases

  29        28        28        27        26     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Fixed Charges

$   278        238        324        336        319     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Earnings:

Income Before Income Taxes

$   2,028        2,598        2,210        1,831        940     

Fixed Charges

  278        238        324        336        319     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Earnings

$        2,306             2,836             2,534             2,167             1,259     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges, Excluding Interest On Deposits

  8.29x        11.92x        7.82x        6.45x        3.94x     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Including Interest on Deposits:

Fixed Charges:

Interest Expense

$   451        412        512        661        885     

One-Third of Rents, Net of Income from Subleases

  29        28        28        27        26     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Fixed Charges

$   480        440        540        688        911     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Earnings:

Income Before Income Taxes

$   2,028        2,598        2,210        1,831        940     

Fixed Charges

  480        440        540        688        911     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Earnings

$   2,508        3,038        2,750        2,519        1,851     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges, Including Interest On Deposits

  5.23x        6.90x        5.09x        3.66x        2.03x     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Exhibit 12.2

Fifth Third Bancorp

Computations of Consolidated Ratios of Earnings to Combined Fixed Charges and Preferred Stock Dividend Requirements

($ In Millions)

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
    2014   2013   2012   2011   2010  

Excluding Interest on Deposits:

Fixed Charges:

Interest Expense (excluding interest on deposits)

$   249        210        296        309        293     

One-Third of Rents, Net of Income from Subleases

  29        28        28        27        26     

Preferred Stock Dividends

  67        37        35        203        250     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Fixed Charges

$   345        275        359        539        569     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Earnings:

Income Before Income Taxes

$   2,028        2,598        2,210        1,831        940     

Fixed Charges - Excluding Preferred Stock Dividends

  278        238        324        336        319     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Earnings

$        2,306             2,836             2,534             2,167             1,259     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges, Excluding Interest On Deposits

  6.68x        10.31x        7.06x        4.02x        2.21x     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Including Interest on Deposits:

Fixed Charges:

Interest Expense

$   451        412        512        661        885     

One-Third of Rents, Net of Income from Subleases

  29        28        28        27        26     

Preferred Stock Dividends

  67        37        35        203        250     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Fixed Charges

$   547        477        575        891        1,161     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Earnings:

Income Before Income Taxes

$   2,028        2,598        2,210        1,831        940     

Fixed Charges - Excluding Preferred Stock Dividends

  480        440        540        688        911     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Earnings

$   2,508        3,038        2,750        2,519        1,851     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges, Including Interest On Deposits

  4.59x        6.37x        4.78x        2.83x        1.59x     
    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Exhibit 21

FIFTH THIRD BANCORP SUBSIDIARIES

As of December 31, 2014

 

Name

Jurisdiction

of

Incorporation

Fifth Third Financial Corporation

Ohio

Fifth Third Bank

Ohio

5/3 Premier NMTC Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

Fifth Third Equipment Finance Company

Ohio

The Fifth Third Auto Leasing Trust

Delaware

Fifth Third International Company

Kentucky

Fifth Third Trade Services Limited

Hong Kong

Fifth Third Holdings, LLC

Delaware

Fifth Third Holdings Funding, LLC

Delaware

Fifth Third Conduit Holdings, LLC

Delaware

Fifth Third Mortgage Insurance Reinsurance Company

Vermont

Fifth Third Mortgage Company

Ohio

Fifth Third Real Estate Investment Trust, Inc.

Maryland

Fifth Third Securities, Inc.

Ohio

ClearArc Capital, Inc.

Ohio

Fifth Third Insurance Agency, Inc.

Ohio

Fifth Third Commercial Funding, Inc.

Nevada

GNB Management, LLC

Delaware

GNB Realty, LLC

Delaware

Old Kent Mortgage Services, Inc.

Michigan

Fifth Third Mortgage – Michigan, LLC

Delaware

Walnut & Vine Holdings, LLC

Delaware

Walnut & Vine Properties I, LLC

Delaware

Walnut & Vine Properties II, LLC

Delaware

Fifth Third Community Development Corporation

Indiana

Fifth Third New Markets Development Co., LLC

Ohio

Fifth Third West Louisville Emerging, LLC

Ohio

5/3 SIP NMTC Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 Better Family Life Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 GCM NMTC Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 Georgia Aquarium Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 LWC NMTC Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 Middough NMTC Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 Middough NMTC Investment Fund, II

Ohio

5/3 Shoreway NMTC Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 The Views NMTC Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 120 East Sixth Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 1400 Race Street Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 200 Peachtree Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 7000 Euclid Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

5/3 CNMF NMTC Investment Fund, LLC

Ohio

600 Fifth Street Properties Master Tenant, LLC

Michigan

Seventh Street Properties Master Tenant, LLC

Michigan

Fifth Third Capital Holdings, LLC

Delaware

Fifth Third Reinsurance Company, Ltd.

Turks and Caicos Islands

Fountain Square Life Reinsurance Company, Ltd.

Turks and Caicos Islands

Vista Settlement Services, LLC

Delaware

Fifth Third Investment Company

Ohio

Fifth Third Mauritius Holdings Limited

Mauritius

First Charter Capital Trust I

Delaware

First Charter Capital Trust II

Delaware

Exhibit 23

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the following Registration Statements of Fifth Third Bancorp and subsidiaries (the “Bancorp”) of our reports dated February 25, 2015, relating to the consolidated financial statements of the Bancorp, and the effectiveness of the Bancorp’s internal control over financial reporting, appearing in this Annual Report on Form 10-K of the Bancorp for the year ended December 31, 2014:

 

Form S-8

Form S-3

No. 33-34075

No. 33-54134

No. 33-55553

No. 333-165689

No. 333-52182

No. 333-187546

No. 333-52188

No. 333-58249

No. 333-58618

No. 333-63518

No. 333-72910

No. 333-108996

No. 333-114001

No. 333-116535

No. 333-119280

No. 333-123493

No. 333-147533

No. 333-157687

No. 333-158742

No. 333-175258

No. 333-197320

/s/ Deloitte and Touche LLP

Cincinnati, Ohio

February 25, 2015

Exhibit 31(i)

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT

TO SECTION 302 OF THE

SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

I, Kevin T. Kabat, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this report on Form 10-K of Fifth Third Bancorp (the “Registrant”);

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the Registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The Registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the Registrant and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the Registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the Registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the Registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the Registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the Registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The Registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the Registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the Registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the Registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the Registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ Kevin T. Kabat

Kevin T. Kabat
Vice Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
February 25, 2015

Exhibit 31(ii)

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT

TO SECTION 302 OF THE

SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

I, Tayfun Tuzun, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this report on Form 10-K of Fifth Third Bancorp (the “Registrant”);

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the Registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The Registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the Registrant and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the Registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the Registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the Registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the Registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the Registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The Registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the Registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the Registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the Registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the Registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ Tayfun Tuzun

Tayfun Tuzun
Executive Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
February 25, 2015

Exhibit 32(i)

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report of Fifth Third Bancorp (the “Registrant”) on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2014 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Kevin T. Kabat, Vice Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of the Registrant, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350, as adopted pursuant to § 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

  (1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

  (2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Registrant.

 

/s/ Kevin T. Kabat

Kevin T. Kabat
Vice Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
February 25, 2015

Exhibit 32(ii)

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report of Fifth Third Bancorp (the “Registrant”) on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2014 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), I, Tayfun Tuzun, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of the Registrant, certify, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350, as adopted pursuant to § 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:

 

  (1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

  (2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Registrant.

 

/s/ Tayfun Tuzun

Tayfun Tuzun
Executive Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
February 25, 2015